(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "A manual of the geology of India"

M.2 



CORNELL 

UNIVERSITY 

LIBRARY 

ENGINEERING LIBRARY 




BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME 
OF THE SAGE ENDOWMENT 
FUND GIVEN IN 1891 BY 

HENRY WILLIAMS SAGE 



A manual of the geology of India. 



3 1924 003 914 037 



^ LISJJ^y;»iEX 











HL«.*^. 






"7j^ 












» 








MMk 






'"-'*^ 






u^i 1 7* 


»^^T t/ 








f^ 




























































































































































The original of this book is in 
the Cornell University Library. 

There are no known copyright restrictions in 
the United States on the use of the text. 



http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924003914037 



A MANUAL 



OF 



THE GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 



PART II ! EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 



CONTEi^TS. 



PART II. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

SIND. — (w. T. B.) 



Sub-division of the Extra-Peninsular 

area 445 

I. SnTD :■'— Physical geography of West- 
ern Sind 446 

Rock formations . . . . • . 447 

Cretaceous beds 448 

PalsBontology 449 

Deccantrap. ; . . . . 450' 

Ranikot group 451 

Pafeeontology 452 

Cretaceous and lower tertiary rocts of 

Baluchistan 453 

Khirthar group 456 

Palseontology 458 



PAOB 

Nari group 459 

Palseontology 461 

Gaj group 463 

PalSBontology 465 

Manchhar group ....'. 466 

Relations to Makran group . . . .4^0 

Paleontology of Manchhar group . 471 

.Post-tertiary beds . . .' ■. 473 

Additional notes on Sind tertiary series 473 
Absence of general breaks below 

plioceUe 474 

Grreat post-pliocene disturbance . . 474 
Alternation of marine and freshwater 

beds . ■ . ... . . .475 



CHAPTER XX. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 
THE PUNJAB HILLS WEST OP THE JHBLTJM. — (w. T. B.) 



Physical geography .... 477 

Geological data 479 

General geological features . . . 480 

Bock-groups of Salt Hange . . . 481 
Bock -groups of Hazira and the North- 

■ ern Punjab 483 

Abnormal boundary pf upper tertiaries . 483 

' Azoic and Palaeozoic rocks of Salt • 

Range, &c ' . . 485 

Salt marl 486 

Purple sandstone ..... 488 





fACtS 


Sjlurian (?) 


. 488 


Magnesiah sandstone . 


. 489 


Speckled sandstone 


. 489 


Carboniferous . ... 


V 489 


Mesogoic rocks of Salt Range, &c. : 


Ceratite'beds . . 


. 493 


Pseudomorphio salt-crystal zone . 


. 494 


Jurassic or variegated group 


. 495 


Cretaceous (neocomian) .. .' . 


. 496 


01iv£ group ., 


. 496 



IT 



CONTENTS, 



CHAPTER XXI. 
EXTRA-PENINSULAB AREA. 
THE PUNJAB HILLS WEST Or THE JHBLUM — CmUntced.- 



-(W. T. B.) 



Palaeozoic and mesozoic rocks of North- 




ern Punjab 


498 


Crystalline and metamorphic 


498 


Schistose series 


499 


Attock slates 


499 


Carholiiferous and infra-triassic . 


501 


Trias (including Rhsetic) 


501 


Jurassic : Spiti shales .... 


502 


Grieumal sandstone .... 


503 


Cretaceous 


503 


Tertiary beds of Punjab generally 


504 


Thickness of tertiary series . 


504 


Distribution of eocene beds . 


505 


Marl and Bhdgti hills .... 


505 


Suleman range near Dera Ghazi Khdn . 


505 


Chiehali Hills and Salt Range . 


S06 



Koh^t district . . . . ; 507 

Salt and gypsum 508 

Clays, limestones, and sandstones above 

the salt : 509 

Northern Potwar and Murree Hills . 509 
Hill nummulitic limestone of Northern 

Punjab 511 

Upper tertiaries, Siwaliks, &c. . . 512 

Distribution- 513 

Palseontology- 514 

Post-pliocene deposits of Northern 

Punjab 515 

Erratics 515 

Indus floods 516 

FossU shells 516 



CHAPTEE XXII. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

SUB-HIMALAYAS. (h. B. M.) 



Scanty materials 517 

Provisional limits of Himalayan region 518 

Map .519 

General features 519 

Three main divisions .... 519 
The stjb-himalatas.— Provisional 

conclusions 520 

General features 521 

Early views on Sub-Himalayas .. . 521 

General range, of these deposits . . 522 

Classification 523 

Petrology 524 



Chiefly of freshwater origin 
Structural conditions .... 

Faults 

Flexures • • . . . 
Middle and terminal Sub-Himalayan 

regions .... 
The Simla region .... 
Order of description .... 
The Sibm6b aeea 



525 
526 
526 
528 

528 
529 
530 
530 



TkUTt 

Unity of the formation . . . 530 

Subathu, Dagshai, and Kasauli groups . 530 

Relation to the older rocks . . . 532 

Section at Subathu .... 533 

Limits of the Sirmur area . . . 534 
Easternmost outlier of the nummulitic 

group ...... 534 

(SlWAMK SEBIES : NXhAN ABBA . . 535 

The Nahan-Swalik boundary , . . 537 

The Nahan-Sirmlir boundary . . 539 

The Jumna- Ganhes aeba . . . 541 
Cordposition in relation to the great 

rivers 541 

Identification of beds in the two zones . 541 
Suggested connection of the two zones 

in this area 542 

The Gahevstal and Kumaun aeea . 543 

NepIij abea ; 543 

SiKKIM AND BHtJTAN AEEAS . . 545 

Uppee Absau aeea .... 545 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER XXIII, 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

SUB-HIMALAYAS — Continued. — (h, b. m.) 



TebMINAI. SUB-filMALAYAS : EXNaSA. 

ABEA 547 

General structure .... 548 

The Ghambar-Basauli fault . . 548 

The Eosari and Badsar-Nurplir faults 549 
Extinction of the . Nahan-Siwalik 

boundary 550 

The Sutlej at Bubhor . . . .551 
^Extinction of the Nahan-Sirmur bound- 
ary 652 

Difficulties of classification in the 

Eangra area. 554 

Bubhor and Bel£spur sections compared 555 

Doubtful beds in the Sirmur zone . 556 

Want of fossils 557 

The base of the Dhauladhar range . 557 

The Mandi rock-salt . . - . . 558 
North-western termination of the 

Eangra area 559 

Special feature 560 

SirmuT zone at the Rivi . . . 560 

Western expansion of Sirmur zone . 661 

Inliers 562 

Characters of the Sub&thu group . 662 

Belation of tertiary to palsBOZoi« rocks 563 



Comparison with sections of Simla 

. region 664 

Doubtful newer rocks of the Sirmur 

zone 564 

Other general features of Sirmdr zone 566 

The Siwalik-iSirmtir bound&ry . . 567 
The Basauli-Naushera fault _ . .567 

Biassi conglomerates .... 668 

The outer Siwalik zone . . . 668 

Sttumabt 569 

1. Special Himalayan disturbance 

altogether post -eocene . . . 569 

2. Eocene Himalayan land . . 669 

3. Doubtful extension over the Lower 

Himalayan area .... 669 

4. Actual Himalayan border defined 

' in middle tertiary times . , 570 
6. Its partial extension to the north- 
west 670 

6. Himalayan river-gorges in Siwalik 

times same as now . . . 570 

7. Extreme slowness of disturbing 

action 670. 

8. Elevation preceded compression . 671 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 
SIWALIK FAUNA. (w. T.. B.) 



The later tertiary vertebrate fauna . 572 

Siwalik mollusca .... 676 

Homotaxis of mammalia . , . 576 

' Reptilian •evidence .... 580 

Siwalik fauna probably pliocene . . 680 
Stratigraphical evidence of age of Siwa- 

liks 581 

Survival of miocene forms in Siwalik 

beds 682 

Pliocene fauna of Pikermi in Attica . 683 



Migration ...... 584 

Effects of change of climate . . 685 
Comparative poverty of recent mam- 
malian faunas 586 

Relations of Siwalik to PerimJsland 

fauna ...... 588 

Comparison with Irawadi fattna . . 588 
Comparison of Siwalik and recent 

faunas . • , . . . • 689 



VI 



■CONTENTS. 



CHAPTEE XXV. 



EXTEA-PENINSULAR AREA. 
LOWEE HIMALAYAS. (h. B. M.) 



Limits 

General features . 
The terminal area 
Classification of rooks 
Correlation of groups 
The gneissic series 
The 6la.te series . 
The Inf ra-Blaini roots 
The Blaini group . 
Itifra-Krdl group . 
The Krdl group . 
The relations of the slate and gneissic 
series ....-• 
Special metmorphism and disturbance . 



(Simla slates) 



fASB 

592 
593 
594 
595 
595 
596 
598 
.599 
599 
. 600 
601 

601 
605 



Trappean rocks . 


.606 


The Chor mountain 


.607 


South-east of Simla 


. 608 


Kumaun and Garhwal , 


. 609 


Nepal . . . . 


. 611 


The SibVim area . 


. 612 


The Darjiling gneiss . 


. 614 


The Baling series 


. 614 


The Damuda series 


. . .615 


Relations of the three series in Sikkim 615 


The Bhutan border : Buxa series . . 618 


The Dikrang section . 


. 620 


Summary .' 


. 620 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 
CENTRAL (tIBETAN) HIMALAYAS! (h. B. M.) 



Data available ..... 

Classification of rocks .... 

General structure and distribution 

The main gneissic axis 

The Lad&k axis . , 

The Hundes and Zanskar Synclinal 

The Karakoram synclinal and Kuenluu 

axis . . . . . 
The Kashmir synclinal 
Position of the tertiary formations 
Gneiss of two ages 
The central gneiss .... 

Mineral character 

Sti;atigraphieal relation . . .' 
Relations defined only in the middle 

Himalayas . . 



PAG-B 




PASE 


622 


The granitic axis .... 


629 


623 


Terminal extensions of the central 




624 


'gneiss . . . . 


680 


624 


The Zfinskar gneissic range . 


630 


625 


The Pir Panjal gneissic chain 


631 


625 


The Dhauladhar gneissic range . 


632 




The newer gneiss .... 


633 


626 


The chief sedimentary basins 


633 


626 


The formations of the Zanskar area 


635 


626 


PalsBozoic series 


638 


626 


South-west boundary .... 


639 


627 


South-east boundary .... 


639 


627 


The Rupshu metamorphics . 


640 


628 


North boundary with tertiary rocks . 


640 




The secondary series .... 


641 


628 


The tertiary series .... 


643 



CONTENTS. 



Vll 



CHAPTER XXVII. 
EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 
CENTRAL (tibbtan) HIMALAYAS — Continued. — (h. b. m.) 



The Hundes or Ngari-Khorsum area . 

Stratigraphicol series of Niti in Hun- 
des ' . 

The tertiary eruptive rocks of Hundes . 

The sedimentary tertiary rocks of 
Hundes . 

The Karakoram area 

The Ladak gneiss 

The eastern section of the 
hasin 

The Earakoram section 

The Kuenlun range 

The Sukef pass section 

The Tangi pass section 

The Pamir section 

The Kashmir-Pangi area 

Triassic rocks of Kashmir 



Earakoram 



PAOB 




PAGH 


646 


Carhoniferous rocks of Kashmir . 


660 




Silurian rocks of Eashmir • 


662 


647 


The Pangi basin ... 


664 


650 


The Fir Panjal Cham . . . . 


665 




One-sidedness of mountain structure . 


667 


651 


Post-tertiary and recent formations . 


667 


652 


Sub-Hjmalayan high-level gravels 


668 


652 


Glacial evidence in Tibet 


669 




The Hundes lake-basin 


670 


653 


Lingzhithang and Kuenlun lake-basins 


671 


654 


Tso Moriri and other basins 


671 


.655 


Alluvial deposits of Tibet . 


672 


656 


The Kashmir basin . . . . 


672 


656 


The Nepal valley ; . . . 


674 


657 


Other lakes . . ... 


675 


658 


Drainage lines 


675 


659 


Summary 


679 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAB AREA. 

THE ASSAM RANGE. — (H. B. M.) 



Area to be described .... 682 ' 

Formations present .... 684 

General structure .... 684 

The Sylhet trap . . ' . . . 686 

The cretaceous series : Khasi area . 687 

Cretaceous series : Garo area . . 690 

Cretaceous series : Mikir area . . 692 

Nummulitic series : Khasi area . . . 693 



Pi.SS 

Nummulitic series : Giro area . . 695 

Eastern extension of the nummulitics . 696 

The upper tertiaries .... 696 

The Assam coal-fields .... 699 

General structure .... 700 
The Disang group . . . .701 

The coal measures , , . . 701 

Tipam and Dehing groups . . . 702 



• CHAPTER XXIX. 
EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 
BURMA.— ^W. T.B.) 



Area and. physical geography 
Geological data ... 



PAGB 

704 
706 



Rock -groups 
Metamorphic rocks 



PASS 

706 
707 



VUl 



CONTBNTS. 



PA 03 

Mergni group 708 

Haulmain group 709 

Axial (triassic) group .... 710 
Mai-iJ[cretaceous) group . . .711 
Supposed cretaceous coal in Tenas- 

eerim 712 

Negrais rocks 713 

Serpentine . . . .. • • 714 
Nummulitic group . . . .715 

Arakan . . ■ • « • ■ 717 

Coal-bearing rocks of Tenaaserim . 718 

■ Pegu group 719 

Newer tertiary beds in Arakan . . 721 



Pliocene fossil-wood group . 
Tertiaries of Upper Burma . 
Extinct volcano of Puppa . / 
Tracbyte in South-Western Pegu 
Post-tertiary deposits : laterite 
Older alluvial sands and gravels 
Delta of Irawadl . 
Littoral concrete of Arakan coast 
Mud volcanoes of Bamii, &c. 
Islands in the Bay of Bengal 
Andaman Islands 
Nicobar Islands . 
Barren Island and Narcoudam 



PABB 

721 
724 
725 
725 
726 
726 
727 
729 
729 
732 
.732 
734 
735 



Eitra-Peninsular, ] SUB-DIVISION of the extra -peninsular area, 4,45 



CHAPTER XIX. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAE AREA. 

SIND. 

Sub-division of the extra-peninsular area : — I, Sind— Physical geography of Western Sind 

— Rock formations — Cretaceous beds — Deccan trap — Ranikot group — Palasonto- 
logy — Cretaceous and lower tei-tiary beds of Baluchistan — Khirthar group — Palte- 
ontology — Nari group — PaliEontology — G^j group — PalEeontology — Manchhar 
group — Relations to Makr^n group of Baluchistan — Palceontology of Manchhar group 

— Post-tertiary beds — Additional notes on Sind tertiary series — Absence of general 
breaks below pliocene — Great post-pliocene disturbance — Alternation of marine and 
fresh-water beds. 

Sub-division of the extra-peninsular area. — The distinctions 
in geological characters between the peninsular and extra-peninsular 
areas o£ India have already been explained, and the reasons for treating 
the two regions separately have been sufficiently stated in the intro- 
ductory chapter ; whilst the descriptions of the tertiary, and still more 
of the post-tertiaiy, formations of the Peninsula furnish a natural passage 
to the extra-peninsular area. This is geologically an intrinsic portion 
of the Asiatic continent, whilst peninsular India is not. 

Imperfect as is our knowledge of the geology of the Indian Penin- 
sula, our acquaintance with the geological structure of the mountain ranges 
west of the Indus, of the Himalayas, and of the countries east and north- 
east of the Bay of Bengal, is even more fragmentary. Occasionally wide 
areas intervene, such as Nepal and the outer hills of the Afghan high- 
lands, from which Europeans are rigidly excluded, and, even when no 
political difficulties exist, the physical impediments to surveying are of 
the most serious description. Many parts of the mountainous barrier 
which almost surrounds India are, from their great elevation and rigor- 
ous climate, only habitable for a short period of the year, and even 
then their exploration is a matter of difficulty ; population is sparse, and 
roads either difficult or wanting throughout the whole tract. To the 
eastward, in the damper regions of Assam, Sylhet, and Burma, the dense- 
ness of the forest throughout nearly the whole of the country, and the 
impenetrable undergrowth of creepers, canes, bamboos, and shrubs, render 
the examination of the rocks toilsome, tedious, and unsatisfactory. To 
crown the whole, throughout extra-peninsular India, with the exception 
of Sind and the Panjab, the geology is greatly obscured by the disturbance 
and, in many parts, the inetamorphism which the rocks have undergone. 



446 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— SIND. [ Chap. XIX. 

Owing to these various di-awbacks, it is not practicable to treat the 
geology of extra-peninsular India as has been done in the case of the 
peninsular area, and to describe eacb formation throughout the whole 
region by itself. Having to deal with fragmentary and isolated observa- 
tions, varying greatly in their amount of detail, it appears best to take 
each geological tract separately ; and this arrangement is facilitated by 
the fact that there is a wide distinction between different parts of tbe 
region, both in the formations represented, and in the physical features of 
the geology, such as the directions of the mountain chains. 'Hie plan 
that will be adopted in describing tbe extra-peninsular tracts will be to 
commence at the west with Sind, as the rocks of that province are not 
only closely connected with the tertiary formations of Cutch and Katty- 
war, described in the f ourteentb chapter, but are also of importance as 
affording a better series of the tertiary beds, so widely developed in 
extra-peninsular India, than is known elsewhere in Southern or South- 
Eastern Asia. 

The following regions will therefore be separately described : — 



I. Sind. 
II. Panjab hills west of the Jhelum. 
III. Himalayas. 



IV. Assam, Sylhet, Chittagong, &c. 
V. Burma. 



I. Sind :— Physical geography of Western Sind.— The greater 
part of the province of Sind is included in the Indo-Gangetic plain, 
already described in Chapter XVII; Eastern Sind, beyond the limits of 
the Indus alluvium, consists chiefly of sand-hills, and the rock area of 
the province is almost limited to the ranges of hills on tbe western or 
Baluchistan frontier, and a few isolated ridges in tbe alluvium ; the most 
important exposures amongst the latter being those near Sukkur (Sakhar) 
and Rohri (Roree). 

The, province is commonly divided into Upper and Lower Sind, the 
former lying north, the latter south of Sehwan. Upper Sind consists of 
a broad alluvial plain on both sides of the river, interrupted near Suk- 
kur and Rohri by the ridges of limestone already mentioned, and bounded 
to the westward by a north and south mountain chain, known as the 
Khirthar,^ forming the boundary between Sind and Baluchistan, and 
rising in places to 6,000, and even in one spot to 7,000, feet above the 
sea. Lower Sind, west of the Indus, consists of a series of parallel 
north and south ridges of no great height, seldom exceeding 2,000 feet 
above the sea, but much loftier to the north than to the south where 
they almost disappear in an undulating plain near the coast. Many of 

' This range in all the older maps is united with other hiUs on the western border of Sind 
and the whole is called the HAla range. No such range is recognised in the country. There 
is a Hdla pass, not in the Khirthar range, but in another much smaller ridge south of Sehwan 



Extra-Peninsular. ] 



EOCK FORMATIONS, 



447 



these ridges are simple anticlinalsj the axes being formed o£ the massive 
nummulitic limestone of which the highest portion of the Khirthar also 
consists. The Khirthar range terminates in Lower Sind some distance 
south of Sehwan j other ridges, however, both east and west of this main 
range, extend farther to the south. East of the Indus there is an 
isolated low range of limestone hills, on the northern extremity of which 
stands the town of Hyderabad, and there is another similar rise at Tatta. 

The hills of Baluchistdn, west of Sind, are very imperfectly known ; 
for some distance from the Sind frontier they form ranges running north 
and south parallel to the Khirthar, but farther west they assume an 
east and west -direction. They are principally composed of tertiary rocks, 
like the hills of Sind, but at Kelat itself, and in a few other localities, 
older formations have been discovered,^ and some apparently extensive 
igneous rocks also occm*. 

Rock formations. — The rocks found in Sind,^ as already noticed, 
belong chiefly to the tertiary epoch, but in one locality some cretaceous 
beds crop out from beneath the higher formations. The following is a 
list of the different groups, exclusive of the alluvium : — 



Name. 

1. Manchhab 

2. Gaj 

3. Nasi 

4. Khibthab 



Sub-diTisions, 



r upper 



• lower 



f tipper 

' I lower 

f upper 

C. lower 



Eanikot 
Teaps . 



'J. Cebtacbous 



f^a. Cardita 
Seaumonti 
beds 
]b. Sandstones 
f c, Hippuritic 
limestone 



•I 



Approximate 
thickneBS. 

5,000 



, 3,000 to 5,000 

1,000 to 1,500 

4,000 to 6,000 

100 to 1,500 

500 to 3,000 

, 6,000 ? 

2,000 
40 to 90 

350 to 450 

700 

320 . 



Supposed geological 

age. 

pliocene. 

lower pliocene or 
upper miocene. 
miocene. 
lower miocene ? 
tipper eocene, 
eocene. 

eocene. 

lower eocene, 
upper cretaceous. 



cretaceous. 



Bemarks, 

Apparently represent- 
ative of the Siwa- 
liks proper. 



Nummulitic lime- 
stone. 

The base not deter- 
mined. 

Representative of Dec- 
can and Malwa trap. 



, Base not exposed. 

> Cook, Trans. Med. Phys. Soe. Bombay, 1860, VI, pp. 1,45 ; Carter, Jour. 
Br. R. A. S., VI, p. 184, It is possible that some of the igneous rocks described as occurring 
may be interstratified and representative of the Deccan trap, as in Sind. 

2 This description is taken partly from the accounts of Sind geology given in Eec. 
G. S. I., IX, pp. 8 — 22, XI, pp. 161 — 173, and partly from manuscript notes. Some details 
were given previously, Mem. G. S. I., VI, pp. 1 — 12. The earliest description of the geology 
of Sind was by Vicary, Q. J. G. S., 1847, p. 384. The fossils obtained by Vicary and others 
were described in Messrs. lyArchiac and Haime's great work, the " Description des animaux 
fossiles du groupe Nummulitique de Tlnde, " published in 1853. 



GEOLOGY OF lUDIA-SIND. [Chap. XlX. 

Of these rocks, the lower Khirthars and the Ranikot beds may be, to 
some extent, representative of each other. On the river Gaj, which 
traverses the Khirthar range in Upper Sind, a thickness of at least 
25,000 feet of strata is exposed, none of the fossiliferous beds being of 
older date than eocene ; but some of the rocks towards the base of the 
section beyond the Sind frontier correspond so well with the description 
given by Dr. Cook of strata in which he found mesozoic fossils 
(Ammonites, &c.) in Kelat, that these bottom beds on the upper Gdj, 
which are only seen west of the British frontier, may very probably be 
of cretaceous age. There is, however, no resemblance between any of 
the lower beds on the Gaj and the cretaceous rocks of the Laki range. 

Cretaceous beds. — The only locality in Sind, in which beds of 
■older date than eocene have been identified, is in a range of liiUs running 
due south from the neighbourhood of Sehwan, and generally known to 
Europeans as the Laki range,^ from the small town of Laki near the 
northern extremity. South-west of Amri on the Indus, a number of 
very dark-coloured hills are seen in this range ; they contrast strongly 
with the clifEs of grey and whitish nummulitic limestones behind them. 
These dark hiUs consist of cretaceous beds, but the lowest member of the 
series is only exposed in a single spot, at the base of a hUl known as 
Barrah, lying about 10 miles south-west of Amri. The whole range here 
consists of three parallel ridges, the outer and inner composed of tertiary 
rocks ; while the intermediate one consists of cretaceous beds, faulted to 
the eastward against the lower eocene strata and dipping under them to 
the westward. Close to the fault some whitish limestone is found, 
compact and hard ; the lower portion pure ; the upper portion, often con- 
taining f ermginous concretions, is sandy, gritty, and forms a passage into 
the overlying sandstones. The base of this limestone is not seen ; the whole 
thickness exposed is a little over 300 feet, and the length of the outcrop 
does not exceed half a mile. The limestone is fossiliferous, and contains 
echinoderms and moUusca, but it is so hard and homogeneous that nothing 
that has been obtained from it can be easily recognised, except one frag- 
ment of a hippurite. This fossil is, however, of great importance, because 
it shews that the white limestone may very probahly be an eastern 
representative of the hippuritic limestone, so extensively developed in 
Persia, and found in numerous localities ^ from Tehran to east of 

' This range has no general name, different portions being luown by a number of local 
terms. It Is one of the ranges which combines to form the Hala range of Vicary and other 
writers, and the name is less inappropriate in this case, for there is an unimportant pass 
through the chain known as the Hala Lak, Different portions of the range are known as 
Tiyfin, K4ra, Eri, Surjdna, &c. The range is very incorrectly represented on the maps., 

2 Eastern Persia, II, pp. 457, 485. 



Extra-Peninsular.] CRETACEOUS BEDS, 44,9 

KarmSn in longitude 58°, just ten degrees west o£ the Laid range in 
Smd. Of course the same formation may be found in the intervening 
country, the geology of which is unknown. The precise position of the 
Persian hippuritic limestone in the cretaceous series has not been deter- 
mmed, but the European formation, which is very similar and probably 
identical, is of the age of the lower chalk (turonian). 

The sandstones resting on the hippuritic limestone occupy a consider- 
able tract arovmd Barrah hill, and extend for about 3 miles from north 
to south. They are also seen at Jakhmari to the northward, a,nd in one 
or two other places in the neighbourhood. They are gritty and conglo- 
meratic, frequently calcareous, and contain a few bands of shale, usually 
of a red colour. The prevailing colour on the weathered surfaces is dark 
brown or purple, many of the beds being highly ferruginous. On the top 
of the sandstones is a thick bed of dark-coloured impure limestone, contain- 
ing oyster shells, and occasionally large bones, apparently of reptiles ; none, 
however, have been found sufficiently well preserved for identification. 

In one place a bed of basalt, about 40 feet thick, has been found inter- 
stratified in the sandstones, and it is possible that the band may exist 
elsewhere, but it has hitherto remained undetected. The position of this 
bed of basalt on the face of a hUl called Bor, about 13 miles north of 
Ranikot, is at an elevation of 300 or 400 feet above the base of the 
sandstones, and about twice as much beneath the main band of inter- 
bedded trap, to be described presently. 

The highest sub-division of the cretaceous formation consists of soft 
olive shales and sandstones, usually of fine texture. The sandstone beds 
are thin, and frequently have the appearance of containing grains of de- 
composed basalt or some similar volcanic rock, or else fine volcanic ash. A 
few hard bands occur, and occasionally, but rarely, thin layers of dark olive 
or drab impure limestone. Gypsum is of common occurrence in the shales. 

Palaeontology. — The olive shales are highly fossiliferous, the com- 
monest fossil being Cardita leaumonti,^ a peculiar, very globose species, 
truncated posteriorly, and most nearly allied to forms found in the lower 
and middle cretaceous beds of Europe (neocomian and gault). This 
shell is extremely abundant in one bed, about 200 to ^60 feet below the 
top of the cretaceous series, but is not confined to this horizon. Nautili 
also occur, the commonest species closely resembling N. lalechei^ of 
Messrs. D'Archiae and Haime, but differing in the position of the 
siphuncle. This form appears undistinguishable from N. houchardianus, 
found in the upper cretaceous Arialur beds of Pondicherry, and at a lower 

1 D'Archiae and Haime, An. foss. Groupe Num., p. 253, pi, xxi, fig. 14. 

2 T. c. p. 338, pi. xxxiv, fig. 12. 

D I 



450 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIND. [Chap. XIX. 

cretaceous horizon in Europe. A second Nautilus resembles JV. stibfleuri'^ 
ausianus, another eocene Sind species, in form, and is also allied to some 
cretaceous tjrpes. Several Gastercypoda occur, especially forms of Rostel- 
laria, Cypraa, Natica and Turritella, but none are very characteristic. 
Two forms of Ostrea are common — one of them allied to the tertiary 
0. flemingi and to the cretaceous O. zittelicma, but distinct from both. 
The only moUusk which certainly passes into the Ranikot beds is Corbula 
harpa. Two echinoderms have been found — one is an ^piaster, an almost 
exclusively cretaceous g-enus, only one or two tertiary species having 
been found ; the other is an aberrant form of EcMnolampas. Two or three 
corals complete the list of invertebrate fossils found in the olive shales. 

In the lower part of the beds with Cardita beaumotdi, however, some 
amphiccelian vertebrae were found, which Mr. Lydekker has ascertained 
to be crocodilian. All amphiccelian crocodiles are mesozoic, and the present 
form must be one of the latest known. So far as it is possible to 
form an opinion from very fragmentary materials, the vertebrsB in 
question appears more nearly allied to the Wealden Suchosawrus than to 
any other form hitherto described. It has, however, bden already shewn, 
when writing of the Grondwana flora, that the distribution ofBeptilia 
in past ages was not the same in India as in Europe. 

The fossils of the Cardita beaumonti zone require much fuller examin- 
ation and comparison than they have hitherto received, but sufficient has 
been ascertained to shew that they have a distinctly cretaceous character, 
and that the limit of tertiary formations must be drawn above them. 
As will be seen in the description of the Panjab Salt Range in the next 
chapter, it is probable that this peculiar band of olive-coloured shales is 
represented by similar beds in that locality also. It has, however, not 
hitherto been Recognised in Baluchistan or in the Western Panjab, south 
of the Salt Range. 

Deccan trap.^Mention has already been made of one bed of basalt 
intercalated in the sandstones above the hippuritic limestone : a much 
more important band of the same igneous rock has been traced, resting 
upon the Cardita beaumonti beds, throughout a distance of 32 miles from 
Ranikot to Jakhmari, about 17 miles south of Seh wan, wherever the 
base of the Ranikot gi'oup, the lowest tertiary formation, is exposed. 
The thickness of this band of trap is trifling, and varies from about 40 to 
about 90 feet. Apparently in some places the whole band consists of 
two lava flows similar in mineral character, except that the upper is 
somewhat ashy, and contains scoriaceous fragments ; the higher portion of 
each flow is amygdaloidal, and contains nodules of quartz, calcedony and 
calcite, and in places the nodules are surrounded by green earth as is 



Extra-Peninsular. J RANIKOT GROUp. ^51 

so frequently the case in the Deccan traps. Another characteristic 
accessory mineral^ common also in the traps of the Deccan and Malwa, is 
quartz with trihedral terminations. The basaltic trap of the Laki hills is 
apparently of subaerial origin^ although it rests conformably on the 
marine (or estuarine?) Cardita heaumonti beds. There is nothing in the 
igneous bed to indicate its having consolidated otherwise than in the air, 
and the structure differs altogether from that of subaqueous volcanic tuffs. 

The evidence that this band of basaltic rock is interstratified and not 
intrusive is ample ; throughout the whole distance the trap is found in 
precisely the same position between the lowest beds of the Ranikot group 
and the highest cretaceous strata, and apparently perfectly conformable to 
both. The close resemblance in mineral character and the similarity 
of geological position at the base of the tertiary beds shew that 
this band must be in all probability a thin representative of the 
great Deccan and Malwa trap formation, and the occurrence of a second 
bed at a lower horizon, interstratified with rocks of cretaceous age, tends 
strongly to confirm the inference drawn from the relations of the traps 
to cretaceous and tertiary rocks in the Narbada valley, that the great 
volcanic formation of Western India must be classed as upper cretaceous. 

Banikot group. — The name of the lowest tertiary sub-division is 
derived from a hill fortress of the Sind Amirs, situated in the Laki range 
of hills, and known as Rani-jo-kot, or Ranikot, and also as Mohan-kot; 
from the Mohan stream, which traverses the fortification. The Ranikot 
group is much more extensively developed in Sind than the underlying 
cretaceous beds, for although it is confined to Lower Sind, and although 
its base is only seen in the Laki range, north of Ranikot, its upper 
strata occupy a considerable tract of country, about 26 miles long 
from north to south by about 12 in breadth, north-west of Kotri, 
and another even larger exposure, about 36 miles long, occurs, extending 
from north of Jhirak (Jhirk, Jhirruk, Jerruck or Jurruk) to Tatta. In 
the Laki range, the Ranikot beds are seen for about 35 miles, but the 
outcrop is never more than 2 or 3 miles broad, and one small inlier is 
exposed to the west of Ranikot. 

All the lower portion of the Ranikot group, including by far the 
greater portion of the beds, consists of soft sandstones, shales and clays, 
often richly coloured and variegated with brown and red tints. Gypsum 
is of frequent occurrence ; some of the shales are highly carbonaceous ; 
and in one instance a bed of coal (or lignite) nearly 6 feet thick was 
found, and a considerable quantity of the mineral extracted.! The. 
quality was, however, poor, and from the quantity of iron-pyrites present, 
the coal decomposed rapidly, and was liable to spontaneous combustion 
1 Mem. G. S. I., VI., p. 13. 



453 GEOLOGY OE INDIA— SIND. LChap. IXX. 

when exposed, whilst the deposit was found to be a small patch, not 
extending more than about 100 yards in any direction. Some of the 
more pyritous shale is used in the manufacture of alum. The only fossils 
found in the lower portion of the Ranikot group, with the exception of 
a few fragments of bone, have been plants, some dicotyledonous leaves, 
hitherto not identified, being the most important. All the Eanikot beds, 
except towards the top of the group, have the appearance of being of 
fresh-water origin, and are probably fluviatile. 

A variable portion of the group, however, towards the top, consists 
of highly fossiliferous limestones, often light or dark brown in colour, 
interstratified with sandstones, shales, clays, and ferruginous bands. These 
are the lowest beds in Sind containing a distinctly tertiary marine 
fauna. The brown limestones are well developed around Lynyan, east 
of Band Vero and north-west of Kotri, and throughout the area of Ranikot 
beds near Jhirak and Tatta. In this part of the country there appears to 
be a complete passage upwards into the overlying nummulitic limestone 
(Khirthar) j but in the Laki range, the upper marine beds of the Ranikot 
group are poorly represented or wanting, and it is e\ident that they were 
removed by denudation before the deposition of the Khirthar limestone, 
for the latter is seen at Hothian Pass resting upon their denuded edges. 

The greatest thickness of the Ranikot group in the Laki range, 
wtere alone, as has already been explained, the base of the group is 
visible, is about 2,000 feet, but generally the amount is rather less,^ 
about 1,500. It must, however, be recollected that in this locality some 
of the upper marine beds are wanting, and as these marine limestones 
and their intercalated shales, sandstones, &c., are 700 or 800 feet thick, 
in places northwest of Kotri, it is evident that the original development 
of the group exceeded the 3,000 feet seen in the Laki range. 

PalsBOntology. — The following are some of the commonest or most 
important fossils of the Ranikot group. The large collections made by 
the Geological Survey have as yet only been partially examined, and 
the lists of fossils given can be considered only preliminary, ' many of 
the commonest species being undeseribed forms :— 

Cephaiopoda. 



Nautilus suhfleunausianui. 
N. deluci. 



N. forhesi. 



1 As in other lists in this chapter, most of the names are taken from D'Archiac and 
Haime's "Animaux fossiles du groupe nummulitique de I'Inde." In this work, however, 
species from upper cretaceous, eocene and miocene beds are described ; until the rocks of 
Sind were surveyed, the distribution of the fossils was not known, although indications of a 
probable sub-division had been pointed out by D'Archiac and Haime, (t. c. p. 359), and it 
had been shewn by Jenkins (Q. J. G. S., 1864, p. 65), and by Martin Duncan (ib., p. 66, 
and Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 8, Vol. XIII, p. 295), that some of the fossils described 
indicated the presence of miocene beds. 



Extra-Peniasular. J CRETACEOUS ROCKS OP BALUCHISTAN. 



453 



Sosiellaria angistoma. 
R. prestwichi. 
It.fnsoiAes. 
Terehellum distorium. 
T. plicatum. 

Corlula hat'pa. 
Vulsella legumen. 
S^ondylvs roualti. 



Gasteeopoda. 

Valuta Juffosa. 

Natica longispira. 

Nerita ( Velates) schmedeliana, 

Turritella angulata, var, 

T. assimilis. 

Lamellibbanchiata. 

Ostrea flemingi. 
O. vesicularis. 



Beachiopoda. 
Terehratula, cf. subrotunda. 



Schiioster, sp. 
Semiasier digonus. 
Eurhodia morrisi. 
Prenaster, sp. 
Toxohrissus, sp. 
Conoclypeus, sp. 

Trochocyathus vandenhecJcei. 
Cyclolites vicaryi. 

Operculina canalifera. 
Nummulites spira. 



ECHINODEEMATA. 

Echinolampas, cf. suhsimilis. 
Temnopleurus valeneiennesi. 
Salenia, 2 sp. 
Phymosoma, sp. 
Poroddans, sp. (spines). 
Cidaris halaensis. 



Anthozoa. 

I MontUvaltiajacquemonti. 

FoeaminifKha. 

Nummulites irregularis. 
N. leymeriei. 



In the above list the majority o£ forms, such as the Foraminifera, the 
majority of the Hchinodermata aod Gasteropoda are lower tertiary, but 
still there is a very distinct admixture of species with cretaceous affinities, 
such as the Nautili, all of which are connected rather with cretaceous 
than with tertiary types, the Tereiratula, which cannot be distin^ished 
from one of the commonest upper mesozoic species, and forms of Salenia, 
Cychlites, &c. Corbula harpa is the only form hitherto recognised that 
is also found in the upper cretaceous olive shales, but a variety of the 
same shell is also found in the Nari beds. 

Cretaceous and lower tertiary rocks of Baluchistan. — All the 
rocks described in the last few pages as occurring below the nummulitic 
limestone or Khirthar group are found in Lower Siud, and, so far as is 
known, are confined to a tract near the right bank of the river Indus. 
Farther to the westwp-rd the series of older tertiary and upper cretaceous 
rocks has not been thoroughly examined, but the information hitherto 
x)btained appears to shew that the strata below the nummulitic limestone 
are very different iu character from those found in Lower Sind. In 



4.54 



GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIND. 



[Chap. XIX. 



Baluchistan, west of the frontier of Upper Sind, lower beds crop out 
from beneath the massive nummulitic (Khirthar) limestone, forming the 
crest of the intervening range of hills, and on the banks of the Gaj river 
which traverses the range south-west of Mehar, a series of more than 
10,000 feet of strata is exposed below the Khirthar group. The follow- 
ing is a rough section of the rocks thus exposed, the thickness being 
merelv an approximation :— 

•' Feet. 

1. Massive nummulitic limestone, forming the crest of the 
Khirthar range .... .... 1,200 

2. Shales, marls and clays, mostly dark-olive in colour, 
ahounding in Numrmdites 500 

3. Hard grey limestone, with NwmmuUtes .... 60 

4. Argillaceous limestone, shales and clays, olive and bluish 
grey in colour, abounding in Nummulites . . . 400 

/5. Unfossiliferous olive and hluish-grey clays and nodular 

shales, no limestone hands ... ... 1,500 

6. Pale-brown sandstones in thick beds with vegetable 
markings 1,000 

7. Fine greenish-white sandstone and shale, some of which 
ia carbonaceous 50O 

8. Dark-brown limestone and dark-green argillaceous beds, 
with Niimmulites ....... 100 

9. Pale-grey argillaceous limestone, with hut few fossils; one 
band towards the base contains NwmmuKtes and 



Khiexhab 



LOWBE KniETHAE 



? Cebiaceous 



I'M. Fine dark-coloured shales, unfossiliferous 
I 11. Very fine grained homogeneous thin-bedded limestones, 
white, red, grey, or ochrey in colour, unfossiliferous, 

forming a conspicuous range 

f 12. Hard grey shales with calcareous bands from an inch or 
two to a foot in thickness . . .... 

The base not exposed. 



200 
3,000 



1,200 



2,500 



12,160 



About this section the first point to be observed is that none of the 
beds resemble those seen in Lower Sind suflBciently to enable any of the 
strata of the two localities to be identified with certainty. The sandstone 
No. 6 may correspond to the sands and clays of the Ranikot group, but 
there is no great similarity, and nothing in the above section appears to 
represent the fossiliferous brown limestones of the Ranikot group, the 
Deccan trap, the olive shales with Cardita beaumonti, or any other of the 
cretaceous beds in the Laki hills. So far, indeed, as the section on the 
Upper Gaj river is concerned, all the rocks exposed might be referred to 
the tertiary epoch and classed as lower eocene ; no marked break inter- 
venes anywhere, nor are there any fossils below the argillaceous limestone 
with nummulites, No. 9, to shew the age of the beds. But, as has 



\ 



Extra-Peninsular.] CRKTACEOUS EOCKSOF BALUCHISTAN. 4,55 

already been noticed, farther to the westward, near Khozd^r, in Baluchis- 
tan, Dr. Cook discovered Ammonites ' in some argillaceous beds, 
passing upwards into red and white limestone, and it appears probable 
from the description that the latter is identical with the fine-grained 
thin-bedded limestone, No. 11, of the preceding section, whilst the 
argillaceous beds may be the same as No. 12. 

The following section, abridged from that given by Dr. Cook,'' 
shews the nature of the rocks between Kelat and Khozdar, the latter 
place lying about 70 miles north-north-west of the section on the upper 

Gaj river : — 

Feet. 
I. Compact white or reddish-white limestone containing 
NummuUtes, OrhitoUtes, Orhitoides, AhieoUna, &o. 
(This is doubtless the Khirthar limestone.) Thick- 
ness unknown ; probably more than .... 1,000 
Eocene . ./ 2. Limestone strata, difEering in character, compact, Sub- 
' crystalline, saccharoid, at times cretaceous, containing 
Nwmnmlites (AssiUna), AhieoUna, and minute 
indistinct Foraminifera and passing downwards into 
coloured argillaceous strata . . . . . ? 200 — 500 
^3 More or less compart, fine grained red and white lime- 
stone interleaved with slabs of flint or chert, the upper 
part containing one or two massive strata of an excess- 
ively hard limestone, abounding in Orbitoides, Orlito- 
Mbsozoic . ,) Una, and OpercuUna, the lower strata becoming argil- 

laceous and shaly and containing (rarely) Ammonites . ? 2,000 
Dark-blue fossiliferous limestone containing strata 
yielding lead ore (galena and carbonate of lead) . ? 2,000 

Is. Clay slate ? 2,500 

It is true that the precise relations of many of these beds are far 
from clear. Thus, in the vaUey of Kelat, the red and white limestone 
appears to underUe strata containing Ortloceratites. This may, however, be 
due to faulting or inversion. It is probable that several different groups 
of beds occur near Kelat, for amongst the fossils, besides OrthoceraUtes, 
AmmofiUes of Jurassic types, Ceratites, Crioceras, Scaphttes and Belem- 
nites occur, and whilst some of the forms are typically cretaceous, others 
can scarcely be newer than triassic. 

It is not impossible that the limestone bands in No. 3, contammg 
Orhitoides fmdLoih^xForammif era, m^jheionxgi^o the tertiary series and 

• Jour. Bombay Br. E. A. S., VI, pp. 186, 188. ^ ^ „ . ,^ ... 

2 Bombay Med Phys. Soc. Trans, 1860, VI, p. 100. The bed numbered 2 in the section is 
caUed upper cretaceous by Dr. Cook, but with a mark of doubt. Thiswas perhaps in accordance 
with the views as to the classification of the beds beneath the nummulitic limestone formerly 
held bv Dr Carter, but subsequently modified by him. See Jour. Bombay Br. B. A. S., IV, 
prsKr^?,? 635. and f' Geological papers on Western India," pp. 623, 626. 699. 700. 

footnote, &c. 



456 



GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIND, I Chap. XIX- 



not to tlie group with which they are associated. The banded fine 
grained white or red and white limestone is a conspicuous and important 
bed, and is probably widely developed in Baluchistan. It was found by 
Dr. Cook at several places south and south-west of Kelat ; it occurs, as 
already shown, on the upper Gaj river west of the Khirthar range, forming 
a range of hills known as Parh, and a rock of precisely the same mineral 
character appears 130 miles further south on the coast at a small hill 
called Gadani, about 25 miles north-west of Karachi. If, as appears 
probable, this peculiarly fine limestone or calcareous shale (for the rock 
in places appears argillaceous) belong to the upper portion of the 
cretaceous seiieSj it will serve to mark that horizon in Baluchistan and 
facilitate the recognition of the indistinct limit between mesozoic 
and tertiary. There is, however, a great appearance of passage between 
all these formations. ■ 

Returning to the beds of the Gaj section, the gradual passage upwards 
from the shales, marls, and clays with Nummulites, Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of 
the section, into the massive nummuUtic limestone is worthy of notice. 
A similar passage takes place locally in Lower Sind, and it appears 
best to consider the shales and marls as the lower portion of the same group 
as the limestone. The six thousand feet of rocks remaining between 
the nummulitie shales and the banded limestones of supposed cretaceous 
age may be classed as lower Khirthar; they very possibly represent the 
Ranikot group, but, as already noticed, there is no distinct mineralogical 
or palsaontological connexion. The nummulites found in No. 8 in 
the middle of this lower Khirthai" group comprise N. ohtusa, N. granu- 
losa, N. leymeriei, N.. spira, and other species common in the Khirthar 
limestone itself. 

It is probable that the beds below the Khirthar limestone extend 
throughout a large tract in Baluchistan, on the west side of the Khir- 
thar range, for similar beds are seen, from the crest of the hills, cropping 
■out to the westward as far north as Dharyaro and Kutto-jo-Kabar (the 
dog's tomb), the culminating point of the range due west of Larkana. 
Again, west of the Habb river, forming the boundary of Sind near the 
sea, the whole Khirthar formation appears composed of shales, marls 
and sandstones, closely resembling in character those of the lower Khir- 
thar group west of Upper Sind, and an enormous thickness of similar 
beds is found extensively developed in Makran.'' 

Khirthar group. — Although this group, named from the great 
frontier range of bills already noticed, is, when the underlying shales 
and sandstones are excluded, inferior in total thickness to several 
'•Eastern Persia, vol. ii., pp. 4.60, 473. 



Extra-Peninsular.] KHIRTHAK GROUP. 457 

other sub-divisions o£ the tertiary series in Sind, it comprises by far 
the most conspicuous rock, the massive nummulitic limestone. Of 
this formation all the higher ranges in Sind consist. It forms the 
crest of the Khirthar throughout, and all the higher portions of the 
Laid range, of the Bhit range south-west of Manchhar lake, and of several 
smaller ridges, and consists of a mass of limestone, varying in thickness 
from a few hundred feet in Lower Sind to about 1,000 or 1,200 at the 
Gaj river, and probably 2,000, or even 8,000, farther north. The colour 
is usually pale, either white or grey, sometimes, but less frequently, dark 
grey ; the texture varies from hard, close^ and homogeneous, breaking 
with a conchoidal fracture, to soft, coarse and open. Ordinarily, the 
nummulitic limestone is tolerably compact, but not crystalline, and chiefly 
composed of Foraminifera, especially Nummulites, whole or fragmentary ; 
corals, sea-urchins and mollusks also abound, but the two latter very 
frequently only weather out as casts. 

Throughout Northern Sind, except near Rohri, no beds are seen beneath 
the Khirthar limestone, and the rocks which crop out west of the Sind 
frontier from beneath the main limestone band have already been de- 
scribed. The remarkable range of low hills, surrounded by ladus alluvium, 
and extending foi* more than 40 miles south from Rohri, consists of 
nummulitic limestoae having a low dip to the westward, and beneath 
■the limestone forming the eastern scarp of the hills, on the edge of the 
alluvial plain, a considetable thickness of pale-green gypseous clays is 
exposed, with a few bands of impure dark limestone and calcareous 
shale- No Foraminifera have been found in these beds, although 
Nummulites abound in the limestone immediately overlying; several 
species of mollusca occur, but none are characteristic, and it is far 
from clear whether the green clays and their associates are merely 
thick bands intercalated in the limestone, or whether they belong to a 
lower group. Probably these ai-gillaceous beds of the Kohri hills 
represent some of the marls, shales and clays forming the lower portion 
of the upper Khirthar group on the Gaj river. 

In some places west of Kotri, a band of argillaceous and ferruginous 
rock is found close to the base of the Khirthar group. This rock 
weathers into laterite ; it is mainly composed of brown hsematite, and 
appears to be found over a considerable area near Kotri and Jhirak. It 
is impossible to avoid suggesting its identity with the feri:uginous 
lateritic bed found in a similar position in Guzerat, Cutch, the Salt 
range, and the Sub-Himalayan region. 

It has already been mentioned that in the Laki range the nummul- 
itic limestone rests unconformably on the Eanikot group. The Khir- 
thar group here cannot be much more than 500 or 600 feet thick, and 



458 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SIND. [Chap. XIX. 

consists entirely of limestone. To the south-east, towards Kotri and 
Tatta, there is no unconformity between the Ranikot and Khirthar groups, 
but on the contrary there is an almost complete passage between the 
two, and the limestone of the latter becomes much split up and inter- 
calated with shales and sandy beds. This is even more the case further 
to the south-east in Cutch,' where, as was noticed on a previous page, 
the whole group consists of comparatively thin beds of limestone, in- 
terstratified with shales. To the south-west, near the Habb river, the 
massive limestone dies out altogether, and although it is well developed 
in the southernmost extremity of the Khirthar range near Karchat, 
about 50 miles south of Sehwan, it disappears entirely within a dis- 
tance of 12 or 14 miles, and in the ranges on the Habb river is 
entirely replaced by shaly limestones, shales, and thick beds of sandstone^ 
Some rather massive beds of nummulitiferous dark-grey limestone, 
very different in character from the pale-coloured Khirthar limestone, 
are found west of the Habb, but their precise position in the series is 
not known, and the rocks appearing from beneath the Nari group, in 
the place of the Khirthar limestone, consist of shales and sandstones, 
with some calcareous bands abounding in nummuHtes, and closely 
resembling, both in character and in the species of, Foraminifera they 
contain, the niimmulitie shales beneath the massive limestone on the 
Gaj river. It is not known to what extent,, the typical Khirthar 
limestone is developed in Baluchistan ; around ]^elat, to the northward, 
this band appears to be extensively exposed, but to the westward, near 
Gwadar, the rocks supposed to represent the older tertiary beds consist 
of an immense thickness of shales, shaly sandstones, and unfossiliferous 
calcareous bands, resembling the lower Khirthars of the Gaj, and the beds' 
of the Habb valley, and limestones with nummulites are of unfrequent 
and local occurrence. It is thus evident that the Khirthar limestone 
although it is so conspicuous in most parts of Sind, and although it attains 
a considerable thickness, is not by any means universally distributed. 

Palseontology.— The most characteristic fossils ' of the Khirthar 
group are Nummulites and AheoUna ; neither the genera, nor, as a rule, 
> See ante, p. 345. 
2 The following fosailsfrom the eocene formations of Western India «re figured on plate 

Fig. 1. VoUtajugosa. j Mg. 8. OrUtoides dUpmsa. 



2. Nerita schmedelicma, 2a. cast 

of the same, half natural size. 

3. Pecten labadyei. 

4. Vulsella legumeti. 

5. Echwiolampas discoideus, i size, 

6. Ev/rhodia morrisi. 

7. OrUtoides papp-acea. 



9. AlveoUna spheroidea, 

10. Nummulites garansensis. 

11. N. sublcBvigata. 

12. N. ramondi. 

13. N. ohtusa. 

14. N. granulosa, 

15. N, lei/meriei. 



Extra-Peninsular. J 



NARI GEOUP. 



459 



the species are peculiar, but the extraordinary abundance of individuals 
renders it usually easy to recognise even small fragments of the rock 
by the organisms preserved in- it. The following is a list of the 
commonest or most important fossils : — 



Ovulum murcMsoni, and other species. 
Cerithium cf. giganteum. 



Gasteeopoda. 

Nerita schmedeliana, PI. XV,, tig, 2, 2a. 



Corhula subexavata. 
Cardita mutabilis. 
C. subcomplanata, 
Lueina gigantea. 



Brissopsis scutiformis. 
B. sowerhyi ? 
Schizaster, sp. 
Eupatagus avellana. 
Fibularia, sp. 



Lamellibeanchiata. 



Astarte hyderabadensis. 
Crassatella sindensis. 
C. halaensis. 

Vulsella legumen, PI. XV-, fig, 4. 
Ostrea vesicularis, var. (O. glohosa, 
Sow.) 



ECHINODEEMATA. 



Amblypygus, sp. 

Conoclypeus pulvinatus. 

Ewrhodia calderi. 

Echinolampas discoideus, PI. XV, fig, 5. 

E. sindensis. 



FOEAMINIFEEA. 



OrbitoUtes complanata. 

Orbitoides dispansa, PI. XV, fig. 8. 

Patellina cooJci. 

Alveolina ovoidea. 

A. spheroidea, PI. XV, fig. 9. 

Nummulites obtusa, PI. XV, fig. 13. 



Nummulites ramondi, PI. XV, fig. 12. 

N. biaritzensis. 

N. beaumonti. 

N. vicaryi. 

JV. granulosa, PI. XV, fig. 14. 

N. leymeriei, PI. XV, fig. 15. 



Many of the species named, and the foraminifera especially, are 
characteristically eocene, and there can be no question that the num- 
mulitic limestone of India is a continuation of the same formation in 
Europe. Several species pass from the Ranikot beds into the Khirthar 
group ; indeed, the principal palaeontological differences between the two 
may be due to a change in conditions, the Khirthar being apparently a 
deeper water deposit than the Ranikot group. 

Nari group. — The series of tertiary rocks above the Khirthar 
nummulitic limestone is superbly developed and very well seen in the 
hills on the frontier of Upper Sind, the culminating ridge of which 
is known as the Khirthar. The names of the tertiary groups over- 



460 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— SIND. [Chap. XIS.. 

lying the nummulitic formation have consequently been derived from 
places in this range, and the Nari group takes its title from a stream 
which traverses the lower portions of the range, composed almost 
entirely of Nari beds, for a considerable distance, and issues from the 
hills nearly west of Johi, and west by north of Sehwan. The present 
sub-division comprises at the base the uppermost bands of limestone con- 
taining JV«««»»w^i!!e«; the species, however {K ffaransensis,T\.XY,Gg.li), 
and W. mllavigata, ib.,.fig. 11), being distinct from those so commonly 
found in the Khirthar sub-division, and the limestone itself being 
usually distinguished from that of the Khirthar group by its yellowish- 
brown colour, and by being in comparatively thin" bands interstratified 
with shales and sandstones. Several other fossils, too, besides the 
nummulites, differ from those in the Khirthar beds. Not unfrequently, 
however, there is an apparent passage from the white or greyish- white 
Khirthar limestone into the yellow or brown Nari rock, and the two 
groups appear always to be perfectly conformable, but no intermixture 
of the characteristic species of nummulites has been detected, and the 
division between the Khirthar and Nari beds can always be xecognised 
by the fossil evidence. 

In some places the lower Nari beds consist almost entirely of brown 
and yellow limestones, but more frequently the limestone bands are 
subordinate; dark shales, and brown rather thinly -bedded sandstone 
forming the mass of the rocks. The limestone bands are often confined 
to the base gf the group, and always diminish in abundance and thickness 
above, although they are occasionally found as much as 1,500 feet 
above the top of the Khirthar. The shales and fine sandstones, with 
occasional bands of limestone, constitute the lower Naris, and pass gra- 
dually into the coarser, massive, thick-bedded sandstones forming the 
greater portion of the group, and attaining a thickness of 4,000 or 
5,000 feet on the flanks of the Khirthar range. With the sandstones 
a few bands of clay, shale, or ironstone, are interstratified, and bands of 
conglomerate occasionally occur. The Nari beds in their typical form 
extend throughout the eastern flank of the Khirthar range, and occupy 
a belt of varying width, from one or two to as much as 10 miles in 
breadth, between the underlying Khirthar and the overlying Gaj beds. 

On the western side of the Bhagotoro hills, 4 or 5 miles south of 
Sehwan, there is a break in the Nari beds, and some variegated shales, 
clays and sandstones, richly tinted in parts with brown and red, and 
representing the massive sandstones of the upper Nari group, rest 
unconformably on the denuded edges of the lower Nari brown lime- 
stones and shales. The break is evidently local. To the east of the 



Extra-Peninsular. J NARI group. 



461 



Laid range the Nari beds are entirely wanting, and it appears very 
possible that they have never been deposited in this portion o£ the 
Indus valley. Prom the neighbourhood of Sehwan to Jhirat, Manchhar 
beds rest, with more or less unconformity, on the Khirthar, a very 
faint and imperfect representative of the Gaj group occasionally 
intervening. But west of the Laki range, throughout Lower Sind, 
the Nari beds are found exposed almost wherever the base of the 
Gdj group is seen ; they increase in thickness to the westward, and the 
Habb valley, from the spot where the river first forms the boundary of 
British territory to the sea, consists entirely of these strata. There is 
however, in this part of the country no longer any such marked dis- 
tinction between the sub-divisions of the tertiary series as is found in 
the Khirthar range. The disappearance of the Khirthar limestone 
has already been mentioned, and with it the lower Nari limestones with 
Nummuliies garansensis and N. sfuiblcsvigata also disappear, so that it is 
no longer possible to draw a distinct line between the two groups, for 
the shaly beds at the base of the Naris are undistinguishable from 
similar rocks in the Khirthars. The calcareous shales, with the cha- 
racteristic Khirthar nummulites, below, and the massive Nari sandstones 
above, are still recognisable, and the two groups can consequently 
still be traced, although the dividing line between them is obscured. 
Beds of brown limestone, too, full of Orhitoides papyracea (or 0. 
fortisi, ?1. XV, fig. 7), a fossil closely resembling a nummulite, and 
associated in abundance with N. garansensis in the typical lower Nari 
limestones, occur in the Nari beds of the Habb valley j but iastead of 
being found at the base, they appear in the middle of the group. Again, 
just as at the base of the Naris, there is a difficulty in distinguishing 
them from the Khirthar, so the beds at the top of the former group can 
only be separated by an arbitrary line from the overlying Gaj beds. In 
the Khirthar range the upper boundary of the Nari group, although 
there is no unconformity, is distinct and definite, limestones with marine 
fossils of the Gaj group resting immediately upon the upper Nari sand- 
stones. But in Southern Sind bands of hmestones, or calcareous sand^ 
stone, with marine fossils, some of which are well-marked Gaj species, 
occm- in the upper part of the Nari group, whilst limestone bands with 
the Nari Orhitoides papyracea are found in the Gaj. 

Palaeontology. — The sandstones, which form so large a portion of 
the Nari group, have hitherto proved destitute of animal remains, and in 
the typical area in Upper Sind, no beds with marine fossils are intercalated 
in. the upper portion of the group, but the occasional interstratifications 
of shales and clays often contain fragments of plants, and some ill-marked 



462 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— SIND. [Chap. XIX. 

impressions J probably due to fucoidsj have Jjeen found in the sandstones 
themselves. There appears a probability that these sandstones may be of 
fluviatile and not of marine origin. 

In the limestones towards the base of the Nari group, many marine 
fossils have been obtained, the following being some of the more 
important : — 

Gasteropoda. 

Natica patula. 

N. sigaretina. 

Siliquaria granti. 

Solarium affine. 



Terebellum ohtusunt. 

Cyprcea nasuta. 

Valuta jugosa, PL XV, fig. 1. 

V. dentata. 

Triton davidsoni. 



Frochus cumulans. 
Fhasianella oweni. 

Lameliibeanchiata. 



» 



Corhula Tiarpa. 

Venus granosa, PI. XVI, fig. 7. 

Cardium triforme. 

ECHINODEEMATA 



Pecten Uhadyei, P). XV, fig. 3. 
Ostrea flalellula. 



Schizasfer heloutcMstanensis. 
Eupatagus rostratus. 
Echinolampas, sp. 



Clypeaster profundus. 
Coelopleurusforhesi. 
Cidaris verneuilli. 



Anthozoa. 
Troehocyathus burnesi. 1 MontUvaltia vignei. 



FOEAMINIFEEA. 

Wiimmulites garansensis, PI. XV, fig 10.1 Orhitoides papyraoea, PI. XV, fig. 7. 
N. suhlcevigata,V\.TY,iLg. 11. \ 

Although some species pass from the Khirthar, and even from the 
Ranikot group into the Nari beds, the fauna is chiefly distinct and 
marks a higher horizon. The most marked change is perhaps in the 
Foraminifera, because they are so abundant and characteristic ; whole 
beds of limestone towards the base of the Nari group being entirely 
made up of JSfummulites garansensis, N. mhlmmgata and Orhitoides papy- 
racea, the last named frequently of large size, some specimens being 
two to three inches in diameter ; yet every species is distinct from those 
occurring in the Khirthar group. One of these species of Nummulites, 
N. garansensis, is of importance, because it occurs in Europe, as in Sind, 
in the highest strata characterised by the abundance of the genus, those 
beds being at the base of the miocene. Nummulites sublavigata is peculiarj 
so far as is known, to India. 

Several of the MoUusca and Echinodermata of the Nari beds also, 
such as Siliquaria granti, .Solarium affim,e, Venus granosa, and Clypeaster 



Extra-Peninsular.] 6AJ GROUP. 463 

profundus, skew distinctly miocene affinities, and some of these pass up 
into tlie Gdj group. But at tlie same time there are so many eocene 
forms present, such as Natioa paiula, N. sigaretina, Ostrea flahelMa, 
Valuta jugosa, &c., that it is somewhat diffiicult to decide to which sub- 
division the Nari beds should be assigned. They may, perhaps, occupy 
an intermediate position, similar to that of the oligocene of continental 
geologists. 

Gaj group. — Upon the Nari group, almost throughout Sind, there 
is found resting a mass of highly fossiliferous limestones and calcareous 
beds, usually more or less shaly, always distinctly stratified, and easily 
distinguished from the limestones of the older tertiary formations by the 
absence of numAulites. A superb section of the strata forming this 
group is exposed on the banks of the Gaj river, the only stream which 
cuts its way through the Khirthar range, and in the neighbourhood of 
which, west of the range, the fine section of lower tertiary and cretaceous 
beds already noticed is exposed. From this river the present group 
derives its name. 

On the eastern flanks of the Khirthar range in Upper Sind, the Gdj 
group forms a conspicuous ridge, the hard dark-brown limestone bands 
near the base of the formation resisting the action of denudation far 
more than the soft sandstones of the Nari beds, and rising every here and 
there into peaks of 1,000 and 1,500 feet, or even more, escarped to the 
westward, and sloping to the east ; Amru, the highest summit of the Gdj 
ridge, being 2,700 feet above the sea. Still, the limestone bands, although 
so conspicuous, are subordinate, the greater part of the group consisting 
of sandy shales, clays with gypsum, and, towards the base, sandstones. 
Many of the bands of limestone appear very constant in position, and 
may be traced for a long distance j as a rule, they are dark-brown in colour, 
but one bed is white and abounds in corals and small Foraminifera 
{Orlitoides), whilst some of the darker bands contain EcAmodermata in 
large quantities. 

The uppermost portion of the group is usually argillaceous, being 
chiefly composed of red and olive clays with white gypsum, and these 
beds pass gradually into precisely similar strata belonging to the over- 
lying Manchhar group. The passage beds contain, amongst other fossils 
such as Turritella angulata, PI. XVI, fig. 2, and forms of Osirea and 
Placuna, the following : — 

Corbula trigonalis, PI. XVI, fig. 8. | Tellina subdonacialis. 

Lueina (Diplodonta) inaerfa. ' Area larlcanensis, PI. XVI, fig. 6. 

All of these have allies living in estuaries at the present day ; Area 
ffranosa, a recent representative of A.. larJcmemis, being one of the 



464 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIND. [Chap. XIX, 

commonest and most typical of Indian estuarine mollusca. To these 
estuarine passage beds further reference will be made presently when 
the relations of the Manchhar to the Gaj beds are discussed. 

The Gaj beds at the Gaj river are very nearly 1^500 feet thick, but 
they appear to be less developed to the northward in the Khirthar range, 
and not to be much more than half the thickness named west of 
Ldrkana, where, however, they are nearly vertical, and have probably 
sufBered from pressure. In Lower Sind, the Gdj group, like the Nari, 
disappears to the eastward of the Laki range, where it is either entirely 
wanting, or else represented by a thin band containing one of the charac- 
teristic fossils, Ostrea multicostata (PL XVI, fig. 3), at the base of the 
Manchhar group. There is, however, a very large area 8f Gaj beds north 
and north-east of Karachi, and the appearance of the formation here is 
somewhat different from what it is in the Khirthar range, for the 
greater portion of the group consists of pale-coloured limestonesj almost 
horizontal, or dipping at very low angles, and to the east of the Habb 
valley forming plateaus 400 or 500 feet high bounded by steep scarps, 
which rise from the low ground of the soft Nari sandstones. A low 
range of hills^ formed of Gaj beds, extends to the south-west, past the hot 
spring at Magar or Mangah Pir, to the end of the promontory known as 
Cape Monze, west of Karachi, and the same beds form the low hills east 
and north-east of the town, and furnish the materials of which the 
houses in Karachi are mostly built. A small island called Churna, in 
the sea, west of Cape Monze, also consist of Gaj rocks. To the north- 
ward the Gaj area of lower Sind extends with very irregular outline to 
the neighbourhood of Tong and Karchatj almost due west of Hala, and 
there are several outliers farther north, eonnnecting the southern portion 
of the group with the typical outcrop in the Khirthar range. East of 
Karachi, also, Gaj beds extend in the direction of Tatta, until they dis-« 
appear with the other tertiary rocks beneath the alluvium of the Indus, 
As was shewn in a previous chapter, the Gaj group of Sind appears to 
be represented in Cutch by a highly fossiliferous belt, containing most 
of the typical mollusca, echinoderms, &c. It is quite possible that the 
present group, as well as the Nari, never was deposited in the neighbour* 
hood of Kotri and Jhirak. 

It has been already stated that the G^j beds, throughout the greater 
portion of the Khirthar range, rest conformably upon the Nari group, 
although there is a change in mineral character, and that, in lower Sind, 
the passage from one group into the other is gradual, calcareous bands 
with Gaj fossils, such as Osl/rea muUieostata and Pecten suhcorneus, being 
found interstratified with the uppermost Nari sandstones. At one place 



Extra-Peninsular. ] 



GAJ GROUP. 



465 



however, near Tandra Eahim Khan, west by north of Sehwan, the 
outcrop of the Gaj beds, here dipping at a high angle to the westward, 
runs nearly in a straight line across the mouth of a valley, composed of 
a deep synclinal of the Nari group between two anticlinal ridges of 
Khirthar limestone. As the Gaj beds do not share the synclinal curve 
of the Naris, it is difficult to see how the two can be conformable j but 
an examination of the boundary between the two groups failed to shew 
any clear evidence of unconformity. There are, however, some places 
south of Sehwan where the G4j group overlaps the Nari beds and rests 
upon the Khirthar limestone, but it must be recollected that the 
Gkj group is itself overlapped by Manchhar beds in the immediate 
neighbourhood . 

PalsBOntology. — ^The following i is of course a very imperfect list of 
the animal remains found in this richly fossihferous group, only the 
more important or common forms being noticed : — 

Cbustacea. 

I Balanus subleevis. 



Palaocarpiliua rugifev.' 
Typilohus, sp. 

Buccinum cautleyi. 
B. vicaryi. 



Gasteeopoda. 

I Vicarya verneuilU, PI. XVI, fig. 1. 
I Turritella angulata, PI. XVI, fig. 2. 

Lamb llibb anchiata. 



Muphus rectus (Serpula reeta, Sow.). 

Corhula trigonalis, PI. XVI, figs. 8, 8a. 

Venus granosa, PI. XVI, fig. 7. 

V. cancellata. 

Tapes suhvirgata. 

Cardium anomale. 

Astarte hyderahadensis. 

Doainia pseudoargus. 

Area kurracJieensis, PI. XVI, figs. 5, 5a. 



Schizaster, sp. 

Maretia cf. planulata. 

Meoma, sp. 

Breynia carinata, PI. XVI, fig. 9. 

Echinolampas jaequemonti. 



Area peethensis. 
A. larMianensis, PI. XVI, fig. 6. 
Pectunculus pecten. 
Pecten suhcorneus. 
P. houei. 

P.favrei, PI. XVI, fig. 4. 
Spondylus tellavignesi. 
Ostrea muUicostata, Desh., PI. XVI, 
figs. 3, 3a. 

EcniKODEBMATA. 

Echinolampas spheroidalis, 
Echinodiscus, sp., PI. XVI, fig. 10. 
Ch/peaster profundus. 
C. depressus, PI. XVI, fig. 11. 
Coelopleurus forhesi. 



' The following fossils from the mioccnc beds of Sind are figured on Plate XVI :— 



Fig. 1. Vicarya vemeuilU. 
„ 2. Turritella angulata. 
„ 3. Ostrea nmlticostata, Desh. 
„ 4. Pecten favrei. 

5. Area (ParalellopipedumJ kvtrra- 
cheensis. 



Pig. 6. Area CAnomalocardiaJ larTchanensis. 

7. Venus granosa, i. 

8. Corbiila trigonalis, 

9. Sreynia carinata. 

10. Echinodiscus, sp. 

11. Clypeaster depressus, \, 



2 StoUczka : Pal. Ind., Ser. VII, p. 8, Pis. IV, V. 



466 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIND. [Chap. XIX. 

Anthozoa. 
Pachyseris murchisoni. | Cladoeora haimei. 

Hydnophora plana ani oihex epeeiea. \ Mycedium eostatum. 

FOEAMINIFEEA. 

Operculina canalifera. I Orbitoidea pajpyracea. 

The commonest and most characteristic fossils of this group are Ostrea 
multicoatata ^ and Breynia carinata. There cannot be any question that 
the Gaj fauna is newer than eocene; some of the species are recent 
(for instance, Bosinia psewdoargus is identical with the recent 1). exas- 
perata, Chemn.), and it is probable tbat many others, when they are 
compared with recent forms more carefully than has hitherto been done, 
will prove to beibe same as living species. Several genera, too, as Ma/retia, 
Breynia, Meoma, Echinodiscm, Cladoeora, and Mycediim, are rare or un- 
known in the older tertiaries, and there is almost a complete disappearance of 
eocene forms, very few species being common to the Nari beds even. The 
chief doubt is whether the Gaj should not be considered as upper miocene. 

The only mammal yet obtained from the Gaj beds is Rhinoceros 
sivalensis — a species found also in the Siwaliks. 

Manchhar group. — The highest sub-division of the Sind tertiary 
series has been named from a large lake, the Manchhar, a few miles west 
of Sehwan. The group doubtless represents generally the far better 
known Siwaliks of Northern India, and it is probable that the upper and 
lower limits of the two may be the same, but the f ossiliferous bands are 
at different horizons. 

The Manchhar group of Sind consists of clays, sandstones, and 
conglomerates, and attains in places a thickness of but little, if at all, less 
than 10,000 feet on the flanks of the Khirthar range. Although it is 
difficult to draw an absolute line between the sub-divisions, the whole 
group may be divided, wherever it is well exposed, into two portions ; the 
lower consisting mainly of a characteristic grey sandstone, rather soft, 
moderately fine grained^ and composed of quartz, with some felspar 
and hornblende, together with red sandstones, conglomeratic beds, and, 
towards the base, fed, brown, and grey clays ; the latter, however, being 
much less largely developed than in the upper sub-division. The conglo- 
meratic beds chiefly contain nodules of clay and of soft sandstone, 
apparently derived from beds precisely similar to those of the Manchhars 
themselves; so far as has been observed, these conglomerates do not 
contain fragments derived from the older tertiary rocks, no pebbles either 

' It is not quite certain whether this species is identical with the European fonn, but 
it is certainly the shell figured by Messrs. D'Archiac and Haime. There is another species 
known by the same name and found in triaissic beds in Europe. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] MANCHHAR GROUP. 467 

of the characteristic Gaj limestones or o£ the still moi'e easily recc^uised 
nummulitic limestone of the Khirthars having been noticed in the beds 
of the lower Manchhars, although both abound in the upper strata of 
the group. These conglomeratic beds of the lower Manchhars are 
frequently ossiferous, the bones and teeth contained in them being, 
however, usually isolated and fragmentary. 

The upper Manchhar sub-division, where it is best seen, on the flanks 
of the Khirthar range, west of Ldrkana, is thicker than the lower, and 
consists principally, towards the base, of a great thickness of orange or 
brown elays, with subordinate bands of ' sandstone and conglomerate. 
The sandstones are usually light-brown, but occasionally grey, like the 
characteristic beds of the lower sub-division. The higher portion of this 
upper snb-g^oup contains more sandstone and conglomerate, and the 
whole is capped by a thick band of massive coarse conglomerate, which 
throughout Upper Sind forms a conspicuous ridge along the edge of the 
Indus alluvium. This conglomerate contains numerous large pebbles 
of nununulitic and Gaj limestone, together with fragments of quartzite 
and other rocks of unknown origin. Throughout the conglomeratic 
beds of the upper Manchhars, pebbles of nummulitic limestone and of 
the brown Gaj limestone occur, shewing that these older tertiary beds 
must have been upheaved and denuded in the later Manchhar period, 
although there is a complete passage between the Gdj beds and the lower 
Manchhars. 

There appears, however, good reason for supposing that some disturb- 
ance of the older rooks took place before the deposition of the loWer 
portion of the Manchhar group. To the east of the Laki range the 
Manchhar beds, themselves disturbed, rest unconformably on the Khirthar 
group, the beds of which are vertical in many places, so that it is manifest 
that the Khirthars had in this locality been upheaved before the deposition 
of the Manchhars. The presence in this locality of the lower portion of 
the latter g^oup appears to be proved by the occurrence of teeth and 
bones of the same mammals as are found in the lower Manchhars 
elsewhere. 

It is evidently far from improbable that the Manchhar group of Sind 
should be sub-divided into two distinct groups, the upper being perhaps 
the equivalent of the typical Siwaliks. Only a few fragments of bones, 
too imperfect for determination, have, however, hitherto been found in the 
upper Manchhars, so that no clue to the age of the sub-division is afforded 
by fossil remains. There4s also a possibility that the coarse conglomerate 
capping the whole tertiary series should be classed apart from the under- 
lying beds, although it appears to pass into them. The only reason for 



4,68 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIND. [ Chap. XIX. 

distinguishing the upper conglomerate, apart from its gi'eat coarseness 
and thickness, is that it, and it alone, exhibits some slight connection in 
its development "with the existing features of the country ; at least the 
conglomeratic band appears to be much thicker at the spot where it is 
traversed by the Gaj river than it is to the northward or to the south- 
ward, and this increase in thickness may be due to an accumulation of 
pebbles brought down by a stream which occupied in upper Manchhar 
times the same position as the Gaj now does. A similar increase in the 
development of conglomerate near the course of the present rivers will 
be noticed in a subsequent chapter in the case of the Sub- Himalayan 
Siwaliks. It is, however, manifest that a great part of the disturbance 
which has caused the elevation of the Khirthar range is of later date 
than the Manchhar conglomerate, because that conglomerate has been 
tilted up at high angles, and appears to dip conformably with the older 
tertiary rocks. Nevertheless it is true that, as has been shewn in the 
last paragraph, there must have been some change of level before the 
Manchhars were deposited, and it is also true that there is in places an 
apparent passage from the upper Manchhar conglomerate into the 
gravels of the slope, on the edge of :the alluvium, but the latter may 
simply be due to the reconsolidation of pebbles derived from the eon- 
glomerate itself; and if the amount of disturbance in the interval between 
the Tipper and lower Manchhar periods was considerable, the evidence of 
such a break should be more conspicuous than it is. On the whole, it 
appears evident that the great period of disturbance which terminated 
the tertiary epoch in Sind commenced during the deposition of the 
Manchhar beds, or probably even earlier, but that far greater changes 
took place after the highest Manchhar strata had been deposited than 
during the period of their deposition. 

In one case a few estuarine fossils were found, near the Nari stream, 
ina Manchhar bed 300 or 400 feet above the base of the group. The 
only form recognised was Corhula trigonalis, already mentioned as 
characteristic of the estuarine passage beds between Gaj and Manchhar. 
With this exception, and that of some rolled oyster-shells possibly derived 
from a lower formation, no marine or estuarine fossils have been observed 
in the Manchhar beds of Upper Sind, above the passage beds at the base 
of the group, and there appears every reason to believe that the group 
Ik of fluviatile origin. The form. of the pebbles in the conglomerate 
of the upper Manchhars is that of stream-worn, and not that of sea- 
worn fragments j they approach an oblate rather than a prolate spheroid. 
Still the amount of rounding is such as could only have been produced 
by a rapid stream. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] MANCHHAR GROUP. 469 

In Lower Sind, however, there is a very considerable intercalation of 
marine or estuarine beds with the Manchhars^ and this evidence of 
deposition in salt water increases in the neighbourhood of the present 
coast. Around Karachi, beds of oysters, and sometimes of other marine 
or estuarine shells, are found not unfrequently interstratified with the 
Manchhar group. There is also some change in mineral character, the 
sandstones becoming more argillaceous and being associated in places with 
pale grey sandy elays and shales. The passage into the Gaj beds is very 
gradual, calcareous bands with Gaj fossils, such as Ostrea multicostata 
and Pecten, subeorneu's, being found some distance above the base of the 
Manchhar group. 

Although, on account of the change in mineral character, there 
is, except in the neighbourhood of the coast, no difficulty in drawing a 
line between Manchhar and Gdj beds, everything tends to shew that 
there is" no break in time between the two, the lower portion of the upper 
group being an estuarine or fluviatile continuation of the underlying 
marine beds. But the great thickness of the Manchhar group in Upper 
Sind alone would suffice to prove that a considerable period of time must 
have elapsed during the deposition of this formation, and it is far from 
improbable that the lower Manchhars may, be upper miocene, whilst 
the upper Manchhars are pliocene. 

The Manchhar beds extend along the edge of the alluvium, and 
form a broad fringe to the Khirthar range, throughout Upper Sind, from 
west of Shikarpur to the Manchhar Lake, but the breadth of the outcrop 
varies greatly, being as much as 14 miles where broadest west of 
Larkana, and diminishing both to the north and south. As already 
noticed, the Manchhars are thickest just where their outcrop is widest, 
but the breadth of the area occupied by them is not due simply to their 
vertical development, but chiefly to their forming a synclinal and anti- 
clinal roll before disappearing beneath the alluvial plain ; whereas in other 
parts of the range the same beds are exposed in a simple section, all the 
strata dipping to the westward. To the north the section is complicated 
by faults, but to the south the thickness of the Manchhar group dim- 
inishes greatly, and west of Sehwaii, near Tandra Rahim Khan, although 
both upper and lower sub-divisions of the group are developed, and the 
uppermost conglomerate is exposed, the whole thickness of the Manchhar 
strata cannot be much more than about 3,000 feet. The Manchhar beds 
are seen west, southj and east of the Manchhar Lake ; they are well 
developed^ and occupy a large plain to the east of the Laki range, and 
•west of the nummulitic limestone tract near Kotri and Jhirak ; they 
reappear in many places in the different synclinal valleys to the west, of 



470 



GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SIND. [Chap. XIX. 



the Laki range^ and they occupy a considerable tract of country east 
and north-east of Karachi. But throughout these areas in Lower 
Sind the rocks are not nearly so well seen as to the northward, the soft 
sandstones and clays of the Manehhar group having been denuded into 
undulating plains, covered and concealed in general by the pebbles and 
sands derived from the neighbouring hills, formed of the comparatively 
bard older tertiary rocks, and it is far more difficult than it is in "Upper 
Sind to distinguish the different portions of the group, or to form a 
correct idea of the thickness of strata exposed. 

Relations to Makran group. — The Manehhar beds extend along 
the edge of the sea, west of Karachi, almost to the end of Cape Monze, 
but no representative of this foi-mation is seen for a considerable distance 
to the westward of the Cape. The few exposures of rocks seen near 
the shores of Sonmiani Bay are older tertiary, or perhaps cretaceous, and 
the greater part of the country consists of alluvium j a low cliff near the 
coast, north of Gadani, being composed apparently of sub-recent deposits. 
But west of Sonmiani Bay, in the neighbourhood of Hinglaj, a well- 
known place of Hindu pilgrimage, there are high hills of hard greyish 
white marls or clays, usually sandy, often highly calcareous, and occasion- 
ally intersected by veins of gypsum. With this clay or marl, bands of 
shaly limestone, dark calcareous grit and sandstone are interstratificd, but 
they usually form but a staall portion of the mass, although their greater 
hardness renders them conspicuous. This marl formation extends for 
many hundreds of miles along the coast, and is well seen at H&s MaMn, 
Ormara, Pasni, Grwadar, near Jashk at the entrance of the Persian 
Gulf, and on the Persian shores of the gulf itself. The headlands of 
Eds Malan, Ormara, and Gwadar consist of great horizontal plateaus, 
surrounded by cliffs of whitish marl or clay, and capped by dark- 
coloured calcareous grit, Ras Maldn especially being a table-land rising 
abruptly to a height of ^,000 feet from the sea. These remarkable rocks 
have been called the Makran group ^ from the name usually applied to 
the littoral tracts of Baluchistan. 

The Makran group is of purely marine origin, and abounds in mol- 
lusea, echinoderms, &c., most of the species apparently bfeing the same as 
those found in the neighbouring seas at present. The collections made 
at Gwddar, Jashk, and other places have not been sufficiently compared 
to ascertain whether any are common to the Gdj beds of Sind, but by 
far the greater portion are distinct; none of the eharaeteristie Gaj fossils, 
such as Osirea muUicostata, Breynia carinata, Bchmolampas jacque* 
monii, &c., have been noticed in the Makran group, and the latter 
» Bee. G. S. I., V, p. 43; Eastern Persia, 11, p. 462. 



Extra-Peninsular. J MANCHHAR group. 471 

appears to be of later age than the miocene Gaj beds. Although 
there is no resemblance between the typical Manchhar beds and the cha- 
racteristic rocks of the Makran group, nor, from the widely different con- 
ditions under which the two formations must have been deposited, would 
any similarity in mineral character be probable, some of the soft argil- 
laceous shaly sands in the Manchhar beds near Karachi closely resemble 
some similar beds in the Makran group near Gwadar. As the coast of 
Baluchistdn has never been examined geologically, all that is known 
of its structure having been ascertained by brief visits to a few points 
separated from each other by intervals of from 50 to 100 miles, it is 
uncertain to what extent the rocks of Sind extend to the westward, 
and whether any representatives of the Gaj group, especially, exist 
in that direction, but there appears a considerable amount of proba- 
bility that the marine Makran group in Baluchistan may represent the 
fresh- water Manchhars and Siwaliks on the edge of the Indo-Gangetic 
plain. 

Palaeontology of Manchhar group. — The only fossil remains of 
any importance hitherto detected in the Manchhar group are bones of 
mammalia, and all that have been recognised belong to the lower Man- 
chhars, the upper sub-division of the group, as has already been mention- 
ed, having hitherto furnished only a few bones, in too poor and fragment- 
ary a state of preservation for the species, or even the genera, to be 
determined. The few estuarine shells which have been found in the 
lowest Manchhar beds in Upper Sind, and a portion at least of the marine 
fossils procured from a similar horizon near Karachi, appear to be Gaj 
forms, and to indicate a close connection between the lower Manchhars and 
the underlying group. In places, and especially in the neighbourhood of 
the Laki range, silicified fossil wood is found in abundance in the Manchhar 
beds, stems of large trees being of common occurrence. The majority 
are dicotyledonous, but some fragments of uianocotyledons are also 
found. 

The following is a list of the species of Vertebrata^ hitherto identified 
from the lower Manchhar group : it should perhaps be repeated that the 
remains are extremely fragmentary, and chiefly consist of single teeth 
and broken portions of bones. No remains of Quadrumana, Ghiroptera, 
Jnsectivara, Bodentia, or Cetacea have hitherto been found, and the fauna 
is chiefly remarkable for the prevalence of artiodactyle ungfulates, allied 
to pigs, or intermediate between pigs and ruminants. 

I These have been named by Mr. Lydekker, Reo. G. S. I., IX, pp. 91, 93, 106; X, pp, 
76, 83, 325 ; XI, pp. 64, 71, 77, 79, &c. ; Pal. Ind., aer. X, pt. 2. 



472 



GEOLOGY OF INDU— SIND. [Chap, XIX. 

MAMMALIA. 

Caknivoea. 

Amphieyon palaindicws, PI. XIX, fig. 4. 

Pboboscidia. 

Mastodon perimensis, PI. XVII, fig. 3. 1 Mastodon {Trilophodon) falconeri: 

M. latidens, PI. XVII, fig. 4. 1 Dinotherium pentepotamice. 

IjNGtrLATA. 
rmtlSSOVACTYLA. 

Rhinoceros palaindicus. I Acer other ium perimense. 



* R. sp. near R. deccanensis. 

Sus hysudrieus. 

* Semimeryx, sp. 

* Sivamerys;, 2 sp. 
Chalicotherium sivalense. 
Anthracutherium silistrense 



AMTIODACTTLA. 

* Spopotamus palceindicut^ 

* Hyotherium sindiense. 
Dorcaiherium majus. 
D. minus. 



Edentata. 
* Manis sindiensis. 

EEPTILIA. 

Crocodilus, sp. 1 Ophidia, sp. indet. 

Chelonia, sp. indet. I 

Species marked witb an asterisk have not been found elsewhere. The 
majority of the genera are extinct ; Khinoceros, Sus, and Manis being the 
only living types, and the last named has only been recognised from a 
single digital phalange, so that the generic identification is far from 
sufficient. Both Rhinoceros and Sus existed in miocene times, whilst 
Amphicyon, Anthracotherium, Hyopotamus, and Dinotherium are not known 
to occur in Europe in beds of later date than miocene. The genera 
Kernvmeryx and Sivameryx are peculiar ; both are allied to the Siwalik 
Merycopotamus. 

The species found also in the pliocene Siwaliks are Rhinoceros palmim,- 
dicus, Acer otherium perimense, Chalicotherium sivalense, Sushysudricws, the 
two species of Borcotherium, Mastodon ladidens, and Mastodon falconeri ; 
but as the presence of these forms in the Manchhars is inferred for the most 
part from fragments, the identifications are by no means quite certain, 
whilst the general facies of the fauna, the absence of characteristic living 
forms like Bquus, Bos, Antilope, Cervus, and Mephas, and the presence 
of several extinct genera not hitherto detected in the Siwaliks, shew that 
the mammalif erous beds of Sind are of older age than the typical Siwalik 
strata. It should be recollected, moreover, that the precise horizon at 
which the Siwalik forms are found is but rarely known with accuracy • 
that some of the Siwalik strata are as old as the lower Manchhars if not 
older, and that a portion at least of the older types of mammals are from 



Extra-Peninsular-] NOTES ON tertiary SERIES. 473 

beds low in the Siwalik series. None of the remarkable series of types 
allied to the giraffes and Sivatherium, nor of the peculiar bovine and 
antilopine forms so characteristic of the Siwalik fauna, have as yet been 
found in Sind ; the only ruminant detected in the Manchhar beds is the 
miocene Dorcathermm, and the place of the more specialised Pecora 
appiears to have been occupied by the less specialised even-toed ungulates 
allied to the pig. While therefore it is probable that some extinct types, 
such as Anthracotherium and Hyopotamus, which are not known in 
Europe above the lower miocene, existed in India at a somewhat later 
period, together with species which survived till pliocene times, it is 
evident that the lower portion of the Manchhar group can scarcely be con- 
sidered of later date than upper miocene. The palsBontological evidence 
is in accordance with the geological, and both shew the close connexion 
between the lower Manchhar beds and the Gdj group. 

Post-tertiary beds. — The post-tertiary formations in the Sind hills 
are not of sufficient importance to deserve a lengthened description ; gravel, 
sand and clays, brought down by torrents, occupy a large area in the 
valleys, and frequently form a slope some miles broad, extending from 
ths base of each range of hills, and covering a very large portion of the 
intervening valleys. The same phenomenon is seen throughout a great 
part of Western and Central Asia, being more conspicuous on account of 
the dryness of the climate and the resulting deficiency of forest or 
dense vegetation ; independently, however, of the greater facilities for 
studying such formations which are afforded by the absence of trees and 
shrubs, the formation of extensive gravel slopes appears to be character- 
istic of climates like that of Sind, with a low rainfall, because in such tracts 
rock detritus accumulates along the bases of hills more quickly than it 
can be carried away by the streams ; the rainfall is sufficient to wash 
down the disintegrated fragments fi'om the steeper slopes, but not to 
carry them forward where the fall is more gradual.' 

The great plain north-east of Karachi is covered by extensive allu- 
vial deposits, chiefly of gravel and sand ; the gravels here, and in many 
of the valleys in Western Sind, being often consolidated into a hard 
conglomerate by carbonate of lime derived from the pebbles of limestone, 
which form the bulk of the detritus. Some oysters of recent species 
are found in the conglomerates near Karachi. 

Additional notes on Sind tertiary series.— Before quitting the 
subject of the Sind tertiaries, there are two or three points to which 
attention may be directed. These points are chiefly of interest with 

1 For further details as to these gravel slopes, see Q. J. G. S., 1873, p. 496 ; Easteru 
Persia, 11, p, 465 ; and also Drew, Q. J. G. S., 1873, pp. 445, &c. 



4,74 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SINl). [Chap- XIX. 

regard to the geology of more extensive areas, but the knowledge, gained 
in the last few years, of the sequence in Sind, and of the peculiarities 
of the upper mesozoic and tertiary series there exposed, together with the 
great imperfection of our acquaintance with all the neighbouring 
regions, renders it desirable that these geological features, although 
they may not be peculiar to the Sind area, should not be overlooked 
when the characters of the region are compared with those of other 
parts of India. 

Absence of general breaks below pliocene.— The first of these 
points is the general conformity of the whole series from cretaceous 
(probably upper cretaceous) to pliocene. The lowest bed, the hip- 
puritic limestone, passes into the cretaceous sandstones, and these again 
into the oUve shales with Cardita heawmonii. The Deeean trap and 
the R^nikot beds at the base of the eocene period follow in regular and 
conformable succession, and the break, shewn by the Khirthar lime- 
stones resting on the denuded edges of the upper Ranikot beds in the Laki 
range, is merely local, for a few miles to the south-east the two forma- 
tions pass completely into each other. At the top of the\ Khirthar 
limestones also, although there is a sudden and abrupt change in the 
fauna, no unconformity has been detected at the base of the Nari 
group, whilst Nari beds in many places, and especially in South- Western 
Sind, pass uninterruptedly into the mioeene Gaj beds, and there is again a 
complete passage from the latter into the Manchhar group. In the 
middle of the Manchhar formation there may be a break proved by some 
slight indications of unconformity and by the appearance of detritus 
derived from middle and lower tertiary beds in the upper sub-division, but 
the unconformity, if any exist, is probably local. 

Great post-pliocene disturbance.— Here, however, the sequence 
ends, and, in the evidence of great disturbance having ta.ken place in 
Western Sind since the upper Manchhar beds were deposited, there is 
an abrupt and startling change from the phenomena exhibited on the 
other side of the Indus valley. We are in fact brought into the pre- 
sence of one of the great facts which divide with so trenchant a line 
the geology of the Indian Peninsula from that of neighbouring countries. 
The eocene nummulitic limestone, even in the middle of the Indus valley 
around Sukkur and Rohri, never dips at more than 5°, and rarely at more 
than 1° or 3° ; the tertiaries of Cutch, Kattywar and Surat pass upwards 
almost without a break into the coast alluvium ; the laterite of Western 
India, probably of tertiary age at least, lies undisturbed upon the flat 
cretaceous basalts ; and the difficulty in drawing a line between older and 
newer forms of laterite — a difficulty so frequently pointed out in the 



Extra-Peninsular.] alternation of beds. 475 

fifteenth chapter of the present work — alone suffices to shew how destitute 
of violent disturbance the geological history of peninsular India has been 
in csenozoic times. It is unnecessary here to do more than refer to the 
older mesozoic and palaeozoic rocks of the Indian Peninsula, but it is a 
fact that the pliocene beds of Sind and the Himalayas are more disturbed 
than the ancient azoic Vindhyans of Bundelkhand. The uppermost 
Manchhar rocks on the edge of the alluvial Indus plain are frequently 
vertical, and rarely dip at lower angles than 30° or 40°, and it is manifest 
that the great anticlinal ridges of the Sind mountains have been mainly 
formed in post-pliocene times. 

In the few notes on the physical geography of Sind at the commence- 
ment of the present chapter, it was shewn that the ranges of hills in the 
province are simple anticlinals with paralled axes, all running nearly 
north and south. This probably proves that the action of disturbance 
has been unusually simple, and has consisted of a distinct lateral 
thrust from one direction. The change of direction to the westward 
in Baluchistan, and to the northward in the Punjab, has been noticeid 
elsewhere. 

AItem3,tion of marine and fresh-water beds. — The cretaceous 
rocks appear to have been marine, with the possible exception of the 
unfossiliferous sandstones above the hippuritic limestone, but at the 
base of the Sind tertiary rocks, in the Ranikot beds, proofs of the im- 
mediate neighbourhood of land are afBorded by the presence of terrestrial 
plants. It is probable that the thin band of Deccan trap at the base 
of the Ranikot group was of subaerial origin in Sind as elsewhere, and 
that the lower Ranikot beds themselves are fluviatile. The upper portion 
of the Ranikot group, the whole of the Khirthar and the lower Nari beds 
are marine, and the nummulitic limestone may have been deposited far 
from land, whilst it is certain that a considerable portion of this lime- 
stone formation is too pure to have accumulated in a sea into which 
sediment in any quantity was poured by rivers or washed from a coast 
line. But, as has been shewn above, the Khirthar limestone in Lower Sind 
contains.'intercalated sandstones and shales, shewing the admixture of 
detritus derived from land, and the great limestone band itself disappears 
in the s outh-we stern part of the province near the Habb river. The 
thick upper l<Jari~sandstones, and the still thicker Manchhars have, again, 
the character of fluviatile deposits, but the intervening Gaj group is 
marine and in part perhaps estuarine. 

Thus throughout the tertiary series of Sind there is evidence of frequent 
alternations of marine and terrestrial conditions, the last marine beds 
known being of miocene date. It will be shewn in subsequent chapters 



476 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIND. [Chap. XIX. 

that to the northward, on the flanks of the Himalayas, the tertiary 
marine beds tend to disappear or diminish, even the numnmlitic limestone, 
the only marine formation which appears to be persistent throughout 
the greater part of the extra-peninsular area, being much less developed 
in the Sub-Himalayan ranges than it is in the neighbourhood of the 
lower Indus valley; 



Extra-Peninsular.] PUNJAB HILLS, 477 



CHAPTER XX. 

EXTEA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

THE PUNJAB HILLS WEST OF THE JHELUM. 

Physical geography and general features — Geological data — General geological features — 
Kock-groups of Salt Range — Rock-groups of Hazara and the Northern Punjab — 
Abnormal boundary of upper tertiaries — Azoic and palseozoic rocks of Salt Range, 
&c. — Salt marl — Purple sandstone — Silurian ? — Magnesian sandstone — Speckled 
sandstone — Carboniferous — Mesozoic rocks of Salt Range, &c. — Ceratite beds — 
Pseudomorphic salt crystal zone — Jurassic or variegated gi-oup — Gretaceous 
(neocomian) — Olive group. 

Physical geography. — Passing northward from Sind to the Puru- 
jab, the physical features of the country at first undergo little or no 
change. The South-Western Punjab near the Sind frontier consists, like 
Sind itself, of the alluvial plain of the Indus, bounded to the westward, 
for the most part beyond the limits of the province, by a range of ter- 
tiary hills, and to the eastward by a sandy desert. Farther north the 
alluvial tract expands into the great plain of the five rivers, the rocky 
boundary, known as the Suleman Range, continuing to the westward. 
_A little beyond the thirty- second parallel of north latitude, however, a 
series of curved hill ranges, of- which the most important, between the 
Indus and Jhelum, is known as the " Salt 'Range" crosses the province 
from Shekh Budin, a little north of Dera Ismail Khan, to Jhelum, and 
to the northward of these ranges, which cross the Indus at Kalabagh, 
a tract of more or less hilly country extends to the foot of the Hima- 
layas, and of the great mountain ranges between the Himalayas of 
Western Kashmir and the Hindu Kush. But this tract may again be 
sub-divided into three high level plains, more or less broken up by ravines, 
and separated from each other by ranges of hills. The south-eastern plain 
extends from the Salt Range to beyond Rawalpindi, and closely approxi- 
mates in dimensions with the basin of the river Soan, a tributary joining 
the Indus a little above Kalabigh. This plain is sometimes known as 
the Potwar or the Rawalpindi plateau ; it extends from the Indus nearly 
to the Jhelum ; it has a superficial area of about 7,000 square miles, and 
a general elevation of about 1,000 feet above the Indo-Gangetic plain 
to the south of the Salt Range. The surface is greatly cut up by deep 
ravines in the soft Siwalik beds, of which almost the whole area is com- 
posed. North of this southern plain there is a series of hill ranges 



478 GEOLOGY OP INDIA-THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap- XX, 

known as Mai-galla, Chitapahar, Cherat, &c., which have a general east 
and west (or east by north to west by south) direction, and connect the 
Murree and Hazara with the Afridi mountains. These hill ranges 
traverse the Northern Punjab south of Attock, and repeat, though on 
a diminished scale, the remarkable curves of the Salt Range and Chichali 
or Shingarh hills. North of the Cherdt and Afridi hills is the alluvial 
plain of Peshawar, and this again is bounded on the north by the 
hills of Swat and Yusafzai, the geology of which is unknown. 

A third plain, more to the westward, of smaller extent than either of 
the former, exists in the neighbourhood of Bannu (Bunnoo). It is close 
to the northern continuation of the Sulem^n Range, and is bounded to 
the northward by ranges of hills having a general east and west direction 
in the Bahadur Khel and Waziri country in Kohdt, and to the east 
and south by the trans-Indus continuation of the Salt Range, known 
under a variety of names, such as Chichali or Shingarh, Kdfirkot, 
Shekh Budm, &c., none of which, however, appear to have more than a 
local value. ^ The Bannu plain comprises about ],5Q0 square miles ; it is 
about 1,300 feet above the sea, and is drained by the Kurram (Koorum) 
river and its tributaries. 

For the purposes of the present work, the boundary between the 
Punjab and Himalayan areas will be understood as coinciding with 
the course of the Jhelum below the junction with the Kishenganga at 
Muzafirabad, the whole of Hazara, and of the hills around Murree (Mari) 
being included in the Punjab hill ranges. The circumstance that the 
valley of the Jhelum, which is also the boundary of Kashmir in this 
direction, closely corresponds mth the important change in the main 
direction of the ranges from the east-north-east strike prevalent in Hazara 

• No names are applied to these ranges on the map, and almost every writer employs 
different terms for them. The ranges in the Punjab are not named by the inhabitants of the 
country, and such distinctive terms as are commonly used appear to be derived either from 
the tribes inhabiting the hills, as Waziri, Afridi, &c., from the passes through them, from 
the country around, or from some local peculiarity, as in the case of the Salt Range. 

The following are the names used by various writers for the hUls forming the western 
extension of the Salt Range beyond the Indus. The portion near the river, much curved, 
but having on the whole an east and west strike for some distance, and then turning 
southwards and running north and south, is known as the Chichali, Shingarh or Lowagarh 
and Surgarh. By one writer these hills are called Ehattak. South of the break made by 
the Kurram river, there is a double range, the northern or north-western, running north-east 
and south-west, known as the Batani or Shekh Budfn ridge, whilst the parallel ridge to the 
south-east near the bank of the Indus is variously known as Khasor, Betot, Kafirkot, or 
Kotta Roh. Prom west of the peak of Shekh BudJn another ridge runs to the north-west 
and joins the Shekh Budin range to the Suloman. This minor ridge is known as the Pyzu 
(Peyzoo) from a pass through it. Most of the ridges named consist of tertiary rocks, but 
older formations occur in the Chichdli or Shingarh and Kafirkot ranges, and under Shekh 
Budin peak. 



Extra-Peninsular.] GEOLOGICAL DATA. 479 

to the north-western direction of the Pir Panjal, justifies the selection of 
this line for the eastern limit of the Himalayan region. 

The plains of the Punjab, so far as they require geological notice, or 
perhaps, it should rather be said, so far as their geology is known, have 
already been described in the seventeenth chapter with the rest of the 
post-tertiary Indo-Gangetic plain. The orographical features of the hills 
to the north and west of the province are peculiar, but our knowledge of 
the geology requires many additions to be made to it before these features 
can be understood. The change in the direction of the ranges, caused by 
a similar alteration in the strike of the rocks at the Jhelum valley, has 
just been noticed, but this is only one of several similar abrupt changes 
in the Punjab hills. Commencing again on the frontier of Sind, the 
Mari and Bhiigti hills, north of Jaoobabad, run nearly east and west, 
whilst the Suleman Range, from the Sind frontier to Dera Ismail Khan, 
runs nearly north and south, like the Khirthar and other mountain chains 
in Sind. The various ranges of the Northern Punjab are so much 
curved and twisted, that no general direction can be detected ; there is, 
however, in many parts of them, as in the Eastern Salt Range, and in 
the Shekh Budin hills, a tendency to parellelism with the east-north-east 
direction of the Haz^ra hills. The extraordinary curve of the Salt 
Range at the Indus may be considered a remarkable instance of folding 
due to compression, but the cause of so singular a change of direction 
requires further explanation. In the Punjab hills thi-ee distinct lines of 
strike may be traced : that of the Sulemdn Range, running nearly north 
and south ; that of the lower Hazara hills, running east-north-east to 
west-south-west ; and that of the Pir Panjdl, running nearly north-west 
and south-east; but all these chains are, in great part at least, of post- 
pliocene date, for all comprise pliocene beds, and it is difficult to see 
any reason for doubting that all are of contemporaneous origin. 

Geological data.— Our present knowledge of the various hill ranges 
varies greatly in accuracy and detail. The Salt Range and the elevated 
tract to the northward in the Rawalpindi district, known as the Potwar, 
together with some of the hills west of the Indus forming the trans- 
Indus salt region, and extending to the neighbourhood of Kohat and 
Bannu, have been examined and mapped by the Geological Survey ^ ; 
portions of Hazdra and the Murree hills have also been surveyed, but 
of the remainder of the region very little is known. Of the hills of 
the Derajat from Bannu southward scarcely any information exists. 
Some notes on the ranges near the Indus, from K^labagh to Shekh 

1 Chiefly by Mr. Wynne ; portions of the Salt Range, of the Murree hills, and Hazara 
having also been examined by Dr. Waagen. The Salt Range is described at length by 
Mr Wynne : Mem. G. S. I., vol. XIV ; an account of Mount Tilla having previously 



480 GEOLOGY OP INDIA-THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XX. 

Budin, have been published by Dr. Fleming.' A few observations on 
the geology o£ the Shekh Budin hills and neighbouring ranges have also 
been published by Dr. Costello ^ and Dr. Verchere/ but the details in all 
these cases are extremely meagre and imperfect. The Suleman Range 
beyond the British frontier has been traversed west of Dera Ghazi 
Khan by Mr. Ball/ and some notes on the Mari and Bhugti hills to 
the southward were published many years since by Captain Vicary ° ; 
whilst the only information on the northern part of the range is 
comprised in some brief notes by Dr. Fleming* and Dr. Stewart.' 

General geological features. — So far as is at present known, the 
Mari and Bhugti hills and the Suleman Range are principally, like the 
Khirfchar and other hills of Sind, composed of tertiary beds, amongst 
which nummulitie limestone and the conglomerates, sandstones and 
clays of the upper tertiaries (Manchhar or Siwalik) are the most 
conspicuous rocks. In the northern part of the Suleman hills, however, 
older formations appear, some of them metamorphic. The Shekh 
Budin and Chichali or Shingarh hiUs, west of the Indus, are a continu- 
ation of the Salt Range, and contain to a great extent the same rocks, 
but, as already remarked, they are very imperfectly known. In the Salt 
Range there is a remarkable series, of formations, from older paleeozoie 
to later tertiary, many of them f ossiliferous, the oldest rocks being found 
along the southern base of the range; and all the beds, despite much 
irregular disturbance, having a general northerly dip. Here the contrast 

been published : Roc. G. S. I., Ill, p. 81. The various descriptions by previous observers 
are noted in Mr. Wynne's memoir : of these the most important were the reports by 
Dr. Fleming : J. A. S. B., XVII, 1848, Pt. 2, p. 500, and XXII, 1853, pp. 229, 333, 4,44. 
The trans-Indus salt region was described : Mem. G. S. I., XI, pp. (105) — (330) ; the 
Kharian hills, south of the Jhelum, Rec. G. S. I„ VIII, p. 46 j the neighbourhood of Mari 
(Murree) hill station, Rec. G. S. I., VII, p. 64 ; and the tertiary rocks of the upper Punjab, 
Rec. G. S. I., X, p. 107, — all by Mr. Wynne. Some details were also given : Q. J. G. S., 
1874, p. 61 ; 1878, p. 347 j and Kec. G. S. I., Ill, p. 73; VI, p. 59. The geology of Mount 
Sirban, close to Abbottabad in Hazara, was described by Dr. Waagen and Mr. Wynne : 
Mem. G. S. I., IX, pp. (331)— (350) ; whilst Dr. Waagen separately gave an account of a 
section near Mureee : Rec. G. S. I., V, p. 15 ; and of forms of Ammonites, Ceratites, and 
Qoniatites f rorn^ carboniferous rocks : Mem. G. S. I., p. (351). The fossil collections made 
by Dr. Fleming and Mr. Purdon in the Salt Range were described by Mr. Davidson : 
Q. J. G. S., 1862, p. 25 ; and Prof, de Koninck : Q. J. G. S., 1863, p. 1. The only other 
important contribution to the geology of the Punjab is by Dr. Verchere: J. A. S. B., 
XXXV, Pt. 2, pp. 89, 159; XXXVI, Pt. 2, pp. 9, &c. 

The present and the following chapter are chiefly compiled from data furnished by 
Mr. Wynne's papers, except where the contrary is stated. 

1 J. A. S. B., XXII, 1853, pp. 259, 261, ^ Rec. G. S. I., VII, p. 145. 

268, &c. 5 Q. J. G. S., 1846, p. 260; Geol. Papeis on 

2 J. A. S. B., XXXIII, p 378. Western India, p. 521. 

3 .1. A. S. B., XXXIV, Pt, 2, p. 42 j and « Q. J. 6. S., 1853, p. 346. 
map, J. A. S, B., XXXVI, Pt. .2. ? J. A. S. B„ XXIX, p. 314. 



Extra-Peninsular.] ROCK-GROUPS OP SALT RANGE. 4,81 

so''£requently noticed between the peninsular and extra-peninsular areas 
of India is yery strongly marked ; although the Korana hills,i apparently 
composed o£ the Arvali transition beds, are but 40 miles distant to the 
south-east, not a single formation, out of the ten pre-tertiary groups 
distinguished by Mr. Wynne amongst the rocks of the range, has hitherto 
been clearly identified with any formation in the, peninsular area, and the 
Salt Range tertiary beds are only represented, as already noticed, in 
Western India. At the same time the peninsular formations contrast 
much more strongly with the marine palssozoie and mesozoic strata of the 
Western Salt Range than with the unfossiliferous sandstones in the eastern 
part of the hills, and there is not only a gradual passage in the range itself 
from west to east, from a distinctly marine facies to one more nearly 
resembling that of the Vindhyan and Gondwana series of the peninsula, 
but there is still a possibility that some of the peninsular formations may 
be identified with those of the Eastern Salt Range. All that can be said 
is that no such identification has hitherto been made; Dr. Waagen* 
suggests 2 that the Salt Range marks the passage from the extra- 
peninsular to the peninsular type of rocks, and these hills m^y conse- 
quently be on the margin of the ancient land area, of which the Indian 
Peninsula formed a portion in palaeozoic and mesozoic times. 

Rock-groups of Salt Range. — The following is a general list of 
the rock- groups found in the Salt Range in descending order ^ : — 

Approximate 
European eqiiivalenis. Name. ' Character of rocks. thickness, 

in feet. 
Pmocenb . . 14 Upper Siwalik . Conglomerates, drab and 

pink clays . . . SCO to 2,000 
13 Lower Siwalik'' . Grey sandstones and red 
clays, with mammalian 
Miocene (?) .1 bones. . . . 1,200 to 7,500 

/ . - — - Greenish-grey sandstones """ ' " " 

Pale limestones, with 
nummnlites and other 
,, „ .... J fossils . . . . 400 to 600 

EOOEHB . . 11 Nummulitic .«^ ^^^f^^ sandstones, shales, 

and red and grey claysj 

with lignite and gypsum 150 to 3C0 

' Ante, p. 52. 

2 Denkschr. K. Akad. Wisa. Wien., 1878, p. 8. 

3 Wynne, Mem. G. S. I., p. 69. The Salt Range was mapped gpologically by Mr. Wynne, 
but Dr. Waagen spent part of a season in examining the rocks and added to the accurate 
determination of the fossiliferous formations, besides distinguishing the triassic group, 
which had previously only been separated on lithological characters.. Unfortunately, 
his health having failed. Dr. Waagen was obliged to leave India without working out the 
paljBontology. He is now occupied in determining the fossils. 

4 As will be shewn subsequently, it is possible Nos. 12 and 13 of the list, the " lower 
Siwalik " and " Nfflian" of Mr. Wy^ne's classification, should rather be classed as middle 
Siwalik (pliocene). See foot-note, p. 512. 



(A 

« / ^. 12 Nahan ? . . Greenish-grey sandstones 600 to 1,000 

H 



482 



GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XX, 



lEuro^ean equivalents, 

yCBETACEOUS 



Name. 



10. OKve group 



Character of rocks. 



Approximate 

thicleness, 

in feet. 



JrEASSIC 



Tbiassic 



9. Variegated g'ronp 



8. Pseudomorphic 
salt crystal 
group. 

7. Ceratite beds 



\Caebonieeeous . 6, 



Carboniferous 
stoue. 



lime- 



SlLtJBIAN ? 



Olive, reddish and white 
sarudstones, slightly cal- 
careous beds and black 
clays with boulders, 
slightly fossiliferous . 150 to 350 

Bed, white and variegated 
sandstones, yellow and 
grey limestones and 
marls, fossiliferous. . 2O0 to 500 

Ejed and pale-coloured 
flaggy sandstones with 
blood-red clays or shales, 
unfossiliferous . 50 to 500 

Grey limestones, calca- 
reous sandstones, and 
grey marls, weathering 
greenish, fossiliferous . 120 to 250 

Grey and maguesian lime- 
stone, calcareous sand- 
stone, and argillaceous 
beds, highlyfossiliferous 300 to 500 
5. Speckled sandstones Speckled, reddish and 
white sandstone, red and 
lavender clay, unfossili- 
ferous , . 250 to 450 
4. Magnesian sandstone Light-coloured magnesian 
sandstone and shales, 
unfossiliferous . 150 to 250 

Black shales with glau- 
conitic calcareous layere 
and sandy bands, fossili- 
ferous . 30 to 150 

Deep purple sandstones, 
unfossiliferous . 250 to 450 

Red gypseous marls with 
thick beds of rock salt 
and thin dolomitic 
layers . 800 to 1,500 

base not seen. 

Scarcely any of these groups, except tlie salt marl at the base, and 
the later tertiary beds at the top of the series, are found throughout the 
range, although the nummulitic limestone is only absent in a few localities 
at each end. No. 3 of the preceding section, the purple sandstone ; 
No. 3, the black silurian shales; No. 4, the magnesian sandstone; 
No. 8, the red sandstones and shales, with pseudomorpbs of salt crystals ; 
and No. 1 0, the olive group, are all wanting in the western part of the 
range : whilst No. 5, the speckled sandstone ; No. 6, the carbonifer- 
ous limestone ; No. 7, the tijiassic limestone ; and No. 9, the Jurassic 
group, are absent to the eastward. Similar diEEerenees may exist between 
the Western Salt Range and the continuation west of the Indus ; one 
formation, the necomian, is certainly found to the^ westward, but not east 
of the river. The important distinction,, however, is the prevalence of 
marine fossiliferous rocks in the western, and of unfossiliferous beds in 



3. ObbUis ? beds 

2. Purple sandstones 
1. Salt marl 



ExtrarPenirisular. ] EOCK-GROUPS OF hazara, etc. 483 

the eastern part of the range, all the principal f ossilif erous formations 
below the olive series, the carboniferous, triassic and Jurassic beds, being 
restricted to the western portion of the area. 

Rock-groups of Hazara, and the Northern Punjab— The 
rocks to the northward in Hazara and near Murree, and in the hills of the 
Northern Punjab near Attock and Peshkwar, differ to a very great extent 
from the Salt Range beds. Although the formations are, in many cases, 
of similar age, marine eocene, cretaceous, Jurassic and triassic rocks 
being found in both areas, there is a marked distinction, both in mineral 
character and in fossils, between the mesozoic rocks in Hazara and 
those in the Salt Range, and no connexion has been traced between any 
of the palaeozoic groups. The nummulitic limestone also exhibits differ- 
ences in the two regions. The mesozoic rocks of the Northern Punjab are 
more closely connected, both by mineral character and fossils, with the 
comparatively distant trans- Himalayan beds of Zanskar, Rupshu and 
Spiti, than with the strata of the Salt Range. 

The following are the formations found in the extreme north of the 
Punjab : — 

Approximate 
European equivalents. Name. Character of roahs. thioleness, 

in feet. 

^ "^ C Limestonis, chiefly dark- 

eoloured, and shales; 
some carbonaceous shales 
Ipcally near the base . 1,700 to 3,000 
Thin-bedded limestones, ( 60 and up- 
unfossilif erous . \ wards ? 300 

Saiidy and rusty lime- 
stones, fossiliferous . 20 
Sandstones, .&c., poorly 

fossiliferous . 30 

liimestoiies, fossiliferous 10 to 100 
Black shales, sandy beds, 
&c., fossiliferous . 30 

Limestones, magnesian in 
part, shales and sand- 
stones, fossiliferous . 2,000 or less 

/Ineba-tbiassio . Siliceous and dolomitic 

breccia, shales, sand- 
stones, unf ossilif erous. 

Tanol (TanIwal) GEorp Quartzites, conglomerates, 

slates, schists and mag- 





EOCBKB 
1 


. Nummulitic 












i< 


JjEASSIO 


1 • Gieuraal beds, 
• [ Spiti shales, &c. 


g Tbiassic 




■ 



eg 

!ziO 



^ t^ / nesian limestones, nn- 

oS \ fossiliferous., 

O J SlllTBIAir ? . Attock slates . Black and grey slates. 



limestones, &c. 
Schistose beds, quartzites and dolomites. 
Metamorphic and crystalline rocks. 



Abnormal boundary of upper tertiaries.— The boundary between 
the paleozoic and mesozoic beds, with the hill nummulitic limestone 



484 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XX. 

on the one hand, and the upper tertiaries, including the beds classed 
a& upper nummulitic, on the other, is very marked, and has the appear- 
ance of a great crushed fault ^ ; it is not clear, however, whether the 
break is entirely due to faulting, or whether it may not in part be 
the result of unconformable deposition subsequently to the consolida- 
tion of the hill area. One of the chief peculiarities of this boundary 
is the apparent inversion of the rocks, the newer beds to the south 
of the junction Having commonly a dip towards the north, as if 
they were inferior in position to the older formations to the northward. 
The line of _ fracture is not always simple ; occasionally it bifurcates or 
consists of two or more parallel lines, nor is it an absolute boundary 
between the two types of tertiary rocks, for the hill variety of the 
nummulitic limestone is .occasionally brought up by faults or exposed 
in crushed anticlinals to the south of the main line of division, and the 
newer tertiary beds are similarly met with in places faulted or let in 
by synclinals to the north of the boundaiy. The most remarkable 
occurrence of the hill nummulitic limestone south of the dividing line 
is in the ridge of Khairi Murat, south-west of Rawalpindi, and 10 
miles south of the main limit of the formation j whilst the newer tertiary 
beds are found represented in the Mir Kulan pass, west of Attock, nearly 
as. far to the north of the junction line, and at Dungagalli, north of 
JVIurree hill station. It should, however, be mentioned that the outliers 
of newer tertiary, beds within the area of the hill rocks are not quite so 
clearly identified as the outlier of nummulitic limestone exposed south of 
the dividing line. 

This discordant junction between the Himalayan rocks and the tertiary 
formations is not confined to the North- Western Punjab, but is traced 
throughout the ranges to the east of the Jhelum in Kashmir territory, 
and thence far to the south-east along tbe southern slope of the 
Himalayas. There is, however, this distinction between the boundary ■ 
in the Northern Punjab and that farther to the south-east, that the 
eocene formations are found superbly developed as the hiU type of num- 
mulitic limestone north of the junction line in the Northern Punjab ; 
whereas to the eastward the rocks on the northern side of the boundary 
appear, except in the Sirmiir area of the Simla region, to be much 
older than tertiary. In the Punjab, too, at no great distaiice to the 
south of the line, fossiliferous beds of similar age to those found in 
the Himalayan area are exposed, although the fossil fauna is in some 
cases different, whilst no similar connection has been traced between the 
Himalayan rocks and those of the Peninsula generally, except iu the 



' Wynne, Q. J. G.S., 1874, p. 



69. 



485 



Extra-Peninsular.] PALEOZOIC ROCKS OP SALT RANGE. 

solitary instance of the Damiida beds in SikMm. One more peculiarity, 
ot the abnormal boundary in the Northern Punjab is that the direction 
here is far more irregular than it is farther to the south-east, and that 
the boundary line leaves the slopes of the Himalayas to which it is con- 
fined to the eastward, and traverses the upper Punjab from east to 
west. 

Commenemg at the western end, the abnormal line of junction 
just described runs along the south of the Afridi hills, and of the 
Chitapahar and Mdrgalla ranges north of the Rawalpindi plain to 
the Murree hills. So far the direction has been that of the ranges, 
nearly from west to east, curving to north-east to the eastward. Near 
the Jhelum, however, the line turns sharply north and runs up the 
valley of the river to Muzafirabad, whence the boundary turns again 
sharply to the south-east along the flanks of the Kaijnag. range in 
Kashmir. 

A similar abrupt boundary between the older hill rocks and the upper 
tertiaiy formations is found along the northern side of the Alps in Europe ; 
and amongst some of the mesozoic rocks there is a singular replacement 
in the mountain zone, both in the Alps and Himalayas, of formations, 
occurring in the plains at no great distance, by beds of corresponding 
age, but differing both in mineral character and fossil fauna. This 
distinction is most marked in the case of the Jurassic rocks,i but there 
is a similar diEEerence in the Trias of the Himalayan and extra- Himalayan 
regions. The palsBozoic beds of- the Himalayan Northern Punjab differ 
also from those of the Salt Kange, but the distinction is of a different 
character, and probably local, for the carboniferous' limestone, the only 
important fossiliferous palseozoic group of the Salt E.ange, reappears in 
Kashmir, and the fauna is similar to that of the mountain limestone so 
widely distributed throughout Europe, Asia, Australia, &c. 

Azoic and palseozoic rocks of Salt Range, &c. — Under the cir- 
cumstances of the case, it appears best to describe separately the palaeozoic 
and mesozoic rocks of the two contrasting areasj and to commence with 
the southern region. As the rocks of the Salt Range alone are well 
known, the description of the older non- Himalayan Pimjab formations 
must be almost confined to the area between the Indus and Jhelum, the 
occurrence of similar beds west , of the Indus being noticed wherever 
their existence has been ascertained. 

1 Waagen, Pal. Ipd., Ser. IX, p. 236 ; Waagen and Wynne, Mem. G. S. I., IX, p. (332) ; 
see also Wynne, Mem: G. S. I., XIV, p. 64; and Wangeu, Deukschrift M. N. Kl. K. Akad. 
Wien, XXXVIII, 1878, p. 12. 



4ij6 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [ Chap. XX. 

In the ranges west of the Indus, the greater part of the area is occupied 
by tertiary rocks, palffiozoic beds occurring, however, in the Chichali range, 
and forming a considerable portion of the Kafirkot hills. In the southern 
part of the Suleman ranges no pre-tertiary formations have hitherto 
loeen noticed, but the occurrence of carboniferous limestone west of Dera 
Ghazi Khan has been inferred from the existence of fragments in the 
beds of streams running from the range. Farther, north, "in the Mahsud 
Waziri country, south-west of Bannu, the higher ranges consist of 
metamorphic and schistose rocks.^ 

Salt marl. — At the base of all the Salt Range sections, throughout 
the range from east to west, there is found a great thickness of red marl, 
varying in colour from bright scarlet to dull purple, and containing thick 
bands of rock salt and gypsum and. a few layers of dolomite. The base 
of this group is nowhere seen, so that the thickness is unknown- j all that 
can be ascertained is that it is not less than lj500 feet. 

The marl itself, which consists of clay, having, carbonate of lime and 
magnesia and a small proportion of sulphate of lime (gypsum) combined, 
is soft and homogeneous, and the only evidence of stratification, as a rule, 
is to be found in the intercalated beds of salt, gypsum, and dolomite. 
In these the strata are frequently seen to be much broken and contorted, 
although no evidence of disturbance can be seen in the marl itself. Be- 
sides the more regular beds, masses of gypsum are frequently irregularly 
dispersed throughout the marl. Many crystals of quartz and a few of 
iron pyrites have been found locally in the gypsum. In one locality in the 
Khewra gorge near Pind Dadun Khan a small quantity of bituminous 
shale was discovered. 

The beds of rock salt to which the group owes its name are very 
rich, some separate bands being as much as 100 feet in thickness, and 
there being frequently several thick beds at one locality. Thus at the 
Mayo Mines of Khewra there are altogether no less than 550 feet of 
pure and impure salt in the upper 1,000 feet of the salt marl : of this thick- 
ness, 275 feet, or one-half, consists of nearly pure salt ; the other half, 
known as halar, being too earthy and impure to be of marketable value 
without refining. The salt of the Punjab, it should be noted, is transport- 
ed and sold in the market as it is dug from the mine, without being , 
refined. The beds of salt, so far as they are known, are most abundant 
in the upper portion of the group, and the principal bands of gypsum 
overlie the salt beds. The "salt bands do not appear to be continuous 

1 Stewart, J. A. S. B., XXIX, 1860, p. 316; Verchere, J. A. S. B., XXXVI, 1867, 
Pt. 2, p. 18. 



Extra-Peninsular. J salt marl. 487 

over a large area, but owing to the manner in which the outcrops are 
usually dissolved by rain, and then covered up by the marl, it is impossible 
to trace the beds. The salt itself is white, grey or reddish, and is frequently 
composed of alternating white and reddish layers, difEering in translucency 
as well as in colour. Some bands are almost pure, others contain small 
quantities of sulphate of lime and chlorides of calcium and magnesium. 
At the Mayo Mines one band has been found, 6 feet thick, composed of 
a mixture of sylvine (chloride of potassium) and kieserite (sulphate of 
magnesia, with only one equivalent of water), and the latter salt prevails 
throughout about 7 feet beneath the sylvine band. Epsom salts (sulphate 
of magnesia, with seven equivalents of water) are produced when water 
from the atmosphere is absorbed by the kieserite, and they frequently 
weather out on the surface, shewing that the magnesian salt is of common 
occurrence in the rock. Glauberite (anhydrous sulphate of soda and 
•Ume) has also been found by Dr. Warth, to whom the discovery of 
most of the salts mentioned is due. 

Owing to the softness of the marl, and to the teiidency of harder 
rocks to slip upon- it whenever it is sufficiently saturated with water 
to destroy its coherence, and also to the salt beds being dissolved 
by water, the rocks of the Salt Range are broken and mixed up in 
the Tnost complicated manner, masses of the marl having been squeezed 
by pressure in places into a position in which they appear to overlie 
more recent rocks, whilst all the n^wer formations are cracked and 
faulted. The detailed geology of the range is consequently very intri- 
cate, and it is not always easy to tell whether dislocations of the strata 
are due to true faults- traversing all the beds, inclusive of the salt marl, 
or whether the displacement is fiierely due to complicated landslips. 

Besides being found from end to end of the Salt Range along the 
base of the sputhem scarps, the salt marl is exposed for a short distance 
beyond (west of) the Indus in the hills behind Kalabagh. The same rock is 
said by Dr. Verchere (and shewn upon his map) to be found at the northern 
and southern extremities of the Kafirkot hills (Rotta Roh of Verchere), 
west of the Indus, and south of Isa Khel, and round the southern base of 
the Shekh Budm peak, a few miles farther west. Dr. Fleming also * men- 
tions the occurrence of red and grey saliferous sandstones under carboni- 
ferous limestone at the northern extremity of the Kafirkot range. 
The salt of the Kohat district is derived from beds of apparently much 
later date than 'those of the Salt Range. 

In a few places, a volcanic rock, having the appearance of diorite, 
but much decomposedj is found in the upper portion of the salt marl 

' J. A. S. B., XXII, 1853, p, 260. 



488 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XX. 

just below the purple sandstone. It occurs in horizontal, lenticular 
layers from a few inches to 6 feet or more in thickness, and contains, 
in abundance, acicular stellate crystals, much decomposed, but apparently 
of hornblend (tremolite or actinolite), together with talc, quartz, and 
calcite ; the latter in small cavities. It is not at all certain whether this 
igneous rock is intrusive or contemporaneous, but its occurrence in 
lenticular beds is in favour of the latter view. 

There can be no reasonable doubt that the salt marl is a sedi- 
mentary rock, although its very peculiar appearance has induced 
some observers to suspect an igneous origin. The red colour, however, 
due to the occurrence of iron sesquioxide, is a normal character of beds 
containing salt. The absence of organic remains is also a common 
peculiarity of saliferous rocks. Whether such formations with their, 
beds of rock salt and gypsum have been deposited in salt lakes under 
process of desiccation, does not appear to be equally generally admitted.^ 
The amount of salt in the beds of the Salt Range is so great, that suc- 
cessive supplies of salt water and repeated evaporation alone could pro- 
duce the thickness of the mineral found in places. 

The geological age of the salt marl and of the next formation in 
ascending order, owing to the absence of fossils, is somewhat doubtful, 
but the presence of a bed, probably of silurian age, at a higher horizon, 
shews that both must be of very ancient paleozoic date. 

2. Purple sandstone. — The group next above the salt marl consists 
almost entirely of. sandstone of a dull purple colour, containing car- 
bonates of both lime and magnesia. The lower fifty' to a hundred feet are 
more argillaceous, and perhaps indicate transition from the marl below ; in 
the higher portion of the group bands of clay are rare or absent. 
Near the top the colour becomes paler. 

This purple band is found throughout the eastern part of the range, 
but it dies out to the westward, or is replaced by an argillaceous conglo- 
merate. No fossils have been found in the present group, which has 
not hitherto been traced beyond the Salt Kange. 

3. Silurian (?). — Throughout the eastern portion of the range some 
blackish sandy shales, of a dull purple colour when dry, overlie the 
purple sandstones, and although comparatively of small thickness, are 
well seen in various cliff sections. Sandy or conglomeratic and calcareous 
bands occur in the group, but the shaly character is predominant. In 
these shales a species of Brachiopod belonging to the genus Obolus, or 
some allied form, has been found. Obohs is a characteristically lower 

' For a discussion of ttiis question, and references, see Wynne, Mem. G S I XI 
p, (141), and XIV, p. 82. ■ • . 



Extra-Peninsular.] CARBONIFEROUS OF SALT RANGE. 489 

Silurian type, but the determination-is not sufficiently certain to fix the 
age of the shale definitely. 

4. Magnesian sandstone. — The next group in ascending .order is 
also confined to the eastern portion of the Salt Range, and consists, in its 
typical form, of a calcareous sandstone, containing magnesia, or of a sandy 
dolomite, (the latter being perhaps the more correct term,) a hard, massive 
cream-coloured rock, conspicuous on the scarps from its massive character.. 
Associated with the harder beds are light-coloUred sandstones, occasionally 
■with oolitic layers or flaggy bands, intercalated with greenish and dark- 
coloured shales. 

To the westward this group becomes chiefly composed of sandstones 
and shales, and is no longer characteristic. No fossils have been found 
in these beds. 

5. Speckled sandstone.— In the Eastern Salt Range the dolomitic 
beds jiist noticed are succeeded in ascending order by a bright red 
argillaceous band, No. 8, and. then by the qlive beds. No. 10 j but to 
the westward other zones are found to intervene, by far the most im- 
portant of which is the carboniferous limestone. Beneath this, however, 
and overlying the magnesian sandstone, there is a group of beds consist- 
ing chiefly of light-coloured sandstones, with reddish or purplish specks 
and patches. With the sandstones, red clays and shales, and some veiy 
distinctly marked lavender and purplish or greyish argillaceous and 
gypseous bands, are intercalated, especially in the higher part and at 
the top of the group. Some traces of copper in the form of small 
nodules of copper glance have been discovered in these shales, but these 
'concretions are of rare occurrence. The sandstones are commonly dis- 
tinguished by the occurrence of small concretionaryt nodules which pro- 
ject in the form of small knobs from the weathered surface. These beds 
are in parts conglomeratic, containing pebbles of crystalline rocks, and 
this conglomeratic character increases to the westward. The speckled 
sandstone group, although well developed throughout the western part 
of the Salt Range, is lost near the Indus. 

Carboniferous. — With the exception of the few Brachiojaoda from 
the supposed silurian shales, the oldest fossils hitherto found in the Salt 
Range occur in tlie carboniferous rocks, from which a very rich and 
characteristic fauna has been obtained. The most prominent beds are 
grey and yellowish limestones, frequently magnesian, and closely resem- 
bling the mountain limestone of the British Isles and other parts of 
Western Europe in texture, colour, and composition, as well as in organic 
remains. At the base of the group, shales often predominate, succeeded 
by reddish and yellowish sandstones with Spirifer, remains of fish, &c., 
the sandstones sometimes containing thick beds of black coaly and sandy 



490 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap, XX. 

shale. The upper part of these sandstones is fossiliferons/ and they 
are succeeded by limestones with numerous Cephalqpoda, Brachiopoda, 
Bryozoa, Crinoidea, &c. The upper strata-are again sandy, and. sometimes 
consist of light-coloured sandstones with coaly shales and argillaceous 
beds intercalated, one thick sandstone bed being crowded with a species of 
Bellerophon. The sections vary in different places ; beds of sandstone 
may occur anywhere, and very frequently the massive grey limestone 
is found at the base of the group resting upon the uppermost lavender 
clays of the speckled sandstone group. 

The carboniferous formation is wanting in the eastern part of the 
Salt Range,* and appears first in the Mlawan ravine near Kallar Kahar, in 
the form of coarse, light-coloured yellowish-grey and greenish sandstones 
with coaly lamina and a band, of sandy calcareous shales. The sand- 
stones contain Broductiis spinosm, and the whole group is but - 60 to 
70 feet thick, resting on the lavender clays of the underlying sub- 
division. To the westward, the carboniferous beds gradually expand to 
a thickness of 450 or 500 feet, forming in many places a steep scarp, and 
maintaining this thickness to the neighbourhood of tbe Indus. Here, 
like most of the other rocks, . they disappear for a space, but they 
reappear, according to Fleming, in the Chichali hills, about 7 miles north 
of Kalabagh, and may thence be traced along the range to near Mulakhel, 
a distance of about 25 miles. At this spot they are covered up by newer 

'The following carboniferous fossils, chiefly JBrachiopoda, are figured on Plate Ij 
the greater portion are from the Salt Range, several being found also in Kashmir and 
other Himalayan tracts, and a few being peculiar to the latter : — 



''igtire 1. 


Spirjfer Tceilhavii. 


Figure 8. 


Prodnctus semireticulatus 


„ 2. 


S. moosakTiailensis J. 


» 9. 


P. costatns \. 


„ 3. 


Spiriferina octopUcata . 


„ 10. 


P. purdoni. 


„ 4. 


Athyris suitiUta. 


„ 11- 


Strophalosia morrisiana. 


,. 5. 


Betzia radialis. 


„ 12. 


Chonetes hardrensis, var. 


„ 6. 


Camerophoria purdoni. 




thiieianus. 


,. 7. 


■ Streptorhynchus cremHria, 


„ 13. 


Axicvlopecten hyemalis. 



" According to Dr. Waagen, the carboniferous rocks of the Western Salt Range are re- 
presented by unfossiliferous sandstones associated with the mngnesian limestone to the east- 
ward. He says (Denkschrift Math. Naturwiss. Class. Kais. Acad. Wiss. Wien, 1878 
XXXVIII, p. 8), writing of the palaeozoic rocks of the Salt Range generally : — " It is very 
difficult to trace the separate bands through the various phases of their transformation from 
west to east, but I have endeavoured to do this at least for the lowest strata of the so-called 
carboniferous limestone, and have found that this formation, proceeding from west to east, 
passes, first, into a coarse-grained white sandstone which stUl contains a very few fossils 
consisting of rolled fragments of coral ; next, into a very coarse conglomerate, with boulders 
the size of a man's head or larger; and lastly, into a homogeneous greyish-green sandstone 
without any organic remains, which again appears to be closely connected with Wynne's 
magnesian sandstone." 



Extra-Peninsular.] . ■ CARBONIFEROUS OF SALT RANGE. 



491 



roeks, but they are again found well developed in the Kdfirkot range, 
south of Isa Khel (Esakhel). Carboniferous rocks do not appear to 
have been recognised under Shekh Budin, but they occur to the north- 
west in the country beyond the British frontier/ as fragments of black 
limestone with Productus are found in the river Kurram, draining the 
southern slopes of the Sufed Koh ; and Dr. Fleming found boulders 
of Producttcs limestone in the streams running from the Suleman Kange 
as far south as the neighbourhood of Dera Ghazi Khan.3 

The following is a list of the fossils hitherto discovered in the car- 
boniferous limestone of the Salt Range and the neighbouring hills, as 
determined by Messrs. Davidson' and de Koninck,* some species con- 
sidered by those authors as probably 'from higher horizons having been 
omitted, as it has been shewn that fossils from triassic, and even from 
higher beds, had been mixed with carboniferous. Three Cephalopoda 
described by Dr. Waagen^ have also been added. Species marked e are 
also found in Europe or America. 



SauricMhys ? indicus. 



Pisces. 

I Acrodusfli 
Acrodus, sp. nov. 



Orthoceras deerescens. 
O. rachidium. 
O. vesiculosum. 
Nautilus flemingianus. 



Cephalopoda. 



Goniatites primas. 

Ceratites carhonarius. 

C. sp. indet. 

Ammonites {Phylloceras) oldhami^ 



Macroclieilus avellanoides. 
M. depilis. 
Sellerophon jonesianus. 



CrASTBEOPODA, 



Bellerophon orientalis. 
JB. decipiens. 
Dentalium herculeum. 



Solenopsis imhricata. 
Pecten crebristria. 



Lameilibeanchiata. 

Peeien asiaticus. 
P. 
Anomia lawrenciana. 



iVerchere, J. A. S. B., XXVI, Ft. 2, p. 21. .. 

2 Q. J, G. S., 1853, p. 348. The boulders of pataozoic limestone f oiirid by Vicary 
Q. J. G. S., 1850, p. 45, in tlie streams near Peshawar are also said by.Verchere to have con- 
tained carboniferous fossils. See foot-note, p. 500. 
' 3 Q. J. G. S., 1862, p. 25. 

4 lb., 1863, p. 1. 

5 Mem. G. S. I., IX, p. (351.) 



492 



GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. 



[Chap, XX. 



Bbachiopoda. 



TerehratulcC Jdmalayends. 

T. subvesicula/ris. 
e Athyris, 7'oyssi. 
e A. subiilita, var. grandu, PI. I, fig. 4. 
e Reizia radiaUs,Ya,r.gr<fndicosta,G.g,5 
e Spirifera striata. 

S. moosakhailensis, PI. I, fig. 2. 
e S. lineata. 

e Spiriferina octopUcata, PI. I, fig. 3. 
e Shynconella pleurodon. 

CameropAoT'ia purdoni, PI. I, fig. 6. 
e Streptorhy'nchus crenistria, PI. I, fig 6 



e Streptorhynclius do. var. robustus. 

S. pectiniformis. 
e Orfhis resupinata. 
e ' Productus striatus. 
e P. longispinus. 
e P. cora. 

e P. semvreticulatus, PI. I, fig. 8. 
e P. costatus, PI. I, fig. 9. 
e P. purdoni, PI. I, fig. 10. i 

P. Jiumboldtii. 
e Sirophalosia morrisiana, fig. 11. 

Aulosteges dalhousii. 



Phyllopora ? cribellum. 
P ? haimeana. 
Eetepora ? lepida. 

Philocrinus comefa. 



Crania, sp. 

Betozoa. 

Fenestella? syhesu 
F. megastoma. 
Polyporafastuosa. 

ECHINODEEMATA.' 

I Poteriocrinus 1 sp. 



e Alveolites septosa ? 
e Michelinia favgsa. 



Anthozoa. 

I e I/ithostrotion irregulare. 
\ e L. basaltiforme. 
CUsiophylltim indicum. 

It has been shewn bjr Dr. Waagen that Dentalium Jierculeum and 
Bellerophon jonesianus occur at a higher horizon than the other fossils 
and iinmediately beneath triassic beds with Gercdites, &c.' Sirophalosia 
morrisiana is a Permian form in Europe, and the Aulosteges has Permian 
affinities rather than carboniferous, but most of the Brachiopoda and 
many of the other fossils are characteristically carboniferous. The occur- 
rence, therefore, of a true ammonite and a ceratite, two forms of Ammoni- 
tidce not previously found in palaeozoic beds, is very remarkable. It was 
certainly believed by Dr. Fleming that he had found Ceratites together 
with the carboniferous Brachiopoday but the species of the former genus 
described from his collections are found in a higher bed, which is really 
of triassic age. The ammonite and the two ceratites discovered by 
Dr. "Waagen, however, were procured by himself, together with Goniatites 
primas, in the upper portion of the group, from a'bed containing several 
typically carboniferous BracMopoda, including Athyris royssi, A. subiilita, 
Spiriferina Qcioplicata, Sireptorhynehus crenistria, Productus costatus, &c. 

The triassic beds appear not only to be perfectly conformable to the 
carboniferous of the Salt Range, but to pass ii^to them, and Dr. Waagen 



Extra-Peninsular. ] MESOZOIC ROCKS. OP SALT RANGE. 493 

has suggested that some of the upper carboniferous rocks are really of 
Permian age. 

Mesozoic rocks of Salt Range, &c.,— Oeratite beds.— Imme- 
diately above the carboniferous limestone, and so closely connected with 
it as not to have been distinguished except lithologically until the rocks 
were examined by Dr. Waagen, there is found in the Salt Range, and 
probably in some of the hills west of the Indus also, a group of marls, 
limestones, and sandstones, containing a distinctly triassic fauna. The 
lowest beds .of this group are generally thin limestones with Ceratites, 
succeeded by a conspicuous thick marly zone, weathering' of a light 
greenish colour. This is overlaid by grey sandstone a,nd flaggy lime- 
stone layers, passing upwards into hard nodular marls, and a succession of 
similar beds forms the upper portion of the group. Some of the bands of 
limestone contain glauconite, and beds of conglomerate occasionally occur. 
In places the formation is chiefly composed of shales and marls. 

Like the carboniferous, the triassic group is only foun,d in the west- 
em part of the Salt Range, the eastern limit of the latter being some 
miles farther west than that of the older formation. Triassic beds are 
found associated with the carboniferous group from the spot where they 
first appear south-west of Naoshera to the neighbourhood ' of the Indus. 
Of their range west of the Indus very little is known ; they certainly occur 
in the range near Kafirkot, as this is one of the localities whence 
Ceratites bucManws was originally procured,^ and other species of the same 
genus were found in the same range by Verchere,^ but it is not so certain 
whether the trias is represented in the Chichdli range. Dr. Fleming, 
however, especially states* that the upper limestone of the carboniferous 
group is more distinct in the Chichali hills than it is west of the Indus, 
and the beds now known to be of triassic age were included by Dr. 
Fleming in the upper portion of the carboniferous. 

Owing to the triassic beds of the Punjab having been at first con- 
founded with the underlying carboniferous rocks,- the fossils of the former 
have not been sufiiciently distinguished for any list to be given.* Cera- 
tites abound, and most oi the species, probably all, described by de Kon- 
jnck — c. flemingianws , C. murcMsonianus, C. hauerianus, C. planulatus, G. 
Ivellianus, C. latifimbriattos, C. bucManus, C. davidsonianus a.vA C. lawren- 
cianus — are from the triassic rocks. Besides the Ceratites, which, are the 
characteristic fossils of the formation, species of Ortkoceras, Anojplo^^hora, 

J Q. J. G. S, 1863, p. 13. 

2 j. A. S. B., XXXVI, 1867, Ft. 2, p. 221. 

3 J. A. S. B., XXII, 1853, p. 264. 

^ As already mentioned in a previbus note, those collected by the Geological Survey have 
been sent to Dii Waagen for examination. 



494 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XX. 

Cardimia, Gervillia, Bhynconella, &c., occur in large numbers; the bivalves 
being especially characteristic of the upper beds. The most remarkable 
fossil, however, is a species of Bellerophon, a genus not known ' to occur 
in Europe in rocks of later age than palseozoic. 

The ceratite beds are probably about the age of the Bunter (lower 
trias), whilst a Myophoria in the overlying limestone closely resembles a 
Muschelkalk species. Above this no distinct fossil zone can be recog- 
nised until the middle Jurassic is reached. 

Pseudomorphic salt-crystal zone. — A group of thin-bedded and 
flaggy sandstones, with intensely red shales and clays, is conspicuous in 
the eastern part of the Salt Range, resting upon the magnesian lime- 
stone, and overlaid by the cretaceous olive shales. Where well developed, 
the upper portion of the present group is argillaceous, the lower portion, 
which is of less thickness than the upper, being chiefly composed of flags and 
sandstone, but there is some variation in the section ; in places the lower 
portion of the group consists of red and variegated clays and shales, 
and where the band is less developed, it consists mainly of flaggy sand- 
stones. On the surface of the sandstones cubical pseudomorphs of salt 
crystals abound, and are so characteristic that they serve to distinguish 
the beds. The band is also remarkable for the bright red colour of some 
of the clays. 

The present group is unfossiliferous or nearly so, only some obscure 
organic traces of doufetful origin having hitherto been detected in it- 
Its position in the series is far from certain, for it is nowhere in contact 
with f ossilif erous Jurassic, triassic, or carboniferous beds ; it rests upon 
the magnesian limestone, and is overlaid by the cretaceous olive group. 
Each of the three groups, although they appear to form part of a 
continuous and conformable series, is well distinguished by mineral 
character and by relations to the other beds ; both the overlying and 
underlying groups being in fact unconformable on the large scale to the 
intermediate salt-crystal formation, for the speckled sandstone in the 
western part of its extent intervenes between the place of the salt 
crystal beds and the magnesian sandstone, whilst the olive group com- 
pletely overlaps the salt crystal formation, and rests upon older forma- 
tions to the westward. The reference of the present group to the trias 
is consequently but little more than a suggestion, and must be considered 
as liable to alteration, should further evidence be obtained. 

The pseudomorph salt-crystal formation is found from Mount Tilla, 
near the eastern Extremity of the Salt Range, to Makrach, north-west of 
Find Dadun Khan, but is wanting at Chambal mountain near Jalalpur. 
West of Makrdeh no such band is found, nor are similar rocks known 
west of the Indus. 



Extra-Peninsular. J JURASSIC GROUP OF SALT RANGE. 495 

Jurassic or variegated group. — The next group in ascending order 
is again a western formation ; it consists of soft wbite and red sandstones, 
with gr§y and yellowish "limestones and yellow marls, and is unknown 
in the eastern part of the Salt Range. The lower beds of this Jurassic 
group rest upon the triassic rocks, and consist of sandstones ..of "varying 
colour, succeeded in ascending order by limestones, clays, and soft white 
sandstones; then come bands of haematiter, several feet in thickness, and 
thinner layers of golden oolite, precisely similar to the rock of Cutch, 
and the upper portion of the group consists of coarse brown sandstones, 
yellow marls, white sandstone and hard grey limestone bands. The 
sandstones are often conglomeratic, and the limestones are most largely 
developed to the westward. Small layers and patches «f bright jetty 
coal occur in places towards the base of the group, and west of the 
Indus near Kalabagh these masses are sufficiently abundant to have 
been worth extraction for the purpose" of supplying fuel to the river 
steamers, but the supply is small ; there is nothing like a seam of coal, 
and no prospect of regular mining operations being successful. The 
patches of coal appear to be merely carbonized fragments of drift wood. 

The Salt Range Jurassic beds are not found east of the neighbour- 
hood of Naoshera ; they begin to appear a little farther west than the 
triassic ceratite strata, and increasing much in thickness continue into 
the Indus. West of that river the same rocks reappear in the Chichali 
hills, where they are well developed and more f ossiliferous than in the 
Salt Range ; they are well seen in the Chichali pass, and extend further 
to the southward round the curve of the range than the carboniferous 
limestone does, but they disappear beneath the tertiary rocks about 
6 miles south of Mulakhel.^ They are wanting .in the northern portion 
of the Kafirkot range, but are said by Verehere ^ to be well developed 
at Shekh Budfn. On Verchere's map, too, Jurassic rocks are represented 
as occurring in the southern part of the Kafirkot range and also near 
Bahadur Khel, north-east of Bannu, but Mr. .Wynne was unable to 
find any in the latter locality, although he searched for them in the place 
indicated. Fleming mentions that Belemnites are brought by natives of 
the country from the Sulemdn Range near Dera Ghazi Khan, and Ver- 
ehere found coral limestone, which he considered probably Jurassic, in 
the Waziri country, west of Shekh Budin.^ 

Until' the fossils of the Salt Range Jurassic beds are examined in 
detail it is not possible to say exactly what members of the Jurassic 

1 Fleming, J. A. S, B., 1853, p. 278. 1 ' 1. c„ p. 19. 

2 J. A. S. B., 1867, p. 15, I 



496 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XX.. 

series are represented. Dr. Waagen has shewn that there is a close 
connexion between the Salt Range oolitic beds and those of Cutchj^ but 
that the Himalayan Spiti shales contain a very different fauna. The 
Kelloway portion of the Chari beds is distinctly represented in the 
Punjab, and some of the higher Jurassic groups also. . Cephalopoda are 
scarce, except west of the Indus, where Ammonites and Beleinmites occur 
rather more abundantly, especially in the fine section of Jurassic beds 
exposed in the Chichali pass. 

Cretaceous (neocomian). — In the Chichali pass, north-west of 
Kalabagh on the Indus, the upper Jurassic beds, consisting of dark olive 
clays and sandstones, with patches of oolitic limestone, pass upward into 
similar beds of» a dark blackish-green colour, containing lower neoco- 
mian Cephalopoda,'^ and these, again, are capped by 60 feet of massive 
sandstone, light coloured above, black below.. This is the only instance 
in which beds with a lower neocomian fauna have yet been clearly 
ascertained to occur in India; upper neocomian Cephalopoda have, as 
already stated, been found in Cutch, and some of the Ammonites from 
Sripermatur were also thought by Dr.. Waagen ^ to resemble neocomian 
species. 

Olive group. — So far, there is no well-marked break in the series of 
mesozoic formations, although several groups may be unrepresented, 
■ but the next formation in ascending order is much more abruptly limited 
below. It is found'to the eastward, and consists of sandstones of various 
shades of dark green, grey> olive, and whitish, olive being the prevailing 
tint. In the upper part some shaly and carbonaceous bands occur, and 
in the lower part dark shales, filled with large boulders of crystalline 
rock.* 

This boulder conglomerate is an extremely interesting formation, for 
it affords a second instance in India (the Talchir group being the first 
example noted) of the characteristic marks of glacial action being found 
in ancient deposits. Other conglomerates, sometimes containing frag- 
ments of rock of large size, are found at a lower horizon in the Salt 
llange, but the only instance in which evidence has been detected of 

" Pal. Ind., Ser. IX, p. 236. 

2 Waagen, Pal. Ind., Ser. IX, p. 245. 

' De'nkschr.-K. Akad. Wise. Wien., 1. c. p. 12. 

* In mineral character, in the occurrence of boulders, and in the evidence of glacial 
conditions at the period of deposit, there is a curious resemblance between this conglomerate 
of the Salt Range ixA the Talchir group of the Gondwana system (see ante, p. 109) ;. and 
Mr. Theobald, the only geologist with any experience of the Talchir beds who has exaurined 
the Salt llange, noticed the similarity (Eec. G. S. I., X, p. 224). 



Extra-Peninsular. J "OLIVE GROUP OF SALT RANGE. 497 

the boulders having been transported by ice is in the olive group. Mr. 
Theobald found ' a rounded fragment of red granite, rather less than a 
foot in diameter, on the surface of this conglomerate, and apparently- 
derived from it ; the block is polished and striated on three faces in so 
characteristic a manner, that very little doubt can exist as to its 
having been transported by ice. The parent rock of this and many 
similar fragments found in the same conglomerate is unknown, no 
crystalline formation is exposed in the neighbourhood of the Salt Range, 
and no red granite, like that of which the boulders are composed, is 
known in the Himalayan region to the northward. Some of the trans- 
ported fragments are much larger than the specimen already mentioned, 
and at Narwari, a mile east of the Collector's house at the Mayo Salt 
Mines of Khewra, one block of red granite occurs 7 feet high and 1 9 in 
circumference ; another large mass lies in the upper part of the Baghanwala 
ravine in the eastern part of the Salt Range. The derivation of these 
two blocks from the conglomerate of the olive group is not, however, 
certain. 

The boulder shales at the base of the olive group are found through- 
out a considerable area in the eastern Salt Range, but they are not co- 
extensive with the overlying sandy beds. In the latter, fossils are 
occasionally found, having for the most part a tertiary facies, but one 
species of Ammonites has been found.^ Large Nautili, Hehinodermata, 
corals, and Terehratula flemmgi are the principal forms occurring. Cardita 
beavmonti occurs, but it is rare. 

The olive group is very closely connected with the tertiary beds ; it 
appears to pass up into them, and to be perfectly conformable to them 
whilst the very irregular manner in which it overlaps various older 
groups shews it to be unconformable to all of them. Although this 
formation is only ftilly developed to the eastward, a thin band is found, 
extending to beyond the Nilawan ravine, and even farther west, at the base 
of the nummulitic group, beds occur probably belonging to the same 
horizon; indeed, ' Dr. Waagen considers' that this group maybe traced 
throughout the range and across the Indus, where it rests unconformably 
on the neocomian. 

It is almost certain that this olive group of the Punjab Salt Range 
is the same as the olive Cardita heaumonti beds of Sind ; the similarity 
in position and mineral character is striking, and some of the fossils are 
identical. 

' Rec. G. S. I., X, p. 224. The block in question is in the Geological Miisctim, Calcutta. 
2 W^aagen. MS. notes. 
'MS. notes. 

G 1 



498 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXI. 



CHAPTER XXI. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

THE PUNJAB HILLS WEST OF THE JHBLUM (conlinued) . 

Palseozoic and njeBozoic rocks of Northern Punjab — Crystalline and metamorphic . — Schis • 
tose series — Attock slates — Carboniferous and infra triassic (Tauol group) — r Trias (in- 
cluding Rhsetic) — Jurassic j Spiti shales — Gieumal sandstone — Cretaceous — Tertiary 
beds of Punjab generally — Thickness of tertiary series — Distribution of eocene beds — 
Mari and Bhiigti hills — Snleman Range near Dera Gbazi Ehau — Chichffi hills and Salt 
Kange — Kohat district -^ Salt and gypsum — Clays, limestones, and sandstones above 
the salt — Northern Potwar and Murree hills — Nummulitic limestone of Northern 
Punjab or hill limestone — Upper tertiavies, Siwaliks, &c. — Distribution — Palaeontology 
— Post-pliocene deposits of the Northern Punjab — Erratics — Indus floods — Possil 
shells. 

Palseozoic and mesozoic rocks of Northern Punjabi— Before 

proceeding to the tertiary rocks o£ the Salt Range and of iihe Western 
and South-Western Punjab, it will be well to notice the few details hither- 
to recorded concerning the older formations of the Alpine and Northern 
Punjab, comprising Hazara with part of the Murree hills, the Gandgarh, 
Margala, and other ranges to the south-west of HazSra, the Chita Pahar, 
Attock and Cherat hills near the Indus, and the Afridi ranges to the 
westward. Of the hills of Yusafzai and Swat, north of the Peshawar 
plain, scarcely anything is known. All the ranges mentioned are iiorth 
of the peculiar line of dislocation and inversion, already noticed as 
the northern limit of the upper tertiaries j and all are composed of 
rocks, which are closely allied to those of the Himalayas, and are for 
the most part distinct in mineral structure and in organic remains from 
the strata of corresponding age in the Salt Range. The rocks of 
Mount SirbS,n, near Abbottabad in Hazara, present in many respects an 
epitome of the geology of the Northern Punjab, and several of the 
details in the following descriptions are taken from a study of the rocks 
at that locality by Mr. Wynne and Dr. Waagen. ■^ 

Crystalline and metamorphic. — The lowest locks in Hazara are 
the syenite, porphyritic granitoid gneiss and greenstones of the Pakli 

1 Mem. G. S. I., IX, p. (331). For additional details of the geology of the Northern 
Punjab, see Wynne, Rec. G. S. I„ VI, p. 59 ; VII, p. 64 ; X, p. 126 ; and Q. J. G. S., 1874, 
p. 61 ; also Waagen, Eec. G. S. I., V, p. 15 ; and Dentschr. Kaii'. Akad. Wiss. Wien., Math. 
Naturhist. Kl. 1878, p. 10, A sketch is also given in the Punjab Gazetteer, the details for 
which were furnished by Mr. Wynne. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] attock slates. 4,99 

■valley, Susulgali, Agror, &c. To what extent these rocks are metamor- 
phosed sedimentary beds, and whether any or all o£ them are intrusive, is 
uncertain. The porphyritic granitoid rock with large twin crystals of 
felspar bears some resemblance to the central gneiss of the Himalayas. 
Very little more is known of these formations than that they occupy 
large areas in Northern and North-Eastern Hazara, and that they probably 
extend thence to the westward. They are a continuation of some of 
the crystalline rocks forming the axis of the Pir Panjdl. 

Schistose series— Between the crystalline rocks and the Attock 
slates in Hazara there is found an immense thickness of quartzites, 
dolomites, and schistose beds passing down into gneiss. .These rocks 
apparently rest upon the Attock slates, but the dip seen may be 
an inversion. They occupy the greater portion of North-Western 
Hazara and: extend down the Indus valley below Turbela. Neither the 
crystalline nor schistose formations of Hazara extend into the other 
hills of the Northern Punjab within the British boundary, but both 
are doubtless continued in the mountains of Yusafzai. 

Attock slates. — The next formation has a much wider range. It 
consists of dark-colom-ed slates with limestones, some sandstones, and a 
few intrusions and perhaps contemporaneous beds of basic ti-ap intercalated. 
These rocks are particularly well seen in the hills on the Indus south of 
Attock, and have consequently received the name of Attock slates. 
They are generally remarkable for their dark colour ; they are irre- 
gularly cleaved, and seldom, if ever, afford good slates for roofing or 
similar purposes, although their thinly laminated layers are sometimes 
employed. The limestones vary in texture, being sometimes compact, 
and occasionally brecciatedj they are often altered, and many are 
dolomitic. They are not often crystalline, although a conspicuous 
band of sub-crystalline white marble belonging to the present forma- 
tion extends for some distance along the southern face of the Attock or 
Mirkulan hills and reappears in the Gandgarh range. The only fossils 
yet obtained are too obscure for identification, and even such traces of 
organisms as have been noticed are excessively rare, the slate beds 
themselves being unf ossiliferous. 

In parts of Hazara the slates become altered and slightly schistose, as 
in the neighbourhood of Gandgarh and Haripur. In these hills the 
typical dark Attock slates are absent or so much altered that they cannot 
be recognised, the common rock being talcose, silky and schistose from 
partial metamorphism. Many greenstone dykes and intrusive masses of 
syenite are found in the schists. In Upper Hazdra and Mianjain, 
limestones are rare or wanting in the slate series, but they abound in the 
Gandgarh hills and also near Attock, a few bands of trap being also 



500 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [ Chap. XXI. 

found in the Gandgarh range. At Mount Sirb^n and around Abhott- 
abad the group consists of slates of a dark colour, sometimes black or 
purple, with bands of greenish grey sandstone. 

Nothing certain is known as to the age of these slates,^ except that 
they must be palaeozoic, for they are inferior in position and quite un- 
conformable to the inf ra-triassic group near Abbottabad in Hazara. They 
are very probably identical with the slates of the Pir Panjfil classed as 
Silurian by Lydekker,^ 

The Attock slates occupy a considerable area in Hazara, and form 
a broad belt between the tract of crystalline and schistose rocks to the 
north-west and the newer formations to the south-east ; one basin of 
stratiiied rocks, including limestone, resting upon the gneissose and 
schistose series of Northern Hazara, amongst the high mountains near 
the frontier, may also contain representatives of the present formation. 
The belt of Attock slates continues to the south-west in the 
Gandgarh hills and in the east and west ranges forming the Cherat and 
other hills south of Attock and Nowshera, and extending to the west- 
ward until the beds are lost near Julozai, beneath the gravels of the 
Peshawar plain. To the west of Peshawar the rocks are unknown, but 
the same beds may very probably reappear in the Khyber Pass. North 
of the cantonment of Nowshera, in the plain of Peshawar, the slates are 
said to be found near Hoti and Mardan at the base of the Yusafzai 
mountains. 

' The suggestion has been repeatedly made by Dr. Waagen, Mr. Wynne and others 
that the Attock slates are probably represented by beds contaming lower silurian fossils in 
the Khyber Pass. It is not, however, quite certain that the fossils found by Falconer and 
Vicary in that locality were silurian. The statement that " lower silurian fossils from 
the Khyber hills were found by Dr. Falconer in the gravel of the Cabul river " was made 
by Colonel (then Captain) H. H. Godwin-Austen in 1866 (Q. J. G. S., XXII, p. 29). The 
paper in which this statement was made appears to have been drawn up from field notes 
without means of access to published information, and no reference is supplied to any 
original authority. No notice of the discovery of such fossils can be found in Falconer's 
published writings, and the only original statement in print we have been able to detect is 
in a foot-note to a paper by Captain Vicary (Q. J. G. S., 1850, p. 45). Vicary himself ob- 
tained " a small Spirifer, Ortkis in abundance, a Terebratula and some Poh/paria " from 
limestone boulders in the water-courses near Peshawar. In a foot-note he adds : " Dr. Fal- 
coner obtained specimens of Spirifer, Ortkis, and other palasozoic forms from these moun- 
tains several years ago." Also in a note by Sir K. Murchison, prefixed to Vicary's paper, the 
discovery of palaeozoic fossils is mentioned. Now it is quite possible that the fossils collected 
by Falconer and Vicary have been examined and their age determined, but as this is not 
stated, some doubt remains whether the fossils may not have been carboniferous, as they were 
said to be by Verchere (J. A. S. B., 1867, Ft. 2, p. 21), the OriAis being perhaps Orthisina or 
StreptorliA/nchus crenisiria, formerly included in the genus Orthis. The chief reason 
for suggesting the possibility of these fossils having been carboniferous, and not silurian, is 
that carboniferous rocks are known to occur in the Suleman Range, whilst no fossilif erous 
silurian beds have hitherto been discovered in that direction, 

2 Kec, G. ^. L, XI, pp. 39, 63, &c. 



Extra-Peninsular.] trIas of hazara. 501 

Carboniferous and infra-triassic.— Carboniferous beds have not 
as yet been detected with certainty in any locality in the Northern 
Punjab ; a specimen of Froductus humboldti was found close to Hassan 
Abdal, by Mr. Lydekker, in a loose block of limestone, but with 
this exception the carb&nif erous limestone has not hitherto been traced 
in the Punjab north of the Salt Range and west of the Jhelum, 
and it is uncertain whence the block in question was derived. The 
age of the rocks resting upon the Attock slates at Mount Sirban, near 
Abbottabadj^ has not been definitely ascertained ; the rocks in question are 
quite unconformable to the underlying formation ; they are overlaid by 
the triassic group, and comprise two divisions, the lower. consisting of red 
sandstones, red shales and red siliceous dolomites, with, at the base, a red 
argillaceous breccia f uU of fragments derived from the underlying rocks ; 
the upper division composed of dolomites only, lighter in colour than the 
lower beds, often highly siHceous and of considerable thickness. Above 
these upper dolomites, again, are some quartz breccias, sandstones and 
shales, all containing heematite : these may belong either to the present 
or the next group. 

These beds have hitherto only been noticed at Mount Sii-bdn and in 
other places in Hazara ; they may of course be in part carboniferous, but 
no fossils have hitherto been detected in them. 

In South-Western Hazara there is an immense thickness of quartzites, 
slates, conglomerates, sandstones and magnesian limestones, all somewhat 
altered and quite unfossihferous. The relations of these beds are obscure ; 
they appear, however, to overlie the Attock slates. For these rocks 
Mr. Wynne has proposed the name of Tanol (or Tanawal) group, from a 
district in the western part of Hazara near Amb. They form a broad 
belt, in places 8 miles wide from north to south, extending nearly east 
and west fromi the neighbourhood of Abbottabad to the Indus, and 
probably comprise altered representatives of the infra-triassic rocks of 
Mount Sirban. 

Trias (including Rhsetic). — The next zone is chiefly composed of 
dark limestone, black or grey, distinctly bedded, with thick zones of 
massive dolomite, sometimes containing numerous laminae of opaque white 
quartz, shales, siliceous breccia, haematitic clays, and sandstones. Near 
Abbottabad, where the series is complete, dolomites form the lowest beds, 
and are followed by thin-bedded f ossihferous limestones ; the dolomites 
are however, frequently absent. Above the fossiliferous limestones 
come quartzites and dolomites of considerable thickness, and above 
these again thin-bedded limestones and slaty shales, fossiliferous, but 

' Mem. G. S. I.. IX, p. (335). 



502 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXI. 

containing different organisms froin those in the underlying portion of the 
group. The lower sub-division contains two chaaraoteristic f ormsj Mega- 
lodon and Sicerocardinm, together with (Memmiziaj GervilUa, &o., the 
upper beds contain numerous Nerineee, together with forms of Neritopsis, 
Astarte, Opis, Nueula, Leda, Ostrea, &c. The Ibwer beds are apparently 
representative of the "' Para limestone " or upper triassic of Spiti, and 
the higher sub-division of the lower Tagling limestone/ or rhsetie of 
the same area. ■ •' 

The triassic rocks are well developed in Hazara between Murree and 
Abbottabad, and extend from the Moehpuxa mountains to beyond the 
trunk roadj reappearing in the Chita Pahar^ but the outcrops are greatly 
complicated by disturbance and faulting, especially in the neighbourhood 
of Murree itself and to the northward. Very little is known with 
certainty as to the extension of triassic rocks to the south-westward^ 
as it is difficult and often impossible to distinguish the different forma- 
tions in a mass of unf ossiliferous contorted limestones and other rocks, 
comprising representatives of triassic, Jurassic and nummulitic beds. The 
triassic strata are well developed in the spurs from the Hazara moun- 
tains east of Hasan Abdal and Haripur. Here the rocks contain but few 
fossils, although sufficient to enable their age to be determined. • The 
triassic group is also probably represented by massive contorted limestones 
in the Chita Pahar range and detached ridges to the north along the 
southern side of the ranges south of Attock and Nowshera, and extending 
westward into the Afridi hills. 

Jurassic, — Spiti shales. — Above the triassic beds there appears to 
be a break in the series, and in Hazara the next formation in ascending 
order consists of jet-black shales with more or less ferruginous concretions. 
These beds have been identified both by mineral character and fossils with 
the upper Jurassic " Spiti shales," of the Himalayan region, but do not 
appear to be very thick. Amongst the fossils. Ammonites, Belemnites, 
and various LamellihrancMata have been found, some of the most 
characteristic Spiti species found in the Punjab being Ammonites [Oppelia) 
acucinctus, A {FerispAmctes) frequens, and Belemnites gerardL The 
second and last named are also found in Cutch, though in different 
zones, the former being known from the Umia group, the latter from 
the Chari sub-division. 

The Spiti shales in HazSra are conspicuous from the contrast they 
afford to the thick mass of limestones ranging from palaeozoic to nummu- 

1 See chapter XXVI, on the Himalayan rocks. The loWer Tiigling limestone was classed 
by Stoliczba, Mem. G. S. I., V, p. 66, provisionally as lower lias, hut he pointed outthat it 
was the equivalent of the Kossen heds, commonly classed, as rhretic. The Para limestone, 
at first classed as rhsetie, was subsequently united to the trias. 



Extra-Peninsular.] cretaceous of hazara, etc. 503 

litic, and forming the bulk of the rocks. Like the underlying trias, 
the Jurassic beds are greatly broken up by faults and dislocations. 
The Spiti group is well seen on Chamba hill, north of Murree, and has 
hitherto been found in no district of the Punjab, except the higher 
parts of the South Hazara mountains. 

Gieumal sandstone, — Above the shales in many places, but not in- 
variably, there is found a thick-bedded sandstone, yellowish-brown and 
ferruginous externally, but bluish-grey when freshly fractured. Occa- 
sionally the Spiti shales are wanting, and the rusty sandstones alone 
represent the Jurassic formation. The sandstone closely corresponds in 
mineral character to the Gieumal sandstone of Spiti, and has been 
identified with it by Dr. Stoliczka.^ As a rule, in Hazara, the present 
formation is not fossiliferous, but some limestones and earthy beds with 
a few bands of calcareous sandstone can be traced for a long distance 
on the spur running west by south from the Murree hills to the north of 
Rawalpindi, and traversed by the Grand Trunk Road at the M^rgalla 
pass, and appear to be a continuation of the Gieumal sandstone, or they 
may represent both this band and the Spiti shales. At the Margalla 
pass and in some other places, the rock aboimds in Trigonia ventricosa, ^ 
the fossil already noticed as characteristic of the Umia beds in Cutch 
and of the uppermost Jurassic zone near EUore. 

The Gieumal sandstone has not been clearly recognised in the Mount 
Sirban section, but may be represented by calcareous sandy beds in the 
upper portion of the Spiti shales. The sandstone is well exposed 
north of Murree, in places,— always being, however, much crushed and 
disturbed. 

The Jurassic beds have been traced to the south-west along the 
Margalla spur, and again south of the Chita Pah arrange, south of Camp- 
bellpur, to the Indus, and farther west beyond the Indus near Nilabgash 
into the Afridi country, where the same beds are seen north of Kohat, 
but very little is known of the exposures. The Spiti shales may perhaps 
be chiefly represented by limestones, and the Gieumal sandstone by the 
beds with Trigonia ventricosa, but the characteristic appearance of the 
Himalayan beds is no longer to be traced in this direction. 

Cretaceous. — In Mount Sirban, resting upon the sandy and calcare- 
ous strata at the top of the Jurassic group, there is found a bed, 10 to 20 
feet thick, of a different kind of calcareous sandstone, ferruginous and 
weathering of an orange colour. This bed abounds in fossils, mostly 
coated with iron oxide, and comprising AmmoiiUes of cretaceous forms, 

' Scientific results of the second Yarkand Mission, Geology, p. 11. 
2 See woodcut, ante, p. 261. 



504 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXI. 

all belonging to the cristaii and inflati groups, besides species of 
Ancyloceras, Anisoceras, Baculites- and large Belemnites, The species 
have not been determined, but the fauna has a gault facies. 

Above the fossiliferous zone there is a group of thin-bedded limestones 
of grey colour, apparently destitute of organic remains. This may be 
either cretaceous or nummulitic. It is succeeded by the nummulitic 
limestone. Cretaceous rocks have hitherto been clearly recognised in 
only one other locality in the Northern Punjab, north of the Salt Range 
and Chichali pass beds ; this is close to Kohat, where a band of ferru- 
ginous sandy limestone contains some fossils, recognised as of cretaceous 
age by Dr. Waagen. 

Tertiary beds of Punjab generally.— Hitherto, in dealing 
with the different palaeozoic and mesozoic rocks of the Punjab, it has 
been sufiScient to describe isolated outcrops of comparatively small ex- 
tent ; but in treating of the nummulitic limestone and the associated 
rocks, and to a still greater extent when describing the upper tertiary 
formations, much larger areas will come under notice, and it will 
therefore be better to describe each of the two great sub-divisions of the 
tertiary series, the older tertiary, or eocene, and the newer tertiary, 
including the representatives of miocene and pliocene formations, through-- 
out the whole Punjab area, commencing at the south. It has already 
been stated that the miocene marine, or Gaj group of Sind, has 
not yet been recognised farther north, and although there is very 
little doubt that the upper eocene Nari group is represented in the 
Punjab, for some of the characteristic species of nummulites have been 
brought from Punjab localities, no attempt has yet been made to 
discriminate the difEerent zones of nummulitic limestone in the northern 
region by means of fossils. The Eanikot beds, as already noticed, are 
only known to exist in Lower Sind, but they may be represented by 
rocks of similar character at the base of the nummulitic limestone in the 
Salt Range and elsewhere. The only Sind groups which have hitherto 
been clearly traced to the northwards are the Khirthar or nummulitic 
limestone proper, and the Manchhar or Siwalik. 

Thickness of tertiary series — The total thickness of the upper 
tertiary, or Siwalik formation of the Punjab cannot be much less than 
15,000 feet, and the Murree beds, into which the upper tertiaries pass, 
represent about half as much more, so that the whole tertiary series, 
including the nummulitic limestone and its associated beds, where fully 
developed, comprises little, if at all, less than 25,000 feet of strata. Of 
this enormous thickness, all, except " the lower 3,000 or 3,000 feet, is 
destitute of marine remains. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] tertiary beds OF PUNJAB. 505 

Distribution of eocene beds.— The nummulitic limestone and 
its associated beds form the higher ranges of the Mari and Bhugti hills 
north of the Sind frontier, and extend throughout the Sulemdn range, 
apparently without interruption, from the Sind frontier to Pesha- 
war. Eocene rocks are said not to occur in the Shekh Budin and other 
ranges south and south-west of the Bannu plain,^ but they occupy a 
very large tract to the northward of the same plain in the Kohat 
district. They are well developed in the Chichdli and Shingarh range, 
and they possibly form a great portion of the Af ridi hills south of 
Peshawar. East of the Indus, the nummulitic group is extensively de- 
veloped in the Salt Range, and forms the small range of Khairi Miirat 
south-west of Rawalpindi. The rocks underlying the Murree beds along 
the west side of the Jhelum valley belong to the same group, but are 
poorer in limestone than usual, whilst north of the line of abnormal 
boundary already mentioned as traversing the Punjab north of Rawal- 
pindi and Kohat, and forming the northern limit of the upper tertiaries, 
the nummulitic limestone is again largely developed in the Murree and 
Hazara hills and Chita Pahar, and forms a great band across the 
province from the neighbourhood of Abbottabad and Murree to the 
Af ridi range south of Peshawar. In this area the limestone differs from 
its representative further south, as will be explained presently. A few 
details of the sections in each area will shew the character of the 
formation. 

Mari hills.— In the Mari and Bhtfgti hills north of Jaeobabad, the 
nummulitic limestone forms a number of east and west anticlinal ridges. ^ 
No lower beds were noticed, and although sandstones rest upon the 
limestones, it is probable, from the description, that none of them belong 
to the Nari group, but that they are all Siwalik. 

Suleman range near Dera Ghazi Khan. — Not far north of the 
Mari hills is the section of the Suleman range near Dera Ghazi Khan de- 
scribed by Mr. Ball.* Here, again, there is no trace of anything which 
can be identified with the Nari sandstones, the beds resting upon the num- 
mulitic limestone being described as dark-brownish sandstones in beds of 
no great thickness, alternating with bright red, greenish and grey clays, 
probably Siwalik. The lowest beds seen in the whole section of the range 
consist of a great thickness of sandstones and shales with very few 
fossils, succeeded by from 1,000 to 2,000 feet of massive limestone with 

1 Verchere, J. A. S. B., 1867, XXXVI, Pt. 2, pp. 13-16, and map. 

2 Vicary, Q. J. G. S., II, p. 260. 

3 Bee. G. S. I., VII, p. 145. 



606 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXI. 

nummulites, &c. On the eastern slope of the hills the nummulitic 
limestones are much mixed with sandy and shaly beds, but a few 
miles further to the westward the whole band consists of limestone. 
The main range of the Suleman consists of the sandstones and shales 
underlying the limestones. With the shales some very thin layers of 
coal are occasionally associated, but none are known to exceed about six 
inches in thickness, and consequently none hitherto discovered are of any 
commercial value. 

The fossils found in the sandstones are all tertiaiy species,' and one, 
Ostrea flemingi, is in Sind a characteristic Ranikot form. There appears 
good reason for assigning all the beds noticed-to the eocene group, the 
lower sandstones and shales probably representing the lower Khirthars of 
the Upper Gaj section described in the last chapter. The nummulitic 
limestone is evidently a continuation of that forming the Khirthar range 
in Sind. 

Ohichali Hills and Salt Range. — No full description of the eocene 
rocks in the northern portion of the Suleman range has been published, 
and it will be as well therefore to proceed at once to the Salt Range and 
its continuation in the curved ridges of Cbichali and Shingarh west of 
the Indus. A section of the latter range, taken near Sultan Khel, and 
about 1 5 miles north-west of Isa Khel, has been given by Dr. Verchere,^ 
whilst the Salt Range rocks have been fully described by Mr. Wynne. 
The section appears much the same throughout, and has a considerable 
resemblance to that already described in the Suleman range. There is 
a bed of limestone several hundreds of feet thick and usually of a light 
colour, resting upon sandstones, shales and clays, with lignite. The latter 
pass downwards into the cretaceous olive group, but immediately upon 
the limestone comes the upper tertiary group, which, contains no marine 
fossils. The Gaj and Nari beds of Sind appear to be unrepresented ; there 
is evidently a break above the nummulitic limestone, and the overlying 
formation is unconformable, and rests in places upon a denuded surface of 
nummulitic rocks. The unconformity is also shewn by overlap in several 
places at the eastern extremity of the Salt Range, and, as already 
noticed, in the ranges near Shekh Budin, and by the circumstance that 
the lowest bed of the upper tertiary sandstones sometimes contains 
pebbles of nummulitic limestone, as for instance near Fadidl, west cf 
Mount Tilla. 

1 The species quoted in Mr. Ball's paper were for the most part only approximately 
determined. 

2 J. A. S. B., 1865, XXXIV, Pt. 2, p. 42. 



Extra-Peninsular.] KOHAT DISTRICT. 507 

The inferior shaly portion of the nummulitic group consists of soft, 
variegated shales or clays, more or less sandy, with occasionally a pisolitic 
ferruginous band, resembling laterite, at the base. A similar band is found 
in a corresponding position in the Sub-Himalayan sections, as will be 
shewn in the next chapter. Many of the shales and clays are pyritous 
and decompose readily on exposure, the decomposed shales being burnt 
and employed in the manufacture of alum. The so-called coal of the Salt 
Range occurs in the upper part of this lower sub-division, associated 
with gypseous shales, and is really a lignite of variable purity, found 
chiefly in thin strings and beds of no great horizontal extent, but 
occasionally in rather thicker seams, some being as much as three to 
three and a half feet in thickness. The principal localities are Bhdg- 
anwala, Pid and Samundri. Like most of the tertiary lignites, that of 
the. Salt Range is pyritous, and frequently falls to pieces or takes fire 
spontaneously when exposed to the air. Similar lignite is found in the 
Chichali and Shingarh hills west of the Indus. Beneath the coaly shales 
are white, red and olive sandstones and clays, occasionally with marls or 
limestone full of f oraminif era, and, in the western Salt Range, a thick 
band of nummulitic limestones occurs immediately below the beds with 
lignite. 

The main band of nummulitic limestone is usually compact, grey or 
white, occasionally chalky, the upper portion being generally purer and 
less mixed with shaly or marly bands than the lower. The whole group 
is fossiliferous, the nummulitic limestone containing the usual fossils, 
whilst bands containing nummuHtes and other foraminifera occur 
amongst the lower shales and sandstones, but more commonly remains 
of plants, chiefly dicotyledonous, are found in the latter. 

The similarity of the section in the Salt Range with that of the Laki 
range in Sind is very gi'eat ; the actual beds are thicker in Sind, but in 
both localities there are olive shales believed to be of upper cretaceous 
age at the base, then variegated sandstones, alum shales and clays with 
plant-remains, lignite and gypsum, followed in ascending order by 
nummulitic limestone. Further comparison of the fossils will, however, 
be necessary, before the group beneath the nummulitic limestone in the 
Punjab can be safely correlated with the Ranikot beds of Sind. 

Kohat district.-rThere is another region in the Upper Punjab 
where the eocene rocks are weU developed, and where they have been 
fully examined and described; this is in the Trans- Indus salt region of 
the Kohat district,^ and the section here exposed, although only a few 
miles distant from parts of the Salt Range, differs in some important 

Wynne, Mem. G. S. I., XI, pp. (101)— (330). 



508 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXL 

points from that just described. The following is abridged from 
Mr. Wynne's summary of the rocks exposed : — 

Thickness in feet. 
JJp'per sandsiones.—Soit, grey sandstones, clays and 
PiioCENE AND ^ Conglomerates . . . • • • • • 500 to 1,500 
MioCBSE ,< Lower sandstones.— 'R&rieT grey and purple sandstones, 

bright red and purple clays, slightly calcareous and 

pseudo-conglomeratic bands 3,000 to 3,500 

Upper wummulUic. — Nummulitic limestone and some 

shaly bands 60 to 100 

Med olay zone, or lower nvmmuKtie. — Eed clay, lavender 
Eocene J coloured near the top, occasionally with Nummulites. 
The lower portion of the red clays in places is partly 
or wholly replaced by fossiliferous sandstones, thick 
greenish clays and bands of limestone all containing 
Nmnmmlites 150 to 400 

SOypsu/m. — White, grey or black gypsum with bands of 
clay or shale 50 to. 300 
EocTc salt. — Thick beds of salt, almost pure. The base 
not seen 300 to 700 

(? 1,200) 

The region examined is the hilly tract north of the Bannu plain and 
of the Chichali hills, and extending from the Indus, on the east, to the 
British frontier. The ground is traversed by a series of east and west 
ranges, chiefly formed of crushed and broken anticlinals of the nummulitic 
limestone and the associated rocks. 

Salt and gypsum. — The rock salt and gypsum at the base of the 
tertiary series in the Kohat region are very important and remarkable. 
The salt consists of a more or less crystalline mass, usually grey in 
colour, with transparent patches, and never reddish, like the salt of the 
Salt Range. A few earthy bands occur, but the portion of the whole mass 
too impure to be worked for commercial purposes is but small, although, 
there is no attempt at refining the salt, which is exported for sale in the 
form in which it is mined. In some places the uppermost layer is dark- 
coloured, almost black, and bituminous. The quantity of salt is some- 
thing marvellous j in the anticlinal near Bahadur Khel alone rock salt 
is seen for a distance of about eight miles, and the thickness exposed 
exceeds 1,000 feet, the width of the outcrop being sometimes more 
than a quarter of a mile. Hills, ^00 feet high, are sometimes formed of 
pure rock salt. As a rule, the salt contains sulphate of lime (gypsum), 
but none of the potassium and magnesium salts of the Salt Range beds. 

Above the salt come gypsum and clays, as in the Salt Range, but 
the colours, white and grey, are very different, and the whole appearance 
of both salt and gypsum so distinct from those of the ancient salt marl, 
that although there is no indication of salt beds at a higher level in 
the Salt Range itself, and although the outcrop of. the salt marl close 



Extra-Peninsular. J NORTH EEN POTWAR AND MURREE HILLS. 509 

to KdlaMgh on the Indus is only 18 miles from one of the Kohat rock 
salt regions at Nundrukki, still as a great series of mesozoicand palseozoic 
beds intervenes, throughout the Salt Range, between the nummulitic group 
and the salt marl, whilst in Kohat. the former rests with apparent con- 
formity upon the gypsum and sg,lt, it appears probable that the salt-bearing 
rocks in the Kohdt district may belong to a very different horizon from 
that occupied by the same minerals in the Salt Range series. It is by no 
means certain that the Kohat salt and gypsum are eocene, but, in the 
absence of any evidence to the contrary, it appears best to class them 
with, the nummulitic beds immediately overlying them. 

Clays, limestones, and sandstones above the salt.— Overlying 
• tte gypsum, there is usually found a thick bed of deep red clay, the eocene 
age of which is proved by the occasional occurrence of nummulites in 
the upper portion. Sometimes the clay is wanting, and apparently re- 
placed by clays, marls, and limestones of a grey or olive colour, and con- 
taining nummulites, but the replacement is not clearly proved. Above 
the red clay zone come earthy limestones, clays, and shales, with 
nummulites. The main band of limestone is very much thinner than in 
the Salt Range, but is as usual massive, pale-coloured, and full of 
Nummulites, Alveolince, 8fe. The overlying formation, consisting of 
sandstones and clays, in which dark red and purple colours predominate, 
exceeds all the eocene beds in thickness, and is probably, like the 
sandstones and clays overlying the mimmulitie limestone of the Salt 
Range, really of much later age than the limestone on which it rests. 

Pebbles of nummulitic Hmestone are said^ to be found in the lowest 
beds of the sandstone, and some reptilian bones, (not determined,) 
siliceous fossil wood, and a few ill-preserved ribbed bivalve moUusca have 
been found, but no characteristic organic remains. The beds resemble 
Murree beds and pass upwards into undoubted newer tertiary (Siwalik or 
Manchhar) strata of the usual character, the red colours becoming rarer, 
and the usual drab grey sandstones and orange or drab clays being the 
prevailing rocks. 

Northern Potwar and Murree Hills. — Along the northern side of 
the Rawalpindi or Potwar plateau, and up the Jhelum valley for a long 
distance north of Murree, there runs the line of abrupt boundary, already 
noticed as intervening between the tertiary formations to the southward, 
and the Himalayan or Alpine rocks, inclusive of the hill type of nummulitic 
limestone, to the northward. It is clear that the tertiary beds seen 
immediately south of the limit in question must be newer than those 
to the northward, for marine limestones are intercalated with the lowest 
clays and sandstones seen south of the boundary, aud it is difficult to 

' Wynne, Mem. G. S. I., XI, p. (170). 



510 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXI. 

understand how two totally different formations could have been depo- 
sited contemporaneously on the opposite sides of a line along which there 
is no evidence of any ridge of older rocks to separate the two areas of 
deposition. Besides, as has already been stated, the hill form of num- 
mulitie limestone occasionally appears a little to the south of the dividing 
line, being brought to the surface either by faults or anticlinals, and the 
newer tertiaries are similarly let in by synclinals, whether faulted 6r 
not, to the north of the same limit. Such outcrops are at no great 
distance from the main boundary, and the rocks are so greatly disturbed 
and contorted that their relations are obscure. In this case, as elsewhere, 
the additional knowledge of the distribution of fossils in the older 
tertiary formations afforded by the study of the Sind rocks has not yet 
been applied to the Punjab region, whilst the complicated disturbance of 
the rocks and the comparative paucity or bad preservation of organic 
remains in the latter country render the correlation of the vai'ious strata' 
a work of great difficulty. 

Perhaps the most interesting section hitherto noticed is that already 
referred to, occurring in the anticlinal ridge of Khairi Milrat about 
12 miles south-west of Rawalpindi. Here clays and sandstones with bands 
of limestone are seen resting conformably iipon a massive clearer lime- 
stone ; the former rocks being evidently identical with the upper 
nummulitic beds found south of the main boundary, whilst the latter 
represents the hill nummulitic limestone. 

The eocene beds of the Upper Punjab, south of the line of disturbance, 
consist of sandstones and shales, very frequently of a red colour,- and 
comprising, towards their base, occasional bands of limestone or marl, 
with mmimulites. Associated with the sandstones, some gypseous shales 
and bands of gypsum are found, but no trace of the Kohat salt. As 
already stated, these lower tertiary sandstones are cut off abruptly to the 
north, and it is not always clear whether they rest upon the hill limestone 
or are faulted against it ; doubtless the junction, whether conformable 
or unconformable originally, has become complicated by faulting and 
crushing, but the whole line of boundary has the appearance of a gigantic 
fault. There is a gradual and complete passage, to the south of this line 
of fracture, from the beds containing nummulites into the upper tertiary 
Siwalik rocks, with mammalian bones. As wiU be noticed in the chapter 
on the Sub-Himalayan area, very similar beds occur at the base of the 
tertiary series along the southern foot of the Himalayas in the Eastern 
Punjab, but in this area representatives of the lower nummulitic 
limestone are shewn to exist by the fossils occurring. 

The rocks at the hill station of Murree have been repeatedly de- 
scribed. The station itself is built on grey and purple sandstones and 



Extra-Peninsular.] HILL NUMMULITIC LIMESTONE. 511 

deep purplish clays, with occasional concretionary bands. These are the 
Murree beds of Mr. Wynne, and whilst their lower strata may corre- 
spond to the Dagshai sub-division of the Sirmur or eocene series in the 
Simla hills, it is probable that they represent higher groups also, and they 
may even comprise strata corresponding to all the Sub-Himalayan beds 
of the Dagshai, Kasauli and Nahan groups between the Subathu and 
the Siwaliks proper. It is evident that no definite line can be drawn, 
either in the neighbourhood of Murree or to the west of Rawalpindi, 
between the eocene beds and the newer tertiaries. Immediately north- 
west of the ridge on which Murree stands, similar grey and red sand- 
stones and shales, underlying the Murree beds, contain bands of nummul- 
itic limestone. These 'rocks ai-e supposed to represent in part the Subathu 
beds at the base of the Sirmur group,^ but it is probable that the lower 
portion of the Subdthn group must be older and representative of part of 
the hill limestone of the Punjab. The bands with nummulites at the base 
of the Murree beds are traced at intervals from the country west of the 
Jhelum to the Potwar, and thence to the westward to beyond the Indus; 
Hill nummulitic limestone of Northern Punjab. — The "hill 
nummulitic limestone,^^ as it is frequently called, consists of a great thick- 
ness of dark-bluish grey or blackish limestones, with brownish olive shales. 
The rock is generally fcetid and massive, with nodular bands, but thick 
zones of pale-grey splintery limestone also occur. Stratification is some- 
times distinct, sometimes obscure. Near Dungagali, between Murree and 
Abbottabad, some red clays are associated with the hill limestone and 
appear to be interstratified.^ These Himalayan and North Punjab beds 
differ from the nummulitic limestone of the Salt Range and Sulemdn 
mountains, and from the Khirthar limestone of Sind, in colour and 
structure ; but it is far from clear how far the distinction is due to the 
amount of disturbance and pressure experienced by the" northern rocks. 
The intercalation of shales with the limestone takes place also in Lower 
Sind and Baluchistan. Similar dark-coloured nummulitic limestones are 
found in Baluchistan, also in a disturbed region, and all the differences 
hitherto noticed between the hill nummulitic rocks and their represent- 
atives in the Salt Range and elsewhere, except colour, might be attributed 
to the different amount of disturbance that has affected the two regions. 
No distinctions have been shewn to exist between the organic remains 
• See next chapter. The tertiary rocks of the Snh-Himalayan ranges are thus classed 

in descending order :— 

„. ,., fSiwalik. 

1 Newer; S.wahk [^^^^^^ 

C Kasauli. 

2 Older ; Sirmur ) Dagshai. 

/ Subathu, 

3 or .Minn M.S nntpR. 



513 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. CChap. XXI, 

found in the two, forms of limestonCj except that the hill nummulitic 
beds contain much fewer and smaller organisms. 

The hill type of nummulitic limestones forms a broad belt throughout 
Hazara and the Murree Hills, from the neighbourhood of Abbottabad, 
past Murree, and along the spurs traversed by the grand trunk road 
north-west of Rawalpindi. The same rock forms the greater part of 
the Chita Pahar Range, and is continued west of the Indus in the 
Nilabgash and Af ridi hills, which are chiefly composed of this formation. 
This great belt and the parallel band of the Attock slates to the 
northward are indeed the leading stratigraphical features of the Northern 
Punjab, the intervening formations being less prominent, although 
largely developed locally. 

Upper tertiaries, Siwaliks, &c. — It will be unnecessary to devote 
much space to the description of the upper tertiary rocks, since, despite 
the enormous area covered by them, and their great thickness, they 
present a nearly uniform character, and differ but little from the rocks 
of the same age to the southward in Sind, already described in the last 
chapter, and from the typical Siwalik series of the Sub-Himalayan region, 
to which the next two chapters will be devoted. 

The passage from the lower into the upper tertiaries throughout the 
Northern Punjab, so far as the ground has been suflBciently examined, 
is transitional, with the exception of the boundary to the north of the 
Salt Range, where, as has already been shewn, the upper tertiary rocks 
rest unconformably on the nummulitic limestones. But even in this area 
there is an apparent conformity in dip and strike, the bedding planes of the 
upper tertiary strata being parallel to those of the nummulitic limestone, 
and it is not quite certain how many sub-divisions of the tertiary series 
are wanting.^ Apparently the lower portion, if not the whole of the 
Murree beds, including the nummulitic bands at their base, — that is, all 
those rocks classed as older tertiary that are exposed immediately to the 
south of the line of discordant junction traversing the Northern Punjab, — 
are unrepresented to the south of the Rawalpindi plain. It is probable 
that a similar deficiency of the middle tertiary beds exists on the flanks 

■ The lowest beds resting upon the nummulitic limestone of the Salt Range are con- 
sidered hy Mr. Wynne to represent the Murree beds, but Mr. Theobald, who has identified the 
same strata with the middle Siwalik group of the Sub-Himalayan region, considers that 
even the NAhan group is wanting on the northern slopes of the Salt Range. The 
fact, determined by Mr. Theobald, that an ossiferous band may be traced not 100 feet 
above the nummulitic limestone, and that amongst the bones discovered in this band are 
those of Mastodon latidens and HMnoceros paleeindicits, renders it probable that the beds 
resting upon the limestone must be either upper miocene or pliocene, and consequently 
must belong to a higher horizon than that of the Murree beds generally. Still as the 
limits of the Murree beds are vague and undefined, it is quite possible that strata, elsewhere 
classed wi h the Murree beds, may be represented north of the Salt Ranget 



Extra-Peninsular. J tJPPER TERTIARIES. 513 

of the Suleman Range^ and it is highly probable that the sandstones 
and clays resting upon the numraulitic beds in Kohdt are also, as already 
suggested, separated by a considerable break in time from the typical 
eocenes. 

Throughout the Punjab, as in Sind, the upper tertiary rocks consist of 
a great sequence of sandstones and clays, surniounted in places by a mass of 
coarse conglomerate of variable thickness. No satisfactory sub«divisions 
have been established in this series, although it is certain that a large 
period of geological time is represented ; for the mammalian fossils from 
the lower portion in the Punjab, as in Sind, include much older forms of 
life, and resemble those peculiar to the miocene of Europe, whilst in the 
upper beds living genera are common, although the species are extinct. 

The transition from the Murree beds to the upper tertiaries or 
Siwalik series is marked by a diminution in the prevalence of red 
clays and sandstones, and by the appearance of bright grey sandstones 
in great abundance. The sandstones become softer, concretionary 
bands more numerous, and a few pebbles derived from the nummulitic 
limestone and Murree beds, together with rounded fragments of quartzite 
and crystalline rocks, make their appearance. Higher in the section 
the red clays disappear, and are replaced by orange and grey clays, and 
there is a gradual passage upwards into the massive conglomerates, 
which form in many places the upper portion of the whole series. 
The pebbles of these conglomerates appear to have been derived from 
the same Himalayan rocks as those now furnishing the materials for the 
gravel and boulder beds of the Punjab rivers, and it is consequently evident' 
that the rivers in the Siwalik period ran from the north, as they do now. 

Distribution. — Commencing, like the eocene rocks, at the southern 
extremity of the area, the upper tertiary beds form several ranges of 
hills north of the Upper Sind frontier, between the desert plain of 
Jacobabad and the ridges of nummulitic limestone ; and, to judge by 
Vicary's section,^ the higher beds reappear in the valleys between the 
parallel anticlinal ranges of older tertiary limestone, precisely as in Lower 
Sind. Passing northward along the boundaiy of the Derajat, the 
Siwaliks, although forming only a narrow belt on the flanks of the 
Suleman Range in the Siri Pass, west of Dera Ghazi Khan, comprise 
two well-marked sub-divisions ; of these the upper, consisting of conglo- 
merates and coarse sandstones, 500 to 600 feet thick, rests unconform- 
ably upon the lower, composed of sandstones with bright red, greenish, 
and grey clays, and attaining a thickness of at least 3,000 feet, and 
probably more.^ The only sections recorded have been too hurriedly 
traversed for more details to be determined, and it must remain for the 

> Q. J. G. S., II. 1846, p. 261. I 2 Ball, Eec. G. S. I., VII, p. 150. 



514 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXL' 

present uncertain whether any of the intermediate groups of Sind are 
represented on the flanks of the Suleman Eange. 

Passing northward along the Suleman, the belt of upper tertiary 
beds appears perfectly continuous. The whole of the Pyzii and Shekh 
Budin ranges are believed to consist of newer tertiary strata, with 
the exception of the peak of Shekh Budln itself, and all the north- 
western slope of the Kafirkot range near the Indus is of the same 
Siwalik formation. A broad tract to the west of the Bannii plain, the 
Waziri country north of Bannri, and the western slopes of the Shingarh 
Range are similarly composed, so thatHhe newer tertiary beds entirely 
surround, and probably underlie, the Bannii plain.^ North and north-east 
of this the upper tertiary formations cover a large portion of the Kohat 
district west of the Indus, and nearly the whole of the great Rdwalpindi ' 
plateau to the east of the river, being thrown throughout into a series of 
great wave-like undulations, the anticlinal and synclinal axes of which 
have a general east and west direction. Older rocks appear to a large 
extent in the anticlinal ridges west of the Indus, more sparingly to the 
eastward, and to the north the upper tertiary area is bounded by the 
Murree and upper nummulitic beds south|of the great line of dislocation. 

Palaeontology. — It is unnecessary to enter into any detailed 
account of the organic remains, almost entirely vertebrate, found in the 
newer tertlaries of the Punjab, because a large number of the same 
species have also been discovered east of the Jhelum, and it will be better 
to deal with the Siwalik fauna as a whole. Owing to the similarity of 
the beds composing the upper tertiary series throughout, and the compli- 
cated disturbance which the rocks have undergone in many places, it is 
very often impracticable to determine the precise horizon at which any 
particular fossiliferous beds occur, and with a large proportion of the 
bones hitherto collected, the original locality has been imperfectly 
recorded. It is therefore impossible to draw up anything like a trust- 
worthy list of the species found in any sub-division of the newer tertiary 
series ; aU that is known with certainty is that the majority of the 
bones found in the Punjab are from the higher portion of the strata. 

In one case only has the peculiar miocene fauna of the Sind Lower 
Manchhar beds as yet been detected in the Punjab, and in this case 
the exact locality is unknown, but it was in the neighbourhood of 
Kushalghar, 40 miles south of Attock.^ Remains of Mastodon,, Dmo- 
therium pentepotamice, ListriodonpentepotamicB, Rhinoceros, Merycopotamus^ 
Lorcatkeriwm, Sanithenum scMagintweitii, and Amphicyon palaindicus 

1 These details are from Verchere's map, J. A. S. B., 1867, XXXVI, Pt. 2, and from 
the Atlas sheets of the Great Trigonometrical Survey. 

2 Lydekker, Rec. G. S. I., IX, p. 92. The fossils were first noticed by Falconer, Pal. 
Mem., I, n. 415. 



Extra-Peninsular. J EERAtics. B15 

were found. There can be no question that the beds yielding the above 
fossils must be at a lower horizon than those from which the bulk of 
the Siwalik fauna has been procured. It is, however, far from improbable 
that some of the supposed Siwalik forms come from the same lower 
horizon, as certain species belong to older forms of life than the major- 
ity of the Siwalik vertebrates. 

Post-pliocene deposits of Northern Punjab— On the great 
plains of Rawalpindi (the Potwar), Bannii, and Peshawar, extensive 
deposits of gravel, sand and silt exist. Little is known about later deposits 
in the Peshawar and Bannii plains, but those of the Potwar present some 
features of interest. The surface consists of an alluvial, rather light-brown 
clay, often containing kunkur, and passing in places into fine silt. 
Beneath this alluvial deposit there is a mass of gravels and sand, some- 
times enclosing boulders of large size. The boulders are not, however, 
confined to the pebble beds; many have been observed imbedded in 
fine silt, and this circumstance, together with the great size of. many 
of the blocks found, and the distance to which they have been trans- 
ported, has induced several observers to attribute the transport of the 
larger masses to ice, whether floating down a river or in a lake. It has 
been suggested that the Potwar may have been converted into a 
lacustrine basin in post-tertiary times by the elevation of the Salt Range 
and the ridges west of the Indus. There is but little evidence in favour 
of this view, but still it is not impossible, for, although the pebble beds 
underlying the finer silt of the Soan valley appear too coarse for 
lacustrine^ deposits the silt may be, in part at least, a later deposit. 

The post-tertiary deposits are of course quite unconformable to the 
Siwalik rocks, which had been greatly disturbed and denuded before the 
later beds were formed. These later beds themselves, however, are 
occasionally found dipping at a considerable angle, due, it is said, to 
original deposition. The pebble beds are found around Rawalpindi 
and in the neighbourhood of the Indus; they overlie the Rhotas 
fforge near Jhelum, occur on some of the Salt Range plateaus, and 
cap the mountain above Kalabdgh on the Indus. They are found at a 
considerable elevation above the present river beds, some fragments of 
crystalline rocks in the neighbourhood of the Indus, apparently brought 
down by the stream, having been observed 3,000 feet above the river. 

Erratics. The large blocks attributed to ice flotation appear to 

have been derived from the Himalayas. They are abundant along the 
Indus as far up as Amb, on the left bank of the river, in the gorge of 
the Sirun and for some miles below Attock, around Jhand about 20 miles 
farther south, and farther still to the southward near the village of Trap 
, T?„. „-l^!f.inn»1 details conoerninjf these alluvial deposits of the Potwfir, see Wynne, 



516 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-THE PUNJAB HILLS. [Chap. XXI, 

on the lower coutse of the So^n. Some of the blocks have been mea- 
sured nearly 50 feet in girth and others are even larger. In places such 
blocks have been found 20 miles away from the banks of the Indus. 

Indus floods. — The Indus, as is well known, is subject to extra- 
ordinary floods, due to a portion of the upper valley being blocked by 
landslips or, according to some, by glaciers, and to the sudden destruction 
of the barriers thus formed. Such floods occurred in 1841 and 1858, 
and have doubtless taken place in past ages.^ In the flood of 1841, the 
waters of the Cabul river were checked and forced backwards for 20 miles 
by the rise of the Indus ; and Drew has shewn that the lake in Gilgit 
formed by the landslip in 1840-41 must have been 35 miles long, 
and upwards of 300 feet deep. Enormous quantities of detritus must be 
carried down by the violent floods produced by the bursting of such 
barriers, and if, as appears probable,^ the low temperature of the glacial 
epoch was felt in India, such lakes at an elevation of 5,000 or 6,000 feet 
above the sea would have been deeply frozen in winter, and large blocks 
from the river bed and dam might easily have been embedded in the ice ; 
glaciers also in the North- Western Himalayas must have been more ex- 
tensive than they now are, and the formation of lakes dammed up by 
glaciers was probably of common occurrence. Shaw ' has called attention to 
the occurrence of heaps of stone and gravel of all sizes brought 80 miles 
down the Shayok, one of the tributaries of the Upper Indus in Ladak, by 
blocks of ice ; and a similar action on a larger scale on the Indus may 
easily have supplied the erratics of the Upper Punjab. If the Potwdr 
was a lake, the dispersion of the erratic blocks is easily understood ; if 
not, the area over which the masses of rock are found may be due to 
variation in the course of the Indus, and to the reversed flow of its 
tributaries in great floods. 

Fossil shells. — In one locality near Fatehganj a number of land 
and fresh-water shells were found* in silt, apparently the same as 
that in which boulders are elsewhere imbedded. The species found, 
including Lymnea rufescens, Flcmorbis exustus, Paludma bengalensis, 
Bythinia piilchella, Melania tuherculata, Bulimus insularis, Opeas gracilis, 
&c., are the same as are now found common in the country, and it 
appears doubtful if they would have survived any very great diminu- 
tion of temperature. At the same time it is possible that the beds 
containing shells may be of later date than those with boulders. 

1 For accounts of these floods, see Cunningham's " Ladak " ; Montgomerie, J. A. S B., 
1860, p. 128; Shaw, "High Tartary, Yarkand and Kashghar," p. 433, &c., and Appendix, 
p. 481 J and especially Drew, " Jummoo and Kashmir Territories," p. 414, Numerous 
references to other accounts are given hy the last-named writer. 

: See ante, p. 372. 

3 1. c, p. 486. 



Extra-Peninsular.] SUB-HIMALAYAS. 517 



CHAPTER XXII. 

EXTEA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

SUB-HIMALAYAS. 

Scanty materials — Provisional limits of Himalayas — Map — General features — Three 
main divisions. The Sub-HiIhaIiAyas : provisional conclusions — General features — 
Early views — General range of deposits — Classification — Petrology — Chiefly of 
fresh- water origin — Structural conditions — Faults — Flexures — Middle and terminal 
Sub-Himalayan regions — The Simla region — Order of description. The Sibmi5b 
ABBA — Unity of the formation — Sub4thu, Dagshai, and Kasauli groups — Relation 
to the older rocks — Section at Subdthu — Eastern limits of the Sirmnr area — East- 
ernmost outlier of the nummulitic group. SlWAllK SbeieS: Nahan abea — The 
Nahan-Siwalik boundary — The Nahan-Sirm6r boundary. The Jumna-Gan&es abea 

— Composition in relation to the great rivers — Identification of beds in the two zones 

— Suggested connexion of the two zones in this area. The GahbvtaIi-Kumatjn abea, 
The KefIii abea. The Sieeim-Bhuxan abea. Ufpeb Assam abea. 

Scanty materials. — Information regarding the Himalayas would 
probably be the first demand made upon an Indian geologist out of 
India. In the country itself it has been quite the reverse, and so it 
happens that up to date this information is most scanty. Regular con- 
tinuous work in the mountains has not yet been attempted by the 
Survey, or has only just been begun, in the hope that circumstances will 
permit of its being continued. The whole information upon which to 
form an outline of this great geological region consists of Captain 
R. Strachey's account of a portion of Central Tibet, Stoliczba^s observations 
in Western Tibet, and some casual seasons' work, by members of the 
Survey, in the Lower and Sub-Himalayan ranges, besides isolated observ- 
ations of more or less doubtful validity by various travellers, whose 
principal objects of interest were not geological. As presenting some 
very marked uniformities of structure, the Himalayas as a whole have no 
doubt a continuous history ; but it would be impossible to make it out 
from such scant data as exist. Each portion of the Himalayan area has 
more intricate and intimate relation to the history of the whole moun- 
tain region than has, for instance, any particular basin of Gondwana 
rocks to the history of the peninsular area, so that a description of any 
part of the mountain chain is more dependent upon a knowledge of the 



518 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXII. 

whole. We can only attempt to indicate such main features as have 
been detenjained, and to make some conjectures on their possible con- 
nexion. This very preHminary condition of our information must be 
our excuse for a somewhat irregular method of presentation. 

Provisional limits of region. — The area to be included under the 
word " Himalaya'' needs to be specified. As originally applied and accepted 
by excellent authorities, it would mean only the southern face of the 
Tibetan plateau ; whereas of late by geological writers the name has fre- 
quently been used as equivalent to extra-peninsular India, with undefined 
outer limits. Both senses are about equally inconvenient, in opposite ways. 
Although the name may be retained in its narrowest sense to distinguish 
the Himalayan range proper from other ranges of the same apparent 
system, it is also, as that of the principal, or at least the most famous 
member of the group, commonly understood to indicate the whole of this 
more or less parallel system of ranges. In these senses we shall here 
speak of the main line of snowy peaks between the Brahmaputra and 
the Indus as the Himalayan range, and of the Himalayan region as 
extending from the plains of India to the -northern scarp of the Tibetan 
plateau. It is very possible, or even likely, that this geological region 
or mountain system, may hereafter be very largely extended ; but until 
this is done upon a basis of observation, and to express a meaning 
more defined and substantiated than any as yet proposed, it would be 
more confusing than instructive to adopt a wider definition than that 
given above. For example, the tertiary rocks of the Potwar and of 
Hazara (between the Jhelum and Indus) are shewn to be continuous 
with those of the Sub- Himalayas, and to have been affected by the 
same disturbing causes ; yet it is quite necessary to distinguish by 
name the two regions, as afEected by total and abrupt contrast in the 
direction of disturbance, and of the resulting surface-features. It is 
certainly most convenient to restrict the word "Himalaya" in this definite 
intelligible sense, more or less in agreement with the meaning spon- 
taneously attached to it, rather than adopt a new name for the familiar 
ground, and extend the old one to a meaning without assignable limits. 

The geological contrast between peninsular and non-peninsular India 
is a very striking one : in the former the sedimentary rocks are almost 
exclusively of fresh-water formation, while the corresponding deposits in 
adjoining areas are marine; again, the stratified rocks of the penin- 
sula, from the Upper Vindhyan time, have undergone comparatively 
little compression or alteration, while very late formations in the 
adjoining area are universally more or less contorted. We can, however, 
keep in mind the peculiar characters of the peninsular rocks without 



Extra-Peninsular. J three divisions OF Himalayan region. sig 

extending the term "Himalaya" on the grounds of such general features 
as marine origin, and disturbance, regardless of special distribution and 
structure. 

Map. — In the map attached to this work, the Himalayan area is 
correspondingly more incomplete than the peninsula. The blanks are 
larger, and such indications as are given are less exact, the lines having 
been more or less conjecturally extended between the observations made 
on separate routes. Some important observations by Mr. Lydekker in 
the Kashmir region that are noticed in the text came too late for inser- 
tion on the map. 

Greneral featvires. — So far as known, the Himalayas exhibit more 
regularity of structure than the Alps. There are, no doubt, exceedingly 
knotty points to be unravelled, but the continuity and similarity of 
structure which prevail over large areas greatly facilitate description, and 
give a promise of an ultimate understanding. On a good physical map, 
the regularity of the boundary between the mountain region and the plains: 
of Northern India is a very marked feature ; a steady gentle curve, 
convex to the west-south-west, without any interruption from spurs or 
semi-detached masses. Throughout great distances the main features of 
the mountains, both of structure and configuration, conform to this outer 
boundary, and thus we may conveniently take up the description in 
successive zones. 

Three main divisions. — Three such zones or natural divisions, of 
permanent significance, can be indicated. There is on the south a con- 
tinuous fringing belt of lower ridges, appropriately known as the Sub- 
Himalayas, and composed of tertiary rocks. Between this marginal zone 
and the great snowy range there lies, throughout the whole length of 
the Himalayas to as far west as the Sutlej, a broad area, some fifty 
miles wide, consisting of irregular ridges of moderate average elevation, 
from 5,000 to 8,000 feet — some ranging up to 12,000 — all largely made 
up of crystalline metamorphic rocks, in very obscure relation with some 
unaltered formations, the latter being for the most part of very 
uncertain age. This great area, so well defined by position, and 
characterised throughout by extreme complexity of structure, may 
appropriately be distinguished as the Lower Himalayan region. 
Although of course the most accessible and the most frequented 
part of the mountains, it is the least understood. The great snowy 
range of the Himalayas proper belongs to what may be conveniently 
distinguished as the Central, or Tibetan, division of the mountains, which 
is characterised on the large scale by several parallel axes of gneissic 
rocks and intervening synclinal basins of little-altered, fossiUferous 
formations. To the west of the Sutlej; and actually on the strike of the 



520 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUIJ-HIMALATAS. LCJiap- XXIL 

great Himalayan rangej the hills next to the tertiary zone have thia 
latter type of structure, and must be classed in the central division. 
This feature and the corresponding disappearance of the whole Lower 
Himalayan region at the Sutlej point to a fact which must be constantly 
kept in mind — that our observations and descriptions 'refer chiefly to 
the (partially) terminal portions of the great Himalayan region, most 
of the middle Himalayas, in Nipal and to the north of it, being 
unknown to us ; so that the divisions and characters adopted in the 
north-western portion may be inapplicable to the mountain region as a 
whole. It is, however, to be observed that the fundamental structural 
characters, from which the history of the mountains is to be made out, 
may be better exhibited" where dying out than in the more elevated 
middle regions, where a deeper and intensified phase of disturbing 
conditions would be exhibited. 

The Sub-Himalayas.^ — Provisional conclusions.— The Himalayas 
being generally supposed to have been upraised in late tertiary times, 
the study of the tertiary rocks ought to be of special importance, as 
embracing the most active period in the history of the mountains. Since 
our sketch of this history cannot be very formal or conclusive, it may 
assist comprehension to indicate at the outset the provisional views sug- 
gested by the observations that have been made, up to the present, in 
the Sub- Himalayan region. If these points do not specifically agree 
with current anticipations, they quite bear out the important part taken 
by the tertiary formations, and the mention of them here will give a 
meaning and an immediate interest to the descriptive details. Some of 
these provisional conclusions depend more or less upon single sections, 
on the report of a single observer, and the verification of them should be 
an object with every competent explorer, either to confirm or confute. 
To provoke this desirable service we will give dogmatic prominence to 
the crucial points. It will be shewn — 

(1) , that immediately preceding the lower tertiary (nummulitic) 

period, the area defined as the Lower Himalayas must have 

been exposed to denudation as part of a land of doubtful 

configuration ; 
{%), that the very ancient, slaty rocks of that land upon which, after 

depression, the marine nummulitic deposits were laid down, 

had then undergone little or no contortion, where they are 

now most contorted; 
(3), that during the deposition of an immense thickness of the 

upper tertiary deposits, the Himalayan region was already 

' For published descriptions of the Geology, see Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Ft. 2 ; Eec^ G, S. I., 
IX,p,49. 



Extra-Peninsular.] early VIEWS ON SUB-HIMALAYAS. 521 

defined as an area of denudation in which the great rivers 

were the same as are now found there ; 
(4), that the topmost beds (Upper Siwalik) of the Sub- Himalayan 

tertiary series have undergone extreme disturbance ; 
(5), that the operation of the forces by which this total of results 

was accomplished must have been most gradual. 
General features. — By abrupt difference of elevation and by contour, 
the Sub-Himalayan hills are everywhere easily distinguishable from the 
much higher mountains to the north of them. They very commonly 
present a steep face to the south, with a more gentle inner • slope ; and 
as a general rule they consist of two ranges, separated by a broad fiat 
valley, for which the native name ''dun" (doon) has been adopted in India. 
When the outer of these ranges is wanting, as is the case below Naini 
Tal and Darjiling, the whole geographical feature might escape notice, 
the inner range being confounded with the spurs of the mountains. 
Prom a point of view whence all the surface features of this inner 
range can be seen, it will, however, generally be observed, that the hills 
are not branching extremities of the spurs from the main range, 
but true longitudinal flanking ridges, separated from the higher 
range by a line of gaps and gorges ; or at least there will always be 
noticed a rapid increase of elevation immediately inside the tertiary 
boundary. 

Two places are known, on the Bhiitan frontier, where even the inner 
Sub-Himalayan range is wanting, and the marginal slopes of the plains 
reach to the base of the Lower Himalayan region ; but with these 
exceptions the fringe of tertiary rocks is, so far as we know, continuous 
for 1,500 miles, from the Brahmaptitra to the Jhelum, which are the 
limits of the Himalayan region proper, as here restricted. West of the 
Sutlej, where the Lower Himalayan area ends, there is an equivalent 
increase in the width of the Sub-Himalayan zone, made up by a repeti- 
tion of low ridges and intervening duns. 

Early views on Sub-Himalayas. — Soft, massive sandstone is the 
prevailing rock of the Sub-Himalayan ranges, but associated in very 
variable proportions, according to position, with conglomerates and clays. 
Owing apparently to some suspected connexion with the rock-salt deposits 
of North- Western India, these sandstones were considered by the early 
observers to belong to the New Red Sandstone of the European scale of 
formations. The Vindhyan rocks on the south of the plains were 
reo-arded at the same time as Old Red Sandstone ; and on the strength of 
these identifications borings were recommended, i£ not actually under- 
taken alono" the margin of the plains, to find the carboniferous formation 



622 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap, XXII. 

with its coal.i It was the discovery of the famous Siwalik fossils in 
the outer range of the hills that established the true age of these rocks. 
Sir Proby Cautley (then Lieutenant Cautley, r.a.) seems to have 
been the original discoverer of those fossils, prior to 1832 ^ ; and the great 
collections were subsequently made by him and Dr. Falcdner, and 
described by the latter, chiefly in the Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis and 
Palaeontological Memoirs. Long after the publication of the tertiary 
age of the Siwalik rocks, until the examination of the ground by the 
Survey, the sandstones of the inner range flanking the mountains were 
still regarded as secondary. 

. General range of these deposits. — The whole of the Sub-Hima- 
layan zone is formed of these tertiary rocks, with the exception of some 
inliers of palaeozoic limestone in the north-west, where the area is broadest. 
At this western extremity of the range, on the Jhelum, the whole 
sedimentary series undergoes an abrupt change of strike, and the tertiary 
formations, without break of continuity, thus sweep into the Potwar 
(the upland north of the Salt Range) and across the Indus, passing down 
into Sind. 

In the other direction, the breach of continuity mentioned in the 
Sub- Himalayan hills on the Bhtitan frontier applies also superficially to 
the rocks, no outcrop of the sandstones having been detected in this 
position. It is thought that they are only concealed, having been 
denuded, and then covered up by the diluvial gravels ; but it may be 
that they are altogether wanting, for in this neighbourhood, in Lower 
Assam, detached hill masses, formed of gneissic rocks of the peninsular 
type, approach nearer than anywhere else to the Himalayan border. At 
one spot, indeed, on the east bank of the Raidak (E. long. 89° 47'), 
Mr. Mallet observed a small boss of this southern gneiss far within the 
tertiary zone, and only a few hundred yards from its inner boundary. ^ 
The sandstone intervened between this boss and the very different 
metamorphic rocks of the mountains; its contact with the gneiss 
forming the boss was not seen, but we may presume that the relation is 
one of simple superposition, and that we have here the local extra- 

' In Notes on the Economic Mineralogy of the HUl Districts of the North- Western 
Provinces of India, by E. T. Atkinson, b.a., p.e.o.s., Bengal Civil Service, 1877, the 
following remark occurs : — " But it has never yet been settled whether coal does or does not 
exist in Kumaun, and until this question has received the attention due to it, the eventual 
absolute success of the Kumaun mines must remain problematical " (p. 7). There is no 
further allusion to coal, to indicate upon what facts this hope of its occurrence is based. 
It may be only a survival of the primitive idea mentioned in the text. 

' Jour. As. Soc, Bengal, Vol, I, p, 249, 1832. 

3 Mem. G. S. I„ XI, 44 



Extra-Peninsular. J CI^ASSIFICATION. 523 

Himalayan base of the tertiary series^ the natural junction of such 
extreme types of rock indicating an equivalent geological break, even 
the nummulitie beds being absent. These gaps in the tertiary zone do 
not, however, quite correspond with the nearest approach of the southern 
gneissic rocks, but lie somewhat to the west; and it may be more to the 
point to notice that they occur exactly in front of the great gap between 
the Assam range and the Rajmahal hills through which all the Hima- 
layan drainage passes to the Bay of Bengal. It seems at least probable 
that the sandstones once were continuous across these gaps, though no 
remnant of these tertiary beds may now be left beneath the superficial 
deposits ; and at all events it is certain that the Sub-Himalayan hills and 
rocks occur again in full force and characteristic form throughUpper Assam 
to the Brahmaputra, where, as on the Jhelum at the western extremity 
of the range, they bend round across the head of the Assam valley, and 
there conform to a system of distui-bance having a totally different 
direction from that of the Himalayas proper. All this takes place in a 
very remote wild country, inhabited by savage tribes, outside the limits 
of British, occupation, so no details of the feature are known beyond the 
facts given. 

Besides the case described in Lower Assam, the only other position 
within or close to the Sub-Himalayan region where we find an extra- 
Himalayan base for the Sub-Himalayan series is in the Punjab, on the 
south side of the Rawalpindi plateau, or Potwdr, where lower or middle 
Siwalik sandstones rest with quasi-conformity on the nummulitie lime- 
stone capping the older fossiliferous series of the Salt Range, as akeady 
described in the preceding chapter. Over all the intermediate country, 
from east to west, the southern limit of the tertiary rocks is altogether a 
matter of conjecture, for no trace of them is found along the southern 
edge of the plains, where from beneath the alluvial deposits the most 
ancient formations of peninsular India crop out ; unless, indeed, we are 
to recognise them, as has been suggested, in the deepest beds of these 
plains deposits themselves. 

Olassiflcation. — From the familiar terms"nummulitic"and" Siwa- 
lik" used parenthetically in preceding paragraphs, it may be observed that 
the Sub-Himalayan system contains a pretty f uU representation of the ter- 
tiary series as generally understood, the former deposits being eocene and 
the latter in part pliocene. The deposits do ample justice to this extended 
period, their aggregate thickness being computed as between 12,000 
and 15 000 feet, or very much more if we take the maximum thickness 
of different portions in different positions. 

Within this region the vertical hmits of the series are very well 
defined, the nummulitie beds at the base are everywhere in abrup t' 



52,^ OLOGY OP INDIA-SUB-HIMALAYAS. [ Chap. XXII. 

contact with immensely older rocks, presumably palseozoic; while the 
topmost Siwalik beds are as often as not vertical at the edge of the plains, 
and are thus in the sharpest possible stratigraphical contrast with the 
post-pliocene and recent deposits. For use within this special region 
the following classification may be adopted for the Sub-Himalayan form- 
ations : — 



f Upper. '^^^ 
/' Siwalik series < Middle. J ^ 
\ (Lower (Nahan). 

StJB-HlMAlAYAN ) 

SySTEM. \ (-Upper (Kasauli). 

(. Sirmfir series \ Middle (Dagshai). . , 

(Lower (Subathu : nummnlitic). f . • 

The enunciation of a classified list of formations ought at once to 
facilitate the progress of description. We should be able to take up each 
so-called group and point out its exact range. For the bottom and top 
divisions of our hst — the Subathu and the Upper Siwalik — this might 
be roughly done ; but we should utterly break down in attempting a con- 
tinuous delineation of the middle zones. This failure is highly 
suggestive of error ; but recognised confusion may be a safer state of 
progress than imposed order; and the compromise to be suggested is that 
no single group-list will ever suit the different sections of the Sub- 
Himalayan zone ; e. g., the break between the Siwalik and Sirmiir divi- 
sions, which is the most marked feature in the Simla region (accord- 
ing to the interpretation given), certainly disappears before reaching 
the Jhelum. Such discrepancies will not surprise any one who can per- 
ceive that the Himalayas have been in great part formed synchronously 
with the deposition of the tertiary series between the Subathu and Upper 
Siwalik groups. 

Under these difiicult circumstances we must crave the reader's 
indulgence for a less regular form of treatment than has been followed 
in the preceding chapters, and for the introduction of discussion upon 
elementary questions not hitherto mentioned, because these are of crucial 
importance in the mountain-sections. A brief abstract account of each 
division will be given, and for further details reference must be made to 
the descriptions of the separate areas. 

Petrology. — Sandstone immensely preponderates in the Sub- Hima- 
layan deposits, and is of a very persistent type from end to end of the 
region and from top to bottom of the series. Its commonest form 
is undistinguishable from the rock of corresponding age known as Mol- 
lasse in the Alps, of a clear pepper and salt grey, sharp and fine in grain, 
generally soft, and in very massive beds. The whole Middle and Lower 
'Siwaliks are formed of this rock, with occasional thick beds of red clay 



Extra-Peninsular.] CHIEFLY OF FRESH-water origin. 525 

and very rare thin, discontinuous bands and nodules of earthy limestoncj 
the sandstone itself being sometimes calcareouSj and thus cemented into 
hard nodular masses. In the Sirmiir group generally, and locally in the 
Lower Siwaliks, the sandstone is thoroughly indurated and often of a 
purple tint, while retaining the distinctive aspect. In the Upper SiwaUks 
conglomerates prevail largely ; they are often made up of the coarsest 
shingle, precisely like that in the beds of the great Himalayan torrents. 
Brown clays occur often with the conglomerate, and sometimes almost 
entirely replace it. This clay, even when tilted to the vertical, is undis- 
ting&ishable in hand specimens from that of the recent plains deposit ; 
and no doubt it was formed in a similar manner, as alluvium. The 
sandstone, too, of this zone, is exactly like the sand forming the banks 
of the great rivers, but in a more or less consolidated condition. Thus 
it was suggestive, and not altogether misleading, to say that the Siwaliks 
were formed of an upraised portion of the plains of India. 

It is only the bottom member of the series that departs widely from 
the prevailing type of Sub-Himalayan rock. The Sub^thu group with 
nummulites is, of course, marine. Its most distinctive, though not most 
abundant rock, is a thin-bedded limestone, more or less pure or earthy, 
associated with clear brown, olive and red, fine crumbling clays; and these 
latter pass up by interstratification into the strong red clunchy clays, 
alternating with sandstones, of the middle Sirmiir horizon. 

Chiefly of fresh-water origin.— The fresh-water origin of the 
Siwalik formation seems almost as indisputable as the marine origin of the 
Subathu beds ; yet, until lately, it has been usual to consider the Siwaliks 
marine. The notion was probably a relic of the opinion, that a water 
basin was an essential condition of the extensive accumulation of deposits, 
and that a sea margin would be required for such a great spread of shingle 
as that of the Siwalik conglomerates. The same opinion, on the same 
grounds, has been extended to the plains deposits themselves. 

The continued experience that the fossil remains in these tertiary 
strata are exclusively of land or fresh-water organisms, made this view 
untenable ; and in time it came to be realised that the deposits themselves 
bear out the same opinion : the mountain torrents are now in many cases 
engaged in laying down great banks of shingle at the margin of the 
plains, just like the Siwalik conglomerates ; and the thick sandstones and 
sandy clays of the tertiary series are of just the same type of form and 
composition as the actual deposits of the great rivers. 

Beds of this character alternate with the upper beds of the Subathu 
group ; so it seems probable that from early tertiary times the sea has 
been excluded from the Sub-Himalayan region, and that the whole of 



526 GEOLOGY OP INDU-SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Cliap, XXII, 

the Sub-Himalayan deposits^ above tbe Subdthu group, are fresh-water 
and fluviatile, and formed on the surface of the land. They are in fact 
subaerial formations, like the river alluvium and bhabar deposits of the 
present day. 

The striking agreement in character betvreen the Sub-Himalayan rocks 
and. the actual deposits now in progress of formation fj-om Himalayan 
debris, at once suggests that the mountain border must have been to some 
extent defined, and the Himalayan area undergoing denudation, from 
early tertiary times ; and it will be seen from the distribution of the 
Siwalik conglomerates, that during the later tertiary times the config'ura- 
tion of the mountains must have been very similar to what it is now. 

Structural conditions. — The validity and meaning of the classifica- 
tion of the Sub-Himalayan tertiary formations depend so much upon the 
interpretation of certain leading and constant features of the sections, 
that it is absolutely necessary to preface the descriptions of these features 
by a brief discussion of certain elementary stratigraphical characters of 
somewhat exceptional application. Although, of course, not required for 
the experienced geologist, these explanations will surely be of use to some 
who may attempt to extend our observations. 

The distinction between the original relations of rocks, those resulting 
from the conditions at the time of formation, and the relations induced 
by subsequent disturbance is perfectly clear in thought and in fact. In 
practice, however, it is often most difficult to discriminate between these 
relations, and the confusion is at the root of many a disputed position. 
The reader of the foregoing chapters may already have perceived this in 
connexion with the question of the nature of the basins of Gondwana 
rocks (pages 103-106). In the Himalayan sections it is of special 
difficulty and interest, as bearing upon the question of mountain forma- 
tion ; and some preliminary indications are necessary to a comprehension 
of the case. 

The most remarkable structural features in the Sub- Himalayan zone 
consist of long lines of abrupt contact of highly contrasting rocks, in 
which, a s a rule, the newer strata dip towards, and so appare ntlyjander, 
the older ; an(J. in most cases the beds on both sides of the' junction are 
in normal order, i. e., not inverted. As exposed in the sides of steep 
valleys, the V-shaped outcrop of the plane of contact, pointing up the 
valley, towards the older rocks, shews indisputably that these latter are 
to that extent superposed on the newer. It is quite certain that this 
could not have been an original relation of these contiguous formations. 

Faults. — In every region which has undergone disturbance to any 
extent there occur what geologists call faults — fissures along which the 



Eitra-Peninsular. ] STRUCTURAL CONDTTIONS. 527 

rocks on either side have moved up or down, or up on one side and down 
on the other, resulting in a separation of the once continuous strata. Side 
movement along the fissure may also occur, but this effect is not here 
considered. When the fissure is vertical, the displacement is altogether 
vertical ; but when the fissure has a slope, there is a horizontal effect also : 
if the mass on the upper side move downwards^ the ends of the broken 
beds retreat from each other, leaving a gap between the broken ends of 
the several strata ; but when the opposite movement occurs, the ends of 
the several beds overlap, so that the newer underlies the older, and a 
vertical line would pass twice through the same beds on opposite sides 
of the fault. This latter kind is the least common, and so has come 
to be called a reversed fault. It is clear that horizontal pressure 
on opposite sides of a sloping plane of fracture tends to produce reversed 
faults, the movement on the inclined plane being always in the du'ection 
of the force producing it. 

The feature mentioned as so common on the Himalayan border has 
prima, facie the appearance of a reversed fault. Off-hand judgments are, 
however, very dangerous in complicated cases : a fault that was origin- 
ally vertical and normal might easily assume the condition of a reversed 
fault by a suitable tilt in the whole mass, and it is easy to see that the 
original relations of rocks might be similarly deformed beyond prima 
facie recognition. The word "deposit" suggests chiefly a floor of de- 
position, and other limiting conditions are liable to be lost sight of. We 
hear, indeed, of geological shores, but chiefly in the sense of shallow 
bottoms ; yet all of us are familiar with cliffs and slopes of every degree. 
Although due to erosion and always, as cliffs, subject to denudation, 
these may also form surfaces on and against which deposition may 
take place, and the residting rock-feature must always bear more 
or less resemblance to a fault — discontinuous rocks in steep juxta- 
position. It is, moreover, certain that subsequent compression might in 
this case also produce the resemblance of a reversed fault— the overhang- 
ing of older upon newer strata. 

These evident chances of deception call for careful examination of 
the ground in certain cases, and we are not without tests, more or less 
trustworthy, according to circumstances. A fault, as such, unless it occurs 
in the bedding or along some other plane of original contact, implies the 
same series of rocks on each side — ^that any bed on the downthrow 
side can be found on the upthrow side, unless removed by denudation ; 
and that any bed on the upthrow side can be found on the down- 
throw side, unless buried out of sight. Straightness of direction is 
another special original character of faults, any departure from which 



528 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [ Chap. XXII, 

would geuerally be due to inequalities in the resisting medium when the 
fracture was made j and in proportion to the magnitude of the fault this 
interference would probably be ineffectual. Another important criterion 
between a faulted and an original contact should be found at the very 
contact itself, and in proportion to the magnitude of the fault. It is 
certain that slips do occur in the interior of rock masses with scarcely 
any perceptible effect of crushing or of friction; and it is intelligible 
how this may take place ; but there must be a general tendency to such 
effects, and often they are "most marked. In the case of these reversed 
faults — the result of lateral compression — ^the friction must be prodi- 
gious, and its effects conspicuous. On the other hand, a steep surface of 
original contact, by deposition, would have a quite different appearance j 
although this, too, would be greatly disguised by subsequent compression, 
such as would convert a normal into a reversed slope of the junction. The 
leading structural lines so marked in the Sub- Himalayas exhibit mixed 
characters ; in some the evidence is very strongly in favour of faulting ; 
in others there is very decided evidence that the feature is principally 
aboriginal.^ 

FlexTires, — These special lines, the right comprehension of which is so 
essential to an understanding of the mountains^ history, are in some cases 
traceable into connection with the known direct effects of disturbance, 
which in this region observe a decided prevailing type, that of normal 
flexures with the axis-plane inclined towards the mountains.^ The 
familiar form of the Sub-Himalyan hills is a direct result of this 
structural character. The detached Siwalik ranges are mostly formed 
of a single flexure, the steep, southern or outer face corresponding with 
the high dip of the beds ; or else, the strata on this, the southern, side 
of the axis have been removed by denudation, exposing the scarped edges 
of the gently sloping strata on the north side. This low dip becomes 
more or less horizontal, and so forms the area of the typical diln, or 
longitudinal valley, of the Sub-Himalayan zone. 

Middle and terminal Sub-Himalayan regions.— As there are 
gaps of some 50 to 200 miles between several of the known sections of the 

1 In geological language, this word must mean— from the commencement of the 
relation, i. e., from the date of formation of the newer rock, 

' Professor H. D. Rogers' classification (Geology of Pennsylvania, 1858) of the nn- 
dulations of strata will be found most useful : the symetrical flexure, when the inclinations is 
the same on both sides of the axis j the normal flexure (so-called, perhaps, because, the 
most common in mountain regions), when the dip is greater on one side than on the other ; 
and the/oMed flexure, when the steeper dip has been pushed beyond the vertical, the beds 
on that side being then inverted. The ctscis-plane is the plane bisecting the angle between 
the opposite dips. To the above we may add the monocUnal flexure, when the beds on 
one side are horizontal. 



Extra-Peninsular. J THE SIMLA region. 529 

Sub- Himalayan zone, the description must be similarly broken, and this 
method will also best suit the imperfect state of our knowledge even 
where observations have been continuous. The conditions of the ground 
lend themselves to this method. One very marked natural division of 
the Sub-Himalayan rock-features corresponds to the termination of the 
Lower Himalayan region, about the seventy-seventh parallel of east 
longitude, jiast of _ ^^line, only the upper tgrHg^g^ rogks 3,jg foijnd, 
forming a inere fringe to the LowerHimala^'s, and consisting often of a 
single range of low hills immediately flanking the mountains ; whereas, 
to the west, there are always several ranges of Sub-Himalayan hills, 
and the zone is sometimes 60 miles wide. As the word central has 
been already applied to a division of the mountains in the sense of 
axial, and as distinguished from lateral, so the word middle will be used 
in a transverse sense, as distinguished from terminal ; and thus the 
contrast here indicated is between the terminal, north-western, portion 
of the zone and the middle portion. We do not know enough of the 
far eastern region to say whether there are any corresponding terminal 
features in tbat direction. ^ 

The Simla region. — The discrepancies that have been mentioned in 
the classification of the tertiary series on difBerent sections are chiefly 
connected with this general change of the mountain features, and so 
the position is one of special importance. For the older rocks, also, the 
terminal area of the Lower Himalayas will be shewn to be of peculiar 
interest, so it will be convenient to give this tract a distinguishing name 
as the Simla region ; the name being, of course, derived from the favourite 
hill station which stands in the middle of the area, on the watershed 
between the Sutlej and the Jumna. It is here we find the original 
type area of the Sirmiir series, where a remnant of these lower tertiary 
formations has been elevated on the mai'gin of the Lower Himalayas. 
To the east the series disappears altogether, and to the west it passes 
down into the Sub-Himalayan zone. Corresponding to this elevation 
of the lower tertiaries, we find here a total separation of them from the 
upper series ; and there is evidence to suggest that the relation between 

I The words inner and outer are of frequent use in tbe description of mountain 
structure. With some writers they have reference to a point external to the range, to an 
imaginary centre of dispersion of the disturhing action. In the text these words will be 
used with reference to central (axial) j and as our description chiefly refers to the southern 
face of the mountain region, this use will not conflict with that other sense of the words, for 
from that point of view the wave of Himalayan disturbance is supposed to have come from 
the north. 

Longitudinal and transverse or lateral are also terms of frequent use in descriptions of 
mountain structure ; they refer to directions with, or across, the axis of the range. 

I I 



530 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap, XXII. 

the two is of the nature of an unconformity. Here, too, we find 
evidence for at least a local unconformity in the upper tertiary, or Siwalik 
series. It seems possible that these two important features may be 
generally pharacteristic of the whole middle Himalayan area ; while 
it is certain that to the north-west neither supposed unconformity is 
maintained, and other structural features are introduced different from 
any observed in .the middle area. 

Order of description. — Following these indications, we will first 
examine these apparently more decisive sections of the Simla region, 
and then the other areas of the middle Himalayan ground to the east. 
We will then return and describe the expanded tertiary zone to the north- 
westj in the Kangra district and the Jamu (Jummoo) hills. 

The Siemue area. — The typical area of the Sirmdr series is not 
in the Sub- Himalayan zone, but on the margin of the Lower Himalayas, 
at their extremity, where the boundary sweeps round to the north up to 
the base of the Dhauladhar. At this edge of the mountains, convex to 
the south-west, a remnant of the lower tertiary formations has been pre- 
served, upraised on a basis of the old rocks. The occurrence forms 
thus an exception to the complete correspondence between the expressions 
Sub- Himalayan rocks and Sub- Himalayan area ; and we have to put up 
with the anomaly of taking our type section of the lower series of the 
Sub -Himalayan system from the Lower Himalayan area. Although 
spoken of as a remnant, the formation here occupies a considerable extent 
of ground, stretching from the Sutlej for 70 miles to the eastward to 
within 15 miles of the Jumna, and locally as much as 10 miles wide. 
AH the east end of the area is in the Sirmdr State, so this name has been 
taken for the formation. 

Unity of the formation. — In a more important sense than relative 
. size, the tertiaries of the Sirmiir area are not properly a remnant. Al- 
though the latest beds of the series are only found in a few places, they 
form, with the lower deposits, a series of very complete facies and unity, 
presenting a gradual passage, by interstratification, from exclusively calca- 
rio-earthy marine beds at the base, ihrough clays and sandstones, to an 
exclusively sandy band at top, in which fossil leaves of plants are locally 
abundant, suggesting the natural local consummation of a continuous 
process of deposition. This character is of much importance in discuss- 
ing the relation to the Siwalik series immediately to the south, 

Subathu, Dagshai, and Kasauli groups.— The nummulitie 
rocks of Subathu were first described by Major Vicary in 1853 ' ; and 
' Q. J. G. S., IX, 1853, p. 70. 



Eitra-Peninsular.] suBATiiu, dagshai and kasauli groups. 



531 



the fossils collected by him were included in the Description des animaux 
fossiles du Groupe Nwrnmulitiqwe de I'Inde (1853) by D'Archiac and 
Haime, from which work the following list is taken. The authors 
remark upon the great contrast between these fossils and those from the 
nummulitic beds of the Salt Range and of Sind ; a contrast especially 
shewn by the total want of corals, bryozoa, echinodermsj and crustaceans 
in the collections from Subathu. This discrepancy may perhaps to some 
extent be accounted for by the prevailing muddy character of the Sub- 
Himalayan nummulitic deposits as compared with those to the south-west. ^ 

Gastebopoda. 



Physa ? nummulitica. 
e * Natica glaucinoides. 
e* N. mutabilis. 
e * N. Roualti. 
e N- epiglottina. 

N. cypraformis. 

Turbo oldheimi. 

Turritella suhathooensii. 

T. suhfasciata. 

Ceritkium jelwmense. 

Ch sirachei/i, 

Fanopeea ? suhelongata. 
* Oorhula suhexarata. 
Donax crassa. 
Cyp>-ina ? subathooensis. 
C. transversa. 
C. semilunaris. 
Verms gumberensis. 
v. subgumberensis. 
V. pseudonitidula, 
V. everesti. 
V. subeveresti. 



C. hooheri. 

Fusus malcolmsoni. 

F. macclellandi. 

F. obsrurus. 

Rostellaria rimosa. 

Sucrinum, sp. indet. 

Vbluta multidentata ? 
e Terebellum fusiforme. 
e Ancellaria olivula. 

Conus, 2 sp. indet. 



Lamellibeanchiata. 

V. subcyrenoides. 
V. nucleus. 
V. semicircularis. 
* Cardita subcom/planata, var. 
C depressa. 
C. mutabilis. 
Cardium jacquemonti. 
Cyprieardia vicaryi. 
C.faba. 
Area, sp. 
Avicula rutimeyri. 

FOEAMINIFBEA. 



e * Nummulites lucasana, var. I e * ..^. spira. 

e* N. beaumonti. I 

Those marked e occur in Europe. 
* „ Sind. 

' Complete reliance cannot be placed in the recorded distribution of these fossils. In 
the brief stratigraphical sketch given on pages 175 and 176 of the work, there are several 
important errors, none of which occur in Idajor Vicary's own accoimt (I. c.) published in 
the same year j such as the occurrence of large mammalian fossils in beds immediately 
overlying the nummulitics near Subathu. Reference was made to Major Vicary on these 
points : he declared the statements to be erroneous, but could not explain the confusion 
that appeared in the account of MM. D'Archiac and Haime, (Mem, G. S. I., Ill, pt. 2, 
p. 93, note). 



tiSii GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS, [Chap. XXII. 

Tn the Sirmur area^ the prevailing rock of the Subathu group is a 
iine, pale yellowish-brown, crumbling day with occasional calcareous 
bands, or locally some thin beds of purer limestone ; dark-greenish shales 
and sometimes harder sandy beds occur. Even within this small area the 
thiclmess of the group varies from 200 to 1,000 feet, as well as can be 
estimated in these very disturbed sections. At the top of the group, beds 
of red clay or shale alternate with the typical Subathu rooks., and 
more or less rapidly increase to the exclusion of the others, with the 
introduction of thick beds of hard purplish sandstone. Thus a gradual 
transition takes place into deposits of strikingly different aspect. The 
Dagshai ridge is entirely made up of these red clays and hard purplish 
sandstones of the middle Sirmur group, which must have a thickness 
of 800 to 1,000 feet. The sandstone has quite the composition and 
texture of the Siwalik rock, and when from any local cause it is less 
indurated and has lost it? colour, the two are undistinguishable. The 
red clays gradually disappear, and on the Kasauli ridge, and elsewhere, 
we find some -600 to 800 feet of sandstone, with only occasional 
partings of grey sandy shale, in which the leaves of plants are locally 
abundant.! 

The separation of the Kasauli and Dagshai horizons is, of course, 
less marked and less significant than that of the Subd.thu group ; and 
the two would go well together as upper Sirmurs, as distinguished frpm 
the marine nummulitic deposits forming the lower part of the series. But, 
as suggested already, the further distinction is important for purposes 
of local comparison. A thickness of 2,000 feet is the least assignable for 
the series in the Sirmdr area, the whole mountain mass being formed of 
it, from the water level in the Sursulla, at an elevation of about 2,000 feet, 
to the summit of Kasauli (6,335), within a horizontal distance of less 
than two miles ; but the disturbance is everywhere excessive. 

Eelation to the older rocks.— The first thing to notice is, that 
the Sirmllr rocks in the Simla region do not rest upon the top group of 
the older formations. All the strata are so tremendously crushed 
together, and the junctions for the most part so steep, that the true 
relation is not apparent at once. The newest group of the old, pre- 
tertiary, rocks is nnquestionably the massive limestone, underlaid by a 
great thickness of flaggy slates, forming the conspicuous hills of 
' Two of these localities may be indicated : one is on the lower Mall, at Kasauli. at si, 
projecting angle about a quarter of a mfle south of the water tunnel ; the other is some 
miles north of Kasauli, on the Budi road, near the stream in the chief re-entering angle 
on the east side of the main ridge. The leaves were roughly identified as belonging to the 
natural families of Sapitidaeeee, Ericacea, LauraceiB, Moraceae, Cycadeacea, Conifera, 
PalmacetB, Cyperacea^ and Oraminece. — Mem. G. S, I., Ill pt. 3, p. 97, 



Extra-Peninsular. ] SECTION AT SUBATHU. 



533 



tbe Boj and the Kiol on the new road to Simla. The main tertiary 
outlier lies tO' the south of the Bojj the junction passing under the 
flank of this mountain and along two spurs, the opposite sides of which 
are formed of highly contrasting formations, with converging dips, 
flaggy slates on the north-east, and thick sandstone and red clays on 
the south-west. But the deep valley hetween the Boj and Krol is also 
occupied by tiie bottom tertiary deposits. In the very great majority 
of exposed sections of the ciontact, it would be impossible to assert 
positively that the existing relative positions are not due to faulting ; 
but crucial sections are to be found ; and one such would be enough to 
prove that the old rocks had been deeply denuded before the tertiary period. 

Section at &ubathu. — ^Within the station of Subathu a typical 
section of this kind is well exposed. The small flat space north of 
the parade-ground is on a surface of soft nummulitic clay, the outcrop 
of steeply compressed beds, on both sides of which the slaty flags pro-' 
trude. Down the sides of the valley to the north-west the contact 
can be followed continuously, and it is unmistakably an original 
junction. The feature is a synclinal fold, and the same bottom layer 
of the Subathu group, a peculiar pisolitic ferruginous clay, is in 
contact with the slates throughout. The horizon of these slates is 
many hundred feet below the base of the Krol limestone; it may 
even be below the Blaini limestone, which is itself at least 1,000 feet 
below the Krol : these details remain still to be worked out. 
. Another very important relation is apparent in this section at 
Subdthu : the same synclinal fold affects the slate series, approximately 
the same layer being at the contact throughout ; from which conditions 
we may certainly conclude that these slates were still approximately 
flat at the beginning of the tertiary period. This zone of the moun- 
tains is at present one of extreme contortion, most, if not all, of which 
therefore dates from that late period. 

There is other evidence from the Subathu sections that the prenum- 
mulitie surface here was very, and snddenly, imeven. In the httle 
section of local bottom beds near the parade-ground, including alto- 
gether, perhaps, 200 feet in thickness, the red clays of the middle 
Sirmiir, or Dagshai, type are already represented, and this group is found 
in force ascending the ridge to the south-east j while in the steep flanks 
of the ridge under Subdthu on the south-west, a much greater thickness 
is found of the brown and olive clays and thin; limestone of the Subathu 
group. A still greater thickness of these purely nummulitic beds 
occurs in the sections along the south margin of the outlier, just inside 
the main boundary. These facts sieem to indicate that there was here 



534 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALATAS. [Chap. XXll. 

some approach to a margin of the nummuhtic sea, the features of which 
(whether shore or sea bottom) must have consisted of steeply scarped 
flat masses of horizontal palseozoic strata. A reasonable objection to the 
introduction of any actual shore here may be found in the total absence 
of anything like a shore deposit along so steep a coast-line. Even small 
pebbles are very rare in the Sirmrfr series at any ^joint, and the 
Subathu group is almost exclusively made up of very fine mud, the 
calcareous element being quite subordinate in it throughout the Sub- 
Himalayan region. 

Limits of the Sirmur area. — The lower tertiaries of the Sirmur 
area do not quite form an outlier, as they are not completely cut off 
from the Sub-Himalayan zone. A narrow band of Subathu beds, less 
than a quarter of a mile wide, crossing the Sutlej at Dihar, connects the 
Sirmrir area on the north-west with the innermost Sub- Himalayan zone 
of the Kfingra area, where the nummulitic group soon disappears 
altogether, and is covered by higher beds. To the south-east the 
Sirm6r rocks have undergone the very opposite effect : owing to a general 
elevation in that direction, the counterpart of the depression to the 
north-west, they have been altogether removed by denudation; the 
bottom beds are the last left, high on the ridge, about 10 miles east 
by north from Nahan. The south boundary of this area is an exceed- 
ingly regular and well-marked feature, an abrupt junction with the 
younger tertiary formations. The nature of this boundary will form 
an important subject of discussion in connexion with these latter rocks. 
The inner boundary of the SirmArs in the Simla region is different from 
any other connected with the Sub-Himalayan rocks : at a few places, 
as along the south-easterly spur from the B6j mountain, the sandstones 
and clays of the middle horizon occur abutting steeply against the 
slates ; but for the most part the junction is found in low ground, with 
the Subathu clays at the contact, almost always steep and much crushed j 
and straggling extensions from the main area of the Subathu group can 
be followed amongst the old rocks, as, for instance, the band passing north 
of Subdthu nearly up to Solan, between the Boj and the Krol. Several 
small outliers of bottom Subathu beds have also been observed, folded 
up in the slates, as may be seen on the old Simla road, above the 
Haripur rest-house, close to an outcrop of the Blaini limestone. Over 
the whole of this area, the massive Krol limestone, and a great thickness 
of the underlying slates, must have been denuded before the deposition 
of the Subathu group. 

Easternmost outlier of the nummulitic group.— This is the 
fittest place to mention the one small outlier of the Subathu group that 



Extra-Peninsular. ] siwalik series : nahan area. 535 

has been observed east of the Sirmur area. A small patch of brown 
nummulitic clay occurs near the village of Bon, in a depression of the 
ridge of slates at the east end of the Dehra dtin over Rikikes. The 
outHer is quite isolated, and some miles north of the Lower Himalayan 
boundaiy. As this ground, east of the Ganges, has been little examined, 
it is not unlikely that other such remnants may yet be found there ; but 
any large area of these rocksj west of Nepalj would probably have been 
brought to notice. 

It is thus stiil an open question, whether the nummulitic formation 
ever extended continuously along the southern face of the Himalayas, 
for no vestige of it has been found in the Sub-Himalayan zone of the 
middle region. The fact that the nearest known rocks of eocene age, 
at the west end of the Assam range, in the Graro hills, are made up 
exclusively of fine clays, precisely like those of Sub^thu, need only 
suggest similarity of origin. In both positions there is a marked absence 
of purely marine deposits] while in both cases these are introduced 
extensively away fi'om the middle region, to the north-west beyond the 
Jhelum, and to the east in the Khasi hills. The Assam range is, indeed, 
outside the Himalayan border, but this border, as we know it, has been 
in great measure defined in post-nummulitic times. It was, however, 
approximately fixed, as now, in earliest Siwalik (Ndhan) times. Such 
a change of feature implies a great break between the deposits preced- 
ing and succeeding it ; and this is a suggested measure of the possible 
separation of the Sirmur and Siwalik series in the Simla region and 
throughout the middle Himalayas. 

Siwalik series : Nahan area. — It was in this Nahan area that 
by far the greater part of the original collections of Siwalik fos- 
sils were made, on which account alone this ground must be considered 
classical. It was here, too, that the study of these formations was first 
taken up by the Survey ; and it so happens that the sections are peculiarly 
favourable for observation ; or at least, features are here exposed that 
have not as yet been observed elsewhere, and that certainly are generally 
concealed. This exceptional character might indeed be reasonably 
taken as an objection to considering this ground as a standard of inter- 
pretation for any larger region ; however this may be, it is certain that 
the facts here exposed give us the means of stating, in the clearest 
manner, one important condition of this question of interpretation, upon 
which the truth of our history of this mountain region must depend. 

The area thus peculiarly circumstanced, in the neighbourhood of 
Nahan, does not at all correspond in length with the adjoining Sirmlir 



£36 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SUB-HIMALATAS, [Chap. XXII, 

area. The latter extends to the Sutlej ; whereas, in the Sub-Himalayan 
zone, the features of the western region begin where the boundary of the 
Lower Himalayas first trends northwards, near Kalka. Just east of this 
point the width of the Sub-Himalayan zone is at its lowest. The lower 
Himalayas themselves are here somewhat protuberant southwards ; but 
there is no exceptional compression of the upper tertiary rocks ; the 
corresponding reduction in width of the fringing tertiary zone is effected 
by the absence of any trace of a diin. From the west end of the 
Kaidrda diin, which is the trans-Jumna continuation of the Dehra diin, 
to the east end of the Pinjor dun, which is the cis-Sutlej continuation 
of the Una dun, the outer Siwalik hills are • confluent, for a length 
of nearly 30 miles, with those on the north of the Pinjor and Kaiarda 
diins ; so that the junction of the rocks forming these distinct ranges 
can be closely followed for that distance. It was from the examination 
of this junction that a clear separation was proposed between a Siwalik 
and a Nahan group. It is not yet proven that such a separation is not 
maintained eastwards, throughout the middle Himalayan region j but it 
certainly is not distinguishable on the extension to the north-west : and 
so, a compromise has been adopted — to speak of the inner or Nahan 
zone, and its representative rocks elsewhere, as Lower Siwaliks. 

The Nahan, or Lower Siwalik rocks, forming the inner Sub-Himalayan 
zone at NShan, consist mainly of massive grey sandstone, often spoken 
of as the lignite sandstone, from its frequently containing small nests 
and strings of fossil wood;, which from early times till now have given 
rise to many sanguine reports of the discoveiy of coal. In deeper 
sections red or purple clays occur, associated with thinner, harder, 
darker sandstones, very like the rock of the Dagshai group. Owing to 
the contorted and faulted condition of these rocks, and the rugged, 
covered nature of the ground, accurate estimates of thickness are not 
easily made : from 2,000 to 5,000 feet may be taken as limits. 

The rocks forming the outer tertiary zone, the true Siwalik hills, 
south of Ndhan, consist at top of Qonglomerates and brown clays 
associated in very variable proportion, overlying a series of alternating 
thick, soft grey sandstones, and red and yellow clays. The total thick- 
ness may vary from 3,000 to 5,000 feet. In other ground the conglo- 
meratic beds by themselves are at least 5,000 feet thick, with a similar 
thickness of grey sandstone between them and the Nahan horizon.. 
These beds of the Siwalik hills proper will be distinguished — the conglo-. 
merates as Upper, and the sandstones and clays as Middle Siwaliks ; even 
if the separation should not be maintained by fossil evidence, the 
s^ratigraphical distinction will be always necessary. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] the nahan-siwalik boundary. 537 

The Nahan-Siwalik boundary.— The junction of the Siwalik and 
Nahan groups is first described, because it clearly exhibits important 
characters that will be less confidently appealed to in the case of other 
boundaries. The topmost beds (conglomerates and clays) of the gi-eat series 
of deposits forming the outer hills, dip steadily towards the base of the 
higher hills, formed of massive sandstones, and subordinate red clays of the 
Nahan zone. The strike in both rocks is the same, but the dip is generally 
higher on the inner side. Where the Markanda crosses the boundary 
under Nahan, the general effect is well seen, and it closely resembles a 
continuous ascending section ; so much so that the early discoverers of 
the Siwalik fossils accepted it as such, taking the inner beds to be the 
newer. 

Upon a first recognition of the outer rocks as the newer, the imme- 
diate conjecture would be that of a fault ; it is the explanation usually 
applied to junctions such as this. The dips might first suggest a doubt, 
for they certainly are not such as would, under ordinary conditions, result 
in connection with faulting. Further examination raises other doubts : 
the conglomerates of the outer beds are largely made up of stones very 
like that of the rock forming the contiguous hills, which at once 
suggests a break other than by faulting. Again, if the feature is due to 
a fault, it must be one of great throw, but the outline of the boundary, 
as traced through the hills, exhibits great and sudden irregularities, such 
as are almost incompatible with a great master-dislocation. One 
other test remains — that of the actual contact, which it is so rare to 
find exposed to observation : at a short distance to the east of the 
Markanda, and close to where the first symptoms appear of the begin- 
ning of the Kaiarda dun, a clear section of the contact was found in 
a gully at the base of the inner hills, shewing the tilted Siwalik 
conglomerates abutting against a steep weathered surface of the older 
sandstones, proving that at this point any faulting whatever is out of 
the question.^ 

This is quite a crucial section, and until it is disposed of, it must 
take a ruling part in our consideration of this great boundary question. 
In any civilised, or even more accessible, country so critical an 
observation would have been examined by many experts since it was 
first noticed. That this has not been done is only an extra reason for 
laying stress upon the point. A conjecture has been offered (by Mr. 
Theobald) that the newer beds at the contact here are not true Siwaliks, 
but the same as some beds at the top of the series in the Siwalik hills 
east of the Jumna, and differing somewhat from the usual type of the 
1 Mem. G. S. I., III., Pt. 2, p. 108. 



538 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXII. 

Siwalik conglomerates. This hint is worthy of notice, but it scarcely 
affects the question at issue, for the beds indicated, whether we choose 
to call them Siwalik or not, must be closely related to that series, as 
being at least apparently conformable to it, and having undergone the 
same disturbances, and must be totally distinct from any deposits formed 
subsequently to the elevation of the outer range.i Thus we may say 
that, for this portion of the ground, all the evidence, with one exception, 
suggests that this boundary is not due to faulting. The exception is 
the reversed lie of the plane of contact ; and it is evident that this 
condition might be produced by lateral pressure upon an originally 
normal face of deposition. 

Another important point in the discussion of this boundary is, that no' 
satisfactory identification has been made between beds on opposite sides of 
it in this section at Nahan. If this should be correct, that in the great 
thickness of rocks outside this boundary none of the inner rocks are re- 
presented, the consequences that follow upon either interpretation of the 
junction are rather startling : if it be a fault, the throw must amount to 
several thousand feet ; and, if it be an original boundary, disturbance of 
Sub-Himalayan (Siwalik) rocks, with denudation to a prodigious ex- 
tent, must have taken place within the Sub- Himalayan (Siwalik) period, 
involving great unconformity here between the upper and lower groups. 
A compromise may be yet made out j but any possible identification of 
the beds of the inner zone, in the rock-series of the outer zone, must be 
low down in this latter series, and so would still leave a large break to be 
accounted for by the fault or the unconformity, as may be ultimately 
decided. It should be remembered that in such rapidly forming diluvial 
deposits as those of the Siwalik formation, very great discrepancies might 
occur between synchronous beds within short distances, so that great judg- 
ment and a full consideration of many circumstances are needed in 
deciding this question. An explanation of this peculiar unconformity 
will be suggested in describing its disappearance westward, in the 
Kangra region. 

The most westerly point at which the peculiar Nahan-Siwalik junc- 
tibn has been observed is in the SursuUa, below Kalka, where the 

1 Because of doubts expressed regarding this section, although no one, that I know 
of, has examined the spot indicated, I have wished much for an opportunity to re- 
visit it. Such an occasion, after a lapse of 18 years, has occurred within the last three 
months, since the ahove remarks were written. The position lies on the path to Khairwala 
from the Eajah's garden on the Markanda, near the village of Tib. I was disappointed to 
find that no section of the contact is now exposed, but on this point I never had any doubts 
of the accuracy of my original observation. I have, however, satisfied myself again that 
the outer rocks at the contact are the regular Upper Siwalik strata. — H. B. M. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] THE NAHANSIRMUR BOUNDARY. 539 

massive horizontal Upper Siwalik conglomerate, forming the surface 
of the Pinjor diln, takes a strong dip towards its junction with the 
highly inclined sandstones of the inner zone. Beyond this no contact- 
section of the Upper Siwaliks has been observed on the north side of 
the dun for more than 50 miles, to near the Sutlej, where everything is 
changed, and the conglomerates are nearly vertical, having a slight 
south-westerly underlie, and are thus in apparent continuous sequence 
with hard Lower Siwalik rocks forming the ridge of the inner zone. 
This Sutlej section belongs to the Kangra area. 

The continuation to the east is more doubtful : at this end of the ex- 
posed contact in the Ndhan hills, the tilted conglomerates at the boundary 
pass on to form the crest of the range on the south side of the Kaiarda 
dfin, and flatten out to form its floor ; but no near sections of the junc- 
tion with the rocks of the Nahan zone are visible. 

The Nahan-Sirmur boundary.— Within the Nahan area the junc- 
tion of the Siwalik and Sirmur series corresponds with what we shall con- 
stantly refer to as the main houndary ; for we may fairly give this name 
to the most persistent and striking structural feature of the whole 
mountain region — the abrupt junction of the slaty or schistose rocks of 
the mountains with the rocks of the Sub- Himalayan zone. The correct 
interpretation of this line of junction is a first step towards understanding 
the history of the mountains. The scarcely disputed admission, that the 
Sub-Himalayan deposits are in great part made up of Himalayan debris, 
is at least suggestive that the present boundary may have had some- 
thing to do with the original one ; but the closer inspection of the 
feature seems always to deter from any further encouragement of this 
view : the appearance is nearly always that of a reversed fault, the outcrop 
of the plane of junction in the bottom of the valley being generally 
inside a line connecting the outcrops of the same plane on the adjacent 
spurs j and consequently this plane of junction between tertiary and 
Himalayan beds is inclined towards the mountains. It is only through the 
Sirmur rocks iu the Simla region that we can bring any direct argument 
to bear upon this question. Elsewhere there are no terms of comparison 
between the rocks on opposite sides of this sharp line ; whereas here the 
beds on either side unquestionably belong to the same great tertiary 
series. We have seen that the upper Sirmiir beds themselves exhibit 
strongly the type of the Sub-Himalayan deposits, and are also presum- 
ably derived from the same source — denudation of the Himalayan area. 

The question again turns upon the part taken by faulting. If this 
main boundary is a joo«<-Siwalik fault, we might expect to be able 
to identify some of the beds on opposite sides. The conditions are 



640 GEOLOGY OP INDIA-SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXII. 

altogether favourable for such a recognition : the highest beds on the 
upthrow side are sufficiently distinctive, and the beds on the down- 
throw side are thoroughly turned up and eroded ; yet there is no 
approach to a resemblance ; on the contrary, clays become more and more 
frequent as we get deep in the Lower Siwalik (Ndhan) group, and we- 
have seen that the top beds of the Sirmurs are exclusively sandstone. No 
trace of the very distinctive nummulitic clays has ever been seen south 
of the junction, or as fault-rock in the supposed faulted boundary.- 

These arguments may, of course, be met by magnifying the throw 
of the supposed fault, so that the Sirmur rocks should be completely 
buried out of sight to the south : or a more plausible objection might be 
raised, that as the outcrops we bring into comparison are for the most 
part at a considerable distance from the fault, and at a still greater 
distance from each other, the correspondence cannot be expected; for 
theoretically, the agreement demanded only holds exactly for the beds 
originally continuous across the dislocation. It might thus be sug- 
gested that the plant-bearing sandstones of Kasauli belong to the same 
horizon as the Lower Siwalik clays, or the lignite sandstone. Those 
who have examined the rocks are least disposed to adopt this supposi-' 
tion ; and unless one or other of these views is adopted, the argument is 
binding in favour of this main boundary being an original line of junc-- 
tion, however modified by the subsequent compression to which even 
the Upper Siwaliks have been subjected. 

This conclusion would establish for the middle Himalayan region 
a very great unconformable break between the upper and lower ter- 
tiaries — the Siwalik and the Sirmur series. It would shew that a great 
elevation took place, with deep erosion, along the margin of the Lower 
Himalayan region, in the interval between these formations. 

In the case of the Nahan-Siwalik boundary in the Simla region 
another argument, besides that founded on the contrast of the strata 
on opposite sides of the junction, was used to shew that the present 
boundary coincided with the original margin of deposition, and was not 
a line of fault. This argument was, the very broken direction of the 
boundary-line. Similar observations apply to the main boundary : the 
Dehra dun occupies a great bay in the Lower Himalayan area, so that a line 
joining the termination of the Sirmiir beds in Sirmdr to the small outlier 
of the same beds east of the Ganges, would touch the Siwalik range south 
of Dehra; and within this bay the main boundary exhibits several sharp- 
bends, not traceable to cross-faults. Such twists would be scarcely com- 
patible with a great dislocation having several thousand feet of throw, as 
this boundary must have, if it is to be regarded as a post- Siwalik fault. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] JUMNA-GANGES AEEA, 541 

The Jumna-Ganges area. — Althougli few of the Siwalik fossils 
were obtained east of the Jumna, it was here the name took its 
origin, as adopted by Colonel Cautley from Shih-wdla, the native name for 
the range separating the Dehra dun from the plains. A more typical 
Siwalik range could not have been chosen. The axis of the normal anticlinal 
flexure runs close along the outer edge of the ridge, the beds to the south 
of the anticlinal having been much denuded, except at the end near the 
Ganges, where there is a pretty full remnant of the steep southerly 
dipping beds, gradually becoming vertical in the conglomerates of the 
little hills west of Hardwar. 

Composition in relation to the great rivers. — By comparing 
this range with its representative in the adjoining region to the west, we 
find an illustration of the fact already mentioned, — how the Siwalik depo- 
sits vary according to their position relatively to the great rivers. The con- 
trast between the rocks of the outer range on opposite sides of the Jumna 
is so great, that it has been doubted if they can be equivalent ; to the west, 
throughout the Nahan area, clays enter largely into the section, and the 
conglomerates are made up of the debris of the rocks forming the higher 
hills immediately to the north, principally the sandstone of the Ndhan 
and the Sirmur groups ; whereas in the range between the Ganges and 
Jumna, clays are very subordinate, and the conglomerates are composed 
of the hardest quartzite pebbles, just like the shingle now. found in the 
great mountain torrents. This portion of the range is, in fact, an ancient 
diluvial fan of the rivers Tons, Jumna, and Ganges. The Jumna, after 
its confluence with the Tons, now flows very obliquely across the dun, and 
passes through the outer range far to the west of the point, where it 
leaves the high mountains, having had to double round the immense accu- 
mulation of hard materials it had formerly laid down in front of that 
gorge. The passes of both the Jumna and Ganges in the Siwalik range 
are now strongly marked by cross-fractures of the rocks, -with contrast- 
ing dips on opposite sides ; but it is more likely that the rivers helped to 
determine the position of these fractures, than the reverse; for the rivers 
have not ceased to flow here since pre-Siwalik times : when the first 
elevation Set in, the rivers had to take to channels of erosion; and when 
the fracturing forces took effect, these lines of erosion were the positions 

of least resistance. 

Identification of beds in the two zones.— The identification made 
by Colonel Cautley^ of certain beds at the south base of the cis-Jumna« 

1 Trans. Geol. Soc, London, 2nd Series, Vol. V, p. 271 ; J. A. S., B, 1834, Vol. III. 528. 

a The prefixes cU and Uans are used in Upper India with reference to the older British 
possessions in Eastern India. Cis- Jumna consequently means east of Jumna ; trans-Jumna, 
west. 



542 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SUB-HIMALA.YAS. [ Chap. XXII. 

ransre with, some beds of the inner zone at Nahan is- well worth 
attention. Taking the Nahan beds, by reason of their apparent position, 
as the highest in that section, he accounted for the non-appearance east 
of the Jumna of the more f ossiliferous strata of the west, by the smaller 
upheaval in the former position. As already explained, the reverse is the 
case ; and the beds in question, in which fossils were found, at the entrance 
to the Kalawala pass (cis- Jumna), the same as in the Nahan beds, are 
probably older than any in the outer range trans-Jumna. A closer 
search might detect the suspected unconformity between these beds -at 
the south end of Kalawala pass and the overljnng Siwalik sandstones. 
The greater abundance of fossils in the range trans- Jumna than cis- Jumna 
may easily be due to the contrasting nature of the deposits. 

Suggested connection of the two zones in this area. — The 
complete confirmation of the identification mentioned in the last paragraph, 
need not disturb the view given of the equivalence of the outer ranges 
on opposite sides of the Jumna ; but this equivalence has been questioned. 
Throughout th.e dun east of Dehra there is no representative of the 
Nahan range, any remnant of these rocks being covered by a great 
bank of detritus ; but in the western dun this inner ridge of the Sub- 
Himalayas is well defined, and in the Nun, under Mansuri (Mus- 
sooree), there is a peculiarly puzzling section. The stream, as usual, 
has cut a steep narrow gorge through the flanking ridge of the massive 
lignite sandstone, here nearly vertical, but with a slight inward underlie ; 
and just below the gorge there is in the low banks a nearly continuous 
section of seemingly conformable beds, in which the sandstone becomes 
pebbly, and gradually alternates with strong beds of tonglomerate, the 
northerly underlie being steady throughout. According to the universal 
order in all normal sections, conglomerates always increase in the upper 
beds, so this section in the Ndn must be an inverted series, and it 
most resembles that in the range south of the ddn. 

If this link should be confirmed, we should have to recast the view 
sketched above regarding the relations of the cis- and trans-Jumna 
Siwaliks ; for there is every reason to suppose that the massive sandstone 
of the Niin is the same as that of Nahan, with which it may be said to 
be continuous. There would then be much plausibility in the view once 
advocated by Mr. Theobald (in an unpublished report), that the original 
Siwalik hills are chiefly composed of Nahan rocks, and that the more 
fossiliferous and newer ti'ans-Jumna Siwaliks are not represented to 
the east of the river, having been denuded away, or else never upheaved. 

The alternative interpretations, to reconcile the Niin section with 
the current opinion of the equivalence of the outer Siwaliks on both 



Extra-Peninsular.] NEPAL AREA. 543 

sides of the Jumna, would be — to suppose that theNiln conglomerates are 
true top beds of the NShan group, and quite different from those of the 
outer range ; or else, to suppose a break, by a concealed fault, in the 
apparently regular sequence between them and the lignite sandstone. 
The question must be worked out on the ground : though it is needfid 
to point it out, it would be out of place to discuss it further in these 
pages.^ 

The Gahewal and Kumatjn akba. — These hill districts correspond 
with the Biohilkand division of the plains, between the Ganges and the 
Nepal frontier. This ground has sSarcely been looked at. "Within ten 
miles east of the Ganges the Siwalik rocks proper are well represented, 
and a. narrow belt of Nahan beds separates them from the slaty rocks of 
the Lower Himalayan mountains. Further east, the outer range, and the 
rocks forming it, seem to be generally absent ; and the inner hills, formed 
of the massive sandstones supposed to belong to the lower Siwalik or 
Nahan group, become very prominent. The steady north-easterly dip pre- 
vails, wherever observations have been made. In General Strachey's 
paper on this part of the Himalayas ^ a very important observa- 
tion is recorded, that the trap-rock of the Lower Himalayas enters the 
sandstone of the Sub-Himalayan zone. The position is in the Gola 
river south of Bhimtal. No fact of the kind has been noticed elsewhere. 

Operations have been undertaken to smelt iron on a large scale from 
an ore concentrated in the red clays at the base of these hills under 
Naini Tal. Similar ferriferous clay is known to occur near Ndhan, and 
again in the same rocks far to the east in Sikkim. 

Nepal akea^.— For a length of 500 miles the kingdom of Nepdl 
completely arrests all study of Himalayan geology, with the exception 
of the single track to Kathmandu (Katmandoo), and a small area around 
the valley. On this track very complete representatives are found of the 
two Sub- Himalayan ranges and their intervening ddn or mdri, as the 
valley is called here. The Churiaghati range is structurally a facsimile 
of the original Siwaliks. At the outer base, at Bichiako, there are some 
earthy rusty beds, all greatly crushed. The dip soon settles down to 30° to 
north-north-west, maintaining the same angle steadily to the top of the 

pass. 

1 Salt-pans were once set up on a small scale in the gorge of the Nun : it is not 
known whether this enterprise was started on the strength of the name nun. (salt), or on 
account of the efflorescence that is often locally abundant on exposed Surfaces of the lignite 
sandstone, or on the trust of some tradition of the occurrence of rock-salt. 

= Q. J. a S., L, 1851. Vol. VII, p. 296. 

3 Kec. G. S. I., 1875, VIII, p. 93. 



544 GEOLOGY OF INDfA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap, XXII. 

This is the typical structure of these detached Sub- Himalayan ranges, 
the flat inner half of a normal anticlinal flexure. The range is about four 
miles wide, which would give an aggregate thickness of about 10,000 feet 
of rockr The pass, as is universal in these ranges, follows the broad bed of 
a torrent to near the summit, where the road turns up a steep gully, 
partly artificial. 

The lower half of the section is sand, and the upper half conglo- 
merate. In the Siwaliks of the North -West the passage between these 
two rocks is gradual and alternating ,■ in the Chiiriaghati section it 
was noticed that the change is rapid and complete, from an almost 
unbroken mass of fine grey sand to an equally uniform mass of pale 
yellowish-brown conglomerate. This may not be a point of any import- 
ance ; but special notice was made of the exceedingly fresh aspect of 
these deposits as compared with the rocks of the original Siwalik 
range, — a point that may have some meaning in connexion with Mr. 
Theobald's suggestion, already mentioned, that the latter rocks may 
belong to the Nahan horizon. In this respect the rocks of the Chiiria- 
ghati range more resemble those of the outermost hills of the trans- 
Jumna region. 

This same newness of aspect may be noticed in comparing the 
Churiaghati rocks with those of the inner Sub-Himalayan range on 
the north side of the dun at Etaunda (the rest-house on the road to 
Kathmandu) , in order to represent the apparent impossibility of the 
two ranges being a repetition of the same rock-series; and hence the 
presumption that their junction is not a fault. In the Rapti, immediately 
under Etounda, there are outcrops of the rusty sandy clays and 
greenish-grey hard sandstone at the base of the section to the north. 
They dip at 60° to north by east. Wherever observed along the 
road, this dip (with slight variation in amount) was found constant, and 
there is but little change in the character of the rock. Clays occur, 
but very subordinately ; the sandstone becomes somewhat softer in the 
higher beds, and there are here several layers of thin conglomerates. 
It is clearly a normal ascending section, and in no particular is there 
any near resemblance to the series of the outer range. The section 
here is about two miles wide, which would give a thickness of about 
10,000 feet, there being nothing to suggest repetition by faulting or 
flexure. As usual, the contact with the rocks of the mountain is 
concealed. 

Regarding the interpretation of this section : we might explain the 

• actual difBerence of composition by the presumable difference in successive 

zones of one great belt of torrential deposits) and the actual differences of 



Extra-Peninsular.] UPPER ASSAM AREA. 545 

texture by the presumable greater induration of the inner band, and 
thus make out that the two rock-series were originally continuous and 
equivalent, and that their present relation must be due to a great fault. 
The impression made on the observer was decidedly against that equiva- 
lence J and hence, that the present relative position is, like that in 
the Nahan section, to a great extent aboriginal. 

SiKKiM AND Bhijtan akbas.^ — Throughout the Sikkim and Bhdtdn 
Du^rs there is no representative of the Siwalik hills (the outer zone of 
the Sub-Himalayas) ; and in two places the Sub- Himalayan rocks are 
altogether absent, or concealed.^ One of these gaps, about 10 miles wide, 
is just south of Baling Fort, and corresponds to a marked promontory of 
the older rocks of the mountains. The other gap is much longer, from the 
Jaldoka to beyond the Tursa, a distance of 40 miles, and throughout this 
area also the base of the mountains is prominent and irregular. It seems 
probable (see p. 522) that the absence of the tertiary sandstones in this 
ground is due to their partial removal, and the complete concealment of 
the denuded outcrops by the great gravel deposits that are here accu- 
mulated at the foot of the hills. There is nothing in the old rocks 
to suggest their former greater extension in this position : the Damuda 
rocks also are absent, but here, as elsewhere, the same belt of slaty 
formations separates the gneissic rocks from the plains. 

Inclose proximity to these gaps, the hills and rocks of the inner Sub- 
Himalayan zone are in full force, shewing no tendency to thin out 
towards those blank areas. In the Mahanadi the thickness is estimated 
by Mr. Mallet as 11,000 feet, and the characters are the same as noticed 
elsewhere ; soft massive grey sandstone being the prevailing rock, with 
occasional clunchy clays, especially towards the base, where these are 
sometimes highly ferruginous. Nests of poor lignite, and even small broken 
seams, occur in the sandstones. The upper beds are often conglo- 
meratic, sometimes coarsely so. In all there is a prevailing dip towards 
the mountains, so the highest beds occur next the main boundary, but 
no actual contact- section of this feature has been described. It is clear, 
however, that whatever explanation of it can be made out elsewhere 
wiU apply here also. 

Upper Assam aeea.— To the east of Bhutan the Himalayas north 
of the Assam vaUey are occupied by various tribes of savages, and the 
only observations worth mentioning of that ground are those made by 

' MaUet : Mem. G. S. I., 1874, XI, p. 45. 

' First noticed by Colonel Godwin-Austen, J. A. S. B., XXXVII, p. 117. 

k1 



5-16 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap., XXII. 

Colonel Grodwin- Austen^ in the Daphla hills of the Dikran^ basin, ad- 
joining the Parrang and Lakhimpnr districts of Upper Assam. Here 
again there are two well-marked ranges of Sub-Himalayan hills, with 
an intervening ddn. Each range is formed of a normal anticlinal 
flexure, directed from the mountains,^ just as at the. base of the North- 
western Himalayas j and the inner range is, at least in great part, formed 
of older beds than the outer one. Here, too, nests of lignite are of 
frequent occurrence in the sandstone. ^ 

The same lignite sandstones have been observed more to the east, 
north of Dibrugarh, with the usual high northerly dip.^ ' 

1 J. A. S. B, 1875, XLIV, p. 35. 

' i. «., having the axis-plane sloping towards the mountains (see note, p. 528). 

= Mem. G. S. L, IV, p. 393. 



Extra-Peninsular.] TERMINAL SUB-HIMALAYAS. 54,7 



CHAPTEE XXIII. 

EXTEA-PENINSULAR AEEA. 

SUB-HIMALAYAS — {contiwued.) 

Tekminal SuB-HiMAtiXAa : Thb KisraBA abba — Genei;al structure — The Ghambar- 
Basauli fault — The Kosari and Badsar-Nurpnr faults — Extinction of the Nahan-Siwalik 
boundary — The Sutlej at Bubhdr — Local extinction of the N&han-Sirmiir boundary 
— Difficulties of classification in the Kangra area — Bubh6r and Beldspur sections 
compared — Doubtful beds in the Sirmur zone — Want of fossils — The base of the 
Dhauladhdr — North-western termination of tlje Kingp-a area — The Mandi rock-salt. 
The Jamtj abba — Boundaries — Special feature — Sirmfir zone at the Ravi — 
Western expansion of the Sirmur zone — Inliers — Characters of the Subithu group — 
Tertiary-palaeozoic relation — Compaj-isott with sections of the Simla region — Doubtful 
newer rocks of the Sirmur zone — Other general features of the Sirmur zone — 
Sirmur-Siwalik boundary — The Basauli-Naiishera fault — Eiassi conglomerates — The 
outer SiwaUk zone. . Summaet. 

Terminal Sub-Himalayas : Kangra area. — In the last chapter 
the Sub-Himalayan rocks were traced from the typical Simla area 
to ^their eastern extension in Assam ; we have now to return to the 
North-West Himalayas and examine the sections to the west of the Simla 
region,'' The great and rapid expansion of the tertiary zone to the 
north-west corresponds with the extinction of the Lower Himalayan 
region. Erom about half-way between Ndhan and Kdlka the " main 
boundary " bends steadily inwards, and continues this northerly course 
for nearly 80 miles, to the base of the Dhauladhar ridge, which is 
directly on the prolongation of the main snowy range of the middle 
Himalayas. The Sub-Himalayan ranges are for the most part unaffected 
by this bend of the main boundary; and thus the grbund on the 
prolongation of the Lower Himalayas is occupied by tertiary rocks, 60 
miles wide inside. Hoshiarpur. , The greater part of this area, up to 
the Ravi, is in the Kangra district ; but this geological field, designated 
as the" Kangra area, must be understood to begin east of the Sutlej, 

1 It would be impossible to give any idea of the structure of this ground without 
mentioning features and localities that are not iridicated on the small map accompanying 
this work : it wUl therefore be difficult to foUow these descriptions without reference to a 
larger map (see note, p. 560), 



548 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXII. 

about the east end of the Pinjor (or Kalka) ddn. The Sutlej and the 
Bias flow westwards^ across the terminal boundary of the Lower Hima- 
layas, and traverse the duns and ridges of the Kangra area in very 
zig-zag courses. 

General structure. — The outer SiwaHk range of the Kangra 
area is continuous with that of the Nahan area j so it will appear that 
the great spread of tertiary rocks to the north-west takes place for the 
most part on the prolongation of the ^ahan, or inner Sub- Himalayan, 
zone of the middle Himalayan region. Both boundaries of this zone, 
as lines of contact of dissimilar rocks, change in character and disappear ; 
and in the middle of the expanded zone new features supervene, flexures 
and great faults, unlike anything as yet observed in the ground to 
the east. 

A more peculiar feature of the terminal Sub-Himalayas is the intro- 
duction of an inner zone of oldest tertiaries, not represented at aU ia 
the middle Himalayas, but on the prolongation of, and actually con- 
tinuous with, the Sirmlir series, on the margin of the Lower Himalayas 
iri the Simla region. The Sutlej may be given as the point where 
the Sirmiir rocks take their place as belonging to the Sub-Himalayas ; 
and a great change rapidly supervenes in the aspect of all the rock- 
features. In all the zones the introduction of apparently higher beds 
to the north-west is the rule. 

It has been already observed that our representation of the Sub- 
Himalayan series depends mainly upon the interpretation put upon 
certain leading structural features peculiar to ^ueh mountain regions, 
and which are markedly homologous in all the formations ; our atten' 
tion must therefore be principally turned upon those features ; and as 
their characters are perhaps best exhibited ia their less extreme form, 
among the newer rocks, the rule observed in this work, to proceed 
from the oldest to the newest, cannot be followed. 

The Ghambar-Basauli fatilt. — At the east end of the Pinjor 
dun, in the section of the Mangrad, south-south-east of K^lka, the 
Nahan zone is scarcely a quarter of a mile wide ; the strata are vertical, 
and aU of the lower type noticed in the Nahan section, hard purpUsh 
sandstones and red clays. North-north-west of Kalka, rocks of this 
stamp, in a very contorted condition, form a confused congeries of hills 
in the Mailog and Nalagarh States. About Khadi,- close to the main 
boundary, on the Subathu and Budi road, higher beds occur, paler, 
softer, coarser sandstones; and there is the beginning of a distinct 
feature, a' faulted synclinal flexure, diverging steadily from the main 
boundary to the north-west. In this direction the character of the 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE KANGRA AREA. 549 

dislocation becomes rapidly developed, and in the valley of the Ghambar 
it is perfectly defined as a great fault, thick conglomeratic sandstones 
dipping steeply to the north-east towards, or under, deep red clays and 
hard sandstones. It follows a remarkably straight course across the 
Sutlej, through the Kangra district, to Basauli on the E,dvi, and thence 
to Riassi on the Chinab, where it again joins the outer Sirmur boundary, 
after a course of nearly 200 miles. It is well seen at many places, as in 
the Banganga river near the main road to Kdngra ; about Kotleh on the 
Bhagsu-Nurpiir road, and at Basauli on the Ravi. The actual contact is 
always disguised, but there can scarcely be a doubt that it is a great 
fault, of the reversed order that is most usual in these mountain 
sections : the strata on opposite sides are nearly parallel to each other, 
the upthrow is persistently on the inner side, and so the newer rocks 
in .normal order (i. e., not inverted) actually underlie the older; as if 
in a double folded flexure the upper side of the anticlinal had subsided 
on, or been pushed over, the lower side of the synclinal limb, the contor- 
tion itself having been removed by denudation. 

At Jualamuki on this line of fissiire there is a temple buUt in which 
flames issue continuously from the ground round the base of the idol. 
At Lunsu, under Dalhousie, there is a mineral spring on this same line of 
dislocation. 

The Kosari and Badsar-Nurpur faults. — South of the 
Ghambar, the complex range of the Ndlagarh hills continues up to the 
Sutlej, where two lines of dislocation take their rise and result in 
steady, well-defined ridges to the north-west. The southernmost of 
these lines is known as the Kosari fault, from a village on the bank of 
the Sutlej at the north end of the Bubhor gorge ; it is comparatively 
a minor feature, running down the centre of the compacted group of 
ridges into which the Parwain range is divided on the south-east. The 
Badsar fault, called after a village 30 miles from the Sutlej, at the 
north base of this same range of hills, is a principal structural feature 
of the trans-Sutlej Sub-Himalayas, being continuous for 300 miles up 
to and beyond the Jhelum. It clearly originates in an anticlinal 
flexure, and is again recognisable as such at several points of its course, 
as at Nurpiir ; sometimes the dislocation is small, but, as a rule, there is 
much faulting ; and towards the Sutlej the downthrow is on the north 
side. The Nadaun dun lies in a trough between the Badsar and 
Ghambar faults. 

These great lines of dislocation determine the chief features of the 
upper tertiary zone of the North-West ; and we have seen that they are 
quite unconnected with any feature of the tertiary zone of the middle 



550 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXIII. 

Himalayas. With, the intrbduction of these new features, characteristic 
of the north-western region, the two chief structural features of the 
Sub-Himalayas in the middle region — the N^han-Siwalik and Nahan- 
Sirmur boundaries — become extinct. These boundaries have siheady 
been interpreted as primarily unconformities, marking decided divisions 
in the tertiary series ; and thus we already find established, in the middle 
of the Kangra area, the difficulty to be confronted throughout the tertiary 
Series of the North- West, the absence of any well-marked stratigraphi- 
cal horizons. 

Extinction of the NahaniSiwalik boundary.— This boundary, as 
described to the east (p. 537),;witTi top Siwaliks abutting at various angles 
against crushed Nahan beds kloiig a very zig-zag' line of junction, con- 
tinues all along ihe Pinjor dlin to beyond Nalagarh, 16 miles north-east 
6f Rupar (Roopur), where lofty terraces of brown Siwalik clays lie flatly 
close up to the ridge of crushed red N^han rocks. Seen in such juxta- 
position as this, the possibility of a conformable transition between the 
two would appear out of the question j yet <such is apparently the case 
within 15 miles to the north-west. North of Anandpur, low flanking 
hills, formied of these same upper Siwali|c strata, turned up and vertical, 
rise in front of the ridge of the red rpeks. A section is recorded just 
north of Nanowal (close to Anandpur), where the very strata forming 
the dKn turn up, within a spa<3^^ 100 yards, from being horizontal to 
a dip of 80° to south-west ; in the section to the north they pass down 
into the ^rey rocks bf the middle Siw'aliks. On this section, under 
Naina Devi peak, 'there is still an abrupt, probably faulted, contact of 
the grey arid the red rOcks, all being parallel and vertical ; but on the 
continuation of the same strike, where the Sutlej cuts a deep gorge 
through the ridge, and the section is fully exposed, it is impossible to 
draw a line between the two types of rock. Within 10 miles farther 
to the north-west any semblance of a coritinii'ation bf the original Nahan- 
Siwalik' boundary is lost j the dip flattens, and the Naina Devi ridge, as 
defined by a core of the harder rocks, disappears, all the strata rolling 
over round the end of the ridge. 

In the annexed figures an attempt is made to. illustrate the inter- 
pretation put upon the observed facts. Throughout the western region 
superficial features of the same character as those on section B, between 
a and c, are interpreted as great faults ; where beds several thousand feet 
apart in geological position are found in abrupt contact. The reasons 
for taking such a totally different view of like features in the eastern 
sections are : 1st, that the horizontal features (the outlines in plan) 
of the jimction are strikingly difEererit ; in the west they observe a 



Sxtra-Peninsular. ] THE kangra area. 551 

straight or very flatly curved course throughout great distances, while in 
the Simla region the Nahan-Siwalik boundary is extremely and sharply 
irregular in dire'ction ; and 2ndly, one section of the actual contact was 
observed here, giving independent and absolute evidence against faulting 
in that position. The reading to be taken from these sections is, that the 
disturbance began earlier, or progressed much more rapidly, in the east, and 
took effect as elevation over a broader area, entailing a greater denuda- 
tion of the lower group along the axis and in its neighbourhood ; while in 
the west the disturbance took effect as greater compression of the flexure 
and a more contracted elevation. In both cases deposition progressed 
continuously and conformably in the adjoining ground, and the latest 
accumulations gradually overlapped the denuded eastern area, pro- 
ducing extreme local unconformity along a narrow belt of outcrop, 
while the same beds in the western section became involved in the 
continued compression of the flexure at that point. 

The Sutlej at Bubhor. — The explanation just given of the change 
in the Nahan-SiwaJik boundary, and its disappearance westwards, may 
seem somewhat fanciful, invblAring extreme unbonf ormity and continuous 
sequence of strata within a very narrow space ; but we find in this very 
ground, in one of the sections compared (that of the Sutlej through the 
Naina Devi ridge at Bubhor), most remarkable independent proof of that 
slow, creeping action of the disturbing forces which is all that is required 
for the result claimed. The same facts will furnish a very striking 
instance of the statement akeady made regarding the composition of the 
Siwalik rocks in relation to the actual rivers, and the pre-Siwalik age of 
the segreat drainage channels. 

The Upper Siwaliks at Bubhor are entirely formed of coarse 
conglomerates, just like the shingle in the river bed; and the grey 
middle Siwaliks are pebbly throughout, all being vertical as in the 
figured section Aj while within 5 to 10 miles on either side of the 
river, common brown clays constitute the bulk of the upper group, con- 
glomerates being quite subordinate. The same distribution of deposits 
is observable in the outer Siwalik range, the case being analogous to 
that already described for the Jumna and the Siwaliks of Dehi-a (p. 541). ^ 
Instead df making a passage through the strong conglomerates opposite the 
gorge at Bubhor, the river has crept round by Rup£r, where the strata 
forming the range are altogether clays. It seems impossible to avoid 
the inference, that the Siwalik conglomerates of Bubhor were formed when 
already the Sutlej had been fixed in its present position by a gorge 
in the axis of the Naina Devi ridge, formed of the tilted Nahan, or 
Lower Siwalik strata, which are still an apparent conformity with the said 
conglomerates. 



552 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXIII. 

This is not a conjectural inference, as in the case of the boundaiy, 
but one that scarcely admits of an alternative ; as it would be more 
wonderful still to suppose that the river kept its position throughout all 
that disturbance, without any initial obligatory point in the neighbour- 
hood above Bubhor. Besides, the deposits in question are such as are 
only found near the mouth of a torrential gorge. After that gorge was 
first marked out in the rising flexure of the Nahan strata, the river must 
have scattered its boulders and gravel over a wide space on either side ; 
while at the same time the flexure was steadily encroaching, and so slowly 
as not to break the continuous parallelism of the series, the lowest bed 
of which may have been vertical before the highest was deposited. The 
required result can easily be imagined with the aid of the figured section, 
page 550: a greater concentration of the flexure would change the local 
overlap-unconformity in figure B into the apparent conformity of 
figure A.^ 

This conclusion as to the age of the Naina Devi ridge, the second (from 
the outside) of the Siwalik ranges on the Stitlej, must bear some weight 
in the discussion of the equivalence or otherwise of certain analogous 
or homologous deposits, external or internal to that range. But it must 
not be forgotten in this connexion, that this case of the Nahan-Siwalik 
boundary has suggested a longitudinal as well as a transverse progressibn 
in the disturbing action, so that analogous deposits on the same continu- 
ous zone need not be, or cannot be, strictly equivalent in time, any more 
than exactly similar deposits in the several successive homologous 
zones. 

Extinction of the Nahan-Sirmur boundary— The Nahan-Sirmrfr 
boundary of the Simla region and of the Nahan area is one and the same 
as the main boundary of the middle Himalayas (p. 528) — the junction of the 
tertiary Sub-Himalayan formations with the old rocks of the higher moun- 
tains. The presence of the Sirmdr outlier on the Lower Himalayas of the 
Simla region does not alter this condition, which continues in force for 
some distance into the Kangra area. For a length of 20 miles near 
the Sutlej a ridge of old limestone, along this junction, separates the 
Sirmur outKer from the Sub- Himalayan zone. Near Belaspur this ridge 
trends to east of north, and Sirmur rocks take its place at the boundary,, 
while the ridge crosses the Sutlej at Dihar; but just beyond the river 
it dies out in the raidst of nummulitic clays. 

The presence of the Sirmiir rocks, composed in their upper measures 
of distinctly Sub-Himalayan deposits, enabled us to discuss the nature of 

1 The necessary distortion of these sections, to make the lines visible, gredtly reduces the 
verisimilitude of the features. 



Extra-Peninsular. J THE KANGRA AREA. 553 

this main boundary, with the result that it is probably of pre-N5han 
origin. Evidence to the same effect is found on the continuation of the 
boundary up to the Sutlej. Although the lower Siwalik (N^han) rocks 
of the MaUog and Nalagarh hills are greatly disturbed and deeply eroded, 
no trace of the distinctive rocks of the contiguous Sirmurs has been 
detected ; on the contrary, we find here strong additional evidence of the 
asserted unconformity in the eastern region. Although clearly on the 
prolongation of the Niihan_zone, the rocks of the Mailog hills do not 
olosely resemble the corresponding rocks of the Nahan areaj the massive 
lignite sandstone is not developed, red clays and hard sandstones pre- 
vail, like those at the base of the section at Nahan, and where higher beds 
occur, they are different from any seen to the east. They come in gradu- 
ally along the , main boundary, and are in force in the valley of. the 
Gamrola and at the Sutlej. They consist principally of thick conglo- 
meratic sandstones, and the debris is largely composed of Sirmiir rocks^ 
including the Subdthu nummulitics. Thus it is clear that the older 
tertiaries were indurated and undergoing denudation at the time when 
these Gamrola conglomerates were deposited. Whether these latter are 
really of lower Siwalik age is a point upon which some remarks will be 
presently made. 

The boundary continues in a very direct line nearly due north, for some 
20 miles beyond the Sutlej, into the basin of the Bias. The contrasting 
■characters are well displayed nearly^ to the end, soft grey conglomeratic 
sandstones dipping flatly eastwards, close up to dark red clays and hard 
purple sandstones of the Sirmur zone, with a high dip in the same 
direction. At one spot, near Dubrog, a contact is obscurely seen : coarse 
conglomerates, here containing well-rounded boulders of quartzite and 
pneiss, 2 feet in diameter, shivered to splinters in situ by the crushing 
they had undergone, are found jumbled together with the red rocks, and 
not confined to a definite vertical band ; the conglomerate occurs in situ 
at 100 yards east of an outcrop of the red rocks, indicating a steep over- 
lap or a broken fault. Higher beds come in rapidly to the north, on the 
upthrow side, indicating the dying out of the dislocation ; and at last the 
strata are continuous across the prolongation of " the main boundary " of 
the eastern region, so that here- one can pass without any break from the 
N^han zone into the Sirmur zone ; and the fresh-looking conglomeratic 
top beds of the former appear to be in regular sequence with the Sirmur 

series. 

The invasion of the Sirmur zone by the rocks of the Nahan zone is 
not however, complete. Another independent dislocation some 4 miles 
to the east-takes the place of the extinct boundary^overlapping its end 



554 GEOLOCtY OF INDIA~SUB-HlMALAyAS. [Chap. XXIII. 

and running to the north-west in a broad curve, parallel to the shore of 
the great bay of the tertiary formations, near the head of which the 
JBias issues from the mountains. After a run of about 40 miles this 
substitute dislocation ceases, and is again replaced near Barwarna (5 
miles south of Palampur) by an exterior line of boundary, on about th^ 
prolongation of the old main boundary. The recurrence of a similar 
feature on the same strike looks as' if an early line of upheaval had been 
Tvorn down and overlapped by later deposits ; but this suggestion of the 
Underground direct continuity of these equivalent boundaries on opposite 
sides of the Bias may be only imaginary. It is perhaps more likely ithat 
the peculiarly symmetrical arrangement of these structural lines near the 
Bias should be a necessary adaptation of the planes of fracture in the 
tertiary basin to 'the form of the compressing surface. From Barwarna the 
restored Nahan-Sirmur boundary becomes again a very permanent feature, 
traceable continuously through the Jamu hills to near the Jhelum. To the 
north-west of the Sutlej, however, where the Sirmur series takes its place 
in the Sub- Himalayan zone, this line of junction can no longer be styled 
the main boundary ; this title must be reserved for the contact of the 
tertiary rocks with the old rooks of the mountains (p. 539) j and although 
the hills of the Sirmdr zone have a very markedly greater elevation than 
those of the newer tertiary area, there is always a greater orographieal 
contrast accompanying the change from the tertiaries to the old rocks. 

DiflElculties of classification in the Kangra area.— We have now 
lost sight of the features which enabled us to trace exact divisions in 
the tertiary series in the N^han area. Even the great boundary which in 
the north-west, as in the Simla region^ separates an inner zone of lower 
tertiary rocks, is partially obliterated in the neighbourhood of the Bias, 
where one can pass from conglomerates of Siwalik type down to nummu- 
litic beds without apparent stratigraphical break. Unconnected virith those 
boundaries we found in the Kangra area great persistent lines of separa- 
tion, having more distinctly the stamp of dislocations. If one could 
frankly accept these lines as faults, pure and simple, in a completed. series 
of deposits, such as can be represented in a diagram, the cotrelation of 
the fetrata would be an easy matter; for. in each area so cut off, we find 
a sequence of deposits having a very decided general likeness, marked by 
harder, redder beds at the base, and by conglomeratic beds at top. Two 
considerations are, however, always present to sap one's confidence in 
such ready identifications. There is the condition of the almost incred- 
ibly slow creeping manner in which the features of disturbance were 
produced; so that, although we must accept these lines of dislocation as 
primarily fractures, there can be no certaiiity that the fault is of later 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE kangRA area. 555 

date than strata found disturbed in its immediate neighbourhood — that 
the conglomerates on the upthrow side of the Ghambar fault are not older 
than similar beds in unbroken sequence with fractured strata on the down- 
throw side. And from the other point of view it is to be remembered, 
that from late nummulitic times the conditions of deposition of these 
tertiary rocks have been very much alike^rain and river accumulations, 
on the margin, and from the debris, of the Himalayan region : so that 
a conglomerate of an .early diluvial zone might be undistinguishable from 
a very much newer rock in an outer zone of the same geological field, and 
thus utterly stultify the prima facie conclusion of their geological equi- 
valence. 

A couple of examples will illustrate the difiiculty of any detailed 
delineation of equivalent stratigraphical horizons in the Sub-Himalayas' 
of the North-West.i 

Bubhor and Belaspur sections compared.-^In the section on 
the Sutlej above Bubhor, fossils are found rather frequently in the middle 
Siwaliks, at a defined horizon, below some 4,000 to 5,000 feet of conglo- 
merates. Proceeding up the river, we find, below and above Belaspur, 
between the Ghambar fault and ' the main boundary, a succession of 
strata that would in many respects answer to those of the Bubhor section : 
the hard red beds at the base are exactly similar ; the middle grey beds 
are only more massive in the Bubhor section; but the conglomerates 
are quite different. The massive beds of Bubhor contain exclusively 
the rounded" hard shingle only found in and near the great Himalayan 
torrents, whereas the conglomerates along the Nahan-Sirmiir junction 
in the Gamrola valley near Belaspur, even where cut by the Sutlej, 
are made up of local debris, principally of the hard sandstones of the 
Sirmurs, but containing also pieces of the softer fossiliferous num- 
mulitic beds of the Subathu group. The lithological contrast is fully 
exhibited on the spot, for all about Belaspur, up to 200 feet over the river, 
there is a thick deposit of old Sutlej shingle, just like theSiwalik conglo- 
merates of Bubhor, but probably of post-tertiary age, corresponding to 

1 In the description of this area puhlished in 1864 (Mem. G. S. I., Vol. Ill) an arbi- 
trary' compromise had to be made on this score, as time did not admit of a further study of 
the ground. The Nahan zrone was distinctively coloured up to the Sutlej ; hut in the country 
beyond, much the larger area being occupied by the higher beds, of presumably Siwalik age, 
the whole of that area was coloured as Siwalik, rather than attempt to put in from memory 
the outcrops of the lower horizons, presumably Nahan, along the several lines of upheaval. 
A compromise on similar grounds was made in the prolongation of the Sirmur zone, on 
account of the total depression of the bottom nummulitic beds, and the appearance of higher 
beds, unlike any in the typical area. The paper referred to contains many more details 
than can be given here. 



556 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXIII. 

the similar boulder gravel capping the low hills of the Siwalik beds at 
Bubhor. 

The easiest solution of the ease is to accept these Gamrola conglo- 
merates as upper N^ban beds ; the fact, that Siwalik conglomerates ho^d a 
like relation of apparent conformity to lower Nahan beds in the Bubhor 
section, being disposed of through the peculiar conditions of deposition and 
disturbance shewn to have obtained in the Sub-Himalayan region. The 
case may be either complicated or simplified by the fact that farther 
north, along the same boundary at Dubrog, as already mentioned, conglo- 
merates of the coarse shingle type are in force. As these descriptions are 
taken from a very cursory examination of the ground, it is likely that- 
a proper survey will make all clear. ' Meantime such suggestions as are 
.given may be of service to passing observers. 

Doubtful beds in the Sirmur zone. — Our next example is taken 
from the Sirmur zone. The structure of this rock- series in its typical 
ground, the outlier on the Lower Himalayan border, is somewhat different 
from what it is when forming an inner zone of the Sub-Himalayan 
area, from immediately north of the Sutlej. In the former position the 
lowest beds, the Subathu nummulitjcs, are always freely exposed in the 
low ground at the edge of the area, and detached patches occur outside 
the principal area ; whereas the nummulitie beds, north of the Sutlej are 
last found on rather high ground in the middle of the band, in the 
axis of an anticlinal flexure, and the highest beds of the series appear 
along the innra- junction, dipping at a high angle towards the old rocks 
of the high mountains. It is so at least till we approach the flanks of 
the Dhauladh^r range. As already explained, this inner Sirmur line is 
now the main boundary of the whole section, and its general regularity 
of direction, combined with the features noticed, is suggestive of fault- 
ing. According to the arrangement described, the top beds of all are 
found at the apex of the curved inner boundary, a littlei north of the 
Bias. Between DrSng and Haurbagh soft light grey sandstones, undis- 
tinguishable from Siwalik rock, are succeeded by clays and conglo- 
merates. The highest beds are exposed in the hill at Sih, and consist of 
massive bands of coarse breccia, rather than conglomerate, being com- 
posed of large and small angular debris of the cherty limestone and of 
the pink sandstone occurring in the ridge close by, towards which the 
conglomerates dip at 40". 

The peculiarly local character of these top deposits is very puzzling. 
It suggests some almost necessary modification of the simply faulted 
nature of the boundary, for the proximity to the old rocks at the time 
of formation must have been somewhat like what it is now. But the 



Extra-Peninsular.] the kangra aeea. 557 

strangest fact is, that although made up entirely of the Himalayan rocks 
recognisable in the ridge close by to the east, the most abundant rock of 
that ridge is not represented in the breccia, although in the actual talus 
of the ridge it asserts its necessary predominance. That rock is eruptive. 
The suggestion is very strong, that the iatrusion of the igneous rock is 
of later date than these tertiary deposits ; and this is the only observa- 
tion by the Survey confirmatory of that made by General Straehey in 
Kumaun (see page 543), that the trap-rock of the Lower Himalayas is of 
tertiary age. No case of intrusion amongst tertiary beds has been noticed 
in the Bias area, where trap is in great force in the higher hills of Mandi. 
It is worth mentioning that no debris of tertiary rocks was found in these 
conglomerates of Sih. 

Thus again here, within the inner zone of tertiary rocks, at the main 
boundary with the old rocks of the Lower Himalayas, and 50 miles from 
the outer zone of the SiwaUks, there are rocks which confront us as being 
possibly of Siwalik age ; but the presumption is that they are older. 

Want of fossils. — That so much disquisition should have been ex- 
pended upon this diflBculty, is already an admission that fossil evidence has 
hitherto failed us. But even this negative fact must at present have 
some weight in the argument. There is no recorded case of a fossil being 
found in these innermost beds of upper tertiary aspect, nor indeed in any 
upper beds inside the Ghambar fault, although that area includes a large 
portion of the Kangra district, and the whole of the ground known as 
the Kangra valley, where for many years Europeans have been accus- 
tomed to reside. The greater part of that area, moreover, between the 
lower tertiary zone and the Ghambar fault, is occupied by rocks 
which, but for the stratigraphical difficulties mentioned, would be taken 
at once as equivalents of the accepted Siwaliks of the Bubhor section. 
Whatever horizon those beds belong to, it may be confidently expected 
that fossils are to be found in them ; but it is well to emphasize the 
significance that may belong to any organic remains obtained from 
the Kangra valley. 

The base of the Dhauladhar range. — The features of the 
tertiary contact-zone, on the north of the Kangra district, along the base 
of the Dhauladhar, present peculiar features of interest. Nowhere else are 
these late deposits brought so near to the oldest Himalayan rocks. , Above 
the sanitarium of Dharmsala, which stands on the Sirmur zone, the space 
is not more than one mile between the tertiaries and the "central 
gneiss," which rises precipitously in the rugged crest of the Dhauladhar 
to above 16,000 feet in elevation. As might be expected, the general 
stratigraphical features are different in such a position from those of the 



558 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXIII. 

Lower Himalayan region. The general view suggested at first sight 
is, that the -gneigsi occupies the axis, of a huge folded flexure, in which 
even the Siwaliks partook. This view would agree with, the opinion 
sometimes expressed, that the whole Himalayan mountains have been 
upraised since a late tertiary date ; and indeed the prodigious, disturb- 
ance the tertiary rocks have undergone is sufficie^it testimony of the 
great changes that have been effected- within that time. It would, 
however, be most difficult to maintain that the tertiary rocks had ever 
extended much beyond their present limits. This can at least b^ 
asserted for the beds immediately outside the Sirmur zone : the enormous 
accumulation of tertiary river-shii;igle conglomerates along the base 
of the range west of Bhagsu to beyond the Ravi implies the proximity 
of an area of erosion to the north. 

The case is difEerent f6r the Sirmur series ; and increasingly so to 
the west. At Dharmsala these rocks afEect a synclinal structure next 
to the majn boundary, but the junction is well defined. At some spots 
to the west, as along the Chaki, the Sirmur beds are scarcely, if at all, 
represented ; and at the western extremity of the range, over the Ravi, 
they are so crushed together with the older rocks as to be inseparable from 
them, or else so altered as to be unrecognisable. The particular section 
referred to is at the head of a great fan on the left bank of the Ravi 
below Simliu, where the Sirmdr beds pass transitionaUy into a green 
pseudo-amygdaloidal trappoid rock, very similar to a rock of the Pir 
Panj^l that is currently axjcepted as trappean. The section is so distinct 
as to have suggested that the Panjal rock would turn out to be ^tered 
Sirmurs. This conjecture has not been confirmed; but it illustrates 
the degree to which the lower tertiary rocks are implicated in the 
structural features of the Dhauladhar. It is worth mentioning that on 
an outer outcrop in this position, a bed with obscure leaf marks was 
found, exactly like that of Kasauli, and so far suggesting the integrity 
of the Sirmur group. 

The Mandi rock-salt.> — As it is still a disputed point whether the 
rock-saltof Mandi belongs to the Sub-Himalayan orthe Iiower Himalayan 
rocks, it will be most appropriate to notice it in this section treating 
of the Kangra district. The rock is known in the country as " black, 
salt," in contradistinction to the pure mineral of the Salt Range. It has" 
a dark, purplish hue, is quite opaque, and contains about 25 per cent, 
of earthy matter, the salt itself being nearly pure sodium chloride. It 
is only used by the poorer classes, after being subjected to a purifying 

1 Mem. G. S. I,, in, Pt. 2, p. 6a 



5xtra-Peninsiilar. J THE kangra area. 559 

process by fire and water. Small nests of crystalline salt occur, but 
so rarely as to be reserved for the use of the Rajah and his household. 
The mines or quarries are at Drang and Guma, 14. miles apart. 

The salt occurs in a constant position, at a short distance within the 
well-defined boundary between the tertiary sandstones and the slaty 
calcareous rocks, apparently all belonging to the Lower Himalayan series, 
which are here, on the margin of the Bias basin, in a state of extreme 
disturbance, with abundant trappean intrusion. Its occurrence in a 
constant position along the general strike of the associated strata, 
and the distinct lamination in the rock itself, sufficiently prove its 
sedimentary origiu. But besides the earthy matter, laminated or 
difBused, the salt commonly contains small angular pebbles, principally 
of pink quartzite ancj of limestone, very like the rocks of the adjoining 
ridge j and where the salt itself is wanting, this character is often 
found in a calcareous rock in the same position in the section, as in the 
Suk^ti, a few hundred yards above its confluence with the Bias, and 
again in the Kangra district, in the river east of Blr (Beer). 

The presence of these pebbles may have suggested to Mr. Theobald 
his opinion,! that the salt-rock o£ Mandi and the narrow band of rock 
between it and the main boundary are of nummuHtic age. The fact 
already mentioned, that the Subathu nummulitie beds are not found 
in a recognisable form throughout the greater part of the Sub-Himalayan 
zone in the Kangra area, gives at least negative support to this conjecture ; 
and positive support may be found in the fact observed in this same 
area, as mentioned in the preceding section, how the nummulitie rocks 
here have been to some extent disguised beyond recognition, so as to be 
more akin in appearance to the old rocks than to their real associates of 
the tertiary zone. 

North-western termination of the Kangra area.— The outer 
Siwalik range of the Kangra area does not cross the Bias. The second 
(Parwain) range, also of that region, ends at Pathankot, east of the Ravi. 
This extinction in echelon of the outer Sub-Himalayan ranges is 
structural, and not merely due to denudation. It will be shewn that the 
termination of the Dhauladhar east of the Ravi is probably of a similar 
nature, and the coincidence of these homologous features in the newest 
and oldest rocks in this terminal Himalayan region is noteworthy, 
although no very direct connexion can be suggested, except that the 
reduction of dimensions of the mountain- features took place in a like 
fashion in each zone, whether synchronously or not. 

' MS. report. 



560 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXIIL 

Tub Jamu aeea : boundaries.— Jamu (Jummoo) is the capital of 
the Sub-Himalayan territories^ and the winter residence, of the Maharaja, 
of Kashmir j and the name may appropriately be taken for this section of 
the Sub-Himalayan zone, the limits of the area being also very well 
marked by physical characters.^ The Jhelum is the western boundary, 
where its course lies in the axis along which aU the strata bend at an 
acute angle from their Himalayan strike into that of the mountains of 
Hazara and of the Salt Range, on account of which fact it has been 
chosen as the limit between the Himalayas proper and the Punjab hill 
regions, described in the preceding chapter. The west boundary of 
Jamu is the Ravi, which also coincides with a very marked stratigraphi- 
cal node. 

Special feature. — As the peculiar expansion of the Nahan zone 
of the Sub- Himalayas in the Kangra area corresponded with the ex- 
tinction of the Lower Himalayan region, so the most peculiar character 
of the Sub- Himalayan region of Jamu, is the expansion of the Sirmiir 
zone, taking its rise from the abrupt extinction of the Dhauladhar axis 
at the Ravi. This inward step of the lower tertiary zone corresponds 
with that of the outer zone : the two outer Siwalik ranges of the Kangra 
area having died out, the outermost range of the Jamu area occurs on 
the prolongation of the Badsar-Nurpur dislocation. 

Sirmur zone at the Ravi. — The change of features from the 
Kangra to the Jamu area is otherwise so decided, that it is remarkable that 
the two master-dislocations of the Kangra area — the Ghambar-Basauli and 
the Badsar-Nurpur faulted flexures — continue without a check or turn 
across the Ravi. The contrast thgy present in this way with the 
boundaries of the inner tertiary zone is very, sliriking : th,e . Sirmilr band 
makes two abrupt, nearly rectangular, bends at the Ravi ; and the river 
runs for about 7 miles in a south-south-west direction along, not across, 
the local strike, where the whole series of formations bends round across 
the termination of the gneissic axis of the Dhauladhar. The condition of 
the Sirmur rocks at their inner contact suggests, as already described, 
complete participation in the intense contortion of the older rocks ; while 
on the outside, the Sirmiirs are in sharp contrast with comparatively fresh- 
looking conglomerates. These are enormously thick, but not very coarse, 
as the upper Siwalik conglomerates always are near the great rivers. 
Debris of the Sirmur sandstone occurs in these old ' conglomerates,; but 

• The maps published with the following papers are on the same scale, and, when joined 
together, give a fair view of the feattn-es noticed in the text;— Sub-Himalayan Country 
between the Ganges and the Ravi, Mem, G. S, I., Ill ; Jamu and Pir Panjal, Kec, G. S. I., IX j 
North-West Punjab, Bee. G. S. I.,- X. 



Extra-Peninsular.] the jamu AREA. 561 

here again it was observed that the pseudo-amygdaloidal trappoid rock 
is not represented,, although it constitutes at present the most abundant 
detritus at the surface. These outer rocks, too, are greatly disturbed, 
being for the most part vertical along the south-south-west strike, so 
that we cannot say that they have not been, subjected to the whole 
disturbing action ; and the abrupt contact of beds of very different hori- 
zons would suggest faulting. Taking everything into consideration, 
however, it seems probable that this line of junction is not primarily a 
fracture, or at least that its form has been determined by local features of 
the surface, in the same position as those now so conspicuously developed. 
It is an illustration in this ground of the slow process of growth of the 
mountain structure, already illustrated from other sections. 

Western espansiou of Sirmur zone. — The suppressed and dis- 
guised condition of the Sirmur zone is one of the peculiarities of the 
Sub-Himalayas of Kangra, where the Subathu (nummulitie) group has 
not been detected throughout a distance of more than 100 miles south- 
east of the Rdvi. The expansion of this zone and the free exposure of 
the bottom group, and even of the supporting rocks, are, on the con- 
trary, the most marked features of the Sub-Himalayan area of Jamu. 
In this last respect the Jamu tract resembles the original Sirmur area 
in the Lower Himalayas of the Simla region, except that in the 
latter instance the tertiary strata lie as outliers on the old rocks of the 
mountains, whereas in Jamu the old rocks appear as inliers in the 
Sirmur zone. This comparison might only imply a relation of degree 
in the amount of denudation the two areas had undergone; but the 
case is far otherwise : there is a great difference in the stratigraphical 
relations of the two rock-series in the east and in the west, confirm- 
ing in a very marked way the opinions arrived at, from the study of 
the upper tertiary groups, regarding the growth of the> mountain- 
system. It ,is also to be particularly remarked that in Jamu as in 
Kangra, but not in the Sirm,ur area, the nummuhtic rocks never occm- 
at the inner boundary of the zone. 

At the R^vi the Sirmdr band is less than a quarter of a mile wide. 
It expands gradually to nearly 20 miles at the road from Jamu to 
Kashmir; at Rajauri it is reduced to 12 miles; and farther on, at the 
Punch, it is nearly 30 miles wide. As in the case of the upper 
tertiaries of the Kdngra area, this expansion and irregularity is due to 
the unsteadiness of the inner (main) boundary — a character which 
appears to shew that that boundary is more probably due to original i 
features of the ground, than to subsequent faulting; while the outer 

' See note, p. 528. 

L 1 



562 GEOLOaY OP INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXIII. 

' boundary is very steady in directionj and is clearly connected with faulted 
flexures. This latter feature dies out in an anticlinal axis to the north-west 
of Kotii on the Pdnch^ before reaching the Jhelum j and to the south-east, 
except for its concealment at the Bias, it is more or less continuous with 
the Nahan-Sirmiir boundary of the Simla region, the "main boundary^' 
of the tertiary zone in the middle Himalayan region. This resemblance 
or even correspondence with the main boundary of the Lower Himalayas 
east of the Sutlej is further increased by the appearance of the 
great limestone inliers along this line in Jamu ; yet the discussion of 
the feature in the Simla region seemed to be against its being primarily 
a fault there. 

Within 15 miles of the Ravi, above the village of Marun, over the 
Pain (Pine) river, a thin calcareous layer with nummulites was observed, 
high in a thick section of red shaly clays at the outer edge of the Sirmur 
zone. The occurrence of even these upper Subdthu beds along this 
boundary is not, however, constant. On the contrary, something like 
a regular succession of high and low beds, occupying alternating inter- 
vals across the Sirmur zone, as of waves along the strike, is very observ- 
able in the Jamu area. It is well exhibited in connexion with the 
great inliers. 

Inliers, — These protruding masses of old rocks within the Sirmur 
zone occur in two pairs: the Lapri and Sangar-Marg ridges on the 
Chinabj and the Ranjoti and Debigarh ridges near the Punch. ■ They 
are formed of hard limestone, conjectured to be of palseozoie age, with 
subordinate flaggy sandstones, and they stand out high above the 
surrounding tertiary strata, — a result due proximately to denudation. 
Lapri has an elevation of 9,914 feet, and seems to be protruded abruptly 
through the red beds of the Sirmurs, no distinctively Subathu beds having 
been observed near it. Sangar-Marg, 6,676 feet high, is the largest of 
these inliers, being more. than 30 miles long, and 5 to 8 miles wide; the 
Chinab passes by a deep gorge exactly through its centre, just above 
Biassi. 

Characters of the Subathu group.— The marked character of the 
bottom Subathu ■ beds makes it easy to distinguish the base of the ter- 
tiary series. The composition of this group* in the Jamu area differs 
from that exhibited where the formation was originally described in the 
Simla region. In the latter ground the calcareous element is very sub- 
ordinate and scattered, whereas throughout the Jamu hills all the lime- 
stone is concentrated in a steady and purely calcareous band near the base 
of the group. It is constantly underlaid by a band of carbonaceous shales 
not found in the Simla region, and often including a cpaly layer. Thus it 



Extra-Peninsular. J THE JAMU AREA. 563 

would be very easy to distinguish lithologically an upper and a lower 
division o£ the Subathu group in this western area. But the most con- 
stant rock of all is the pisolitie ferruginous clay already mentioned as the 
bottom rock in the Subathu section, an exactly similar bed to which is 
found in the same position all through the Jamu hills ; and the same 
occurs again in the Salt Range, where, at the east end at least, the 
nummulitic group is represented by these three bottom bands of the 
Subathu group of the Jamu region. This fact is noticed here in 
order to record a suggestion regarding this peculiar bottom bed : in some 
respects it very much resembles a form of the high-level laterite of the 
peninsular area, the differences being easily attributable to contin^ 
gencies that have affected the Himalayan rocks ; its remarkable constancy 
over so large an area is also a strong point of similarity with the laterite, 
in which this uniformity, at great distances and when surrounded by very 
different rocks, is so puzzling a character ; and lastly, this Subdthu 
bottom bed is on the geological horizon, already suggested ' as probable 
in the case of the high-level laterite formation of the peninsula, and a 
similar rock has been already noticed on the same horizon in Guzerat,^ 
Kachh,^ and Sind.* 

Relation of tertiary to palesozoic rocks. — In Sangar-Marg and 
in the western inliers the original relations of the tertiary series to 
the old rocks is fully exposed, and in all it presents itself as perfectly 
. parallel superposition. It is diflBcult to conceive that a junction of palseo- 
zoic and tertiary strata can really be conformable, and a close examination 
will no doubt reveal some discordance j but it is certain that through 
all the contortions exhibited in these rocks the same contact beds 
are found together over large areas, and are, locally at least, quite 
conformable. This local conformity is exhibited at the very crest 
of the ridges ; so these must be altogether due to disturbance of post- 
nummuUtic date. 

At many points all over the Sangar-Marg, ridge, the SubSthu bottom 
bed rests upon a brecciated sandstone, associated with the great palaeozoic 
limestone of the inliers. An ochrey iron ore has been extensively extracted 
from nests in these shattered top beds of the old formation, having pro- 
bably been derived by infiltration from the coaly and ferruginous beds below 
the nummulitic limestone. In- this great limestone itself the bedding is 

1 Ante, p. 364. The chapter on laterite had unfortunately been printed ofB before this 
remarkahle confirmatory evidence of the theory there put forward as to the origin of high- 
level laterite had been recognised, 

2 Ante, p. 340. 

3 Ante, p. 345. 
• Ante, p. 457. 



564 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS. [ Chap. XXIII. 

often very obscure^ but with such characteristic junction beds the relations 
of the two formations are very well seen : how the old limestone, as yet 
uncontorted, must have formed the floor of the nummulitic deposits, 
and was brought up and exposed on the axes of great complex anti- 
clinal flexures, the cpvering beds having been more or less removed dm-ing 
the process of upheaval. 

At the north-west angle of Sangar-Marg the axis of one of these 
flexures is very well seen, the old limestone disappearing under a saddle of 
the nummulitics, which continue exposed for many miles in the valleys to 
the west, a middle rib of the old limestone appearing again at two points of 
the outcrop. Copious hot sulphurous springs occur at Barmandal in the 
nummulitic coaly beds close to this axis, and again hotter springs at the 
point of the Eanjoti ridge, on the banks of the Prfnch, where a corre- 
sponding anticlinal feature is well seen. Along the valley of the Choti 
Tawi, east of the Chinab inliers, and to the west, in the valley of the 
Bari Tdwi, between the two groups of inliers, much higher beds of the 
Sirmlir series are found, on the very strike of the older rocks, thus shew- 
ing longitudinal undulation of the disturbance, as already mentioned. 

Oompared with sections of Simla region. — The contrast between 
the relations of the Subathu group to the older rocks of the Jamu inliers 
and of the Simla region is a very noteworthy point in the history of 
the Himalayan region. The full effect of the evidence depends a good 
deal upon the identity of the old limestones of the two regions, and 
upon this, as wiU be explained, different conjectures have been offered ; 
but even supposing the Jamu rock to be carboniferous, and the Krol 
limestone to be triassic, the difference would still be important. In both 
areas the parallel superposition shews that the contortion of the old rocks 
occurred after the depositioii of the eocene strata ; in the Simla region, 
however, the nummulitics were deposited close to the limestone, but on 
beds a thousand feet below its horizon, i. e., on an area where the lime- 
stone had been deeply denuded : whereas in Jamu the same nummuli- 
tics were laid down evenly over the limestone itself. Supposing the 
limestones the same, the facts would imply that the eastern area had 
been for long exposed to denudation as a land surface, while the western 
had been by some means protected from erosion. Analogous conclusions, 
as to an earlier elevation of the Lower Himalayan area, have been already 
strongly suggested from a comparison of the Nahan-Sirmur and Siwalik- 
Nahan relations to east and west of the Sutlej. 

Doubtful newer rocks of the Sirmur zone.— In the Sirmur zone of 
the Jamu hills we have again to encounter a puzzle noticed in the Kdngra 
area. Passing west from the Ravi along the inner (main) boundary, higher 
beds in the tertiary series are found, not accounted 'for by difference of 



Extra-Peninsular. ] the jamu area. 565 

elevation, apparent conformable sequence being observed throughout. 
At several places in the upper Tdwi valley, below the Bindi gap, coarse 
massive conglomerates are nearly vertical, close along the boundary. 
The peculiarity of these beds as compared with those noticed in a like 
position at Sih (page 556) is, that the partially rounded shingle of the 
Tawi conglomerates, containing some blocks 2 feet in diameter, is made 
up almost exclusively of bottom tertiary sandstone. 

The question whence was derived this ancient tertiary debris, at the 
present inner edge of the tertiary area, is of much interest. The con- 
glomerates occur just where the river, within 10 miles of its rise on the 
Kiind-Kaplas mountain, 14,241 feet high, crosses the main boundary 
from the north-east. This mountain ridge has not been examined, but 
all the detritus in the river at present is of metamorphic rocks, and there 
is no known occurrence of tertiary sandstones to the north of the Sub- 
Hiinalayan boundary nearer than the basin of the upper Indus in Tibet. 
Their sub-angular condition and size give a strong presumption that the 
blocks of comparatively soft sandstone forming these conglomerates 
have not travelled fer ; and these fragments may possibly have been 
derived from some tertiary rocks exposed by a line of early disturbance 
in the area to the south. The probability seems, however, in favour of 
the blocks having come from the northwards, beyond the present main 
boundary ; and what we know of the processes of disturbance in these 
mountain sections, would admit of a very limited range to this former 
extension of the tertiary deposits. The rocks at the edge of the supposed 
tertiary basin may have been slowly, but abruptly, turned up along a 
monoclinal flexure ; as thus indurated and exposed to denudation, their 
debris may have been laid down in conformable sequence upon their 
undisturbed main area, until the fracture supervened, which resulted in 
the present steep contact with the ancient supporting rocks. Or it 
might be possible to derive these blocks from the exposed top of 
an anticlinal flexure in a former great spread of these lower ter- 
tiaries to the north, possibly continuous with the very similar deposits 
of the Indus valley in Ladak. Independently of geological considera- 
tions the law of parsimony (to favour the least laborious process) inclines 
to the former supposition; and in any case it is highly probable that the 
area of denudation was close by when these conglomerates of coarse 
sub-angular debris were formed. 

The question of the age of these conglomerates of the Sirmur zone 
is rendered more difficult in this position from the fact of their containing 
Sirmdr debris. Independently of this, the great thickness of the series 
implies a great difference of age (in years) between the top and bottom 



56S GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SUB-HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXIII. 

beds ; and it is evident that under the synchronous jsan passu operations of 
disturbance and deposition, as urged for the whole Sub-Himalayan zone, 
the presence or absence of even great local unconformity is of compara- 
tively little import, and thus some ordinary stratigraphical criterions of 
relative age fail us here. There are other beds in this zone that would 
even more directly suggest a much later age than any Sirmilr beds of the 
standard area ; as on the band of depression of the Choti Tdwi, there is a 
considerable thickness of soft pale clays north of Chineni, more like 
upper Siwaliks than anything else. They are topmost beds, but in apparent 
sequence with all the other strata of the Sirmur zone. It would be very 
rash at present to say that any of these rocks are Siwalik j yet it is seem- 
ingly awkward to include, as Sirmur, beds made up of middle Sirmur 
debris. Fossils only can decide these questions, and as yet none have 
been found in these beds. 

Other general features of Sirmur zone. — Such very fresh looking 
rocks as those on the Chota Tawi have not been observed elsewhere in the 
Sirmdr zone of this area, but large portions of the ground have not even 
been traversed. On the Chinab section only low red beds are exposed, 
higher beds prevailing again on the Rajauri section. The course of the 
Jhelum in the Sirmdr zone below Uri is with the strike of the rocks 
along a broken anticlinal, having the usual upthrow to the north. A 
continuation of this feature is traceable southward towards Rajauri ; and 
■ east of the dislocation, in the ridge of the Haji Pir, there is an outcrop 
of Subathu limestone. The principal deformity of the direction of the 
main boundary is north of Rajauri, where there is a broad angular 
projection of the rocks of the Pir Panj^l ; it is in such positions that test 
sections of the true nature of the contact are most likely to be found. 

No study has yet been made of that remarkable feature at Musafar- 
abad, close to the confluence of the Kishenganga and the Jhelum, where 
the main boundary, with the strike of all the rocks and the course of 
the Jhelum, bend at an acute angle (35°) from the direction of the 
Himalayan ranges. The position seems approximately coincident with 
the introduction or expansion of the nummulitic limestone to the 
westward ; and for some little distance on the Himalayan side of the 
bend this rock occurs at the boundary. Such coincidences of original 
with induced stratigraphical characters are often very suggestive of cor- 
rect interpretations. To the south-west of this point, in the Hazara hills 
the whole character of the bottom tertiary zone is changed : instead 
of a continuous main boundary, separating all the tertiary deposits 
from the rocks of the higher range, as in the Himalayan region, we 
find the nummulitic beds folded up promiscuously with the underlying 



Extra-Peninsular. ] THE jamu arka. 567 

formations, resulting in a very patch-work appearance of the outcrops, 
as shewn in a map. Thus the nearest physical equivalent of the main 
boundary of the Sub-Himalayas should be near Abbottabad rather than 
near Murree.^ This contrast might, of course, be due simply to greater 
elevation and denudation of the western area ; but it is probably further 
connected with other original points of difference between the two 
areas, besides the one already mentioned : in the trans- Jhelum ground 
other formations (Jurassic and triassic) are introduced between the 
Subathu group and any representative of the palaeozoic limestone of 
the Jamu inliers. 

The Siwalik-Sirmur boundary. — Pending the palseontological 
determination of the equivalent horizons in these several zones of 
similar rocks, little more can be done than to describe these mere rock- 
features. The outer boundary of the Sirmur zone of the Jamu area, 
on the prolongation of the main boundary of the Lower Himalayan 
region, has ali-eady been noticed as mainly a fault-line. This is strongly 
suggested by the straightness of the feature; and everywhere along ' 
it, beds of different horizons are in contact, till at last, within a few 
miles of the Jhelum, it dies out in an expanded anticlinal flexure, where 
again, as on the JBias, one can pass from the Siwalik to the Sirmur zone 
without a break. Thus this feature, whether > dislocation or not, of 
principal magnitude and persistence throughout the whole Himalayan 
border, comes to an end within the Himalayan limits, not like the more 
simple features of disturbance, recognised as primarily faults or flexures, 
which are continuous with like features beyond the Jhelum. There is one 
remarkable irregularity of this boundary at the Chinab ; and the normal 
direction of the Siwalik zones imdergoes a corresponding deflection in 
this position. At Riassi, where the river passes through the Sarigar- 
Marg inlier, there is a wide bay in the south face of the limestone ridge, 
making a very marked indent in the course of the outer Sirmur 
boundary. 

The Basauli-Naushera fault. — On the Ravi, where a much more 
abrupt twist affects the inner tertiary (Sirmur) zone, it was noted that 
the great dislocations in the SiwaHk zone swept past it with little or no 
deviation. It is not so at the Chinab : the Grhambar-Basauli fault curves 
northwards into apparent, or actual, continuity with the eastern face of 
the Ridssi bay, thus cutting off the inner Siwalik zone of Udampur 
and Kdngra. This effect is, however, not permanent, for an equivalent 
dislocation emerges in continuity with the western side of the bay, 

1 In the North-West Punjab Map, referred to in the note, p. 560, the boundary west of 
the Jhelum, continuous with the main boundary to the east, is probably a junction of upper 
and lower Subathu beds. 



668 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SUB-HIMALAY AS. [Chap- XXIII. 

and forms the Naushera faulted anticlinal, with the Kotli synclinal dun 
between it and the Sirmiir zone, representing the Udampur dun to the 
east. The Naushera dislocation is as important as its eastern representa- 
tive ; it curves round across the Jhelum, north of Mount Narh, passmg 
south-westwards towards Rawalpindi. 

Riassi conglomerates. — The actual continuity of this Basauli- 
Naushera dislocation, round the edge of the Riassi bay, may possibly 
be maintained. There are no observations to settle the point, or to 
shew the relation of this dislocation with the outer Sirmrlr boundary, 
where the two are confluent at the base of Sangar-Marg. Thus 
it would seem that the conglomerates on the • Chinab, in the Riassi 
bay, belong as much to the middle as to the inner Siwalik zone ; 
and there is strong presumption that they correspond in age to the conglo- 
merates of the inner zone on the Ravi, north of Bksauli. In both cases 
the conglomerates occur in force only near the great rivers. 

The outer Siwalik zone.— The Riassi bay is most marked in the 
outer Siwalik zone. The Badsar-Nurpur anticlinal, which is a conspicu- 
ous feature throughout the lower hills of Jamu to beyond the Jhelum, 
where it bends south-westwards to Kahilta, makes a deep swerve north- 
wards at the Chin^bj so that the outermost Siwalik range north of 
Jamu runs due north and south for some distance. This corroborates the 
suggestion that the Basauh-Nausl^era dislocation does actually run up 
to the inner boundary under Sangar-Marg. The elucidation of this 
very exceptional feature, in connexion with the great inlier, would form 
an interesting study. 

Outside the Badsar-Ndrpur flexure there is no great continuous dis- 
location passing across the Jhelum from one direction of strike into the 
other, as in the deeper sections to the north : a number of local independ- 
ent flexures pass off more or less obliquely from the Himalayan strilfc, to 
terminate in a reciprocating manner with the flexures of the Salt 
Range system.^ This arrangement exhibits, in even a more convincing 
manner, a synchronous action in both directions of disturbance. In this 
struggle for room the Salt Range system seems to have had the best of 
it : flexures belonging to it are more persistent in overlapping the 
Himalayan series. The last example of this is the Pabbi or Kharian 
anticlinal ridge, consisting of Siwalik rocks, striking due north-east close 
up towards, and at right angles to, the Sub-Himalayan ranges at 
Bhimbar ; its prolongation for 18 milfes would thus strike the great Siwalik 
dislocations on the Bari Tawi, more than 50 miles from their diversion 
on the Jhelum. This outlying Kharidn flexure is altogether east of the 



1 See maps quoted in note, p. 660. 



Extra-Peninsular.] summary. ' 569 

Jhelum, and forms the only exception to this river forming an exact 
boTindaiy of the Sub-Himalayan system. 

Summary. — As other considerations made it necessary or desirable 
to break up the description of the Sub- Himalayan zone into sections of 
areas iflore or less natural or arbitrary, we must now endeavour to in- 
dicate connectedly the chief points of evidence upon which inferences 
have been based regarding the history of the mountains. 

1. Special Himalayan disturbance altogether post-eocene.— 
Where the original relations of the lowest tertiary deposits, the Sub^thu 
nummulitic group, to the very ancient (palseozoic) rocks of the moun- 
tains are exposed in the Simla region (p. 532) and in Jamu (p. 563), we 
learn that these old rocks had then undergone no ■ contortion, where 
now contortion is extreme. We might thus infer that the Himalayas, 
as a region of special distwrhance, had then made no beginning, and for 
this southern zone of the mountains this inference is conclusive j but there 
are other facts to qualify it as regards an earlier stage of Himalayan 
elevation. 

2. Eocene Himalayan land. — ^The remnant of lowest tertiary 
rocks preserved on the margin of the Lower Himalayas in the Simla 
region, reveals other original relations not elsewhere discoverable — (a) the 
old rocks had here been deeply denuded (p. 533), as by subaerial denuda- 
tion; {b) the Subdthu beds here are very variable in thickness (p. 533), 
suggesting proximity to a hmiit of deposition to the north-east ; (c) the 
marked deficiency in these Sub-Himalayan nummulitics of open sea 
deposits or organisins (p. 531) suggests at least estuarine conditions; [d) 
the regular succession here of deposits of true Sub-Himalayan type 
(pp. 525, 530) carries on this suggestion, implying that bef6re any special 
contorting action had set in, the general conditions of Sub- Himalayan 
deposition had been established by a general (continental) elevation of 
the Himalayan area. The presence of terrestrial plants in the Kasauli 
beds also proves the proximity of land. 

3. Doubtftd extension over the Lower Himalayan area. — 
Even in the Simla region, the border of that eocene Himalayan 
land is only approximately and conjecturally indicated. The inner 
boundary of this Sirmur outlier is quite different from any line of junc- 
tion in the Sub-Himalayan zone (p. 534) : these latter are universally, to 
some extent or other, special features of Himalayan disturbance, forming 
single continuous lines of boundary ; whereas the former is the outcrop 
of an irregular surface of deposition that had subsequently undergone 
simple corrugation and denudation. As regai*ds the country to the north- 
west the absence in the old rocks of Jamu (p. 564) of the denudation 
which is so marked in the Simla region, suggests tjiat the long pre- 



570 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— SUB-HIMALAYAS, [Chap. XXIII. 

tertiary elevation of the Lower Himalayan region had not extended to 
the north-west. The features of the boundary in this direction also 
leave it an open question how far the tertiaries may have extended : we 
find these either amalgamated with the older rocks in their most extreme 
condition of disturbance (p. 558), or in abrupt faulted contact (p. 565), 
both states implying some former extension ; so there remains only the 
fact of composition to suggest that there, too, there was a neighbouring 
eocene land. 

4. Actual Himalayan border defined in middle tertiary times. 
— To the east of the Simla region the case is the reverse of that de- 
scribed to the west : no trace of lowest tertiary rocks has been found 
in the Sub-Himalayan zone in this direction (p. 534) ; the Sirmiir rocks 
seem to have been uplifted, and more or less completely removed by denuda^- 
tion, in early tertiary times (pp. 534, 540), when the present Himalayan 
border was defined. The only connection suggested for the Subathu group 
in the east is the strikingly similar nummulitic beds in the Garo hills, at 
the west end of the Assam range (p. 535). 

5. Its partial extension to the north-west.— This first great act 
of Himalayan disturbance in tertiary times, as just recorded, again resulted 
in the elevation of the Lower Himalayan as compared with the north- 
western area, producing the Nahan-Sirmilr unconformity, and the main 
boundary of the whole middle Himalayas. In the north-west the 
Nahan-Sirmiir boundary is the most important structural feature within 
the Sub-Himalayan zone ; and there, too, it is doubtfully a feature of 
simple dislocation (pp. 560-1). The elevation in the east seems to have 
taken place earlier : seemingly newer rocks occur in the Sirmur zone 
north of the Sutlej than in the Simla region (p. 556). 

6. Himalayan river-gorges in Siwalik times same as now.— 
The great accumulation of conglomerates, and their marked variation 
in quantity and quality in relation to the gi-eat Himalayan torrents, 
are most marked in the outer Siwalik zone (pp. 541^, 551) ; and 
the fact admits of no other explanation than that the gorges of these 
torrents in the adjoining mountains were then in the same positions as 
now, and have not been sensibly changed by the prodigious disturbance 
to which these latest Siwalik deposits have been subjected (pp. 541, 551). 
In the north-west similar accumulation and distribution of conglo- 
merates are found iif the inner Siwalik zones (p. 568). Whether or 
not these prove to be of the same age as those on the outer zone on 
the same section, the fact is again suggestive of the earlier elevation and 
separation of the zones in the middle Himalayas. 

7. Extreme slowness of disturbing action.— The extreme slow- 
ness with which such great operations of disturbance were accomplished 



Extra-Peninsular.] SUMMARY. 571 

is sufficiently attested by the fact related in the preceding paragraph 
regarding the great rivers ; the inference being especially illustrated by 
the case of the Sutlej at Bubhor (p. 551). This ease illustrates, too, a 
constant puzzle in these Sub-Himalayan sections — the close conformable 
sequence between strata that were virtually strongly discordant. The 
same process of simultaneous deposition and disturbance gives us some 
explanation of the prodigious thickness of these deposits — a thickness 
that would appear excessive if the measurements had to be understood as 
vertical dimensions. 

8. Elevation preceded compression.— One important inference 
upon the theory of mountain-formation is apparent from these observa- 
tions on the Sub-Himalayan zone. Special Himalayan disturbance is 
now nowhere more strongly marked than in this fringing zone ; and it has 
all occurred since a middle tertiary date, for the oldest rocks were then 
unplicated in this position. Yet a considerable Himalayan elevation had 
occurred in pre-tertiaay and early tertiary times ; and this elevation 
must, therefore, have been of the nature of a simple protuberance 
(bossellementj ,ox warp, as suggested in De Beaumont's theory of mountain- 
formation ; while some more modern theories seem to require that com- 
pression with contortion should be a first stage in the process of special 
elevation. 



572 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIWALIK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV. 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

SIWALIK FAUNA. 

The later tertiary vertebrate fauna — Siwalik moUusca — Homotaxis of mammalia — 
Eeptiliaii evidence — Siwalik fauna probably pliocene — Stratigraphical evidence of 
age of SiwaBks — Survival of miocene forma in Siwalik beds — Pliocene fauna of 
Pikermi in Attica — Migration -r- Effects of change of climate — Comparative poverty 
of recent mammalian faunas — Relations of Siwalik to Perim Island fauna — Comparison 
with Irawadi fauna — Comparison of Siwalik and recent faunas. 

The later tertiary vertfebrate fauna.— In several of the pre- 
ceding chapters reference has been made to the mammalian fauna 
found in the upper tertiary beds of Northern and Central India, and in 
five instances, — the post- pliocene faunas of the Gangetic plain ^ and of 
the Narbada valley,^ the older pliocene mammalia of Perim Island,* and 
the miocene faunas of Sind* and of Kushalghar^ in the Punjab, — lists of the 
species identified have been given. By far the most important collec- 
tion of mammalian remains found in any Indian formation is, however, 
that of the Siwalik beds ; and as many of the species found elsewhere 
recur in th? Siwalik ar^a of the North- West Provinces and the Punjab, 
it will be useful in the present chapter to give a general account of the 
later tertiary vertebrata of India and Burma.* The following is a 
complete list of all species' hitherto identified in the miocene, phocene, 

» Ante, p. 402. i " P. 471. 

2 P. 385. 6 P. 514. 

s P. 343. I 

5 Crania and teeth of several species, and in two instances, Astragali, are figured in 
Plates XVII, XVIII, XIX, and XX. Eef erences are appended in the list of species. 

? The majority of the tertiary vertebrata of India, discovered by Falconer, Cautley, ' 
Baker and Durand, were described by Falconer, most of whose writings, published and 
unpublished, are collected in his posthumous " Palseontological Memoirs." The greater 
portion, of the following notes are taken from Mr., Lydekker's papers on the Siwalik fauna j 
Kec. G. S. I., IX. pp. 42, 86. 144, 154 ; X, pp. 30, 76, 225 ; XI, p. 64 ; and Pal. Ind., Ser. X, 
Pts. 2 and 3 ; and from some MS. papers by Mr. Theobald, who has collected a large number 
of the fossils described by Mr, Lydekker. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] 



THE LATER TERTIAEY VERTEBRATA. 



573 



and post-pliocene deposits of British India and its dependencies^ the 
distinctly miocene forms of Sind and the Punjab being distinguished by the 
letter M, and the post-tertiary mammals by PI being affixed. To all 
forms that have been found in the Siwalik area, irrespective of horizon, the 
letter S is added ; the species from Perim Island are distinguished by a 
V, and those from the Irawadi valley by I. 



S. Macacus sivalensis. 

S. M., sp. 

S. Semnopithecus, sp. 



MAMMALIA. 
PRIMATES. 



S. ? Semnopiiheeus suhhimalayanus, 

PI. XIX, fig. 11. 
PI. 8., sp. 



CARNIVORA.- 



S. Felis oristata. 
S. F. paltBotigris. 
PI. F., sp. 

S. Mach<Brodus sivalensis. 
S. Pseudcelurus sivalensis. 
ViVEEEiDa; — 

S. Ictitheritim sivalense. 

S. Syeena sivalensis, PI. XIX, 'figs. 
8,10. 
Canid^ — 

S. Canis (Vulpes); sp. 



Uesidj! — 

S. M. AmpMcyon palceindicus, PI. 

XIX, fig. 4 
S. Ursus, sp. 
I. U., sp. 

PI. U. namadicus, PI. XX fig. 6. 
S. Syanarctus sivhlensis, PI. XIX 

fig. 9. 
S. M. palceindicus, 

MiTSTBLIDa: 

S. Mellivora sivalensis. 
S. Meles, sp. 
S. Lufra paleeindica. 
S. Enhydriodon sivalensis, PI. XIX, 
fig. 5. 



PROBOSCIDEA. 



ELEPHANTIDiE — 

S. Elephas (Euelephas) hysudricus, 

PI. XVII, fig. 5. 
PL E. {Euelephas) namadicus, PI. 

XX, figs. 5, 8. 
S. E. (Loxodon) planifrons. 
PI. S. E. (Stegodon) insignia, PI. 

XVII, figs. 1, 1. 
PI. S. E. (Stegodon) ganesa, PI. 

XVII, fig. 2. 
S. E. {Stegodon) sinensis. 
S, E. (Stegodon) bomhlfrons. 



S. I. E. (Stegodon) cliflii. 

S. I. M. (Pentalophodon) sivalensis, 

PI. XVII, fig. 6. 
S. I. P. M. Mastodon (Tetralo- 

phodon) latidens, PI. XVII, fig. 4. 
S. P. M. M. (Tetralophodon) peri- 

mensis, PI. XVII, fig. 3. 
PI. ? M. (Trilophodon) 'pandionis. 
S. M. M. (Trilophodon) falconeri. 

DlNOTHBBID^ — 

P. Dinotherium indieu}n. 
M. D. pentepotamite. 



574 



GEOLOGY OP INDIA— SIWALIK FAUNA. [ Chap. XXIV. 

UN6ULATA. 

A. PJEBISSODACrrLA. 



Rhinoceeotidj; — 

S. Rhinoceros platyrhiniis, 
S. M. R. sivalensis, PL XIX, figs. 1, 3. 
• S. M. R. palcsindictis. 
S. R.planidens. 
I. R. iravadieus, PI. XIX, fig. 2. 
PI. R. namadicus, PI. XX, fig. 9, 
PI. R. deccanensis. 
S. R. 2 sp. 
I. R. sp. 
M. R. 2 sp. 
S. P. I. Acerotherium perimet^se. 



Tapibid^ — 

I. TapirUtS, sp. 

M. Listriodon pentepotamiee, PI. XIX, 

fig. 7. 
S. L. theobaldi. 

S. Hqutcs sivalensis. 
S. E. paltBouus. 
I. K sp. 

PI. £'. namadicus, PI. XX, fig. 4. 
S. Sipparion antelopinum, PI. XIX, 
' fig. 6. 
S. M. S. theobaldi. 



S- ABTIODACTTLA 
HiPPOPOTAMIDa; — 

PL Hippopotamus (Tetraprotodon) 



paleeindicus, PL XX, fig. 7. 
S. S. (Hexaprotodon) 

PL XVIII, figs, 1, 6, 8. 
I. H. {Sexaprotodon) irdvadicus. 
PL H. {Sexaprotodon) namadicus, 

m. XX, fig. 2. 

S. Sippopotamodon sivalensis. 
Tetbaconodontid* — 

S. Tetraconodon magnus, 
SciDJE — 

S. Sus giganteus, PL XVII, fig. 9. 

S. 8. punjahiensis. 

S. P. M. S. hysudricus. 

PL S. sp. 

M. Sanitherium schlagintweiti. 

S. Sippohius sivalensis, PI. XVII, 
fig. 8. 

S. S. sp. 

M. Syopotamus paleeindicus. 
Anoplotheeid^— 

S. Chalicotherium tivalense, PI. 
XVIII, fig. 4. 
Anthbacotheeid^— 

M. Syotlierium sindiense. 



S, I. Merycopotamus dissimilis, PL 

■ XVII, fig. 10. 

M. Anthracotherium silistrense. 

Chmromeryx silistrensis. 

M. Semimeryx, sp. 

M. Sivameryx, 2 sp. 
Ceetid^ — 

S. Cervus latidens. 

S. O. triplidens. 

S. O. simplicidens. 

PL C. namadicus. 

I. C. sp. 

S. M. Dorcatherium majus, PI. XVIII, 
fig. 3. 

S. M. D, minus. 
Ca'melopaedaIiID^ — 

8. Camelopardalis sivalensis. 

S. C. sp. 

P. C. sp. 

S. Siratheriam giganteum, PL XVIII 

fig. 7. 
P. Brahmatherium perimense, PL 

XVIII, fig. 5. 
S. Hydaspitherium megacephalvm, 
S. S. grande. 
S. fi^. leptognathus. 
I. Fj»AM«<Ae>.j«»» iravadicum. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] THE LATER TERTIARY VERTEBRATA. 



575 



B. ABTIOBACTTLA—cojitiiiaei. 



BoviD«— 

♦ S. Bos acutifl'ons. 
S. S. planifroiis. 
S. B. platyrhinus. 
I. B., sp. 

PI. B. namadieus, PI. XX, fig. 3. 
S. B. (Bison) sivalensis. 
PI. S. B. {Buhalus) paleeindicus, 

PL XX, fig. 1. 
S. B. {Buhalus) platycerus. 
S. Peribos occipitalis. 
S. Ainphibos acuticornis, PI. XVIII, 
fig. 2. 



S. Hemibos iriquetncerus, 

XVIII, fig. 1. 
S. Antilope sivalensis. 
S. A. patuUcornis. 
S. A. porrecticornis. 
S. A. palteindica. 
P. A. sp. 
PI. A. sp. 

S. Capra sivalensis. 
S. C. sp. 
P. C. perimensis. 
S. OwJs, sp. 

S. Camelus sivalensis. 



PI. 



MuEIDiE — 

S. Mus, sp. 
PI. M. sp. 



S. Crocodilus crassidens. 
S. C leptodus. 
S. C. palustris, 
P. C. perimensis. 



RODBNTIA. 

SPAlACIDa; 

■ S. Bhizomys sindiensis. 
Hysteicid^ — 

S. Bystrix sivalensis. 

EDENTATA. 
M Manis sindiensis. 

AFES. 

S. Argala falconeri. 

S. Other bones belonging to the order Grallie. 



REPTILIA. 

CROCODILIA. . 

M. Crocodilus, sp. 

PI. a sp. 

I. C. sp. 

S. I. Gharialis gangeticus. 

LACERTILIA. 

S. Varanus sivalensis. 

OPHIDIA. 

S. M. Vertebra indet. 



CHBLONIA. 



S. I. Colossochelys atlas. 
S. I. Testudo, sp. 
S. Bellia sivalensis. 
PI. S. Emys tectum 



PI. T. sp. cf. gangeticus 



S. .£^. (Batagur), sp. 
PL jBm^^s [Batagur), cf . 
S. I. Emyda, sp. 
S. I. Trionyx, sp. ' 



576 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIWALIK FAUNA. , [Chap. XXIV. 

Siwalik moUusca. — The few moUusea which haye been found be- 
long solely to fresh-water or terrestrial forms, and the only comparison 
hitherto made^ was carried out under circumstances so unfavourable, 
with so poor a collection of recent species from India, and at a time 
when the latter were sO imperfectly known, that but little weight can be 
attached to the conclusions formed. No good materials for comparison 
have been procured of late years, and the few specimens obtained are in 
poor preservation, but all the forms collected since the recent fresh-water 
shells have been better known have proved to be either identical with 
living species, or closely allied to them. Amongst those hitherto identi- 
fied, the only land-shell is Bulimus instilaris, ^ a species which ranges 
at the present day from Africa to Burma, whilst amongst fresh-water 
moUiisks, the two common Indian river-snails, Faludina bengalensis and 
P. dissimilis, have been recognised, and forms of Melania, AmpuUaria, 
and Unio also occur. 

So far as the evidence extends, therefore, the few moUusca of the 
Siwalik s tend to shew that the beds must be of late tertiary date ; for it 
is difficult to conceive that no important change in the species of fresh- 
water mollusca would have taken place had the strata been of miocene 
age. But the evidence afEorded by the mollusca is imperfect, and both 
closer comparison and a larger series of fossil specimens are desirable 
before any Very positive assertions can be made as to the antiquity of 
the formations on the data afforded by the Invertebrata. In investi- 
gating the question of age, we are consequently forced to depend, ji/rst, 
upon the Vertebrata, and especially the Mammalia ; and secondly/, upon such 
geological evidence of connection with other formations of known age 
as the rocks afford. 

Homotaxis of mammalia.— The first question, th.en, is the homo^ 
taxial relation of the Siwahk mammalian fauna. The preceding lists, 
it should be repeated, embrace the whole of the collections of Vertebrata 
from the later tertiary beds of India; in dealing with the Siwaliks 
alone, we ^ have therefore to omit all forms found solely — (1) in the 
lower Manchhar beds of Sind, and their probable representatives in the 

' Prof. B. Forbes, in Falconer's Palseontological Memoirs, I, p. 389. 

2 Theobald, MS. As in this and the following paragraph Mr. Theobald's view of the 
affinities of the Siwalik moEusca has been accepted in preference to the high authority of 
Prof. E. Forbes, it is only just to say that Mr. Theobald has a far more extensive knowledge 
of living Indiau fresh-water shells than it was possible for any naturalist in Europe to' 
acquire at the period when Prof. E. Forbes' note was written. Indeed it is evident from 
Prof. Forbes' remarks that the collections of recent Indian shells examined by him were 
too imperfect to enable him to form a competent opinion. Mr. Benson, a far better author- 
ity on this particular subject than Prof. E. Forbes, considered the most, if not the whole, of 
the Siwalik mollusca identical with existing species : Falconer, Pal. Mem., I, pp. 26, 181. 



Extra-Peninsular. J HOMOTAXis OF mammalia. 577 

Western Punjab;— (2) in the localities of Perim Island, the 'Irawadi 
valley, and certain beds of Sylhet;— and (3) in the post-tertiaiy clays and 
gravels of the Jumna, Narbada, Godavari, and other Indian rivers, so 
far as all such forms are unrepresented in the Siwalik area. This 
leaves a fauna composed of the following 45 genera, each represented 
by the number of species noted, the total number of specific forms 
being 84 : extinct genera are marked with an asterisk :— 

Peimates — 

Macacus, 2 ; Semnopithecus, 2. 

Cabnivoba — 

Felis, 2 ; MachcBrodus* (Drepanodon), 1 ; Pseudcelurus* 1; Ictitherium* 1 ; 
Myeena,!; Canis {Vulpes), 1 ; Amphicyon,* 1 ; Ursus, 1 ; Syanarctus,* 2; 
Mellivora, 1 ; Meles, 1 ; Lutra, 1 ; Enhydriudon* 1. 

Peoboscidba — 

Elephas, 7; (Eueleplias, 1; Loxodo'n, 1; Stegodon* 5;) Mastodon* 4. 
(Pentalojphodon,* 1 ; Tetralophodon,* 2 / Trilophodon,* 1). 

Ungtjlata peeissodacttla — 

Rhinoceros, 6 ; AcerotJierium,* 1 ; Listriodon,* 1 ; Equus, 2 ; Sipparion,* 2. 

Us GULATA AETIODACTTIA 

Hippopotamus (Sexaprotodon*), 1 ; Mippopotamodon* 1 ; Tetraconodon,* 1 ; 
Sus, 3 ; Hippohyus,* 2 ; Chalicotheri'um,* 1 ; Merycopotamus,*! ; Cervus, 3 ; 
Dorcatherium,* 2 ; Camelopardalis, 2 ; SivatAerium,* 1; Sydaspitherium,* 
3; Bos, 6; {Bos restricted, 5; Bison, 1; Buhalits, 2;) Ferihos,* 1; 
Amphihos^ 1; Memibos,* 1 ; Antilope, i; Copra, 2 ; Ovis, 1 ; Camelus, 1. 

EODENTIA — . 

- Mus, 1 ; Shizomys, 1 ; Systrix, 1. 

Of a large proportion of the species only very imperfect information 
exists as to the exact horizon in the Siwalik series at which the bones 
have been found, but the great majority are from the upper and middle 
Siwaliks, none in the typical area being known to occur in the lower 
or Nahan sub-division. It is, however, by no means certain that some of 
the specimens from the North- Western Punjab are not derived from beds 
of the same age as the Nahan group. The mammals of Kushalghar have 
already been excluded from the list, because they, like the lower Man- 
chhar species of Sind, evidently belong to an older formation than 
the f ossilif eroiis portion of the Siwalik beds ; and Nurptir in the Punjab, 
the only other locality, besides Kushalghar and the Laki hills of Sind, 

M 1 



578 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIWALIK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV. 

whence AmpTiicyon has been obtained, may also be upon older strata. It 
is highly probable that some other forms with middle tertiary affinities 
would be found to be confined to lower Siwalik beds, if the precise 
horizon of all the bones collected were known.^ 

On the other hand, one post-tertiary form. Bos {Bulalus) palaindioui, 
has been found in the highest Siwalik strata, associated with Camelus 
dvalensis, Colossochelys, &c. ; and two species of elephant belonging to 
the sub-genus Stegodon, viz., E. insignis and E. ganesa, range throughout 
the upper Siwaliks, and recur in the post-tertiary deposits. The species 
of proboscidians generally appear to have had a more extensive range, 
both in space and time, than most of the forms belonging to other 
mammalian orders ; but Eos palcsindicus is an animal of exceptionally 
recent aspect, even in the post-tertiary mammalian-fauna, since it is 
only distinguishable from the living Bos buhalus (Bubalus buffelus v. 
B. ami, auct.) by comparatively trifling and unimportant osteological 
details ; it must evidently have been a very near ally, and, in aU pro- . 
bability, the not very distant progenitor of the buffaloes which now 
inhabit the Ganges valley, Assam, and parts of the Central Provinces 
of India. 

The Siwalik forms, however, which might be excluded on account of 
belonging to an older or a newer fauna, and of being supposed, on 
more or less strong evidence, to be confined to either the lowest or 
the uppermost portions of the series, are too few in number to affect the 
general facies, and there are unquestionably several miocene types and 
some post-tertiary species found in the highly fossiliferous upper Siwalik 
beds. It is best therefore, for the present, to include all the forms 
enumerated. 

Proceeding, then, to classify the genera above given, it will be found 
that 24) comprising 53 species, still ^ exist (the living species being how- 
ever all, so far as is known, different), whilst 21, with 30 species, are 
extinct. If, instead of reckoning the larger genera, Elepkas, Mastodon, 
Hippopotamus, and Bos, their sub-genera are counted, the result will be 
slightly to diminish the proportion of recent genera, the recent generic 
types becoming 26, with 47 species, the extinct 25, with 36 species. 
The former plan of classification is however, on the whole, preferable, 
because such distinctions as those between Euelephas, Ldxodon, and Stego- 
don, for instance, are scarcely of generic value, the majority of the genera 
named, e. g., Eelis, Rhinoceros, Gervus, Antilope, have not been sub-divided 

> A very large proportion of the Siwalik remains have been obtained by native collectors 
employed in the search, and of course the precise locality of the bones is in most cases 
doubtfiil. 



Extra-Peninsular.] HOMOTAXIS OP MAMMALIA. 579 

like ElepAas and Bos; and the affinities of the fauna are best understood 
by grouping the forms in somewhat .larger sub-divisions than the sub- 
genera of older and the genera of many modern writers. 

Taking the extinct genera first, the following ten are peculiar to 
the Indian tertiaries, so far as is hitherto known : — 

Cabnitoka — • 

Snhi/drlodon. 
Unguiata abtiodacttla — 

Hippopotamodon, Tetraconodon, Hippohyus, Merycopotamus, Sivatherium, ■ 
Sydaspitherium, Peribos, Amphihos, Memibos. 

Of the remaining eleven genera, four, viz., Pseudcelurus, Am'phicyon, 
Listriodon, and Dorccdherium, are only known in Europe from miocene 
beds, Pseudeelurus being also found in pliocene rocks in America ; whilst 
Macharodus, Hymnarctus, Ictitherium, Mastodon, Acer other ium, Chalicothe- 
rium} and Ripparion are both miocene and pliocene ; the first and fourth 
ranging into post-pliocene beds also ; the former in Europe, the latter 
in America. 

Of the other extinct forms, two, Kippohyus and Merycopotamus, belong 
to the less specialised types characteristic in ■ general of the older and 
middle tertiaries. Several others, such as Tetraconodon, with its enor- 
mously developed premolar teeth, and the huge four-horned Sivatherium, 
differ widely from anything now existing ; but being highly specialised 
forms, there is nothing in their organisation to indicate that they are 
of earlier age than newer tertiary. 

Amongst the recent genera represented in the Siwaliks, eight, viz., 
Felis, Hyana, Canis, Lutra, Rhinoceros, Sus, Cervws, and Antilope, are 
known to range as far back as upper miocene, and in one or two cases even 
further ; ten, viz., Macacus, Semnopitheaus, Ursus,Elephas, Eqims, Hippopo- 
tamus, Camelopardalis, Bos, Rystrix, and Mus, are known from the European 
pliocene beds, but not earlier ; and several are poorly represented, or only 
known in newer pliocene strata ; whilst the following, Mellivora, Metes, 
Capra, Ovis, Camelus, and lihizomys, have hitherto only been found recfent, 
or in post-pliocene deposits. 

This examination of the relations between the Siwalik genera and 
the distribution of similar forms in European tertiaries leads, as might 
be anticipated, to a somewhat uncertain result. The proportion of living 
to extinct genera is greater than is found in most miocene deposits, but 
not more than appears to exist in the characteristically middle tertiary ' 

1 Acerotherium and Chalicotherium are found in pliocene beds at Pikermi : see page 583. 
JcUtherium occurs in the pliocene of Pikermi, and in miocene beds in Bessarabia and in 
France. 



580 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SIWALIK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV 

ossiferous beds of Sansan in France.^ The presence of four extinct 
genera not known to range above the mioeene period elsewhere is con- 
trasted with the occurrence of sixteen genera not found elsewhere at a 
lower horizon than pliocene or post-tertiary. There is perhaps rather 
more probability that early , forms like Chalicotherium and Aw/phicyon 
should have survived longer in India than they did in Europe, just as 
rhinoceroses, tapirs, and elephants still exist in the tropics, associated with 
a faUna amongst which they appear antiquated and out of place, than 
that such eminently specialised types as Macacus, Bos, Capra, or Egtms 
should have lived in mioeene times ; but the argument is of small value, 
for the mioeene Cervus and Antilope were in all probability as highly 
specialised, or nearly so, as the Siwalik genera. The fact, however, that 
the recent 'genera contain more species than the extinct forms is of some 
importance, since it is probable that types which were dying out 
would be represented by few.er species than those which were supplanting 
them, and which might fairly be credited with the vitally important 
power of producing distinct specific stocks by variation. A stronger 
argument for the newer age of the Siwalik beds is to be found in the 
close approximation between some of the mammals and the living 
species of the same genera, the most remarkable of all being the con- 
nection, already noticed, between the fossil bufEalo of the uppermost 
Siwalik strata, that of the post-pliocene Jumna and Narbada beds, and 
the common Indian species now existing. 

Reptilian evidence. — The evidence afforded by the few species of 
reptiles sufficiently known to be of importance is decidedly in favour 
of attributing to the Siwalik beds a later age than mioeene. Only 
six species are sufficiently well known to be 'fairly comparable, and 
three of these, Crocodilus palustris, Gharialis gangeticus, dioAJEmi/s tectum, 
are common living forms now inhabiting the same area ; whilst Mmys 
{Bellia) sivalensis ^ is very closely allied to a living Burmese species,- 
M. crassicoUis, CrocodUus orassidens and Colossocheli/s atlas differ consi- 
derably from all living forms, and CrocodUus leptodus is very imperfectly 
known. 

Siwalikfaunaprolaablypliocene.— Putting together the whole 
data derived from Mammalia, Reptilia,, and Mqllusca, it is impossible to 
deny that the balance of evidence is in favour of a pliocene age. This is 
opposed to the general consensus of European geologists hitherto,^ and it 

1 Gervais, Zool. Pal. Franc, p. 338. 

2 Theobald, Eeo. G. S. I., X, p. 43. 

3 It appears at first sight, also, to be in direct opposition to Dr. Falconer's conclusions, 
but a study of his writings leaves it doubtful whetlier he ever expres.sed any decided con- 
viction on the subject. He repe9,tedly noticed the close connexion between some Siwalik 



Extra-Peninsular.] STRATIGRAPHICAL EVIDENCE OF AGE. 581 

would therefore be put forward with very little confidence if it were not 
supported by some stratigraphical data. As the approximate age of the 
Siwalik rocks is a necessary element in any argument founded upon 
their fauna, it will be best to shew how the stratigraphical evidence 
supports th^ view that these beds are of pliocene and not of mioeene 
age, before proceeding to notice some other interesting points of con- 
nexion between the Siwalik and other faunas, recent and extinct. 

Stratigraphical evidence of age of Siwaliks. — The stratigra- 
phical data as distinguished from the purely homotaxial relations just 
discussed depend entirely upon the connexion between the typical 
Siwaliks and the Manchhar beds, of Sind. The position of the latter 
has been already described in Chapter XIX,i where it was shewn that 
the whole of the Manchhar group, comprising, where thickest, but little 
less than 10,000 feet of strata, rests upon the tniocene Gaj group, the 
age of which is determined by the far more satisfactory data afforded 
by marine organisms, and is shewn to be more probably upper than 
lower mioeene. The lower Manchhar beds pass down into the Gaj 
rocks, so that it is reasonable to believe that no difference of age of any 
importance exists between the two. It has also been shewn that the 
mammalian fauna of the lower Manchhars, although containing several 
species in common with the Siwaliks, is altogether older in aspect; 
and that the majority of the forms hitherto recognised belong i,o the 
peculiar types of even-toed ungulates allied to Merycopotamus and 
Anthracotherium, intermediate in character between pigs and ruminants, 
and peculiarly characteristic of the mioeene epoch. In these lower Man- 
chhar beds also there is found a form of Dinotherium, another mioeene 
type unknown in the Siwaliks proper, though found (the species being 
distinct) in the beds of Perim Island. Now, there can be no reasonable 
doubt that the Manchhar beds of Sind, as a whole, correspond with the 
Siwalik formation of Northern India ; for the two are portions of one con- 
tinuous band of upper tertiary rocks, and, viewed ■ in this light, the 
relations of the faunas are very striking, the fossiliferous lower beds 
of the Manchhar group corresponding to the unfossiliferous Nahans, and 

forms and those now found in India, and appeared for iv long time (Pal. Mem., 1, p. 28) 
rather disposed to consider that the tertiary mammalia of India " lasted through a period 
orresponding to more than one^of the tertiary peviods of Europe " than to class the Siwalik 
fauna with the mioeene of Europe. In his later writings he certainly spoke of the Siwalik 
fauna as mioeene, but only incidentally; whilst in some of his latest papers he argued in 
f of man having been a probable contemporary of Colossochelys and the Siwalik mam- 

Y —an idea which it is diiEcult to reconcile with the mioeene age of the fauna. 

1 See aiile, p. 466. 



582 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIWAL IK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV. 

the almost unfossiliferous upper Manchhar beds to the ossiferous strata 
of the SiwaHks. It has ah-eady been shewn, how extremely difficult 
it is to trace particular zones amongst the confused and contorted 
mass of the newer tertiary deposits in the Sub- Himalayan ranges and 
the Punjab ; but, so far as the evidence extends, it is certainly in favour 
of a close correspondence between the Manchhars and the Siwaliks, 
the upper Siwaliks being represented in Sind by the conglomerate, 
less fully ■ developed 'there than to the northward, at the top of the 
series, whilst a large proportion of the lower Manchhars is made up of 
the grey sandstone, so well developed in the Nahan group. If, there- 
fore, the lower Manchhars of Sind are upp6r miocene, so is the Nahan 
group of the Punjab ; and it is impossible, either on stratigraphical or 
palseontological grounds, to class the fossiliferous middle Siwaliks lower 
than pliocene, the upper Siwaliks, which contain £os {Bubalus) palcsin- 
dicus, being probably upper pliocene. Briefly stated, the evidence is 
that the Siwalik fauna is newer than the Manchhar fauna, and found in 
higher beds, and the Manchhar fauna is not older than upper miocene. 

Survival of miocene forms in Siwalik beds. — If the views 
expressed in the preceding paragraphs be admitted, it will be seen 
that we have represented Lq the Siwalik beds a pliocene fauna, 
containing an abnormally large miocene element; and although the 
presence of this older element may be partially due to an undetected 
admixture, by the collectors, of fossils from lower beds, it is certain that 
this explanation will not suffice to account for all the older types of 
Siwalik mammals; for the locality and horizon of several typically 
middle, tertiary forms, such as Dorcaiherium, are well known to be middle, 
or even upper Siwalik. An admixture of European miocene forms, 
though to a much smaller extent, is fpund in the older pliocene of North 
America. There is, however, a good reason for believing that European 
miocene forms survived to a later period in India than in Central Europe, 
because several genera not known in beds of later age than the miocene 
• of Europe are found living, or are represented by nearly allied forms, 
in the tropics of Asia and Africa. It has even been suggested that 
of the two most important faunas in the tropics of the Old World, the 
Indo-Malayan (exclusive of that inhabiting the Indian peninsula) and 
the Ethiopian, the former is allied to the lower or middle miocene, 
the latter to the upper miocene of Europe.' Thus in the miocene 
beds of Central Europe, besides a monkey very like Semnopitheciis, there 

' Fraas, Wiirttemberg'sche naturw. Jahreshefte, XXVI, 1870, p. 297j v. Pelzeln, 
Africa-Indien, Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien., 1875, p. 61 ; and Ueber die Malayische Sange- 
thier-fauna; Festschrift, 25 Jahr. Zool. Bot. GeseUsch., 1876, p. 19; Wallace, Geographical 
Distribution of Animals, I, pp. 114 to 124. 



Extra-Peninsular. J PLIOCENE fauna OP PIKERMI. 583 

are found two genera of apes, Pliopithecus and Bryopithecus, allied 
to the gibbons [Hylohates] of Assam, Burma, and the Malay countries ; 
there is an insectivore nearly affined to Tupaia (Indian and Malay), 
and forms of deer closely resembling Cenulus (another Indo-Malay 
genus) occur, besides the living genera Viverra, Rhinoceros, and Tapirm ; 
the two latter, however, being also found in European pliocene beds. 

Pliocene fauna of Pikermi in Attica. — There is, however, one 
European fossil fauna which is of singular interest from its resemblance 
to that of the Siwalik beds. In this collection of extinct mammalia, 
which has been discovered at Pikermi in Attica,^ not only is there a re- 
markable admixture of typically miocene forms with other species which 
have a later aspect, but there is the same remarkable abundauce of true 
ruminants as in the Siwaliks. In the mipcene strata, although ruminants 
occur, they are in general but little, if at all, superior in number to the 
other artiodactyle ungulates; but in the Pikermi beds there are 15 
ruminants to one pig and one Ckalieotherium ; in the Siwalik fauna, 28 
ruminants and but 10 other artiodactyle ungulates. Another point of 
similarity in the two faunas is the absence of small mammals. 

The following is a list of the genera found in the beds of Greece, 
vrith the number of species belonging to each genus : — 

Primates — 

Mesopitheeus, 1. 

Caenivoba — 

Simocyon, 1 ; Mustela, 1 ; Promephitis, 1 ; IctitheriurA, 3 ; Hycena, 1 ; LycycBwn,, 
Hymnictis, 1 ; Machcerodus, 1 ; Felis, 4. 

Peoboscidba — 

Mastodon, 2 ; Dinotherium, 3. 

Ungtjlata peeissodacttla — 

Rhinoceros, 3 ; Acerotherium, 1 ; Leptodon, 1 ; Ripparion, 1. 

UlfGtrlATA AETIODACTTLA 

Sus, 1 ; Ckalieotherium, 1 ; Dremotherium, 2 ; Antilope, 3 ; Palceotragns, 1 ; 
Palmoryx, 2; Tragoceras, 2; PalcBoreas, 1 ; Antidorcas, 1 ; Gazella, 1 ; Cam- 
elopardalis, 1 ; Kelladotherium, 1. ' 

RODENTIA — 

Hystrix, 1. 

Edentata — 

Ancylotherium, 1. 

Of birds, a Fhasianus, a Gallms, and a Grus have been identified : of 
reptiles, bpnes of Testudo and Far anus. Of the above 30 genera of 
mammals, 13, besides Helladotherium, which is said to be scarcely distin- 

1 Gaudry : Animanx fossiles et goologie de I'Attique. 



584 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— SIWALIK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV. 

ffuishable from the female of SivatAerinm, are found in the Siwaliks of 
India : besides this^ the fauna bears in many respects the same similarity to 
that of Africa at the present day as the Siwalik mammals bear to their 
living Indian representatives. Now, this Pikermi fauna is constantly 
quoted as upper miocene, and its connexion with the miocene beds in other 
parts of Europe is unmistakable, no less than 15 species being undistin- 
guishable from those found in various miocene deposits. Several of these 
species are doubtfully identified, but amongst the number are such 
characteristic forms as Machmrodiis cuUridens, Mastodon turicensis, and 
Hipparion graeile. 'But, as M. Gaudry points out in the clearest manner,' 
the ossiferous beds of Pikermi contain at their base, and below the 
horizon whence the bones have been obtained, a layer with pliocene 
marine fossils, and all the beds containing the bones, together with the 
pliocene marine beds, rest unconformably on lacustrine miocene rocks. 
There can be therefore no reasonable doubt that the Pikermi fossils, 
like the Siwaliks, are of pliocene age, and that the quotation of them 
as miocene is an error.'* 

Migration. — The points of similarity between the European miocene 
faunas and the animals now inhabiting either tropical Asia or Africa south 
of the Sahara may be due either to migration and survival^ in a more 
favourable climate, or to the fauna having been formerly more uniform 
over large areas, and to the modified descendants continuing to live in one 
region, whereas they have died out and been replaced by distinct types 
in other parts of their old province. On the latter hypothesis we may 
suppose that the fauna of Central Europe and Malayasia was more or 
less uniform in the lower miocene period, and that Greece and Africa 
formed a single zoological province in pliocene, days j but that the gibbon- 
like apes, Tupaiadcs and other Malay types, died out in Central Europe, 
and the girafEes, antelopes, &c., in Greece, whilst the descendants of their 
relatives survived in the Malay countries and Africa respectively. The 
theory of migration presents, on the whole, fewer difficulties, and is rather 

1 Tom. oit., pp. 426-435. 

2 For the theory adopted by M. Gaudry to account for the survival of these miocene 
animals in pliooerfe times, see "Animaux fossiles et geologie de I'Attique," p. 431. It appears 
simpler to believe that the miocene fauna of Europe migrated to the southward, and that 
mnny species survived in Greece after they had died out north of the Alps. Hence the 
admixture of pliocene and miocene types. 

, ' It is assumed in the present and in other arguments employed in this work 
that similarity of organisation implies relationship of descent, i. e., that animals having 
similar structure are descended from the same ancestors more or less remotely. The 
theories pf evolution and of origin of species by descent with modification are now 
so widely accepted amongst naturalists that it is unnecessary to explain or defend 
them. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] EFFECTS OF CHANGE OP CLIMATE. 585 

in accordance with the little we already know of the Indian miocene 
(Manehhar) fauna, in which living tropical forms appear to be less repre- 
sented than they are in the deposits of that age in Europe. It is not 
unreasonahle to suppose that some of the forms' nanied, and especially 
the ruminants, migrated into Southern Asia at the close of the miocene 
period. 

Effects of change of climate. — It is true that amongst the 
marine invertebrates there is a well-marked resemblance between the 
miocene genera of Europe and living tropical forms. The Indian and 
African land faunas of the early and middle tertiaries are as yet too 
imperfectly known for any comparison to be made between them and those 
of the same epoch in extra-tropical regions. It is not improbable that 
there may prove to have been a greater similarity than exists amongst 
the terrestrial forms living - at present, and it is also probable that if 
such similarity existed, it will be found to have consisted mainly in the 
greater richness of the extra-tropical fauna in middle tertiary times, and 
in a number of types now extinct or confined to the tropics having been 
represented in both tropical and extra-tropical zones of climate. This 
last probability is founded on the fact that the temperature of Europe 
in the miocene epoch was in all probability nearer to that of the present 
tropics than to the temperate climate of recent times, and that conse- 
quently whole families of animals, and of plants intolerant of. cold, 
then ranged io much higher latitudes than they now do. That 
this was the case with plants is shewn by the well-known miocene 
(or eocene?) flora of Greenland, Spitzbergen, and Alaska,^ and by 
the species found in such marvellous abundance in the miocene beds 
in Central Europe. 

It is by no means an improbable inference that the representation of 
so many European miocene genera in the Indian Siwaliks is due to 
changes caused by the gradual refrigeration of the earth in later tertiary 
times and to the migration of the fauna towards the tropics. There is 
o-ood reason for believing that Europe and South-Eastern Asia were con- 
nected by land after the eocene period ; and as it is certain that a great 
portion of the disturbances affecting the Himalayan strata are of pliocene 
or post-pliocene date, it is reasonable to conclude that at the close of the 
miocene epoch no such mountain barrier as exists at present separated the 
Indian peninsula from Central Asia. There is independent evidence in 
favour of the view that the elevation of the Tibetan plateau is of post- 
Siwalik date • for remains of Bhinoeeros and other large mammals occur 

' Heer : Flora fossilis Arctioa, Vol. Ill, Ft. 4, &e. 



586 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— SIWALIK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV. 

at an elevation o£ 15,000 feet in Tibet,^ and it is not probable that these 
animals lived in so elevated a region. ^ 

Comparative poverty of recent mammalian faunas. — But 
the immigration of the European mioeene forms may not be the only- 
way in v^hich the Siwalik fauna vras affected by the secular refrigera- 
tion of the eartVs surface, culminating in the glacial epoch. It is true 
that there is a considerable amount of similarity between the Siwalik 
fauna and that of India at the present day ; but, nevertheless, there is a 
very striking distinction — a distinction due less to change and re- 
placement than to disappearance. Even after making allowance for 
the fact that the whole assemblage may not have existed contem- 
poraneously, there is nothing so striking in the fauna of the Siwalik 
epoch as the wonderful wealth and variety of forms. It must be 
recollected that we know little or nothing of the smaller mammals, 
and that animals of size inferior to a pig or a sheep are scarcely 
represented. It would be premature to infer that, as at the present 
day,, the more minute forms exceeded the larger types in abund- 
ance ; for the conditions of intermediate ages may have affected the more 
bulky animals far more than the minute Rodentia, Insedivora, Chiroptera, 
&c. Still it is only reasonable to suppose that the ancestors of the present 
Micro -mammalia lived in the same profusion as they do now ; and it is 
incredible that the living rodents and inseetivores can play the parts on 
the modern stage and fulfil the functions of the great ungulates and 
carnivores of past times. Comparing like with like, and especially pass- 
ing in review the Camimra, Frohoscidea, and Ungulata, all represented, 
and all, except the Proboscidea, well represented in the living fauna of 
India, indeed better than in most other parts of the world at the 
present day, it is impossible not to be struck with the comparative poverty 
in variety of the existing mammalian types. We have of course but an 

1 There is, on the other hand, a probahility that the elevation of the great plateau of 
Central Asia dates from a period prior to the glacial epoch, or at least antecedent to the 
close of the cold period, because, in the first place, there are numerous signs of ice having 
formerly occupied a much greater area than it does at present ; and secondly, there is a very 
remarkable change in several species of migratory birds between the forms found in 
Western India (many of which are common to Europe) and those found in Eastern India 
and Burma, many of which are peculiar to Eastern Asia. The two groups meet in India ; 
and although stragglers are found to the east and west of the limit, they are not common. 
The contrast is easily explained if the breeding places of the representative races have been 
separated for' ages through the elevated regions of Central Asia being so covered by snow 
and ice as to be unfitted for birds, and especially for insectivorous birds, to breed in. Amongst 
examples of the representative races, Motacilla alba (v. dukhunensis) and Ert/tkrosferna parva 
of Western India, replaced by M. luzoniensis and E. albicilla to the eastward, may be quoted. 

' Falconer, Pal. Mem., I., p. 173. 



Extra-Peninsular.] POVERTY OF recent mammalian faunas. 587 

imperfect knowledge even of the larger Siwalik animals, and remains of 
Carnivora are rare, so much so that probably many species remain undis- 
covered; but even at present the known Siwalik carnivores are more 
numerous than the living forms of similar size in the same area, and the 
ungulates exceeded their living representatives in number in the proportion 
of more than 5 to 2, there being 50 known Siwalik species and only 18 
recent. The superior wealth of the older fauna is both generic and epe- 
cifie ; not only are the types more varied, but there is a greater variety 
of forms in many of the genera ; thus 6 species of Rhinoceros existed 
where now there is only 1, or, including Eastern India and Burma, only 
3 ; and no less than 11 extinct elephants and mastodons are represented 
by a solitary living form. Even such modern types as Bos have dwindled 
in numbers from 6 to 2. 

This great impoverishment of the recent mammalian fauna is not 
peculiar to India. It is found in other parts of the Old World and in 
America, wherever remains of animals have been preserved in sufficient 
quantities amongst the deposits of the later tertiary epochs for a good 
idea of the fauna to be presented. ' In the words of Mr. Wallace, " we 
■ live in a zoologically impoverished world, from which all the largest and 
fiercest and strangest forms have recently disappeared ; " and he makes 
the happy suggestion,' that this enormous reduction in the numbers of 
the greater mammals is due to the glacial epoch. Thus for a second time 
we find the action of this great physical change reflected in the Siwalik 
fauna ; and we have an addition to the arguments urged in the sixteenth 
chapter ^ in favour of India- having been affected by the cold period 
which immediately preceded the present day. 

The post-pliocene Narbada fauna is very poor compared with the 
Siwalik. It is true that the former comprises two species of elephants and 
two of hippopotamus; but only two bovines have been detected, one deer, 
and one antelope. This difference may be partly due to imperfect know- 
ledge, to the much smaller, range, both in area, and in time as represented 
by thickness, in the case of the Narbada beds ; but none of these circum- 
stances can possibly account for the whole distinction ; for large collections 
of Narbada bones have been made, and more ruminants would surely have 
been detected, had many existed. It is probable that the Narbada fauna 
is posterior in date to the main operation of the agency, whatever it may 
have been, that caused so many of the Siwalik mammals to die out. 
The further diminution in the numbers of Proboscidea, and the complete 
disappearance of the genera Hippopotamus and Rhinoceros from Central 

■ Geographical Distribution of Animals, I, p. 150, 
2 Ante, p. 372. 



588 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— SIWALIK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV. 

India, may perhaps have heen partly due to the agency of man, who, if 
the evidence of the chipped quartzite implement already mentioned ^ can 
be trusted, must have been a contemporary of the Narbada fauna. 

Relations of Siwalik to Perim Island fauna. — Before quitting 
the subject of the relations between the Siwalik and other fossil faunas^ 
two other Indian deposits containing mammalian remains require notice, 
besides the mioeene beds of Sind and the Punjab, and the post-pliocene 
formations of the Ganges valley and the Indian peninsula. These two 
deposits are those of Perim Island in the Gulf of Cambay, the known 
species from which locality have already been quoted ^ and are marked 
P in the preceding list of tertiary fossil vertebrates, and those of the 
Irawadi valley in Upper 'Burma marked I. 

The known mammals from Perim Island comprise ten species, of 
which four, viz., MasfMon latidens, M. perimensis, Acerotherium peri- 
mense, and Sus hysudricus, are eomriion to the Siwalik beds. All these 
forms are, however, found in other fossil faunas ; Mastodon perimensis and 
Sus hysudricus being met with also in the lower Manchhar beds of Sind 
Acerotherium perimense in the Irawadi deposits, and Mastodon latidens 
in both, so that all the forms common to Perim Island and the Siwaliks ' 
are clearly species of wide range. The absence of Mephas and its 
sub-genera, and of bovines, and the presence of Binotherium, tend 
strongly to make the Perim Island fauna appear of greater age than 
the Siwalik generally; but, on the other hand, the presence of so 
highly specialised a genus as Capr'a, if the generic determination be 
accepted,^ the occurrence of Cam.elopardalis and Antilope, and, above 
all, the absence, so far as is known, of any of the Anthracotheridm and 
other older ungulate types so abundant in the mioeene beds of Sind 
and the Punjab, are opposed to the idea that the Perim Island rocks 
can be of higher antiquity than pliocene. They possibly occupy an 
intermediate position between the Siwaliks proper and the Manchhars 
of Sind, but they are more nearly allied to the former. 

Comparison with Irawadi fauna. — It will be necessary to revert 
to the mammalian remains found in the Irawadi valley when' describino- 
the rocks of Bui-ma. JMI that it is now necessary to point out is that, 
although the proportion of species identified with Siwalik forms is 
rather less than in the case of Perim Island, only four species, viz., Stego- 
don cliftii, Mastodon latidens, Acerotherium perimense, and Merycopotamus 

1 Ante, p. 386. 

2 AntR, p. 343. 

' It should not be forgotten that Ccvpra perimensis ia founded solely on a frontlet ' 
with the hom-casea, and that nothing is known of the greater part of the cranium, the 
teeth, or the limb bones. See Lydekker, Pal. Ind., Ser. X, 3, p. 83-170, PI. xxviii, fig. 4. 



Extra-Peninsular. J comparison with EECENT fauna. 589 

dissimilis, out of thirteen, being known to be common to the Siwaliks 
and the Irawadi beds, the general facias of the two, faunas is very similar. 
Both contain a considerable proportion of living genera unknown in 
the middle tertiaries of Europe, together with some older forms, such 
as Acerotherium and Merycopotamns. The Irawadi fauna perhaps may- 
be equivalent to upper Siwalik. 

The Tibetan mammalian fauna ' already noticed is too imperfect for 
comparison. 

Oomparison of Siwalik and recent faunas.— Lastly, a few words 
may be added as to the points of connexion between the Siwalik f aun^, 
and that now found in India, Malayasia, and Africa. The most remarkable 
distinction between the mammalian life of tertiary times and that of the 
present day, the comparative wealth of the former and poverty of the ' 
latter, has already been noticed ; but jt is matter of some interest to trace 
how far the Siwalik types are represented by animals now inhabiting India, 
and how many of the tertiary genera, though still living on the earth^s 
surface, are no longer found in the regions formerly inhabited by their 
Siwalik alHes. As the fauna of India varies in different parts, it will be 
best to take for comparison with the Siwalik mammals all forms now 
existing in the IndorGangetic plain, from the Indus to the parallel of 
Calcutta, together with those inhabiting the lower slopes of the Himalayas 
up to 4,000 or 5,000 feet. This area comprises portions of three distinct 
zoological sub-provinces, the animals inhabiting the Indo-Gangetic plain 
to the westward exhibiting some distinctions of importance ' from those 
occurring to the eastward, and the lower slopes of the Himalayas having 
a very different fauna, distinguished' by the presence of numerous 
Malay types. In this comparison, again, the minor generic or sub-generic 
groups of many modern naturalists are not enumerated ; Rucenus, Rum, 
and Axis, for instance, being considered merely forms of Cervus, and Bibos, 
Bubalus, &c., of Bds. The following is a list lof the Siwalik genera 
represented by species living in Northern India,^ the number of such 
species being added : — 

Pbimatbs — 

Semnopifhecus, 2; Macacus, 1 (or 2). 

Caenivosa — 

Felis, 8'; SycBna,!; Canis, (including Vulpes), 4; Ursus, 1; Mellivora, 1; 
Lutra, 2 (or 3). 

1 Falconer, Pal. Ind., I, p. 173; Strachey, Q. J. G. S., 1851, p. 292. 
' The living genera are taken chiefly from Jerdon's Mammals of India, a few alterations 
and additions being made. 

3 Five of these are of small size. 



590 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-SIWALIK FAUNA. [Chap. XXIV. 

Peoboscidea — 
Elephas, 1. 

UN0TTLATA PBEISSODACTYI.A — 

Bhinoceros, 2 (both only found to the eastward, and the second species barely within 
the area) ; Equus, 1 (also barely within the ar^, but to the westward). 

UNaUIiATA AETIODACTTLA — 

Sw (including PorcuUa), 2 (or 3) ; Cervus, 4 ; Antilope (including Gazella), 2 ; 
Bos, 2 ; Ovis, 1 (in the Punjab only). Capra is not found living in the area 
named, tut 3 species exist on the higher Himalayas, and two on the hill 
ranges to the west of the Punjab. 

KODENTIA — 

Mus, many species; Jthixomys, 1 (only found to eastward) ; Hystrix, 2 (or 3). 

The genera of Ungulata now found in Northern India and not re- 
presented, so far as is known, in the Siwalik fauna are only four : Cenulus, 
Portax, Tetracerus, and Nemorhedus. Some twelve genera of living Indian 
and Himalayan Carnivora have not heen found in the Siwalik rocks, hut all 
are of comparatively small size ; Viverra, Arctictis, Cuon, and Paradoxurus 
being the largest. 

Th6 Siwalik genera not now living in Northern India, hut still 
existing elsewhere, are Meles and Camelm, now confined in the wUd state 
to the palsearctic region, and Hippopotamus and Camelopardalis, both 
surviving in Africa. AH the other living forms already enumerated 
are common to India and Africa south of the Sahara, except Semno- 
jpiikecus, Macacus, Ursus, Cervus, Ovis, and PJiizomys, whilst Hyoena, 
Cams, Mellivora, Equus, Antilope, and Ovis are unknown in the Malay 
regions. The genera common to the Siwalik fauna and Malayasia, but 
not found in Africa, are Semnopithecus, Macacus, Ursus, Cervus, and 
Bhizomys. The first two and the last of these are, however, represented 
by allied forms in Africa, whilst no such near Malayan representa- 
tives of any of the Siwalik-African forms, except Canis (replaced 
by Cuon), can be mentioned. It may be added that of the twelve genera 
of living Indian Carnivora. unrepresented in the Siwaliks, the majority 
are Malayan forms inhabiting the Himalayas. It is clear that the 
Siwalik fauna resembles that now inhabiting Southern Africa more than 
it does the assemblage of living Mammalia now found in Malayasia, 
and it is probable that this resemblance is due to both the pliocene 
Siwaliks and the recent; Ethiopian faunas, together with a very large 
proportion of the animals now inhabiting the plains of India, being 
descended partly or wholly from the same ancestors, and perhaps from 
their ancestors having originally migrated southward from the miocene 
lands of Central Europe and Asia. We know nothing of the miocene 
mammals of Southern Africa, but such information as we possess of the 



Extra-Peninsulaj. ] COMPARISON WITH RECENT FAUNA. 591 

upper miocene fauna of Northern India renders it probable tbat most of 
the Siwalik mammals emigrated about the close of the miocene epoch, 
and a portion of the descendants of the Siwalik immigrants may have 
inhabited the country ever since. Many forms have, however, died out, 
and it is probable that in comparatively recent times some of these 
extinct forms have been replaced by Malayan types, either introduced 
from the eastward, or spreading northward from the singularly isolated 
Malayan faunas now inhabiting the Malabar coast and the Southern 
Indian hills. Many, however, of the forms which at first sight appear 
to have distinctly Malayan afiinities, such as Cenus [Bucervus) duvaucelU 
and Bos gaums, despite their close alliance with living Malay forms, 
and the want of related species in Africa, are probably descended from 
Siwalik ancestors, and are not Malayan immigrants. Again, in a few 
cases, as in that of the Indian gazelle, some of the species which, judging 
by their range and their close connexion with forms inhabiting other 
countries', are amongst the most recent additions to the Indian fauna, 
come from the west and not from the eastward. 



592 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-LOWER HIMALAYAS. [ Chap. XXV. 



CHAPTER XXV. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

LOWER HIMALAYAS. 

Limits — General features — The terminal area — Classification of rocks — Correlation 
of groups — Tlie gneissic series t- The slate series — The Simla slates — The Blaini 
group — The Infra-Kr(51 — The Krdl group — The relation of the slate and gneissic 
series. Special metamorphism and disturhance — Trappean rocks — The Chor mountain 
— South-east of Simla. Kumaun and Gharwal. Nepal. The Sikkim area — Dar- 
jiling gieiss — The Baling series — The Damuda series — Relations of the three 
series — The Bhutan border : Baxa series — The Dikrang section. , SuMniET. 

Limits. — The name "Lower Himalaya" does not spontaneously suggest 
the area to which it is here restricted. This is not a mountain-zone of 
medium elevation, continuous between tlie Sub-Himalayas and the Central 
or Tibetan region; for, as already stated (p. 557), we find the tertiary 
rocks in the Kangra district within a mile of a lofty ridge of " central 
gneiss/' on the prolongation of the main Himalayan axis, and structurally 
belonging to the Tibetan region. StUl, to any one who knows the ground, 
the character " Lower " would suggest the area in question ; for the 
ridges of the Dhauladhar and Pir Panjal, belonging to the Central 
Himalayas, and overhanging the Sub- Himalayan zone in the north-west, 
are much more lofty, rugged, and persistent than the mountains of the 
Lower Himalayas, occupying the broad area, some 50 mUes wide, 
between the great snowy range and the plains. 

To the east this feature continues beyond the range of exploration, in 
the mountains north of Assam : on the west it ends, or begins, abruptly 
very nearly on meridian 77° E., a short distance west of Simla. Both 
the Bias and the Sutlej flow from east to west across this terminal Ijound- 
ary of the Lower Himalayan region, while the Tons and the Jumna are 
the first rivers having a southerly course in this ground. The mention 
of these rivers shews that the meridional watershed of India occurs here ; 
but this is a fact of no significance ; for it is possible that almost 
within historical times the Jumna may have flowed westward, instead of 
to the Ganges.^ Simla stands on the Sutlej-Jumna watershed, and, as 

• See page 417. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] general features. 593 

a well-known place, its name has been given (p. 529) to this terminal 
region of the Lower Himalayas. I£ a politico-geographical name were 
required for the Lower Himalayan region, the kingdom of Nepal would 
furnish the most suitable, as it occupies the whole middle area for a 
length of 500 miles; and the Gurkhas of Nep£ formerly held sway to 
beyond the Sutlej. 

G-eneral features. — The character chosen to designate this region of 
the mountains is a superficial one ; yet it is an index of important 
structural peculiarities : the low general average of elevation is due to 
the irregularity of the disturbance that has affected the rocks, without 
producing any dominant lines of dislocation or of upheaval ; being thus 
in marked contrast with two other divisions of the mountains, where 
steady outcrops are determined by continuous parallel axes of flexure and 
of dislocation. There is, no doubt, a very decided prevalence of a strike 
parallel to the general mountain- axis, and the dominant dip of the 
strata is towards that 3,xis; but local interruptions are so frequent, that 
the general result, as brought out by the drainage courses, is more like 
that from the denudation of a homogeneous mass. It has been suggested ^ 
that the present rivers cross this area on lines of fracture ; but observation 
lends no support to the opinion : the drainage channels, great and 
small, are as devious as they could be worn through a promiscuous 
mass of broken materials, J^ possible cause for this condition will be 
suggested. • 

The boundaries of the Lower Himalayas are, however, well defined. 
On the north, so far as known from the west end, there is the great, 
gneissic axis, with constant granitic intrusion, forming the main snowy 
range. On the Sub-Himalayan border, along the " main boundary " of 
the tertiary zone, there is also, from the west up to Nepal, some approach 
to constancy in the older rocks. They are intensely contorted, but with 
more steadiness of direction than in the interior of the area ; although 
still there are numerous breaches of regularity, as at the sharp bends 
of the main boundary east of Dehra, and again just east of the Ganges, 
both of which coincide with twists in the strike of the slates. This 
circumstance (the local strike of the strata at these points) is perhaps an 
additional argument in favour of this boundary being primarily a 
feature of denudation, or at least against its being a great master-disloca- 
tion (p. 540). 

Regarding the distribution and structure of the rocks in the Lower 
Himalayas, our information is still more scanty than in the case of the 
Sub-Himalayas, and our description must be correspondingly bare. For a 

> Q. J. G. s., VII, p. 309. 



594 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXV. 

length of 500 miles in Nepal, we have only notes upon one short section 
in the middle ; and to the east of this, throughout the whole range, only 
one narrow area has been examined, in Sikkim. It is in the north-western 
portion that most observations have been made, and it is there that the 
rocks are in the most favourable condition for study, as exhibiting least 
metamorphism. This is apparently due to the position being a sub- 
terminal one in the mountain area. However this may be, we find here 
a continuous broad belt of unaltered limestones and shaly slates at the 
edge of the mountains ; and at many points they extend far into the 
interior. This border contracts gradually to the eastwards, being com- 
paratively narrow, though still well marked, at Naini Tdl ; but on the Kath- 
mandu section it has disappeared, and in Sikkim gneissic rocks come 
very close to the southern or main boundary. ■ The relatioa of these 
unaltered rocks to the gneissic series is the chief puzzle of the Lower 
Himalayas. The boundary of the two is as irifegular as it can be, and 
quite unlike any feature described in other Himalayan regions. 

As in the case of the Sub-Himalayas, and for analogous reasons, we 
must describe the Lower Himalayas in sections of areas, commencing 
at the west end, with the terminal area already denoted as the Simla 
region.^ 

The terminal area. — It is important to note at starting that the 
termination of the Lower Himalayas, in about 77° of east longitude, is 
sti'ictly a feature of the general mountain-structure, the boundary there 
being more or less homologous with that elsewhere. The several rock-series 
of the area do not continue with their general north-westerly strike up 
to the terminal boundary, nor end there along a transversely denuded 
outcrop, against the tertiary formations. Here, as elsewhere, the strike of 
the old rocks conforms to the main boundary, even when almost at right 
angles to the axis of the range ; and the same external band of unaltered 
palaeozoic rocks intervenes continuously between the gneiss of the interior 
and the fringing tertiary formations. This condition holds good for the 
whole Western Himalayas, the strata forming throughout an independent 
system of disturbance : at no point along the mountain border on this 
side do the gneissic rocks touch the Sub-Himalayan zone, so they can 
never (in, or since, silurian times) have been continuous with the crystalline 
rocks pf peninsular India. This fact would be almost a corollary 
from the statement already given (p. 569) , that the contortion of the 
slates is of post-nummulitic date ; it may now be quoted as a confirma- 
tion of that statement. 

' For some particulars of this ground, see Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Pt. 2, 1864 ; and Eec. 
a. S. I„ X, p. 202, 1877. 



Extra-Peninsular. J CORRELATION OF GROUPS. 595 



« 



Olassiflcation of rocks. — The following petrographical groups are 
distinguishable in the Simla Himalayas. It is convenient to consider 
them as two series, although they may be in part equivalent ; the relation 
between the two being the great puzzle of the geology of this region, 
and the chief contrast between it and the Central Himalayas. 
■A- — Outer, newer, or slate series — 

Krdl : limestones, sandstones and shales . . .' 800 — 1,200 
Infra- Krol : shales (often carbonaceous) and flags . 1,000—3,000 
Blaini • : limestone, sandstone and conglomerate . 100 

Infra-Blaini (Simla slates) : slates and flags . . over 5,000 

Base not known. 
B — Inner, older, or gneissic series — 

Gneissose schists 6,000 

Massive gneiss 100 — 600 

Schistose gneiss ? 

Correlation of groups.— The absence of fossils is one of the most 
puzzling facts connected with the geology of this area, and the same 
remark applies to these formations throughout their extension on the 
southern face of the Himalayas, eastwards to Nepal and westwards to 
the Jhelum. All the rocks of series A are such as might be expected to 
contain organic remains ; they are fully exposed to view at some much 
frequented localities, as in the hill stations of Mansiiri (Mussooree) and 
Naini Tal, and on the road to Simla, — at all of which many skilled 
observers have searched carSfuUy for fossils, but in vain. Only one 
authentic case of organic remains from these rocks is on record : ' some 
indeterminable casts of bivalve moUusks from a band of limestone in the 
Tal, or Bheng, river, at the end of the Dehra Dun, east of the Ganges. 

In the absence of fossils, an attempt at identification can only be 
made through comparison with sections of known rocks, or by continuous 
connexion with known sections. On the former grounds, the following 
conjectural affiliation was made by Dr. Stoliezka, through a comparison 
with the rocks described by him in Spiti, beyond the snowy range due 
north of Simla. * 

Simla. Spiti. Europe. 

Krdl limestone. LiUng series. Upper trias, 

Infra-Kr61. Lower trias. 

Qnartzites and mica. 
' schists at Simla. Kuling. Carboniferous. 

Blaini. Muth. Upper Silurian. 

Infra-Blaini (Simla slates). Upper Bhabeh. Lower silurian. 

1 Formerly spelt "Blini": the first vowel sound is full, as in blind, so the correct spell- 
iag is '■' Blaini." 

2 Mem. G. S. I., HI, Ft. 2, p. 69. 

3 Mem. G. S. I., V, p. 141. 



596 GEdLOGY OF INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXV. 

On the same page (l. c.) Dr. Stoliczka mentions a prior recognition 
of the infra-Kr61 beds as lower trias, from their being mineralogically so 
very similar to the Banter Sandstein of Europe ; and no remark is so fre- 
quently repeated in Stoliczka's later Himalayan notes as the resemblance 
of the semi-oolitic triassic limestone to the Krol rock. An apparent 
confirmation of the age assigned by Dr. Stoliczka to the Krol group was 
published about the same time ^ in Professor Giimbel^s description of a 
specimen, from the Schlagintweit collection, said to have been obtained 
at Dharampur near Solan in the Simla district, containing three fossils, 
Idma Imedta and Natica gaillardoti, found also in the Muschelkalk in 
Europe, and a new species, Nat. simlaensis (Giimb). In view of all the 
circumstances,^ however, it seems safest to doubt the authenticity of this 
specimen. The well.-known locality Dharampur, in the neighbourhood 
indicated, is certainly on nummulitic rocks, and there can be but little 
doubt that the specimen in question came from some tbtaUy different 
ground, possibly from Tibet. ( 

The method of connected observations has suggested a different 
correlation of the upper members of the Simla series. These rocks, as 
has been said, are continuous, although locally much contracted and ob- 
scured, along the Himalayan border up to the Pir Panjal, and the lime- 
stone there occurring, like that of the Simla region, at the top of the 
slate series, has been satisfactorily identified by Mr. Lydekker ^ with the 
carboniferous limestone of Kashmir (the Kuling limestone of Tibet), 
and quite distinct from the triassic limestone, which also occurs in the 
valley. He also thinks that the infra- Krol is carboniferous, leaving the 
"Blaini group and the Simla slates to represent the Muth and Bhabeh 
rocks of Tibet, as silurian. In the Pir Panjal and Kashmir, as in the 
Lower Himalayas, these lower rocks have as yet proved unf ossiliferous ; 
but there can scarcely be a doubt of their representing the infra-carbon- 
iferous slates of Tibet in which silurian fossils have been found. 

The gneissic series. — The gneissie and schistose rocks, even in the 
Simla region, occupy the largest portion of the Lower Himalayan area 
south of the great snowy range. That range, westwards from Nepal, has 
been described by different observers as formed of, or supported by, gneiss,, 
with e:!}tensive intrusion of granite. In describing this gneiss between 
the Sutlej at Wangtu and the Bhabeh- pass, north-east of Simla, Dr. 

' Sitzungster. bair. Akad. d. "Wiss., 1865, II, p. 354. 

2 So many serious errors have been found to exist in the localities assigned by the 
Messrs. Schlagintweit to their reptilian and other collections, that no dependence can be 
placed upon any specimen collected by them. 
Kec. G. S. L, XI, p, 63,<1878. 



Extra-Peninsular.] THK QNEISSIC SERIES. 597 

Stoliczka distinguislied it as the " central gneiss/' asserting that, geologi- 
cally speaking, it had nothing to do with the gneiss of the Lower Hima- 
layas to* the south of it.^ It is presumable that there was some better 
ground for this opinion than the presence of an eruptive rock in the gneiss 
along this mountain axis ; but however this may be, it has been shewn 
beyond reasonable doubt by Colonel McMahon^ that the crystalline series 
forming the peaks south of Wangtu, of which the Simla watershed is an 
offshoot, is the same as that of the main range.^ The massive granitoid 
gneiss which, although subordinate, is the most conspicuous member of 
the series, and thus was unfortunately made its representative member, 
passes into the north base of these soifthern peaks above Sangla on the 
Baspa (which joins the Sutlej south of Chini), at an elevation of about 
10,000 feet; and it emerges on the south base at Lorot (20 miles due 
south-west from Sangla) at the head of the Pabar valley, at an elevation 
of about 8,500. In the intervening mountains of Bisahir, crossed by the 
Borendo and Eupinu passes, the stratification lies flatly, and there must, be 
some 6,000 feet of the gneissose schists overlying the more granitoid 
rock. Although no granite has been observed here, these are no doubt 
the same as the schistose gneiss, having a high northerly dip, described by 
Dr. Stoliczka in the Bhabeh section {I. c, p. 14) and distinctly included by 
him in his " central gneiss." The opinion that this gneiss was restricted 
to the main mountain axis was, no doubt, a principal reason for the 
name given to it, which is certainly not altogether appropriate to the real 
state of the case. " Lower gneiss ■" would have been a better designation 
for it, as it is probably the oldest rock in the whole Himalayas. In the 
Tibetan region we shall find gneiss that is probably an altered silurian 
rock ■ whereas the junction of the Lower Himalayan gneiss with the 
silurian slates on the north side of the main range is represented as 
abrupt, if not Unconformable ; although the granite is said to penetrate 
even up to the overlying secondary rocks.* 

This determination of the Lower Himalayan gneiss in the Simla 
region to be the same as that of the main range, is a point of great 
importance ; as it at once disposes of the conjectures that had been 
hazarded, as to its being possibly of later age than the Krol rocks ; and 
it is only fair to suggest that those conjectures may have influenced 

1 Mem. G. S. I., V, p. 15. 

2Eec. G. S. I., X, pp. 216—221. 

» It should be recollected that Dr. Stoliczka did not himself survey the Simla region, 
and that his examination of the gneiss in this part of the Himalayas can only have been of 
the most cursory description. 

4 I. c, p. 12. 



598 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— LOWEB HIMALATAS. [Chap. XXV. 

Dr. Stoliczka's decision upon the distinctness o£ the two gneisses. Suppos- 
ing the massive band of granitoid gneiss to have an approximately fixed 
position in the series, as is implied for this area by the foregoing' observ- 
ations, it will be of great service in tracing the position of the gneissic 
series and its relation to the slate series. On the secondary ridge, and 
principal watershed, running west-south-west from the Bisahir peaks to 
Simla, this gneiss forms the crest at Hatu (10,469) ; and it is very pro- 
minent below the crest in the southern branch, forming the Shankan 
ridge, from which it passes eastwards into the valley of the Pabar. A 
low east-north-easterly dip is the general lie of the gneiss in this position. 
Hatu would seem to be on the cre'st of an anticlinal, and 8 miles to the 
north, in the Sutlej (3,000), the same gneiss, or what we are supposing to 
be the same, forms the banks of the river from Kamarsen bridge, nearly 
to Rampur, the capital of the Bisahir State. North of the Sutlej, in the 
Jalori ridge, running from the snowy peaks of Kulu west-south-west- 
wards to the Cheru summit (10,134), within 12 miles of the tertiary zone, 
a massive granitoid gneiss again occurs, with a prevailing low easterly 
dip. 

AH these gneissic rocks of the interior are continuous with the crys- 
talline mass of the main chain ; and the principal feature to notice about 
them is their small disturbance as compared with their state in that 
chain, or with the condition of the newer rocks forming the outer zone 
of the Lower Himalayas. But there is one mass of granitoid gneiss 
difBerently circumstanced in the Simla area, forming the Chor mountain 
(11 982 feet high), 25 miles south-east of Simla, and 20 miles from the 
main boundary at Nahan. Lithologically, the rock forming the Chor 
is the same as the massive gneiss of Hatu and elsewhere, but in the first- 
named mountain it is quite surrounded by the rocks of the upper series. 
It will be described further on. 

The slate series. — Although true slaty cleavage, distinct from 
lamination and jointing, is of rare occurrence in the Lower Himalayas,' 
the prevailing type of rock in the newer series, indicated on p. 595, is that 
best described as slaty; and it will be convenient to speak of these rocks 
collectively as the slate series, as distinguished from the lower metamor- 
phic series. Locally, the texture is below this standard of induration, 
and the rock is rather shaly than slaty, as in the Infra- Krol shales at the 
base of the Krol mountain. Locally also, and more frequently, crystalline 
foliation is well developed, where the rock is rather schistose than slaty, 
as in those same Infra- Krol shales on Jako at Simla. 

> Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Pt. 2, p. 72. 



Extra-Peninsular. J THE slate series. 



599 



The normal order of this series is nowhere so svu-ely displayed, with 
so little disturbance and alteration of the strata, as in the Simla region, 
just inside the Sirmur rocks of the standard area, on the main road to 
Simla. From the Solan rest-house the Krol mountain (7,406) on the- 
north, the Boj on the west, and Kanoj on the south-east, are within easy 
walking distance. They are formed, above the road level, of massive 
hmestone, more or less isolated upon a base of earthy slates, thus leaving 
no doubt that the limestone is the latest of the series. The Blaini stream 
rises just west of Solan; and in its channel the small, but highly distinct- 
ive, group that bears its name is repeatedly exposed, sometimes in con- 
tact with the nummulitie clays. Considering its persistent small dimen- 
sions, this Blaini group has a remarkably wide distribution, having been 
traced in typical form as far as the Krol limestone itself; and thus a 
much-needed horizon can be recognised in an immense thickness of rocks 
that could scarcely otherwise be separated, and a clue is furnished whereby 
to unravel and delineate the very complicated disturbance to which 
these outer rocks have been subjected. 

So far as can be, or at least has been, made out in the outer zone of 
the mountains, there is conformity between the several groups of the 
upper series ; but in discussing the relations of the two series, facts will 
be observed involving the overlap of the upper groups at or about the 
Blaini horizon. 

The Infra-Blaini rocks (Simla slates). — In the neighbourhood of 
Solan, where the three upper groups of the slate series are typically seen, 
the Blaini rocks occur in the lowest ground, so the underlying formations 
are not exposed. These may be well seen near Simla, below the Blaini 
outcrop on the easb in the valley of the Ussan, and on the north towards 
the Sutlej. They consist of finely laminated slaty shales and thin sandy 
flagstones, with occasional beds of earthy sandstones. The lamination 
is sometimes fine enough and the induration sufficient to produce service- 
able roofing slate, but much inferior to true cleavage slates. From the 
Blaini rocks at the Lakri Bazaar there is an apparently unbroken succes- 
sion of the Simla slates to Naldera (the ridge above Bassantpur), where 
the limestone of the Sutlej valley begins; the dip is steady, and there is 
no trace of a flexure; 5,000 feet is a low estimate of the thickness of such 
a section. The limestone just mentioned is supposed to be the Krol lime- 
stone, brought down by faulting ; and, as in every other known section, the 
actual substratum of the Simla slates has not been observed in this region. 

The Blaini group. — This group consists of two very distinct mem- 
bers, each of which seldom exceeds 50 feet in thickness, and is gene- 
rally much less. The upper rock is a fine, compact or micro-crystalline 



600 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXV. 

magnesian limestone/ of pale-grey and pink tints, thin bedded, but often 
amalgamated into a single mass. It rests upon a quartzite sandstone, 
often a clear quartzose rock, but sometimes rusty and more or less earthy. 
In whole or in part this lower band is very often highly conglomeratic, 
with well-rounded pebbles and small boulders of white quartz and vari- 
ously-tinted quartzites, and sometimes partially-rounded debris of slate 
rocks. Pebbles of crystalline rocks have not been observed in it in this 
region. Although often crushed together, mixed and inverted, these two 
rocks seem never to have been interstratified originally; and it is possible, 
notwithstanding their so constant association, that they were considerably 
sepai-ated in age. The persistent occurrence of two thin bands of such 
different types of rocks over so large an area is a remarkable circumstance, 
but a most fortunate one for the geologist who undertakes the study of 
this difficult ground. 

Infra-Krol group. — This is a provisional form of nomenclature, and 
it is not improbable that " lower Krol " group would be more appropriate; 
but until the connexion can be based upon palseontologieal facts or more 
extended observation of the strata, it is safer to adhere to the more vague 
expression of the relation. At the base of the Krol, north of Solan, the 
soft black infra- Krol shales are very well exposed. The carbonaceous 
element is the most striking character of the group, but it cannot be 
adopted as an essential one, or even perhaps general. Sometimes this 
character extends down to the beds overlying the Blaini limestone, as in 
the outcrops on the Ghambar between Kiari Ghat and Sairi ; but often 
it is wanting in beds that seem to belong to this horizon, as along the 
Solan watershed, on the crushed anticlinal between the Krol and the Boj. 
In the absence of faulting, or of an outcrop of the Blaini limestone here, 
all the beds should belong to the inf ra-Krol group, but they are not car- 
bonaceous. It may perhaps be questioned whether this can be attributed 
to a subsequent removal of the carbonaceous ingredient, or to an original 
inequality of distribution. This carbonaceous ingredient of the shales is, 
however, very widely spread, being well seen at Mansiiri (Mussooree), and 
other places at a distance from the Simla region. The shiny black . 
crushed rock, so common in faulted ground in this region, is presumably 
derived from the carbonaceous beds pf the infra-Krol gronp.^ 

J McMahon : Bee. G. S. I., X, p. 210. 

' Suhathu Coal. — The coaly aspect of this carbonaceous shale, especially where made 
glossy in crashed ground, has often raised expectations of finding coal. In 1862, Colonel 
Fyers, in spite of warnings, made an attempt at mining upon an outcrop of this crushed 
rock near Suhathu, expecting to find coal to the deep. The sttifE contains sometimes as 
much as 25 per cent, of fixed carbon, besides 11 per cent, of volatile matter, partly hydro- 
carbons. 



Extra-Peninsular.] RELATIONS OP THE SLATES AND GNEISS. 601 

In the neighbourhood of the Krol or at Simla, a thickness of about 
1,000 feet would include the beds between the Blaiui limestone and the 
base of the Krol group ; elsewhere there is a much greater apparent 
thickness, as from the base of the Tara Devi quartzite at Man Ghat sum- 
mit, to the Qutcrop of the Blaini group in the Ussan, where the thickness 
would seem to be 3,000 feet. But in all these sections the strata are 
greatly affected by small slips ; and these interfere with any attempt to- 
estimate the dimensions of the groups, and tend either to exaggerate, or to 
diminish the true thickness.' 

The Krol group.— On the Krol mountain, from which it takes its 
name, the top group consists almost entirely of limestone, a pale-grey 
(Compact or crypto-ciystalline rock, "sometimes dark and locally oolitic ; 
but even here there are subordinate shaly beds, sometimes pale pink, and 
at the base there is a variable band of clear coarsish quartz sandstones. 
The calcareous element is decidedly the prevailing character of the group, 
as compared with the imderlying slate series, which is remarkably deficient 
in this ingredient. The sandy element, however, is often very pro- 
minent. As an expansion of the bottom band, this fact is well exempli- 
fied at Simla, in the massive quartzites of Boileauganj, and of Tara Devi 
ridge to the south, overlaid by a remnant of the Krol limestone at Jutog, 
Elsewhere, as south of Guma peak in Sirmiir, the limestone itself is 
rather a calcareous sandstone, or occurs as subordinate bands in a mass of 
sandstone. When the ground comes to be worked out, these variations 
will be useful, as suggesting local conditions of deposition; and the estab- 
lishment of this character in the standard area will facilitate conjectural 
identification of the group elsewhere, as in Nepal. 

The relations of the slate and gneissic series.— No special ac- 
count has been given of the distribution of each group, nor of the struc- 
tural features of the ground, because the little that is known of either will 
be fully exhibited in discussing the difficult question of the relation of the 
two rock-series. The structural peculiarities of the Lower Himalayas 
are best shewn by contrast with those of the other regions of the moun- 
tains. .All the boundaries hitherto noticed were determined along what 
are clearly Himalayan lines of disturbance. Even in the middle region, 
where both the bottom tertiary and middle tertiary junctions were shewn 
with some probability to be aboriginal, i. e,, primarily (as junctions) 
lines of deposition, these had previously been determined as lines of erosion 
by the early results of Himalayan disturbance. In the North-West, again, 
where the Sub- Himalayan and Central Himalayan features come toge- 
ther there is complete con-espondeuce between the structural features in the 

' Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Ft. 2, p. 37. 



602 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-LOWER HIMALAYAS. . [Chap. XXV. 

gneissic axes o£ the Dhauladhar (the range just north of the Kangra valley) 
and the Pir Pan jal (the range south of Kashmir), which are constructed on 
the same pattern as the latest ridge of the Siwaliks. The change is im- 
mediate where, at the east end of the Dhauladhar, the Lower Himalayan 
region begins : the boundary of the slate and the gneissic series here does 
not run even approximately parallel to the main boundary ; it bends east 
and then north, round the point of a ridge of gneiss, up the valley of 
the Bias towards Sultanpur, and thus all round the basin of the river 
and its tributaries to the south, where it runs to south of west along the 
Jalori ridge of gneiss, separating the Bias from the Sutlej, and then 
round the point of this ridge and along its south flank to far up the 
valley of the Sutlej. 

Other changes are commensurate with this remarkable one in the out- 
line of the boundary : from being a single naiTow outcrop along the base 
of the Dhauladhar, the slate and limestone series spreads into a wide area 
(some 20 miles by 30) in the Bias basin, and similarly on the Sutlej. 
The structural features in the two positions are equally discrepant : along 
the Dhauladhar the strata are vertical, or underlie towards the gneissic 
axis in inverted ordtr ; whereas in the great river basins of . this termi- 
nal area of the Lower Himalayas, the confused contortion of the rocks 
within the basin is beyond description ; but at the boundary the dip on all 
sides is towards the overhanging ridge of gneiss, and in normal order, 
the great or Krol limestone being uppermost.^ 

The appearance is as if the slate and limestone series really passed 
beneath the gneiss, and were older than it ; but if this gneiss is the same 
as that of the main range, such a view would be untenable. The sup- 
position which would best represent the facts to the imagination is, that 
these deep and precipitous valleys in the gneiss had existed in pre-silurian, 
or at least pre-carboniferous times, and had become filled with deposits 
of those periods. Under subsequent compression the disturbance would 
principally take efifect upon the softer later deposits, and in' a man- 
ner corresponding with the features described. It is doubtful indeed 
whether any other supposition will iit the case : the structural features 
may almost be said to be incompatible with the view of their formation 
by faulting or inversion, produced by lateral thrust upon any parallel 
sequence of strata, the very difEerent results of which processes are so 
well illustrated in neighbouring areas. 

An apparently complete refutation of the objection just stated, against 
the explanation by faulting, is found in the Sutlej basin. The Shali 
mountain (9,420'), which forms such a picturesque object in the land- 

' Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Ft. 2, p. 50. 



Extra-Peninsular.] RELATIONS OF THE SLATES AND GNEISS. 603 

scape from Simla, is formed of limestone, and it stands within the special 
basin of distm-bance in question. Above and east of the gap connecting 
the Shall with the watershed-ridge east of the Sutlej, there is an outcrop 
. of the Blaini group, dipping north-eastward; and from the Shall the lime- 
stone passes to the south-east, and round the head of the valley under 
Thiog, Fagu, and Mahasu, into the Naldera ridge, where, we have already- 
seen (p. 599), it apparently passes southwards under the base of the Simla 
slates. Thus on the south side the rocks of the Sutlej valley behave 
towards the slate series of the typical area, as they do to the gneiss on 
the north side ; and it would seem that the 'crucial evidence, whereby to 
judge the whole case of these valleys full of the latest beds of the series, 
were to be found here, where ■ the horizons of the contiguous rocks are 
more comparable. 

The question turns upon the point, whether the limestone of the Shall, 
and of the Sutlej and Bids valleys, is the same as the Kr61 rock ; and, so 
far as our observations go, the answer is in the affirmative. The general 
resemblance of the two rocks is sufficiently marked, and the differences 
are no greater than have been observed in the Krol rock within its standard 
area. Carbonaceous beds also are found in both of those valley's ; and in 
one case an outcrop of the Blaini group has been marked, north of the 
Sutlej, on the spur north-west of Bihul ; where, in contact with a broad 
dyke of trap, there is a small thickness of coarse quartz conglomerate, 
overlaid by slate and thin-bedded limestone.^ 

Accepting this identification, we are then bound to suppose a disloca- 
tion and downthrow of great magnitude in the Sutlej valley, or an up- 
heaval of the ground at Simla and to the west of it. The Blaini outcrop 
north of Simla passes westwards along the flank of the ridge to Dhamini, 
where it turns south and then south-east, following a devious course to 
near Haripur on the old road to Simla.* Thus the form of this inevitable 
dislocation is quite on a par with that of the boundary with the gneiss 
between the Sutlej and the Bias. We cannot, however, reasonably apply 
this crucial evidence all round, without consideration of the objections 
already noted. We have seen how regularly even the oldest rocks can 
conform to the lines of Himalayan disturbance — a fact which implies 
some approach to original homogeneity of disposition in the strata so 
affected; and, in like manner, it seems obligatory to account for such 
very abnormal lines of dislocation as that under notice by supposing a 

1 Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Pt. 2, p. 56. 

2 For the observations here quoted, and for others to follow, as well as for a fuller 
discussion of this puzzling question, see Colonel McMahon's excellent paper on the Simla 
Himalayas, Eeo. G. S. I., X, p. 204, 



604 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. C Chap. XXV. 

corresponding discordance of original relations in the masses subjected to 
the disturbing action. For the case in hand no supposition seems so 
plausible as that already made, that these upper rocks in the actual 
valley basins were originally laid down in similar deep hollows formed 
by subaerial erosion m the gneissic series ; and that the dislocated up- 
heaved mass of Simla slates, forming the ridge on the south of the Sutlej, 
was determined in form by an underlying original ridge of the support- 
ing gneissic rocks. The presence of this massive gneiss in the Chor, on 
the axis of this curved dislocation, is perhaps some support for the ex- 
planation offered of the latter feature. This mode of action is also sup- 
ported by observations made elsewhere, from which it was inferred that 
compression has a tendency to increase original inequalities of surface.^ 

The junction of the slate and gneiss series in this regi&n is not, 
however, all of the sharply defined form described in the Sutlej vaUey, 
where the massive unaltered limestone dips abruptly towards the massive 
gneiss. The observation already mentioned, of the Blaini group on a 
high point north-east of the Shall, and having a low north-easterly dip, 
gives us cause to expect that the Kr61 rocks occur in the ascending section 
in the direction of the high mountains, lofty spurs from which are at no 
great distance. The same Blaini outcrop has been traced by Colonel 
McMahon to the south-east across the Thiog ridge into the valley of the 
Giri, east of which it passes under the Paternala ridge, formed of Krol 
quartzites, to emerge again in the valley under Chepal, whence it is trace- 
able to the Tons at the bridge on the Simla-Mansuri (Mussooree) road. 
The expectation to find the supra-Blaini rocks inside this line is natural ; 
but the difiiculty of recognising them is indefinitely increased by the 
greater or less metamorphism that all the rocks have imdergone in this 
direction. 

A very important first attempt to accomplish this task has been made 
bj' Colonel McMahon. He considers that the calcareous schists formino- 
the summit north of Matiani, on the Simla watershed ridge, east of 
Shdli, represent the Kr61 limestone ; and they pass on to Narkanda, close 
under the Hatu summit, formed of the massive gneiss. Similar calca- 
reous and carbonaceous rocks occur in the Sutlej valley, north of Hatu, 
above and below Kotgarh, and close above the massive gneiss in the 
gorge of the river. Other identifications have been made in like posi- 
tions elsewhere, as at the base of the Shankan ridge about Kotkhai and 
Tirhosh (Taroehe), and far «p the tortuous valley of the B.upin. The 
degree of metamorphism these supposed Krol beds have undergone is 
always markedly less than that of the gneissic rocks of the enclosing 
> Eec. G. S. L, VII, p. 62. 



Extra-Peninsular. J special metamorphism and disturbance. 605 

ridges ; but the action has been sufficient to amalgamate the two rocks at 
their junction, so that the detection of their original contact is most 
difficult. Such crucial sections must, however, be sought for and found, 
to complete the direct evidence for the proposed relations of the rocks. 

Such observations as those now recorded — where top beds of the slate 
series rest close upon the massive gneiss — ^imply, not only the removal of 
the 6,000 feet of schistose gneiss, normally overlying the massive rock 
in closely adjoining positions, but also the entire overlap of the Simla 
slates by the Krol deposits in the inner area of the mountains ; thus 
completing the picture of the primitive condition of the Simla area — as a 
great mass of gneissic rocks, deeply eroded by atmospheric denudation, 
and gradually submerged beneath the palseozoie waters. The idea of the 
upper gneiss being the Simla slates converted, is hardly to be thought of ; 
a much more probable equivalent for the infra-Blaini beds being found 
in the silurian slates resting upon that gneiss in Tibet. 

Special metmorphism and disturbance. — The extent to which 
the top beds of the slate series have been locally metamorphosed under 
different circumstances is well exhibited at Simla itself ; the garnetiferous 
and hornblendic mica schists, with abundance of vein quartz, forming 
Jako, being undoubtedly converted infra- Krol beds, overlying the Blaini 
group, which is well seen round three sides of the mountain. This feature 
is in itself most interesting, as shewing that advanced results of 
metamorphism are brought about independently of any plutonic heat ; 
the Simla slates underlying these highly foliated schists of Jako shew 
no sign of crystalline metamorphismj although of course they must 
have had the full benefit of any heat from below that can have been 
instrumental in producing those effects on the upper rocks. This re- 
markable case of special metamorphism at Simla was a strong point 
in the suggestion that even the gneiss of Hatu and elsewhere might 
really be a later formation than the Krol beds, which at so many points 
seem to pass under it. That suggestion did not necessarily imply that the 
Kr61 beds maintained their unaltered condition beneath the gneiss ; but 
the proof (p. 597) that this latter rock is the same as the infra-silurian 
gneiss of the main range, renders the suggestion altogether untenable. 

In this connexion notice may be taken of a common structural fea- 
ture of the hills in this region ; how, almost invariably, vertical or 
highly contorted beds are found in the bottoms of the valleys, whether 
transverse or longitudinal ; while in ascending the slopes the dips become 
lower, and at top the beds are often quite flat. The usual explanation 
of this would be that, as the valleys are the result of denudation, 
erosion had taken place where the strata were most crushed. A quite 



606 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXV. 

opposite interpretation of the facts has been suggested by Colonel 
McMahon, to shew that more or less of the contortion of these rocks 
has occurred since the hills and valleys assumed somewhat of their 
present form : — that, lateral pressure, set up beneath a deeply eroded 
surface, would take effect in the manner described, crushing the strata 
in the positions of least resistance, the action being distributed in a 
diminishing degree up the sides of the hills. Some confirmation of 
this view may be derived from the fact that great contortion, the result 
of lateral pressure, has been proved to have taken place in the- outer 
hills since the main features of the Lower Himalayas were carved out 
(p. 570) ; and it is by no means unlikely that at the same time some 
action of the kind supposed occurred in that area. 

There is always a risk in applying characters that are obscure, to 
modify the interpretation of characters that seem plainer ; but in 
complex questions no suggestion should be omitted. Thus the fact 
that on a commanding summit, some of the highest beds of the whole 
stratified series are- found in a high state of metardorphism, overlying 
unaltered rocks, and well removed from the area of general metamor- 
phism, seems decidedly at variance with certain views put forward, on 
page 569, regarding pre-tertiary Himalayan land and the late dis- 
turbance of the slate series. The risk here lies in the imperfection of 
our knowledge regarding the processes, of the metamorphism of rocks ; 
but on any supposition, short of some innate form of metamorphic action 
at this spot, we must connect the fact with the principal disturbance 
and crushing to which these rocks have been subjected ; and it must 
have been a form of disturbance very different from that suggested in 
the last paragraph. The same considerations would suggest that, at the 
time of their metamorphism, these rocks on Jako, and the valleys on 
both sides, must have been covered by a thickness of deposits of which 
no account has yet been taken. Or may we reverse the reasoning, and 
take the fact of the rocks being altered on this peak as a proof of how 
very superficial a matter thorough metamorphism may be ? 

Trappean rocks. — The distribution of eruptive rocks in the Simla 
region is not without its bearing upon the foregoing considerations. 
On the best known section, that along the road through Simla to Nai-- 
kanda, only one thin dyke has been observed near the latter place ; 
whereas in the same rocks of the adjoining area in the Sutlej valley, 
and again in the basin of the Bias, we find profuse trappean intrusion, 
evidently connected with the extreme crushing and disturbance the slates 
and limestone have undergone in those positions ; and the same intrusion 
occurs again freely to the south-east, under like conditions. Trap is rare 



Extra-Peninsular. J THE CHOR MOUNTAIN. 607 

in the gneissic series, unless in particular spots, as on the Sutlej between 
Nogli and Rampur ; and its absence in the slates in the area indicated 
may be due to an underlying mass of gneiss, such as has been just sug- 
gested to account for the peculiar form of dislocation connected with the 
elevation of that area. 

This distribution of the trap, connected with the fact that the slates 
had not been contorted when the Subathu deposits were laid down 
(p. 569), has been taken ^ to prove that the trap of the Lower Himalayas 
must be at least of post-nummulitic age. That it should so very rarely 
penetrate the tertiary rocks is rather remarkable (p. 557). Can the ex- 
planation of this apparent anomaly be, that the origin of this intrusive 
rock is rather innate than hypogene ? * 

The Ohor mountain. — The most conspicuous summit of what we 
may still speak of as the Simla region is the Chor mountain, having 
an elevation close upon 12,000 feet (11,982). It stands between /the 
Giri and the Tons rivers, 25 miles south-east of Simla, and as near to 
the plains as that station itself. Throughout the whole Lower Hima- 
layas no summit of this elevation is known to occur so near the edge 
of the mountains. The entire crest is formed of the most massive 
granitoid gneiss, which, unless repeated by faulting or flexure, must be 
here at least 5,000 feet thick. The area occupied by this rock 
is about 10 miles long, from south-east to north-west, by 6 miles broad ; 
it is surrounded by the slate and limestone series. 

At first sight, and from the point of view of- the slates and the 
metamorphic series forming an approximately conformable sequence, 
the feature was most puzzling, as it had to be accounted for in some 
manner as a protrusion of the basal rock through an enormous thick- 
ness of overlying deposits ; and accordingly it was so accounted for ^ ; 
a partial resemblance of the cross-section to that of the Dhauladhar 
was allowed to overrule many almost incompatible facts recorded at 
the same time,* and the Chor was presented as a protruded mass. All 
the observations we possess of the ground are few and incomplete ; but 
they seem to agree best with the view brought forward by Colonel 
McMahon, that the Chor was already a mountain in palaeozoic times.^ 
The ground offers an accessible and compact field for the study of this 
most interesting question of the relation of the two great rock-series. 

1 Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Pt. 2, p. 71. 

2 For a parallel case, see Mem. Q. S. I., VII, (201)— (203). 

3 Mem, Gt. S. I., III., Pt. 2, p. 47. 
* I. u., pp. 41 to 45. 

5 Reo. G. S. I., X, p. 211. 



gQg GEOLOGY OP INDIA^LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXV. 

The gneiss of the Chor is highly granitoid and massive. It is 
certainly generally free from foreign rock, but vein granite has been 
observed in it.^ The , bedding and foliation can, however, be traced, 
indicating a low dip to north -north-east ; and other features shew this 
to be the lie of the gneissic mass : on the north, the overlying schists 
reach farthest up the spurs, and the gneiss farthest down the stream 
beds ; while on the south the highest outcrops of the gneiss area are on 
the spurs and the schists extend up the valleys. This latter disposition 
requires that the gneiss to some extent overlies schists ; but it has not 
been made out whether this is by normal superposition, or by inversion of 
newer beds, or by deformation of an original junction, or by faulting. 

On the supposition of this gneiss being protruded fi-om below 
among the slates, whether in a partially plastic state or by faulting, its 
neighbourhood should be a position of special disturbance. The contrary 
is certainly the rule. In ascending from the Giri to the Chor, the 
Simla slates maintain a moderate dip towards the mountain ; they 
become gradually metamorphosed, and about Banalah and Sohana, close 
to the gneiss, soft hornblendic garnetiferous mica schists, like those of 
Jako, are nearly horizontal. Similar beds on the north side form the 
spur between Mandera and Suran, where they rest upon the porphyritic 
gneiss. If these beds are indeed of the infra-Krol group, the case of 
overlap and complete unconformity would be established. On the south- 
east side of the Chor the limestone is in great force, and the disturbance 
is more marked. 

South-east of Simla. — Although the fullest and clearest sections 
of the upper groups of the slate and limestone series are found in the 
Simla region, the most complete case of removal of these beds occurs in 
the same ground; west of the Krol, up to Arki, the great Krol limestoiie 
is wanting, unless it is represented by the narrow band at Kakarhati 
on the old road to Simla, the pseudo-organic markings in which rock 
have often led to a vain search for fossils. The absence of the limestone 
here is apparently connected with the faulted elevation to the west, 
described on page 603. South-eastwards from the Krol the limestone 
range is very conspicuous, being sharply defined on the north by a great 
faulted anticlinal that passes from Kandah Ghat, at the north base of 
the Krol, down the deep valley of the lower Giri. Frofu the confluence 
of the Palar with the Giri the limestone crosses to the north, .and 
spreads over a large area east of the Chor, to the Deoban mountain (9,347')- 
in Jaunsar. The boundary with the gneissic series has not been traced 

' McMahon : I. c, p. 221. 



Extra-Peninsular.] KUMAUN AND GARHWAL. 609 

in that direction. Along the ridge at Mansiiri (Mussooree) the Krol 
limestone occurs frequently, as on the Abbey and Camers-back summits. 
On the top of Landour it is mixed with sandstones, and appears again 
by itself on the Tapuban point. The Blaini limestone and conglomerate 
are well seen on the flanks of the Sirkanda summit, and again in the 
Ganges at its confluence ^th the Hinnalgar. Intrusive trap is not 
uncommon in the slates at Mussooree. 

Kumaun and Garhwal. — As the earliest British possession in the 
Himalayas, the province of Garhwal and Kumaun was the first open to 
systematic observation. Indeed, the first attempt at official geological 
survey work in India was the mineralogical survey of this ground, under- 
taken by Captain Herbert by order of the Governor General (Lord Hast- 
ings). The work was finished in 1825, but was not published till 184^,^ 
nine years after the death of Captain Herbert. As the work of an 
accomplished man, fairly versed in the science of his day. Captain Herbert's 
report is of permanent interest for students of geology in India, as the 
best local illustration of the state of geology at that time. 

A quarter of a century later it was again on this ground that a 
connected geological survey on a large scale was undertaken by Captain 
Richard Strachey, of the Bengal Engineers, now General Strachey. His 
map includes the same area of the Lower Himalayas as Captain Herbert's, 
between the Sutlej and Nepal, with the important addition of a broad 
band in the Tibetan region. A comparison of the two works gives an 
instructive illustration of the advance made by geological science in the 
interval. With some few exceptions, our remarks on this portion of the 
Lower Himalayas are taken from General Strachey's observations.* 

The section through Naini Tal and Almora presents some analogies 
with' the Simla section. The ridge at Naini Tal is a great synclinal 
range, with many local fractures and contortions, like its type the Krol 
range. The great limestone that forms many of the summits to the 
south of the lake is very like the Krol limestone ; and the pink, greenish 
and dark-grey shaly slates associated with ' it shew the same aflSnities. 
A conglomerate like the Blaini rock has been observed in the dark slates 
forming the ridge north of the Kota dun. One observation, indeed,, has 
been recorded throwing doubt upon this correlation : the Messrs. 
Schlagintweit announced ^ the discovery " in the clay-slates in the neigh- 
bourhood of Naini Tal of numerous Foraminifera, evidently identical 

1 As an extra number of Vol. XI of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 
The map to illustrate the report was issued with Vol. XIII, 1844. 

2 Q. J. G. S., Vols. VII and X, 1851 and 1854. 

3 J.A. S. B., XXV, p. 118. 



610 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Cliap. XXV- 

with those which accompany the eocene nummulitic foi-mation." It is 
possible that these explorers may have hit upon a remnant of the 
Subathu beds, folded up in the slates, like those mentioned in the Sirmur 
area (p. 534), and the one case east of the Ganges (p. 535) j but it is also 
possible that the oolitic or other concretionary forms, common in the 
limestone at Naini Tal as at the Krol, may have been mistaken for fossils. 
Numerous careful observers have searched the rocks in vain to verify the 
Messrs. Sehlagintweit's discovery.^ 

North of the limestone range there is a great dislocation with up- 
heaval tothe north, as at the Krol. But in Kumaun, at least on this 
section, the line of fracture is filled with a basic eruptive rock, numerous 
dykes of which occur in the range about Naini Tal. It is apparently on 
the south-eastern continuation of this main intrusion that the igneous 
rock which penetrates the sandstones of the Sub- Himalayan zone (p. 543) 
is described as taking the form of a granite.^ It is stated that the 
limestone occurs again to the east of this great line of intrusive rock. 

North of the dislocation the contrast with the Simla section is most 
marked : we come at once upon thorough metamorphic strata, genuine 
schists, like the older series of the Simla region, rather than like any 
known metamorphic condition of , the slate series. The strata maintain 
a steady, moderate north-easterly dip, thus presenting a very marked 
decrease of disturbance as compared with the newer rocks. This was 
also a point of contrast between the two series in the Simla region. In 
Kumaun, too, trap rock is comparatively rare in the gneissic series. 
South of Almora (the capital of Kumaun) a broad band of granitic rock 
occurs in the schists, and has a considerable range to south-east and 
north-west. It seems to be in the main a massive granitoid gneiss ; but 
some true vein granite occurs with it. Mica schists occur again north of 
the granitoid rock, containing strings and nests of impure graphite, the 
north-easterly dip being continued ; after a space the same beds turn 
up, with a south-westerly dip. North of the synclinal there is a marked 
line of disruption, with copious intrusion -of trappean rock and the intro- 
duction of new strata— slates, conglomerates, and quartzites, with lime- 
stone in force. Disturbance is, again, more varied and more marked in 
these formations, and it is not unlikely that they may ultimately be 
identified with the slate and limestone series of the Simla region, though 
no specific attempt can now be made at affiliation. Beyond these, again, 

' There is also a possibility, as in the case of the triassic limestone, said to have been 
found by one of the same collectors near Solan, and in numerous examples amongst their 
zoological collections, that there was a mistake about the locality of the specimen. 

2 Q. J. G. S., 1851. VII, p. 298. 



Extra-Peninsular.] nepal. 6] 

there is a region of crystalline schists at the base of the great snoM 
range. 

Nepal. — From the borders of Kumaun we have to pags by a blank 
250 miles to get our next glimpse at the rocks of the Lower Himalaya 
on the Kathmandu section.^ The length of this section is about 30 mile 
from the main boundary] which distance would nearly take us to tl 
second line of dislocation and intrusion north of Almora in Kumaui 
and as far as Narkanda in the Simla section. Except in the conjectiiri 
identification of the formations, the features are mJike those described i 
the western area. 

The first rocks seen north of the tertiary sandstone are some eartl 
schists, having a crushed dip of 50° to north-by-east, quite parallel : 
strike to the sandstone and to the boundary. A thin band of bh 
limestone occurs in these beds ; and further on, a thick band of blac 
schistose slates, in which are some irregular layers of impure coa 
matter. All these beds, though decidedly sub-foliated, are le 
altered than any rocks to the north of them, and also less highly incline 
After some special contortion and folding, connected with which a doub 
fully intrusive trappoid rock was observed, the schists are succeeded 1 
a broad band of quartzites ; and these again by a great mass of whi 
crystalline limestone, all dipping at 70° to 80°, to north by east, 
specimen of this rock proved to be not dolomitic. 

This great band of hmestone would seem to end the ascending sectior 
for over a broad area on the north this limestone and the quartzite are r 
peated in broken confused masses, as if in a synclinal flexure, forming tl 
most wild and picturesque portion of the Rapti valley, below Nimbua Tar 

The resemblance of this series to that of the Krol and infra-Kr^ 
rocks, is quite sufficient to warrant the supposition of their connexioi 
and even the form of the section, so far, is homologous with the corr( 
sponding portion of the western sections. The greatly advanced meti 
morphism and the excessive disturbance are the chief points of contrast. 

At the head of the Rapti valley, about Bimphddi, there is an abru] 
change of the strike, to north-35°-west, in flaggy quartzose schists 
and in the Chessagarhi ridge these rocks are associated with thick banc 
of porphyritic gneiss, which becomes dominant at the north base c 
the ridge. On this side the change is abrupt, from the gneiss to a gree 
series of flaggy and slaty schists occupying the Pinauni and Chitlon 
valleys. The dips are in opposite directions in the gneiss and the sehisi 
close to their junction, suggesting that the gneiss had been faulted u 

iRec. G. S. I., Vni,p.93. 



GEOLOGY OP INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXY. 

along a broken anticlinal. With slight variations, there is a steady 
ascending section of the flaggy schists up to the Chendragiri ridge, over- 
looking the valley of Nepal ; and here again we come upon calcareous 
rocks, which occupy the whole width of the Nepal valley. It is a broad 
synclinal, with repeated minor compressed flexures of these upper rocks. 
Pure limestone occurs chiefly towards the top of the series, as the white 
crystalline rock at the summit of Phulehok (9,730') and elsewhere ; but 
there is a great thickness of strata, in which the calcareous element is 
subordinate, the prevailing variety being a massive, very fine, schistose 
quartzite, with only a small percentage of carbonate of lime. 

It is not a very forced supposition to conjecture that these Nepal 
rocks are the same as those south of the Chessagarhi ridge, and represent 
the Krol series. The change of composition is even analogous to that 
observed between the Krol and the ground at and north of Simla. 
The flaggy schists of Chitlong would fittingly represent the Simla 
slates. 

Crystalline schists rise again, tnore or less vertically, on the north- 
north-east side of the valley, apparently in descending sequence with the 
calcareous formation, and at first alternating with the coarse, f elspathic 
gneiss forming the lofty Sheopuri ridge. To the north-west, slaty 
schists come m again at the inner base of the Sheopuri ridge, and 
have a decided soiitherly underlie towards the gneiss. In the valleys 
of the Tadi and Trisulganga the strike of these schists changes to east- 
north-east, and calcareous rocks occur with them. The Sheopuri gneiss 
probably does not cross the Trisulganga. 

It is doubtful whether the gneiss of the Chessagarhi or Sheopuri 
ridges represents the old gneiss of the western sections. Its structural 
relation to the schist and limestone series is quite different. No granitic 
vein-rock was observed in connection with it. It is also noteworthy that 
no trappean eruptive rock occurs in these sections, except in the doubtful 
case already mentioned near the mam boundary, although the rocks are 
so universally contorted. The fact is apparently adverse to the conjecture 
hazarded (p. 607) upon the quasi-innate nature of trap in the western 
region. 

The Sikkim area.— Passing over another reach of forbidden ground, 
250 miles long, in Eastern Nepal, the Lower Himalayas are again acces- 
sible in Sikkim, and we find an immense change in the aspect of the 
rocks. There is no calcareous group, and aU the rocks are more or less 
metamorphic ; but their arrangement is very different from that seen in 
the Kathmandu section, gnd superficially more like that of the Simla 



Extra- Peninsular. ] the sikkim- area. 613 

The first observation of importance in this ground was the discovery 
by Dr. Hooker, hi 184.9, of rocks containing fossil plants of the Damfida 
formation at the base of the Sikkim hills.^ This still remains the only 
case of identification between the pre-tertiary rocks of peninsular India 
and of the Lower Himalayas-; and while we are shut out from observa- 
tion in Nepd,l, nothing can be done to follow up this clue towards a 
fuller correlation of the formations in the two areas. 

In 1874, Mr. F. R. Mallet was deputed to examine the ground with 
a view to the possible discovery of useful coal-seams in the Damiida ropks. 
Several seams of workable dimensions were found, but the strata have 
been subjected to such compressioa and contortion, that the coal is every- 
where reduced to a flaky crumbling state, so that it could only be used 
after artificial consolidation. The broken condition of the rocks would 
also make mining very difiicult. Mr. Mallet has, however, given a de- 
scription of the rocks that deserves careful attention.^ His observations 
extended along the fringe of the hills through tlie Wtestern Bhutan Duars 
to the Sankos river, near longitude 90° ; but as there is a striking contrast 
in the rocks to east and west of the Jaldoka, forming the boundary of 
Sikkim on the east, the descriptions had better be given separately. 

The Sikkim area is more than 90 miles long, from the Mechi on the 
west at the Nepdl frontier, to the Jaldoka on the east. The Tista 
(Teesta) river, flowing from the great snowy range, divides this area about 
equally into the Darjiling division on the west and the Baling on the east. 
North of Darjiling lies the broad and deep valley of the Ra-ngit ; while 
the Tista and the Rangchu form a similar deep depression north of 
the Ddling area, the combined effect being that of two broad lofty 
spurs confronting each other on opposite sides of the lower gorge of the 

Tista. 

There are three series of rocks within the area specified : a gneissic 
series forming the whole of the mountain masses above 3,000 to 3,000 feet 
in elevation, and called the Darjiling gneiss; a great thickness of schist 
and slate, called the Daling series, extending not only along the outer 
border of the mountains, but up the gorge of the Tista and round into the 
valleys of the Raingit and Rangchu ; and the Damiidas, forming the 
third series of the Lower Himalayan rocks in Sikkim. The last- 
named are only found at the outer edge of the mountains, their great- 
est inward extension being a short way up the valley of the Tista, where 
of course the deepest section of the rocks occurs. The Damuda out- 
crop dies out within the limits of the Sikkim border : on the west it 

> Himalayan Joiirnals, Vol. I, p. 402, 
2Mem. G. S. I., XI, Pfc. 1. 



614 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— LOWER HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXV 

cannot be traced beyond the Balasan riverj 4 miles short of the Nepal 
frontier. To the east it has not been with certainty traced beyond the 
Chel, south of Baling, one of the positions already noticed where the 
tertiary rocks have been totally removed or concealed. The Di'liag slates 
at this point form a promontory, reaching quite up to the usual line of 
the outer edge of the tertiary zone. 

The Darjiling gneiss. — True gneiss is the preponderating rock of 
the gneissic series, but it often passes into gneissose schist and mica 
schist ; bands of quartzite occur rarely, and hornblendic rocks are ex- 
tremely uncommon; limestone or dolomite is unknown, and the gneiss is 
quartzose and never granitoid. Almost the only accessory minerals are 
kyanite, schorl, and garnet. Several of these characters distinguish this 
gneiss very decidedly from the gneiss of the peninsula, which is well 
represented close to the Himalayan border in the hills of Lower Assam. 
Except for the absence in Sikkim of the massive granitoid band, the 
Darjiling gneiss would fairly represent the gneiss of the Simla region. 
No observer in Sikkim has suggested the presence of two gneissic series. 
In the snowy range near Kanchinjinga Dr. Hooker has described this 
rock as penetrated by granite veins ; but this, as we have remarked 
(p. 597), gives no grounds for its separation. The age of the gneiss 
in the great range of the Eastern Himalayas has not been proved ; but 
there is no presumption that it is different from the infra-silurian gneiss 
in a corresponding position to the north-west ; and thus there is a decided 
presumption against the Darjiling gneiss being formed of strata of the 
secondary period, as it must be if its apparent relation to the other form- 
ations is the true one. At the same time, the rocks of the two areas 
have never been examined hj the same observer. 

On the main northern road through Darjiling the gneissic area is 16 
miles across, and the strata have the form of a broad flat synclinal, with 
numerous minor internal foldings. On the eastern slope also, over the 
Tista, the dip is inwards (westerly). Alike arrangement is observed in 
the gneiss of the Daling' spur. 

The Daling series. — ^^Pale-green smooth slates or clay-slates are the 
prevailing rocks of the Doling series]) in its lower outcrops, next the 
Damudasj but sometimes, in this position, they are quite schistose. 
Darker bands occur, also some flaggy quartzites, and rare beds of horn- 
blendic schist, which is sometimes calcareous or dolomitic ; but the almost 
complete absence of lime is a character of the series. Beds of carbon- 
aceous or graphitic schist ar6 occasionally found in the Daling series, as 
on the road above Pankab^ri, and a little south of the cart-road at Kur- 
, seong. West of the Mah&nadi the beds next the Damudas are more 



Extra-Peninsular.] the sikkim area. 615 

earthy and arenaceousj and a slaty conglomerate occurs near, or at, the 
boundary. On approaching the gneiss there is always a marked increase 
of metamorphism. In the outer Csputhern) sections this apparent 
passage into the crystalline series is comparatively rapid ; while in the 
interior the metamorphism of the slates near the gneiss is more pro- 
nounced, more gneissose beds appearing in them ; so that the distinction 
■of the two series is less marked. 

In both the Darjiling and Daling areas, the 'dip of the slates is 
constantly towards the gneiss, thus conforming regularly to the con- 
verging dip described in this rock, and thus completing the appearance 
that the DdUng series normally underlies the gneiss in a continuous 
transitional sequence. Only for a portion of the" boundary north of 
Darjiling, in the Little Rangit and on the Takvor spur, an appearance of 
faulting between the two series was observed. From the recorded 
arrangement of the rocks, it appears as if the lower gorge of the Tista 
lies in a broad tranverse anticlinal curve of the strata. 

The Damuda series. — In some sections, as on the cart-road to 
Darjiling, the Damiidas have undergone little or no alteration, and their 
resemblance to the regular Gondw^na coal-measures is very marked. 
The sandstones, as a rule, are rather fine-grained ; they sometimes occur in 
thick masses, but coarse, white, felspathic sandstones of the Barakar 
type are not common ; the beds are occasionally calcareous, and conglo- 
merates are absent. - In the^e characters they resemble rather the upper 
measures of the Damtlda coal basins. The fossils as yet found comprise 
two species of Glossopteris (one is G. irowniand), Fertebraria, an 
equisetaceous stem referred to Phyllotheea, and SphenopJiyllum, speoiosum. 
Frequently, however, the Damuda rocks exhibit as much alteration as 
the contiguous Dalings, as west of Pankabari, and in the Rangichang 
east of Pankabari ; the sandstones being converted into hard quartzites 
and the shales into dark slates and graphitic schists. In this respect, the 
contrast with the contiguous tertiary rocks is important; these, although 
greatly disturbed and compressed, never shew signs of mineral alteration. 

It would be difficult to assign a thickness for the Damuda formation 
in this ground. The broadest section of the outcrop is at the Tista, 
about one mile long ; and the beds have a high dip (more than 60°) 
throughout, but in very various .directions. The prevailing dip is 
inwards, towards the mountains, and almost always so near the Dalings, 
the stratification in the two formations being constantly parallel. 

Relations of the three series in Sikkim.— The conclusions which 
Mr. Mallet has adopted regarding the relations of these three roek-series 
are : that they form a continuous stratigraphical sequence, the gneiss being 



616 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— LO WEE HIMALAYAS. ■ [Chap. XXV. 

the newest and the Damudas the oldest. This is undouhtedly the apparent 
reading of the recorded observations ; and considered by itself, without 
reference to other Himalayan sections, the objection to it was more or 
less a theoretical one — the occurrence of a completely metamorphorsed 
formation above absolutely unaltered deposits, Mr. Mallet did not, of 
course, suppose that the Damddas passed beneath the mountain area with 
no greater change of texture than they exhibit at the outcrop on the 
edge of that area ; even the Baling slates are more schistose in the 
interior valleys than along the outer scarp of the mountains ; still, if the 
apparent sequence of the rocks were true, the anomaly, on a very large 
scale, had to be accounted for, and the explanation of it ofEered by 
Mr. Mallet (/. e., p. 42) is certainly a vera causa, within unknown 
limits, in adopting. which he was much encouraged by known pre- 
cedents — the thoroughly crystalline schists («w^m-Blaini) forming Jako 
mountain at Simla, overlying slates that are not even sub-schistose ; and, 
the then open question whether the Krol series did not really pass 
under the gneiss of Jalori and of Hatu (p. 605). The subsequent 
demonstration by Colonel MscMahon, that the gneiss of the Simla 
region is «w/5'a-silurian, made this latter supposition untenable j and 
other explanations, seemingly more far-fetched, had to be adopted for 
that ground, regarding the relation of the two great rock-series. 

This experience in the Simla region compels us to scrutinise more 
closely the observations in Sikkim, and to indicate what possible alter- 
natives there are to the view at present set forth. We have three series 
to deal with here, which may rather help the discussion ; but we have 
not the advantage of knowing the normal (original) order of sequence 
in any of them, as was the case vsdth the slate and limestone series in 
the north-west ; so that in Sikkim we have no direct criterion as to 
inversion, or otherwise, in any particular position. 

Out of all the observations recorded bearing upon this question, only 
one gives certain evidence upon the original relations of these formations. 
The opinion that the Dalings normally underlie the Darjiling gneiss is 
altogether inferential, from the lie of the rocks of both series in adjoin- 
ing positions, no actual section of the junction having been seen. It 
may, indeed, be granted that if the gneiss does overlie the Daling series, 
it does so in normal sequence, inversion in this form and of such magni- 
tude being out of the question; and this is a crucial point in the 
argument, for it can be said (from the evidence of our one sure section) 
that if the gneiss does overlie the Dalings, the Damiidas must normally 
underlie them, as otherwise the gneiss must be converted Damudas, 
which is an untenable view. 



Extra-Peninsular. J the SIKKIM AEEA. 617 

The crucial section referred to is 'that in the Lehti stream {I. c, pp. 
28 and 39), just west of the promontory of slates south of Baling. 
Here we have a continuous section showing the original relation of the 
DamHda and Ddling series to be complete conformity and association 
by mterstratification, several hundred feet of each series being exposed. 
Nothing can shake the fact derived from this section (assuming it to be 
correctly described), that the two formations are conformably associated ; 
and this disposes of one of the possible conjectures regarding the bound- 
ary — that the Damudas were deposited against a steep bank of the slates, 
as is thought to be the case with the boundary of the tertiary series. 
The junction observed in the Lehti section may, moreover, be one of 
extreme chronological importance ; for if the Baling slates should be 
ultimately proved to be the same as the middle palaeozoic slates of the 
Simla region, the Damiida beds so closely associated with them can 
scarcely be newer than upper palseozoic. The other important features 
of the. Lehti section are, that the dip is steady and low (30°) ; that its 
inclination is to the south ; and that the Damiidas overlie the Dalings. 
As the balance of evidence from all the other sections, and the decision 
regarding the slate and gneiss boundary, indicated or required that the 
Damudas should underlie the Dalings, this section in the Lehti had to 
be considered as inverted, in spite of its unbroken low dip, and southerly 
inclination, which would require, or at least suggest, that the inverting 
thrust had been directed from the south. . It is true that the Damudas 
here are in their most altered condition, comprising quartzose and car- 
bonaceous schists, with thin seams of the flaky anthractic coal ; but the 
action of metamorphism is too capricious and untraceable to carry much 
weight in an argument against clear mechanical conditions. 

"We have already seen an instance (p. 537) in which one clear section 
was held valid against any amount of 'conflicting appearances. This 
Lehti section is not of the same decisive nature as the case referred 
to, but it certainly suggests the necessity of a close revision of the inter- 
pretation set forth for these intricate stratigraphical features. If it 
should be upheld as the standard section, as shewing that the Damudas 
normally overlie the Dalings, all the other sections of this junction must 
be regarded as inversions ; and the slate an^ gneiss boundary must be one 
of great unconformity or of great faulting ; for, as already mentioned, it 
is scarcely possible that the gneiss should be converted Damudas. This 
slate and gneiss boundary (p. 615) is, perhaps, the less difiicult of the two, 
for its featm-es are exactly similar to those in the Bias and Sutlej valleys 
of the Simla region (p. 602), where the fault or imconformity explan- 
ation had to be adopted. The greater difiiculty is to shew how, on the 



618 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— LOWEE HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXV- 

supposition of inversion, the Damuda outcrop could assume the form it 
has ; such as, its greatest inward extension in the Tista valley, on what 
is taken to be an anticlinal axis of- the slates. This extension on the 
denuded anticlinal, axis is exactly what would occur if the Dalings over- 
laid the Damudas normally, without inversion. 

Another supposition is evidently possible : The unconformity view 
may be adopted, as in the North-West, for the Daling and gneiss relation ; 
and stiU the Damudas may normally underlie the Dkhngs, and be 
altogether overlapped by these, low down (underground) on the flanks 
of the gneissie masses. But in this case also the section in the Lehti 
must be an inversion. 

The reader will probably admit that the interpretation of the Sikkim 
sections is still an open question ; and he will also , recognise how 
very precarious any attempt must be to correlate these rocks with 
those of the Lower Himalayas of the North- West : the only conjectures 
possible are, that the Darjiling gneiss probably represents the central 
gneiss, and that the Dalings possibly represent the Simla slates, in 
which case the Damudas must overlie them. 

The Bhutan border— Buxa series. — Colonel Godwin-Austen was 
the first observer in this ground (1865-68) ; when he brought to notice • 
its peculiar features-r— the local concealment or absence of the tertiary 
rocks, and the presence in force of dolomites that are not represented 
in the Sikkim sections. Mr. Mallet's connected observations of the 
two areas were necessarily too rapid to admit of more than a suggested 
correlation of these adjoining and contrasting sections. The superficial 
view of the case (from the maps) would be, that these new rocks in the 
Bhiitan Dudrs take the place of the Damudas in the Sikkim ground. 

Mr. Mallet gave the name of Baxa series to this new formation, 
from the weU-known Bhiitanese fort which is built upon it. The fullest 
section given is that in the Titi stream (20 miles west of Baxa), as 
follows (in apparent natural order) : — 

(/). — Dark-grey slates ; pyritous and rusty 300 

(e). — Dolomite, with layers of dark-grey slate 1,500 

(i). — Green, Hack and red slates, with flaggy qnartzite, chloritic schist, 

and flaggy calcareous heds at top 1,500 

(c). — White quartzite, locally flaggy and schistose 1,000 

(S). — Slates with flaggy silicious and calcareous layers 800 

{a). — Grreen and red slates 50O 

The thicknesses are only eye-estimates, the dip being pretty steady 
at 60°, to north-north-east. In the Jangti (3 miles east- of Baxa) the 

? J, A. S. B., XXXIV, Pt. 2, p. 106, and XXXVII, Pt. 2, p. W. 



Extra-Peninsular. J the BHUTAN border. 619 

apparent thickness of the dolomite band is 2,300 feet. Owin^^ however, 
to fa,ulting or contortion, with denudation and concealment, this rock is 
locally absent from the exposed outcrop of the serieg, as in the space of 
15 miles between Baxa and the Tursa. Carbonaceous schists were 
■observed low in the series in the Raidak stream (10 miles east of 
Baxa) . 

Owing to the restrictions against entering the Bhritdnese territory, 
Mr. Mallet was not able to examine the inner boundary of the Baxa 
series where it is fully developed, but it seems there to underlie a broad 
belt of slates and schists intervening- between it and the gneiss, and 
probably representing the Baling series. This was also observed at a 
point 30 miles west of Baxa, where the Baxa series ends abruptly in the 
surface gravels : the Daling slates are seen in the Jangti river at a short 
distance oflF, and they seem to pass inside and to overlie the ridge o£ 
Baxa rocks. From this point to the Jaldoka at the Sikkim boundary, 
the hills are altogether inside the Bhutan border, and thus inacces- 
sible. 

Between the Sikkim boimdary and the promontory of Daling slates 
there is a short space, 6 miles long, where some of the tertial^^ rocks are 
represented ; and between them and the Doling zone Mr. Mallet found 
beds representing both the Damiida and Baxa series, but not in the 
same section. In the Mochu, on the west, just below the Ddlings, 
dipping north-east at 60°, there are coarse and fine sandstones, shaly and 
slaty beds, and two or three coal-seams of about a foot in thickness. 
These are undoubtedly Damud^j- but the rocks below them are not 
exposed. At 3 miles to the east, in the Machu, some beds, including 
carbonaceous layers, are obscurely seen imderlying very brittle silicious 
flags, with pink calcareous layers, and a few of red shale, dipping north- 
north-west at 50°. Beyond these, and apparetitly overlying them, are 
green slates of the Daling type. The middle beds of this section are 
quite of the Baxa type, and unlike anything known in the Ddlings ; 
and the carbonaceous layers at the bd,se are not more carbonaceous than 
some found in the Baxa area. 

Independetitly of atiy direct identification of these carbonaceous 
layers in the Mdchu as Damuda, which would shew a distinct incipient 
intercalation of the Baxa beds between the Ddlings and the Damiidas, 
and a horizontal association and transition between the Damuda and the 
Baxa deposits, the general comparison of the sections seem to suggest 
no other supposition than that these two series are in some manner 
representative of each other. The observations in hand do not admit of 
any further discussion of the question. 



620 GEOLOGY OP INDIA^LOWBR HIMALATAS. [Chap. XXV- 

The Dikrang section.— After so complete a change as that from 
the Damuda coal-measures of Sikkim, to a great mixed series of deposits 
like that of Buia, it might certainly be expected that the alteration 
would be permanent, and that the Buxa type of deposits would continue 
to the eastward ; yet in the next observation we obtain of the Lower Hima- 
layan rocksj the section is more like that in Sikkim than any other. 
The locality is more than 250 miles to the east of Buxa, in the Dikrang 
valley, inhabited by the Daphla tribes, where Colonel Godwin-Austen 
has described,^ immediately inside ihe tertiary zone, a belt, about 1,000 
feet in thickness, of dark, hard sandstones with carbonaceous shales and 
seams of crushed flaky coal. No fossils were secured, but the probabUity 
is strong that the group represents the Damilda formation. The beds 
are more or less vertical, with a north-east strike ; and they are bounded 
on the north-west by a parallel series of white quartzitic beds with 
micaceous and homblendic schists, passing by degrees into gneiss, which 
in turn becomes highly granitoid. Had there been anywhere near 
this ground any development of so conspicuous a rock as the dolomites, 
they would surely have been noticed by so practised an observer ; so the 
presumption is fair that the schists next the Damuda band represent 
the Daling rocks. Thus, again, the disappearance of the Baxa series 
and the reappearance of the Damudas in its place, is some slight con- 
firmation of the conjecture hazarded, that these two formations are in 
some manner equivalent. 

' Summary. — All the conclusions suggested by our study of the Sub- 
Himalayan rocks, and summarised at the end of Chapter XXIII, have 
more or less bearing upon the contiguous Lower Himalayan area, and 
indeed upon the whole mountain region : any additional reinarks deriv- 
able from this latter area only, must refer to the earliest periods of our 
history, or, indeed, to pre-Himalayan time, for all the formations ■ con- 
cerned are probably not newer than palaeozoic. 

Prom end to end of the range (veiy imperfectly known on the east) 
we have found two great rock-series, a slaty and a gneissic. For 500 
miles in the middle of the range we have but one section, reaching 
only to 30 miles from the south border ; and it is, perhaps, doubtful 
whether the gneiss described in that section belongs to the older series 
(p. 612). 

In the Simla region, at the north-west termination of the Lower 
Himalayas, a strong case has been made out for very great uncon- 
formity between the two series, shewing the palaeozoic rocks to have been 

1 J. A. S. B., Vol. XLIV, Pt. 2, p. 35. 



Extra-Peninsular.] SUMMARY. 621 

deposited upon and against a very deeply and irregularly eroded surface 
of the old gneissic series (p.^ 605) ; to which circumstance may be 
attributed the very partial manner in which the contortion of the rocks 
of the Lower Himalayan area has conformed to the normal lines of 
Himalayan disturbance. 

Structural features homologous to those of the Simla ground have 
been provisionally indicated in the east, in Sikkim (p. 617). Should 
this relation of the two series be established throughout the range, 
a connexion will have been made out between this peculiar Lower 
Himalayan region and a primitive gneissic mass, forming a fundamental 
nucleus for the whole series of Himalayan formations. The presence of 
this barrier may help in the explanation of the strange contrast pre- 
sented by the fossiliferous deposits on the north, and the azoic charac- 
ters of what are probably the equivalent strata on the south, even though 
we find that these deposits were continuously connected to the north- 
west. 

What may have been the original southern extension of the great 
slate and limestone series of the Lower Himalayan area is at present a 
matter of pure conjecture. Considering, on the one hand, the clos^ con- 
nexion of the Damtidas with the Lower Himalayan slates, and, on 
the other, the prodigious break in time between the Gondwanas and the 
Vindhyans of the peninsular area, it does not seem likely that the latter 
formation can have any representative in the newer series of the Lower 
Himalayan area. 



622 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Qhap. XXVI. 



CHAPTEH XXVI. 

. EXTKA-PENINSULAE AEEA. 

CENTRAL (tIBETAN) HIMALAYAS. 

Data available — Classification of rooks — General structure and distribution — The 
main gneissio axis — The Ladak axis — The Hundes and Zinsk&i synclinal — The 
K&akoram synclinal and Kueplun axis — The Kashmir synclinal — Position of the 
tertiary rocks — Gneiss of two ages — The central gneiss — Mineral character — Strati, 
graphical relation — Eelations defined only in the middle Himalayas — The granitic 
axis — Terminal extensions of the central gneiss — The Zanskar gneiss — The Pir 
Panial gneissic chain — The Dhauladhfo gneissic range — The newer gneiss — The 
chief sedimentary hasins. The formations of the Zanskfo area — Palaeozoic series — 
South-west boundary — South-east boundary — The Rupshu metamorphics — North 
boundary with tertiary rocks — The secondary series — The tertiary series. 

Data available.— ^ As the title of this section of our work would be 
understood to include all of the Himalayan region not described in the 
preceding chapters, we must at once call attention to the small portion of 
that enormous area of which any trustworthy observations have been 
made, and of which only any; notice will be taken. Of the two south 
ern divisions of the region, the Sub^imalayain-and the Lower Hima- 
layan, comparable sections were given, extending nearly to the eastern 
end of the Himalayan ranges, though with very long blank intervals. 
Of the entire eastern half of the central area, we have only to record 
Dr. Hooker's observation^ within the frontier of Tibet, north of Sikkim 
and of the gneissic axis, that conglomerates, slates, and-red clays were 
found overlying the gneiss ; and further oil, a dark limestone " full of 
encrinitic fossils and probably nummulites, but all were too much 
altered for determination." All the great peaks are said to be formed 
of granite or of massive gneiss. 

On the west of the unknown area of Nepdl, General R. Strachey 
has described the country^ from the watershed at Lake Manasaraur 
(Manasarowar), elevation 15,200 feet, in about longitude 81° 30', and 
has given an account of part of Hundes or Ngdri-Khorsum, in the upper 
valley of the Sutlej, as far as the place where this river enters the trans- 
verse gorge, about Shipki. 

' Himalayan Journals, Vol. II, pp. 156 and 177. 

s Q. J. G. S., VII, 1851, p. 293 ; and X, 1854, p. 24,9. 



Extra-Peninsular.] classification of eocks. 633 

This position immediately adjoins the ground of which a tnore de- 
tailed examination was maxie by Dr. Stoliczka' during the summers of 
1864. and 1865, extending from the Sutlej to the Dras river. Neither 
of these descriptions extends northwards much beyond the right bank of 
the Indus, which river occupies a nearly central position in the region we 
have provisionally adopted as the Central Himalayas. For the northern 
portion of this ground, including the Earakoram and Kuenlun ranges, 
our information is derived from the traverse made of it by Dr. Stoliczka 
on his journey to Kashghfo in 1873-74.2 Tbe latest additions to the 
geology of the Central Himalayan region are by Mr. Lydekker in the 
neighbourhood of Kashmir .^ 

Thus it is seen that our materials r^fer almost entirely ito the north- 
western, sub-terminal, portion of the Central Himalayas. It is in the near 
extension of this ground, where the main geological axes of the Hima- 
layas seem to be more or less continuous with those of the Hindu Kush, 
that the battle of the mountain systems (p.. 518) must be fought out. 
While the facts upon which the question can be decided are unknown 
it is difficult to take any interest in discussing it. 

Classification of rocks. — In our description of the two preceding 
divisions of the Himalayan region, we have been forced to depend almost 
exclusively upon stratigraphical characters, the rocks of the ' Lower 
Himalayas having proved unfossiliferous ; and even in the tertiary Sub- 
Himalayan series the occurrence of fossils is so, irregular, and the exact 
sequence of the known fossils is still so uncertain in detail, that but little 
use could be made of them in tracing horizons throughout so great an 
accumulation of deposits. Our knowledge of the Central Himalayas may 
almost be said to err in the opposite direction. In consequence partly, 
no doubt, of the explorer's attention having been especially directed to 
palseontological investigation, but still more as a result of the great 
difficulties of moving about in such rugged ground, and under such 
trying atmospherical conditions, our information of the central region is 
decidedly deficient in critical stratigraphical observations. But few will 
complain of this when palasontological information is forthcoming ; and on 
this score the results already obtained are highly satisfactory. In propor- 
tion to the time devoted to this ground, the knowledge we possess of it 
gives a striking instance of what a master-key palaeontology is in geological 
researches. It is sad to have to record that the master who applied that 

1 Mem. G. S. I., Vol. V, pp. 1 and 337. 

2 Eec. G. S. I., Vol. VII, pp. 12, 49, 51 ; and Scientific Results of the Second Y4rkand 
Mission : Geology : Calcutta, 1878. 

3 Eec. G. S. I., 1878, Vol. XI, p. 30. 



624 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

key to the geology of this region lost his life in those researches. Dr. 
Ferdinand Stoliczka was buried at Leh, in the very centre of the field of 
his achievements. 

In one respectj that of the unaccountahle absence or rarity of fossil 
remains, the slate and limestone series of the Lower Himalayas exhibit 
an obscure relationship to the old formations of the Peninsula ; although, 
as regards petrological characters, the rocks of the two areas are en- 
tirely dissimilar. This azoic condition holds good for those same forma, 
tions along the whole south face of the Himalayas, in their extension 
to the north-west of the Lower Himalayan area, along the flanks of the 
Dhauladhar and the Pir Paijijal. It is true these rocks in that posi- 
tion are greatly compressed and more or less altered, but certainly 
not so as to obliterate all trace of fossils, had any been present in them. 
Already on crossing the Pir Panjal into Kashmir, fossils are found in 
the carboniferous limestone, sandstone and shales, which are with much 
probability taken to represent the upper portion of the series to the 
south. Still here the underlying silurian slates have as yet yielded no 
fossils. It is only on crossing the higher range into Tibet that the series 
of marine fossiliferous deposits can be fully recognised. Through this 
ground the geology of India can be brought into relation with the rest 
of the world : all the principal formations of the established stratigraphical 
scale, except the cambrian, devonian, permian, and neoeomian, have 
been identified. The detailed sequence of formations will be given in 
connexion with the separate areas in which they were observed. 

General structure and distribution.— Considering the immense 
range of formations — metamorphic, palseozoicj and mesozoic — represented 
in the sections of the North-West Himalayas, the general uniformity 
of distribution and symmetry of arrangement, so far observed, give much 
promise that, ultimately, a very complete history of the region can be 
made out. From end to end of the partially known ground, about 
500 miles, two gneissic axes are more or less continuous. 

The main gneissic axis.— The southern of these is the Himalayau 
range proper, of which, in Sikkim and again west of Nepal for 300 miles, 
gneiss is the predominant rock, many of the highest and most massive 
peaks being formed of it ; while the slates on the north sometimes run 
up to an equal altitude, and the passes, through the continuous line of 
greatest elevation (the watershed), are generally to the north even of these 
slates. North of the Simla region, corresponding with the termination 
of the Lower Himalayan area, this main gneissic rang^ divides into 
three, two of which come to an end well within the Himalayan limits ; 
the third probably does so too, but it has not been traced so far. 



Extra-PeninsTilar.J THE HUNDES-zanskar SYNCLINAL. 635 

The Ladak axis. — The second gneissic axis runs parallel to 
the first, at a distance of 50 to 80 miles. It has only been observed 
with any accuvaey in Ladak, where it forms a steady range of moderate 
elevation, separating the Indus from its tributary, the Shaiok (Shyok), 
and the Pangkonglake. The continuation of this gneiss to the north-west 
would run high up on the south flank, if not to the crest, of the great 
Mustagh range in Baltistan, or Little Tibet. To the south-east the 
Ladak gneiss passes, on both sides of the Indus, through Rupshu into 
Chinese Tibet. This delineation includes the Rupshu metamorphics 
with those of the Ladak range, as they are only separated by the 
nummulitic trough and the tertiary axis of eruption of the Indus valley. 
Their possible, or even probable, distinction will be indicated further on. 

The few names that have been current for the leading features 
of these mountains are often very inappropriate even for geographical 
purposes ; atid for geological description, they are altogether inadequate. 
Indeed the familiar remark, denoting the close connexion between surface 
features and the rocks, has a partial lithological application, rather than a 
geological one ; for in the latter sense the idea would often be radically 
deceptive, as in the case before us : this gneiss of Ladak is geologically 
an axis of elevation ; but although more steady in its course, it is less 
elevated than the mountains formed of much newer rocks on either side 
of it ; it coincides in part with the actual valley of the Upper Indus. 
We will avoid confusion with geographical names by calling it the 
Ladak gneissic axis. 

The Hund.es and Zanskar synclinal.— Between these two 
gneissic axes there is a long synclinal basin in which the fossiliferous 
rocks are found in more or less complete sequence, according to original 
variations of deposition and the subsequent action of denudation. This 
feature is not, however, unbroken from end to end of the known 
ground; at long intervals the basin is more or less completely con- 
stricted or interrupted by transverse upheaval and metamorphism of the 
rocks. A principal break of this kind occurs where the Sutlej bends 
southwards at the Purgial mountain, which separates the Hundes area 
from that to the north-west, the secondary formations at least being com- 
pletely interrupted. It was in this north-western area that Dr. Stolic^^a 
studied the rocks, principally in the Spiti valley, at the south-east extf em- 
ity of the basin", for which an appropriate name may be taken from the 
larger and more central district of Zanskar. The length of the basin 
is about 200 miles, ending abruptly east of the Dras river in a trans- 
verse mass of syenitic metamorphic rocks. The valleys of Astor and 
Gilgit, between which places the Indus has a north and south course^ are 

p 1 



6^6 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

on the prolongation of this synclinal axis of Zanskar, beyond the crystal- 
line rocks forming the mountains round the Deosai plateau. Nothing 
definite is known regarding the extension of the sedimentary series to the 
east of Hundes ; but it is presumable, as Dr. Hooker conjectured, that the 
unaltered rocks observed by him north of the great gneissic range in 
Sikkim are more or less a continuation of those in a similar position 
in the North-Western Himalayas. 

The Karakoram synclinal and Kuenlun axis.— North of the 
Ladak gneissic axis the same sedimentary series comes in again in force, 
but in this direction some of the upper groups of the series have not yet 
been identified. This area also is a broad synclinal basin, the newest 
rocks being found in the centre of it, in the Karakoram ridge, and the 
older formations rise again to the north against a third gneissic axis, 
forming the core of the Kuenlun range. The direction of this range 
seems to be more east and west than that of the Himalayan ranges 
proper; so that, if the gneissic axes continued to the west, the 
sedimentary basin of the Karakoram would soon be cut ofE in that 
direction ; while to the east it expands rapidly. 

The Kashmir synclinal.— South of the Zanskar basin, and be- 
tween the diverging prolongations of the gneiss of the main Himalayan 
range, there is a minor synclinal basin of unaltered rocks, that of 
Kashmir and Pangi, divided by a transverse mass of metamorphic strata. 

Position of the tertiary formations. — The one great exception 
to the general structural symmetry of the Himalayan formations is the 
distribution of the tertiary rocks. The nummulitic deposits are not found 
in the middle of the synclinal basins, in sequence with the upper 
secondary deposits : they seem, on the contrary, to be as far as possible 
out of connexion with the general sedimentary series, occupying, as they 
do, a long trough in the Indus valley, in or adjoining the metamorphic 
rocks of the Ladak gneissic axis. This feature is so very marked, as laid 
down for 200 miles, between Hanle and Kargil, by Dr. Stoliezka (who 
identified nummulitic rocks in no other position), and the significance of 
the tertiary rocks in the history of the mountains is so great, that special 
interest attaches to observations on this formation. 

Gneiss of two ages.— It was fully shewn by Dr. Stoliezka that the 
metamorphic rocks of the Himalayas are extensively formed of converted 
palaeozoic formations, in continuous relation with unaltered rocks of the 
same period. The whole of the gneissic axis in' Ladak is considered to be 
so constituted. Elsewhere, unaltered lower palaeozoic strata of great 
thickness are found in abrupt contact, at their base, with gneissic 
rocks. Two sections of this kind are recorded ; both are in the main 



Bitra-Peninsular. J CENTRAL GNEISS. 627 

Himalayan range, and on the confines of the area described as the Lower 
Himalayas. The descriptions of the contact are not very precise, but 
there can be little doubt that the slates were deposited upon a floor of 
gneiss. In Hundes General Strachey describes and figures some 2,000 
feet of infra- silurian azoic slates overlying the crystalline schists in im- 
mediate, parallel succession, with a band of coarse conglomerate at or 
near the junction.^ The granite of the adjoining axis of - intrusion 
penetrates these slates for a short distance, without producing any great 
alteration. In the corresponding section described by Dr. Stoliczka 
on the Bhabeh pass, at the south-east corner of the Zanskdr basin in 
Spiti, a similar relation was observed. The actual contact was concealed 
by snow ; but the lower rocks maintained their gneissic character to the 
top, and the nearest outcrops to them were of grey slates and sandstones, 
the lowest beds of a long series of lower silurian strata, quite unaffected 
by crystalline metamorphism. The latter are probably the same as the 
infra-silurian beds of Hundes. The dip is somewhat higher in the gneiss 
than in the slates, suggesting some unconformity or faulting at the con- 
tact ; but this is not certain, as the observations were some distance apart. 
Transitional metamorphism is, however, out of the question. 

The central gneiss. — We thus have an important fact established, 
that of an older and a newer gneiss, the difference in age between them 
being necessarily very great ,• so that the distinction of the two is a 
point of much importance in the geology of the mountain region. It 
was, no doubt, partly to mark this distinction of age, that Dr. Stoliczka 
gave the name central to the gneiss of the main Himalayan axis. The 
term is certainly ambiguous, and we have already (p. 597 ) pointed out 
one important correction in the extension given to it by Dr. Stoliczka ; 
but it may as well be retained, not in the sense of axial, but simply as 
denoting the fundamental formation of the Himalayan rock-series. 

IVIineral cliaracter. — It is unfortunate that so important a distinc- 
tion depends for detection upon such uncertain criterions as the 
mineral constitution of metamorphic rocks, and characters so generally 
obscured as those of contact-relations. The central gneiss is normally 
composed of white quartz with white felspar (orthoclase or albite), which 
often forms large crystals, in the more massive varieties of the rock ; 
and the basic mineral is mica (biotite or muscovite), often abundant in 
the more schistose varieties. The rock of the Laddk gneissic axis is, 
on the contrary, chiefly" syenitic. This cannot, however, be taken as a 
sure criterion ; for elsewhere the sihirian slates are found converted 
into ordinary gneiss. 

' Q. J. G. S., Vir, p. 302, 



628 GEOLOGY OF INDIA- CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

Stratigraphical relation. — The stratigraphical relation is also of 
most Tincertain application. It is evident that if a later metamorpljism 
had converted the slates of the Niti or the Bhabeh sections, where the 
two series are in parallel succession, into gneissic schists, the great 
distinction betrayed by the actual relations (perhaps the greatest in the 
whole sequence of formations) would have been altogether obscured, and 
the whole would appear as one continuous metamorphic series. This is 
precisely the difficulty encountered in attempting to follow out the central 
ffneiss to the north-west, in immediate continuation of the main 
Himalayan axis ; and the same impediment would of course render it 
stUl more difficult to detect the older gneiss in a detached area, sur- 
rounded by a later gneiss, as in the Ladak axis, or elsewhere. EVen along 
the south boundary of the central gneiss, in the Lower Himalayan area, 
where there is great unconformity between the gneiss and the slate 
series (as that unconformity does not involve oblique discordance of stra- 
tification), it has been a matter of great difficulty to detect the distribution 
of the two series, and almost impossible to delineate their separation with 
any accuracy ; the originally highly contrasting conditions of the rqeks 
having been so disguised by the subsequent metamorphism of the newer 
series, especially near the contact of the two. 

Relations defined only in the middle Himalayas. — The very 
striking contrast of the relations between the central gneiss and 
the slate series, on the north and on the south, would be a remarkable 
fact, if it should be confirmed by more extended observations that, 
as is believed, the two slate series are identical. On the north 
there is quasi-conformity of superposition, while on the south, as we 
have seen (p. 601), the newer series overlaps and abuts against denuded 
masses of the older.' From this latter relation it was shewn that 
the central gneiss must have formed a primitive ridge, to some extent 
corresponding in position with the Lower Himalayan area. In spite 
of the contrasting stratigraphy, the northern sections confirm this 
impression, in that they shew, what was not demonstrable on the south, 
however apparently probable, that the gneiss underwent its meta- 
morphism in pre-silurian times ; and further, it can so f a,r be stated 
that the evidence for this condition is limited to the confines of the 
Lower Himalayan area, or a middle Himalayan position with reference 
to the whole mountain range ; everywhere else, in Zanskar, Pangi, and 
the Pir Panjal, the slates become schistose, and are more or less transitional 
with the underlying gneiss ; or, in other words, the slates along the 

' It should he recollected that the nearest outcrops exhibiting this contrast are 30 
miles apart. 



Extra-Peninsular. J THE GRANITIC AXIS. 6iJ9 

northern border of the Lower Himalayan area have not been subjected 
to the metamorphic action which they have undergone more or less 
generally in other parts of the mountains: a fact that would be 
most naturally explained by these slates never having been so depressed, 
or subjected to so great crushing, whereby the silurian rocks of the 
Ladak axis and elsewhere were converted into gneiss. Thus, from the 
side of the Central Himalayas, in the north, we find confirmation of 
the evidence brought forward from the tertiary rocks on the south, and 
from the rock-structure of the Lower Himalayas themselves, that this 
latter area holds a peculiar, and more or less neutral or independent, posi- 
tion in the Himalayan system. 

Although not fully identified out of the Lower Himalayan area, no- 
thing is more likely than that the central gneiss should occur elsewhere ; 
and it has been recognised with much probability in several positions 
in the divided north-western ranges on the continuation of the main 
range. Dr. Stoliczka thought he recognised the same rock well to 
the north of the main range near Changrizing, east of the Para river, at 
the base of the great Purgial mountain, which separates the basin of 
Zanskar from that of Hundes. 

The granitic axis. — There is no more unique or debatable feature 
in the Himalayas than the granitic axis, so persistent along the main 
range. To the east in Sikkim, and in the north-west, from the frontier 
of Nepal to Kulu, wherever examined, coarse white granite has been 
found in profusion along the line of peaks, near the pressnt edge of the 
sedimentary basin of Tibet. It occurs in veins and dykes of every 
size, sometimes forming the massive core, up to the summit, of the 
highest mountains. % 

The width of the band of intrusion seldom exceeds 25 miles, and 
is generally much less. The rock dies out completely to the west, being 
only very feebly represented at the Baralaeha pass, the most distant 
point at which it has been observed in the ranges beyond the Lower 
Himalayan area, with which again this peculiar feature is nearly coter- 
minous. 

This granite is pre-eminently the axial rock of the main Himalayan 
range, as a geographical feature ; and this fact, perhaps, was partly the 
reason why the name " central " was given to the gneiss in which it occurs, 
with the implied suggestion that this gneiss had been upraised with the 
granite ; for the contiguous gneiss to the south was regarded by Dr. 
Stoliczka as distinct. This view has, however, been shewn to be untenable 
(p. 597) ; and it is very open to question whether, in any proper 
geological sense, this line of eruptive rock can be considered an axis 



630 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

{locus) of elevation. The supposition would be incompatible with the 
inferences already drawn from the circumstances of the sedimentary- 
rocks on both sides of the central gneiss of the Lower Himalayas, 
shewing absolutely (if correct) that the slate series had never been 
continuous across that area. It is more likely that the gi-anite marks a 
marginal line of irruption, with reference to the main area of deposition 
from which the Central Asian plateau was to arise. From general con- 
siderations on the drainage system it will be suggested that the crest of 
the Himalayan elevation lay far to the north of the present main range. 
General Strachey describes the granite as penetrating the slates, and the 
same authority is quoted by Dr. Stoliczka^ for its reaching the secondary 
formations. It can scarcely be of later date. 

Terminal extensions of the central gneiss,— The distinction of 
middle and terminal characters is nowhere more marked than in the main 
Himalayan range, which may, in fact, as a geological feature, be said 
to end with the Lower Himalayan area. Beyond this, to the north-west, 
there are three independent ranges with gneissic axes, all connected with 
the central gneiss, and each having some pretension to be considered the 
continuation of the main range of the middle Himalayas. 

The Zanskar gneissic range. — Immediately north of the Sutlej, 
and west of the Bhabeh section described by Dr . Stoliczka, there is a great- 
nucleus, or stratigraphical node, of high mountains, ranging to 31,772 
feet in elevation, in Waziri Rupi, a district of Kulu. The mass lies for the 
most part to the north of the prolongation of the main chain. In fact, 
from the Sutlej, at about the Bhabeh pass, there is a rather abrupt change 
of about 25° in the strike of the Central Himalayan axes, on opposite sides 
of the Purgial transverse ridge. The strike of the Hundes basin, and of 
the main gneissic range south of it, is about west-35°-north ; while 
that of the Zanskar basin, and of the gneissic range outside it, is west-60°- 
north. The Zoji-La from Kashmir, and the Baralaeha from Lahul, are 
the best known passes in this latter range ; and the name of the latter 
pass has been sometimes applied to the range itself; but it is better to use 
a term of greater original extension, such as that of the central district 
of Zanskar. Several of the peaks range above 20,000 feet in elevation. 

For many reasons, geological as weU as geographical, the Zanskar 
range has a right to be considered the principal continuation of the 
Himalayan chain. In its centre, south-west of Zanskar, for a width of 
nearly 50 miles, it is formed entirely of gneiss ; but this rock rapidly 
contracts to the north-west, and dies out altogether before reaching the 
Zoji-La, where the sedimentary formations roll over from Tibet into 
' Mem. G. S. I., Vol. V, p. 12. 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE PIR PANJAL GNEISSIC CHAIN. 631 

Kashmir, and form the mountains on the north side of the valley, at 
a considerably lower elevation than the gneiss-formed peaks of the 
range in Zanskar. Here, then, we have a complete terminal occultation 
of the gneissic axis, in the principal north-western representative of the 
Himalayan range.i The width of the gneiss contracts also very much on 
the south-east : Dr. Stoliezka observed a band, only 6 miles wide, 
of what he took to be the central gneiss, low on the south side of the 
Baralacha pass. It will, however, be shewn that the gneiss of Zanskar 
IS, to some extent at least, a newer rock, formed of converted palaeozoic 
strata. 

The Pir Panjal gneissic chain. — If the questioji of representa- 
tive ranges were to be settled by the continuous line of greatest elevation, 
the Zdnskar range would have to cede its claim ; for the col or gap 
(the Kunzum- pasSj on - slates, at 14,931 feet), connecting it with the 
gneissic mass of Rupi, is lower than the Rotang pass (on gneiss, at 15,206 
feet), dividing the mountains of Rupi from those of Bara-Bliagdl and 
Barmaur, which range to above 30,000 feet. It is still unsettled 
whether the slates of the Kunzum pass are not continuous with those 
immediately north of the Hamta and Rotang passes, so as to cut off the 
gneissic mass of Zanskar. Dr. Stoliezka notes also " the characteristic 
of albite granite in the gneiss of the Hamta pass.'" 

This Rotang ridge at the head of the Kulu, or upper Bias, valley is 
certainly the most direct continuation of the mountains of Rupi ; and on 
this line we find the greatest prolongation of gneissic rock, through 
Barmaur, Chamba, Badrawah, and Kistwar, to the Pir Panjal, bounding 
the Kashmir valley on the south-west. The crest of this chain is more 
irregular than those we have hitherto spoken of, and this irregularity has 
always caused a diflSculty in finding a name for it. It is perhaps best to 
extend the well-known name of Pir Panjal to the whole of it. Even in 
the Pir Panjal proper, the ridge is very irregular, and the gneiss is not 
continuous throughout j but in this broken fashion the rock continues 
across the Jhelum to beyond Kashmir, where its mode of termination 
in the Kishenganga valley is not known j but it probably does terminate 
there. 

1 To the great disappointment of geologists, all mention of the rocks seems to have 
been ciiref ully excluded ^y that accomplished observer Mr. Drew from his most interesting 
•worlconthe.Jummoo and Kashmir Territories. One of the very few remarks that have 
escaped him records (p. 378) the occurrence of mountains of grey granite on each side of 
Stakpi La defile, and something less than 2,000 feet above it, between the Burzil branch of 
the Kishenganga valley and the head waters of the Shingo rivei-. The locality would be 
nearly on the prolongation of the Zanskar axis, but it probably belongs to a local focus of 
disturbance in Little Tibet. 



632 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

In this chain also^ according to the few observations on recordj the 
relation of the gneiss to the slates is not of so decided a character as 
in the Lower Himalayan region. There is generally more or less of 
transition^ and it is difBcult to make sure whether we have to deal with 
the older or the newer gneiss. The abrupt manner in which the semi-de- 
tached gneissic masses are intercepted by schists and slates is especially 
hard to reconcile with other structural features of the sectionSj as will be 
indicated in connection with the slate series j but the arrangement of 
these quasi-continuous masses^ independent of an approximately axial 
position — and there are some, such as the Kuad KapMs mountain in 
Badraw^h, which cannot pretend to belong to the Pir Panjal chain — 
is suggestive that the relations of the slates to the gneiss here may be 
the result, in a minor degree, of an original relation like that described 
on the south side of the Lower Himalayas in the Simla region, where 
the slate series was shewn to have been deposited amongst steeply eroded 
masses of the central gneiss (p. 605). 

There is, however, one remarkable observation by Mr. Lydekker i in 
the slates of the Pangi basin, in the upper Chinab valley, separating 
the Zanskar range from the almost equally high mountains of the Pir 
Panjal in Chamba, shewing that at the time of the deposition of these 
slates the central gneiss was undergoing extensive erosion at no great 
distance. In the midst of the black slates, throughout a thickness of some 
2,000 feet, large blocks of granitoid gneiss, either angular or water-worn, 
are scattered in great numbers. They are well seen about the village of 
Salgraun (25 miles above Kilar). Some were measured as much as three 
and a half feet iu diameter ; and being embedded in fine slate, it seems 
necessary to suppose that they were in some manner erratics, i. e., trans- 
ported by some form of flotation or suspension, distinct from the ordinary 
denuding agencies of water and gravitation only. 

The Dhauladhar gneissic range. — There is one other gneissic ridge 
that might be considered the legitimate representative of the Himalayan 
axis proper, as being most nearly on its prolongation, in its normal 
direction. The Dhauladhdr is remarkably well defined as a geological axis, 
although at the very edge of the mountain area, overhanging the tertiary 
zone in the Kangra valley, and separatiug this zone from the basin 
of slates in the upper Ravi valley, which, again, divides the Dhauladhar 
from the Pir Panjal range in Barmaur. The Kulu valley, which is 
the upper valley of the Bias, running due south from the Rotang pass, 
completely cuts off the Dhauladhar from direct continuity with the moun- 
tains of Rupi; but the connexion is maintained at a very high levelj from 

1 Kec. G. S. I., XI, p. 54. 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE chief sedimentary BASINS. 633 

the Rotang pass through the mountains o£ Bara Baghdl, separating 
the head waters o£ the Bias and the Ravi. There seems little doubt that 
the gneiss of the Dhauladhar is to some extent, i£ not altogether, 
the central gneiss ; but it ends completely and abruptly at Dalhousie, 
where the Rdvi turns round it, at right angles to its course within the 
mountains. This is a conspicuous instance of the feature already men- 
tioned as so difficult of explanation, and upon which some detailed 
observations are very much needed. 

The newer gneiss. — In preceding paragraphs frequent mention has 
been made of the newer gneiss ; of its special (syenitic) mineral characters 
where the lower palaeozoic formations have been metamorphosed on a 
large scale, as in the Ladak axis, and of its more ordinary condition where 
mineralised in connexion with the old gneiss in its extensions to the north- 
west. Any further mention of the newer gneiss will be made in tracing 
the general distribution of the palaeozoic rocks themselves. 

The chief sedimentary basins. — The skeleton of the mountain 
structure delineated in the foregoing paragraphs, shewing the position 
and nature of the gneissic axes, will help to elucidate the distribution 
of the fossiliferous formations, and will suggest at once the conveni- 
ence of dividing the description according to the great areas, more or less 
separated, in which these rocks are now found : the two central basins of 
Zanskar and Hundes or Ngdri-Khorsum ; the northern basin of the 
Karakoram. ; and the southern area of Kashmir and Pangi. 

In speaking of these areas as basins of sedimentary rocks, we do not, 
of course, mean basins of deposition, but simply stratigraphical basins. 
They are certainly now basins of disturbance, great synclinal troughs ; 
but it is a leading point of inquiry, — to what extent in any of the 
successive formations, if at all, the areas of deposition corresponded with 
these areas of present relative depression of the rocks ? The available 
observations are much too cursory and scattered to support a definite 
opinion upon this point ; but if we might extend to this ground the in- 
ference arrived at in the other Himalayan regions, that the palaeozoic rocks 
had undergone no contortion prior to the eocene period, we could not look 
for much agreement in detail between the actual results of disturbance and 
the original distribution of the pre-tertiary sedimentary series. Whatever 
may have been the circumstances which resulted in the striking discre- 
pancy between the rock-series of the Central and the Southern Himalayan 
areas whereby all the secondary formations, or at least all the middle 
and upper groups of that period, were excluded or removed from the 
southern area, it might seem fair to suppose that the great contortions 
and dislocations affecting the southern region were more or less of syn- 



634 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

chronous origia with the similar and connected features in the adjoining 
area ; and, therefore, that the great axes of flexure which now define the 
rock-basins of Tibet are of post-eocene origin. The very marked approx- 
imate conformity exhibited throughout the whole sedimentary series up 
to the cretaceous deposits, as represented in the sections of the Zanskfir 
basin figured by Stoliczka, and the certainty that at the close of the 
cretaceous period some of the highest summits of Tibet were at the sea- 
level, would seem to support the view, that in this region also the begin- 
ning of special Himalayan disturbance was posterior to the eocene period. 

We must, however, beware of inferential assumptions, however plaus- 
ible. Enough has been seen in the Sub-Himalayan ground to warn us 
against placing much reliance upon conformity or unconformity, within 
very close proximity, in these mountain sections ; and the most marked 
stratigraphical feature of Tibet — the complete severance of continuity 
between the eocene and the cretaceous deposits — implies great changes in 
the intervening time, and has a direct bearing upon the point at issue ; only 
we have no observations as to the full or special meaning of this feature. 
Eocene deposits of great thickness occupy a long trough in the silurian 
gneiss of the Ladak axis. No one has suggested that they were let down 
into" this position by faulting ; so there must have been immense pre- 
tertiary denudation, with a corresponcKlig-i!ise'6rthe Himalayan-area. It 
is just possible that the original relation in Tibet may have been the same 
as that already shewn for the nummulitic beds in the Simla region, where 
they were laid down on deeply eroded, but as yet uncontorted, palaeozoic 
rocks. The fact that the palaeozoics of Tibet had been previously converted 
into gneiss would not absolutely preclude this condition (for the central 
gneiss is the least disturbed of all the Himalayan formations), although 
certainly rendering it far from probable. 

The settlement of this question — the original relation of the nummulitic 
formation in Tibet — is a point ol: extreme interest in Himalayan geology. 
If it should be proved that that relation was the same as in the Lower 
Himalayan area — that the immense pre-tertiary denudation of the Central 
Himalayan region had taken place previous to any great contortion of 
the strata there — we should have something like a demonstration of the 
DeBeaumont theory of mountain formation : that the first stage in the 
process is of the nature of a great warp or deformation of the earth's 
crust, the collapse {ecrasement) of which state of tension results in the 
flexures and dislocations which characterise every region of true mountains.^ 

' DeBeaumont's theory of mountain formation is so commonly identified witli liis 
final speculations upon the question of direction, that it is necessary to point out that his 
preliminary discussion of the conditions is independent of that elaborate development. 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE ZANSKAR AREA. 635 

It has been suggested elsewhere ' that much of the contortion 
of the later tertiary rocks of the Sub-Himalayan zone may have been 
due to a reflex action, the protracted adjustment of equilibrium after the 
great mountain features had been fully developed. 

The formations of the Zanskar area. — Dr. Stoliczka's first 
work in Tibet (the only exploration of which he published any detailed 
observations^) was confined to the south-east end of the Zanskar area, in 
the Spiti and Para valleys^ and through Rupshu (or Rukshu) to the Indus. 
On his second trip he made several traverses of a much larger area, up to 
the north-west termination of the basin at Kargil ; but only brief route- 
notes were published.* The length of the area is 200 miles, with a 
maximum width of 50 miles in Zanskar. The following detailed charac- 
ters of the rocks, and for the most part the fossils also, are taken from 
the former ground ; they will serve for general comparison. The names 
also are taken from localities in Spiti and Rupshu, where the several 
formations are well exposed. No groups were added from the examina- 
tion of the larger area to the north-west. 



FOSSILIFHSOUS SEBIES OF THE ZANSKAR AREA. 



MBSOZOIC : 



(m) Chikkim shales (Cretaceous). — Dark grey, marly, earthy shales. Thickness, 
200 feet. No fossils ; considered to be closely related to the limestone. 

{m) Chikkim limestone {Cretaceous). — White, or grey on fresh fracture: when 
somewhat earthy it gives a strong bituminous odour when struck. Thick- 
ness, 600 feet ; parallel to I. 



Budistes (fragments). 
Nodosaria, 2 sp. 
T>entalina ( annulata ?), 
JRotalia, sp. 



Textilaria, 2 sp. 
Saplophragmium, sp. 
Cristellaria, sp. 



{T) GiETJMAL SANDSTONE {Upper jurassic). — Light yellowish, silicious ; darker and 
calcareous, fossiliferous ; sometimes a loose grit, and even coarsely conglo- 
meratic. Thickness, 600 feet ; conformable to and interstratified with k. 



Opis, sp. 

Anatina spitiensis. 
A. sp. nov. 
Fecten bifrons. 
Amusium demissum. 
Lima, sp. 



MytUus mytiloidea. 

Avicula echinata. 

GyphcBa, sp. 

Ostrea, sp., near O. gregaria. 

O. sp., near O. sowerbii. 



> Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Pt. 2, p. 174; and Q. J. G. S., XXIV, p. 48. 

2 Mem. G. S. I., V, 1865, pp. 1-154. 

3 Mem. G. S. I., V, 1866, pp. 337-354. 



636 



GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTKAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 



(/fc) Spiti SHALES {Upper jurassic). — Black, crumbling shale, full of calcareous 
concretions, each generally containing a fossil. Thickness, 300 to 500 feet ; 
in Spiti they rest conformably on g, the lower Tagling limestone. 



JBelemnites canaliculatus. 

B. elaiiatus. 

Anisoceras gerardianum. 

Ammonites acucinctiis, 

A. strigilis. 

A. macrocephalus} 

A. octagonus. 

A. hypJiasis. 

A. parTcinsoni, 

A. theodorii. 

A. sabineanus. 

A. spitiensis, 

A. curvicosta. 

A. hraiTcenridgii. 

A. nivalis. 

A. liparus, 

A. triplicatus. 

A. biplex. 

A. alatus. 

Pleurotomaria, 2 sp. 



Astarte unilateralis. 

A. major. 

A. spitiensis. 

A. hiemalis. 

Trigonia costata. 

Cyprina trigonalis. 

Nucula cuneiformis. 

N. sp. 

Area (Maorodon) egertonianum, 

PI. XII, fig. 14. 
Inoceramus hookeri. 
Lima, sp., near L. rigida. 
Auoella blanfordiana. 
A. leguminosa, PL XII, fig. 15. 
Amusium (conf. Pecten stolidus). 
Pecten lens. 
Osirea, sp. 

Mhynconella varians. 
Terehratula sp. 
Salenia ? sp. 



Somomya tibetica. 

(») Shalt SLATES (J^wrasnc).— Brown or black ; full of broken shells. Thickness, 
50 feet ; very local ; probably belong to k. 

Belemnites, sp. ) Posidonomya ornata. 

(A) Dppee Tagling (Lias). — Dark, earthy, bituminous ; only described north of 
Spiti. Thickness, nearly 1,000 feet ; difficult to distinguish from g. 
sp. TrocJius epulus. 

T. attenuatus. 
Chemnilzia undulata. 
Neritopsis (conf. N. elegantissima). 
Modiola, sp. (resembling Mytilus 

subreniformis). 
Terebratula sinemuriensis. 



(conf. macrace- 



Ammonites 
phalus). 

Nerinea (conf. iV. goodhalii). 

Aoteonina (conf. A. cincta). 

Eucyclus (Amberleya), sp. 

Trochus latilabrus. 

g) Tagling limestone {Lower Lias or Phcetic). — Dark grey, brown or black, 
sandy or earthy, often oolitic and bituminous, sometimes a shell-limestone ; 
weathers light brown, rusty. Thickness, more than 1,000 feet ; locally un- 
conformable on e. 



Belemnites budhaicus. 
B. bisulcutus. 
B. tibeticus. 

Ammonites (conf. A.germanii). 
A., sp. (conf. A. macroce- 
phalus). 



Nerinea, sp. (near N. goodhalii). 

Chemniizia (conf. C. coarctata)i 

C, sp. (near C. phidias). 

Natica (conft N. pelops). 

Nerita, sp., nov. 

Dentalium, sp. (near D. giganteum). 



1 According to Dr. Waagen, Palseontologia Indica, Ser. IX, 3, p. 237, foot-note, this and 
several other species are not identical with the European fossil forms to which they were 
referred by Dr. Stoliczka. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] 



THE ZANSKAR AREA. 



637 



Area (Macrodon), sp. (appar- 
ently A. lycetti). 
GervilUa, sp. (near Cr. olifex). 
Avicula inaquivalvis. 
A. punctata. 
Lima densicosfata, 
Pecten (conf. P. palosus). 
P. moniliger. 
P. sdbal. 
P. hifrons. 
P. valoniensis. 
Amusium, sp. 



Osirea (conf. 0. acuminata). 

O. (conf. O. anomala). 

Rhynconella ohtusifrons. 

S. pedata. 

Bi. Jissicostata. 

R. austriaca. 

B. variabilis. 

JJ. ringens. 

Terebratula gregaria. 

T. piriformis. 

T. punctata. 

T. (Waldheimia) sehafhceutli. 



(/) Paea limestone (Bheelic or Upper 2Vias).- Black, dolomitio, strongly bitu- 
minous, often earthy. Thickness, 700 feet; only found on north side of 
Spiti. 

Dicerocardium himalayense, I ULegalodon triqueter, 
PI. II, fig 7. I PI. II, fig. 8. 

(e) LitANG SEEIES* {Tipper or Middle Trias). — Dark limestone, calcareous slates 
and shales ; limestone compact or finely oolitic ; lower beds quasi-concre- 
tionary. Thickness, 1,000 to 2,000 feet ; locally unconformable on d. 



Orthoceras, sp. 

O. salinarium. 

O. latiseptum. 

O. dxibium. 

Nautilus spitiensit. 

Clydonites oldhamianus, P 

II, fig. 4. 
C. hauerinus. 
Ammonites Jloridus, PI. II, 

fig. 1. 
A.jollyanus. 
A. hlianihofi. 
A. gaytani. 

A. diffissus, PI. II, fig. 3. 
A. ausseanus. 
A. gerardi. 
A. medleyanus. 
A. studeri. 

A. thuillieri, PI. II, fig. 2. 
A. malletianus. 
A. hatteni. 



Pleurotomaria (conf. P. buchi). 

P. sterilis. 

Discohelix, sp. 

Myoconcha lombardica. 

Z/ima (conf. L, ramsaueri). 

L; sp., nov. 

Monotis salinaria, PI. II, fig. 6. 

Halobia lommeli, PI. II, fig. 5. 

Waldheimia stoppanii. 

Athyris strohmeyeri. 

A. deslongchampsi. 

Rhynconella mutabilis. 

R. theobaldiana, 

R. salteriana. 

R. retrocita var. augusta. 

Spirifer, sp. n. 

8. (Spiriferina) (conf. S. fragilis). 

S. (Spiriferina) stracheyi, PI. II, fig. 9. 

S. (Spiriferina) lilangensis, 

8. spitiensis. 

Encrinus cassianus. 



' The following triassie and rhsetic fossils are figured on Plate II : 



Pig. 1. Ammonites flondMS J. 
„ 2. A. (Ceratites) thuillieri ^. 
„ 3. A. diffisas. 

4. Clydomtes oldhamianus. 
„ 5. Ralobia lommeli. 



Fig. 6. Monotis saKnaria \. 
„ 7. Dicerocardimn himalayense J. 
„ 8. Megalodon triqueter \. 
„ 9. Spirifer stracheyi. 



638 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

PALJ30Z0IC : 

(d) KuLiua SBEIES (Carhoniferows). — Pale quartzites (fossiliferous) generally at 
base, but alternating with brown shales ; the latter are often carbonaceous 
and calcareous, passing into dark limestone. Thickness, 100 to 400 feet ; 
junction with (e) conformable, obscure. 



Orthoceras, sp. 
Aviculopecien, sp. 
Cardiomorpha, sp. 
Avicula, sp. 

Productus purdoni, PI. I, 
fig. 10. 



P. semiretieulatus, PI. I, fig. 8. 

P. longispinus. 

Spirifer moosakJiailensis, PI. I, fig 

8. keilhavii, PI. I, fig. 1. 

S. tiheticus, 

S. altivagus. 



(e) MuTH SBEIES {Upper Silurian) — 

White quartzite, often speckled ; no fossils. Thickness, 200 to 300 feet. 
2. Pale sandy and silicious limestone, purer beds dark ; weathering brown ; fos- 

siliferous. Thickness, 300 to 400 feet. 
1. Purple sandstone, slaty partings ; conglomeratic ; no fossils. Thickness, 500 
to 600 feet ; conformable to b, slightly alternating. 

Tentaculites, sp. 



Strophomena, sp. 

Orthis, sp. (near O. thakil, var. 

striatocostata, and var. con- 

vexa). 
Orthis, sp. (near O. compta). 



Orthis, sp. (near 0. tibetica). 
O., sp. (conf. O. resupinata). 
Crinoid stems. 
Cyathophyllum, 2 sp. 
Syringopora, sp. 



(S) Bhabeh seeies {Lower Silurian) — 

3. Greenish and bluish sandstones sometimes micaceous, often laminated ; also 
thickly bedded, occasional slaty and calcareous beds, fossiliferous. Thick- 
ness not stated, but represented in the section as equal to 2 or 1. 

2. Grey, white and pinkish, speckled sandstone or quartzite, with occasional 
calcareous beds, dolomitic and cavernous (Eauchwake), fossiliferous. Thick- 
ness not stated ; figured as much as No. 1. 

1. Bluish and greenish grey slates (some micaceous) and sandstones ; no fossils. 
Thickness, 3,000 feet. 

Orthis, sp. ? I Chcetetes yalc. 

Palseozoio series. — A large part of Stoliczka's Memoir is given 
to tlie description and discussion of the fossils, a complete list of which has 
been given above ; besides this there is not much ma,tter for discussion, 
and it would be too tedious without a full-scale map to trace the formations 
severally wherever they have been observed. It will be more suitable 
here to take them up in series, and to indicate the conditions they exhibit 
at different points of the area. This sketch possesses the advantage, 
so rarely experienced in Indian formations, that the stratigraphical 
identifications were made upon the basis of palseoptological evidence. 
The palseozoio series, as given in the above list, is, of course, only illustra- 
tive, not in any sense a standard ; even here, in several of the groups. 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE ZANSKAR AREA. 639 

much variation is noticed. The observations were taken at the south- 
eastern extremity^ where the Zanskar basin approaches nearest to the 
Lower Himalayan area, and where the strata exhibit a minimum 
of alteration. It is only in this portion o£ the area, within the Spiti 
basin, which drains into the Sutlej, and has undergone the greatest 
erosion, that the upper palaeozoic rocks are freely exposed, away from the 
edge of the basin. In Spiti the Kulingp series is very frequently found 
at the bottom of the deepest valleys, underlying the secondary formations 
of the adjacent mountains. In the more elevated ground of Zanskar 
it has been noticed only in a few localities in this position, as in the 
Tzarap valley. There is no mention of the silurian rocks being exposed, 
except along the marginal outcrops. 

South-west boundary. — To the north-west of Spiti the palseozoic 
series is still recognisable at the Bdralacha pass. The rocks imme- 
diately above the central gneiss are like those of the Bhdbeh section ; and 
fossils were found at a low horizon in the silurians. The next section is 
on the Zanskdr river, near Padam, where the boundary between the two 
series is not fixed, within broad limits ; and from this to the westward, 
along the flank of the Zanskar ridge to Suru (Sooroo), near the north-west 
end of the Zanskar basin, the metamorphism increases, and the whole 
palseozoic series becomes gradually disguised. On the Suru section the 
metamorphics of the Zanskar range extend northwards to Sangra, near 
Kartse (Kurtse), where they are largely hornblendie, and supposed to be 
upper silurian. The chloritic quartzites north of this are considered to be 
carboniferous, and they are in contact with the syenitic rocks of Kargil, 
against which the sedimentary basin terminates on the north-west. 

South-east boundary. — Proceeding north-eastwards from the 
Bhabeh pass, we follow the south-east end of the Zanskar basin, as 
stopped out against the central gneiss of Purgial. The details of this 
feature have not been observed, buit, as seen in the section of the Spiti 
river, only 25 miles from Muth, some important changes are recorded. 
Fossils were found far down in the series, near Kuri and Shdlkar. The 
gneiss is overlaid by dark, thin-bedded slates and sandstones, but ap- 
parently not immediately ; for the chief contrast between this and the 
Bhdbeh section is stated to be that the lower strata on the Spiti are more 
altered in a few places truly metamorphic, and that the higher beds are 
more slaty. But the most peculiar difference is the appearance of inter- 
bedded greenstone throughout the whole series, from the gneiss up to the 
carboniferous rocks near Po (on the Spiti river) . The thickness of the 
deposits seems to be greater here, especially of the carboniferous series, 
if all the brown shales at the top of the section belong to this formation. 



640 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XX7I. 

The disturbance is not excessive ; it is locally described as if the schists 
had been upheaved in the form of a dome. 

The Rupshu metamorphics. — The next section is 40 miles to the 
northj in the upper valley of the Para river^ where the conditions of the 
north-east boundary are fully established. The first effects of metamor- 
phism are noticed in the triassic rocks ; but the greenish quartzites and 
slates beneath them are still recognisable as of the Kuling series^ and 
have yielded carboniferous fossils. Beneath the quartzites and slates 
come chloritic and mica-schists, doubtless representative, if the observa- 
tions be correct, of the silurian rocks, but differing entirely from them 
in facies. The south-westerly dip continues remarkably constant for 24 
miles across a vast thickness of these metamorphic strata, a third of 
which would amply represent the known thickness of the lower palseozoic 
series ; so that, unless there are undetected repetitions, there must be either 
great expansion of these formations, or we have here also an unknown 
thickness of the old gneiss. This would seem by no means improbable • for 
below some 10,000 feet of the mica-schists, at about the middle of the 
Moriri lake, there is a strong band of granitoid rock, not unlike the 
central gneiss. - It is underlaid by a great series of thin quartzose schists, 
locally gneissose, below which, at the Kiagar lake, is another mass of 
gneiss, characterised by large imperfect crystals of felspar and much tour- 
maline. This gneiss is thin-bedded, and passes down again into quartz- 
ose schists. At last, within six miles of the Indus, there is a reverse 
(north-east) dip in these beds, and so they abut against (are traversed 
by) a great mass of basic igneous rock, forming a line of irruption along 
the Indus. 

A passing reflection may be recorded on the absence, in the infra-car- 
boniferous rocks of Rupshu, of bedded greenstone, so abundant through- 
out the Silurians of the Spiti valley. The fact would be enough to awaken 
doubt whether any of these metamorphics can be converted silurians ; save 
that the total absence of those same rocks in the Bhabeh section rather 
suggests that they are not truly contemporaneous in the Spiti ground. 

The Rupshu metamorphics continue to the north-west, with a con- 
stantly diminishing width, the massive gneiss being still in force at 
Gya (36 miles south-south-east of Leh), where it is described as having 
a large proportion of white quartz, but the mica is occasionally replaced 
by diallage. This is close to the axis of eruptive rock. 

North boundary with tertiary rocks.— Not far to the west the 
Rupshu metamorphics must die out altogether; for at the Zalung Karpo 
pass, 15 miles west of Gya, carbonaceous slates and limestones underlie 
the Lilang (triassic) limestone, and are the only rocks seen from this 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE ZANSKAR AREA. 641 

all down the Marclia valley to Skiu, near the Zanskdr river, where carbona- 
ceous limestonej full of crinoid stems, and presumably carboniferous, is in 
close proximity to the numm'ulitics. Silurian rocks were not distinguished 
in this section, but Stoliczka considers that they are probably present. 
The eruptive rock is not noticed in the section at Skiu. The nest section 
is 30 miles west of the Zansk^r river, on the road from Dras to Leh. 
Here the slates, green and red shales and sandstones, between the serpen- 
tine of the Indus and Lamayuru, are recognised as of the Bhdbeh series. 
They are contorted, with a prevailing south-west high dip, and are over- 
laid by a few hundred feet of carbonaceous shales, which are spoken of 
as of the Muth series, and also as carboniferous.^ The rocks are spoken 
of as highly metamorphic-looking, and at the same time as not 
easily distinguished locally from the adjoining tertiary rocks. Farther 
on, west of Kharbu, the tertiary rocks, both sedimentary or igneous, 
encroach still more ; and about Shargol they are in obscure contact with 
the triassic limestone. The next mention of the palseozoic series is at 
16 miles to the west, where we have already seen them, much altered, in 
contact with the syenite of KargQ. 

Thus it appears that for about half its length, on the north, the 
Zanskar basin of palseozoic and secondary rocks is now bounded by ter- 
tiary formations. On the north-west these contiguous, but distinct, 
basins end together against the syenitic mass of Kargil ; but to the 
south-east the tertiary rocks pass continuously into the broad central area 
of metamorphic rocks, those of Rupshu on the south-west, and those of the 
Ladak range on the north-east. The latter will be noticed in connexion 
with the Kardkoram area, where they are described in sequence with the 
fossiliferous rocks of that basin. 

The secondary series. — The series of secondary formations in the 
Zanskar area, recorded in the list at p. 685 amounts altogether to a 
thickness of 8,000 to 9,000 feet. From the structural condition of the 
area, shewing that it is proximately at least a basin of disturbance, the 
general distribution of the formations may be surmised ; and we have 
already traced a continuous outcrop of the palsBOzoic rocks round the 
edo-e of the basin, except on the north, where the structural symmetry is 
broken by the contact of an independent and much later basin of 
tertiary rocks. As there is general conformity throughout the entire 
sequence of formations, each is principally exposed along the external 
outcrop of its area, and then along the sides of the deeply eroded river 
gorges traversing the basin, where all the strata are variously affected 

1 These observations are taken from Stoliczka's notes, in the Scientiflc Results of the 
Second Ydrkand Mission : Geology, pp. 13, 14 : Calcutta, 1878. 

Ql 



642 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI. 

by minor undulations and contortions. The great limestones of the 
Lilang and Tagling groups are the most prominent rocks of the area ; 
while the later f ormationsT-^upper Jurassic and cretaceous — are reduced to 
comparatively small patches in the centre of the basin, in the hollows of 
local synclinals or as remnants on the tops of ridges. 

On the much more obscure question of the original distribution of 
these formations, there is very little to be said. It is important to record 
the few remarks on tMs point made by the observer himself, from whom 
these descriptions are taken. In his reflections on his second year's work 
Dr. Stoliczka remarks {I. c, p. 352) : " Eefen-ing to' the section near 
Muth, as far as I can see now, I believe that the carbonif erqus deposits here 
seem to close a grand geological epoch, and that in the main their 
deposits filled only the interior of a large basin, which gradually and 
partially became dry land. The carboniferous rocks now appear spar- 
ingly dispersed in consequence of undulating contortions of the entire 
ground. Towards the west, especially in Kashmir and Little Tibet, the 
carboniferous rocks are, however, much more developed." On the same 
page it is written, that " after the close of the triassic group in the 
North-West Himalayas, great disturbances must have taken place ; large 
tracts of the country wer6 raised, and never more covered by the sea, 
until partially in comparatively recent periods (eocene), while in other 
places the regular succession of deposits took place. One of these was 
evidently the large northern Jurassic basin of the Himalayas." Again, 
a little further {I, c, p. 353) : " The j urassic basin, which is so well 
developed in Spiti, and extends to North Kumaun, continues to retain 
the same north-western direction, with all. the characteristic rock-forma- 
tions, until it becomes interrupted by the great granitic and syenitie 
mass of Little Tibet. A partial interruption seems to have taken place 
after the close of the rhaetic deposits ; biit whether the Jurassic basin 
has been actually and totally interrupted here (that is, south of .the 
Indus), Or whether it has been only compelled to continue with its 
course towards the north or north-west in Gilgit and beyond the Mustagh 
range, subsequent inquiries must prove." 

The particular observations upon which these impressions were based 
are not indicated ; and it must be said that from an independent study 
of the recorded observations, such inferences could not be made, or even 
that a different interpretation is suggested. No facts are quoted shew- 
ing the great disturbance of the Lilang series independently of the later 
formations, preparatory to the formation of the Jurassic basin. The 
lower Jurassic group, the Tagling limestone, appears in full force, forming 
the highest summits close to the edge of the basin, both on the north and 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE zanskar area. 643 

south ; and the original limitation of the Jurassic rocks anywhere near this 
seenos to be purely conjectural. The only instances given, in the Pdra and 
upper Tagling limestones, of interpolation and thickening of strata have 
no reference to the actual basin ; they begin to the north of its centre, and 
expand towards its "present north mai-gln. The only appearance of an 
original basin, corresponding with the actual one, is in the upper second- 
ary deposits — the Spiti and Chikkim groups ; and even for these the case 
is not very evident. The best case quoted is that at Muth, where the 
carboniferous (Kuling) group seems to be' regularly overlapped by the 
Lilang beds ; but this, like the two cases just mentioned, only 'points to 
a southern limitation of the Hinaalayan deposits. The greatest difficulty 
in the way of the latter supposition, as a general f eatm-e, is the great thick- 
ness of the Silurians in the Bhabeh section ; the only relief to it being the 
preponderance of sandstone in that position, contrasting with finer deposits 
elsewhere. On the whole, it is evident that the date of formation of 
the Zdnskair basin is still an open question, within very wide limits. 

The tertiary series. — It is in connection with the Zanskar area 
and Dr. Stoliczka's work that we have to notice the tertiary rocks of the 
Central Himalayas. Here, as in the Sub-Himalayan zone, their features 
and relations are of first importance in the mountain history. With the 
exception of some almost unknown' deposits (to be mentioned again), 
from which the Siwalik fossils brought from the Hundes area must be 
derived, the tertiaries of Tibet are, so far as known, eocene, or, at least, 
nummulitic. Dr. Stoliczka describes them as very similar to the corre- 
sponding deposits of the Sirmur area in the Simla region : " soft and partly 
loose conglomerates, reddish and purple slates and marls, and greenish sand- 
stones, much like those on Dagshai hill and to the north of that station " 
(I. C.J p. 34)3). From these' beds at Rambag, close to the Indus, near Leh, 
he procured Nv/mmiiliies ramondi and N. ex^onens. In some of the 
lowest beds of the same group near Kargil, some fossils found by Mr. 
Drew are mentioned by Dr. Stoliczka as " very like Melania, and bivalves 
almost unmistakably belonging to Tholadomya or Panopcea " [1. ■c., p. 348^ ; 
and he alludes to the beds again as " a brackish and fresh water deposit,^' ^ 
The thickness of these strata here is given as 5,000 feet {I. c, p. 348). 

According to Dr. Stoliczka's observations, these rocks extend from 
Kargil on the west, where they end against-the syenitic rocks of Baltistan, 
continuously along the Indus for more than 200 miles to beyond the 
eastern limits of his explorations. This long trough is seldom more than 
25 miles wide, and from end to end a line of eruptive rock accompanies 
the eocene strata, generally on the south side, but also in the midst of the 

> Rec. G. S. I., VII, p. 13. 



644 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap- XX¥I, 

sedimentary rocksj as at the west end about Paskim. Varieties of the 
eruptive formation are described as epidotic roek^ consisting of crystallised 
or granular masses of epidotCj quartzj and albite ; also as diallage rock, 
, serpentine, and gabbro. When Dr. Stoliezka first examined these tertiary 
rocks in Northern Rupshu, the nummulitics are there so indurated, consist- 
ing of green and red sandstones and slates, with a thickness of 3,000 to 
4,000 feet, that they were taken to be probably a palsBozoic series; the 
eruptive rock also is in great force, being 1 5 miles wide at the Hanle 
river, and upon it Stoliezka remarked : '' From their dark colours, these 
rocks have sometimes been referred to the basalts, but they have certainly 
nothing to do with these more recent volcanic rocks "^ {I. c, p. 12S) . 

On the north-east side this long compressed basin of tertiary .rocks 
is bounded throughout by the syenitic metamorphie series of the Ladak 
axis ; on the south-west for half its length it is in contact with the 
Hupshu metamorphics, which thin out gradually, and are replaced to 
the north-west by the palseozoic slates of the Zanskar basin ; and far- 
ther on, the nummulitics reach to the triassic outcrop within that basin. 
Although Dr. Stoliezka found no trace of nummulitic rocks to the south 
of this very peculiar and well-defined area, he seems to have accepted 
without hesitation (I. c, p. 354), as of the same deposits. Dr. Thomson's 
discovery of nummulitics on the Singhi pass (16,600 feet), on the route 
between Padam and Leh, in the centre of the Zanskar basin. Without 
presuming to question the possibility'' of this occurrence, upon so slight 
a knowledge of the geology of the region, the obvious importance of 
this observation suggests an examination of its authenticity.^ 

1 This, of course, refers to the idea, prevalent amongst German geologists until recently, 
and still held by a large number, that different igneous rocks are characteristio of parti- 
cular geological epochs. See foot-note, p. 302. 

2 Dr. Thomson's record of the rocks on the Singhi La is as follows ("Western 
Himalayas and Tibet : " 1852, p. 381) : " Quartz rock, slate, and limestone alternated during 
the ascent; and near the summit of the pass the limestone evidently contained organic 
remains, perhaps coralline ; though their traces were not sufficiently distinct to enable me 
to decide the point." This observation does not at f\ll suggest an outlying high-level 
remnant of newer rocks, like those of the Indus valley, but of well-indurated strata, 
forming the mass of the adjoining mountains. The i4entification of the fossils is re- 
corded at page 176 of the " Description des Animaux Possiles du Groupe Nummulitique 
de I'Inde," by MM. D'Archiac and Haime, as follows : " Un calcaire gris bleuStre, 
compacte, ptoi S Mveolina melo, associ^e ^ une nummulite qui parait etre la N. ramondi, 
a. ete observe' en place par le docteur Thomson, dans la chaine m^me de I'Himalaya, au 
passage et au col de Singhi La, lorsqu'il se rendait de Zanskar a la vallee de I'lndus." 
There is nothing to suggest doubt or discrepancy in these records ; bat so great errors of 
locality amongst the fossils described in this work have been found out (see note, p. 531) 
that there is room, for doubt, where there is anything to suggest it j and it appears desirable 
that the occurrence of nummulitic rocks on the Singhi La should be verified. 



Extra- Peninsular. ] THE Zanskae AREA. 645 

There are no detailed observations to shew the relation of the Indus 
nummulities to the contiguous rocks. The facies of the deposits is that 
of a local basin ; and this seems to be the view taken of them by Dr. 
Stoliczka, at least at the western end ; he says : " I rather presume that 
these beds have been formed in a kind of narrow bay of the tertiary 
sea, which covered Northern and Eastern Tibet ^' (p. 348). In his route- 
notes on his journey to Yarkand, in the same western area, between 
Shargol and Kharbu, he describes lumps and patches of the triassie 
limestone sticking out of the tertiary shales.^ 

It seems at least certain from the condition and positioft of the 
eocene rocks of the InduSj that vast denudation, and therefore dis- 
turbance [quoad elevation), of the Himalayan area had occurred in 
pre-tertiary times. It remains for future observation to shew how far 
the special disturbance of the older formations corresponds with that 
which the eocene rocks themselves have undergone, 

' Scientific Results of tlie Second Yarkand Mission : Geology, p. 13 : Calcutta, 1878. 



646 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTEAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap- XXVII. 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA, 

CENTRAL (tIBETAN) HIMALAYAS— i 

The Hundes qt Ngari-Khorsutn area — Stratigraphical series of Niti in Hundes — The 
tertiary ernjjtive rocks of Hundes — The sedimentary tertiary rocks of Hundes — The 
Karakoram area — The Ladak gneiss — The eastern section of the Karakoram basin 

— The KarAkoram section — The Kuenlun range — The Suket pass section— The 
Tangi pass section — The Pamir section — The Kashmir-Pangi area — Triassic rocks of 
Kashmir — Carboniferous rocks of Kashmir — Silurian rocks of Kashmir — The 
Pangi basin — The Pir Panjal Chain — One-sidedness of mountain structure — Post- 
tertiary and recent formations — Sub-Himalayan high-level gravels — Glacial evidence 
in Tibet — The Hundes lake-basin — Lingzhithang and Kuenlnin lake-basins — Tso Moriri 
and other basins — Alluvial deposits of Tibet — The Kashmir basin — The Nepal valley 

— Other lakes — Drainage lines. Summaex. 

The Hundes or Ngari-Khorsum area.^— Although we cannot 
refer to actual record of the observations, it is prohable that the palaeozoic 
series is continuous from the Zanskar basin into that of the Hundes ; it is 
coloured so on General Strachey's map of the Hundes region, no doubt 
on good authority;. It remains for future observation to shew whether 
the mesozoic formations of the two areas were originally continuous or 
not ; at present they are separated by the gneissic mass of Purgial, 
against which the Sutlej turns southwards, and which is now the north- 
western barrier of the present basin of secondary rocks of the Hundes 
province. At 180 miles to the south-east of Purgial the great Gurla 
mountain (25,200 feet high), south of Manasaraur lake, stands right in 
the axis of the Hundes basin, and may be taken as its limit on this side ; 
although here, too, there is a band of palseozoic and mesozoic rocks passing 
partially to the south of it, up to the edge of the area explored. Whether 
continuously or not, it is fairly established that Jurassic rocks occur far to 
the east on this strike, north of Nepal, claracteristic ammonites having 
been brought by traders from that region. On General Strachey's map 
the gneissic formations of both Purgial and Gurla are shewn to be in- 
trusively penetrated by granite j so we may accept them provisionally 
as fco-med of the central gneiss. 

1 Captain Richard Strachey, on the Geology of part of the Himalaya Mountains and 
Tibet, Q. J. G. S., 1851, Vol. VII, p. 292. 



Extra-Peninsular. J 



HUNDES AREA. 



647 



The general aspect of the Hundes area must be very different from 
that of Zanskar. With the exception of a few small lake-basins, and 
occasional alluvial patches in the deep river-valleys, Zanskdr is covered 
by lofty rugged mountains, many rising above 19,000 feet, and holding 
considerable glaciers. The central area of the fiundes is occupied by a 
great spread of diluvial deposits forming an extensive plateau^ 1X0 miles 
in length and from 15 to 60 in bireadth, at an elevation of from 14,000 
to 16,000 feet. It is intersected by great ravines, that of the Sutlej 
to the west being nearly 3,000 feet deep. 

Stratigraphical series of Niti in Hundes. — The numerous 
collection of fossils made by General Strachey was described by Messrs. 
Salter and H. F. Blanford, from whose work^ the subjoined lists are taken ; 
the petrological characters being collected from General Strachey's paper. 
In most cases the thicknesses are not estimated : — 

Fossizimssous sesies of tsm sundms abea. 

Hard grits, shales, and limestones ; no fossils found. 

Oolitic : Dark crumbling shales with hard nodules (Spiti shales), full of fossils ; 
below them are several thousand feet of various limestones (not examined) 
underlaid by black limestones and shales, with imperfect fossils. 



Selemnites sulcatus. 


A. torqudtus. 


Ammonites acudnetws. 


A. triplicatus. 


A. alatus. 


A. thouarsensis. 


A. bifrons. 


A. umbo. 


A. bijfilex. 


A. wallicJiii. 


A- communis. 


Turritella montiwm. 


A. concavus. 


Pleurotomaria ? sp. 


A. eugenii. 


Tv/rbo invitus. 


A. gerardi. 


Chemnitzia, sp. 


A. grijithii. 


Anatina vaginula. 


A. guttaiMS. 


Myophoria blanfordi. 


A. Jwoleeri. 


Cardium truncatum. 


A. hetero'phyllus. 


Oyprina trigonaUs. 


A. Jiimalayamis. 


Astarte major. 


A. hyphasis. 


A. unilateralis. 


A.juhar. 


Modiola, sp. 


A. medea. 


Nucula cuneiformis. 


A. nepalensis. 


Cueullcsa virgata. 


A. oetagonus. 


C. leionoia. 


A. rohnstus. 


Inoceramus hookeri. 


A. scriptus. 


Lima acuta. 


A. spitiensis. 


L. gigantea. 


A. strigilis. 


L. mytiloidea. 


A. tenuistriatus. 


Monotis coneentricus. 



1 PalsBontology of Niti in the Northern Himalayas. Printed for private circulation by 
General Strachey: Calcutta, 1865. 



648 



GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVII. 



A. incequivalvis. 
JPecien aquivalvis. 
F. comatus. 
P. hifrons. 
P. monilifer. 
F. lens. 
F. sahal, 
Ostrea flahelloides. 



O. acuminata, 
Terebratula numismalis. 
T, carinata. 
T. glohata. 

Mhynconella va/riahilis. 
S. condnna. 
Actosalenia ? 
Fentacrinites, sp. 



Teiassic (Upper) :' Dark-coloured limestone, associated with shales and dark red 



grits. 

Ammonites floridus, PL II, 

fig.l. 
A. aon. 

A. winterlottomi, 
A. planodiseus, 
A. diffissua, PI. II, fig. 3. 
A. gaytani. 
A. ausseeanus. 
A. hlanfordii. 
Ceratites Jacquem onti. 
Orthoceras pulchellum, 
O. salinarium. 



Natiea snhglohulosa. 

Exogyra, sp. 

Halohia lommeli, PL II, fig. 5. 

Fecten scutella. 

Lima stracheyi. 

Athyris deslongchampsii. 

A. 



Fhynchonella reir.ocita. 
Spirifera oldha/mi. 
S. stracheyi. 



Caebonifeeotjs : The rock not identified in situ.. 



Froductus purdoni, PL I, fig. 10. 
F. flemingii. 
Chonefes vishnu. 



Athyris roissyi, 

Aviculopecten hyemalis, PL I, fig. 13. 



SilTJEiAN' : g. White quartzite ; no fossils. 

f. Pale flesh-coloured quartzite ; no fijssils. 

e. Dark-red grits, sometimes marly,; with Crinoid stems. 

d. Earthy slates and concretionary limestones, Cyrtoceras, Ortho- 
ceras, Cheetetes. 

c. Flaggy limestones and grits :, most of the Trilobites, Stro- 
phomena,i Leptcena, Lituites, Ftilodicfyon, Cystidea, and 
Pucoids. 

b. Limestones and slates : the strong-rihhed Orthis (0. thahil), 
Terebratula, lAngula, Bellerophon, fragments of JSncrinites 

a. Dark, thick-hedded, coralline limestone. 



' No plate of the Himalayan silurian fossils has been given in the present work for 
want of specimens to illustrate. But few have been procured by tbe Geological Survey, and 
the figures in Mr. Salter's work are not well adapted for reproduction by lithography. 
Owing to the rarity of silurian fossiliferous rocks in In.dia and the neighbouring countries, 
illustrations of the fossils are not of much importance. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] 



HUNDES AREA. 



The total thickness of these groups is estimated at 6,000 feet. 

Asaphus emodi. 

Illcenus hraohyoniscus, 

I. punctulosus. 

Cheirurus mitis. 

Frosopisous mimus. 

SphcsrexocAus idiotes. 

Lichas tihetanus. 

Calymene nivalis. 

Tentaculites, sp. 

Serpulites, sp. 

Nautilus ? involvens. 

Cyrtoceras centrifugum. 

Lituites iutliformts. 

Orthoceras striatissimum. 

O. kemas. 

Theea lineolaia, 

Bellerophon ganesa. 

Mutchisonia himalensis. 

M. pagoda. 

Pleurotomaria tiirlinata. 

Saphistoma emodi. 

Trochonema humifasa. 

Cyclonema rama. 

C. suhtersulcata. 

Solopea varicosa. 

H. pumila. 

Ctenodonta sinuosa. 



Cyrtodonta ? imbricatula. 

lAngula kali. 

Tj. ancyloides. 

LeptcBna himalensis. 

L. repanda. 

L, cratera. 

L. mix. 

Strophomena trachealis. 

S. cheemerops. 

8. umbrella. 

8. aranea. 

8. nubigeua. 

8. bisecta. 

8. halo. 

8. lineatissima. 

Orthis thakil. 

O. tibeiica. 

O. compta. 

O. monticu,la. 

O. uncata. 

Ptilodictya ferrea. 

P. plumula. 

8phierospongia mellijlua. 

8. inosculans. 

Chcetetes ? yak. 

Heliolites depauperata. 



Slate sebies : No fossils found ;' coarse slates, grits, and limestones, with coarse 
conglomerate of rounded quartzose rocks, at hase ; 9,000 feet. 

Metamoephics : Many varieties of mica-schists and gneiss, with beds of highly 
crystalline limestone and calcareous schists. 

From a small collection made by Mr. Hughes, o£ the Geological 
Survey, on a trip over the Milam pass. Dr. Waagen has somewhat ex- 
tended the list of formations in the Hundes basin. The following notes 
are taken from his paper' : — 

CEErACEOTTS FOSSILS : — Corhula cf. cancellifera ; Astarte ; Pectunculus ; Cu- 
eullma. The facies of these fossils is considered to be decidedly creta- 
ceous. 



JUEASSIC EOSSILS : — 

Belemnites cf. kuntkotensis. 
Ammonites {Oppelia) acucinc- 

ta. 
A. (Perisphinetes) frequens. 



Ammonites (Perisphinetes), sp. (tripli- 

cattis, StoL, non Sow.) 
A. (P.) sabineanus. 
A. (P.) stanleyi. 



»Eec. G. S. I., XI, p. 184. 



650 GEOLOGY OP INDIA- CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVlI. 



Ammonites (Perisphinctes), sp. 
A. (Stephanoceras?) wallichii. 
A. (Oosmooeras) theodori. 
A. (C.) octagonus. 
Aacella leguminosa. 



Aiteella hldnfordiana. 
Au., sp., nov. 
Pecten, sp. 

Ithynchonella, sp. (vwians, Blanf., non 
Sohloth.) 



Teiassic rossiis : — A Monntis, two Pecten, and Shynehonella aitstriaea, are 
recognised as of an upper triassic horizon. They occurred in a hard, flaggy 
dark-grey limestone. Two fragments of Ammonites of the Am. semipar- 
titus group, in a smooth, dark-grey, hard shale, are considered as prohably 
belonging to the Muschelkalk, and the Bunter is indicated by a red crypto- 
crystalline limestone containing a Ceratite like one of the Salt Eange 
species. 

Peemian and caebouifebous fossils : — A white limestone full of crinoid-stems 
yielded — 



Terehratula himala^enais. 
, T. subvescicularis. 
T., sp. nov. ? 



Spirifer cf. glaher. 



CameropJtoria, sp. nov. P 
Productus semireticulatus. 
P., sp. 

Bactri/nium, sp. 
Cyathophyllum, sp. 



This fauna is noticed as much resembling that of the lower carboniferous limestone 
in the Salt Range. A black shale gave a Shynehonella, allied to Sh. 
acuminata; and a dark liver-coloured limestone contained ^SSpi/'j/wcf. striatus; 
Stringocephalus ? sp. ; Mhyneonella ? sp. 

SiLTJEiAN FOSSILS : — A white sandstone yielded Strophomena aranea. 

The crystalline schists (central gneiss) at the edge of the Hundes basin 
are profusely penetrated by a coarse, white granite, with much schorl and 
kyanite. All the great peaks of the snowy range occur in this zonie. The 
summits of the highest passes, which average about 18,000 feet in eleva- 
tion, are in the zone of palsBOzoic rocks, which rise into peaks some 2 000 
feet higher than the passes. A northerly dip is constant throughout the 
whole stratified series ; and no unconformities were detected. General 
Strachey considers that the south edge of this basin has probably been a 
sea margin from the remotest ages of the earth's history {I. c.y p. 808). 

The .tertiary eruptive rocks of Hundes, — There can scarcely 
be a doubt that the igneous rock so conspicuous at various points of the 
Hundes area is the same as, and probably continuous with, the middle 
tertiary (or at least post-nummulitic) eruption of the Indus valley in 
Laddk and Rupshu (p. 643). General Strachey describes a great out- 
burst of this rock, 35 mUes wide, " in which are found hypersthene and 
bronzite, besides syenitic and ordinary greenstones, and various varieties of 
porphyry, " forming the western shores of the Rakas Tal, which is the 
western companion of the Manasaraur ;Manasarowar) lake j and from here 



Extra-Peninsular.] hundes area, 651 

the trap seems to extend in force to the north-west, on the north side of the 
Hundes plain. The intrusion is not, however, so restricted to this main 
line of eruption as it seems to be in Ladak ; for General Strachey has map- 
ped several detached protusions of the same rock, notably that forming the 
Balch pass, surrounded by Jurassic strata. Others appear surrounded by 
the Hundes plains deposit, and it would seem in the figured section that the 
trap penetrates, and now overlies, these very new rocks. This error of 
drawing is sufficiently corrected in General Strachey's text, where, in a 
paragraph of the summary, it is distinctly stated that the tertiary beds of 
the plains were deposited upon and contain debris of the eruptive rock. 
The Jurassic strata being the latest known to be affected by the intrusive 
rock here, this has been taken as a lower limit of age for the eruption, 
and the supposed tertiary deposits of the plains have given an upper limit 
of date. The correlation of the rock with that of Ladak reduces the 
question of its age to much narrower iimits, as middle tertiary. 

The sedimentary tertiary rocks of Hundes. — The earliest 
evidence, so far as known, of tertiary rocks in Tibet, came from the 
Hundes area. In the first quarter of the century, long before the dis- 
covery of the Siwalik fossils, fragmentary remains of extinct mammals 
from beyond the Niti pass were brought to notice. Specimens were 
even presented to the Geological Society of London about that time by 
Sir Thomas Colebrooke and Dr. Traill ; others were sent to the British 
Museum. But from that time till now they have received little or no 
attention, probably on account of their fragmentary condition, and 
because nothing precise was then known as to their geological position. 
General Strachey to some extentre moved this latter objection (I. c, p. 306), 
by declaring that these fossils were derived from the great imdisturbed 
diluvial deposits filling the upper valley of the Sutlej to a depth of 
3,000 feet, and forming the wide plain of Hundes. He also enumerates 
some approximate determinations of the specimens he collected himself, 
made at his request by Mr, Waterhouse : there were— ^bones of Hippothe- 
rium {Hippirion) ; of several varieties of horse ; of a bovine ruminant ; 
a head allied to goat or sheep ; a vertebra of rhinoceros ; tooth of 
elephant (?). The evidence is not sufficient for correlation with any 
precise horizon ; the fauna is, however, an extinct one, and may perhaps 
be relegated to some place in the great Siwalik series. 

General Strachey did not, however, omit to state that none of his 
specimens were found in situ, and that, in spite of every attempt, he 
could not hear of a definite locality in which any one knew positively that 
they had been found. His own conviction as to their being derived from 
the horizontal plain's deposits is based on their general position, supported 



652 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVII. 

by the fact that on many of the specimens there are attached rem- 
nants of a fine calcareous conglomerate, exactly identical with beds 
observed intpcalated with the boulder and gravel-beds that constitute 
the mass of the deposits. This point cannot be much insisted on ; for 
the complete similarity of such rocks in different groups is well known 
(p. 555). Any shadow of doubt upon the correctness of this inference 
comes ■principally from the asserted horizonfality of these deposits, 
whereas the latest Siwalik beds in the Sub-Himalayan zone are locally 
vertical ; and even some doubtfully tertiary deposits in the Kashmir and 
Nepal valleys (to be mentioned in our brief notice of the Himalayan 
post-tertiaries) have suffered some disturbance. It should be noticed 
that the occurrence of a displacement of the Hundes deposits seems 
to have been contemplated by General Stracheyj for he speaks of some 
similar deposits, to the south of the Niti pass, as having been separated 
from the general mass by the dislocations tha,t have upheaved the whole 
country {L c, p. 308). These discrepancies are noticed with a view to 
verification by future explorers : it may be that beneath the general mass 
of undisturbed diluvium formiiig the Hundes plains, there may occur 
obscure outcrops of similar deposits, of much older date, that have under- 
gone considerable disturbance. The comparative antiquity of even the 
most recent beds of the Hundes plain seems to be attested by the 
existence of ancient moraines upoa that plain [1. c, p. 310). These 
deposits will be referred to again with others of a like nature. 

The Karakoram^ area. — Dr. Stoliczka's observations on this ground 
were taken under very trying circumstances, while making forced marches 
at a most unseasonable time of year. His outward route lay by the 
Pangkong, Changehenmo, Lingzhithang, and the Upper Karakash val- 
ley. His return journey lay more to the west ; his last march but one 
was across the Earakoram pass.^ 

The Ladak gneiss.— The entire ridge north of the Indus consists 
of syenitic gneiss of extremely variable composition. The typical 
rock is, a moderately fine-grained syenite, with veins richer in horn- 
blende ; some portions contain much schorl. In finer varieties the felspar 
almost disappears, and the quartz is very scarce, forming a hornblende 
schist. In j)laces the hornblende disappears, the crystals of felspar increase 
ia size, and with mica (biotite) and quartz form an ordinary gneiss, but 
inseparable from the syenite, to which it is subordinate. To the north 
the syenitic gneiss passes into hornblende and chlorite schists, alternating 
with quartzose schists of great thickness. These rocks extend to the 

' Rec. G. S. I., VII, pp. 12 and 49 ; also. Scientific Results of the Second Yarliand Mis- 
sion : Geology : Calcutta, 1878, pp. 15-20, and 45, 46. 



Extra-Peninsular. J KARAKORAM AREA. 653 

Lunkar-la or Mdsimik pass. They are intimately connected with a 
greenish chloritic rock, both thin-bedded and more massivC; the latter 
sometimes distinctly crystalline, containing bronzite, and passing into 
diallage. These beds are compared to those found about Srinagar, in 
Kashmir (Mr. Lydekker's silurian trappean group) ; they occupy the 
south'-west side of the Chdngchenmo valley. On the 'western route simi- 
lar rocks were traced, by Dr. Bellew, up the Nubra valley to near the foot 
of the Saser pass. Dr. Stoliczka says : " I think we have to look upon 
this whole series of schistose and chloritic rocks as the representatives of 
the silurian formation.'" The remark seems to include all the rocks of 
the Ladak range ; but this is not certain, for a little further on in the' same 
short paper the Karakoram area is spoken of as bounded on the north 
and south by syenitic rocks, including between them the silurian, car- 
boniferous, and triassic formations. The Ladak gneiss is so unlike the 
description given (by the same observer) of the gneiss of Rupshu {c^te, 
p. 640), where also the silurian formations are unrepresented, unless by 
the crystalline schists, that we may expect some radical difference between 
them j it may be that the central gneiss is largely represented in Rup- 
shu. The two areas are separated by the trough of tertiary rocks, 
sedimentary and eruptive. A northerly dip seems to be as general in 
the Ladak gneiss as is the southerly one in Rupshu ; so that the tertiaiy 
basin would seem to lie on the axis of a great anticlinal, in contact with 
the very lowest rocks of the Central Himalayas. 

The eastern section of the Karakoram basin. — The observations 
made on the eastern traverse of the Karakoram basin differ in so many 
points from those of the western route, that they are better given sepa- 
rately. The direct length of the former section on a line north by west, 
from the top of the silurian rocks at the Changchenmo river to the 
Kuenlun gneiss near Shahidula, .is .about 120 miles. The length of the 
western section in a north-north-east direction, from, a corresponding point 
near the Nubra riverj below the Saser pass, to Shdhidula, is about 90 
miles, which is also nearly the distance between the two starting-points. 

The passage from the trappoid silurian rocks south of Chang- 
chenmo was not observed ; but on the north side of the valley there are 
dark, often black, shales with sandstones. Traces of fucoids were found 
in these rocks, but no other fossils ; from their relation to the triassic 
limestone, and their resemblance to the carboniferous rocks of Spiti, the 
beds are supposed to be carboniferous. Obscurely connected with these 
beds near Kium, in the Chdngchenmo valley, some recent-looking conglo- 
meratic sandstones are noted as possibly related to the eocene deposits of the 
Indus valley. 



654 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS, [ Chap, XXVII. 

The carboniferous eeries must be of considerable thickness, for it forms 
the Chang ridge, north of the Changchenmo valley, and the whole of the 
western portion of the Lingzhithang ; occurring again at the head of the 
Karakash river as far' as Shinglung. Similar rocks were observed by Dr." 
Bellew on both sides of the Saser pass, and to the north of it. There is 
no mention of a calcareous rock in any of these sections. 

A pale-grey triassic limestope, containing Bicerocardium himalaya- 
ense and Megalodon f/riqueter, occurs within the Changchenmo valley, and 
is the most frequent rock, forming the ridges to the north. It is some- 
times dolomitic and semi-oolitic, a,nd is locally underlaid by a red brec- 
ciated calcareous conglomerate. On the border of the Lingzhithang it is 
said to rest unconformably on the carboniferous shales. The last place 
where this triassic rock was observed was also at Shinglung, near the 
head-waters of the Karakash. 

On this route Dr. Stoliczka observed no newer rock than the trias ; 
but, as before mentioned, the ground was covered with snow at the time, 
and the diiEculties of the journey were extreme. A little to the east, how- 
ever, in the Lokzhung range, separating the Lingzhithang plains from 
the larger area on the north, described by Mr. Drew as the Kuenlun 
plains, the last-named observer found a limestone containing hippurites, 
underlaid by ferruginous sandstone, lying unconformably on an older 
encrinitic limestone, dark grey va. colour.-'- 

At Shinglung, in the Upper "Karakash valley, the carboniferous shales 
are followed immediately by the same chloritic rock noticed on the 
Lunkar-la, alternating with quartzose schists, and there regarded as 
Silurian. At Kisiljilga ordinary slates alternate with red conglomeratic 
sandstones, and are succeeded by dark slates, which rock is described as 
occupying the ground to Aktagh, and thence across the Suget-la to near 
Shahidula, on the Kdrakash, where the syenite of the Kuenlun begins. 
These silurian slates are expressly noticed as not metamorphic, and as 
corresponding with the metamorphic schists on the side of the Ladak 
axis. 

The Karakoram section.— By the eastern route, Dr. Stoliczka ap- 
proached Aktagh nearly from the east, and left it in a north-east direction ; 
and the observations recorded are strikingly different from those made 
on the route from the north-west, and proceeding south-south-west to the 
Karakoram pass. On the former route no mention is made of limestone 
anywhere near Aktagh; while on the latter limestone is by far the 
most conspicuous rock. Some miles below Aktdgh, towards the Yarkand 

' Jummoo and Kashmir, p. 343. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] the kuenlun eange. 655 

nverj the silurian slates are overlaid uneonformably (in the figured section 
they are quite parallel) by about 150 feet of reddish eartby and calca. 
reous sandstones, passing into grey limestone and whitish marl, some 
550 feet thick ; higher beds are reddish and brownish, sandy and conglo- 
meratic. No fossils were found in these rocks ; but they are considered 
as probably carboniferous, and to be continuous from here with the 
similar rocks observed at Aktdsh, east of the Pamir. At Aktdgh there 
are some earthy and conglomeratic beds, resting on the edges of the 
carboniferous ^tyata, and themselves considerably disturbed ; they are 
conjectured to be tertiary. Proceeding towards the Karakoram, the 
carboniferous rocks are regularly overlaid by a long sequence of triassic 
strata, dark and pale limestones and shales. A red limestone yielded 
Arcestes joAwfinis amtrice (?), Ammonites latteni, Aiilaeacercis, and Crinoids. 
Both carboniferous and triassic rocks are frequently traversed by a dark 
homogeneous greenstone, resembling basalt. At the Karakoram the 
red triassic limestone is succeeded by blackish and grey marly shales 
which are overlaid by almost horizontal strata of brown limestone, very 
like the lower TagHng limestone, and containing fragments of Belemnites. 
These triassic rocks form the ridge at the Karakoram pass. Some 
peculiar spheroidal fossils, known as Kdr^koram stones, were observed 
to occur in dark shales below limestone taken to be triassic. They were 
described as <Cystideans formerly, and l^ave since been considered by 
various observers sponges or corals, b^it they appear to be types of a 
distinct class of animals, Syrmgosphmvidc^y allied to the Foro/minifera. 

In his last day's notes Dr. Stoliczka records the occurrence ' of large 
boulders of syenite on the Dipsang plain, immediately south of the 
Karakoram pass ; and he draws the apparently obyious inference that this 
rock must be exposed in situ within the watershed, the extreme point of 
which at the head-waters of the Chipchak stream is only 25 miles to 
the east, and thus in the very centre of the strati graphical basin. The 
route by the upper K^rakash and over the Kqratagh passed much closer 
to the upper Chipchak, on the east and north ridges of the same moun- 
tain crest, withoilt any observation to sugge^ the proximity of crystalline 
rocks ; so it is riot impossible that the blocks in question may be true erra- 
tics, traces of the former extension of glacial condition^, of which almost 
every traveller in the Himalayas has niade mention. 

The Kuenlun range. — Dr. Stoliczka' has given tvvo sections of the 
Kuenlun ; one on the west by the Yangi pass, and one fifty miles, more 
to the east by the Suket pass, with which we must combine that of the 
Sanju pass on the same cross-section, over the northern or Kili^n ridge 
of the same rainge. 



656 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVII. 

The Suket pass section. — The relation of the slates forming the 
Suket pasSj supposed to be silurian, to the syenitie gneiss, alternating with 
quartzose metamorphic schists to the north of it, in the Karakash valley 
about Shahidula, is not stated. It is in these gneissic rocks that the 
old jade mines are placed, at about 20 miles up the Karakash, east-south- 
east from Shahidula; and the gorge of the river, for 25 miles below 
ShShidula, to the north, traverses the sam^ formation. On the Sanju pass 
the rock is chiefly a true mica-schist, with garnetif erous, chloritic, and 
quartzose varieties, in which jade was observed. In the Sanju valley, 
at TixD., some 20 miles north of the pass, the metamorphic schists are 
overlaid unconformably by dark, almost black, smooth slates, succeeded 
by grey conglomeratic sandstone belonging to some palseozoic formation. 
These dip at 40° to the north-west, but are again abruptly replaced by 
metamorphic schists, in which occur several massive beds of coarse 
porphyritic gneiss ; these continue for 18 miles, to Kiwaz. At Kiwaz . 
both sides of the valley are formed of conglomerates and red clays, said to 
strikingly resemble the supra-nummulitie rocks of the Sub-Himalayas 
and supposed to be, tertiary. These have undergone contortion ; and below 
Kiwaz they rest upon thick grey carboniferous limestone, containing 
Crinoid stems, Spirifers, and Fenestella. The dip in this rock is to the 
south-west, rising to the vertical, when it is succeeded by chloritic schist, 
which, after a mile or two, is in contact with red sandstone ; and this again, 
at Sanju, is overlaid by calcareous sandstones and chloritic marls, some 
beds of which are nearly made up of GrypJima vesicularis {? vesiculosa) . 
This cretaceous group of Sanju is represented in the figured section 
with a low northerly dip, running up against the schists to the 
south, which somewhat reduces the difficulties of this rather anomalous 
sequence. 

The Yangi pass section. — The second section of the Kuenlun cor- 
responds only in a general way with that to the east. Some distance north 
of the pass there is a broad core of white granitoid gneiss, which is spoken 
of as the axis of the whole metamorphic mass. It is overlaid on both 
sides by schistose ^■neiss ; and on the south this is overlain by black 
shale, grey sandstone and conglomerate, the whole series being spoken of 
as upper palseozoic. The coarse conglomerates are in great force at the 
Yangi pass (16,000 feet), and have a comparatively recent aspect, evidently 
forming the top of the series. They are identified with the beds at 
Tam, on the Sanju section. The lower, greenish and blackish, submeta- 
inorphic slaty or schistose beds turn up again south of the pass; and it 
is upon these that the newer rocks rest, as already described, near 
Aktagh. It must be remembered that all these details are derived 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE PAMIR SECTION. 657 

from uncorrected field-notes ; and it is quite possible that had Dr. Stoliczka 
lived to publish his observations, he would have corrected them in many 
cases. 

North of the gneissic axis there is a broader belt of metamorphic 
rocks, chiefly of a syenitic (hornblendic) character ; and for a width of 
16 miles the section is occupied by massive greenstone, which on the 
north is described as if, in part, a transformed condition of a bedded 
chlori^ie ' rock. This latter rock, with alternating white quartzose and 
calcareous schist, forms the Chiklik pass (10,400), at the north base of 
which it is succeeded by a thin-bedded limestone, also affected by meta- 
morphism. This limestone increases to a great thickness, forming a belt 
some miles wide between the Chiklik pass and a point about 12 miles 
south of Kugiar. There is a reddish sandy band in the middle of it. 
The limestone itself is spoken of as grey dolomite. The dips are high 
and disturbed, but the prevailing direction is to the north. No fossils 
were found, and no suggestion is given as to the age of this limestone : 
it is presumably either carboniferous or triassic. No cretaceous beds 
were observed on this section. 

The Pamir section. — A brief note of the section of the Pdmir 
will be of interest, for comparison with those of the Himalayas proper. 
The direct distance in a west-south-west direction is about 220 miles 
from Ighiz-yar, at the edge of the Y&,rkand plains, at an elevation of 5,600 
feet, to Kila Panjah, the capital of Wakhan, elevation 9,090, on the Oxus, 
at the confluence of the tWo western streams, from the Great Pamir 
on the north (elevation 14,320), and from the Little Pamir on the south 
(elevation 13,200). The drainage of the eastern side of the Pamir also 
flows to the Oxus, by the Aksu river (probably the original of Oxus) 
passing by Akt^sh, elevation 12,800 feet. The main watershed lies close 
to the east of Aktash, at the Nezatash pass, elevation 14,900 feet, 
at about the centre of a synclinal basin, between the gneissic axes 
of Sarikol and the P^mir. The Pamir is placed at the apex, where the 
Mustagh and Hindukiish ranges would meet, at an angle of about 120°, 
if prolonged on their general directions ; but on the maps these ranges 
are represented as swerving southwards from the Pamir, and as being 
confluent in the range from which the Gilgit river flows south-eastwards 
and the Chitral flows south-westwards, the pass to the latter . valley 
from the Oxus having only 12,000 feet of elevation. 

The mass of the Pamir is mainly formed of gneiss ; a pale, fine- 
grained, miea-gneiss, which Dr. Stoliczka considered to be the same as the 
central gneiss of the Himalayas. It exhibits comparatively little disturb- 
ance and is locally traversed by veins of albite granite, with mus- 

R 1 



658 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVII. 

covite. It is not distinctly stated whether this granite is intrusive. The 
correlation o£ this gneiss with the central gneiss is supported by the fact 
that the former is at many points immediately overlaid by black slates 
and shaleSj probably silurian, shewing very little alteration at the contact. 
The slates pass up into reddish sandy and conglomeratic beds. On the 
north-east, towards Aktash, these rocks are overlaid by some 3,000 feet of 
limestone, both dark and pale varieties, considered as probably carboni- 
ferous ,• and these are succeeded by dark shales and limestone, in which, 
on the Nezatash pass, Halohia lommeli, Rhynconellce, and Megalodon were 
found, proving the triassic age of the rock. East of this the black silurian 
slates turn up, with a very steep underlie, and are thus in abrupt contact 
with the gneiss of Sarikol. The width of the Aktash basin, between 
the two gneisses, is less than 50 miles. Intrusive greenstone is of 
frequent occurrence in the highest beds, as we have seen in the K^rako- 
ram section, south of Aktagh. The Aktash basin is, in fact, con- 
sidered by Dr. Stoliczka to be the stratigraphical continuation of the 
Karakoram. 

The abrupt boundary of the Sarikol gneiss with the rocks of the Aktash 
basin is probably faulted ; for the relation of the same gneiss to corre- 
sponding beds on its north-east side is described as transitional, the paleo- 
zoic strata having undergone considerable metamorphism ; and the gneiss 
itself is largely homblendic and much disturbed. The Sarikol gneiss is 
about 25 miles broad, and is held to correspond with the crystalline rocks 
of the Kuenlun axis. Along the whole section to the north-east, 50 miles 
long, only lower palseozoie rocks were observed in situ; slates and 
sandstones, occasionally conglomeratic and earthy limestone, aU without 
fossils ; but debris of carboniferous limestone, with Bellerophon, was found 
in the latei-al stream courses. Between Aktala and the gneiss there is 
extensive irruption of greenstone, like that south of Chiklik, on the 
Yangi section. The degree of disturbance diminishes in a very marked 
manner towards the plains. 

The Kashmir-Pangi area.— This ground includes, ^as already indi- 
cated (p. 62.6), a pair of semi-detached synclinal basins, on the same 
strike, south of the Zanskar ridge, which is in elevation the principal 
continuation of the main Himalayan range. The Kashmir area coin- 
cides nearly with the upper basin of the Jhelum, and the Pangi area 
may be taken to indicate the upper valley of the Chinab, from the head- 
waters in Ldhul to below Kilar. The irregular chain of ridges described 
(p. 631) as the Pir Panjal forms the south side of these basins; and 
the minor basin on the upper Eavi, in Chamba, between the eastern 
Pir Panjal and the Dhauladhar, belongs to the same group of terminal 



Extra-Peninsular. J 



KASHMIR AREA. 



659 



features, on the divided prolongation of the main range. The following 
approximate classification of rock-groups in this ground is taken from 
Mr. Lydekker's paper' : — 



Kashtmr and Fangi areas, 

^ C Sandstones and slates of Zoji-la and '' 
t Panjtarni. 

f Upper limestones and dolomites of/ 

" \ Ammd.tli, Sonamarg, Manasbal, and\ 

Dras river. 

Limestones of West Kashmir. 
Blue limestones of Manasbal. 
Limestones and slates of Marbal pass, I 

Lidar and Upper Sind valleys, Kiol ( 

series (?), 
Great limestone of Jama hills (?). 

Upper Panjal slates, shales and trap-'' 

poid rooks. j 

Trappoid rocks of Walar lake. ' 

Lower Panjal slates; lower slates andn 
trappoid rocks of Kashmir. ( 

Slates and limestones of Fangi, Lahal\ 
slates. 

Gneiss of Pir Panjffl. , 

Upper gneiss of Wardwan and Zans- 1 

kar range. ^ 



Areas to north and east. 



Lilfog series. 



Kuling series: 

Krdl limestone (?) 
Infra-Ki61 group (?) 

Muth series. 
Blaini series. 

9habeh series. 



Aye, 



■ Rhsetic and trias. 



- Carboniferous. 



. Upper Silurian, 



Lower silurian and 



/n/ra- Blaini, or Simla C Cambrian (?). 
slates. J 






Cambrian, 



Central gneiss of Darcha. 

Lower gneiss of Wardwan and Zans- 

kar range. 
Dhauladhar gneiss. 



ans- / 



Gneiss of WSngtu and / ^»/»*»-siln"an, but 
Chor mountain. f exact age not 

\ determined. 



For convenience and clearness, we must again make a local exception 
to our rule, and describe the formations in descending order. 

Triassic rocks of Kashmir. — As already mentioned (p. 631), the 
sedimentary series of the Zanskar basin, from the trias downwards, 
rolls over into the Kashmir basin, round the termination of the great 
gneissic mass of the Zanskar range. Although the feature is thus in 
the main a great anticlinal, the very crest of the ridge, at the Zoji-la, 
is formed of a sharp and locally inverted synclinal, in the highest rocks 
of the local series. It was this inversion that led Dr. Stoliczka to suppose 
that the sub-schistose sandstones at the Zoji-la were carboniferous, from 

1 Eec, G. S. L, XI, p. 63. 



660 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVII. 

their apparently miderlyiiig triassic strata. Mr. Lydekker found the 
same rocks to the south-east near Amrnath and Panjtarni to be dis- 
tinctly folded in a trough of the dolomitic limestone. The age of these 
limestones is well fixed north of the Zoji-la. Dr. Stoliczka observed a 
great thickness of light-blue limestone forming the banks of the Dras 
river, and containing numerous small bivalves, like Megalodon colufnbella, 
Homes, from the upper trias of the Alps. It is overlaid to the south 
by a darker dolomitic limestone, apparently identical with the Para lime- 
stone of Northern Zanskar. South of the Zoji-la, Dr. Stoliczka found 
Ammonites gerardi in the limestones and carbonaceous slates near the 
camp Thajwaz in the Sind valley, proving them to belong to the 
Lilang group of Zanskar.-^ There would seem, however, to be gi-eat 
variability in the composition of these groups. Mr. Lydekker [l. c, p. 45) 
identifies the white dolomite of Amrnath with the Pdra limestone 
north of the Zoji-la; and in the Chandanwari section {I.e., p. 44), 
at the head of the Lidar valley, a set of slates and sandstones separates 
these white dolomites from the dark-blue carboniferous limestone, and 
is interstratified with both of them. This apparent transition between 
carboniferous and uppermost triassic strata calls particularly for further 
examination. Triassic rock has as yet only been observed in one other 
locality in the area under notice; it is in the Kashmir valley, in 
the promontory south of the Manasbal lake, where the white dolomite 
overlies the compact blue carboniferous limestone. 

Oarboniferous rocks of Kashmir. — With the exception of the 
very local occurrence of the triassic limestone on the north side of Kash- 
mir, as already mentioned, only palaeozoic and gneissie rocks are found 
throughout the rest of the area under notice, in which condition this 
ground exhibits a partial affinity with the Lower Himalayan area. Of the 
palaeozoics, again, only the upper members have been fully recognised by 
fossil evidence ; and in this way they have scarcely been traced beyond 
the limits of Kashmir, where they are almost confined to the north side 
of the valley. We must notice these rocks first, as it is through com- 
parison with them that the position of other groups has been provision- 
ally determined. 

The identification of carboniferous rocks in Kashmir is of old stand- 
ing. Fossils are locally abundant, but no large collection of them 
has been made. The following species of carboniferous BracJiiopqda 
were described by Mr. Davidson^ from specimens collected by Captain 

' Mem. G. S. I., V, p. 349. 

2 Q. J. G. S., XXII, 1866, p. 39. 



Extra-Peninaular.] KASHMIR AREA. 661 

Godwin- Austen near the villages of Khunmu, Barus, and Zew£n, in the 
Vihi valley, immediately to the east of Srinagar : — 

Terehratula sacculus. 
Athyris mUilita, PI. I, fig. 4. 
Spirifera kdlhrnii, PI. I, fig. 1. 



Sp. vihiana. 

Sp. Jcashmiriensis. 

Sp. moosakhailensis, PI. I, fig. 2. 

Sp. harusiensis. 

Mhynconella barumensis. 

Sh. kashmiriensis. 



SVreptorhynchus crenistria, PI. I, fig. 7. 

Produotus semireticulatus, PI. I, fig. 8. 

Pr. scabriculus. 

Pr. humboldtii. 

Pr. spinulosus. 

Pr. IcBvis. ' 

Chonetes Icevis. 

Ch.? austeniana. 

Discina kashmiriensis. 



Two measured sections from this neighbourhood hy Captain Godwin- 
Austen ^ will shew the local composition of the series. The fossils were 
principally found near the very base of the formation ; and it would 
seem from his figured sections that the bottom quartzite is unconform- 
able to the underlying hornblende slates; but as no statement is 
made to that efEect^ the point is doubtful. The appearance is probably 
due to the locally unstratified condition of the trappean upper silurian 
rocks. *- 

Section along a spur from Wastertodn, between Pdrus and Reshpur. 

Feet. 
8. Hard compact limestone, weathering light ochre 100 

1. Hard compact limestone, no fossils 410 

6. Grey limestone, weathering light-brown 200 

5. Micaceons sandy limestone ; Spirifera rajah, and Produotus semireticu- 

latus ............. 60 

4. Slaty shale 15 

3. Shaly limestone, weathering green, full of fossils 40 

2. Hard fossiliferous limestone 80 

1. White quartz rock 15 

Hornblende slate 

920 

Section at the foot of a ridge from, Zehanwdn. 

Feet. 

7. Hard compact crystalline limestone, of a dark blue-grey, interstratified 

with grey shales, which weather to a green tint, very fossiliferous . 20 

6. Calcareous shales, very fossiliferous 30 

5. Alternations of shaly slate and sand , '. 30 

4. Sandstone containing water-worn pebbles 2 

3. A bed of water-worn pebbles and shingle, of quartz and homblendic rock, 

imbedded in a sandy crumbling matrix 4 

2. Altered sandstone and shaly beds, very hard and splintery ... 15 
1. White flinty quai-tzite 12 

Hornblendic slaty rock 



" Q. J. G. S., XXII, 1866, p. 29. 



662 GEOLOGY OF INDIA-CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. SXTI 

Owing to the excessive disturbance all these strata have undergone 
and the deep erosion of the ground^ the upper members of liie stratifiec 
series are only found in isolated masses along the inner edge of th( 
valley, and in the hills to the north. No carboniferous rocks have beei 
observed on the south-west side of the valley, on the flanks of the Pi 
Panjdl ; but at the south-east end of the valley, south of Sbahabad, thi 
rocks of the Pir are in faulted contact with the mass of carboniferou 
limestone, which here closes the valley, and stretches for a few mile 
beyond the watershed at the Marbal pass. The general structure is tha 
of a broad complex synclinal fold, the axis rising to the south-east. A 
the north-west end of the valley also, at Trigamma, the carboniferou 
limestone is in force, occupying a synclinal fold in the slates. Nea 
Shahabad Mr. Lydekker describes the sequence as consisting of dark 
brown sandy shales, gradually becoming calcareous, and so passing u] 
into the characteristic dark-blue carboniferous limestone, which is over 
laid by yellowish and whitish sandstones. These highest beds are oftei 
replaced by banded limestone, and may represent the trias. 

From the examination of many sections, Mr. ,iiydekker concludec 
that the carboniferous rocks are normally in conformable sequence wdtl 
the underlying slate series. This relation is seen in the section neai 
Eishmakam, in the Lidar valley, north of Islamabad, where the following 
beds are in regular succession. No. 1 being silurian and Nos. 2, 3, and ■; 
carboniferous : — 

4. Slates and sandstones with Fenestella, ProdMclus, and Spirifera. 
3. Sandstones and dark -blue limestones, witli corals and crinoids. 
2. White and Hue sandstones. 
1. Blue or green slates and amygdaloids. 

The proportion of limestone in the cai-boniferous series is very variabli 
in different sections. 

Silurian rocks of Kashmir.— It is upon the strength of thi 
close connection with the carboniferous strata that the underlying seriei 
is taken to be silurian ; for not a single fossil has been found in thes( 
rocks throughout the whole of this region. They are, however, continu 
ous with rocks in corresponding relations to the carboniferous grouj 
in Zansk&,r, where silurian fossils do occur (p. 63§), though far lea 
abundantly than farther east in the Hundes basin (p. 649). The absent 
of organic remains is only very partially accounted for by the greatei 
metamorphism of the strata in the north-western area. 

Another cause of doubt regarding the correlation of the differen 
formations in Kashmir has been the extensive occurrence of trappeai 
rocks, and the uncertainty as to their relation to the sedimentary series 



Extra-Peninsular.] KASHMIR AREA. 663 

and, therefore, as to their age. All the rocks have been so contorted, that 
special examination was needed to distinguish effects cif irruption from 
those resulting from a disturbance common to all, the local appearances 
being superficially very deceptive : thus north-east of Manasbal there 
is a dome-shaped mass of amorphous greenstone, with the carboniferous 
limestone dipping from it on three sides. Such appearances are very 
suggestive of intrusion ; and so the prevailing opinion has been, that the 
trap of Kashmir and the Pir Panjal is of later date than all the contigu- 
ous formations. Mr. Lydekker, however, comes to the conclusion that 
the trap is altogether pre-carboniferous, no single instance of true 
intrusion having been found ; and the general distribution of the rock 
clearly points to its cotemporaneity with the upper silurian strata.' In 
Northern Kashmir, especially about Srinagar, Manasbal, and the Walar 
lake, the massive amorphous forms of greenstone are predominant ; but 
even with these there are associated stratified earthy and amygda- 
loidal beds, identical with those which all through the Pir Panjdl and 
elsewhere are characteristic of the upper zone of the slate series. To a 
great extent these beds are of a mixed nature, containing much silicious 
detrital matter with the trappean ingredient, and their trappoid character 
is further to some extent due to partial metamorphism ; but there can 
scarcely be a doubt that the peculiar facies of the upper silurian zone 
of this region (and it seems to extend also to the western part of the 
Zansk^r area) is due to cotemporaneous eruptive action. The following 
general sequence of the strata coniposing the lower palaeozoic rocks, form- 
ing the slate series, is taken by Mr. Lydekker (I. c, p. 39) from the 
section of the Pir Panjal pass : — 

5. Greenish slates, sandstones and amygdaloidal rooks. 

4. Black and green slates with brown sandstone conglomerate, containing pebbles 

of quartzite and slate. 
3. Whitish quartzites and sandstones. 
2. Black slates containing pebbles of gneiss and quartzite. 
1. Granitoid gneiss, with occasional bands of slate and quartzite. 

The relation of tbe palaeozoic slates to the crystalline series is a point 
of special interest and difficulty, as has been shewn in other cases (p. 640) . 
In the region under notice Mr. Lydekker has found this relation to be one 
of inseparable association, as is indicated in No. 1 of the preceding section 
of the rocks in the Pir Panjal. The same condition obtains on the north- 
east with reference to the gneissic mass of the Zanskdr range ; as is well 

1 Dr. Verchere (J. A. S. B., XXXV, 1867, p. 86) had announced the same conclusion j but 
this writer's views are not always supported by sufficient evidence to be accepted. 



664 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [ Chap. XXVII, 

seen in passing from the south-east end of Kashmir, by the Margan pass, to 
the Wardwan, and down the latter valley to Kishtwar. It is not merely 
a case of gradual transition of metamorphism, but also complete associa- 
tion by interstratification of slaty, and gneissic rocks, and their equal 
participation in the results of disturbance. Some of the bands of gneiss 
thus intercalated with the slates are quite massive and granitoid, both 
fine-grained and porphyritic. The contrast is altogether most striking 
between this mode of relation and that of the slates to the central gneiss 
of the Lower Himalayan region j and the inference is, that the gneiss of 
Zdnskar is to a great, but unknown, extent made up of converted palseo- 
zoic strata. Abrupt contact is here also found between the two types 
of rock ; but they are more or less distinctly due to dislocations, as at 
Krur in the lower Wardwan valley. 

The Pangi basin. — Below Kilar, the gneissic rocks of the Zanskar 
ridge pass well to the south of the Chinab ; and it is not known whether 
they are not there confluent with the gneiss of the Pir Panjal chain, 
thus separating the slates of Pangi from those of Kashmir. There 
can scarcely be a doubt that these two belong to the same lower palaeozoic 
series; but there are some noteworthy difEerenees of composition. The 
trappoid rocks have not been observed in Pangi ; it may be because the 
eruptive action did not extend so far, that zone being represented by 
ordinary slates ; or, only the lower members of the series may be repre- 
sented in Pangi. Bands of limestone are not very rare in the Pangi 
slates, although entirely wanting in the Kashmir area. The quasi- 
erratic boulders in the black slates of Pangi, as already mentioned (p. 632), 
are very peculiar ; although these slates are probably the local representa- 
tives of the zone No. 2 of the Pir Panjdl section in the list already 
given. The relation of the slates to the gneiss in Pangi is not exclusive- 
ly like that described in the Wardwan valley : in introducing the Pangi 
slates, Mr. Lydekker {I. c, p. 54) describes a very thick bWd of granit- 
oid gneiss as conformably overlaid by a newer series of bluish slates 
and sandstones, which contain no truly metamorphic rock. At the east 
end of the basin, the junction of the slates \^ith the gneiss of the 
Kot^ng pass would seem to be of the same abrupt kind. Yet on a 
parallel section to that at Kilar, about Tingrat, in the valley north of 
. Triloknath, there is an alternating passage from the slates to the gneiss. 
It is by the close comparison and connected survey of such contrasting 
sections, that we may ultimately expect to separate the two very distinct 
gneissic formations, which we are almost forced to think must be present 
in this ground (p. 630): the central gneiss, of long pre-silurian meta- 
morphism; and a lower Silurian or Cambrian gneiss, made out of, and 



Extra-Peninsular. J the fir panjal chain. " 665 

associated with, deposits that have undergone Kttle or no change in 
adjoining areas. 

The Pir Panjal chain. — The extension already given (p. 631) to this 
name of the range outside (south-west of) Kashmir, to include the ridges 
in approximate continuation of it to the south-east, although separated 
by the gorge of the Chinab below Kishtwar, may be upheld geographi- 
cally ; but geologically (as based upon structural equivalence) it is still 
provisional, for we have no observation of these hills south of the upper 
Chinab valley. So far as we know, the slates of Pangi may be con- 
tinuous with those of the upper Ravi valley, without any dividing 
gneissic axis. In this south-eastern ground, too, the range in question 
is not the outermost range of the older formations, for the Dhauladhdr 
lies to the south of it ; and it may be to this condition, of an outside 
position in the mountain system, that is due the peculiar structural 
character noticed in the Pir Panjal and Dhauladhar ranges— that of a 
great folded flexure, with inversion on the outer side. This peculiarity 
is, perhaps, opposed to the connexion of this ridge with the central 
region, of which it is thus here a specially marked marginal feature. Its 
affinities are, however, much closer with the area of normal Himalayan 
disturbance, than with the Lower Himalayas, where the stracture is quite 
different (p. 602). 

Mr.,Lydekker has clearly shewn this structural character at the 
Banihal pass,^ and at the Pir Panjal pass^ ; and the same feature had 
previously been noticed in the Dhauladhar.^ In proceeding from Kash- 
mir across the Pir Panjal pass, the sequence of rocks given above (p. 663) 
is observed in descending order, the beds dipping towards the valley. 
The dip increases steadily, and becomes vertical in the gneiss-; then the 
black slates (No. 3), with pebbles of gneiss, come in again, but with a 
steep underlie towards the gneiss ; and they are succeeded at the crest of 
the pass by the white quartzites, having the same inward dip ; under 
these again come the greenish trappean beds of zone No. 4 ; the whole 
series many thousand feet in thickness, being clearly inverted on the 
south side of the axis. 

On the outer margin of the range, in the inverted series, higher 
(apparently lower) beds are preserved than on the side next the valley. 
They consist principally of limestone, with a variable proportion of 
associated black and greenish shales and pale sandstones. From their 
conformable and transitional relation to the trappean upper silurian zone, 

1 Eec. G. S. I„ IX, p. 161, 18V6. 

2 Rec. G. S. I., XI, p. 39, 1878. 

3 Mem. G. S. I., Ill, Pt, 2, p. 63, 1864. 



666 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS, [ffliap. XXVII. 

Mr. Lydekker concludes that they represent the similar, but fossili- 
ferouSj rocks in a like position in Kashmir, and are therefore car- 
boniferous. This band oB limestone is more or less continuous at the 
edge of the higher mountains, from the Pir Panjal to the Lower Hima- 
layan area ; and it is upon this remote and slender connexion that the 
Kr61 limestone, capping the slate series in the Simla region, is taken to 
be carboniferous. The identification of the great limestone, forming the 
large inliers of the Sub-Himalayan zone (p. 562), from 4 to 12 miles 
distant from the base of the Pir Panjdl, as carboniferous, is perhaps 
equally open to verification. If all the limestone of those inliers is 
carboniferous, the deposits of that age increased enormously in thick- 
ness within a very short distance ; but this inequality of deposition 
has been very generally observed in the carboniferous rocks of the 
Himalayas. 

The fact that the gneiss partakes so regularly in the disturbance of 
the slates, would seem necessarily to imply original complete conformity 
of stratification between them ; and therefore the probability is, that all 
the metamorphies of the Pir Panjal belong to the newer gneiss. It 
may also be suggested that this form of disturbance, a great regular 
folded flexure, could hardly have occurred here had there been a primitive 
ridge of old gneiss occupying the position of the present axis ; from 
which we may suppose, that if the central gneiss is represented here, its 
elevation is altogether due to post-silurian disturbance. 

There are, however, certain irregularities in the feature as a whole, 
that necessitate some modification of the view of it as a single and 
simple anticlinal flexure. The outcrop of the core of gneiss is not 
continuous ; nor does it observe a strictly uniform direction throughout. 
These irregularities, moreover, are not superficial ; thus, in the deep 
gorge cut by the Jhelum through the range, between Baramula and 
Uri, the gneiss does not appear at all ; and the slates, in som6 manner 
not yet worked out, wrap round the termination of the gneissic mass of 
the ridge on either side. The abruptness of these breaks has suggested 
the possibility of their connexion with primitive ridges of old gneiss ; 
but this supposition is so difiicult to reconcile with the general symmetry 
of contortion, that we must seek for some other explanation. Since the 
main feature is not a simple flexure, but includes also some minor fold- 
ings of the strata, as is observed in both the Banihal and Pir Panjal 
sections, it is natural to suppose that at different points of this range 
the maximum effect took place along different minor axes of initial 
contortion, resulting, of course, in ultimate discontinuity, and partial 
discordance between these elements of the great flexure. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] post-tertiary and recent formations. 667 

One-sidedness of mountain structure. — It has teen abeady 
remarked (p. 559) that the structural form of the Pir Panjal and Dhau- 
ladha.r ranges corresponds- with that of the ridges of the adjoining Sub- 
Himalayan rocks. It may perhaps also be inferred that a similar 
structure prevails in the Zanskar range, but nothing very like it has 
been described in the interior mountains, nor yet, which is more note- 
worthy, at the northern margin of the mountain region ; the features of 
the hills on the borders of the Ydrkand plains, so far as we know them, 
bear no resemblance to those of the Southern Himalayas. This one- 
sidedness of mountain structure has been observed elsewhere, and has 
given rise to the opinion already alluded to (note, p. 529), that the source 
of disturbance was external to the mountain region.^ This notion, 
however, is decidedly obscure ; almost on a par with the original idea of 
simple upheaval, so long in favour with Alpine geologists. It seems 
more natural to look for an explanation of the dominant structural form, 
in any area of special disturbance, ^n the T-psnlfanf, f^t imdition of resistan ce 
at the time of compression. Such a local condition has been intelli- 
gibly assigned by Mr. LeConte,^ in the unsymmetrically lenticular form of 
the total sedimentary mass, from the alteration and compression of 
which a mountain range is formed, whereby excessive contortion and 
over-thrust takes place on the side^oF]TEFTnosljapii-.deQ'^^ 
tEiekness'^TTEe^deposits, whtch'would generally be the landward side. 
This explanation may be partially the correct one for the case under 
description, although there would still be some difficulty in connexion 
with the part that has been assigned to the central gneiss of the Lower 
Himalayas. But it is evident that this particular condition is only one in 
the many possible combinations by which the position of least resistance 
under compression may be determined. 

Post-tertiary and recent formations. — It has been already ex- 
plained (p. 371) how difficult it is to draw a distinct line between tertiaiy 
and post-tertiary formations in Peninsular India. Indeed, it is sufficiently 
evident from general considerations that, unless upon the assumption 
of a world-wide or half world-wide coincidence of phenomena, there 

1 Suess : Die Entstehvmg der Alpen. An abstract of this work is given in SUliman's 
Journal, 1875, p. 446. 

2 American Journal of Science and Arts, August 1878, and elsewhere. 

Mr. J. LeConte (and he is not singular in this) seems to have overlooked the fact that a 
very large and vital a part of his theory is contained in views admirably expounded long 
ago ; it is by no means evident in what particulars, as a " formal theory," the " geanticline " 
differs from De Beaumont's hossellemerd, or the " mashing " from the iorasement of the same 
author; or how the part played by "sedimentation" in the origin of mountains difEers from 
that assigned to it by Herschel and Babbage. The little progress geologists have made has 
been in applying the ideas of these physicists to actual cases of mountain-structure. 



(568 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVII. 

can be little or no correspondence between the great breaks in the 
sequence o£ geological formations in distant parts of the earth^'s surface; 
and the chief interest of the , case under immediate notice is, that the 
traces of such a half world-wide event have been observed in the Hima- 
layas. On the page above referred to it was stated that the limit be- 
tween tertiary and post-tertiary formations in Europe is most con- 
veniently marked by the glacial epoch ; and on the following page it 
was shewn that India had been affected by the glacial period, and that 
Himalayan glaciers were formerly more extensive than they now are. 
That evidence need not be quoted again here; we would only draw 
attention to the fixing of the date and the cause of that former exten- 
sion, as necessary features of the important question at issue — the validity 
and force of the words " epoch " and " period, " as applied (without local 
affix') to glacial action; for, as so used now, they imply a half world-wide, 
if not a world-wide, coincidence of the phenomena ; and the importance 
of verifying this application is very gi-eat. Even if one such event 
could be established, it would be of immense service, in giving a rough 
general datum line in past time from which to correlate the progress of 
geological changes ; for at present there is no greater obstacle to exact 
speculation in geology than the utter uncertainty between local and true 
time, as indicated by the palseontological clock.' It will require a great 
accumulation of connected observations to establish the cotemporane- 
ous glaciation of even a hemisphere of the earth — to shew, for instance, 
that the facts appealed to are not successive, and due to a progressive 
change, more or less irregular, such as would be caused by a shifting of 
the earth's axis, although the possibility of this particular occurrence has 
lately been denied by competent physicists. In such a case the expres- 
sion " glacial epoch ■'■' would have little more exact significance than have 
now the various palseontological periods. 

Sub-Himalayan high-level gravels. — The evidence for a strati- 
graphical break in the formations of India, eqiiivalent to the pliocene- 
pleistocene change in Europe, is not found most distinct in the same 
localities as the best evidence for an extension of glacial action. The 
latter naturally occurs in the higher ground, towards the region of existing 
glaciers ; the best instances on record being those in Sikkim {mpra, p. 373) 
and Kashmir.^ The former, as naturally, is found in connexion with 
the known tertiary deposits in the Sub-Himalayan zone. Nothing 
could be more sharply defined than the separation of the high-level 

1 e. g. Dr. John Eyans' ptjeetions to Professor Haughton's considerations on Changes 
of Climate in past times. Presidential Address (Geological Section), British Association, 
1878, "Nature," Vol. XVIII, p. 418. 

2 Drew : Jummoo and Kashmir Territories, p. 219. 



Extra-Peninsular.] GLACIAL EVIDENCE IN TIBET. 

gravels along the base of the North- Western Himalayas, from all recent 
deposits on the one hand, and on the other from the latest rocks of the 
tertiary series — the topmost Siwaliks. In the section already so much 
quoted of the Sutlej gorge ahove the Bubhor (p. 551), those gravels 
are found capping the low bUls, at an elevation of 500 to 600 feet over 
the river, and resting undisturbed on the edges of vertical Siwalik 
conglomerates. The same may be seen in many other places, as in the 
river section of the Rotas ridge, west of Jhelum ; and it will scarcely 
be disputed that, from stratigraphical analogy, they may take provisional 
rank as early pleistocene. In the places indicated they are made up of 
thoroughly water- worn torrential debris, but in certain positions, as in 
Kangra, they have a character that seems to demand the aid of glacial con- 
ditions ; and this only occurs when there is an obvious source of such an 
influence. The whole Kangra valley and many other ddns were once more 
or less filled with these deposits. The boulder gravel caps ridges' above 
Kangra fort, on the southern side of the valley ; and all about, especially 
on the inner side of the valley, huge blocks of gneiss are scattered. These 
blocks are not traceable to distinct moraines ; but they often occur in 
sheltered positions, to the side of the actual gorges, where they must have 
arrived by flotation, or else have fallen over the present flanking ridges 
when these were smothered in a great fan-talus of diluvium from the 
main ridge of the Dhauladhar close by. No scratching or polishing has 
been found either on the blocks, or on the rocks in situ ; but all the 
facts very strongly suggest that glacial conditions must have aided in 
producing such results. The elevation of this sub-glacial deposit in 
Kangra is between 2,000 and 3,000 feet; the crest of the Dhauladhar, 
from 6 to 8 miles distant, rising to 14,000 and 16,000 feet. 

Glacial evidence in Tibet. — The effects, real or imputed, of glacial 
action in the Alps and elsewhere are so prodigious, that, after accepting 
some clear cases, such as those quoted in Sikkim and Kashmir, of old 
moraines at elevations of only 6,000 to 8,000 feet, one is surprised to 
find that traces of glaciation are not more conspicuous elsewhere in the 
Himalayas at vastly greater elevations, in Tibet. At least, but slight 
mention is made of those traces by very competent observers. Dr. Sto- 
liczka may be said to have ignored the subject ; Colonel Godwin- Austen, 
who surveyed the highest regions of Western Tibet, and who from the 
first paid attention to geological features, only makes casual mention of 
glacial extension, generally in its least certain form — that of presumed 
erratics • and Mr. Drew, who enjoyed such exceptional opportunities of 
studyino" the ground, and who paid particular attention to this subject, 
as is proved by his admirable account of the superficial deposits of Western 



670 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVIL 

Tibetji makes less distinct mention of glacier extension here than at 
much lower elevations to the south. He does, indeed, describe deposits 
of the glacial period, but as being scarcely different from the actual 
torrential deposits : and to the other marks of glacier-action there is very 
little allusion. The spurs at the edge of the Deosai plain are said to shew 
signs of ice-moulding,^ and a few instances -of contorted alluvium are 
attributed to the presence of glaciers at lower elevations than at present j 
but Mr. Drew's chief argument, so far as his work has proceeded, for the 
influence of the glacial period in Tibet is the indirect one — ^to account for 
the excess of disintegrating action, whereby the river valleys became choked 
with diluvial matter. It is even remarked {I. c, p. 470) : " Whether in that 
period there was any variation in the transporting power of the streams, 
I do not at present see my way to determine ; the material is, as a whole, of 
the size that is even now brought down by the streams, taking the spring 
and occasional floods into account.'' What these occasional floods may • 
do has been already stated (p. 516). On the whole, the published de- 
scriptions of Tibetan regions are not what might be expected, had the 
ground been deeply covered by ice, as would surely have been the case at a 
time when on the southern side glaciers reached so low as 7,000 feet. But 
these doubts are only conjectural, and intended to elicit further research. 

The Hundes lake-basin. — The immense extent of what we may 
conveniently (until we know more about them) call " post- Himalayan 
deposits " in Tibet has already been indicated in our remarks on the plain 
of Hundes (pp. 646-51); where some doubt was hazarded as to whether 
the remains of the extinct mammalia were really derived from the undis- 
turbed deposits of that high-level basin. If the " glacial epoch " test 
might be applied here, it would confirm the supposed Siwalik age of 
these beds j for General Richard Strachey mentions the existence of old 
moraines upon them.^ From an observation recorded by Captain Henry 
Strachey * it would seem that they are truly lacustrine : he speaks of the 
ground by the name " Guffe," and says that the deposits " appear to 
consist of more finely comminuted material in their central part, where 
furthest distant from the mountains, the great ravines there being 
flanked by clifEs half a mile high, which exhibit throughout their thick- 

' Drew: "AHuvial and Lacustrine Deposits and Glacial Records of the Upper Indus 
Basin," Q. J. G. S., 1873, XXIX, p. 441 ; and " Jummoo and Kashmir Territories," 1875. 

The paper in the Quarterly Joui-nal is headed Part I, and only treats in detail of the 
alluvial deposits ; it is understood that the " Glacial Records " were to have been described in 
the second portion of the paper, which has not yet been published, 

2 Q. J. G. S., XXIX, p. 466. 

3 Q. J. G. S., VII, p. 310. 

" "Physical Geography of Western Tibet," Jour. Eoy. Geogr. Soc, 1858, XXIII, p. 19. 



Extra-Peninsular.] LAKE BASINS. 671 

ness a fine homogeneous clay with little gravel in it. The stratification 
of the alluvium seems to be horizontal in all cases, or at most very 
slightly sloped from the mountain foot to the valley middle, in accord- 
ance with the existing directions of the drainage. J have once or 
twice seen small faults, where some of the strata had become canted 
from the horizontal for a few yards ; but never anything like a general 
disturbance of the original position." 

It is not known whether this great lake-basin is now a rock-basin, or 
if it ever was ; and, as we shall see, there are other larger and more lofty 
lake-areas, the origin of which is distinctly attributed to the damming up 
of the gorge of discharge. The fact that the gorge and the deposits 
themselves have been re-excavated to so great a depth, is another point 
in favour of the greater antiquity of the Hundeis deposits ; and, on the 
whole, the balance of evidence is in favour of their being of late tertiary 
(Siwalik) age. It would be a crowning proof of the fact, already sufiiciently 
established (p. 570), that the great Himalayan river-basins existed in 
Siwalik times, ^s now. A comparison of the state of these deposits 
with that of the older tertiary deposits of the Indus valley, is a further 
suggestion, that the post-Siwalik disturbance was quite a minor, or collate- 
ral, effect of that which produced the contortion of the mountains. 

Lingzhithang and Kuenlun lake-basin. — The great lake-basin 
of Lingzhithang, and the Kuenlun plains,^ are in a much newer phase of 
existence than that of Hundes, although of greater extent, and at a 
higher elevation. They stand at the main Himalayan watershed, north 
of the Indus ; and have apparently been reclaimed from the northern 
drainage area. They are now in the last stage of extinction as lakes, 
having numerous small shallow tarns and ponds of salt water still left in 
the lowest depressions. They occupy an area 100 miles long from north 
to south, with an average width of 70 miles, divided by the Lokzhung 
mountains, or what is left of them ; for the watershed in the gorges is 
only 300 feet above the southern plains, and altogether on gravel ; while 
some of the peaks range to 21,000 feet. The Lingzhithang plain, on 
the south, has an elevation of more than 17,000 feet, and the Kuenlun 
plains 16,000. The original outlet is supposed to have been at the 
north-east corner, into the eastern Karakash valley. This became 
choked by fan-deposits from the lateral gorges ; and so the lakes were 
formed, and ultimately the plains. 

Tso Morili and other basins. — Mr. Drew describes several other 
similar areas, on a smaller scale ; such as the little salt-lake plain of 

' Drew : " Jummoo aud Kashmir Tfirritorics," p. 331. 



672 GEOLOGY OP INDIA-CENTRAL HIMALAYAS, [Chap. XXVII. 

Rupshu, and the saline lakes of Pangkong and Moriri — all attributed to 
the same mode of formation. The Tso Moriri gives the most distinct 
illustration of this process j the Phirsa stream brings down to the main 
valley more debris than it can carry on, and thus has raised a dam 
across the valley. The greatest depth of the lake is 248 feet ; but the 
fan of the Phirsa apparently has that depth, besides being now, at its 
lowest point, about 100 feet higher than the lake. 

Around all these lakes and lake-plains there is clear evidence that 
the waters have fornierly stood at a much higher level. This fact 
points to a continuance of the cause which originally gave rise to 
these lakes — a progressive decrease of precipitation and increase of eva- 
poration, whereby the carrying power of the streams has become more 
and more out of proportion to the rate of disintegration of the rocks. 

Alluvial deposits of Tibet. — This clear evidence of a change that 
is still in operation is the more noteworthy, as it is apparently the 
reverse of a process which is appealed to in explanation of a more wide- 
spread development of other deposits in the valleys of Tibet. Mr. Drew 
makes a very important distinction between lake-deposits and river- 
deposits, or alluvium ; the principal criterion being the horizontality of 
the former, their lamination, and the absence of larger, current-borne 
materials : and he considers that the great accumulations of debris 
found in almost every valley, high above the present stream level, 
are river-deposits, not lacustrine ; also, that they were deposited since 
the valleys were eroded to about their present depth ; and that, therefore, 
a double change took place in the relative carrying power of the streams, 
before and after the formation of those deposits. In this case the 
changes of balance are accounted for by the abnormally increased dis- 
integrating action from the cold of the glacial period ; to which time 
these beds are thus relegated. This is, in fact, the principal evidence 
referred to for the glacial epoch in Tibet. The general description of the 
nature of these deposits is quoted above (p. 670); and it^is hardly 
what one would have expected from the supposed conditions. May not 
these old valley deposits be in part the result of temporary lakes, such 
as may at some time or other have been formed by obstructions at 
different points of the deep valleys ; and in part, deposits of the time 
when the valleys first stood at those levels ? The Indus is now laying 
out alluvial plains at several points of its valley in Ladak. 

The Kashmir basin. — None of the Tibetan lake-basins, actual or 
extinct, are known, or supposed, to be rock-basins. Indeed, they are 
plateaus as much as basins, on account of their elevation, and because 
the height and width of the lip separating them from ground at a much 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE KASHMIR BASIN. 673 

lower level are inconsiderable. This is remarkably tbe case witb the Ling- 
zhithang basin. The Kashmir valley is much more basin-shaped. Its 
length is about 84 miles, and in width it varies from 20 to 25 miles ; the 
lowest elevation is 5,200 feet, the mean for the whole valley being about 
6,000 feet, or 5,000 feet above the plains of the Punjab, from which it is 
separated by the Pir Panjal range, the lowest pass in which is 3,000 
feet over the valley. Kashmir is still in part a lake-basin, and a much 
larger part is occupied by very low alluvial land, formed by the overflow 
of the actual rivers ; the rest is occupied by flat terraces and plateaus, 
from 100 to 300 feet above the alluvial surface, and known by the ver- 
nacular name Icarewas. Both surfaces rise as they ' come within the 
influence of torrents and rain wash from the surrounding hills j in this 
way the karewa surface rises to an elevation of 7,000 feet. 

Colonel God win- Austen^ observed that at the outer edge of the valley, 
especially on the south-east, the karewa deposits have an inward dip of 
more than 20°; and he estiniated their thickness at 1,400 feet. Through- 
out this thickness the remains of recent, land and fresh-water, shells were 
repeatedly found, also plants and fish scales ; peaty layers also occur at 
several horizons, indicating a succession of land surfaces, alternating with 
the lacustrine deposits. Mr. Drew^ confirms the opinion, that the karewa 
deposits are lacustrine and not alluvial j but he seems (^. c, p. 212) to 
suggest a distinction between these disturbed beds and the material ol 
the karewas proper. Mr. Lydekker,^ however, describes a perfeetlji 
oradual transition from the disturbed blue clays and conglomerates on 
the outer side of the valley, up into the horizontal pale fine sands and 
loamy clays forming the plateaus in the centre and on the inner (north- 
east) side; but be suggests the convenient distinction of upper and 
lower karewa deposits, and considers that the former may be of uppei 
Siwalik age. 

It seems most likely that these deposits now lie in a rock-basin, th< 
tilting of the lower strata probably corresponding with a late relative 
rise on the side of the Pir Panjal. Colonel Godwin- Austen and Mr 
Drew however, only refer to possible obstructions in the Jhelum vallej 
in connexion with the old lake; although the latter observer {],. c, p. 211] 
contemplates its having risen to a level of 7,000 feet above the sea, thai 
of the highest karewa slopes, or to 1,800 feet above the present lowesi 
level of the valley. The possible source of doubt in this estimate lies ii 
the uncertain distinction between true deposits in water and the results oi 

1 Q. J. G. S., XX, p. 383. 

2 '/ Jummoo and Kashmir Territories," pp. 16l to 212. 

3 Rec. G. S. I., XI, p. 32. 



674 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Ctap. XX?II, 

rainwash. Mr. Drew decides that the ancient buildings in Kashmir are 
subsequent to any but the recent deposits of the valley ; and no relics of 
man have been found in any beds older than recent. No undoubted 
marks of glacial action have been observed in Kashmir lower than 500 
feet above the valley ; the evidence of such action at a lower level is so 
far confined to quasi-erratics in or about the gorge of the Jhelum. 

The Nepal valley. — The only other valley at all comparable with 
that of Kashmir is Nepal^ " in the Lower Himalayan area. The superfi- 
cial differences correspond with those that mark the structural characters 
of the two regions ; both are longitudinal valleys^ lying in the general 
strike of the strata ; but the clear open oval area of Kashmir approx- 
imately coincides with the elliptical synclinal depression of the calcareous 
upper palaeozoic strata, a form that is so generally marked wherever the 
Himalayan disturbance has been unobstructed. Nepal, on the contrary, 
is rather a group of confluent valleys, with high dividing spurs : in both 
directions, on the prolongation of the strike of the rocks, there is a con- 
tinuation of the special excavation of the mountain zone ; and the rocks 
of this zone being prevailingly calcareous, has suggested the conjecture 
{I. c, p. 92) that the feature is primarily due to erosion by solution ; .as 
may also be the case with Kashmir. Another cause, however, and the 
proximate one {I. c, p. 100), of the formation of a lake-basin in Nep^l, 
was probably, in part, a relative rise of the hills on the south ; for here, 
too, the bottom beds of the valley .deposits have undergone local dis- 
turbance on this side. 

These deposits correspond very closely vnth those of Kashmir. There 
is no remnant of a lake ; but the other features are alike. An extensive 
upland area, known as tdnr land, corresponds to the karewa of Kash- 
mir, and to the bhangar of the Gangetic plains, It is the surface of the 
old lake-deposits, no doubt considerably modified by waste in the central 
parts, and by rainwash accumulations near the hills. The streams flow 
at a depth of from 50 to 500 feet below this surface, according to posi- 
tion ; but here too, as in Kashmir, they are now, for the most part, subject 
to overflow, and thus form the alluvial valleys, known as kholas, the 
khadir land of the plains (p. 403). Beds of serviceable peat, much 
used for brick and lime burning, occur at various levels in the valley 
deposits ; and there is also a blue clay, extensively used for top-dressing 
the fields, and the fertihsing virtue of which seems to be due to the 
phosphate of iron (vivianite) freely scattered through it in blue specks. 
No fossil remains have, as yet, been found in any of these deposits. Any 

' Rec. G S. I., VIII, p. 93. 



Extra-Peninsidar. J DRAINAGE LINES. 675 

trace of glacial action is also wanting in Nepdl ; not even the doubtful 
erratics occur. But such could only be expected on the assumption of 
very advanced glacial conditions; for Kathmandu is only 4,509 feet high, 
and the valley is not traversed by any river from the snowy range, but 
forms the head-waters of the Baghmati ; the highest summit of the sur- 
rounding ridges being Phulchok, on the south of the valley, with an 
elevation of 9,720 feet. 

Other lakes. — There are a few insignificant lakes near the outer 
fringe of the mountains, which may be accounted for in the same way, 
or by obstruction caused by landslips. A cluster of such ponds lies about 
Naini T^l ; and some occur also in the Sub-Himalayan zone, as at 
Kundlu, on the road from Rupar to BeMspur. Mr. Mallet describes ^ 
some tiny lakes at the edge of the tertiary zone in Sikkim, as formed by 
landslips. In one, the stumps of the trees that were growing on the 
sides of the valley at the time, are still standing. 

It is apparent how very different are the lakes, actual or extinct, of 
the Himalayas from those of the Alps; the distribution of lacustrine rock- 
basins in the latter ground being as markedly marginal and transverse, 
as in the former it is internal and longitudinal. Yet it is quite possible 
that both may be principally due to a like cause — changes of level 
in the mountain mass, due to lateral pressure, which would takeeffect 
variously, according to the form and dimensions of the ground affected.^ 

Drainage lines. — In connexion with the alluvial and related de- 
posits, a few suggestions may be made regarding the drainage. Rivers are 
one of the most palpable, most widespread and ceaseless agents of 
geological changes ; and dwellers in India have before them unsurpassed 
examples of the magnitude of their operations, both for construction and 
destruction. Yet we have hardly outlived the time when much of this river- 
action was ignored. Until recently, the deposits forming the great 
Indo-Gangetie plains were regarded as of marine origin. The positive j 
constructive action of rivers is now better understood, as it is, of courscj 
more open to observation and veriflcati(?n ; and use has been made ol 
it above (p. 570) to shew the antiquity of the rivers and of the moun- 
tains (or at least of the land-surface) from which they flow. The 
negative or destructive operations are much less susceptible ' of direei 
proof ; and accordingly there are still some who believe that the greal 
fforges and valleys of the mountains are the gaping fissures of th« 
fractured earth. In detail it is perfectly easy to confute this supposition . 

' Ball: Eec. G.S. I., XI, p. 174. 
" Mem. G. S. I., XI, p. 7. 
5 Q. J. G. S., XXIV, p. 51. 



676 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVI] 

to shew in countless instances that the rocks in the deep gorges of th 
river-heds are not, and never have been, so fractured; and once the doa 
is closed against this vein of semi-occult hypothesis, a rational inter 
pretation of the forms of denudation, based upon known and measurabk 
modes of acftion, becomes possible, and a new record is opened to th 
geologist. 

The conditions of this mode of action have never been very systematic- 
ally formulated, although few natural ■ processes have to work with s( 
simple and axiomatic a rule — ^that water will not rest unsupportec 
upon a slope, and must flow by the lowest channel of escape. Th( 
uncertainties of the problem arise from unknown partial interferences 
by ground movements, with the original levels ; but of these influences 
also, evidence should be forthcoming, as is that of the changes whicl 
occur normally in any large drainage system, whereby an originallji 
transverse^ drainage may become by itself more or less converted into 
main longitudinal channels. 

This normal process of formation of river-systems is too well 
understood to need explanation here ^ ; and it is evident that abnormal 
changes of the drainage lines, by local disturbances of the ground-levels^ 
should also be traceable ; though it might not always be easy to assign the 
exact cause : for example, a small additional tilt of the outer range would 
have sent the drainage of the old Nepal lake down the longitudinal vaUey 
to the south-east ; but the gorge of the Baghmati would have remained 
as a permanent testimony of a former state of things. 

We may now indicate the application of these considerations to some 
features of the Himalayas. The case of the Chinab has been already 
noticed (p. 562), where it passes by a deep narrow gorge at Riissi through 
a lofty ridge of palaeozoic limestone, siirrounded by much softer tertiary 
rocks, the ground to the north being several thousand feet lower than 
the crest of the ridge. That gorge not being a fissure — it is tortuous, and 
the rocks are perfectly continuous "and unbroken across the river-bed at 
both ends — it must have been sickly excavated by the river ; and through- 
out that process the ground to the north must have been higher than 
the river in the gorge, and so originally higher than the present crest of 
the ridge. It cannot be asserted that the surface to the north of the 
ridge was ever higher than it is now ; for the disintegration of the tertiary 
rocks and the erosion of the gorge may have kept pace with the gradual 

> See note, p. 529. 

2 For an admirable illustration of the process referred to in the text, see a paper hy Mr. 
Jukes, " On the mode of Formation of some of the River Valleys in the south of Ireland," 
Q. J, G. S., XVIII, p. 378, 1862. 



Extra-Peninsular,] drainage lines. 67i 

elevation of tlie whole ground ; while the resistance of the older rocks 
preserved them to be elevated to their present position. Or, the ridge 
being distinctly a case of locally greater upheaval, the erosion of the 
gorge, on the primitive course of the river, must have kept pace with that 
special elevation ; for otherwise the stream would have made a new channel 
through the softer rocks. But the fact remains absolute, that .within the 
lifetime of this river, the rCcks forming the crest of this' ridge must have 
been lower than the ground to the north. 

More important, though less striking, are the cases to be found in 
the higher mountains. That all the great Himalayan rivers have their 
sources well to the nbrth of the line of greatest elevation in the main 
snowy range, has for long been a familiar fact ; and also that the three 
largest of them — the Indus, the Sutlej, and the Sangpo or Brahmaputra 
— run for great distances in longitudinal courses within the mountains, so 
as almost to draw their head-waters from a common source in a middle 
position. We have no direct observations upon the gorges of these rivers 
in the high mountains, as to whether they can be regarded as lines of fis- 
sure ; but all the collateral evidence is decidedly against that assumption. 
We may at least glance at the question as if these river-courses had been 
selected under the simple conditions that govern formation by erosion. 

We cannot here assert positively, as in the case of the Riassi gorge, 
•that the river valleys through the snowy range were originally filled by a 
mass of rock, continuous with the mountain crest on either side ; although 
the probability is that they were very approximately so ; and it is quite 
certain that prodigious erosion has taken place in those positions through 
the agency of the rivers. It can then be absolutely asserted {if we ignore 
the supposition of original fissures) that throughout that process of erosion, 
and at its origin, the whole ground to the north was higher than these 
transverse drainage lines, through what is now the main mountain range ; 
and, therefore, that this range (as such), at present the most conspicuous 
feature of the mountains, is of later date than these river channels. 

The facts further point to the probability that the present longitudi- 
nal character of the Himalayan drainage may have been more or less 
brought about from an original transverse type, by the normal process of 
change alluded to in a previous paragraph. The gorges of the greater 
torrents the Sutlej and the Indus, are much deeper than those of the 
other rivers draining through the main range ; and they may thus in 
process of time have intercepted and drawn off the original head-waters 
of the latter streams, which may have originally drained from beyond 
the basin of the sedimentary rocks. No doubt the story may have 
been otherwise, and these longitudinal rivers may have been more or less 



678 GEOtOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [ Chap. XXVII. 

aboriginal, through circumstances that are easily imagined; but the 
question is not beyond the range of evidence ; and the fact that the 
minor rivers have been able to open, or keep open, a passage through 
what is now a great mountain barrier, is suggestive that for a consider- 
able period they had a larger source of power than now. 

These considerations upon the drainage system lend some support to 
views upon the mountain structure derivable from the rocks. It has been 
suggested, with some probability, that the great sedimentary series of the 
Central Himalayas was originally laid down in a continuous basin of depo- 
sition, though now broken up into great synclinal basins of disturbance, 
represented on the north-west by the Zanskar and the K^rakoram areas ; 
also, that the '' central gneiss " of. the " main range " and the Lower 
Himalayas has always been an elevated mass relatively to that basin of 
deposition. Upon these seemingly probable inferences (or assumptions) 
the gneissic axis of Lad^k now dividing these basins of disturbance, and 
formed in whole or in great part of metamorphic palaeozoic rocks, must be 
considered as the chief and central feature of Himalayan disturbance, and 
the line upon which the greatest amount of upheaval occurred, whatever 
elevation it may at any time have attained. The drainage system, at 
least in the middle region of the mountains (Hundes), strongly suggests 
that it originated from that central • axis of disturbance as a line of 
relatively greatest elevation ; the fact that the drainage took its origin 
from a watershed somewhere to the north of the present main chain 
being a certainty, 

Two views are compatible with the facts : either the elevation of the 
whole area was equable, and the original spiU from that central crest of 
upheaval, across what is now the position of greatest elevation, has been 
maintained simply by erosion, the present less elevation of the central 
range (Ladak axis) being also a result of denudation, as may well be the 
case ; or, there has been a subsequent special elevation along this line of the 
present main Himalayan range. In this case, this special upheaval must 
have been so gradual that the erosion of the passes could keep pace with 
it ; or else these had been for the most part cut down before it set in. 
The latter supposition, of a partial later elevation of the Himalayan range 
proper, would help to account for the great lake of Hundes ; although 
the basin itself, as formed by the drainage of the Sutlej, is probably 
of older date. In the case of the* limestone ridge at Ri^ssi, we could 
shew that such a special marginal uphea,val had taken place ; for that 
limestone at no very distant period had formed part of the level bed 
of the nummulitic sea, and so, at the commencement of the disturbance, 
must have stood at a lower level than the upper tertiary rocks to the 



Extra-Peninsular.] SUMMARY. 679 

north of it. The case is different for the gneissic axis of the main 
range : we have seen reason to think that from very early times it has 
formed a relatively elevated mass ; but we have also (p. 604) shewn rea- 
son to suggest that this fact may have led to its special elevation undei 
certain conditions of disturbance by compression. 

Smnmaxy. — Beyond the fact that a very full sequence of formations 
has been palseontologically established in the Tibetan regions, there is 
. little to bring forward from this chapter as general results.^ 

(a) . The relation of the lowest strata of the slate series on the Tibetar 
side, to the gneiss of the main chain and of the Lower Himalayan ares 
(p. 628), indicates their wide separation in age, and, so far, agrees wit! 
,the more marked stratigraphical break between that same gneiss and th( 
slate series to the south of it, in the Lower Himalayan area (p. 630) 
so far confirming the probable equivalence of the two slate series, anc 
establishing this gneiss as a primitive rock in the Himalayan series 
forming here a sort of neutral block in the disturbances that have pro^ 
dticed the mountains. It might thus, too, be regarded as having formec 
here a primitive Himalayan range, from which the qnasi-erratics of th( 
Pangi slates were derived (p. 664) ; and Dr. Waagen in the paper jusi 
quoted (see note) makes use of it in this way to account for the con^ 
trasting life-conditions of the areas north and south of it, throughou' 
the palseozoie and- mesozoic epochs, thus connecting it with th( 
Peninsular rather than with the true Himalayan region. However thii 
may have been in pre-Himalayan times, considerations upon the drainag( 
system have suggested (p. 676) that since eocene, or, at earliest 
cretaceous times, it has not always been^ as now, the principal crest oj 
Himalayan elevation. 

(S) . The few instances of thinning out of deposits that occur in thf 
mesozoic formations- (p. 643), again indicate this Lower Himalayar 
area as a southern limit of deposition ; although in several of the group! 
there is no symptom of any such limitation (p; 642) . 

(c) , The extensive metamorphism of the palseozoie rocks in other posi- 
tions, especially on the central axis in Ladak, may suggest the opposit( 
condition in those positions — that a greater depression and accumulatioi 
of deposits had occurred there ; unless that metamorphic state is to b( 
accounted for by the greater compression and upheaval of which thos( 
positions have been the loci. 

1 For a partial comparative discussion of the palseontological data, we may refe: 
our readers to an essay by Dr. Waagen in the Uenkschriften d. Math.-KTatuwissen 
chaftlichen Classe A.ll. Ak. d. Wissenschaften. Wien., Vol. XXXVIII, 1878; and Rec 
G S. I. XI, Pt. 4, 1878. This general subject ia also treated of in the Introduction. 



680 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— CENTRAL HIMALAYAS. [Chap. XXVII. 

(d). In the, central, as in th^ outer Himalayas, the relations of the 
tertiary rocks are of chief importance in the history of the mountains j 
and already some interesting points have been made out. From the 
Sub-Himalayan sections it was shewn (p. 569) that an eocene land had 
existed in the Himalayan area. The distribution of the nummulitic 
deposits in Tibet, so far as accurately known, would independently sug- 
gest the same fact : they are totally cut off from connexion with all 
preceding deposits, and now lie in a compressed trough, chiefly in contact 
with the metamorphic palseozoic strata, in the very centre of Himalayan 
disturbance, where presumably the maximum of total upheaval took 
place (p. 678), i. e., including pre-tertiary with post-tertiary elevations. 
After the cretaceous epoch, a prolonged elevation set in, involving the 
corresponding denudation of the whole sedimentary series down to the 
altered paleeozoics, and the rise, on adjoining areas, of mountains having 
a height at least equalling the thickness of the mesozoic series ; 
this position of maximum upheaval, on the Ladak axis, corresponding 
with that of greatest denudation, where subsequently the eocene deposits 
were accumulated. It is, of course, clear that at the beginning of 
the tertiaries, these depressions of the Himalayan area were still, or 
again, at the sea-level. This preliminary, pre-tertiary stage of Hima- 
layan elevation, of the whole area we now speak of as Himalayan, would 
very closely correspond with the period of the Deccan trap of the 
Peninsula. 

(e) . It is a point of very great interest to ascertain how far, if at all, 
that pre-tertiary elevation of the Himalayan axis was accompanied by the 
disturbance of contortion which is the special character of the Himalayan 
mountains (p. 634) . No fact is better established -in the Sub-Himalayan 
zone, at two distinct points (p. 569), than that the special disturbance of 
the Silurian slates there is altogether ^ost-eocene, subsequent to the 
elevation of the central area, as just described. Can it have been so 
also in the central region? If so, the history of the mountains would 
be brought within a narrow compass : a broad, unbroken, pre-tertiary eleva- 
tion of the area (clause d), followed in middle tertiary times by a break-up 
and compression into flexures. If not, if the plication also of the central 
region preceded the deposition of the Indus tertiaries, a pretertiary 
act of special Himalayan disturbance would be marked off, distinct 
from that which produced such great effects on the southern border of 
the mountains. It is certain that extensive crushing and folding of 
the central region, with irruption, took place after the Indus tertiaries,; 
but there is no observation as to whether in degree, or by dis- 
cordance, it can be distinguished from an earlier contortion ; and thus it 



Extra-Peninsular. ] SUMMARY. 681 

is still an open question whether the special Himalayan disturbance is 
altogether post-eocene. 

[f). There remains the important question, how far the rising of the 
mountains to their present elevation coincided with the act, or acts, of 
plication [ecrasement, "mashing;" see note, p. 667) ? It is quite clear 
that the special Himalayan contortion had been practically completed, 
and the mountains had veiy approximately assumed their present 
sculpture, when the undisturbed strata of the Hundes basin were depo- 
sited (pp. 651-670). If those deposits are Siwalik, it would be plain 
that the very considerable contortion of the latest Siwaliks of the 
Sub-Himalayan zone took place, as has been suggested from other facts 
(p. 570), long after the principal contortion of the mountains, as a 
whole, and after they had approximately assumed their present contours. 
There remains, however, the very important question of elevation, as 
distinguished from form and structure : it is strongly' objiected, that 
the rhinoceros could not have lived at the present elevation of the 
Hundes deposits. When the possibilities of this condition are fixed, 
we may be able to record another, and perhaps the latest, event in the 
physical history of the mountains — a great continental elevation of the 
area, without sensible contortion of the rocks, and after the sculpturing 
of the mountains to very nearly their present shape had been accom- 
plished. Any clear evidence of simple and extensive upheaval, distinct 
from, and long subsequent to, the chief special plication so characteristic 
of the mountain region, would be an interesting contribution to the 
theory of mountain-formation. 



682 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Chap. XXVIII. 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 

EXTRA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

THE ASSAM EANGE. 

Area to be described — Formations present — General structure — The Sylhet trap — The 
cretaceous series : Kh&i area — Garo area — Mlkir area — The nummulitic series : 
Khasi area — G4ro area — Eastern extension of the nummulitics — The upper 
tertiaries — The Naga coal-fields. 

Area to be described. — ^The ground to be described in this 
chapter is a kind of residual area, for which even a name has to be in- 
vented. Assam, as known in geography and in the Anglo-Indian verna- 
cular, is the valley of the Brahmaputra, from the Brahmakhund to 
Dhubri, a direct distance of 420 miles ; and this has been already de- 
scribed in the chapter on post- tertiary deposits (p. 405). The northern 
border of the valley has also been described in the Himalayan chapters 
(pp. 545, 618). There remain the hills bounding the valley continuously 
on the south, and now included in the province of Assam, recently 
formed into a local government, under a Chief Commissioner. The close 
conuection between the hill tracts and the Assam valley justifies us in 
speaking of these hills collectively as the Assam Range, in order to 
use one general term instead of the five or six names now applied to 
different portions of the hill country, as was explained on page 27. 
This confusion of names is, however, to a great extent founded on the 
undecided or contrasting features of the ground, as may be appre- 
hended from the statement that more than half of this range has 
already been described as structurally belonging to the peninsular area,* 

The hills formed of these most ancient rocks, and occupied by the 
Garo, Khasiy Jaintia, and Mikir tribes, are for the most part low and 
very irregular on the north side, with numerous outliers in the Lower 
Assam valley, even close up to the Himalayan border (p. 522). On 

• For the little we know regarding the gneiss forming the great mass of the hills, ex- 
tending for 250 miles, between the Dhansiri and the Lower Brahmaputra, we must refer 
the rea'der to page 26 ; and the transition rocks associated with the metamorphics are 
noticed at page 40. 



Extra-Peninsular.] area to be described. 683 

the south and south-east the metamorphics are everywhere overlapped by 
very much newer strata, upper secondary and tertiary, which in this 
position are still undisturbed ; and so form plateaus between the deep river 
gorges, with a high scarped face along a regular line to the south. To 
the south of this line, the same neozoic strata are greatly disturbed ; and 
consequently form hills of very different outline from that of the ad- 
joining table-lands. This remarkable feature is badly seen in the middle 
region, that of the Khasi and Jaintia hills^ where thg alluvial plains of 
Sylhet reach nearly to the base of the plateau, with only. a very narrow 
intervening outcrop of the disturbed rocks. To the west, in the G^ro, 
country, the fringing zone of low hills is somewhat broader, between the 
plains in Mymensingh and the Crystalline rocks of the Tura ridge. To 
the east of Jaintia a complete change takes place rapidly in the relative 
magnitudes of these contrasting features ; the dividing line curves 
gradually to the north-east, so as to emerge in the Upper Assam valley, 
near Golaghdt, on the Dhansiri ; while the formations in the zone of dis- 
turbance expand enormously in the Naga country, and rise into a range 
of hills that quite overlooks the crystalline area. In North Cachar this is 
known as the Barail range,- and its prolongation to the north-east, 
separating Upper Assam from Manipur and Burma, is called the Patkai 
range. It is confluent with, and a member of, the Indo-Burmese 
mountain-system, of which the Barail-Patkai range may be considered 
a border zone, near the original margin of the deposits which principally 
constitute that region of special disturbance. 

It is thus plain that the Assam Range is made up of two very distinct 
portions. Besides its strong petrological resemblance, the characters 
sustained by the gneissic mass, as an area at least partially, reserved 
from deposition, and as a neutral block of ground, unaffected by the dis- 
turbances that have operated so powerfully in adjoining areas, mark it 
clearly for affiliation to Peninsular India. For these reasons it has been 
described in that connexion, and distinguished from the adjoining 
hills under the title .of the Shillong plateau. ^ Thus only the newer 
formations of the range remain to be noticed. The description must be 
given in the same disjointed manner as for the Himalayan area, because 
our information ^ is equally fragmentary in the present ease. 

1 Mem. G. S. I., IV, p. (42?). 

2 The following papers refer to the ground under description : — 

Oldham : Mem. 6. S. I., I, p. 99. 

Medlicott : Mem. G. S. I., IV, p. (387) ; VII, p. (151) ; Rec. G. S. I., VII, p. 58. 

Mallet : Mem. G. S. I., XII, Pt. 2. 

Godwin-Austen : J. A. S. B., XXXVIII, 1869, Pt. U. p. 1, 



684. 



GEOLOGY OP INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [ Chap. XXVtiI. 



Formations present. — The rocks to be described have only been 
studied with any care in two positionSj far apart : one^ on the Kh^si hill 
section; 'at Cherra Poonjee, and one in the coal-fields of the Naga hills, in 
Upper Assam ; and although the formations in both are, presumably, on 
the same general horizon, the petrological differences are so great, that 
no exact correlation of groups can be attempted. In the for'mer ground 
the rocks are seen resting upon, and immediately contiguous with, the 
gneiss, and some very noteworthy variations of composition in the seve- 
ral groups have been observed in this position. The gneiss does not 
appear near the Naga hill coal-fields, although it may underlie the upper 
Assam valley at no great distance. The descriptions of these two areas 
will be given separately ; and it is only possible to give the most general 
designation of the formations as applicable to the whole area, in the 
f oUowing form : 

Teetiaet sbeibs. — An immense thickness of soft sandstones and clays, 
based upon a nummulitic group, in which. limestone is locally in force; 
coal also occurs. 

Ceetaceous seeies. — Sandstones and shales, with local coal basins. 

JtTEASsic (?) — ^The Sylhet trap, stratified. - 

General structure. — The leading characters to be exhibited in these 
formations are — the original termination, either abrupt or gradual, of each 
against, or upon, the old rocks of the Shillong plateau, clearly marking, 
this as the margin of a great basin of deposition ; and, the subsequent 
disturbance of the whole sedimentary series up to the edge of the crys- 
talline mass, shewing that the latter has been comparatively unaffected by 
the forces that produced so much contortion in the adjoining ground. It 
is further of interest to observe that there is a great decrease in the 
thickness of the sedimentary series from east to west — a fact supporting 
the conjecture of the original continuity of the gneissic area with 
that of the Peninsula. It is also of special interest to find a corre- 
sponding steady increase of disturbance from west to east, confirming the 
well-founded opinion of a direct causal relation between the original and 
induced structural conditions — between the amount of deposition and the 
degree of disturbance. • 

In one respect there is a noteworthy discrepancy between the relation 
of the gneissic mass and the newer stratified series, in the Assam Range 
and in the Peninsula. In the latter the fringing marine deposits every- 
where flatly overlap a very irregular surface of the gneiss : a similar relation 
is found where the strata rest upon the metamorphics of the Shillong 
plateau ; but in this Shillong ground there is a marked outer line of 
southern limitation of the older rocks, at many points of which line the 



Jiixtra-reninsuiar. J ubneral structdbe. 68f 

newer strata abut against the older, as mentioned above. It can be seen or 
the general map, and better still on the small hill-ranges map in the Intro- 
duction, that this feature would seem to belong to the Himalayan system 
being remarkably parallel to the Eastern Himalayan border in Assam ; oi 
even as if it might once have formed a continuation of the middh 
Himalayan boundary. Such a temporary connexion cannot, of course 
annul the more fundamental connexion of the crystalline rocks with thost 
of the Peninsula ; but, whatever this .seeming Himalayan, connexion maj 
mean, it will be shewn that the feature in question is not due to th( 
middle tertiary disturbance, by which the Southern Himalayan bordei 
was defined -(p. 570), or to the post-tertiary disturbance, of which th( 
Barail-Patkai range is an effect : although the exposure of the feature is 
of course, owing to the disturbance and removal of the coveriug rocks, ii 
will be shewn that this steep face of old rocks is older than the Sylhe 
trap, and that it gave its form to the feature of disturbance, instead o: 
the reverse. 

This distinctly local cause for a feature of direction having sucl 
magnitude as the Barail-Patkai range, more than 400 miles long (mea 
sured to the Brahmaputra), removes, or at least greatly reduces, anj 
difficulty that might have been preconceived regarding this range belonging 
to the Indo- Burmese, rather than to the Himalayan, system of mountains 
although for a considerable distance the two run directly at right angles t( 
each other. The Barail, with its structural continuation westward to th( 
Brahmaputra, may not be strictly a monogenetic component of th( 
meridional ranges of the adjoining area to the south ; but all the'accessoriei 
of disturbance are common to both, as formed of immediately continuoui 
formations in the same basin of deposition. The monocUnal flexure along 
the edge of the Shillong plateau may have been due to the initial act o: 
depression which culminated in the great waves of compression of th( 
Burmese mountains. These explanations are needed to remove the primi 
facie impression of the necessary distinctness of the Assam, or at leas 
the Barail-Patkai range, from those to the south, and its equally apparen 
relation to the Himalayas : though, indeed, this distinction does not impl;; 
much difference ; both systems of disturbance are so closely related in age 
the Burmese being, perhaps, somewhat the more recent. The Shillong 
plateau portion of the Assam chain stands equally aloof from botl 
areas o£ disturbance. 

With reference to the parallelism of the Barail-Patkai and the Hima 
layan ranges, we may also note the contrasting structural features : in th( 
Sub-Himalayan zone of Assam, as elsewhere, the dominant dip of the 
rocks is inwards, towards the older rocks of the mountains ; whereas th( 



JEOLOGY OP INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Chap. XXVIII. 

corresponding tertiary formations of the Barail-Patkai range^ where fully 
developed, 'dip as constantly southwards, away from the gneissic mass of 
the Shillong plateau, and towards the southern basin of disturbance. 

The Sylhet trap. — The name of the adjoining district in the plains 
to the southward has been given to this formation, because of its con- 
nexion with the area south of the metamorphic mass of the Shillong 
plateau. All the other formations to some extent overlap the edge of the 
crystalline area-; but the trap ends abruptly against a steep face of the 
gneiss. These features are beautifully exposed on the paths and in the deep 
gorges south of Cherra Poonjee. The inner boundary of the trap is so 
straight and steep, as seen crossing the separate gorges, that the pro- 
bability of a faulted junction is at once suggested. It is, however, im- 
mediately apparent that any such dislocation must be of very ancient 
standing ; for the cretaceous sandstone passes over the trap in an unbroken 
semi-arch, being horizontal on the plateau and nearly vertical at the base 
of the hills. The mode of exposure of the eruptive formation, is thus in 
more or less detached areas in the several river gorges, forming togeitTier 
an inner zone, close under the scarp of the plateau. The width of this 
band in the Tharia river below Cherra is less than two mUes ; and the 
height above the sea at which the trap occurs along the inner boundary 
with the gneiss varies between 2,000 and 3,000 feet, which may be 
taken as the minimum local thickness of the formation ; for the rivers 
here are very little above the Sylhet plain, which is nearly at the ' 
sea-level. 

This trappean formation belongs altogether to the basaltic f amilyj and 
has a strong likeness to the corresponding rocks of the Rajmahal hills 
and of the Deccan, already described. Close study might reveal distinct- 
ive characters ; but there has been neither time nor opportunity for this 
work of detail. The stratified condition is very well seen ; and earthy, 
ashy beds prevail ; but there are many flows of hard basaltic rock, both 
compact and granular, sometimes with much olivine. No dykes were 
observed in the trap, except at the junction with the gneiss, a boundary 
which would thus seem to have been to some extent a line of eruption. 
At the head of the Lian glen (south-south-east of Cherra), some dykes and 
veins, with transverse prismatic structure, traverse the bedded trap, and 
penetrate the crystallines for a short distance. The same may be seen in 
the Bogapani. It is, however, plain that the junction with the gneiss is 
one of original contact : this is well seen below Mamlu, south by west of 
Cherra, where some 300 feet of the topmost earthy trap beds rest on the, 
metamorphic qnartzite forming a short spur at Tarna, close to the general 
boundary. 



E^-tra-Peninsular. j THE CRETACEOUS SERIES: KHASI AREA. 687 

As no sedimentary intertrappean beds, with or without fossils, have 
been discovered in this eruptive formation, we can only guess at its age 
from its relation to the contiguous rocks. Thus it is evidently much 
older than cretaceous ; for it seems to have undergone both disturbance and 
denudation before the deposits of that period were laid down upon it. 
This is well seen in the Tharia river, where the trap-flows have a moderate 
northerly iachnation, and are thus transversely bevelled by the cretaceous 
sandstone, sloping rapidly to the south. No rock is seen below the trap, 
except the gneiss ; so there is a very wide range for conjecture as to its 
age. It probably corresponds approximately with the Jurassic ti'ap of 
the Rajmahal hills, 200 miles to the west. In any other direction its 
nearest known petrological congeners would be the sub-recent volcanic 
rocks of Burma, 

The Sylhet trap has not been observed east of the Tharia river, and 
no doubt it soon becomes concealed in that direction. It is finely seen in 
the Jadukata, the Umblai or Kanchiang of the hill people, 40 miles to the 
west of Tharia, and under very similar circumstances ; but it is not again 
exposed in the Garo hills. It would seem as if some greater elevation 
in the middle region, that of the Khasi hills, to which the trap is limited, 
had brought up this lowest formation of the extra-gneissic area in this 
position. 

The cretaceous series : Khasi area. — It is difficult to give an 
abridged account of deposits where they are subject to much change, and 
for particulars of these features we, must refer to the original descrip- 
tions.^ In the Tharia river, where the strata have a very high southerly 
dip, there are about 1,500 feet of cretaceous beds between the Sylhet 
trap and the nummulitic limestone. The bottom 200 feet, next the trap, 
are of massive, coarse, felspathie and ochrey sandstone. The only beds 
seen above this here are dark and pale grey shales, locally nodular, calca- 
reous and ferruginous, with some layers of flaky earthy limestone, and of 
fine, hard, earthy sandstone. There is a similar section on the Bogapani, 
9 miles to the west, with 43 feet of fine sandstone immediately underlying 
the nummulitic limestone, and probably representing the Cherra sand- 
stone of the plateau. On the Jadukata, 20 miles farther west, only the 
bottom sandstone is seen, but in greater force. Near the base of it here 
some Brachiopoda, EcMnodermata, and fragments of large Inocerami were 
found, and with these marine fossils numerous pieces of fossil resin, the 
same as occurs so constantly in the coal of this formation. This is the 
most westerly point at which marine (or indeed any) fossils have been 
observed in these deposits. 

1 Mem. G. S. I., I, p, 99, and VII, p (168). 



GEOLOGY OP INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Chap. XXVIII. 



In ascending to the plateau, a very marked change is observed in the 
character of the rocks ; the sandy element prevailing here as markedly as 
the earthy one did in the lower section to the south. About Mahadeo, 
on the first ledge above Tharia, a glauconitic sandstone is prominent j 
probably an expansion of the bottom sandstone already noticed. It is 
traceable at the same horizon at many points in the cliffs south of Cherra. 
Marine fossils are locally abundant in it. Above this a fine pale sand- 
stone, frequently with broken fragments of plants and also marine fossils, 
is a characteristic rock ; it is often locally calcareous in a veiy capricious 
manner. This band is well seen in the Langpar spur, above the Mahadeo 
ledge. Above this is the Cherra sandstone, a coarsish hard rock, about 
200 feet thick, which forms the edge of the main scarp, and the broad 
ledges of bare rocks at the edge of the plateau, under the nummulitic 
limestone. No fossils have been found in it, but it passes down locally 
into the lower beds, though often sharply separated from them. 

In a small collection of fossils from these rocks. Dr. Stoliczka recog- 
nised the following species. The highest fossiliferous band, about 200 
feet below the edge of the- cliff at Mausmai, a coarse sandy limestone, 
contains small LamellibrancAiata, a Cellepora, and echinoderms j a finer 
rock is principally made up of an Astrocmnia, allied to A. deeaphylla. 

From about the middle of the series, above Mahddeo, in a stream 
under Laisophlang, in a soft, ochreous, glauconitic sandstone these fossils 
were found : — 



Nautilus {? N. elegans). 
Nautilus, with a central siphon ; 

fragments. 
Ammonites planu laius. ] 
Am. dispar. 
Am. orbignyanus. 
Am. ? pacificus. 
Anisoceras indicum. 
Anis. sub-compressum. 
Baculites, near B. vagina. 
Alaria papilionacea. 
Mostellaria palliata. 
Gosavia indica. 
Gerithium inauguratum. 
Tritonidea requieniana. 
Bemifiisus cinctus. 



Phasianella. 

Turriiella. 

Euspira. 

Dentalium, 

Janira, near J.fleuriausiana. 

Exogyra mathercniana, 

Spondylus stviatus. 

Hifodiola typica. 

Cardita orbicularis. 

Cardium. 

Terebratula, near T. carnea. 

JSemiaster. 

Solaster. 



Turhinclia. 



The facies of this group rather resembles that of the Utatdr beds of 
Southern India. 

Prom the welUknown fossil locality about 2 miles from Tharia, 
on the fourth cross-cut taken by the foot-path between the zigzags 



•Extra-Peninsular. J THE CRETACEOUS SERIES : KHASI AREA. 



689 



of the roadj or the first below the Devil's Bridge, the following" were 
named : — 



Nautilus IcBvigatus. 
Saculites vagina. 
CyprcBa glohdina. 
C. pilulosa. 
Bostellaria palUata. 
Alaria tegulata. 
Alaria glandina. 
Lyria crassicostata. 
Volutilithes septemeostata. 
Tritonidea requieniana. 
Latirus reussianus. 
Fseudoliva subcostata. 
Turritella pondicherriensis. 
T. multistriata. 
JSfitreola citharina. 
Euspira lirata. 



Oyrodes pansus. 

Cfibbula granulosa. 

Nerita divaricata. 

Eupiycha larvata. 

ActcBon cureulio. 

Pecten septemplicatus, 

Janira quadricostata. 

"xryphcea vesicularis, 

Spondylus striatus. 

Pecten, near P. rugosus. 

Inooeramus. 

Shynconella compressa. 

Terebratula, sp., probably T. hiplicata 

and T. carnea. 
Ananchytes ■) several species, but distinct 
Brissus J from any described. 



Nearly all the fossils of this list occur also in the Arial6r group of 
Southern India, but there are a number of species in the Tharia beds 
which appear to be peculiar, and most of them new. It may be worth 
recording that the observer who collected these fossils considered the latter 
locahty to be lower in the series than the former, which would be 
remarkable, if true, seeing that the AriaMr group is newer than the 
Utatiir. 1 

On the plateau at Cherra Poonjee, which is only 6 miles from Tharia, 
the thickness of the cretaceous series is reduced to 600 feet, and ten miles 
farther north, about Surarim, there is only about 100 feet, and thus it 
gradually disappears altogether. Its last remnants do not occur on the 
highest ground ; but in depressions, and along the edges of the gorges, 
which had also been valleys in the cretaceous time, where the softer meta- 
morphic rocks had been eroded, the adjoining higher ground being gener- 
ally formed of the Shillong quartzite (p. 40). In this way outliers 
occur for some distance to the north, to near Moflong, 13 miles due north 
of Cherra. 

It is in these little primitive basins on the plateau that the cretaceous 
coal is found. The station of Shillong was for years supplied from a 
tiny coal-basin at Maubilarkar, between Surarim and Moflong. The 
mineral itself has a persiste^p^-^'^^^^^*'^^ throughout the whole cre- 
taceous area : it is remarkable as being less of a true coal than is 
that of the overlying nummulitie group; the texture is compact and 

> See Chapter XII. 

t1 



&20 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Chap. 1X7111. 

splintery, with smooth conehoidal fracture, and the coal giyes a dull 
woody sound when struck ; it has the additional peculiarity of containing 
numerous specks and small nests of fossil resin. The abundance of 
pyrites is a serious defect jn it as fuel. 

The top member of the series, the Cherra sandstone, seems to be .contin- 
uous throughout : it was recognised at the foot of the hills on the Boga- 
p&ni, and it covers the coal at Maubilarkar. There is more doubt as to 
the continuous identity of the bottom group. In the lower ground it is 
separated from the Cherra band by 1,000 feet of earthy strata, while to 
the north it seems to coalesce with the Cherra band. This statement 
implies that there is an apparently continuous bottom band throughout : 
in the low ground, next the Sylhet trap, the coarse bottom sand- 
stone is free from pebbles ; but as it rises on to the plateau, and over- 
lies the metamorphics, it becomes coarsely conglomeratic, made up prin- 
cipally of half -worn debris of the Shillong quartzite ; and this bo|;tom 
conglomerate is continuous from the scarp to the most northern outcrop. 
It has, however, been observed that the matrix at different levels partakes 
of the character of the corresponding horizon below Cherra; it is some- 
times glaueonitic, like the Mahadeo sandstone, and farther north it is' 
locally calcareous, like the Langpar rocks. The carbonaceous element is 
the most persistent ; traces of it occur at the base of the clifE south of 
Cherra ; and we have already mentioned the resin found mixed with 
marine fossils at the base of the series on the Jadukata. 

Cretaceous series : Garo area. — Immediately west of the Jddu- 
kata, or Umblai, in the Hd.biang Garo hills. Colonel Godwin-Austen has 
described i the cretaceous formation as made up entirely of sandstone, in 
which he could find no fossil remains, save indistinct vegetable impres- 
sions. Coal of serviceable quality and thickness was observed in many 
places ; and attention is called [1. c, p. 23) to this ground as the most 
favourable for an attempt to work the seams ; as the formation here occurs 
at the very edge of the plains, within easy reach of water carriage. 

Prom the figured sections in the paper referred to, it would appear 
that the overlap of the metamorphic rocks by the cretaceous sandstones 
is more gradual in this position than to the east or to the west. 

From about the Jddukata there is a slightly more northerly trend in 
the strike of the formations through the Garo country, and this introduces 
a considerable expansion of the low fringing hills of upper tertiary 
strata ; so that tjie line of the gneissio houudary emerges at Singmari, 
near the middle of the Assam range, /where it terminates close to the 

1 J. A. S. B., XX^VlII, Pt. 2, p. ] 



Jlxtr^-Peninsular.] CRETACEOUS SERIES: GARO AREA. 691 

left Ifank of j^^ Brahmaputra. The in|gort9.i}ce pf f}}:i4ing cpal near 
thp great river has ie,(i to the examjnatjop of the rocks in this neigh- 
bourhood. 

The whole aspect of the jSarp hills is yery (liferent from that of the 
adjoining Khasi country. |n itjie jat^r the- undulating uplands of the 
plateau are continued on the prystalline area, np]i-th of the horizontal 
sandstones ; b^t the whole of tjie Gapp country jis a maze of hil|s and 
V3lleys, with hardly any levpl groupd, and all at a much lower elevation 
than the plateau country tp the eas|;. Tfie lea^iijg feature pf the area 
is a ridge of gneiss, coinciding witl^ ibhe line already indicated as the 
southern boundary of tjie metamorphic mass. It culminates in Nok- 
rekj at an elevation of ■^,65? feet; })ut is genejally known as the Tura 
range, from tlie hea^-quarter statiojgL pf tjie G^ro Hills district. It is 
important to libtice that t);iis ridge is npt the watershed : the Sumesari 
(Soomeysurry) drains a large area to tJie nprth, passipg through the 
ridge by a deep gorge above the village of Seju. 

To some extent, at lea,st, this contrasting condition of the two areas 
dates from precretaceous times. Even in the Khasi hiUs the shallow 
basins pf the cretacepus rocks shew a connexion with drainage lines that 
have been again selected by the present streams ; but, on the whole, 
the surface of junction is more Hke a general plane pf marine, denuda- 
tion. The coal-basins of Ropgreng and Darang, on the upper Sume- 
sari, north of the Tura range, are much larger and deeper. It will be 
shewn that they have undergone some special depression in tertiary times ; 
but it is certain that they are original basins, for the cretaceous deposits 
thin out against the surrounding crystallinps, overlappiag the coal- 
seams on all sides." This more distinctly subaerial configuration of 
the crystalline surface in the Gar^p area, at a present much jlower eleva- 
tion than that surjEaee in the Khasi coun,try, is coii^rmatory of the con- 
ieeture, suggested by the position of the Sylhet trap, that the latter 
ground had undergone some ;rel^tive upheaval. 

Other more or less detached basins of crejtacepus ,d?posits occur ,tp i^e 
west of the Sumesari, in the upper valleys p;f the Kalua;nd either s^treams, 
draining from north to south of the Tura fidge. West pjE Tura the 
crystalline rocks become very much lower, sinki,ng to the level pf the 
Brahmaputra at Sipgm^ri ; and in .this ground the sandstones are con- 
tinuous across the prolongation of Ijhe ridge in many places. 

The original relations of the rocks are nowhere better seen than 
here : the spur on which the station of Tura stands, some ,2,000 feet 
below the crest of the ridge, has a midrib of gneiss, with sandstone 
on both sides, through which the streams have again excavated their 



692 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Chap. XXYHI. 

channels. There is little or no disturbance in this locality ; and it is 
plain that the ridge must have stood as it does now when these sandstones 
were laid down. Thus it would seem that, at this west end of the 
Assam range, land and fresh-water accumulations of the cretaceQus 
period had more or less enveloped the gneiss of the Shillong plateau, just 
as the Gondwana formations had covered up the corresponding rocks at 
the nearest point of the peninsular area, in the Eajmahal hills. 

The earliest notice of coal in this ground (by Mr. James Bedford, 
Revenue Surveyor, in 1842) was in very shallow basins near the villages 
of Salkura, Champagiri, and Mir^mpura, on the low gneissic plateau 
south-east of Singmari. The seams are altogether valueless, being only 
carbonaceous shale, with small strings of resinous coal. It is certain 
that, so far as the formation is exposed on the western side of the field, 
there is a very marked decrease of the coaly element, compared with what 
is seen on the Sumesari, and between that and the Umblai, as described 
by Colonel Godwin- Austen ; yet the rocks are the same throughout : , a 
pale sandstone, in which only traces of plants have been found. A white 
shale, or pipe-clay, is of more frequent occurrence in the west. The most 
hopeful point in the enquiry is, perhaps, that the rocks are much more 
disturbed and exposed in thfe east than near the Brahmaputra ; so that 
here the coal may lie concealed below the existing outcrops. In this 
connexion it is important to notice that, while in the Khasi section all 
the beds in the low ground are marine deposits, the coal being confined 
to high ground at the north margin of the formation, in the Hdbiang 
Ga.ro hills, and on the Sumesari, at and below Seju, the coal is equally 
found to the south of the general gneissic boundary, in what may be 
called the main basin of the formation. Thus there seems a fair chance 
of finding it in a Kke position in the lower valley of the Kalu river. 

Cretaceous series: Mikir area. — It is certain that the cretaceous 
rocks occupy a large fepace in the Jaintia hills, where the features of the 
Khasi area are continued for some distance ; but we have no observations 
on that ground. To the east of it the distinctive characters of the forma- 
tion become much disguised, probably through the substitution of earthy 
marine deposits for the coal-measure sandstone. The thin bands of hard 
sandstone, resting on the gneiss, at the falls of the Kopili, south of 
Nowgong, are supposed to be cretaceous ; and the sandy limestone, 
similarly resting flatly on the gneiss, at the Nambar, near Golaghat, is also 
believed to be of the same formation. In this river, a few miles west 
of Bor Patar, there is a bed of the typical cretaceous coal j and from 
the same neighbourhood in ;the Mikir hills, some white pipe-clay, just 
like that of Tura, has been sent in for inspection. Thus at its eastern 



Extra-Peninsular.] NUMMULitic SERIES: KHASI AREA. 693 

extremityj on the south-east border^ the characters of the Shillong 
gneissie area, as a very ancient land surface that has undergone little or 
no disturbanccj appear to be maintained. 

Nummulitic series : Khasi area. — The northern thinning out of 
the nummulitic series upon the gneissie plateau is not so clearly seen, at 
least in the Cherra section, as in the ease of the cretaceous rocks, because 
only remnants of the bottom bands are preserved there ; but, on the whole, 
the evidence is convincing as to the southern expansion of the marine 
deposits. The nummulitics have not been observed anywhere to rest upon 
the gneiss, so there is no proof of their having overlapped the cretaceous 
deposits ; but it is presumable that they did so, for the sequence is con- 
formable, or a,t least parallel and undisturbed, on a rising surface of the 
metamorphics ; and the nummulitics extend close up to the northern 
boundary, where the cretaceous beds are very thin, near the outcrop of the 
gneissie rocks. 

Immediately to the south-west of the station of Cherra Poonjee there 
is a small plateau of nummulitic strata. The bottom 80 feet are of 
limestone, covered by about an equal thickness of sandstone, not markedly 
different from the underlying cretaceous rock. At about 10 feet above 
the limestone there is a thick seam of bright coal, the well-known 
Cherra coal.^ The limestone rests directly upon the rough surface of the 
Cherra sandstone, without any sign of intervening denudation j and the 
bedding is parallel, having a southerly slope of 3°.' The fossils from this 
limestone were determined by Dr. Stoliczka : portions of the rock consist 
almost entirely of small specimens of Operculina canalifera, Nummulites 
luaamna, and N. ramondi, both the last species very small ; also species 
of echinoderms, fragments of oysters, Fecten, Cardium salteri, and frag- 
ments of Natica, CeritUum, Turritella, &c.^ 

1 Oldham : Mem. G. S. I., I., pp. 140 and 185. 

3 Thig little plateau at Cherra offers a remarkatte instance of a form of denudation 
that is not, perhaps, taken sufficient account of in geological explanations. The scarp is 
very regular and well defined at many points; but the upper surface of the area, about, a 
square mile in extent, is a chaos of tilted masses of the upper sandstone. This is clearly 
due to the more or less complete removal by solution of the supporting limestone. A small 
stream passes under the hill from north to south. The annual rainfall at Cherra exceeds 
500 inches. Colonel Godwin- Austen {I. c-., p. 21) has described a much larger instance of 
this form of denudation in the Giro hills, where a considerable enclosed catchment 
basin is drained underground. 

3 The fossils described from Eastern Bengal by MM. D'Archiac and Haime in their 
" "Groupe Nummulitique de I'Inde" were all from the Kh^si hills ; but their specimens were 
80 mixed, probably even including fossils from the cretaceous beds, that the value of their 
identifications is doubtful. As the authors themselves remark--" On voit qu'il y a un 
certain vague dans les rapports de plusieurs des assises que nous venons d'indiquer:" I. c, 
p. 1V7. 



694 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Chap. XXVIII. 

Close to the north of the coal hill, the nummulitic beds occur again in 
equal thicktiess, under the native town of Cherra Pobnjee. The limestone 
is not seen here ; but this may be partly due to concealment. The num- 
mulitic sandstone forms the highest giround of the plateau from Cherra 
Poonjee to beyond Surarith. Carbonaceous markings are frequent in 
it ; and at Lairangau, 4 miles north of Cherra village, there is a workable 
seam of coal. It is at about the same height over the cretaceous sandstone 
as the seam at Cherra ; but at Ld,irangau the underlying beds are all sand- 
stone and shale, except one bottom bed of limestone, resting on the Cherra 
sandstone.. In this limestone bed OpercuUna canalifera and NwmmuUtes 
lamarchi are very common; with these occiir a Trochocyathm, Stylocania 
vicary'i, EcMnolamjpas sphermdalis, a small Cardita, Pecten, Natica roualti^ 
Keilostoma marginatum, a Ziziphinus, the small Cerithium hookeri, casts 
of a large Natica, CentMum, and terebellum?- 

Under Surarim, only 1 mile from Lairangau, this bottom bed of lime- 
stone is wanting ; and the carbonaceous sandstones themselves come to an 
end in a low bluff, 3 miles farther north, near where the road bifurcates. 
These observations clearly shew the entire replacement of a thick bottom 
band of marine limestone by a coal-bearing sandstone; or the latter 
may, perhaps, be more correctly described as overlapping the former. 

The same character of the deposits is shewn by a comparison with 
the section at the foot of the hills. In the Tharia river the nummulitic 
series is as f oUows, all with a high southerly dip : — 

Feet. . 

1. Limestone, coarse, massive, Mue 200 

6. Sandstone, clear, yellowish, coarsish 100 

5. Limestone, fine, compact, blue or pink 200 

4 Sandstone, earthy, greenish, ochrey 50 

3. Limestone 50 

2. Sandstone, yellowish 100 

1. Limestone 200 

ToTAli . . 900 

In the parallel section on the Bogapiani, below Chela, in the sandstone 
just over the bottom limestone, there is a coaly layer, which may suffici- 
ently establish the identity of these two bottom bands with those on the 
plateau above, the marine bed having increased in thickness ; and this 
marine character is here strongly stamped upon the whole series. 

These nummulitic limestones form the most prominent features of 
the low hills at the foot of the scarp along the Khasi area, where they 

' These fossils were named by Dr. Stoliczka. 



Extra-Peninsular. J NUMMULITICS ■. GAro area. 695 

are in inucli greater force than elsewhere to east or west. This, as 
has ah'eady been suggested upon other grounds, may be owing to a 
greater elevation in this position, whereby a deeper zone of the basin of 
deposition has been exposed to view. Pure limestone is still the chief 
rock of the group on the eastern confines of the Garo hills, west of the 
Umblai, as described by Colonel Godwin- Austen ; although the total thick- 
ness must be much less than in the Tharia section; In the same ground 
this observer describes (/. c, pp. li and 16) local cases of denucjation- 
unconformity between the limestone and the cretaceous saiidstone. 

Nummulitic Series : Garo area.— On the Sumesari, however, 
only 12 miles farther west, a great change is observed. The whole series is 
exposed ; but it contains only one thin band of limestone, about 40 feet 
thick, resting conformably upon the cretaceous sandstoiie. Even this 
limestone is often earthy, nodular, and oehreous, with shaly partings ; th6 
purer portion being generally formed of a mass of NummuUteS granulosa, in 
various Stages of growth. A similar change occurs throughout the forma- 
tion : there are no clear sandstones ; clays and soft earthy sandstones overlie 
the limestone, and are with difiiculty distinguished frond the succeeding 
upper tertiary deposits. This new character is still more pronounced at 
the west end of the hills. The clear cretaceous sandstone is well exposed 
in the gorge of the KSlu at Dotnalgiri below Tufa ; it is covered by crum- 
bling brown clays, in which occur rusty earthy concretionary layers of 
nummulitic limestone, the oily represeutsbtive here of the pure rock of 
the Khdsi hills J and altogether the formation bete strongly resembles 
the most characteristic beds of the Subathu group in the North-West 
Hiinalayas. No coaly layer has been found in the series in the Garo area. 
The occurrence of remnants of the nummuUtic group on the creta- 
ceous sandstones of the interior basins north of the Tura range is a 
point worthy of attention. In the middle of the Uongreng basin some 
earthy nummulitic linlestOne was observed at the level of the river, the 
cretaceous rocks rising much higher against the surrounding metamorphicS. 
The outcrop is flat and covered ; but the presumption is that the local 
cretaceous group is complete th«ire> and that the actual positions are' 
mainly due to a later depression of these inner basins. There is suffi- 
cient independent proof that the crystalline rocks here were affected by 
the general disturbanee> and that the east end of the Tura range must have 
been squeezed up to a considerable extent. At both ends of the Sume- 
sari gorge, in the Darang basin on the north^ and at SejU on the south, 
the cretaceous strata rise nearly vertically agailist the gneiss, With the 
beds parallel to the contact ; while rocks of the same age occur but 
little disturbed high on the shoulders of the intervening ridge, the widtt 



696 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Cliap. XXVIIl. 

at the base being about 4 miles. That there was an original ridge of 
smaller dimensions in this position is certain ; and it seems equally so 
that the ridge underwent a subsequent special upheaval ; and the manner 
of this upheaval seems to require an actual yielding and protrusion of 
the gneissic rocks. The disturbance which took effect as a general rise 
of the Khasi area may have been concentrated here in this special crush- 
ing upwards of the east end of the Tura range. There is no trace of 
such an action at the west end, about Tura. Considering the view taken 
of the original relations of the rocks here, it is rather remarkable that the 
nummulitics have not been found anywhere in contact with the gneiss; 
but nothing like a survey of the ground has as yet been attempted. ' 

Eastern extension of the nummulitics. — Having seen the steady 
increase of purely marine deposits from west to east for 130 miles in the 
Garo and Khasi areas, it might be expected that the more pelagic forma- 
tion would be steady for some distance in the same direction, in what 
is represented, as a still-expanding series of deposits. There is no doubt 
that the total sedimentary series in the J'aga hills is much thicker than 
in the western areas; but it is almost exclusively made up of detrital 
(clastic) rocks, and it is certain that the increase takes place largely in the 
upper tertiary formations : the part taken by the lower tertiary (nummu- 
litic) formation in the Naga hills is not known, and its extension in that 
direction on the map, to include the Upper Assam coal-measures, is still 
conjectural. The nummulitics of the Khdsi area no doubt continue for 
some distance into the JaintiA country ; but their mode of change or of 
extinction eastwards has not been traced out. Already on the track 
between Nowgong and Cachar they are so concealed or altered from 
their famiHar aspect in the Khasi section, as to have escaped the passing 
notice of an observer of some experience ; and the more detailed examin- 
ation of the ground in the Assam coal-measures at the north base of 
the Patkai, has not revealed any recognisable outcrop of nummulitic 
strata. ' The e3j)lanation that has been offered of the change to the west 
may coVer this case also : that a special elevation of the Khasi area has' 
there .brought to the surface a deeper zone ef deposits in this great con- 
tinuous basin of deposition. 

The upper tertiaries,— It was said above that at the west of the 
Garo hills the earthy nummulitics pass up, without marked change, into 
the soft upper tertiary strata. There is at first a moderate southerly dip ; 
but the strata become nearly horizontal as they recede from the gneissic 
mass ; so that this section on the Brahmaputra is the most obscure of 
any in the whole range ; the hills are much lower than elsewhere, and 
the tertiary series must have here a minimum thickness, even if the 



juiwa-remusuiar.j thj!; uji-i-au xjiKTiAKiBis. oav 

whole of it is exposed. Yet the only distinct information we possess as to 
the horizon of these newer rocks is from this ground. In 1821 Mr. 
Colebrooke read to the Geological Society of London' some observations 
on these rocks by Mr. David Scott, then Commissioner of Cooch Behar. 
In those days the Brahmaputra flowed at the foot of the hills, and at one 
spot on the left bank Mr. Scott found some fossils. The exact locality 
is not given, but it was somewhere between the Kalu and Mahendraganj' 
(or Karibari) , probably nearer the latter place ; so the position in the 
series is not known; but it seems certain that the bed belonged to the 
rocks of the hills, not to the " old alluvium ;" for it is described as at the 
foot of a small hiH, rising about 20 feet over the general elevation. The 
fossils were a strange mixture of marine with land and fresh-water forms ; 
and amongst them Mr. Pentland described ^ the teeth of Antkracot/ierium 
(Charomeryx) silistreme, a species that has been recently found in the 
Manchar (upper miocene) beds of Sind.' 

The change of character that is so marked in the cretaceous and 
nummulitic deposits from west to east has not been observed in the 
upper tertiaries : there certainly can be no striking feature of this kind. 
A massive soft greenish sandstone is the most prominent rock; it is 
somewhat like the common Siwalik rock, but more earthy and of darker 
hue, and the associated beds are mostly grey shales, unlike the brown 
and ochi-ey clays of the Sub-Himalayan series; and the fossils above 
mentioned shew that even at this w.estem end of the range the deposits 
are, in part at least, marine. In Mr. Scott^'s notes of the section on the 
Brahmaputra, local contortions are noticed, and this condition increases 
eastwards. On the Sumesari, where the tertiary zone is 14 miles wide, 
nearly 60 miles from the great river, the state of disturbance is still only 
partial* : at the southern edge of the hills the dip is 40° to the south, in 
very new -looking strata ; there is then a broad band, in which the beds 
are flatly undulating ; they then rise again with a steady and increasing 
southerly dip. The form of these outer, partial lines of disturbance is 
that of normal flexures, with the axis-plane sloping northwards, towards 
the gneissic mass at the edge of the basin (note, p. 528). In the inner half 
of the section there are two lines of compressed contortion, with interven- 
ing bands of nearly horizontal beds. In this more advanced state of com- 
pression the features suggest that the flexures had not been thrust -over 
from the north, but from the south, as the reversed fault seems to have 

1 Trans. G. S., Set. 2, vol. I, p. 132. 

2 Trans. G. S., Ser. 2, II, p. 393. 

3 -Rec. Q. S. I., X, p. 77. 

" Mem. G. B. I., VII (193). 



698 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— THE ASSAM RANGE, [Chap. XXYIII. 

a southerly underlie, and the upthrow is on the south. Nothing like a 
general unconformity in the tertiary series was noticed in the' section of 
the Sumesari. 

Only aO miles to the east lies the ground described by Colonel God- 
win-Austen on the confines of the tJaro and Khasi areas, where the upper 
tertiary rocks have beeh almost denuded away frotn the base of the range, 
the little that is left of them being nearly vertical. Several peculiar- 
ities have already been noticed in this position : the depression, or the 
gradual rise, of the metamOrphic mass, unlike its abrupt southern ending 
to east and west : here, too, is the transition ground of the prevailing 
marine type of deposits in both the cretaceous arid nummulitic Strata, 
and here a partial unconformity was noticed between these formations. 
Similar conditions affect the upper tertiaries : this is the only position 
in the western part of the range where they have been found on the 
plateau, inside the line of disturbancCi The summit of Nongkulang 
hill (2,070 feet) is fornted of rusty sandstones and shalfes, resting horizon- 
tally upon the undisturbed nummulitic limestoile. In a collection of 
fossils f jrota these beds, sent by Colonel Godwin- Austen, Dr. Stoliczka 
found the genera Conus, Dolium, Denialium, Cardita, Cardium, Tellina, 
Nucula, Leda, Gucullcea, and several others ; and he remarked that none 
of the species, so far as recognisable, appealed to be identical with those 
known from the mlmmulitic beds of the same district- This fact suggests 
that these detached beds on the heights may, perhaps, be an overlap of 
some beds of the series higher than those that seem to be in transitional 
sequence with the nummulitics in the sections to the west. This view 
is strengthened by the fact, that Colonel Godwin-Austen observed 
some cases of local denudation-unconformity between these fossiliferdus 
sandstones and the nUmmulitie limestone, the strata being still qliite 
parallel. 

Along the foot of the plateau in the Ehasi and Jaintia artas the dis- 
turbed lippef tertiary rocks have been almost entirely removed by denuda- 
tion. East of Jairltiapur they appear ^gain in force, and expand rapidly 
into the Barail range, which is^ so far as known, entirely made up of 
them, Hsing steeply from the alluvial valley of Caehar^ drained by the 
Siirma, or Batak. Oh the south this valley is very undefined, long lateral 
valleys ruiinitlg up from it to the south, between the low meridional 
ridges of the Tipperah and Lush&i hills, formed of the same soft upper 
tertiary rocks, some of which ridges strike up to within ten miles of the 
east and west Baj-ail range. The Cachar valley seems to be excavated 
out of what must be the very broken ground where these two conflicting 
strikes meet. As the Barail curves to the north-feast into the strike of 



jixraa-reiunsuiar, J 'I'ujii absam ijUAL-tusiius. d9» 

the P^tkai, north of Manipur, the confluence with the ridges from the 
south takes place more easily. 

It is only in the north-east, in the Patkai, that the range forms 
the main Watershed. The northern drainage of the Barail passes 
through that range, by the deep gtirge of the Jatinga, into Caehar. 
Prom the edge of the plateau, immediately over the upper Jatinga valley, 
the drainage flows to Assdm. In this position the iedge of the plateau, 
as constituted of horizontal rocks, dbes not visibly correspoild with a 
supporting mass of metamorphics . There is here a large area of the 
North Caehar or West Naga hills formed of the massive upper tertiary 
sandstone very Httle disturbed. It would seem that the spill of the 
drainage took its origin here from the first great monoelinal axis of flexure 
into the basin of disturbance, the protrusion of the Barail range into its 
present position along that axis being a slow after-process. It seems 
not unlikely, too, that this great accumulation of late tertiary strata may be 
largely formed of early Himalayan debris, from the discharge of the great 
eastern torrents, the Pihorig-toibong, the Brahmaputra, and others ; and 
that the diversion of these through Assam into Bengal was the "result of 
the crushing together of those deposits in the lines of the Burmese 
mountain system. 

The AssatQ coal-fields. — U^per and Lower Assam are very neatly 
defined geologically : the latter as the area between the metamorphic mass 
of the Shillonff plateau and the Himalayas, where the metamorphics 
appear bccasiohally as outliers through the alluvium, and probably under- 
lie the whole at no great depth. The most easterly known outcrop of 
these crystalliiie rocks, north of the JBrahmaputra, is the granitic mass 
at Tezpur. Upper Assam lies on the north-easterly prolongation of the 
crystalline area, and commences at the Dhansiri valley, wbere the sedi- 
mentary series lying to the south of the gneiss extends beyond it, in the 
northern ridges of the Patkai range, to forin the south-east boundary of 
the upper part of the great valley. The general continuity of this line 
of outcrop here, with that of the cfy'stalline boundary to the south-west, 
suggests that the metamoi-phics may extend for a long way beneath the 
alluviuni of Upper Assam; but this is purely conjectural, and the data are 
insufficient to discuss it. 

It has been already stated that, although these rocks of the Patkai 
range are the direct continuation, after an unexamined interval of nearly 
200 miles, of the formations already described on the southern margin of 
the Garo and Khasi hills, the general facies of the sequences are so differ- 
ent, that the two can only be correlated by a connected survey, fossil 



700 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— THE ASSAM EANGE. [Chap, XXVIII, 

evidence also being entirely wanting in the Naga ground. This eastern 
area must therefore stand by itself for the present. Mr. F. R. Mallet has 
described the coal-measures in some detail, with the rocks immediately 
adjoining, for a length of about 100 miles from south of Jorhat. He 
gives the following classification of the formations : — 

4. — The Dehing group (from the river of that name) : conglomerates and blue clays 
with fossil wood ; minimum thickness, 400 feet; transitional with No. 3. 

3. — Tipam group (from the low range traversed by the Dehing above Jaipur) : 
massive, false-bedded, soft, grey sandstones, with subordinate variegated 
clays and fossil wood ; thickness, 7,000 to 9,000 feet ; "transitional with No. 2. 

2.— The coal-measures : alternating shales, sandstones and coal, with a few thin cal- 
careous layers ; thickness more than 2,000 feet. 

1. — The Disang group (from the river of that name) : grey, fine, hard sandstones 
overlying splintery grey shales, several thousand feet thick. 

General structure. — Although in a general sense the section of the 
P^tkai may be, as suggested, a continuation of that to the south-west, 
with a prolongation of the crystalline rocks beneath the Upper Assam 
valley, very great changes are introduced to the north-east. Instead of 
finding the lowest rocks at the base of the hills, adjoining the alluvial 
area, as would be the case on the simple supposition referred to, there is,. on 
the contrary, a nearly continuous belt of upper tertiary rocks outside 
(north-west of)^ the main outcrop of the coal-measures and of the Disang 
group. This feature is due to a great fault that has been traced from 
end tp end of the area, with a steady strike to east-35°-north, and hav- 
ing a great upthrow to the south-east. On both sides of the fault the 
prevailing dip is towards the crest of the Patkai. 

This fault is the leading structural feature of the field, and it must 
have a throw of from 10,000 to 15,000 feet; for the outer tertiary rocks 
dip towards it, and high Tipam, and even Dehing, beds are generally 
found at the dislocation in contact with the Disang group. The principal 
coal-fields occur isolated inside the great fault, where, at intervals, the 
throw is less, or where a loop-fault encloses a section of the measures. 
Here, too, south of the main fault, the Tipam group is found in force 
overlying the coal group, and proving the magnitude of the dislocation. 
Thus the several coal-fields inside the fault are strictly isolated as basins 
of dislocation. The only position where the coal-measures appear at the 
base of the Tipam group outside the fault is in the Jaipur field, on the 
Dehing and the Disang ; but they presumably occur all along the margin 



' Mem. G. S. I., XII, p. (269). 

2 See note, p. 529 : the axis of disturbance here is not Himalayan, but that of the 
Burmese system. 



Extra-Peninsular.] THE coal-m;easures. 701 

of the alluviimij at an unknown depth : the great thickness of the Tipam 
group would make the search for the coal very precariouSj unless near a 
known outcrop. 

The Disaug group. — The three upper groups form a continuous 
sequence, and the top one is a vepy late tertiary formation, so the Di- 
sang beds must take their place below the continuous series, as at least 
older than the coal-measures. The Disang boundary is everywhere de- 
scribed as faulted, and the original base of the coal-measures has not any- 
where been observed : it is, however, quite probable that the Disang beds 
also form part of the continuous sequence, for both shales and sandstone 
are very much like those of the coal-measures ; only in the latter these 
rocks are freely interbedded throughout, and include coal-seams at all 
levels ; whereas in the Disang group the shales, as a whole, underlie the 
sandstone, and both are vnthout carbonaceous layers. As these contrast- 
ing conditions obtain in contiguous areas, it is impossible the groups can 
be the same ; and the Disang is certainly the older. 

The type section of the group is taken from the Disang, .south of 
the Tipam range, no coal-measures being exposed along the great fault 
for many miles on either side ; but similar rocks occur to the south of the 
coal-measuresj in the Makum field, to the east, and in the Nazira field, 
to the west. 

The coal-measures. — Three principal fields have been described. In 
the Jaipur field the measures crop up with a high dip along a narrow 
band at the north base of the Tipam range for about 20 miles, when 
they are covered over in both directions by the alluvium. East of the 
gorge of the Dehing, at Jaipur, the Tipam i-ange comes to an end, and 
the alluvium passes behind it, up to the edge of the Makum field, along 
the main fault. This is the most extensive of the Assam coal-fields : to 
the south-west its exact limit is not known, but it is certainly cut out 
before reaching the Disang ; to the north-east it extends beyond the limits 
of exploration, into the Singpho country. The Nazira field occurs along 
the great fault, on the Dikhu and Saffrai rivers, for a length of about 
16 miles. In the former position the outer hills of the Tipam rocks 
intervene between the plain and the coal rocks ; but on the Saffrai the 
ground is more open, and the coal-field moreaccessible. Farther to the 
south-west there are small outcrops of the coal-measures south of the 
fault, on the Janji and Disai rivers ; but here the outer range of Tipam 
rocks is very broad, and the coal proportionately difficult of access. 

For detailed information regarding these fields and 'the coal, we must 
refer to Mr. Mallet's memoir.' The measures are very much alike in all ; 

• Mem. G. S. I., XII, Ft. 2. 



703 GEOLOGY OF INDFA— THE ASSAM RANGE. [Chap. XXYIIL 

^eama of less than a y^rd iij thickness are very nujnerpus in some sections, 
and not tinf requently the coal feeds attain much greater dimensions. In 
the Namdang, south of Uongreng in the Makum field, there is a seam 100 
feet thick, containing at least 75 feet of golid coal; and some very. large 
seams have been traced for more than a mile without dimini^tion. The 
sandstones and shales often contain nodules and layers of play-ironstone. 
Earthy and ferruginous limestone occurs sparingly in thin concretionary 
bands, also some layers of hard tough magnesian limestone. The coal- 
measure shales decompose into a very tenaceous blue elay^ differing in this 
irespect from the Disang shales, which are more clunchy. 

On the interesting question of the age pf these very important and 
extensive coal-measures, there is little ' evidence for opinion; and that 
little suggests a middle tertjary horizon. , The coal itself is a true coal 
of superior quality, not lignite, as is attested by its composition. 

Fixed Volatile 

cartian. ma^tter. Ash. 

Average composition of 27 Assam coals . 60-0 36,3 3'8 

Ditto of 17 Kaniganj coals . 511 32'6 16-3 

It is not unlike the nummulitic coal of the Khasi hills, and quite unlike 
the cretaceous coal, which maintains its peculiar characteristics into close 
proximity to the Assam fields. The only fossils found in the seams 
are bad impressions of dicotyledonous leaves ; and no trace of animal life 
has been seen in any of the associated rocks. The strongest point in the 
argument is the closely transitional relation between the measures and the 
Tipam sandstone, which is a yery typical rej)resentative of the Siwalik 
rook, and almost undoubtedly belongs to that upper tertiary period. In 
the Khasi hiUs, and again in the Punjab, the nummulitic coal occurs- 
near the very base of the formation : in the Tharia section (p. 694) there 
are about 1,000 feet of marine nummulities above the coal bed. If the 
Upper Assam coal-ndeasures are nummulitic at all, they would seem to 
belong to the upper limits of the formation. 

Tipam and Dehing groups.' — We might without niuch risk speak 
of these as Lower and Upper Siwaliks ; for in very many respects they 
correspond with those S,ub- Himalayan formations as seen on the north 
side of the alluvial valley ; and it is by no means improbable that the 
two may yet be traced into actual continuity through the wild unexplored 
country at the head of the valley. The greenish grey (pepper-and-salt) 
sandstone of the Tipam range undoubtedly alternates with the top beds 
of the coal-measures ; but the shaly beds rapidly cease, and the sand- 
stone becomes very massive. Some coaly partings were also observed 
well up in the Tipam group ; and fossil wood, whether silieified or semi- 



Extra-Peninsular. ] TIPAM AND DEpiNG GROUPS. 703 

cartonised, sometimes in very large blocks, is common throughout this 
great sandstone formation, as well as in the upper conglomeratic beds. 

The upper (Dehing) group is less like the corresponding group of the 
Siwaliks than is the Tipam sandstone ; and two points are noteworthy 
in it. Some of the bottom beds are coal-conglomerates, made up almost 
exclusively of rolled fragments of coal, presumably of the coal-seams 
underlying the Tipam group. This peculiar conglomerate has been ob- 
served at great distances apart, at the top of the Tipam sandstone, along 
the main fault. The ordinary conglomerates of the group also are com- 
posed of well-rolled pebbles of fine hard sandstone, identical in appearance 
with the Disang sandstone. The beds associated with these conglomerates 
are blue sandy clays, not like the brown and red clays of the top Siwaliks, 
at least of North-Western India^ The facts altogether seepi to si^ggest 
that these top beds are of very late date ; and that the great disturbances 
now displayed in these formations may bp to a great extent older than 
the deposits which seem to have taken full part in them, as was suggested 
in soine of the spetions in the Sub-Himalayas of K^ngrg, (p. 554 ). But 
nntil the rocks at the head of the Assam valley have been studied, it will 
be impossible to offer any explanation of the general features of this 
region. 



704 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 

EXTEA-PENINSULAR AREA. 

BURMA. 

Area and physical geography — Geological data — Eock-gronps — Metamorphic rocks — 
Mergui group — Maulmain group — Axial (triassic) group — Mai-i (Cretaceous) group 
— Supposed cretaceous coal in Tenasserim — Negrais rocks — Serpentine — Nummu- 
litic groupi — Arakan — Coal-bearing rocks of Tenasserim — Pegu group — Newer 
tertiary heds in Arakan — Pliocene fossil-wood group — Tertiaries of Upper Burma — 
Extinct volcano of Puppa — Trachyte in South-Western Pegu — Post-tertiary deposits : 
laterite — Older alluvial sknds and gravels — Delta of Irawadi — Littoral concrete of 
Arakan coast — Mud volcanoes of Bamri, &c. — Islands in the Bay of Bengal — 
Andamans — Nicobars — Barren Island and Narcondam. 

Area and physical geography.— British Burma, consisting of the 
countries on the eastern side of the Bay of Bengal, north of the tenth 
parallel of north latitude, comprises three divisions — Arakan, Pegu, and 
Tenasserim. The first and last of these are mainly composed of narrow- 
strips of territory extending along the coast ; the former north, the latter 
south, of the Irawadi delta. Pegu consists of the lower Irawadi valley 
south of the parallel of 19° 30' north latitude, together with the country 
between the Irawadi and Sittoung (or Sitang) rivers. Martaban, part 
of the Tenasserim division, includes a large tract between the Sittoung 
and Salwin. 

The whole region is traversed by hill ranges, having a general north 
and south direction, parallel to the coast. All the principal streams have 
the same general course, which is the strike of the rocks. To the 
northward, in Arakan, the strike curves to west of north. 

The main hill ranges of British Burma are three in number. Com- 
mencing to the westward, the ridge running parallel with the coast, 
and forming the watershed between the Bay of Bengal to the westward, 
and the Prawadi valley to the east, is known as the Arakan Yoma?- This 
range is the southern continuation of the somewhat complicated ranges 
to the east of Chittagongj it becomes a well-defined ridge of great 

' Yo-ma is a Burmese word signifying backbone. ' 



iSxtra-Jr-eninsular. J AEEA AND PHYSICAL QEOQRAPHy. 705 

breadth, but of comparatively moderate height, east o£ Akyab, and con- 
tinues steadily to Cape Negrais. To the northward the general height 
of the watershed is about 3,000 to 4,000 feet, some peaks rising to as 
much as 5,000 ; but to the southward the elevation is much less. This 
range is the boundary between Pegu and Arakan. 

East of the Irawadi valley, and forming the water-parting between 
that river and the Sittoung, is another range, known as the Pegu Toma, 
terminating to the southward, close to Rangoon, and extending north- 
ward for some distance beyond the British frontier. The maximum 
elevation of this Yoma is about 2,000 feet, and is attained near the 
southern extremity^ in latitude 17° 55' ; thence northward to the frontier 
the height of the w;atershed varies from 800 to 1,200 feet. 

The whole of the mountains east of the Sittoung must be classed 
with those of the Tenasserim provinces as parts of one great range, 
greatly exceeding the Arakan and Pegu Yomas in elevation, and distin- 
guished from both by being mainly composed of metamorphio rocks. 
To the northward this range, which appears to have no general and dis- 
tinctive name, is connected with the gneissic ridges and plateaus of Upper 
Burma ; it forms the watershed between the Sittoung and Salwin, the 
latter river cutting through it near Maulmain (Moulmein), where the 
strike of the rocks ia north-north-west instead of north, and it continues as 
a number of parallel north and south ranges in the Tenasserim provinces, 
Towards the southern extremity of British Burma the various paralle 
ridges coalesce into one general range, which forms the backbone of the 
Malay Peninsula. The metamorphic hills frequently attain an elevation 
of 5,000 to 6,000 feet, and some peaks are said to be as much as 7,000 
above the sea. 

It may be useful to notice that the great rivers of British Burma are 
the Irawadi and Salwin, both of which rise far to the northward, in 
Chinese territory. The Sittoung is a much smaller stream, coming from 
but a short distance north of the British frontier. The Irawadi forms 
a large delta, but the Salwin flows in a rocky channel almost to its 
mouth. In Northern Arakan are several rivers of considerable size, the 
principal being the Koladyne, all running from the northward; and in 
the Tenasserim provinces, the river Tenasserim has a course of about 
150 miles from north to south, before turning westward to run into the 
sea near Mergui. The general parallelism of all the streams and hill 
ranges gives an appearance of simplicity to the physical geology of the 
country ; but, owing in a great measure to the prevalence of forest, it has 
been found extremely difficult to determine the stratigraphy, and very 
little can be said to be accurately known about the formations occurring. 

ul 



706 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— BURMA, [Chap. XXIX. 

Geological data. — The province o£ Pegu has been geologically 
mapped ^ j but, for the reason mentioned, the classification of the rocks in 
the hill ranges is by no means satisfactorily settled. The formations 
along the course of the Irawadi north of the British frontier to beyond 
Ava have been cursorily examined,^ as also a tract on the upper Sal win* ;, 
and the extinct volcano of Puppa, south-west of Pagan, has been 
visited.* Occasional notes, too, have been collected, by various travellers 
in other parts of Upper Burma. A few visits have been made to parts 
of Southern Arakan in the neighbourhood of Pegu, and to the islands 
of R&mri and Cheduba,^ the southernmost part of Arakan being in- 
eluded in Mr. Theobald's map of Pegu, but the northern portion of the 
division is geologically unknown. All that can be said is, that the 
formations are probably similar to those of the Arakan Yoma, as the 
same beds appear to extend northward into the Assam hills. Tenasserim 
is similarly most imperfectly known, the neighbourhood of Maulmain, 
and a few localities to the southward, being the only parts of which any 
account exists.^ 

Rock-groups- — The following are the groups in which the rocks 
found in Burma have been arranged, with their approximate geological 
position. It should be repeated that, owing to the very great difficulties 
in the way of a geological exploration of the country, the sub-divisions 
are by no means so well defined as in the Peninsula of India. The fossils 
found have not been compared and described ; and until this has been 
done, it is impossible to feel sure that portions of different groups have 
not, in some cases, been included in one sub-division. 

Ifame, Sockt. Bv^oied geological age, 

( Blown Band, littoral concrete, ") 
I. Neweb Aliuvunn, &o. j regur, and recent alluvial \ Secent. 
^ deposits. J 

II. OiiDEE AlLirviUM . ( ^^""^ """^ ^''^^^^ °* *^« °1^«"^ \ PoH-teHiar^, 

(. river alluvium, laterite, &c. ) 

III. FOSSK-WOOD GEOUP J Sand, gravels, &c., with sUiciaed j p^^.^^^^_ 
( wood and bones of Mammalia. ) 

' Theobald : Mem. G. S. I., X, pp. (189)— (359). Some earlier notices appeared in the 
Records of the Geological Survey of India, but all details were incorporated in the Memoir 
quoted. 

2 Oldham : Tule's Mission to the Court of Ava, Appendix, pp. 309 — 351. 

3 By Mr. Fedden. 

^ J. A. S. B., 1862, XXXr, p. 215. 
" MaUet : Eec. G. S. I., XI, pp. 188—223. 

" Oldham : Selections from the Records of the Government of India, Home Department, 
No. X, pp. 31—67. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] METAMOEPHIC EOCKS. 707 

Name. Bocka. Bvfpoted geohgieal age. 

IV. Pegu GBOUP (Shales and Bandstones, occasion--) j^^.^^g^^_ 

\ ally calcareous; fossils numerous, j 

f Shales and sandstone, with some > 

v. NuMMTTHTio . j limestone bands containi^ig ^Eocene. 

^ nummulites, &c. ^ 

VI. Neseais books . (Similar, hut much hardened, and)^„^^„^ ^^ Cretaceous. 

\ sub-metamorphic in places. j 

( Limestone, sandstone, calcareous") 

VII. Mai-i sbotjp . \ shales, &c., with Ammonites f Cretaceous. 

^ inflatus, J 

( Shales, sandstones, &c., more or •\ 

Vm. AxiAli ctEOUP . ■< less altered, and occasionally f Triassia. 

>■ schistose. •' 

IX. Maulmain (JEOTTP ;f Limestone, reddish sandstone, and 1 ^^^j^^^^^^^^„^ 

(. shales. ) 

X. Mbegui geoup . iSlaty and schistose beds, grits, &c. ? 

^T nr fGneiss, mica-slate, &c., with) . 

XI. Meiamoephio . ) '. . * ' \ Azoic. 

(. gramte veins. ) 

Iktetjsitk beitptitb books. — Serpentine, trachyte, &c. ; an extinct volcano in Upper 

Burma. 

0£ these various groups, it should be stated at once that the three 
uppermost constitute the greater portion of the Irawadi valley ; that the 
Pegu Yoma consists entirely of the mioeene Pegu group ; and that the 
Arakan Yoma, and the spurs to the eastward and westward of the main 
range, are chiefly composed of nummulitic, cretaceous, and triassic beds. 
The carboniferous limestone and its associated beds, together with the 
Mergui group, are, in British Burma, nearly confined to the Tenasserim 
provinces j the former extending northward into Martaban, whilst the 
main area of metamorphic rocks lies to the east of all the other forma- 
tions. In describing the various beds, it will be best, as usual, to com- 
mence with the lowest ; the intrusive rocks, however, being noticed with 
the beds with which they are associated. 

Metamorphic rocks. — The Burmese gneissic series consists of more 
or less granitoid gneiss, hornblendic gneiss, crystalline limestone, quartz- 
ite, and schists of various kinds. In many places the gneiss becomes a 
true granite, and much of the area occupied by the crystalline formations 
has been described by various observers as composed of granitic rocks. 
Some of the granitoid portions of the rock weather into remarkable round- 
ed masses,* isolated from each other by the decomposition of the inter- 
vening rock, and forming huge piles of gigantic boulders, as in Southeni 

1 Figures of some extraordinary isolated blocks of this kind, resembling perched 
erratics, but really due to disintegration, are given by the Rev. C. Parish in his "Notes of a 
trip up the Sal ween," J. A. S. B,, 1865, XX XIV, Pt. 2, pp. 135, &c., PI. VI, VII, VIII. 



708 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIS 

India (Hyderabad, Mysore, &c.) and parts of Western Bengal.^ Horn 
blendic gneiss seems less abundant than in the main gneissic. area o 
India, whilst crystalline limestone is o£ not uncommon occurrence. 

So little attention has hitherto been paid to the metamorphic rock, 
of Burma, that very little is known of the minerals occurring amongs 
them. That the gneissic formations are metalliferous in places ha 
long been known; gold is obtained, in small quantities, in many o 
the streams, and tin stone is found in some abundance in parts of tin 
Tenasserim provinces and in Martaban. Lead and silver mines, oni 
of them at least — the famous Bau-dwen-gyee — of very large dimen 
sions and highly productive, exist in the Shan States, north-east of Ava 
The most valuable and productive ruby mines known are in the sami 
direction, but nearer to the capital. Chondrodite associated with spine 
in crystalline limestone has been found close to Mandalay, the combina 
tion of minerals being similar to that occurring in certain localities nea 
New York. 

As already mentioned, metamorphic rocks occupy a large, but un 
explored, area in Upper Burma : they form all the higher ranges in th^ 
neighbourhood of Ava, and extend throughout a great portion of tb 
country, extending thence to the Salwin. Farther to the northward- the; 
extend from Bham6 to the neighbourhood of Momein in Yunnan.^ Th 
Irawadi below Ava turns more to the west, and flows through newe 
rocks, whilst the crystallines continue to the southward, forming th 
Bed Karen (Karen-ni) country and the hills between the Sittoung an 
Salwin, and extend into Tenasserim. None occur in Pegu or Arakar 
west of the range between the Sittoung and Salwin. 

It is impossible to do much more than guess at the relations of th 
Burmese metamorphic rocks to those of the Indian Peninsula ; but th 
gneissic rocks of Burma ha?ve more resemblance to those of Peninsula 
India than to the crystalline formations of the Himalayas. 

Mergui group. — Resting upon the metamorphic rocks in th 
southern portion of the Tenasserim provinces, there is a great accumuls 
tion of pseudo-porphyritic sedimentary beds, the principal feature c 
which is derived from imbedded crystalline fragments of felspar. Th 
rock in its normal form is earthy, but highly indurated ; it passes, on tl 
one hand, into slaty masses without the conspicuous felspar fragment 
and on the other into grits and conglomerates. With these grits, an 
resting upon them, are dark-coloured earthy beds, finely laminated, wit 
hard quartzose grits. These rocks cannot be less than 9,000 feet i 

' A form of " dome arneiss :" see ante. D. 20. 



iiiiva-reninsiiiar. J MAUbMAiiN UKUuf. Yuy 

thickness, and in places they must be 11,000 or 12,000., They have 
only been noticed hitherto near Mergui, and nothing is known o£ their 
relations. 

Maulmain group. — The beds of the last group in the Tenasserim 
valley are succeeded, in ascending order, by hard sandstones, often in thin 
and massive layers, with thin earthy partings, sometimes in fine 
laminae ; the prevailing colour is a reddish tint, and some of the layers 
are calcareous. Some of the more soft and earthy beds contain marine 
fossils. Over these sandstones occur grey shaly beds, also sometimes 
calcareous and fossiliferous, with occasional beds of dark sandstone; 
then come 150 to 200 ffeet of fine soft sandstone, thinly bedded with 
grey and pinkish shaly layers intercalated ; and upon these, again, hard 
thick limestone. The fossils found are unmistakably of carboniferous age, 
Spirifer and Frodwctus being the commonest forms ; but the species have 
not been determined, and it is rare to obtain specimens in a state suitable 
for identification. 

The thickness of the Maulmain group, exclusive of the 'limestone, is 
estimated at about 5,000 feet, and the limestone itself near Maulmain 
is 1,100 feet thick. 

Near Maulmain the limestone is extremely conspicuous, and forms 
large hills and ranges, extending far to the south-south-east up the 
valley of the Ataran and Zami. The same rock occurs east of the 
Salwin, but it does not extend far into Martaban, and it is wanting 
in the Sittoung valley. Farther up the Salwin, however, in Karen-ni, 
and elsewhere beyond the British frontier, large tracts of limestone 
occur, probably belonging to the carboniferous series. Limestone is 
said to abound in the Mergui Archipelago, and may very probably be, in 
parts at least, identical with that found near Maulmain. Carboniferous 
limestone is also extensively developed in Sumatra.i 

Until the fossils are better known, it is impossible to say whether the 
Maulmain group exactly corresponds to the carboniferous beds of the 
Himalayas and the Punjab ; there can, however, be uo question that both 
are of the same approximate age. The occurrence of marine fossHiCerous 
rocks of the carboniferous period at the two extremities of the extra- 
peninsular area of British India, and the complete absence of any 
marine palseozoic fossils within the peninsular region, afford perhaps one 
of the most striking illustrations of the great divergence between the 
geological history of Peninsular India and that of the surroimding 
countries. 

1 Geol. Mag.. Dec. II, Vol. II, p. 478. 



710 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX 

Axial (triassic) group.— There is manifestly a great break be 
tween the rocks already noticed and the mesozoic formations of Burma 
the older beds are found in a distinct area to the eastward, and are assc 
ciated with metamorphie rocks, whilst the triassic beds are only known t 
occur west of the Irawadi, and are connected by stratigraphy and positioi 
with the newer rocks of the Arakan Yoma range. This range, althougl 
of no great height, forms an excessively broad belt of uninhabited forest 
clad hills, only traversed by a single road and by a few difficult path 
at wide intervals, and it is, in general, absolutely inaccessible, excep 
along the tortuous beds of streams. Anything like satisfactory geolo 
gical surveying becomes almost impossible in such a region, unless somi 
well-marked and prominent beds occur to afford a clue to the stratigra 
phy, or fossiliferous belts are numerous. In the Arakan range neithe: 
is the case ; the rocks of the main range consist of rather hard sand 
stones and shales, greatly squeezed, contorted and broken, traversed b] 
numerous small veins of quartz, often slaty, and sometimes schistose 
but there is a marked deficiency of any conspicuous strata. The fev 
bands of limestone which occur are thin, isolated, and as a rule unfossili. 
ferous. The rocks on the western, or Arakan, side of the range appear 
on the whole, less altered than those on the eastern, or Pegu, slope ; anc 
on the outer spurs, on both sides, unaltered nummulitic rocks appeaj 
throughout a great part of the area, although not continuously. 

The crushed, hardened, and somewhat altered rocks of the Arakai 
Yoma were originally separated by Mr. Theobald from the newer-look 
ing nummtditics under the name of " axials,^' and considered as com. 
prising the oldest tertiary beds and their immediate predecessors in the 
series. Although there is a well-marked difference between the num^ 
muUtic-beds and the "axials," there is no distinct break between them 
the two present an appearance of conformity where they are noi 
faulted against each other, and it is far from clear that some of -the 
axials are not merely nummulitic strata, greatly crushed and contorted 
But subsequently to the preliminary examination of the area, a creta- 
ceous ammonite was found in Arakan ; and amongst some rather obscurt 
fossils discovered near the frontier of British and Native Burma, wesi 
of Thayetmyo, were a few specimens referred by Dr. Stoliczka to th( 
typically upper triassic Salobia lommeli (PI. II, fig. 5). It became 
therefore, necessary to distinguish both triassic and cretaceous beds 
amongst the axial rocks of the Arakan range. 

To the former has been referred a series of hard sandstones and shales 
with grits and conglomerates, and a few bands of impure limestone, whict 



Extra-Peninsular. J MAI-I (CRETACEOUS) GROUP. 711 

southward, nearly to the parallel of Prome. The only characteristic beds 
are some white-speckled grits, interhedded with shales and sandstones, 
and attaining a thickness of 1,300 feet, in the Lhowa stream, 35 miles 
west of Thayetmyo ; a band of dark-blue shale with conglomerate, 
part of which is calcareous, 33 feet thick, below the grits j and some thick- 
bedded shales, passing into massive sandy shales, with hard nodules inter- 
spersed, attaining a thickness of 110 feet, and containing a Cardita and 
some undetermined Gasteropoda. The calcareous conglomerate passes 
into- a rubbly limestone, and appears identical with the beds contain- 
ing Halohia lommeli. To the northward a band of limestone, much thicker 
and purer than that of the Lhowa stream, has been traced in several 
places. The speckled grits and conglomerates are, however, more con- 
spicuous and more characteristic, • and it is mainly by means of them 
that the area of supposed triassic beds has been mapped. 

The whole thickness of the triassic group appears to be rather less 
than 6,000 feet, the characteristic beds just noticed being near, but not 
at the base of the group. To the eastward these beds are in contact 
with nummulitic strata, the boundary having the appearance of a fault ; 
to the westward it is believed that cretaceous beds come in, but the 
country is difficult of access, and has not been surveyed. The area 
occupied within the limits of British Burma is elongately triangular, 
broadest at the frontier, where it extends for 15 miles from east to west, 
and terminating in a point to the southward, west by north of Prome. 

A few outbursts of serpentine occur within the limits assigned to 
the triassic group. As these intrusive masses differ in no way from 
some occurring farther south, amongst the rocks of the Negrais group, 
it will be best to notice all the cases of serpentine intrusion together. 

Mai-i (Cretaceous) group. — The existence of cretaceous beds in the 
Arakan Yoma, like the occurrence of triassic strata, is only shewn by the 
discovery of one species of mollusk in a single locality in Arakan ; the 
species found. Ammonites inflatus, is a characteristic cenomanian cephalo- 
pod, common in the Utatur beds of Southern India. ^ The only specimen 
obtained was picked up in the bed of a stream, and had evidently been 
derived from some shales in the neighbourhood. No other specimens 
nor other fossil of any kind could, however, be found. 

The spot where this ammonite was found was near Mai-i, in the 
northern part of the Sandoway district of Arakan. 

"What may be the extent of the cretaceous beds, and which strata 
shoidd be referred to this group, are matters on which but little trust- 
worthy information has been obtained. Mr. Theobald is disposed to con- 
sider that a peculiar, compact, light cream-coloured argillaceous limestone. 



712 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX. 

resembling indurated chalk, sometimes speckled from containing sublenti- 
cular crystalline particles, belongs to the cretaceous formation ; and this 
limestone has been traced at intervals from near Mai-i^ about 30 miles 
north of Tongup (Toungoop), to the neighbourhood of Sandoway, whilst 
somewhat similar limestone, though not so characteristic, may be traced to 
Keantali, some 30 miles farther south. The same limestone is found in 
the western part of Ramri Island. Another peculiar formation is a greyish, 
rather earthy sandstone, with, in places, a pisolitic structure, due to the 
presence of small globular concretions of carbonate of lime and iron. 
The concretions decompose, and leave small holes, which impart to the 
earthy sandstone the aspect of an amygdaloidal trap. Like the limestone, 
this peculiar sandstone is traced from Mai-i to near Keantali, a distance 
of 94 miles ; and if, as appears probable, these beds are really cretaceous, 
for both are closely associated with the shale from which the ammonite 
had apparently 'been derived, the rocks of this formation may be con- 
sidered as extending at least the distance mentioned. To the northward 
their range is unknown ; to the south, they seem to be replaced by the 
next group, which may, however, in part at least, be simply the same 
beds, but more altered. The strata ascribed to the cretaceous group are 
less hardened and metamorphosed than the other rocks of the Arakan 
Yoma ; they are of great thickness, and may include all the beds to the 
west of the triassic group, and of the main range of the Yoma as far 
south as Keantali. No rocks which can be referred to the Mai-i group 
have been detected east of' the main Arakan range in Pegu. 

Supposed cretaceous coal in Tenasserim. — There is, however, 
some probability that cretaceous rocks may exist in Tenasserim. On the 
Lenya river,^ in the extreme south of the province, a bed of coal occurs, 
of very laminar structure, and containing numerous small nodules of a 
resinous mineral Hke amber. This peculiar association of mineral resin 
is characteristic of the cretaceous coals in the Assam bilk, and it is 
highly probable that the Tenasserim mineral is of the same age. At 
the same time no palseontological evidence has been discovered; the rocks 
assoqiated with the coal are soft clays and sands, having a more recent 
appearance than those accompanying the other coal-feeams of the Tenasse- 
rim provinces; and these other seams are, it is believed, not older than 
eocene. The coal occurs as an irregularly developed bed, varying from 
one to five feet or rather more in thickness, with thin layers of fine jetty 
coal between bands of hard black shale, and rests upon clay with veo-eta- 
ble remains, also containing patches of jet-coal ; thin coal laminte are 
also found in the associated strata, 

' Oldham : Sel. Eec. Govt. India, Home Dept., No. X, p. 48. 



Extra-Peninsular.] NEGEAIS ROCKS. 713 

Below the rocks, immediately associated with the coal, are fine, whitish, 
earthy sandstones and indurated clay, passing into marl, with some 
conglomerates. Above the coal is a series of soft muddy sandstones, 
clays, marls, conglomerates, and a few seams of carbonaceous matter. 
The whole may be 600 feet thick. The dip is considerable, about 35°, 
and the rocks have undergone disturbance and faulting. Nothing has 
been ascertained as to the relations of the coal-bearing beds to other 
formations ; indeed, all that is known of the Lenya river coal is the result 
of a hurried visit to a locality very difficult of access. 

Negrais rocks. — The remainder of the rocks forming the Arakan 
Yoma are either unfossiliferous, or the few organisms which have been 
detected, mostly indistinct remains of plants and mollusca, are insuffi- 
cient to afEord any trustworthy indication of age. Some of these rocks 
appear to be a continuation of the Mai-i group ; whilst, on the other 
hand, it is impossible to draw any definite line of boundary between the 
hill rocks and the nummulitics of Pegu. In Pegu, away from the base 
of the hills, comparatively soft, unaltered fossiliferous beds are found, 
belonging to the older tertiary period j these strata appear to rest upon 
the hill beds ; for, away from the axis of the range, both have, in general, 
an eastwardly dip. The two rocks contrast strongly, the nummulitics 
being soft and unchanged, the hill beds hardened, crushed, and in places 
almost schistose ; but it is impossible to find a precise limit to either ; 
the two are never seen in contact ; there is no evidence that they are 
faulted against each other, and there appears to be a belt, often two or 
three miles wide, of rock in an intermediate condition. On the whole, it 
appears probable that the rocks of the Arakan Yoma in general comprise 
representatives, shghtly altered, of both cretaceous and nummulitic rocks ; 
but as it has hitherto proved impossible to draw a line between the two, 
whilst, on the other hand, there is no clear proof that these Arakan 
Yoma beds are identical with the Pegu nummulitics, it appears best 
to distinguish the hill rocks by a separate name, and to class them, as 
Mr. Theobald has proposed, as Negrais rocks. The name is derived 
from Cape Negrais, the south-western point of Pegu, and the extreme 
southern termination of the Arakan Yoma. 

The Negrais rocks differ in no important particulars from the triassic 
and cretaceous beds, already noticed, except that they are more altered 
than the latter. They consist principally of hardened and contorted sand- 
stones and shales, intersected throughout by numerous small veins of 
quartz and carbonate of lime. Limestone is not of common occurrence ; 
where it is seen, it does not appear generally in regular strata, but in 
huge detached blocks, imbedded in the shales and sandstones, as if the 



714 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX 

latter had yielded without fracture to the pressure which dislocated the 
limestone. Conglomerates also occur, sometimes passing into breccia. 

The alteration of these beds is most capricious and irregular; 
frequently for a long distance they are apparently unchanged, except in 
being somewhat hardened; then they become cherty, slaty, or sub- 
schistose, and cut up by quartz veins. One not uncommon form of alter- 
ation is exhibited by the rocks affecting a greenish hue, due to the 
presence of chlorite, such .rocks being generally much cut up by quartz 
veins. In a few iustances, apart from the serpentine intrusions to be 
mentioned presently, irregular dyke-like masses of either serpentine or a 
decomposed steatitic rock are found j but this is far from being of fre- 
quent occurrence. A more common form of alteration seen along the 
coast north of Cape Negrais is apparently due to the infiltration of silica 
in large quantities, and is shewn by the intense, and often, abrupt, 
alteration of beds of sandstone into'cherty masses. 

No satisfactory classification of these, the main rocks of the Arakan 
Yoma, has been practicable ; they must be of great thickness, but the 
stratification is too confused, in the absence of any well-defined horizon, 
for a clear idea as to the succession of different strata to be formed. Some 
massive sandstones on the Arakan coast north of Cape Negrais may 
perhaps be high in the series ; they are little, if at all, altered, and dip 
westward at a low angle. They are of a peculiar greenish hue, and 
comprise subordinate bands of conglomerate, containing fragments -of 
indurated shale and some quartz. It is possible that these sandstones 
may be nummulitic ; but as it is almost certain that some of the Negrais 
rocks are older tertiary, the separation , of the upper beds is useless 
without further evidence. 

Serpentine. — The occurrence of masses of serpentine has already 
been noticed ; the intrusive rock generally occurs as irregularly-shaped 
bosses of varying dimensions,^ but, especially north-west of Prome, dykes 
also occur. The rock is a characteristic dark-coloured serpentine ; it 
frequently becomes a gabbro, and contains bronzite, and it is intersected 
by veins of gold-coloured chrysotile, or sometimes of carbonate of 
magnesia. Occasionally it appears to be replaced by a form of green- 
stone; or possibly the greenstone outbursts may be distinct, although 
the two rocks occur in the same neighbourhood. The hiUs formed of 
serpentine may be distinguished at a distance by their barrenness ; they 
appear to support little except grass and a few bushes ; the greenstone 
hills, on the other hand, are covered with luxuriant forest. In all 
probability, the serpentine and greenstone outbursts were originally the 
' Koue are sufficiently large to be marked on the map issued herewith. 



Extra-Peninsular. J NUMMULITIC GROUP. 715 

same, or nearly the same, and the former rock has undergone a chemical 
change. 

In the neighbourhood of some of the larger masses of serpentine, 
the sandstones and shales are converted into greenstone and chloritic 
schist; but the effect varies, and in some instances the neighbouring 
rocks appear almost unaltered. It is, however, worthy of notice that, 
except far to the northward, all the outbursts of serpentine appear eon- 
fined to the Pegu, or eastern, side of the range ; and that, as has already 
been stated, the rocks on the Pegu side exhibit, as a rule, more altera- 
tion than those on the western slopes in Arakan. To the northward, 
near the northern frontier of Pegu, serpentine occurs on the highest 
hills of the Yoma, and, in one instance at least, on the western side ; but 
elsewhere all the outbursts detected are not only east of the main range, 
but near the eastern limit of the hill rocks. Not a single intrusion 
has been detected in the unaltered nummulitie rocks. 

It is unnecessary to describe the distribution of the serpentine masses 
in any detail. , They are principally collected in three groups, the most 
northern of which consists of the largest mass known, a horse-shoe 
shaped intrusion, some 5 miles in length, forming Bidoung hill, amongst 
the triassic rocks, nearly due west of Thayetmyo. Several masses occur 
north-north-west of Prome, in the southern portion of the triassic area ; 
and one of these, forming a long dyke-like mass, running for about 5 
miles along the boundary ■ between nummulitics and trias, appears to 
alter the triassic rocks, but not the nummulitie beds, although the latter 
are greatly crushed. Probably, the difference is owing to the boundary 
between the serpentine and nummulitics being a fault. The third group 
is west of Henzada, where twenty-one distinct and isolated intrusions 
occur, scattered over a length of 26 miles from north, to south, close 
to the edge of the unaltered nummulitie area. The largest of these 
masses is about 3 miles long by perhaps hal£ a mile broad; but the 
majority are less than a mile in diameter. Besides these principal groups, 
a few small and unimportant outbursts are found isolated here and there ; 
none, however, are found south of the area west of Henzada. 

Nummulitie group.— Beyond the much smaller amount of alter- 
ation that they have undergone, and the resulting difference in mineral 
character from the hill rocks, there is but little to distinguish the num- 
mulitie beds of Pegu from the Mai-i and Negrais rocks, except the more 
frequent appearance of fossils, and the occasional occurrence of limestone 
containing nummulites, especially in the higher part of the group. The , 
ordinary beds are sandstones and shales, unaltered, but still frequently 
hard and compact. The distinction from the Negrais rocks is far from 



716 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX, 

absolute ; the tendency to a passage at the foot o£ the hills has already- 
been noticed, and there are, in places within the nnmmulitic area, hills 
formed of hardened masses, perhaps older thdn the rocks around, but 
which have much the appearance of being the same beds, slightly altered.- 

The main outcrop of the nummulitie rocks extends from north to 
south throughout the province of Pegu, east of the Arakan hills, and 
west of the Irawadi river. The beds have a general dip to the eastward : 
but to the southward it is difficult, if not impossible, to define the base 
of the formation, on account of the apparent passage, just noticed, from 
the nummulitie into the Negrais rocks. To the northward, west of 
Thayetmyo, near the boundary of British territory, the section is better 
defined, the lowest eocene strata, however, being, to all appearance, fault- 
ed against the triassie rocks ; so that here, again, it is uncertain whether 
the bottom beds of the tertiary series are exposed. In the Lhowa stream, 
16 miles west by south of Thayetmyo, upwards of 4,000 feet of hard 
sandstones, mostly grey, and of blue, grey, or yellow shales, are ex- 
posed ; but throughout all this thickness of beds, no fossil remains have 
been detected, except a few carbonaceous markings. Apparently at a 
somewhat higher horizon on the Mahton stream, which joins the Lhowa 
from the north, there is a great thickness of massive blue shales, of rather 
a dark indigo-blue in general, but sometimes of lighter colour. These 
shales cannot be much less than 3,000 feet in thickness ; but they are 
almost as unfossihferous as the sandstones and shales on the Lhowa, 
the only organic remains found being » some cycloid fish-scales. Above 
these shales, again, there is a great thickness of sandstones and shales, 
mostly unfossiliferous, but containing a few layers with Nummulites; 
and at the top of the whole group is a band of nummulitie limestone, 
from 10 to 100 feet thick. This limestone, however, is by no means 
continnous : where it occurs, it seems to be the uppermost band of - 
the group, but frequently it appears to thin out, and in fact to consist 
of irregular lenticular bands in shale, rather than of an unbroken bed. 
Denudation may, perhaps, also have removed the limestone m places 
before the deposition of the next group. Other bands of limestone occur 
at, a lower horizon, but they are more irregular'than that at the top of the 
group. 

The whole thickness of the formation must be considerable — probably 
not less than 10,000 feetj but no estimate of any value can be made, 
on account of the imperfect manner in which the rocks are seen. In 
Northern Pegu, west of Thayetmyo, the breadth of the eocene outcrop 
from east to west is 17 miles; but a few miles to the south the 
width diminishes, till, west of Prome, it is not more than 6 miles. The 



Extra-Peninsular. J. ABAKAN. 717 

belt again expands in breadth near Thombo and Akouktoung, on the 
Irawadi, above Myanoung; but the beds in general are very poorly ex- 
posed, being covered with gravel and other late deposits. Farther to the 
southward, west of Myanoung and Henzada, the nummulitic rocks are 
much concealed by post-tertiary gravels ; and from Henzada to Bassein 
the only rocks seen to the westward of the Irawadi plain are the altered 
Negrais beds. The nummulitic strata reappear west of Bassein, and 
continue thence to Cape Negrais ; but stiU the rocks are much concealed 
by gravel. Throughout the area, however, limestone with nummulites 
occasionally appears amongst the higher beds of the group ; and a pecu- 
liar, very fine, white or greenish, argillaceous sandstone, with Foraminifera, 
seen at Purian point, east of the Bassein river, and in Long Island on 
that river, is also probably one of the uppermost eocene beds. This rock, 
known as Andagu-lcyonh, or image stone, is employed by the Burmese 
for carving into images of Buddha, and is quarried to some extent for that 
purpose. 

It is possible that nummulitic beds may crop out in places amongst 
the miocene rocks of the Prome district ; but the only known exposure of 
the former in Pegu, apart from the belt just noticed as extending along 
the eastern side of the Arakan Yoma, is in a small ridge, known as Thon- 
doung, or lime hill, about 5 miles south of Thayetmyo. This ridge 
consists in great part of nummulitic limestone, resting upon shales and 
sandstones ; and in the latter a promising bed of coal, 4 feet thick, was 
discovered in 1855, but proved so irregular as to be of no value; the 
coal thinning out, and passing into a clay with mere laminse and patches 
of coaly matter, in the course of a few feet.^ 

Petroleum has been found in a few localities in Pegu within the 
older tertiary area ; and it. is probable that when mineral oil occurs in 
later tertiary beds, it has been derived frorh the underlying eocene strata. 
Such, at least, is Mr. Theobald's opinion after surveying the country, 
and it is in accordance with the geological distribution of petroleum in 
Assam. 

Arakan.— To the west of ^the Arakan range, limestone with nummu- 
lites has been noticed near Keantali, a vUlageon the coast,, almost on the 
1 8th parallel of nortl latitude; and there can be but little doubt that 
eocene beds extend along the coast for a considerable distance. The 
islands of Ramri and Cheduba consist of sandstones and shales closely 
resembling those of Arakan, and doubtless belonging to the same series.** 
These beds are also very similar to the nummulitic rocks of Pegu. A 

' Oldham : Sel. Eec. Govt. India, Home Dept., No. X, p 99. 
2 JUaUet : Kec. G. S. I., XI, p. 191. 



718 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX, 

few seams of coal have been found, resembling in character the num- 
mulitic coal of Assam ; and petroleum is obtained in several places. The 
limestone on' the eastern side of Ramri Island, as already mentioned, re- 
sembles that of the Arakan coast near Mai-i and Tongup, and may, 
therefore, be cretaceous ; but there is no marked character by which the 
rocks of the island can be divided into two series. 

Farther north the eocene beds probably continue, until they join those 
of Assam ; but the intervening country is geologically unknown. 

Ooal-bearing rocks of Tenasserim. — Although nothing definite is 
known as to the age of the beds associated with coal in Tenasserim, ex- 
cept that they are in all probability tertiary, there is more likelihood 
that they belong to the older tertiaries than to the newer, because simi- 
lar coal-bearing deposits in Assam on the one side, and Sumatra,^ Java, 
and Borneo on the other, are known to be of eocene age. It will conse- 
quently be best to notice the Tenasserim beds in this place.^ They have 
received more attention than the other rocks of Southern Burma, but 
still they are but imperfectly known. 

The tertiary formations of Tenasserim consist of conglomerates, 
sandstones, soft shales, and beds of coal. The conglomerates are never 
coarse, the pebbles seldom exceeding a few inches in diameter; the sand- 
stones are fine, gritty, and pebbly clean white quartzose sands, or earthy 
and of a yellowish tint ; the shale beds are of a bluish-green or blackish 
tint, and very regularly disposed in thin lamiase. The coal is also in 
thin laminse, with earthy bands. 

These coal-bearing deposits, the total thickness of which nowhere 
exceeds 900 to 1,000 feet, are never traceable continuously over any 
extended area. They are found occupying isolated and detached basins 
in the great north and south valley of the Tenasserim river, between the 
main dividing range to the eastward separating British Burma from Siam, 
and the oiiter ridges to the westward near the sea-coast. The small 
tracts of tei-tiary rocks are in all probability of fresh-water origin, and 
have much the appearance of having been deposited in the small basins 
they now occupy. The only organic remains found are, dicotyledonous 
leaves and scales and hones of fish. 

The most important coal localities known are Thatay-khyoung and 
Heinlap on the great Tenasserim river, about 6 miles apart. At the 
former locality there is a workable coal-seam,' 7 feet in thickness 
including small partings of shale and clay ; at the latter the seam is 

' Geol. Mag., Dec. 11, Vol^II, 1875, pp. .481, &c. 

" This account is taken from Dr. Oldham's report : Sel. Kec. Govt. India, Home Dept., 
No. X 1856, pp. 34-56. 



riiira-remnsmar. J fEou oauui'. yiy 

between 17| and 18 feet thick. The quality of the coal is fair, the pro- 
portion of volatile matter being large, but the percentage of ash is 
small. At Kaumapying, three-quarters of a mile north of Heinlap, 
there is a seam of about 8 feet in thickness, but containing much iron 
pyrites. Some coal also occurs on the Little Tenasserim river ; but the 
only known seam is not more than three feet thick. The Lenya river 
coal, farther south, has already been shewn to be veiy possibly of cre- 
taceous age. 

Pegu group. — Above the nummulitic formation of Pegu, there is an 
immense thickness of soft shales and sandstones, often fossiliferous, but 
almost destitute of any horizon distinguished either by mineralogical 
characters or by organic remains. The base of this group is assumed to 
coincide with the band of nummulitic limestone, already mentioned ; but 
there is no clear evidence that this bed is the uppermost rock of the eocene 
group, and no unconformity has been detected between the nummulitic 
rocks and the next strata in ascending' order. The upper limit of the 
middle tertiary rocks of Pegu is equally iU defined, there being a gra- 
dual passage from clays and sandstones with marine fossils into the 
gravels and sands with silicified fossil-wood and mammalian bones. 

The fact is that, without a thorough knowledge of the fossils, the 
classification of rocks so obscure and so ill seen as those of Pegu is a 
simple impossibility ; and until the tertiary mollusks, echinoderms, and 
corals of Southern Asia are better known, it is hopeless to attempt more 
than a general rough arrangement of the Burmese tertiaries. In the 
absence of sufficient fossil data for the proper determination of different 
beds, all that has been attempted at present is to class together all the 
marine beds of Pegu without nummulites, and at a higher horizon than 
the nummulitic limestone ; and the group thus constituted has been named 
the " Pegu group " from its forming the greater part of the Pegu Yoma 
between the Irawadi and Sittoung. There can be no doubt that a portion 
of this group is of miocene age, and corresponds generally to the Gaj 
group of Sind^; but it is probable that representatives of other forma- 
tions are included. 

The only approach to a sub-division of the Pegu group that has been 
suggested is the separation of a considerable thickness of soft unfossili- 
ferous blue shales, which near Prome rest upon the upper nummulitic 
strata, and underlie the typical fossiHferous middle tertiary beds. These 
shales'have been called the " Sitsyahn shales," from a village on the 
Irawadi, 8i miles above Prome ; whilst the overlying sandstones and shales 
with fossils are distinguished as " Prome beds," from their occurrence in 

^ See ante, p. 463,' 



720 GEOLOGY Of INDIA— BURMA. [Chap.'XXIX. 

the neighbourhood of Prome. The Sitsyahn shales consist of blue elunchy 
clay, with indistinct bedding, and, except that they are somewhat paler 
in colour, .greatly resemble some of the nummulitic shales. The thickness 
of the sub-division is about 800 feet, and the beds have been traced for 
a considerable distance along the upper limit of the nummulitic rocks in 
the Prome district. 

The Prome beds succeed the Sitsyahn shales conformably, and are 
composed of grey sandstones, occasionally hard, but frequently argilla- 
ceous or shaly, hard yellow sandstones, and shales or clays of > various 
colours. A section of about 2,500 feet of these beds is seen opposite 
Prome on the right Bank of the Irawadi, and probably a much greater 
thickness exists east of the river. One of the most fossiliferous beds is 
a band of blue clay exposed at Kama on the Jrawadi, 18 miles above 
Prome. The position of this band is high, and, above it, a bed, abounding 
in Tmritelltz, and a hard sandstone containing corals belonging to the 
genus Cladocera, are the highest rocks of the group, and mark the passage 
into the fossil-wood beds. 

In one locality, Minet-toung (Myay-net-toung), 24 miles east-south- 
east of Thayetmyo, a bedded volcanic rock occurs, consisting of greyish 
trap, interstratified with the rocks of the Pegu group, and, to all appear- 
ance, contemporaneous. Nothing has been ascertained as to the source 
of this igneous formation. 

It is almost useless to give any palaeontologlcal details. Foraminifera 
and IHchinodermata are rare, and the moUusca are not, as a rule, very 
characteristic forms. A sessile cirriped, very common in some beds, 
closely resembles Balanus sublmvis of the miocene in Sind. A few small 
crabs occur ; small corals and sharks' teeth are common. 

The Pegu group forms nearly the whole of the great range of hills, 
known as the Pegu Yoma, between the Irawadi and Sittoung, no older rocks 
being known with any certainty to occur in the country between the 
two rivers. The area occupied by the middle tertiary beds is very broad 
to the northward, where it extends from considerably west of the Irawadi 
to the base of the metamorphic hills east of the Sittoung, and contracts 
gradually betVeen the alluvial plains of the two rivers to the southward, 
till it terminates in a long narrow spur at Rangoon, West of the 
. Irawadi, the Pegu group extends to a little below Prome, and some hills 
on the opposite side of the river below Prome are formed of the same 
beds. It is, however, not quite certain that no older rocks appear 
between the Irawadi and Sittoung ; for in some beds in Eastern Prome 
a species of Pseudodiadema, a genus of echinoderms . with cretaceous 
affinities, has been found, and a Terebratula with a very cretaceous aspect 



Extra-Peninsular. J PLIOCENE FOSSIL-WOOD OEOUP. 721 

was obtained near tlie town of Pegu. " In the former case the beds 
appear to be high in the Pegu group j but owiag to the great extent to 
which the surface of the country is concealed, both by gravel and other 
alluvial deposits, and by forest, it is most difficult to make out the 
geology satisfactorily, and lower beds may be brought up to the surface 
by faults or otherwise. In the case near Pegu the position of the beds 
is uncertain. 

Newer tertiary beds in Arakan. — On the Araban coast, in latitude 
16° 30' 50*, is a small island known as Kaurangyi (Koran ji), composed 
of calcareous sandstone or earthy limestone, of a very pale brown or 
cream colour, and containing eehinoderms, moUusks, sharks' teeth, and 
other fossils. The s^me rock- occurs also at Nga-tha-mu on the main- 
land opposite Kaurangyi Island, but has not been detected elsewhere. 
Amongst the fossils the most abundant are a species of Ldbvphora 
(Hckinodiscus) and an Hckinolampas, apparently H.jacquemontii, one of the 
commonest fossils of the Gaj group in Sind : the Hchinodiscus also closely 
resembles a Gaj species. The bed is somewhat similar to the " miliolite " 
of Katty war, and may represent a portion of the Pegu group ; but it is 
perhaps more probably of later date. One of the sharks' teeth, however, 
closely resembles one found in the Pegu group south of Thayetmyo. 

Pliocene fossil-wood group. — The highest member of the tertiary 
series in Pegu is distinguished by the abundance of silicified dicotyle- 
donous wood, and is the source whence all the fragments of that 
substance, so abundant in the older and newer alluvial gravels of the 
Irawadi, are derived. The fossil-wood group is much coarser than the 
underlying formations, and consists of sands, gravels, and a few beds of 
clay or shale, all, as a rule, being soft and incoherent ; although occasion- 
ally hard sandstone or conglomerate bands occur. The group is thus 
sub-divided : — 

a. Fossil-wood sands. — Sand, in part gravelly and conglomeratic, cbaracteriSed 

by a profusion of concretions of iron peroxide. ' 
h. Fine silty clay, with a few small pebbles. 
c. Sands, shales, and a few conglomerate beds, with a little concretionary iron 

peroxide. 

The lowest bed c passes downwards into the marine bands of the 
Pegu group, and contains, sparingly, rolled fragments of silicified wood, 
and a few mammalian bones. Some sharks' teeth also occur. The 
thickness of none of these sub-divisions has been clearly ascertained ; but 
-the lower sands must comprise bed^ some hundreds of feet thick. The 
fine silty clay does not exceed about 40 feet in thickness. This bed is 
quite unfossiliferous, neither fossil-wood nor bones having been found 

y 1 



722 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX. 

in it, and pebbles are rare, though a few occur. It thus forms a marked 
band in the group, and contrasts with the beds above and below it. 

The upper fossil-wood sands and gravels are by far the most import- 
ant members of the formation, and it is from them that the greater 
portion of the sUicified wood is derived. This wood occurs in the form 
of large and small masses, some being trunks of trees 40 or 50 feet 
long ; usually, however, such masses display marks of attrition, as if the 
tree stems before being silieified had been transported, to a distance 
and rolled. The wood is always, or nearly always, exogenous j a few 
rolled fragments of endogenous wood found in newer formations being 
nevertheless, in all probability, originally derived from the present group. 
The wood is not coniferous j but owing to the very considerable amount of 
decomposition it had undergone previous to silicification, its nature is 
difficult to determine. Besides the fossil-wood, another characteristic 
of this portion of the group is the abundance of concretionary nodules 
of hydrated iron peroxide j these are in places so numerous as to have 
furnished a supply of iron-ore for the native , furnaces. Mammalian 
bones are of only local occurrence. i 

The following is a list of the Vertebrata, exclusive of sharks' teeth, 
hitherto obtained in the Irawadi valley from the beds of "the fossil-wood 
group :— 

' Mammalia. 

Ta/pvrus, sp. 

Equus, sp. [vadicus. 

Sippopotamtis (Sexaprotodon) ira- 
* Merycopotamus dissimilis. 

Cerviis, sp. 

Yishnutherium iravadicum. 



Ursus, sp. 

* Elephas (Steffodon) cliftii. 

* Mastodon latidens. 

* 31. sivalensis. 
Rhinoceros iravadieus, 
H., sp. 



i 



£os, sp. 

E^PTILIA.' 



Crocodiltis, sp. Emys, sp. 

GJtarialis, sp. Trionyx, sp. 

Testudo, sp. JEmyda, sp. 
* Colossockelys atlas. 

* Those marked with an asterisk are also found in the Siwaliks of the Sub-Himalayas. 

It has been shewn^ in the chapter on the Siwalik fauna that the mam- 

maliferous beds of the Irawadi valley are of approximately the same age 

1 These genera are recorded amongst the Ava specimens in the collection of the Asiatic 
Society, Falconer, Cat. Fos. Eem. Vert. Mu .As. Soc, 1859, p. 30; but as all the specimens* 
were unlabelled, there is some doubt about the locality. 

^ See ante, p. 588. 



.Extra-Peninsular. J pliocenk fossil-wood group. 723 

as the Siwaliks, or plioeenej if the views as to the relations of the Siwalik 
fauna advocated in the present work be accepted. Silicified wood abounds 
in places in some of the Siwalik beds of the Punjab and in the Manchhar 
beds of Sind ; but in the Sub-Himalayan Siwaliks remains of trees are 
carbonised, not silicified, and there is no great mineralogical resemblance 
between the Siwaliks and the pliocene sands and gravels of Burma. In- 
dependently of the fact that the rocks supplying the materials from 
which the beds have been derived east and west of the Bay of Bengal 
are probably very distinct, there is some doubt as to the conditions under 
which the Burmese beds were deposited, owing to the frequent occurrence 
of sharks^ teeth ; and it has been suggested that the f ossiUwood group 
may have been, in part at least, marine or estuarine. The sihcified 
wood itself is never bored by xylophagous moUusca {Teredinida or FAola- 
did(B), ; and as in India, at the present day, not only all wood floating on 
the sea, but all found anywhere in tidal creeks, and even the dead trunks 
and branches of trees in places flooded by the tide, are riddled by boring 
moUusks, it is extremely improbable that the wood found in the 
Burmese pliocene beds can have been immersed for any length of time 
in salt water ;_whilst the tree-stems can scarcely have been silicified before 
being imbedded, as they would have been in that case too heavy to be 
transported. It is true that the beds containing sharks' teeth are not 
those in which the- fossil-wood is most abundant; but still some frag- 
ments of wood occur with the teeth, and mammalian bones are common. 
The beds generally are much too coarse for estuarine deposits ; and if 
they are marine, it is difficult to understand why no mollusks or echino- 
derms, &c., occur. On the whole, it is most probable that the fossil- 
wood beds, like the Siwaliks and Manchhars, are fluviatile or subaerial, 
deposited by streams and rainwash, and that the sharks inhabited rivers, 
as some species do at the present day. 

But another distinction between the Burmese and Indian pliocene 
beds requires notice, as it indicates a wide diflerence in the later geolo- 
gical history of the two countries. The Siwaliks, as has been amply 
shewn in the chapters relating to the Sub-Himalayan tocks, have been 
greatly disturbed, turned on end, and compressed by a lateral thrust. 
The fossil- wood beds of Pegu and Upper Burma exhibit very slight dis- 
turbance, and are generally horizontal. It is thus evident that the great 
changes to which the Sub-Himalayan ranges, and probably a considerable 
proportion of the Himalayan elevation, are due, did not affect the Irawadi 
valley, or only affected it very slightly. 

The fossil-wood beds in Pegu are evidently the mere remnants of a 
formation which once occupied a far more extensive area, the former 



724) GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX. 

existence of the beds being shewn by the occurrence in abundance of 
fragments of silicified wood far beyond the present limits of the group. 
At present the only country within British territory where the beds still 
occupy a considerable area is in Northern Prome. These pliocene strata are 
rather extensively distributed east of the Irawadi, between Prome and the 
frontier ; and some large patches still exist, although much denuded, on 
the west of the river, in the neighbourhood of Thayetmyo. Judging, 
however, from the occurrence of the larger blocks of fossil-wood alone, 
and neglecting the small fragments in the alluvial gravels, the beds of 
the present group formerly extended far to the southward, probably 
along the whole eastern side of the Arakan Yoma, and almost certainly 
as far as Kangoon along the Pegu range. A considerable area in the 
Sittoung valley, north of Tonghoo, is also occupied by the fossil- wood beds ; 
but no tra,ces of the former existence of this group is found south of the 
Kaboung stream, which joins the Sittoung, from the westward a little 
below Tonghoo. There is rather more clay associated with the pliocene 
beds in the Sittoung than in the Irawadi valley ; whilst in two small 
outlying patches, east and north of Tonghoo, the group is represented 
by a form of laterite containing numerous pebbles. 

Tertiaries of Upper Burma. — The Irawadi valley, from the 
British frontier to the neighbourhood of Ava, where the metamorphic 
area is entered, consists of the same tertiary rocks as are traversed by 
the river in Pegu ; but the newer beds with mammalian bones and fossil- 
wood occupy, comparatively, a much larger area than in Pegu. It is 
uncertain whether any true nummulitic rocks occur in the neighbourhood 
of the river, or whether all the fossiliferous clays, shales, &c., should be 
referred to the Pegu miocene group; but the latter is certainly well 
represented. From the pliocene gravels the majority of the mammalian 
remains hitherto collected in Burma have been obtained. 

About 50 miles above Ava, the river again runs through tertiary 
rocks, in which, near Thingadau, some coal has been found. The quality 
is not very good, but some of the seams are from 3 to 5 feet thick. 
Nothing is known as to the extent of the coal-seams, nor have any 
fossils been found to shew the age of the beds ; but they are probably 
eocene. 

The most important petroleum wells in Burma are at Yejian-khyoung, 
60 miles north of the British frontier. The age of the rocks has 
not been ascertained ; they contain marine fossils, and probably belong 
to the Pegu group. The wells are situated on an anticlinal j all the 

rocks are very soft— too much so for any fissures to remain open in them 

and the mineral oil is apparently derived from a porous stratum. 



Extra-Peninsular.] VOLCANIC ROCKS. 725 

Extinct volcano of Puppa. — About 50 miles north-north-east o£ 
Ye-nan-khyoung, and 25 to 30 miles east- south-east of Pagan, both large 
towns on the Irawadi, the extinct volcano of Puppa^ rises to a height of 
about 3j000 feet above the undulating country, composed of pliocene 
sands and gravels. The mountain has preserved its original form to some 
extent ; but the crater has been greatly broken down by denudation, and 
the rim completely cut away at one point, where the drainage from the 
interior has made itself a means of exit. The peak consists of ash 
breccia ; but lava-flows, mostly trachytic, form the lower slopes and the 
surface around the base of the volcano. Amongst these flows, some 
consist of a very beautiful porphyry, with crystals of pyroxene. 

The horizontal beds of gravels and sands around the base of the 
volcano contain fossil-wood and ferruginous concretions, and belong 
apparently to the pliocene fossil-wood group. They are capped by the 
lava-flows, and contain pumice and volcanic fragments ; and in one place 
a bed of ash breccia was found interstratified with them. It appears 
highly probable, therefore, that the volcano was active in pliocene times ; 
but it may have continued to emit lava and scorisB at a later period. 

Far to the northward, in Yunnan, in latitude 25°, another extinct 
volcano has been observed near Momein.* 

Trachyte in South-western Pegu. — About 4 miles east by north 
of the village of Byangyee on the Bassein river, 14 miles south of 
Nga-pu-tau', and 30 miles south of Bassein, a mass of trachyte occurs, 
about 6 feet in diameter, and known in the neighbourhood as " kyouk- 
ta-lon.'^ The relations of this mass are obscure, but it may be part of an 
intrusive pipe vein : there is no reason to suppose that the block can 
have been transported from a distance. It is remarkable that the spot is 
only 15 miles east of a straight line from Barren Island, an active 
volcano in the Bay of Bengal, to Puppa. It is by no means improbable 
that the Momein volcanic outburst is connected with the same line of 
vents, and that it is on the prolongation of the great chain of volcanoes 
traversing the Malay Archipelago, or the Moluccan band of some writers ; 
the idea, so commonly put forward in text-books, that the northern 
extremity of this volcanic Hue is to be found in Ramri and Cheduba, 
being due to a mistaken notion as to the nature of the mud volcanoes in 
those islands : the real character of the latter outbursts will be explained 
presently, after a brief notice of the post-tertiary and recent formations 
of Burma. 



1 J, A. S. B., XXXI, 1862, p. 215. 

' Anderson : Report on tte Expedition to Western Yunnan, pp. 90, 312. 



726 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— BUEMA. [Chap. XXIX. 

Post-tertiary deposits : laterite.— Here and there, on the edge 
of the alluvial tracts of the Irawadi and Sittoung rivers in Pegu and 
Martaban, laterite of the detrital low-level type is found, forming, as 
usual, a cap to other rocks, and having a very low dip towards the river 
from the sides of the valleys. The laterite appears to form the base- 
ment bed of the post- tertiary gravels and sands ; and laterite gravels, , 
apparently derived from the denudation of the massive laterite, are largely 
dispersed through the older alluvial deposits. 

A few patches only of laterite occur in the Myanoung district, west 
of the Irawadi ; but the rock is more common along the western foot of 
the Pegu Yoma. To the east of that range laterite is generally want- 
ing; but to the east of the Sittoung river there is a well-marked belt, of 
this formation along the base of the metamorphic hills. The lateritic 
rock here forms a plateau, rising 50 or 60 feet above the alluvium of the 
Sittoung valley. Some laterite is also found in Tenasserim, whence it 
extends into the Malay Peninsula. 

Older alluvial sands and gravels. — Along the margin of the 
Irawadi ahd Sittoung alluvium, there is a broad, but interrupted, belt of 
undulating ground, clearly distinguished from the flat alluvial plains near 
the river, both by the greater inequaHty of its surface and by its more 
sandy character. This tract is locally known as " Eng-dain," or the 
country of the Eng tree {Dipterocarpus grandiflora); but the same name is 
naturally applied to the very similar sandy tracts occupied by the pliocene 
fossil-wood group, so that the popular distinction does' not precisely 
coincide with the geological limits of the formation. 

The Eng-dain tract is composed chiefly of gravel, . derived in a krge 
measure from the neighboijring hills, but partly from a distance. A 
portion of the deposits, as on the edge of the Ganges valley,^ may simply 
be "bhabar," the detritus washed from the surface of the hills by rain 
and small streams, and forming a slope at the base of the range ; but in 
Pegu, as in other countries with a heavy rainfall, this slope is inconsider- 
able, and a great portion of the alluvial gravels are simply stream and 
river deposits. Similar beds of sand and gravel are found in many 
places underlying the argillaceous delta deposits of the Irawadi, and are 
evidently of more ancient origin. 

Besides the fringe, of variable width, formed by the gravels along the 
edge of the older rocks, large tracts of the same older alluvial deposits are 
found in places isolated in the delta, forming occasionally ground raised 
to a considerable height above the flat country around. One such tract, 
about 20 miles long from north-east to south-west, by 10 miles broad, 

' See ante, p, 403. 



Extra-Peninsular. ] delta OP irawadi. 727 

occurs east of Nga-pu-tau and south of Bassein ; another, of about the 
same dimensions, lies south-west of EaUgoon. These areas may he 
ancient hhangar deposits, or they may he caused by local upheaval. 

Delta of Irawadi. — Except in the immediate vicinity of the river 
channel, there is no important expanse of alluvial deposits in the valleys 
of the Burmese rivers ; the beds of all, immediately above their deltas, 
are formed in places by older rocks, and there is no such continuous 
alluvial plain as is found along the course of the Ganges and Indus. 
Small tracts of alluvium occur, as usual, every here and there; but the 
•wide undulating plains in the neighbourhood of the river in Upper 
Burma are composed, not of river alluviimi, but of the pliocene fossil- 
wood deposits'. 

Compared with the Gangetic and Indus deltas, those of the Irawadi 
and other Burmese rivers convey an idea of imperfection and backward- 
ness, as though the latter were of more modern growth than the 
former, and had made less progress towards the formation of a great 
fertile plain. The Salwin cannot be said to have any delta at all ; and 
in the Irawadi delta, as has already been mentioned, elevated tracts, both 
of rock and of the older alluvial deposits, occur in the neighbourhood 
of the sea. Considering the size of the river, the Sittoung delta, if the 
alluvial plain extending to the northward beyond Tonghoo be included, 
is proportionally more extensive than that of the L'awadi ; but still the 
broad Gulf of Martaban extends into the very mouth of the Sittoung 
river. 

The Irawadi delta^ extends from the Rangoon river to the Bassein 
river, and the head of the delta may be placed near Myanoung.^ The 
first important distributary — that forming theJiead of the Bassein river — 
leaves the main river a little above Henzada ; but water overflows in 
floods some miles above Myanoung, and finds its way to the sea by the 
Myit-ma-kha Khyoung, the origin of the Rangoon river. The various 
rivers and creeks of the Irawadi delta are said to be far less liable to 
change than those of the Ganges and Indus ; but it must be remembered 
that the authentic history of the latter rivers, and especially of the 
fadus, extends much farther back than does that of the Irawadi. The 
general surface of the delta near the sea, with the exception of the 
higher tracts already mentioned, diffei's but httle in elevation from that 

1 Theobald : Rec. G. S. I., Ill, p. 21. 

" Mr. Theobald considers Mengyi, 13 miles below Myanoung', .the apex of the delta; and 
taking Purian Point, east of the Bassein riyer, and Elephant Point, west of the Eangoon 
river, as the two lateral angles, he estimates the distances from Mengyi to Elephant and 
Purian Points as 129 and 176 miles respectively, the two points being 137 miles apart. 
The area of the entire delta would thus be 8,766 miles. 



728 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX. 

of the great Indian rivers ; and Mr. Theobald considers that at least 2,000 
square miles must be below the level of high spring-tides. Large 
marshes or jhils (" eng," in Burmese) are found occupying the depressions 
between the raised banks of the principal streams; and the whole region, 
especially in the neighbourhood of the sea, consists of a network of 
tidal creeks. Little appears to be known as to the progress of the delta 
seaward: judging by the contour of the coast, it would appear that 
the Irawadi, owing to its far greater size, and perhaps to the larger pro- 
portion of silt transported by its waters, had pushed its delta seaward far 
beyond the Sittoung. The Salwin traverses for the most part an area 
of hard metamorphic rocks, and probably brings down but little detritus ; 
so that the conversion of the Gulf of Martaban into land, if it is ever 
to be effected, must depend largely upon the deposits from the Irawadi. 

I The alluvial plain and delta of the Lower Irawadi consist mainly of 
a clay ^ very similar to that found in the Gangetic plain, but containing 
much less lime, and, in consequence, poor in kankar. The colour is 
generally yellowish-brown, sometimes reddish, owing to the presence of 
peroxide of iron. The proportion of sand varies, and is, on the whole, 
greater than in the Gangetic alluvium. A few thin layers of sand occur, 
interstratified with the clay ; and a band of dark-blue or carbonaceous 
clay, a few inches in thickness, has been noticed in several localities. 

The clay, in many places towards tbe head of the delta, is seen to 
rest upon pebbly sand, and the latter is frequently found beneath the 
clay in the delta itself ; wells being sunk tbrough the argillaceous surface 
formation to the porous stratum beneath. In the absence of any bor- 
ings, however, it is impossible to say wbat tbe nature of the beds at a 
depth below the surface may be ; and it is not clear whether the sand is 
the underlying formation throughout, or whether it is merely intercalated 
between beds of clay. 

On the surface of the clay, in the immediate neighbourhood of the 
river, deposits of silt and sand are found in some places, and resemble 
the khadar deposits of the Ganges vaUey. No extensive area, however, 
is covered by these sandy beds ; they form a narrow belt along the river " 
channel above the influence of the tide, and occupy a ratber larger area 
around Pantanau. The deposits of the Sittoung alluvial plain closely 
resemble those of the Irawadi. 

' Mr. Theotald considers this clay marine or estnarine, but no fossils have been found 
in it ; and Ms main arguments, founded on the similarity between the clays of the Irawadi 
and Gangetic deltas, are of course favourable to the fluviatile origin of the Irawadi day, if 
that of the Ganges be also, as has already been contended [fmU, p, 393), of fresh-water 
origin. 



Extra-Peninsular.] MUD volcanoes op RAMEI, etc. 729 

littoral concrete of Arakan coast.— In many places on the 
Arakan coast, and especially along the course of several of the less 
sheltered tidal creeks, a more or less compact calcareous sandstone, con- ' 
taining shells and corals of recent species, is found at some elevation 
above the level of the highest tides. The. rock is porous, evidently 
formed by the cementation of shells, sand, &c., by carbonate of lime ; 
and precisely similar to the littoral concrete of Bombay, Kattywar, 
&c. As in "Western India also, the presence of this calcareous rock on the 
Arakan coast affords, evidence of a rise of land within a geologically 
recent period. 

On the shores of Ramri and Cheduba, the evidence of elevation is 
very marked, and some details of the amount and date of the latest move- 
ments have been recorded. ^ By these accounts it is shewn that the last 
rise of the land took place about 1760, and varied in amount from 9 to 
22 feet, being greatest, in the north of Cheduba, and less to the south- 
east and north-west. 

A few sand dunes are found on the Arakan c'oast, but they are small 
and unimportant. 

Mud volcanoes of Ramri, &C.T-The peculiar geological pheno- 
mena presented by the so-called " mud volcanoes " of Arakan and Burma 
deserve a passing notice. The best known vents are those of Membu '^ 
(Menbo or Memboo) on the Irawadi, 43 miles north of the British fi'on- 
tier, and those of the islands of Ramri and Cheduba on the Arakan 
coast ; a few others are reported, but they are small and isolated, and 
consist only of temporary outbursts.* 

The Ramri mud volcanoes are more interesting than the others, since 
they alone, so far as is known, are subject to paroxysmal eruptions of 
great violence, and from them alone stones have been ejected and flames 
emitted. Some of the principal phenomena may be briefly described 
here. There are about a dozen or rather more vents in R^mri Island 
itself, more than half that number in Cheduba, and a few in the other 

1 Halsted : .T. A. S. B., X, 1841, p. 434 ; see also Mallet : Rec. G. S. I., XI, p. 190 ; and 
Map of Arakan Islands. 

2 For a description of the mud volcanoes of Membu by Dr. Oldham, see Yule's 
t' Narrative of the Mission to the Court of Ava in 1855," p. 339. The Ramri and Cheduba 
mud volcanoes are described, with full references to earlier accounts, by Mr. Mallet : Rec. 
G. S. I., XI, p. 188. Figures of the cones are given in both cases. Mr. Malltt's paper 
was published after page 379 of the present work was printed ; hence the omission of a 
reference. 

3 No " mud volcanoes " are found in the Indian Peninsula or in the Himalayas ; but there 
is one in Assam, and there are some on the Baluchistan coast, west of the British frontier. 
See for descriptions. Trans. Bom. Geog. Soc., IX, p. cviii j X, p. 154 ; Stifle : Q. J. G. S., 1874 
p. 50. The details differ in no respect from those of the K£mri vents. 



730 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX. 

neighbouring islands. Near Kyouk-phyu (Kyauk or Kyouk-phyoo) in 
Ramri, six occur in a line, within a distance o£ about a mile and a half, 
along the summit of a low broad ridge. 

Many of the vents consist of truncated cones, built up of the dried 
mud ejected by outbursts of gas. The crater, filled with mud, more 
pv less liquid or viscid, through which the gas escapes, occupies the top 
of the conical hillock. The majority, however, of the Ramri '' mud 
volcanoes " consist of mounds composed, on the surface, of angular frag- 
ments of rock, and having scattered over them a few small mud cones 
of trifling height (from a few inches to 8 or 10 feet), with craters at the 
top. When gas ceases to be emitted from a vent, the mud is rapidly 
washed away by rain, and a low mound remains, composed of angular 
fragments of rock, ejected together with the mud ; and a similar process 
accounts for the formation of the mounds. The mounds ia Ramri are from 
50 to 100 yards in diameter, with a height of from 15 to 30 feet; two of 
exceptional size, in Cheduba, near Pagoda hill,. being 200 and 350 yards 
across. The cones in which the mud is viscid are very steep, being built 
iip partly of small quantities of mud spurted out by the evolution of 
gas, so as to form a hard rim round the mud crater, partly of mud 
poured out from the crater down the slopes through broken portions of 
the rim. 

Besides the gas and mud, a small quantity of petroleum is usually 
discharged from the vents. The gas consists mainly of marsh gas (light 
carburetted hydrogen), mixed probably with some of the more volatile 
hydrocarbons usually associated with petroleum. The mud is simply 
the grey shale or clay of the tertiary rocks, mixed with water, contain- 
ing some salt in solution. There is not the slightest connexion with any 
real volcanic action ; no igneous rocks are found, and if some few stones 
appear to have been subjected to heat, this is due to the occasional ignition 
of the inflammable gases emitted. The only distinction between " mud 
volcanoes" and ordinary emissions of marsh gas is, that in the former case 
the gas traverses a bed capable of being easily mixed with water, so as 
to "form mud," and this, like the water and petroleum, is. carried to the 
surface by the gas. The term " volcano " applied to such phenomena 
conveys a false idea of the nature of the action. 

The association of petroleum with large quantities of marsh gas, 
and the frequent emission of water, usually saline, and of gas in abund- 
ance, from borings for mineral oil, are .too well known to require the 
recapitulation of details. Both the petroleum and the gas are produced 
during the slow change of woody fibre into lignite and coal, and both 
products are known to be found in many localities amongst the "tertiary 



Extra-Peninsular.] MUD VOLCANOES OF RAM EI, ETC. 731 

rocks of Extra-Peninsular India and Burma. Not unfrequently both 
gas and mineral oil issue with water, in the form of a bubbling spring ; 
both water and petroleum being, perhaps, forced to the surface by the 
pressure of the gas. Whether a spring of this kind forms a " mud vol- 
cano " or not, depends evidently on the nature of the beds traversed on 
the way to' the surface. As a rule, the mud in these vents is either of 
the same temperature as the air, or a little higher ; ^but in the Ramri 
craters a higher temperature has been recorded after the more violent 
eruptions. 

These paroxysmal eruptions appear to occur at irregular intervals, and 
are at times very Ariolent ; they appear frequently, perhaps usually, to 
accompany earthquakes ; mud and stones are shot out with great force, 
accompanied by large quantities of inflammable gas, which in many 
cases takes fire, and lights up the country for miles around. Some of 
these eruptions of ignited gas have taken place at sea off the coast of 
Ramri; and in one case a small island was formed near False Island, south 
of Ramri and south-east of Cheduba ; but it was soon washed away again. 
The ejected stones are in all cases fragments of the tertiary rocks, chiefly 
shale or sandstone, some of them being from half a cubic foot to a cubic 
foot in size, and a few larger ; but the majority are from half an inch 
to 5 or 6 in'ches in diameter. The ignition of the gas is ascribed by 
Mr. Mallet to frictional electricity,' and not to the high temperature 
at which the various ejecta issue ; the fact that the stones and even frag- 
ments of lignite thrown out during eruptions are, as a rule, entirely un- 
changed by heat, proving that the gas is not in a heated state previous to 
emission. A very few fragments of burnt and reddened shale have been 
found, and these have probably been calcined by the flaming gas j but they 
are rare and exceptional. 

It should be noticed that even the fiery eruptions of the "mud' vol- 
canoes " of Arakan have nothing in common with the igneous outbursts> 
of true volcanoes. In the former, gas emitted at, in all probability, a 
low temperature, is ignited, or perhaps occasionally exploded, when, mixed 
with atmospheric air, and fla;me ensues ; in the latter red-hot lava and 
scorise are ejected, and the appearance of flame is due either to the high 
temperature of the substances projected into the air, or to the reflection of 
masses of flowing lava by condensed vapours or by cbuds of volcanic dust. 

" I. C; p- 202. Mr. Mallet points out that the principle of the hydro-electric machine, 
in which the production of electricity of high tension is due to the issue of partially con- 
densed steam through small orifices of such fornl as to produce great friction, is similar to 
that of violent evolution of gas from such vents as those of Bamri. He also notices the 
well-known fact that lightning often accompanies Volcanic eruptions. 



732 GEOLOGY OF INDIA— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX, 

Islands in the Bay of Bengal. — Of the islands in the Bay of Ben- 
galj exclusive of those forming the Mergui Archipelago, which consist 
of detafched fragments of the Tenasserim rocks, and of the geology 
of which but Httle is known, the only groups requiring notice are the 
Andamans and Nicohars, Narcondam and Barren Island. 

The Andamans, and probably the Nicobars, are a continuation of the 
Arakan Yoma, the islands of Preparis and the Coco's being parts of the 
same line of elevation, and serving to connect the northernmost of the 
Andaman group with Cape Negrais. The idea expressed in some geologi- 
cal works, that the continuation of the line of summits formed by the 
Nicobars and Andamans is to be traced in the islands of Cheduba and 
Ramri, is not quite accurate, as may be seen by examining a good map. 
To the southward, the same line of elevation may, perhaps, be continued 
in Sumatra and Java, as the rocks of all these islands present some points 
of similarity ; but no trace of the volcanic band, so conspicuously de- 
veloped iu Java and Sumatra, is known to exist in the Nicobars or 
Andamans; and the northern extremity of the great series of igneous 
vents which traverses the Malay Peninsula may probably be found, as 
already noted, in Barren Island and Narcondam, and perhaps still farther 
north, in the extinct volcanoes of Upper Burma and Yunnan. 

Andaman Islands. — Although there has been a large convict settle- 
ment on the Andamans for nearly twenty years, and although the islands 
have repeatedly been visited by geologists, very little is known of the 
rocks, except in the neighbourhood of Port Blair, the British station. 
The islands are for the most part covered with dense, almost impenetrable, 
forest, and the coasts, owing to coral reefs and rocks, are difficult of 
access. The only geological information of any importance hitherto 
published is contained in Mr. S. Kur/Zs " Report on the Vegetation of the 
Andaman Islands,'^ i and in a few details given by Mr. Ball * of the 
neighbourhood of Port Blair. 

The Archipelago consists of Great Andaman, comprising North, 
Middle, and South Andaman, and Rutland Island, all separated from each 
other by narrow straits or inlets; Little Andaman, about 35 miles 
south of Rutland Island, and numerous small islets. The larger islands 
are hilly, and consist of ranges having a general direction from north by 
east to south by west, parallel to the longer diameter of the group and . 
to the line running from the North Andaman, through the Cocos and Pre- 
paris, to Cape Negrais. The highest elevation. Saddle Mountain, in North 

' Putlished in 1870. A Geological map is given, sliewing the nature of the roclis in 
all places visited hy Mr. Kurz. 

" 3. A. S. B., 1870, XXXIX, Pt. 2, p. 231. 



Extra-Peninsular. J ANDAMAN ISLANDS. 733 

Andaman, rises to rather more than 3,000 feet above che sea; Ford Peak 
on Rutland Island may exceed 2,000 ; but most of the ridges are lower. 
Nothing is known of the geology of North Andaman, nor of Little 
Andaman ; but they in all probability consist of the same rocks as the 
other islands. 

The formations of Middle and South Andaman are extremely simi- 
lar in appearance to the Negrais rocks of the Arakan Yoma, and in all 
probability belong to the same group. The prevailing rock is sandstone, 
fine-grained, grey or greenish in colour, and often containing shales 
intercalated. Traces of coal occur, chiefly in nests, no true seam having 
been detected. 

An indurated chloritic rock of a dark-green colour, rather fel- 
spathie, intersected by small veins of quartz and calcite, and containing 
crystals of quartz and other minerals in small cavities, extends for a 
considerable distance northwards from Port Blair, and probably the same 
band reappears in the Middle Andaman. This bed has the appearance 
of being a greatly altered form of sandstone, and is precisely similar to 
one of the rocks occurring in the Arakan Yoma. Serpentine and 
gabbro are found largely developed south of Port Blair and on Rutland 
Island, and are doubtless intrusive. A " micro-crystalHne syenite " was 
noticed in one locality by Mr. Kurz ; it is doubtless a form of the dioritic 
rock found locally associated with the serpentine in Pegu. 

Unlike the Arakan coast and the Nicobar Islands, the Andamans 
appear recently to have undergone depression.^ Stumps of dead trees 
are found in several places in the sea ; and although some of these trees 
grow in the mangrove swamps, others belong to species which grow 
above the limit of high tides. There mre also some records of encroach- 
ment by the sea on the coast, since the period of attempts at settlement 
in the islands towards the end of the last century ; but these changes 
might be due to marine denudation. The evidentje afforded by the tree- 
stumps appears, however, indisputable, and it shews that the movement 
of sinking must be very recent. No raised coral reefs have been 
detected, although some bands of conglomerate on the western side of 
the islands may indicate local elevation ; but, on the other hand, the exist- 
ence in abimdance of kitchen-middens,^ just where they might be 
expected to occur, close to the coast, appears to indicate that the sinking 
has been local, or else that the late movement of depression is excep- 
tional. 

1 Kurz : I. c, p. 4. 

2 StoUczka : Proc, A. S. B., 1870, p. 13, 



734 GEOLOGY OP INDIA.— BURMA. [Chap. XXIX. 

Nicobar Islands. — The geology, of the Nieobars has been described 
by Danish and Austrian observers, members o£ the Galathea and Novara 
Expeditions.^ The interior of the larger islands has pever been examined ; 
butj from observations made on the coast, a fair idea oi the general 
geology has been obtained. There is a vague report of the existence 
of an active volcano in Great Nicobar, but no traces of recent igneous 
rocks have been discovered on the island,; and although Hochstetter 
remarks thatthe highest peak of Great Nicobar has the form of a volcano, 
he is disinclined to believe that the mountain is really of volcanic 
origin. 

The rocks of the Nicobar Islands, so far as they are known, comprise 
the following formations : — 

1. Becent coiral reef formations. 

2. Marine deposits, consisting of sandstone, shales and clay.^ 
8. Serpentine and gabbro (intrusive). 

Rink considers that there are sedimentary deposits of two ages, exclusive 
of the raised cgral reefs ; and he calls the newer "older alluvium," and the 
older " brown coal formation.^' The former comprises some argillaceous 
formations in the northern islands ; the latter the sandstones and shales 
of which the southern islands are chiefly composed. Hochstetter classes 
all together, and is inclined to refer the whole to the newer tertiaries, and 
probably to upper miocene. 

This view cannot, however, be accepted as conclusive in the case of the 
sandstones and shales. Ball ^ has pointed out the similarity of these beds 
to those of the Andamans, where the rocks are in all probability older 
tertiary or cretaceous ; and the association of serpentine and gabbro is 
a character common to the rocks of the Nicobars, the Andamans, and 
Arakan., The principal tertiary formations of Sumatra also are known 
to be of eocene age ; and it is highly probable that similar rocks to those 
of the Sumatran mountains occur in the Nicobar Islands, as the latter 
appear to be merely a prolongation of the former. With the excep- 
tion of a few obscure vegetable organisms, no, fossils, have been found 
in the Nicobar sandstones and shale's. 

' Rink, Di,e Nicobariscben Inseln j Kopenbagen 1847 '. Hochstetter, Beise der Novara ; 
Geologiscber Tbeil, II, pp. 83-112 ; Vienna, 1866. A translation of tiie latter by Dr. 
Stoliczka . was printed in the Records of the Geological Survey of India, II, p. 59. The 
geology of the neighbourhood of, Nancowry harbour has also been described by Mr. Ball : 
J. A. S. B., 18T0, XXXIX, Pt. 2, p. 25. 

2 In Rec. G. S. I., II, pp. 64, 65, &c., the German term "mergel" is translated clay-marls. 
This is incorrect, as the beds in question are free from lime : see Bajl, J. A. S. B., 
1870, Pt. 2, p. 27. 

3 I. c, p. 27. 



Extra-Peninsular. J BARREN ISLAND AND NARCONDAM. 735 

If, however, the sandstones and shales of the Southern Nicobars be 
older tertiary, it is far from improbable that Rink was right in separating 
the whitish yellow clays of Camorta, Nancowry, and others of the 
northern islands of the group ; and the newer age of these clays is sup- 
ported by the occurrence in ' them of detrital serpentine and gabbro 
fragments ; for these igneous rocks are shewn to be of later date than the 
sandstones and shales, by being intrusive in the latter. At the same 
time the clays in question are, locally, much disturbed. 

The whitish clays of Camorta and Nancowry collected by Eink were 
found by Ehrenberg to contain Pol^cisiina in great abundance, no less 
than 300 species having been identified from Camorta alone.^ The 
species are nearly the same as those composing similar clays in Bar- 
badoes in the West Indies, and are considered as probably of miocene 



The serpentine appears to be much more largely replaced by gabbro 
than in the Arakan Yoma, diallage and bronzite being of very common 
occurrence. These intrusive rocks break through the shales and sand- 
stones, but fragments are associated with the Poli/cistma clays ; and 
consequently the period of the serpentine eruptions, although posterior 
to the former, was prior to the latter. Serpentine and gabbro are chiefly 
developed in the northern islands, Teressa, Bompoka, Camorta, and Nan- 
cowry j whilst Tillanchang is almost entirely composed -of ^ these rocks. 

The upraised coral reefs are found on the coasts of all the islands in 
places ; they form a raised flat fringe, a few feet above the sea, and are 
covered by a forest of cocoanut palms. On Car Nicobar, Bompoka, 
and several other islands, these coral banks are of great thickness, and are 
raised 30 or 40 feet above the sea. The formation is clearly the same as 
the " littoral concrete" of Arakan and Western India, but richer in corals ; 
and the same conclusions as to a recent rise of land are to be drawn from 
the occun-ence of this fringe of sub-recent marine beds. A large collec- 
tion of Foraminifera was made from the raised coral reefs of Car Nico- 
bar by Prof. V. Hochstetter, and described by Dr. Conrad Schwager.^ 

Barren Island and Narcondam. — The, last of the Bay of Bengal 
islands requiring notice differ entirely from all the others, by being, the 
one certainly, the other in all probability, recent or sub-recent volcanoes.* 
Barren Island has b;een repeatedly described by various visitors ; Narcon- 

1 Monatshefte K. Aiad. Wiss., Berlin, 185.0, p. 476 j Abh, K. Akad. Wiss., Berlin, 1875, 
p. 116. Numerous recent and sub-recent fresh-water infusoria from the Nicobars are 
described in the same author's " Microgeologie." 

2 Eeise der Novara, Geol. Theil, II, pp. 187-268. ' 

8 For an account of these two islands, with full references to former descriptions, see 
Ball, Rec. G. S. I., VI, pp, 81-90. 



736 GEOLOGY OP INDIA— BURMA. [ Chap. XXIX. 

dam has never been properly examined, and no one appears to have 
recorded an ascent to the peak. 

Barren Island is about If miles in diameter, and nearly 6 miles in 
circumference, the highest peak being about 1,000 feet above the sea. 
The island rises from deep water. A high encircling ridge, broken 
down nearly to the sea-level on the north-west-by-west side, surrounds 
a central hollow, in the middle of which a cone rises to a height of 950 
feet, with a small crater at the top. The whole consists of basaltic lava 
and ashes, the encircling rim being doubtless the remains of the original 
cone, after a large portion had been blown ofE by a violent eruption. 
The statement in many geological works, that the sea enters the inner 
basin, within the encircling rim, appears to be due to a misunderstanding 
of the original description. 

This volcano was very active at the close of the last and beginning of 
the present century ; of late years it is not certain that any eruptions 
have been recorded. 

Narcondam, like Barren Island, rises abruptly from the deep sea to a 
height of about 1,300 feet. In consists of a tolerably regular cone, 
somewhat truncated at the top, where it forms three small peaks. , The 
rocks on the beach consist of a conglomerate containing boulders of 
trachytie porphyry. The island is encircled by dense forest, which it was 
found impracticable to penetrate in the only recorded visit made by 
geologists. There can be no reasonable doubt that the island is a volcano ; 
but no eruptions have been recorded, and the igneous action to which 
the peak is due may be extinct. 



GLOSSAEY. 



AciciTLAE: (acicula, a little needle). Needle-like, long and fine; a term 
applied to crystals. 

AcEOGBN : (ciicpos, summit; ylyvofiai, I am formed). A siiMivision of 
cryptogamic plants, comprising Eqmsetacece, ferns, mosses, &c. 

AcTiNOLiTE : (xtKn's, a ray; Xt'Oos, a stone). A variety of hornblende' or 
amphibole, usually of a green colour, and frequently translucent ; 
it occurs in Ipng acicular crystals, and is often found in metamor- 
pMc rooks. 

AcTiNQZOA: (mtri'j, a ray; Z<^ov, animal). A class of Codenterata, called 
also Anthozoa. ^ 

Agate : (derivation said to be from the river Achates in Sicily) . A variegated 
form of silica, banded with different colours, or with opaque and 
translucent layers alternating. It is commonly found Kning 
cavities in basalt and other volcanic rpcks. 

Albite : {alhiis, white) . A kind of felspar, usually of a white or grey 
colour, and differing from orthoclase or common felspar in contain- 
ing soda instead of potash, and in crystallizing in the tricUnic or 
anorthic system. 

Alg^ : {alga, seaweed). A class of cryptogamic plants, comprising various 
aquatic forms, such as seaweeds, and also very many low types, 
such as GonferviB and BiatomaeecR. 

Alluvium : (oIImo, I wash against) . Clay, silt, sand, and gravel deposited 
from water. The term is usually restricted to deposits from rivers, 
lakes, and seas, still existing, or which existed in very late geolo- 
gical times ; and it is especially appKed to the deposits formed by 
rivers when overflowing their banks. 

Alum : (alumen). A hydrous double sulphate of alumina and of an alkali. 
Common alum contains potash. ~ 

Alumina : An earth : the sesquioxide of the metal aluminium, containing 
two equivalents of the metal and three of oxygen. Alumina 
combined with silica is the basis of all clays. 

Ambthtst : (afiiBvirTosi). Quartz or rock crystal, of a pink or purple colour, 
the colour being due to the presence x)f manganese or iron. 

w 1 



738 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

Ammonite. An extinct genus of tetrabranchiate ceptalopod moUusca, cham- 
bered witMn, and coiled in a plane spiral. The shell is distinguish- 
ed from that of the still-surviving genus Nautilus hj the sutures 
being much curved and crenulated, and by the siphuncle being 
dorsal or external. By many modem palsebntologists the genus 
has been divided into several. Ammonites range from car- 
boniferous to cretaceous, and are especially characteristic of 
mesozoic strata. 

Amoephous : (a, privative, and juop^^, form) . A term applied to such 
mineral substances as present no appearance of crystallization. 

Amphibia: (dp0f, both, and /3(os, life). A class of vertebrate animals, com-, 
prising the living frogs, newts, and salamanders, and the extinct 
Labyrinthodonta. By some naturalists these forms are classed with 
reptiles, but the two differ greatly in .embryonic, characters, and 
in the fact that all amphibia breathe with gills during part of their 
life, whereas reptiles breathe with lungs throughout. 

Amphibole : {a/^^iQoXo^, ambiguous ; the mineral having been confounded 
with tourmaline) . See " Hornblende." 

Amygdaloid: (d/iuySaA.oi', almond ; elSos, form). A volcanic rock containing 
small nodules of quartz, felspar, zeolite, or some other mineral. 
These minerals have been deposited in cavities which were origin- 
ally,, in most cases, air-bubbles in the molten rock. 

Analcime : {avdXKt;, weak ; in aUusion to its weiak electric power when rubbed) . 
A zeolite, composed chiefly of silica, alum.ina, ajid soda, and crys- 
tallizing in the cubical or monometric system. The ordinary form 
is a trapezohedron. 

Anamesite : (avdfieao;, intermediate), A fine-grained variety of dolerite or 
basalt, in which the constituent minerals are so minutely crys- 
tallized, that the rock appears homogeneous, except under the 
microscope. , 

Anastomoze : (dj/atrtd/iuiTts, inosculation) . To open into each other. A term 
applied to the veins of leaves when they unite to form a network. 

AnGIOSPBEMS : (ayy eiov, a vessel; (rwip/ja, seed). The great subdivision of 
dicotyledonous phanerogamic or flowering plants, with their seeds 
encased. All ordinary dicotyledonous plants, except cycads, conifers, 
and Gnetaaece aa^e ajigiospermous. 

Annelida : (annellus, a little riag). Annelids, a class of ApMulosa or 
Artiaulata, comprising worms, Serpuli^s, &c. 

Annulosa : (jcmnulus, a ring). A primary division or subkingdom of 
animals, comprisiug worms, crustaceans, insects, &c., and corre 
spending, to the Cuyierian Artiaulata. 

Anokthic : (av, negative; cJpflos, straight). A system of crystals distin- 
guished by having the three axes unequal and all obliquely 
inclined to each other. 



GLOSSARY. 739 

Anthozoa: (AvOoi, a flower-; liwov, an animal). A class of Caelenterata, 
called also Actmoeoa, comprising the coral-animals, sea-anemones, 
and some other forms. 

Ahtrbacite : (&vdpa^, carbon). Coal, deprived of tnost of its Tolatile 
ingredients,, and consisting almost Tviiolly of carTbon. 

Anticlinal : (^avri, opposite, and kXjVw, I incline). The curvature of strata 
in a ridge-like form, the convexity or salient angle being up- 
ward. 

Anticlinal axis. A line 4rawn along the summit ridge of an anticlinal 
curve. 

Apatite : (oTraraw, I deceive : the name was given from the resemblance to 
other minerals). Mineral phosphate of lime, crystallizing in the 
hexagonal system. 

Apophtllite : {a/irmi>v\\il!oi, I exfoHate). A hydrous silicate of Kme and 
potash, with some fluorine ; allied to the zeohtes, and occurring in 
the same manner as zeolites in volcanic rocks. It crystallizes in the 
tetragonal or pyramidal system. > 

Aqueous ROCKS : (agwa, water). Rocks deposited by water, in contradis- 
tinction to igneous rocks, the formation of which has been due to 
heat. 

Arenaceous : (arena, sand). Sandy or composed of sand. 

Argillaceous: (argilla, clay). Composed of clay, or containing a large 
proportion of it. 

Aekose. a detrital rock, composed of the materials of granite, quartz, 
felspar, and mica, and consisting frequently of angular fragments 
of those minerals in a sandy or argillaceous matrix. 

Aethropoda: {apdpov, a joint; irous, a foot). Those classes of Annulosa 
which have jointed limbs : spiders, insects, myriapods, and crusta- 
ceans. 

Aeticulata: (flwfe*J!ts, diminutive oi artws, a, joiat) . Cuvier's name for 
the great animal subkingdom comprising worms, insects, Crustacea, 
&c., now classed generally as Annulosa, or subdivided into Annelida 
and Arthropoda. 

AetiodACT?la : {aprw?, even; SaxruXos, a finger or toe). A subdivision of 
the ungulate or , hoofed mammals, having the toes of the feet 
either two or four in number. This group comprises the ruminants 
and some of the pachyderms of Cuvier, such as the pig. 

AsCiDioiDA: (aaKO'^, a bag; J^os, form). A class of Molluscoida^ also 
known as Tunicata. 

Ash, Volcanic A general name applied to fragments of rock and dust 
(lapillse, scorise, &c.) ejected from volcanoes. When consolidated, 
the mass forms a breccia, consisting of larger and smaller masses 
of various igneous rooks, such as basalt or trachyte, in a finer 
matrix. ■ 



740 GEOLOGY OP INDIA. 

Atol : (a Malay word) . A coral island consisting of a more or less perfect 
ring of coral rock surrounding a lagoon. The Maldive and 
LaccadiTe islands consist of atols. 

Adgite : (avyii, lustre). A mineral known also as pyroxene; one of tlie 
principal constituents of lavas, and especially of dbleriie. It is 
composed of silica combined with, lime, magnesia, iron, and other 
hases in varying proportions. Augite differs but little in com- 
position from hornblende, and both crystallize in the same system, 
the oblique or monoclinic, but the angles differ. 

Ayes : (Latin for birds) . Birds : one of the classes of the animal sub- 
kingdom of Tertebrata. 

Azoio : (a, privative ; ^wi], life) . A term applied to the oldest rocks, in 
which no organic remains have hitherto been discovered. See p. 37. 

Backwater. A name applied to expanses of salt water close to the coast, 
and separated from the sea by sand-spits. 

Basalt : (basaltes, Grr. and Lat.) An igneous rock, 'composed of augite 
and labradorite, often with olivine in disseminated grains. The 
term is chiefly applied to the hard, black, crystalline form of 
dolerite, and especially to that variety of the rock which exhibits 
prismatic structure. 

Basin. A defined area composed of strata, dipping in a concave form from 
the circumference towards the interior. 

Basset or basset edge. A miner's term for the outcrop of a bed. 

Bathymeteical : (/3a0os, depth ; fiirpov, measure) . Distribution according 
to depth in the sea. 

BateachiA: (jGarpaxos, a frog). The Anura or tail-less Amphibia, includ- 
ing frogs and toads. 

Bid. a single definite layer of a sedimentary rock, irrespective of thickness. 

Belemnite : dSikefiyov, a dart). An extinct genus of dibranchiate Cepha- 
lopoda, having a straight, subcylindrical internal shell of great 
strength, solid and pointed at one end, and expanded so as to form 
a conical chambered- area, known as the phragmocone, at the other. 
Belemnites abound in mesozoic rocks, especially in middle second- 
ary or Jurassic strata. 

Beetl : (j3)7puXXos ) . A mineral composed of silicate of alumina and 
glucina, crystallizing in the hexagonal system, and usually occur- 
ring in hexagonal pyramids. Emerald is a finely coloured and 
transparent variety of this mineral. 

BhXbee: (Hindi). See p. 403. 

BhXhgae: (Hindi). See p. 404. 

Bhil : (Bengali) = jhil : a marsh. See p. 406. 

BiOTiTE : (named after M. Biot). Uniaxial or magnesian mica ; a silicate 
of alumina, iron, and magnesia, crystallizing in the hexagonal 
system, and usually dark-green or black in colour. 



GLOSSARY. 74,1 

BoTETOiDAL: (fioTpvs, a bundi of grapes; tUos, form). Minerals and rocks 
are thns termed when, owing to concretionary structure, the surface 
IS raised into numerous convex projections, resembling grapes. 

Boulder. A mass of transported rock, too large to he classed as a pebble. 

Beachiopoda: (IJpaxluv, the arm; ttous, foot). A- class of bivalve shells, 
placed by some naturalists with true moUusca, but by most modern 
systematists in the Molluscoida, with Bryozoa and Tunioata or 
Asciddoida. The BracJiiopoda may be distinguished from true 
bivalve moUusca or Lcrniellibranchiata by their bilateral symmetry, 
by the structure of the hinge and texture of the shell, and, in 
many cases, by having one valve larger than the other. 

Bebccu: (Italian). A rock composed of angular fragments cemented 
together. 

Beonzite. a mineral allied to pyroxene, consisting of silicate of magnesia, 
.with a variable proportion of iron, having frequently a bronze 
colour and lustre, and often associated with serpentine. Called 
also Enstaiite. 

Beown-coal. Lignite of a brown colour, found in tertiary rocks, and so 
abundant in certain miocene beds in Germany, as to have been 
furnished a name used by many geologists for a particular epoch. 

Betozoa : (fipvov, moss; l^Giov, an animal). A class of compound aquatic 
animals, called also Folyzoa, forming a coating of cells on sea- 
weed, shells, rocks, &c., or else branched aggregates (corallines) . 
One of the best known forms is the sea-mat or Flmstra. The 
Bryozoa, were formerly classed with the Bad.iata, and subsequently 
with MoUusca ; but by most modern systematists they are placed in 
the MollusGoida with BracMopoda, to which they are nearly allied 
in structure. 

Buntee: (German; variegated). The name applied to a subdivision of 
the Trias formation in Germany, on account of the prevalence of 
variegated sandstones. The term is now used for a group of the 
new red sandstone, in England and elsewhere, equivalent to the 
German Bunter. 

Cjinozoic or Cenozoic : (Katros, recent; 4^wjj, life). The latest great sub- 
division of geological time. The name has been applied by some 
geologists, in preference to tertiary, in order to preserve unifoml- 
ity of nomenclature, and to introduce a term corresponding to 
mesozoio and palsBozoic. 

Calcaiee gbossiee: (Fr., coarse limestone). The name of an important 
subdivision of the French eocene tertiary beds. 

Calcaebotis: (oafo, lime). Composed of lime, or containing a consider- 
able quantity of it. 

Calcitb : (cah>, lime). Mineral carbonate of lime, crystallizing in the hexa- 
gonal system. 



742 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

Cambeian. a subdivision of palssozoic ro.c]$3, inferior to. the silurian. Tlie 

name i^. derived from Cambria or Wales, 
Caeboniibeous : {carlo, coaj ; fen, I bear). A subdivision of upper palaBo- 
zoio rooks, resting upon the devoniaj;, and beneatL the permian. 
The name, is derived from the circumstance that all the most 
important coal beds of Western.Europe belong to the formation. 
Caenivoea: (caro, flesh; voro,l devour). An order of mammalia, com- 
prising cats, dogs, weasels, civets, bead's, seals, &c. 
Cataoltsm : (KaraKXuir/ios, inundation). A violent flood or deluge. 
Oenomanian : (from Oenomanum, the Latin name for the town of Mans). A 
group of the cretaceous system,, nearly corresponding to the upper 
greensand of English geologists. 
Cephalopoda: (ke^oA.^, head jirous, foot). A, class of mollusks,, comprising 

cuttle fish, argonauts, Nautili, Ammonites, Belemnites,, &c. 
Cbtagba : (K^Tof, a whale). An order of mammalia comprising whales and 

porpoises. 
Cekatites : (KEpaf, a horn). A genus of Cephalopoda, nearly- allied to .4m- 
OTowies, but distinguished by a more simple form of suture. The 
distinction, however, is now known to be less important than was 
formerly supposed. The genus is almost peculiar to triassic strata, 
though species, have been found in carboniferous beds in India. 
Cebtjsite : {cerMssa, white lead). Mineral carbonate of lead. 
Chabasitb : (xa|Saf 105, a kind of stone) . A zealitic mineral, a hydrated 
silicate of alumina, lime and soda with a little potash, crystalliz- 
ing in the rhombohedral system, and generally occurring in ba- 



ChaIiObpont or CALCEDomr : (derived,, from, the town of Chalcedon). A 
variety of uncrystallized silica, with a waxy lustre, and either 
transparent or translucent 

Ghalcopteitb : (xctXKoj, brass ; Truptrj/j, pyrites). Copper pyrites, sulphide 
of copper and iron, crystallizing in tha pyraniidal. system. 

ChaiiE. a soft, white limestone. A rook of thisj kind, belonging to the 
upper cretaceous period, is largely developed in England and 
France, and has furnished the name used for the period, 

Ohab : ' (Hindi ; frequently written chur) . A sandbank in a river. The term 
is applied to the banks of sand and silt left dry on, the subsidence 
of rivers after the flood, season, and frequently cultivated during 
the dry weather. 

Chbet. Impure silica, or flinty portions of rocks* 

Chieoptbea : {x^ip,h&Ti^; ■KTtpov, wing). An.orderof mammalia compris- 
ing the bats. 

Chlorite : iyXwpos, green). A hydrated silicate of alumina, iron and mag- 
nesia, resembling mica, but of a green colour and very soft, oocuTr 
ring chiefly in scales and small crystals in metamorphic rocks. 



GLOSSARY. ' 743 

Chondeodite : (xo^^pof, grain)!. A silicate of magnesia, with pa*t of ttie 
oxygen replaced hj fluorine, occurring usually as yellow or brown 
grains in crystalline limestone. 

Chrysolite : (^(puo-dj, gold) . A mineral identical with oliTine, composed of 
silicate of magnesia and iroii, and crystallizing in the prismatic or 
orthorhombic system. 

Chetsotile : (j^puijoj, gold; riXoi, hair). A fibrous variety of serpentine 
with a silky lustre, and frequently a yellow or green colour. 

CinoPODA : (cilium, an eyelash ; ttous, a foot). A name proposed by Dr. Sto- 
liczka for Bryozoa. 

Class. In zoology, one of the great subdivisions of the animal kingdom, 
bel6w the rank of subkingdoms. Ehizopods,- sponges^ corals, echi- 
noderms, Crustacea, insects, brachiopods, cephalopods, fishes and 
mammals are classes. 

Clastic : (KXaoroj, broken in pieces). Detrital: a general term applied to 
rocks formed from broken fragments of other rocks. The term is 
intended to include breccias, volcanic ash, and re-arranged detritus of 
all kinds, as well as ordinary sandstones, congl'omferafces, clays, &c. 

Clay ieonstone. A niixture of carbonate of iron and clay, found in beds 
and nodules, and espebially common in the coal-measures. 

Claystonb. a term of somewhat- loose application, generally used for 
compact felspar, felsite, or very felspathio igneous rocks. The 
term is also applied to disintegrated felsite, and sometimes, but 
rarely, to a sedimentary rock composed of hardened clay. 

Cleavage. A fissile structure, not due to' the original bedding of a rock, 
nor, as a rulfe, coincident with it. Cleavage is characteristic of 
true slates, and has been shewn to be due to pressure exercised at 
right angles to the cleavage planes. 

Coal. Vegetable tissue, converted into a substance prbpdrtiohally poorer in 
water and volatile ingredients; and richer in carbon. Lignite has 
undergone less change than coal, but the two. pass into each other. 

CcELENTBRATA : {koiKos, hoUow ; ivTEpd, viscera). A group of animals distin- 
guished from the lower forms (Infusoria and Protozoa) by having 
a hollow digestive cavity. This grdup comprises the Antlwzoa or' 
Adimizoa eioA Sy^ozoa, and,, according to some naturalists, the 
Sponges. 

CoLbssocfiELTS : {Kokoimog, gigantic statue; x^^vf, tortoise). A gigantic 
genus of tortoise, found in Siwalik rocks. 

Compact, rirm and close-grained : a term applied to rocks. 

CoNCHiFEBA : (conoJta, a shell ;/ero, I bear). A name formerly used by some 
naturalists for LameUibrancMata. 

CoNFOKMABLB.. Beds having their stratification planes perfectly parallel, and 
in which the lower has not been eroded before-' the deposition of the 
upper. 



744 UEULUUY Oi' IJNUIA. 

CoNQiiOMEKATE : {^aon, together, and glomero, I collect). Rocks composed of 
rounded pebbles cemented together, or imbedded in a sandj argil- 
laceous or calcareous matrix. 

CoNiFEEJ! : (conms, a cone ; fero, I bear). An order of gymnospermous exo- 
gens, including pine and fir trees and their allies, and largely de- 
veloped in past epochs. 

COPPBE GLANCE. Native sulphide of copper, crystallizing in the prismatic 
or orthorhombic system, and known also as chalcocite, redruthite, ' 
and vitreous copper. 

Copper pteites. Sulphide of copper and iron, containing, when pure, 
34'6 per cent, of copper, crystallizing in the pyramidal or tetra- 
gonal system. 

CoPEOLiTE : (xdirpof, dung). Petrified excrement. 

CoBAL: (rapaXAtov). A general term for the calcareous structures secreted 
by Anthozoa and Hydrozoa. 

CoKAL BEEF. A shoal Or low island formed by the growth of corals, and by 
the accumulation and consolidation of their debris. In many tropi- 
cal seas, archipelagoes of great extent are entirely formed of coral 
reefs. These have been shewn to have been built upon sub- 
merged land, the reef-building coral animals, which can only 
live at certain moderate depths, having gradually built up the 
island as the base sank. 

CoETiNDUM : (kdrand, Hindi) . Pure alumina, crystallizing in the hexa- 
gonal system. Sapphire and ruby are forms of corundum, and 
emery is a granular variety, mixed with magnetite or hssmatite. 

COSMOGONT: (Koir/ioj, world ; yoc^, origin). An hypothesis of the origin of 
the universe. 

Cbag. The local name for the pliocene beds of Eastern England. 

Ceatbe : (jcpaTrip, a cup). The orifice of a volcano. 

Ceinoidba : {Kpivov , a lily ; tlSof , form) . An order of EcMnodermata consist- 
ing of a cup-hke body, giving off a variable number of arms 
(usually five), and either supported on a jointed peduncle or sessile. 

Ceop: Ceop otjt. To appear at the surface. See " Outcrop." 

Cbtjstacea : (jyrusta, a shell). A class of arthropodous Awmdosa, or articu- 
lated animals, including crabs, lobsters, cyprides, cLrripeds, Squilla, 
wood-lice, king-crabs, copepods, trilobites, &c. 

Cbyptogamia : (xpuiTTos, concealed ; yafiibi, I marry) . One of the primary 
divisions of plants, in which flowers and cotyledonous seeds are 
wanting. 

Ceystal: (KpiffToAAos, ice). A mineral or salt having regular polyhedral 
structure. All crystalline forms known are divided into six systems : 
the cubical or isometric ; the pyramidal, dimetric, or tetragonal ; 
the prismatic, trimetric, or orthorhombic ; the hexagonal or rhom- 
bohedral ; the monoclijlic or oblique ; and the triclinic or anorthic. 



a LOSS A RY. 745 

Ctenoid : (xre/s, a comb; JSos, form). An order of fishes- in Agassiz' ar- 
rangement, distinguished by their scales being pectinated on the 

posterior margin. 
Cubical. A system in crystallography in which all the three axes are equal 

and at right angles to each other. 
CrCADEACBiE. A great subdivision or natural order of gymnospermous 

exogens, comprising a few living genera, as Gycas ^nd Zamia, and 

numerous extinct .forms. 
Cycloid : (kukXos, a ring ; ^I?os, form). An order of fishes, in Agassiz' ar 

rangement, distinguished by having round smooth scales, with a 

simple margin. 
Ctclopteeis : (KvK\6i, a ring ; eltpls, a fern). A genus of fossil ferns, 

distinguished by having more or less rounded leaflets,, without a 

midrib, but with dichotomous veins, radiating from the base to 

the margin. 
Ctpeis. a genus of bivalve entomostracous freshwater crustaceans, having 

two flattish valves, with elliptical outlines. 
Debris : (debris, fragments or wreck) . An accumulation of loose material 

derived from the waste of rocks. 
Degradation. The wasting and wearing away of rocks by atmospheric or 

, aqueous action. 
Deinosauria. See " Dinosav/ria." 
Dbinothbeium. See " Dinothervum." 
Delta. The alluvial land near the mouth of a river. The name was 

originally given to the triangular tract near the mouth of the Nile, 

and was derived from the resemblance of this area in form to the 

Greek letter A . 
Denudation : (dewudo, I lay bare) . The removal of the superficial crust of 

the earth by the agency of the atmosphere and water. 
Deposit: (depono, I lay down). Aiiy substance originally suspended or 

dissolved in water and precipitated therefrom. 
Detritus : (detero, I rub off) . Material removed by disintegration and other 

agencies from the surface of rocks. 
Devonian. A subdivision of palaeozoic formations, resting upon the silurian, 

and overlain by carboniferous. The name is derived from the 

county of Devon in England. 
Diabase : (lia^aaii, a passage). A compound of plagioclase felspar (oH- 

goclase, labradorite, albite or anorthite), with pyroxene and some 

chlorite. The rock in its fresh state is dark-green ; it is usually 

fine-grained or micro-crystalline, and is distinguished from dolerite 

by the. presence of chlorite. 
DiALLAOB : (iLoKhxyri, difference). A foliated form of pyroxene, usually of a 

green or greenish grey colour. The name is also applied to forms 

of the allied minerals, bronzite and hypersthene. 



. 746 GEOLOGY OP INDIA. 

DiASPOBB : {Svaanslpio, I scatter) . A hydrate of alumina, crystallizing in the 
prismatic system, and fotmd in small scattered crystals associated 
, with corundum. 

DicoTTLEDONOTJS : (St's, twice ; KomXijSfciv, seed lobe). Exogenous : the great 
suhdivision of phanerogamous or flowering plants, distinguished 
by having seeds with two or more lobes or cotyledons, leaves with 
divided veins, and wood, if any, arranged in concentric layers. 

DiCTNODON : (2/5, twice ; Kuwi', a dog ; o^owf, tooth). An extinct reptile with 
two canine-like teeth, found hitherto in South Africa and India 
only. 

Dike. See " DyJce." 

Diluvium: (Lat., a deluge). This term isusedi, as opposed to, alluvium, to 
indicate deposits produced by extraordinary water action. It was 
thus applied to the drift gravels, boulder clays, and erratics attri- 
buted originally to a deluge ; and although the name is now but 
little used by English geologists, it is still commonly applied by 
French and German writers in the sense of post-tertiary or 
pleistocene. 

DiMETEiC : (2(f, twice ; /iErpoi', a measure). A name formerly used by Dana 
for the pyramidal system in crystallography, now called by him 
tetragonal. 

DiNOSAUEiA : (Setj/oj, terrible ; aavpa., lizard) . An extinct order of reptiles 
having marked affinities with birds. The order included, amongst 
other genera, Igncmodon and Megalosaurus. 

DiNOTHBEiUM : (SnVdj, terrible ; drjpiov, a' beast) . A genus of proboscidian 
mammals, having a very different dentition from Hl&phas and 
Mastodon. 

Dio&iTB : (hopdta, I distinguish). A rock, usually fine-grained, of a dark- 
green colour, and consisting of felspar (not orthoclase) and 
hornblende. 

Dip. The angle at which a stratum slbpes from the horizontal plane of 
the earth's surface. 

DiPTEEA : (Si's, twice ; irTspov, a wing). An order of insects, including flies 
and gnats, and distinguished by having' only two wings. 

DoAB: (do, two ; db, water • Persian). The area between two confluent 
rivers, and the confluence itself. 

DoLEEiTB : (SdAof, a trick 'or deceit). A rock of volcanic origin, composed of 
labradorite and pyroxene; and distinguished from trachyte and its 
allies by the much larger proportion of bases to silica. 

Dolomite: (named after Dolomieu). Magnesian limestone : a carbonate of 
lime and magnesia in equal proportions when pure. 

Dune : (Fr.) A sand-hiU. 

Dtkb. Volcanic or plutonic rock,. filling a crack in a pre-existing forma- 
tion. 



GLOSSARY. 74,7 

EcHiNODEEMATA : (l^'t'of , a hedgeKjog ; depfia, sfcim) . A great class of in- 
vertebrate animals, including seai urcMns, star-fishes, brittle-stars, 
feather-stars, sea-slugs {Holuthwmdiea}, &c. 
Edentata : (e, -without ; dens, a tooth) . An order of mammalia in which 
the teeth are absent or deficient. The sloths, pangolins, anteaters, 
and armadillos .belong to this order. 
Efflorescence: (effioresco, 1 -pni forth flowers). A saline crust forming 
on the surface of the ground or on rocks. 

Blvak. a Cornish term, for a felsitic rock, occurring in dykes. For 
Elvamte, see "Porphyry." 

Blttritm: : (jiXvTpov, a cover) . The wing case of a beetle, being one of the 
anterior pair of wings which are modified into sheaths to cover the 
second pair. 

Enaliosatjeia : (IvaAioj, marine; (raiipa, lizard)'. An extinct order of, rep- 
tiHa, fitted to live in the sea, and comprising IcMhyosomrus, Plesi- 
osati/rus, &c. It is now considered to include two distinct orders, 
the loMhyoscmria and Plesiosanria. 

Bnceinitbs. a genus of fossil crinoids. The term is often used for fossil 
crinoids generally. 

BndOGEN : (ev?ov, within ; ylyvofiai, I am formed) . Monocotyledonous flow- 
ering plants, such as grasses, pahns, lilies, &c., with simple veined 
leaves, seeds with one cotyledon, and the wood-, if any, not in con- 
cen-tric layers. 

Entomostkaca : {ivrifivui, I cutup ; oorpaKov, a shell). The lower Crustacea, 
so called from the segments of their bodies being unconsolidated. 

Eocene : (Jii>S, dawn; Kaivoi, recent). The lowest great subdivision of ter- 
tiary strata. 

BOLIAN : (JEolus, god of the -winds). Aterm occasionally appljed to wind- 
carried' formations, such as blo-wn sand. 

Bpidote : (kiriloaii, increase) . A mineral composed of silicate of alumina, 
iron and lime, crystallizing in the oblique system, and generally of 
a green colour. 

Bpistilbite : (eitj, upon ; and otj'XjSi;, lustre) . A zeolite ; a hydrated silicate 
of alumina and lime, -with some soda, crystallizing in the oblique 
system. 

Epoch. A period in geological time. 

Eeeatic. a transported fragment of rock, at a distance from the original 
bedi The term has been especially, applied to the blocks of stone 
scattered over the plains of Europe, and formerly supposed to have 
been transported by a deluge, or wave of translation, but now gen- 
erally considered to have been carried by ice ; hence the term "erra- 
tic" has become generally synonymous with an ice-borne boulder. 

BSCAEPMENT. An inland, cliff, usually produced by the outcrop of a hard 
stratum. • 



748 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

EsTHBEiA. A genus of bivalve Crustacea. 

EcjPHYLLiTE : (eu, beautiful; ipvWov, a leaf).. A mica-like mineral belonging 
to tbe margarophyllite section, and composed of hydrated silicates 
of alumina, lime, potash, and soda. 

ExOGEN : (i^ai, outside ; yiyvofiai, I am formed). The same as "dicotyledon- 
ous" 

ExDViJ) : (Lat., cast clothes). Remains of animals, especially the shelly 
coverings of invertebrates. 

Eacies : (Lat., the face). A term used to imply the general aspect or rela- 
tions of a fauna or flora. 

Ealse bedding. Oblique lamination ; the arrangement of sand and other 
materials of which a bed is composed in laminae not parallel with 
the planes of bedding. False bedding is especially common in 
beds of sandstone deposited by running water, as by a river, or by 
tidal currents in the sea. 

Family. In zoology and botany, a group of allied genera. 

Fault. A miner's term for any break in the continuity of a coal seam or 
mineral vein, however caused. In geology, the name is only ap- 
plied where fracture of. any rocks has taken place, accompanied by 
the shifting, either vertical or horizontal, of the opposite faces of 
the crack. 

Fauna (Fauni, rural deities). The whole collection of animals inhabiting 
a given area, or preserved in a particular bed or formation. 

Felspar or Feldspar : (the latter spelling is correct, the word being de- 
rived from the Grerman feldspath) . A very important group of 
minerals, one or the other species being a principal constituent of 
almost all igneous rocks. Orthoclase, albite, oligoclase, and labra- 
dorite are felspars ; all consist of double silicates of alumina and 
one or more alkalies or alkaline earths, and crystallize in the oblique 
or anorthic system. 

Felsite or Fblstone. A rock of compact texture, usually pale coloured, 
but sometimes black or brown, weathering white, composed chiefly 
of felspar with some quartz. Felsite is the matrix of most por- 
phyries. 

Fenestblla : (Lat., a little window). A genus of Bryo^zoa found in the 
palaeozoic rocks. 

Feeeuginous : (ferrugo, iron rust). Impregnated with iron oxide. 

FiEECLAT. Clay capable of resisting great heat without fusing. 

Flag or Flagstone. Hard laniinated or fissile stone, especially hard sand- 
stone in thin slabs. 

Flint. Silicious concretions, usually translucent and tolerably homogeneous, 
occurring in chalk or limestone. 

Flora : (the goddess of flowers) . The whole collection of plants inhabiting 
a given area, or preserved in a particular bed, formation, group, or 
series. 



GLOSSAEY. 749 

Foliation. The arrangement in alternating laminae of different minerals, 
as commonly occurs in gneiss and other metamorphic rooks. 

PoEAMi?[iFEEA : {foramen, a small opening; fero, I bear). A group of Bhizo- 
podn, living in hollow perforated shells, frequently chamhered. 
Globigerma, Alveolites, b,iiA Niomnmlites are examples. 

PoEMATiON. An assemblage of rocks of similar origin, connected by mineral 
characters, by organic remains, or by being of the same geolo- 
gical age. 

Fossil : (fossilis, dug out of the earth). Originally, this term applied to 
all mineral substances ; now, it is restricted to organic remains, 
animal or vegetable, imbedded in rocks. 

Freestone. A stone, usually a sandstone, easily cut and dressed. 

FuooiD : {fucus, sea-weed). A sea-weed, or a sinjilar plant. 

Gabbeo : (Ital.) A rock composed of labradorite and diallage pr hyper- 
sthene (bronzite). It is frequently associated with serpentine. 

Galena : (Lat.) Native sulphide of lead, crystallizing in the cubical sys- 
tem. 

Ganoid : (yayo;, brightness; kilo;, form). An order of fishes, distinguished 
for the most part by hard polished rhomboidal scales. Ganoids are 
far more common in the upper palaeozoic and lower mesozoic 
formations than at present. 

Garnet : {granatus, like a grain). A mineral, crystallizing in the iso- 
metric or cubical system, and composed of silicate of alumina and 
lime or iron ; the alumina often replaced by sesquioxide of iron, 
and the lime by magnesia or some other oxide. 

Gasteropoda : (yaarrip, belly ; ttov;, foot). A class of moUusks, comprising 
ordinary univalvies, whelks, cowries, cones, periwinkles, limpets, 
&c. 

Gault. An argillaceous bed in the cretaceous formation between the upper 
and lower greensand. 

Genus : (Lat., a race). A group of allied species. 

GhIt : (Hindi). A landing-place, ford, or pass. This term " ghats," origin- 
ally appKed to the passes through the mountain ranges that run 
parallel, or nearly so, to the coasts of the peninsula, has now been 
transferred to the ranges themselves. 

Glacial epoch. A period of low temperature intervening between ter- 
tiary and recent times. 

Glacier (French). A mass of ice moving slowly down the valleys and 
other depressions of snow-clad mountains, and formed by the 
accumulation and consolidation of snow. 

Glaubeeitb. • Native anhydrous sulphate of lime and soda, crystallizing in 
the oblique system. 

GlosSOPTERIS : (yXwaara, the tongue; irrcp/j, a fern). A genus of simple 
leaved ferns, with reticulate venation and a distinct midrib, com- 



750 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

mon in tie Indian coal-bearing rocks of iike Damuda period, and 
in Australian coal-measnires, but rare elsewliere. 

Gneiss : (a German, miner's term) . A MgUy fojiated rock, composed of 
quartz, felspar, and miea in crystals. The mica is sometimes re- 
placed by hornblende, and garnets or otker m.inerals are imbedded. 
Gneiss passes by insensible gradations into granite. 

G0NIA.TITE : (yuifla, an angle). A genus oi Gephalopoda^llieiiio Ammonites, 
but distinguished by having the sutures in angulate zigzag 
lines. 

Granite. A plutonic rock, rich in silica, and composed of felspar, quartz, 
and mica. The felspar is almost always orthoclase ; a second 
felspar, usually oligoclase, being frequently present also. In some 
forms of granite the mica is absent (aplite or pegmatite) . 

Gbaehite : (ypd^u, I 'write) . A form of carbon, occurring pure or mixed 
•with m.ore or less iron oxide in crystalline rocks. 

Geaptomtes: {ypd^b), I write; Xi'eof, a stone). A group of fossils, charac- 
teristic of the Cambrian and silurian periods, composed of straight 
or curved rods, with denticulation corresponding to cells on one 
or both sides, and supposed to have been Sydrozoa, allied to the 
recent sertularian zoophytes. 

GRAUWACKi. A German miner's term for thfe older argillo-arenacebus beds, 
and often employed at one time as a name for the transition series. 
The term is now obsolete. 

Geavel. Loose pebbles, with or without sand. 

Geeen-baeth. a hydrous silicate of iron and potash, found chiefly in 
basalt and other eruptive rooks. 

GsEENaAND. The name of two important siibdivisions of the cretaceous 
system in England — the upper and lower greensands. 

Geeenstone. a general name for "igneous rocks, composed principally of 
felspar and hornblende. By some writers certain plutonic rocks 
containing augite are also called greenstones. 

Geetwack^. See " Grawwackie." 

Geit. a coarse sandstone, or, according to some writers, a sandstone in 
which the grains of quartz are angular. The term is applied 
I somewhat loosely. 

Geoup. An association of beds agreeing in mineral character, or varying 
amongst themselves in mineral character, but containing the same 
fossils. The terms " group " and " series " are frequently used by 
geologists as equivalent terms. In' the present work, " series " is 
always understood as implying a more extended range of forma- 
tions, and usually as comprising several " groups." 

Gtmnospeems : (yu/ii/of, naked; anipiia, seed). Dicotyledonous flowering 
plants, with naked seeds composed of two or more cotyledons. 
Conifers and cycads are included. 



GLOSSARY. 751 

Gypsum: (yv^os, lime orehalk). Hydrated sulphate of lime, crystallizing 
in tlie oblique system. 

G-TBOQONITES : (yu(jdf, round; yovog, seed), The spiral seed vessels of 
GharacetB, found in freshwater heds. 

Habitat. The country, district, or kind of -locality in which an animal or 
plant is found Hving in a wild state. 

HEMATITE: (aT//a, blosd). Native iron oxide in a massive form, either 
crystalline or amorphous. The crystalline variety, kaown as 
specular iron, crystallizes in the hexagonal systems 

Hbmihedral : {fifii, half ; ilpa, side) . Crystalline forms made from other 
- . regular solids by the obliteration of half of the bounding planes. 

Heulandite : (named after Heuland, a mineralogist). A zeolitic mineral; 
a hydrous silicate of alumina and lime, crystallizing in the oblique 

, or monoclinic system. 

Hexagonal : (li,, six ; ywvla, angle) . A system in crystallography in which 
four axes are present, three equal lateral axes meeting at angles of 
60°, and the vertical axis at right angles to the others. 

HiPPARiON (iTrirdpiiijy, diminutive of iTnros, horse,) or Hippotherium. A 
genus of mammals found in the later tertiaries, and closely allied 
to the horse, but distinguished by the lateral digits of thfe feet 
being better developed and furnished with hoofs. 

HtPPUKiTES : (tTTirovpis, a horse-tail). A genus of cretaceous bivalves of 
very .peculiar form, one valve being conical or shaped like a horn, 
the other resembling a lid. 

Hornblende, A silicate of various bases, usually lime, magnesia, or iron, or 
combinations of these with each other, part of the silica being 
often replaced by alumina. The crystallization is oblique. Horn- 
blende is an important constituent of many igneous rocks, such as 
syenite, diorite, &c. 

HoRNSTONE. A variety of flint or chert, resembling horn in appearance. 

HxDEOZOA: (ySpn, a water dragon; ^uiov, an animal). A class of animals 
belonging to the subkingdom Goelenterata, allied to the Anthozoa, 
and comprising the hydroid or sertularian polypes; most of the 
jelly-fishes {Aealepha), and some other forms. 

Htpebsthbnb : (limp, very ; aQivoi, tough). A silicate of iron and magnesia, 
usually containing also some lime and alumina, closely allied to' 
bronzite. 

HtpoGENB : (tiTo, below ; yiyvofiai, I am made) , A term proposed by Lyell 
for the metamorphosed sedimentary formations formerly known as 
primary. The term is intended to express the idea that the beds 
in question had been transformed from below. 

ICHTHTOSAUEUS : (ix^uj, fifih ; aavpa, lizard). An extinct genus of reptiles 
inhabiting the sea, having no exo-skeleton, the limbs converted 
into paddles, a large head, short neck, and probably a tail like that 



752 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

of Getacea. The genus gives its name to the order Ichthyosauria, 

which abounded in the mesozoic epoch, and especially in Jurassic 

times. 
Igneous : (ignis, fire) . A term applied to all geological phenomena supposed 

to be due to the action of heat. Igneous rocks are such as are 

believed to have undergone fusion. Particular igneous rocks were 

formerly supposed to be characteristic of different geological 

epochs, and some geologists stiU believe in the distinction, which 
' has, however, been entirely abandoned by all the best English 

writers. 
Ilmenitb : (named after Ilnien) . Titaniferous iron ore ; hematite, in which 

part of the iron, is replaced by titanium. 
Infea : (Lat., below) . Applied to strata, infra implies a lower position : 

thus Infra-JIrol (p. 600) is the name of a group inferior to the 

Kr&l ; Infra- Vindhyan implies beds underlying the Vindhyans. 
InfusobiA: {in, axid f undo, Ijiour). A class of microscopic animals, named 

from their occurrence in vegetable infusions. 
Innate : (in, and natm, bom) . A term applied to certain igneous rocks, 

which have undergone transformation, without intrusion or other 
• change of position. Such rocks are believed to have been found 

by simple fusion in situ. 
Insbcta: (mseco, I cut in pieces) . A class of the arthropodous subdivision 

of Annulosa, characterized in all perfect forms by the possession of 

three pairs of legs attached to the thorax, and in most cases by two 

pairs of wings. 
Insectivoea : (insedum, an insect ; voro, I devour) . An order of mammalia, 

comprising moles, shrews, hedghogs, Twpaice, &c. 
In situ: (Lat., in place). A term applied to a rock or fossil when still in 

the exact position in relation to the matrix or surrounding rocks 

in which it was formed or deposited. 
Inteetebeata : (in, privative; vertebra, a joint). All animals except the 

Vertehrqta. 
Ieonstonb. Any ore of iron; but generally the name is employed for 

carbonates, especially the argillaceous carbonate of iron so common 

in the coal-measures, and generally known as " clay ironstone." 
Isometeic : ('iaos, equal; fiirpov, a measure). . Dana's name for the cubical 

system in crystallography. 
IsOTHEEMAL : ■'(tiTOf , equal ; dipfiri, heat) . Equal in temperature : a name 

applied to lines and zones of equal temperature, for any given 

period, on the earth's surface. 
Jade. A name applied to several hard compact minerals, resembling each 

other in being tough, translucent, and very homogeneous in texture. 

One form (nephrite) is a variety of amphibole, another (jadeite) 

is a silicate of alumina and soda. 



GLOSSARY. 753 

Jaspbe. Impure opaque coloured quartz, often of a bright red colour, or 
striped red and black or white. 

Jet : {gagates, from Gagas, a place in Lycia) . A variety of coal' having a 
very low specific gravity, homogeneous texture, and resinous lustre. 

JnfL : (Hindi). A marsh or shallow lake. 

Joints. Parallel fissures or planes dividing rocks into more or less regular 
masses. 

Jurassic : (from the Jura mountains.) A system of rocks belonging to the 
mesozoic period, comprising the lias and oolite, and intervening 
between the trias below and the cretaceous above. By some geo- 
logists, the lias is separated from the Jurassic system, and the 
latter then corresponds with the oolitic series of English geologists. 

Kankar. See p. 381. 

Kaolin: (Chinese). Tine porcelain clay, derived from the decomposition 
of felspar. 

Keupee: (German). The upper subdivision of the triassic system. 

Khadab. See p. 403. 

Khal : (Bengali). A tidal creek. 

KiESEEiTE : (from Kieser, a proper name). Hydrous sulphate of magnesia, 
crystallizing in the prismatic system. 

Knorria: (from Knorr, a proper name). A carboniferous genus of Irt/co- 
podiaceoB, founded on stems with projecting leaf-sears arranged 
■ in a spiral. 

KuNKUE. See p. 381. 

KiTPFERSCHiEPEE : Qiv^fer, copper; sehiefer, slate). A subdivision of the 
permian system in Germany. 

Labeadorite : (from Labrador, the original locality). A kind of felspar 
composed of silica, alumina, lime, and soda, crystallizing in the 
anorthic or triclinio system, and forming a constituent of many 
igneous rocks, such as basalt and diabase. Labradorite, when in 
large crystals, is often distinguished by a peculiar play of colours 
on the surface. 

Labyeinthodon : (Xa^uptveoj, a labyrinth; dSouj, a tooth). An extinct genus 
of Amphibia, named from the compHoated foldings on the trans- 
verse sections of the teeth. From this genus the order TJahy- 
rvnthodonta was named : it comprised salamandriform animals with 
a long tail, and existed in upper paleozoic and lower mesozoic 
times. 

Lacustrine : (locus, a lake). Of or belonging to a lake. 

Lagoon: (laguna, Ital.) A shallow salt-water lake or inlet, nearly or 
entirely cut off from the sea. 

LamellibbANCHIATA : (lamella, a thin plate; ^pdyxia, gills). A class of 
Mollusca, comprising ofdinary bivalve shells, such as oysters, 
mussels, cockles, &c. 

X 1 



754 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

Lamination: (lamina, a thin plate). The division of rooks into thin paral- 
lel layers. 
LapilIi : {lapillus, a little stone) ^ The finer forms of volcanic ash. 
Lateeite. See p. 349. 

Latjmonite or Latjmontite : (from Laumont, the name of the discoverer). 
A hydrous silicate of alumina and lime, crystallizing in the oblique 
system, and usually found in the cavities of basalt and similar 
rocks associated with zeolites. 
Laueentian. Some of the oldest rocks in Canada, of age anterior to the 
Cambrian, and named thus from the river St. Lawrence. From 
these rocks the fossil Eozoon, supposed to be the oldest form of 
life known, was first obtained. The nature' of this fossil is, how- 
ever, disputed, and by some naturalists its organic origin is doubted. 
Lava : (Ital.) The molten rock that flows from ' a volcano in eruption. 
Lavas have the same composition as intrusive volcanic rocks, and 
are divided into two great sections : (1) Doleritic or basic, con- 
sisting largely of pyroxene, and not containing more than 45 to 
65 per cent, of silica ; and (2) trachytic or acidic rocks, with 60 to 
80 per cent, of silica, and composed inainly of felspar. 
Lepidolite : (Xem'e, scale) . A kind of mica containing lithia. 
Lbucite : QiiEVKOQ, white) . A silicate of alumina and potash, crystallizing 

in the cubical or isometric system, and found in volcanic rocks. 
Leitcopteite : {\evk6q, white; Trvpirr)Q, pyrites). Arsenide of iron, crystal- 
lizing in the prismatic system. 
Lias. The rooks at the base of the Jurassic or oolitic system, classed by 
som.e with that system, by others as a distinct formation, inter- 
mediate between the oolites and the trias. 
Lignite : (Ugnum, wood) . Fossil wood, carbonised and altered, but still 
containing a much larger proportion of volatile ingredients than 
true coal. 
Limestone. Indurated carbonate of lime. 
LiTTOEAL: Qittus, the shore). A term applied to deposits formed in 

shallow water close to the coast. 
Loam. A soil composed of clay and fine sand. 

Loess. A term applied to a very fine unstratified or imperfectly stratified 
formation, composed of clay, very fine sand, and some carbonate of 
lime, occurring in the Rhine valley. Similar, beds of great thick- 
ness have been found in China and other parts of Central Asia, 
and shewn to have been probably formed of fine dust transported 
by the wind. 
Ltcopodiace^s. a class of acrogenous cryptogamic plants comprising the 

living club-mosses and numerous fossil forms. 
Ltdian stone, a black siUceous rock, either a kind of jasper, or an altered 
siliceous shale. 



GLOSSARY. 755 

Magnetite : Magnetic iron ore. An ore of iron composed of one eqni- 

valent of sesquioxide and one of protoxide, or of three equivalents 

of iron and four of oxygen. It crystallizes in the isometric or 

cubical system, and is usually found in octohedra. 

Mammalu: (mamma, breast). The highest class of Ferfe&rato, comprising 

all animals that suckle their young. 
Marble. Properly this term is only applied to the finer and more crystal- 
line forms of limestone. Commonly, however, all rocks capable of 
being polished are thus called. 
Marl. Clay mixed with carbonate of lime, but not consolidated into hard 
rock. The term is sometimes erroneously applied to non-calcare- 
ous clays. 
Mastodon: (^affrog, breast ; dSouc, tooth). An extinct genus of ProSoscit^ea, 
closely allied to the elephant, but distinguished by the form of the 
teeth, which bear a number of rounded protuberances on the 
surface. 
Megalosaueus : (/uEyoXo-great ; o-aupoj, lizard). A genus of DinosoMna of 

great size, with curved sabre-shaped teeth. 
Mesozoic : (fii(TOQ, middle ; ^lofi, life). AU formations, from the trias to 
the cretaceous inclusive, belonging to the middle or intermediate 
period between the palseozoic and tertiary or csenozoic epochs. 
Mbtamorphic rocks : (ftETo, after; liop^n, form). Rocks which have under- 
gone a change of structure and become crystalline. The term 
is especially applied to sedimentary formations, which, through the 
agency of heat or chemical action, have acquired crystalline 
structure. 
Mica : (mieo, I shine). A group of minerals, distinguished by being easily 
split into thin elastic plates, composed of silicates of alumina 
and various earths and alkalies, and largely developed in crystal- 
line rocks. 
Mica schist. A metamorphic foliated rock composed of mica and quartz. 
Micaceous iron orb. A variety of haematite occurring in scales like mica. 
Miocene: (fieiuiv, less; Kai cos, recent). The middle subdivision of tertiary 

formations, above the eocene, and below the pliocene. 
Mollusca: (mollis, soft). One of the primary divisions or subkingdoms 
of animals', comprising cuttle-fish and ordinary univalve and 
bivalve shells, or Cephalopoda, Oasteropoda, Pteropoda, and Lamelli- 
hranchiata. 
Molluscoida: (mollusoa, and eldos, resemblance). A primary division or 
subMngdom made for certain classes formerly united with 
Mollmea, but considered distinct by many modern naturalists. 
These classes are Ascidioida or Tmiicata, Bryoeoa or Polyzaa, and 
Brachiojpoda. 



756 GEOLOGY OP INDIA. 

MoNOCUNAL : (fiovos, single ; kXivw, I incline) . A bend, crtrve, or angle in 
strata, where one portion of the stratification plane is horizontal 
and the other inclined. 

MoNOCLiNic : (fiovos, single; K\iv(a, I incline). Dana's name for the oblique 
system in crystallography. 

MoNOCOTTLBDONOUS : (ftovos, single; KorvXriSuiv, seed lobe). Endogenous: 
the great subdivision of phanerogamous or flowering plants, dis- 
tingfuished by having seeds with one lobe or cotyledon, leaves with 
snbparallel and generally simple veins, and the wood not in con- 
centric layers. 

MoNOMETEio: (/iovos, single; ^eVpor, a measure). A name formerly used by 
Dana for the cubical system in crystallography. 

Monsoons : (a corruption of mdusim, a season, Hindi). Seasons of the year 
distinguished by the prevalence of winds which blow in opposite 
directions at different periods. 

MoBAiNB : (French, of Switzerland). The accumulation of angular frag- 
ments of rook at the termination and along the sides of glaciers. 
The rocks are brought down from the mountains traversed by the 
glacier, and deposited where the ice melts. 

MoOEUM : (Dakhani Hindustani). Decomposed rock of any kind. The 
term is commonly used for partially disintegrated basalt near the 
surface. 

MusCHELKALK: (German, muschel, a shell; kalk, limestone). The middle 
group of the triassic formation. 

Muscovite : (from muscovy-glass, an old name). Common mica or potash 
mica ; one of the constituents of granite, gneiss, and mica schist, 
chiefly a silicate of alumina and potash, with some iron, magnesia, 
soda, &o., and crystallizing in the prismatic system. 

Nala: (Hindi). A rivulet or brook, ditch, cabal, ravine or valley. The 
term is especially applied to a watercourse or ravine. 

Nateolitb : (natron, soda). A zeolitic mineral, crystallizing in the pris- 
matic system, usually assuming acicular forms, and consisting 
of hydrous silicate of alumina and soda. 

Nautilus: (vaurtXoj, a sailor). A genus of tetrabranchiate cephalopodous 
Mollusca-mth. coiled chambered shells, allied to Ammomtes, but dis- 
tinguished by having simple sutures. Some species are still living. 

Neocomien: (Neoconiim, Neufchatel). The lower subdivision of the creta- 
ceous system. 

Neogene: (vios, new; yiyvo/tai, I am formed). A term used by German 
geologists for all tertiary beds of later age than eocene. 

Neozoic: (vio;, new; fiu^, Hfe). All formations from the trias upwards, 
including both mesozoic and csenozoio or tertiary. The term is 
used in contradistinction to paleeozoic. 



GLOSSARY. 757 

Neptunian : (Neptmius, god of the sea). The stratified or aqueous deposits 
are thus termed in contradistinction to plutonic or igneous. 

Few red sandstone. The sandstones, permian and trias, above the coal 
measures in the British Islands. 

NoDTJLE. An aggregation of a mineral, such as carbonate . of lime or silica 
around a nucleus, or central point. 

NoBGGBEATHiA : (named after Noggerath, a botanist). A genus of plants 
of somewhat doubtful aflSnity, found in palseozoic rocks. The 
original types are now referred to OyoadeacecB, but it is uncertain 
how far the various forma referred to the genus are really con- 
generic. 

Ntjllah. See"Nala." 

NuMMULiTE : (mmmius, a coin). A genus of Foraminifera, consisting of 
lenticular shells composed of chambers aiTanged in a spiral. 
Nummulites are so abundant in eocene beds as to be characteris- 
tic. 

Oblique. A system in crystallography in which the three axes are unequal, 
and whilst two of the axial intersections are rectangular, one is 
oblique. 

Obsidian. A lava that has cooled rapidly and is consequently vitreous, like 
glass oi; slag. The term is especially applied to vitreous acidic or 
trachytic lavas, composed mainly of felspar. 

Ochre. Clay, strongly coloured by oxide of iron. 

Old red sandstone. The sandstones, now referred to the Devonian period, 
underlying the coal measures of the British Islands. 

Oligocenb : (6\lyo;, Kttle; Kaivo;, recent). A term employed by many 
Grerman geologists for a subdivision of the tertiary epoch corre- 
sponding to the lower miocene and uppermost eocene beds of 
English geologists. 

Oligoclase : (dXj'yof , little ; xXaw, I cleave) . A species of felspar, chiefly 
a silicate of alumina and soda with some lime and potash, crystal- 
lizing in the anorthic or triclinic system, and commonly found in 
granite and other plutonic rocks. 

Olivine. A tribasio silicate of magnesia and iron, usually of a greenish 
colour and translucent, crystallizing in the prismatic system. The 
transparent forms are known as chrysolite. Olivine is common in 
basalt, and usually occurs in imbedded grains of a dark yellowish 
green colour. 
Oolite: (b>6v, egg; \ido;, stone). Limestone composed of small rounded 
concretionary particles. From the prevalence of such limestones 
in the middle secondary ro.cks, the term ' oolite ' has been applied 
to the system of beds underlying the cretaceous. 
Opal. An amorphous form of silica, having a resinous lustre. Precious 
opal has a peculiar play of colours. 



758 GEOLOGY OP INDIA. 

Opikctjlum: (Lat., a little cover). A shelly or homy appendage to the foot 

in many gasteropodons Mollusca, serving to close the mouth of 

the shell. 
Ophidia : (o<pis, a snake). An order of reptiles comprising the snakes. 
Oedeb. In animals and plants, a group of inferior rank to a class : thus 

in the class Mammalia the orders are Primates, Garnivora, CJiiroptera, 

Ungulata, &c. 
Organic eemaests. Any recognisahle parts or impressions of animals or 

vegetables in a fossU state. 
Oeiental. a name' applied by Mr. Wallace to one of the great zoological 

regions into -which the surface of the earth is divided. The 

Oriental region, by many ^.oologists known as the Indian region, 

includes India, the Burmese and Malay countries, Southern China, 

Java, Sumatra, and Borneo, with the western half of the Malay 

archipelago. 
Oethoceeas : (opSoj, straight ; (ctpaj, a horn). A genus of cephalopcJdous 

Mollusca with a chambered shell allied to that of Nautilus, but 

straight, not spiral. 
Oethoclase: (diuSdj, straight ; kXcim, I cleave). Common felspar, essentially 

a silicate of alumina and potash, crystallizing in the oblique or 

monoclinic system, and forming an important ingredient of granite, 

gneiss, and many other rocks. 
Oethoehombic : (dpOoj, straight ; pdju|3o5, a rhomb). Dana's name for the 

prismatic system in crystallography. 
Ossifeeotis : (os, a bone; fero, I bear). Bone-bearing: applied to beds 

yielding bones of Vertebrata. 
Outcrop. The edge of a bed, where it appears on the surface of the 

ground. 
Outlier. A portion of a bed detached from the main area by denudation. 
Pachtdeemata : (ttoj^uj, thick; lipfia, skin). A mammalian order of Cuvier's, 

comprising elephants,' hyraces, and certain ungulates. 
PALiEARCTic : (iroXdios, ancient ; apxroj, a bear, wrsa major) . The great zoo- 
logical' region comprising Europe, Africa north of the Sahara, and 

all Northern and Central Asia. 
Pal^iontologt : (iroXaids, ancient, 6)v, beiag, Xdyoj , discourse) . The science 

of ancient forms of life. 
PALiEOZOiC; (iraXotdf, ancient; l^iari, life). The lowest great division of 

stratified rocks, comprising the permian, carboniferous, devonian, 
sUurian, cambrian, and laurentian systems. 
Peat. A brown or black carbonaceous substance formed in marshes from 

vegetable tissue by a process of chemical change. In Western 

Europe peat is mainly derived from the growth and decay of a 

kind of moss. 



GLOSSARY. 759 

Pegmatite : (w^y/za, anything fastened together). Usually, a binaiy gra- 
nite, composed of quartz and felspar without mica. By some 
German geologists, the name is applied to a granite containing 
orthoclase, quartz, and white mica. The term aplite is given by 
German petrologists to the pegmatite of English writers. 

Pelagic, or Pelagian : (irtXoyoj, the open sea). Termed, living or deposit- 
ed in the deep sea. The term is used in opposition to littoral or 
estuarine. 

Pelbctpoda: (a-iXticwf, an axe ; Trouf, foot). A term used by some natural- 
ists instead of La/mellibranohiata, q. v. 

Perched blocks. Fragments of rocks transported by glaciers and left 
isolated on slopes of hills. 

Period. A subdivision of geological time. 

Peeissodacttla : {yrtpiaaoi, Uneven ; laKrvKo;, toe). A subdivision of the 
Uhgulata distinguished by having an odd number of digits, and 
comprising horses, rhinoceroses, tapirs, PalcBOtheria, &c. 

Permian. The highest subdivision of palaeozoic rocks, resting upon the 
carboniferous, and overlaid by triassic beds. The name is derived 
from the district of Perm, in Russia. 

Petroleum : (jpetra, rock ; olewm, oil). Earth-oil ; liquid hydrocarbons 
found oozLQg from rocks in places, or occupying cavities, and form- 
ed during the slow alteration of organic matter. 

Peteologt : (irETpo;, rock ; '\6yos, discourse). The science treating of 
rocks, their structure and composition. 

Peteosilex. a synonym of felstone or felsite, sometimes applied also to 
hornstone. 

Phanerogamia : (9aj'£pdj, apparent ; ya/tf'w, I marry). One of the primary 
divisions of plants, including all with flowers and cotyledonous 
seeds. All plants without flowers and with obscure repro- 
ductive organization are, on the other hand, classed as Gryp- 
toga/mia. 

Phlogopite : (^AoyuTToj, fire-like, in allusion to its colour). A kind of 
mica consistiog essentially of silicate of alumina and magnesia, 
usually of a red colour, and often occurring associated with ser- 
pentine or crystalline limestone. 

Phonolite : ((jxavv, sound; XWog, stone). A felspathic volcanic rock, known 

also as clinkstone ; a compact mass, usually of a greenish grey 

colour, with here and there cleavage surfaces of vitreous felspar. 

' This rock is named from its ringing sharply when struck by a 

hammer. 

Pisces: (Lat.). Pish: a class of the subkingdom FerfeSraia. 

Pisolite : {pisti/m, a pea). A concretionary limestone similar to oolite, but 
of coarser texture, the concretions being larger. 



760 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

PiTCHSTONB. A vitreous, dark-coloured rock of igneous origin allied to 
obsidian, but less glassy, of resinous lustre, and frequently contain- 
ing small crystals and grains of quartz, felspar, &c. 
Placoid: (7r\a|, a flat plate; elSoy, form). An order of fishes with flat 
smooth integument. This order comprises the sharks and rays. 

Plagioclasb : (irXayiof, oblique; /cXaw, I cleave). A name proposed by 
Breithaupt for the group of triclinic felspars, albite, oligoclase, 
labradorite, and anorthite. 

Pleistocene^: (irXtioros, most; (catyoj, recent). Post-tertiary or post- 
pliocene. 

Plbsiosaueus : {irXriaios, near; aavpa, lizard). An extinct genus of marine 
reptiles somewhat allied to Ichthyosaurus, having, in a similar 
manner, limbs converted into paddles, and occurring in mesozoic 
strata. The neck is usually produced and the head small. 

Pliocene: (ttXeiwi', more ; koivoj, recent). The uppermost great subdivi- 
sion of tertiary strata. 

Plutonic : (Pluto, god of Hades). Igneous rocks formed beneath the surface 
of the earth and not erupted. 

Poikilitic^ : (notKiXo;, many coloured). A term proposed originally as an 
equivalent for the New Red Sandstone, comprising '^joth permian 
and triassic beds. Subsequently the name was used in a more 
restricted sense, but it has recently been revived by Huxley with 
its original meaning. At present, when employed, it is generally 
understood to include both permian and trias. 

POLTCTSTINA : (ttoKvs, many ; KvtTTis, a bladder). The minute siliceous 
shells of Badiolaria. 

Polype : (woXvj, many ; irovs, foot). The animal of a hydrozoan or antho- 
zoan (actinozoan) ; that is, of a hydroid zoophyte, sea-anemone, 
or coral. 

PoLTZOA : (woXiis, many ; ^aiov, animal) . A synonym of Bryozoa,, q. v. 

PoEPHTET : (TToptjtvpios, purple) . An igneous rock, composed of a com- 
pact finely crystalline mass, in which large crystals of felspar are 
imbedded. Occasionally other minerals, besides felspar, occur in 
large crystals, and the term is applied by some geologists to rocks 
in which any mineral is developed in conspicuous crystalline 
masses. A porphyritic granite, syenite, greenstone, &c., is a rock in 
which the felspar is in large distinct crystals. The term ' porphyrite ' 
has been introduced by German geologists for quartzless porphyries 
consisting of a felsitic base with crystals of felspar, hornblende, or 
mica ; porphyry being considered essentially quartz jporjphyry or 

1 This should be written ' plistoeene,' like pliocene. 
^ Correctly ' pcecilitie.' 



GLOSSARY. 761 

elvanite, a compact felsitic mass, with crystals of felspar and 
quartz. 

Peehnite : (named after the discoverer). A hydrous silicate of alumina 
and lime, crystallizing in the prismatic system, but usually occur- 
ring in reniform crystalline masses associated -with zeolites. 

Peimart : (^primus, first) . A term applied by the earlier geologists to the 
azoic rocks, and especially to the crystalline formations, granite, 
gneiss, &c. The name is stiU occasionally used as synonymous with 
palaeozoic, q. v. Primitive has been used in the same signification 
as primary. 

Primates. The highest order of Mamvmalia, including men and monkeys. 
By Linnaeus a more extended meaning was given to the term. 

Prismatic. A system in crystallography in which the three axes are un- 
equal and all are at right angles to each other. 

Peotoginb : (irpiirof first ; yiyvofiai, I am formed). A granite containing 
talc or chlorite instead of mica. , 

Protozoa: (TrpCrof, first; .fJioi', an animal). The lowest subkingdom of 
animals, comprising Oregarinida, Shizopoda, and Radiolaria. By 
most naturalists the sponges are also included. 

Pteeopoda: (irrepdi', wing; wouj, foot). A class of Mollusca in which part 
of the foot is developed into wing-Hke processes, with which the 
animal swims. The Pteropoda are pelagic animals, living near the 
surface of the ocean. 

Phlmonata, or Pulmo-gasteeopoda : (puhno, lung) . A class oi Mollusca, 
distinguished from true Gasteropoda by intestinal and reproductive 
characters. It comprises snails, slugs, pond snails (Lymnece), 
&c., but not the operculate land shells, Gyclostoma, Helicina, &c., 
which are ordinary Gasteropoda. 

Pumice. A kind of volcanic froth, the mass of air bubbles from the surface 
of lava consolidated, and forming a spongy rock, allied to obsidian 
in composition, but so light as to float upon water. 

Ptritb. Iron pyrites; bisulphide of iron, crystallizing in the cubical 
system. 

Pyrites: (irup/rij? from irup, fire). Several sulphides of metals are thus 
termed; iron pyrites (pyrite), copper pyrites (chalcopyrite), &c. 
The term used alone generally signifies pyrite. 

Pteoxene : (tvp, fire ; ^vo(, a stranger. The name was given by Haiiy 
under the impression that the mineral was not igneous, whereas it 
is, except felspar, the commonest volcanic mineral). Augite, q. v, 

Pyeamidal. a system in crystallography in which all three axes are at right 
angles to each other, and two of the three are equal to each other, 
but not to the third. 

Quadettmana : (q^Mtuor, ioxiT;manus, hand). A suborder of PrMwa^es, com- 
prising monkeys. 



762 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

QuAQUAVERSAL : (quaqua, whereao&vef ; verto, I turn). Dipping on, every 
side : .applied to the strata wMcli dip ia all directions towards or 
from a common centre. 

Quartz. Pure silica, crystallizing in the hexagonal system. The word is 
a German mining term. 

QuARTZiTE. A metamorphic rock composed entirely, or almost entirely, of 
silica. 

QuARTZ-REBP. A vein of sUioa traversing other formations. 

Qtjatbenart. a term used by some geologists for post-tertiary and recent 
formations. 

Race. A subdivision of a species comprising individuals related by descent. 

Eadiata : (radius, a spoke). Cuvier's name for one of the primary sub- 
divisions of the animal kingdom. This subkingdom included 
the modern Protozoa and Goelenterata, the JEchinodermata, and the 
Bryozoa. 

Radiolaeia : (radiolus, dha. oi radius'). A class of Profo0oa, the skeleton of 
which, when any is present, usually consists of silica. Shells of 
Hadiolama are commonly known as Polyeystina. 

Recent. In geology, the present epoch ; the period during which no im- 
portant change has taken place in the plants and animals inhabiting 
the earth. 

Reh. See p. 413. 

Reptilia: (repo, I crawl). A class of Vertebrata, comprising, besides cro- 
codiles, lizards, snakes and tortoises, the extinct orders of IcMhuo- 
sauria and FlesiosoMria, (which are united by some naturalists 
into a single order Enaliosauria,') Bicynodontia, Pterosauria, and 
Dinosauria. 

Rhjetic. a group of beds formerly classed in England as lower lias, and in 
Southern Germany as upper trias, but now separated by many 
geologists as an intermediate formation, and named from the 
Rheeti, the ancient inhabitants of the Tyrol. This group is also 
known as the Avicula contorta zone, and in Southern Austria as 
Kossener-schichten. 

Rhizopoda: (pt^a, a root; ttovs, a foot). A class of Proio«oa, comprising 
the Foramirdfera and many forms without shells, such as Amoeba, 
all of very simple organization, and having the power of thrusting 
out portions of their body as processes of variable form called 
' psevdo^odia.' 

Rhombohedeal : (po/i^o;, a rhomb; elpa, a side). A name often used in- 
stead of hexagonal for the system in crystallography with four axes. 

Rhtolite : {pvofiai, I protect). A rock allied to trachyte and felsite in com- 
position. A compact or vitreous matrix enclosing grains or 
crystals of felspar, mica or quartz. The proportion of silica is 
larger than in trachyte. 



GLOSSARY. 763 

Roches moutonn^ es. Rocks that have been rounded off and polislied by- 
ice action. 
Rock. In geological writings, this word is understood to mean any mineral 
substance occurring in large masses. Sand and clay in large 
quantities form rocks, as well as limestone or granite. 
Rock salt. Common salt occurring as a rock. 

RoDENTiA : (rodo, I gnaw). An order of mammals distinguished by having 
the anterior teeth in each jaw modified into powerful cutting 
weapons. Rodents comprise squirrels, rats, porcupines, hares, 
and a few other forms. 

RtTMiNANTiA : (rvmimo, I ruminate). A subdivision of the mammalian order 
Ungulata, comprising all animals which chew the cud, such as 
oxen, sheep, antilopes, deer, and camels. 

Rdtile : (rutilus, redi). A mineral composed of titanic acid, crystallizing 
in the pyramidal system, and occurring, usually, in imbedded 
crystals, and not unfrequently in acicular forms traversing quartz, 
in granite, gneiss and other rocks. 

Sacchaeoid: (acLK^ap, sugar; Hloi, form). A granular structure resem- 
bling that of loaf-sugar. 

Salipeeous oe Salipeeian : {sal, salt ; fero, I bear). Salt-bearing : a term 
applied by some geologists as a distinctive name to the triassic 
system. 

Sandstone. A rock composed of sand cemented together. 

Saueian : (ffowpa, lizard). Reptiles, and especially fossil reptiles, akin to 
lizards. 

SOAEP. A steep face of rock bounding a bed. 

Schist: (<rxtf<i>, I cleave). A metamorphio rock, having a distinctly 
foliated structure. 

SCHOEL. The black opaque variety of tourmaline, common in metamor- 
phio rocks. 

ScoiECiTE : ((tkoiXj/I, a worm ; in allusion to its behaviour before the blow- 
pipe). A zeolitic Inineral, occurring in acicular crystals, belonging 
to the oblique system, found chiefly in basaltic rocks, and con- 
sisting of hydrous silicate of alumina and lime. 

ScoEiJi : (Lat., slag). The vesicular portions of a lava flow, or the equally 
vesicular fragments ejected from volcanoes during eruption. The 
term is sometimes used as synoliymous with volcanic ash, which 
is, however, of more general appUoation. 

Seam. A bed or stratum: a term often used for beds of coal. 

Secondaet. a term originally applied to the sedimentary fossiKferous rocks 
above the primary crystaUine strata and below the later or tertiary 
beds, but subsequently restricted to the formations from the 
triassic to the cretaceous inclusive, and used as synonymous with 
mesozoic. 



764 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

Section: {seco, I cut). A face of rocks exposed by nature or art, or 
represented in a drawing. 

Sediment. Earthy deposit from mechanical suspension in water. 

Sedimentary books. Rocks formed of sediment. 

Sbnonian : (from Senones, the Latin name of a people whose chief town 
was Agendicum, now Sens). A subdivision of the cretaceous 
system in France, corresponding to the upper chalk of English - 
geologists. 

Series. A collection of beds comprising several groups, connected by 
stratigraphical relations or by similarity of organic remains. 
See " Group." 

Serpentine. A mineral, usually of a greenish colour, consisting of 
hydrous silicate of magnesia ; a rock composed of the mineral in a 
more or less pure state. 

Shale. A consolidated and well-laminated argillaceous rock. 

Shingle., Loose pebbles, especially those on the sea-shore. 

Silica: (silex, a flint). Silicic acid, a compound of the element silicon 
and oxygen. Quartz is the same as silica. 

Siliceous. Composed partly or wholly of silica or quartz. 

Silt. Fine sediment from water, especially from rivers. 

Silurian : {Silures, the ancient inhabitants of a part of Western England 
and Wales). A system or series of lower palaeozoic rocks, above 
the Cambrian and below the Devonian. ' 

SiRENiA: {atiphv, a siren or mermaid). An order of marine mammals, 
including the dugong, manatee, and Rhytina. 

Slate. A fissile non-crystalline argillaceous rock, the planes of separation 
in which are not due to bedding, but to cleavage. This is the 
true geological definition ; but the term is often applied to hardened 
shales, which are bedded, not cleaved, and to schists, which are 
crystalline. 

Slickensides. a mining term applied to the smoothed and striated sur. 
faces of a fissure along which movement or faulting has taken place. 

Soapstone. See " Steatite." 

Spar. A common term for mineral crystals. 

Species. All plants or animals which resemble each other so closely in all 
characters, that it is convenient to call them by one name, form a 
species. They are suppcised to be in general more closely con- 
nected by descent than different species are ; but this rule is not 
quite accurate or certain; The term was originally applied to aU 
individuals supposed to be descended from one pair, or one parent 
stock ; but the definition is no longer considered sufficient, as it is 
believed that different species are connected by descent, and that 
specific distinction is frequently a matter of convenience in 
classification. 



GLOSSARY. 765 

Spinel. A mineral composed essentially of alumina and magnesia, the mag- 
nesia being sometimes replaced by lime or iron protoxide. Spinel 
crystallizes in the cubical system, and generally occurs in oc- 
tobedra. 

Spongida, or SpongiozoA: ((TTroyyia, a sponge). Sponges: a class of animals 
referred by most -wTiters to Protozoa, but lately by some naturalists 
to Gcelenterata, and considered by others a distinct subkingdom. 

Spore : (^avopd, seed). The reproductive germ of a cryptogamic plant. 

Stalactite : {aTaXdaaut, I drop). Earthy matter forming icicle-like projec- 
tions, and separated from solution in water, through the evaporation 
of the latter, whilst trickling down cliffs, or dropping from the 
roofs of caves. The material is commonly carbonate of lime, less 
. frequently chalcedony or some other mineral. 

Stalagmite : {ardXayfia, a drop). Projections from the floor of a cave, pro- 
duced, in the same manner as stalactites from the roof, by the 
evaporation of water dropping 'from above, and depositing carbonate 
of lime or any other mineral from solution. 

Steatite, or Soapstone : {ariap, fat). A form of talc ; a massive soft mineral, 
having a waxy lustre and a greasy or soapy feel. 

Stilbitb : (arlX^ri, lustre). A zeolitic mineral : a hydrous silicate of alumina 
and lime, crystallizing in the prismatic system, and occurring 
commonly in basaltic rocks. 

Stratum : pi. Strata : (stratus, spread). A bed or layer of a sedimentary 
rock. 

Strike. A line drawn along a bed at right angles to the dip, being the 
intersection between the plane formed by the bed and the earth's 
surface, if horizontal. The line of outcrop of any stratum on level 
ground. 

SuBCRTSTALLiNE* Imperfectly crystalline. The prefix svib, under, indicates 
that the word to which it is added is to be understood as employed 
in a minor or inferior degree. 

Sub-Himalayas. The low ranges, along the southern base of the Himalayas, 
composed of tertiary rocks. The term is also applied to the rocks 
forming the low ranges in question. 

Submetamorphic. Partially or imperfectly metamorphic. The term is 
applied to the transition rocks of India, which are sometimes 
highly crystalline, but more frequently unaltered. 

Syenite : (from Syene, in Egypt). A plutonic rock, composed of felspar, 
quartz, and hornblende, and only differing from granite by the 
substitution of hornblende for mica. This is the signification of 
the term as employed by English geologists; but by German 
writers the name is used for a tock composed of orthoclase felspar 
and hornblende, without quartz, and the quartziferous rock is called 
syenitic granite. 



766 GEOLOGY OF INDIA. 

Syltinb : (from Sihius, a proper name). Native cHoride of potassium. 

Symphysis : (o-u/u^uirtf, a growing together). The union of two bones. 

Synclinal: {aw, together; kS1vu>, I incline). The curvature of strata in a 
trough or valley like form, the convexity or salient angle being 
downward. 

Synclinal axis. A line drawn along the lowest portion of a synclinal 
curve. 

System. A term applied in geology to the whole series of beds representing 
a subdivision of geological time, as the cretaceous system or 
tertiary system. 

Talc : (derivation uncertain ; said to be from an Arabic word). A hydrous 
silicate of magnesia, rarely crystallizing in the prismatic system, 
more commonly occurring in f oKated masses or granular, very soft, 
and with a pearly lustre. The massive form is known as steatite 
or soapstone. 

Talus. The loose detritus accumulated by falling from the face of a cKfE, 
precipice or slope, and not rearranged by water. 

Tbeai. See p. 404 

Teetiary. The third or upper great division of geological time, including 
all formations above the cretaceous and below the deposits of the 
glacial epoch. The name is synonymous with Gcenozoio. 

Tbteagonal : (Ttrpayu 1/05, four-angled). Dana's name for the pyramidal or 
dimetric system in crystallography. 

Thomsonitb : (named after Prof. Thomson). A zeolite, crystallizing in the 
prismatic system, and consisting of hydrous silicate of alumina, 
lime and soda. It usually occurs in radiated masses. 

TiN-STONE. Oxide of tin, crystallizing in the pyramidal system. 

TotJEMALiNE : (turamali, Cingalese). A mineral, crystallizing in the hexa- 
gonal system, and commonly occurring in six-sided prisms. It is 
of variable composition, containing silicic and boracic acid, with 
alumina and magnesia, iron, soda, potash, or other bases, as well 
as a small percentage of fluorine. It is common in metamorphic 
rocks, occurring most frequently in the form of sdhorl. 

Teachytb : (rpaxv?, rough). A volcanic rock, usually of a pale colour, and 

mainly composed of felspar ; a rough mass, frequently with 

imbedded crystals of sanidine (glassy felspar, a variety of ortho- 

clase). Some hornblende or augite and dark-coloured mica are 

■ also present in most trachytes. 

Teansition: {trimseo, I go over). The rocks forming a passage from the 
crystalline gneiss and schists to the fossiliferous sedimentary rocks. 

Teap: (trajppa, a stair, Swedish; treppe, German). A name originally 
applied to tabular greenstone and basaltic rocks, from their fre- 
quently occurring in hills with step-like terraces on the sides. 
The term subsequently was used in a somewhat vague manner for 



GLOSSARY. 767 

all igneous rocks not distinctly granitic. By some geologists the 
name is now disused ; by others it is restricted to stratified lavas, 
whether basaltic or trachytic, and to intrusive dykes and masses of 
basalt, greenstone, trachyte, or similar rocks. The term is too 
generally used to be abandoned ; and for the ancient bedded lavas, 
which cover so enormous an area in India, no term equally 
expressive exists. 
Teavbetine : (Tiburtirms, from Tibur, near Eome). Calcareous tufa de- 
posited from the water of springs holding lime in solution. 
Teemolite : (from Tremola, in Switzerland). A variety of hornblende, of 
a pale and often white colour, usually in fibrous radiated aggregates, 
and composed of silicate of magnesia and lime. 
Teias. The lowest subdivision of mesozoic strata, overlying the permian 
or uppermost palaeozoic series. The name is derived from the 
three groups of which the series consists in Grermany and 
elsewhere. 
Tkiclinic: (rptj, thrice; kX(v(u, I incline). A name of Dana's for the 

anorthic system in crystallography. 
Teimeteic: (rpii, thrice; nirpov, a measure). A name formerly employed 
by Dana for the prismatic system in crystallography, now called 
by him orthorhombio. 
Teilobita: (Tpij, thrice; XojSof, a lobe). A group of OrMsiacea only found 
in palaeozoic rocks, and having some resemblance in general form 
to a woodlouse. The cephalic shield is longitudinally divided 
into ttiree by sutures. 
Tufa : (Ital.) Any porous vesicular rock. The term is generally restricted 

to calcareous deposits from springs. 
TuPi'. A volcanic formation composed of loose material, scoriae, lapilli, &c., 
cemented together. The term is especially applied to subaqueous 
volcanic accumulations, 
TuHiCATA : (tunica, a garment). A synonym of Aseidioida : a class of Mol- 

luscoida without shells. 
UnCOKFoemable : Unconpoemitt. Strata are unconformable to each other 
when the lower has suffered from denudation before the deposition 
of the upper, or, in a minor degree, when the upper overlaps the 
lower. As a general rule, the planes of deposition in unconform- 
able strata are not parallel to each other, but there are exceptions 
for instance, the lower bed may have been partially denuded whilst 
still perfectly horizontal, and a second horizontal bed may be 
deposited on the denuded surface of the first, without the latter 
having been disturbed. In this case the bedding planes in both 
continue parallel, although the two are quite unconformable. 
Ungulata: (ungula, a hoof). An order comprising all herbivorous and 
hoofed mammals, except the Proloscidea. It includes the Pachy- 



v768 GEOLOGY OP INDIA. 

dermata and Rwminardia of Cuvier, with the exclusion of JElephas 

and Hyrax. 
Uniclinal : (mms, one ; kXivui, I incline). See " MonocUnal." The term 

'uniolmal' being of improper construction, has been generally 

abandoned for the synonym. 
Unsteatipied. Rocks which do not occur in layers or strata. 
Variety. A subdivision of an animal or vegetable species founded on 

minor characters. 
Vein. In geology, a fissure filled with some mineral substance differing 

from that of the rock around. 
Vebmes : (Lat., worms). A Linnsean name for several classes of Invertehrata, 

including insects, mollusks, Zoophyta, &c. It is now sometimes 

used as a synonym of Armelida ; sometimes of Anwuloida. At 

p. 286, it is employed in the former signification. 
Vertebbata : (vertebra, a joint, from verto, I turn). A primary division or 

subkingdom of animals comprising all provided with a spine or 

backbone composed of joints called vertebrae. Mammals, birds, 

reptUes, amphibians, and fishes constitute the subkingdom. 
Volcanic : (Vuharms, god of fire). Igneous action at the surface of the 

earth, in contradistinction to phitonio action, which takes place 

beneath the surface. 
Volcanic ash. See " Ash." 
Wack6. a German mining term for a somewhat decomposed state of 

doleritic and greenstone rocks. 
Whin : Whinstone. A Scotch term for basalt or greenstone. 
WoLLASTONiTE : (named after Dr.WoUaston). Silicate of lime, crystallizing 

in the oblique system. 
Zamites. a genus of fossil cycadeaceous plants allied to the existing 

Zcmda. 
Zechstein: (German, mine-stone). A German term for the upper sub- 
division of the permian series, corresponding to the magnesian 

limestone of England. 
Zeolite : (few, I boil). A group of minerals, hydrous silicates of alumina 

and various earths and alkalies, all characterized by intumescence 

before the blowpipe. Several of the species are common in 

amygdaloidal volcanic rocks, filling the cavities. 
Zircon: (from ja/rgon, an old term for the gem). Silicate of ziroonia, 

crystallizing in the pyramidal system. Zircons are found in some 

crystalline rocks. 
ZoOPHyTA : (f<5ov, an animal; (jivrov, a plant). A term applied to the 

animals of Hydroeoa, sea-anemones and corals, or to all typical 

sessile Gcelenterata, and sometimes to Bryoeoa. 



INDEX. 



Abbottabad, 498, 500, 501, 502, 505, 

511, 
Absence of fossils in oldec rocks . 
Abu,, Mount .... 

Abu, Mount, Himalayan planfe on 
Accessory minerals in Bundelkhand 

gneiss 
Adam's bridge 
Adjai river . . , .• 178, 179, 
Adjai river, Talchir outliers on 
AfBnities of recent, land shells 
Africa and India, land connexion be 

tween . * . xxxv, xxxix, lii, Ixviii, 
Africa, recent mammalia df 
Africa, Soutb, cretaceous beds of . 
Africa, South, Jurassic beds of 
Africa, South, formations allied to 

Gondw^nas' xxxiii, 

Afridi mountains, 478, 485, 498, 502, 

503, 505, 

Agani valley 

Agate flake, Godavari alluvium 
Agates in Deccan traps 
Agates in tertiary gravels 
Agate knives and, cores 
Agori 
Agra . 

Agra, height above sea 
Agror 
Ahmedabad 
Ahoni . 
Aikona 

Ajabgarh group 
Ajigarh 
Ajmir ...... 48, 

Akbarpur • 

Aknapali 

Akola . 

Akouktoung 

Akrani 

Aktagh 

Aktasb 

Akyab 



35, 78, 



PASE 






PAHB 




Alampur 


\ . 


220 




Alandanapuram 


276 


567 


Alapali 




235 


1 


Alhertia 


speciosa ..... 


114 


48 


Albite granite, Pamir 


657 


374 


Albite in 


central gneiss of Himalayas 


628 




Alethopt 


ens whUlyensis . 157, 159, 


160 


16 


Alikur 




248 


377 


Allahabad . , 


. 30 


184 


Allahabad, height above sea 


392 


173 


Alii . 




295 


Ixix 


Alluvial 


deposits of Tibet . ... 


672 




Alluvial 


deposits, older ... 


382 


' Ixix 


Alluvial 


plains of Narbada, Tapti, &c. -. 


' 383 


Ixvii 


Alluvial 


plains of Tapti valley . 


387 


292 


,»• 


„ ,„ elevation 


388 


261 


„ 


„ „ salt in . 


. 388 




Alluvial sands and gravels, older, Burmi 


726 


122 


. Alluvium, Indo-gangetic, see Indo- 
gangeticalluvium. 




512 


Alluviun 


, old, of Narbada . . 


384 


74 


- 7, 


„ „ thickness of . 


384 


389 


>, 


„ „ in a rock basin 


385 


30S 


„ ■ 


„ fossils 


385 


341 


J, 


,> „ stone implement 




441, 




in . ' 


386 


85 


„ 


1, „ of fluviatile ori- 




69 




gin . • . 


387 


392 


„ 


„ of Godavari . 


•388 


499 


„ 


of Indo-gangetic plain,. 


391 


425 


., 


_ raised area of in Ganges delta 


408 


217 


») 


older, west of Ganges delta . 


■410 


230 


», 


east-coast . . . . 


422 


49 


„ 


west-coast ' . ; 


424 


11 


„ 


Bombay 


424 


50 


„ 


Guzerat .... 


425 


83 


13 


Kattywat and Ciitch . 


426 


234 


Almod beds . , 


134 


388 ' 


Alpine triassic fauna in Himalayas 


xlvii 


717 


Almora 


609, 


610 


222 


Alwar . 


. . . . 49, 


50 


'6S4 


Alwar gneiss and schists. 


5 


658 


Alwar group 


49 


705 


Amddi stream 


217 



Y 1 



770 



INDEX. 



Amarkantak . . 202, 300, 

Amarkautak plateau . . vi, 

Amb 

Ambala, see Umballa. 
Amerumbode 

Ammonite bed of Kucbri , 
Ammonites Bagavapuram sbales 
,; of Sripermatnr beds 

„ in carboniferous rocks 

Ammonites athleta , '. 



355, 

203, 
501, 



148, 
149, 
250, 



(« . . . 258, 

Ammonites maerocephahts . 253, 254, 



. 259, 
. 253, 
in Oohdwana 
117, 128, 131, 
. 578, 



Ammonites (FhyUocerasJ oldhami 
Amtdonites plarmlatus I .266,278, 
ATti/monitiBspoitingeri 
Ammonites serrig'er ' 
Amphibia;, remains of, 

rocks . " . 
Amphicyon , 
Amr^oti 

Amri 

Amrnfith 

Amrii hill 

Analcime, B^jmahSl traps . 
Analysis of porcellanic rpck from Gwa- 

lior beds 

Analysis of trappoid rook from. Lower 

Vindhyans . . ' . 
Analysis of porcellanic rock from Lower 

Vindhyans ....*.. 
Analysis of laterite . . ~ . 

„ of kankar . . ' . 382, 
„ of cotton soil ... 

„ of Riniganj coal . 
„ of Assam coal 

Anamal^ v, 

Anameeite, Bljmah^l . . . . 

„ Deccan traps 

Ailundpur, Guzerat . . .' . 
Anundpiir, Sub-Himalayas . 
Anaram ; . '. . . . 
Ancient zoological and botanical re> 

gions 

Xndagou kyouk 

Andaman Islands .... 

Andaman islanders, stone implements 

of 441, 

Andaman Islands, depression of land iu 



FAQS 




PABB 


363 


Andhfoi 


46 


308 


Animal kingdom,,claSBiflcation of 


Ixxix 


515 


Anjar river . . 


217 




Antargaon 231 


234 


370 


Anthi 


45 


264 


Anthozoa, see Corals. 




246 


Antri 


94 




Apatite in gneiss 


Id 


265 


Apophyllite in Decoan traps 


306 


492 


Aptian beds, Cutch 


266 


256 


Arabia, Southern, cretaceous fossils of 


297 


264 


Arabian coast, depression of land on 


376 


255 


Arakan . * . . . 704, 717 


721 


258 


Arakau coast, littoral concrete of 


729 


491 


„ „ rise of land on 


729 


289 


„ „ san^ dunes on 


729 


263 


Arakan, nummulitio beds of 


717 


254 


„ newer tertiary- beds in . 


721 




Arakan Yoma . xi, 704, 707, 710 


713 


132 


Arakeri .^ 


68 


580 


Araucarites cutchensis . 154, 159 


160. 


388 


Aravelly, see Arvali. 




448 


Aravulli, see Arvali. 




660 


Area larkanensis ... 


463 


463 


Arohegoscmriis . . . . J.I7 


128 


170 


Arconum junction . . * . 


248 




Arcot, gneiss of ... 


25 


58 


Area of 6ondw'£nas 


• 97 




Area of Eajmahal volcanic action 


. 142 


79 


Areas of. gneissic rocks . , 4 


5 




Arenaceous group, Cutch 


347 


79 


Argilla'ceons group, Cutch . 


. 317 


349 


irialur 280 


287 


note 


Arialfir group 


280 


430 


. „ „ distribution . 


281 


702 


„ ,, relations to lower groups 


282 


702 


„ „ paleontology 


283 


18 


Arjuna, Gondwdna outlier near . 


227 


170 


Arki ...■..". 


. 608 


302 


■ Arur . . . . ^ . 


418 


48 


Arvali area, gneissic rocks . xviii, 5 


27 


550 


„ boundary of Vindhyans . 


88 


155 


Arvali range . . iv, v, vi, 48 


, 437 




„ region .... 


44 


101 


„ series of transition rocks , £ 


, .44 


717 


Asansol 


. .183 


733 


Aserali ..... 


. 237 




Asirgarh 


. 385 


442 


Ash, volcanic, in Deccan traps . 303 


, 326 


733 


Ashraopettah .... 


. 239 



INDEX. 



771 



TAOS 

Assam 391 

Assam coal-fields .... 699 

As&am gneiss . . . xv, xix, 4, 17, 26 

Assam hills, transition series . -xv, 40 

Assam range . . . ' . x, 2^ 682 

„ „ area to be described . 682 

„ ,i distinction between Sbil- 

long plateau and Barail — 

Patkai range xi, 683, 685 

' „ „ formations present . 684 

„ '„ general structure . . 684 

„• Sylbettrap . . .686 

u „ cretaceous series . 1 687 

„ „ ■ nummulitic series . ■ 693 

. „ „ upper tertiarios . . 696 

„ „ Assam coal-fields . . 699 

Assam, stone implements . , . 441, 442 

„ Sub-Himalayas of '522, 523, 545 

„ upper and lower, distinction of 699 

„ upper, area of Sub-Himalayas 545 

„ valley . . . ; 372, 405 

Astarte major . ■ . . . . 262 

Astor 625 

Ataran river , 709 

Atgarh and Atgurh, see Atbgar. 

Atbgar .140, 243 

Atbgar Gondwana basin . . . 243 

Atolls in Indian seas .... 376 

Attica, pliocene fauna of Pikermi in . 583 

Attock . . . 478, 483, 498, 515 

Attock slates .... xxr, 499 

Aucella . . . . . . 149 

Augite in gneiss .... 19 

Auk group 70 

Anlathor 282 

Australia connected with India in 

palseozoic times . ■ • . . . xxxiv 

Australian coal-fields, beds of . . 119 

Australian region . . . . Ixiv 

Ava . . ': . . . . 708, 724 

Axial (triassic) group, Burma . . 710 

Axis, granitic, of Himalayas . . 629 

„ main gneissic of Himalaya . ^4 
' „ of earth, change of direction in 

xxii, xxxvii, ^68 

„ the Ladik gneissic ■ . . . . 625 

Azoic, application of term ... 3 

Azoic rocks . . . .xviii, 1 

„ „ origin of . . . . xviii 

„ . „ three-fold division of . 3 





PAHB 


zoic rocks, section of . . . 


6 


„ „ general composition and 




distribution of 


9 


„ „ classification of 


9 


„ „ salt range 


485 



BacyMies vagina 

Bachao . . . 

Badalgarh beds . 

Badhdno 

Badnera, elevation of 

Badraw^h 631; 

Badsar-Nurpur fault, Sub-Himalayas 

549, 
Big, see Bagh. 

B^gh 221, 293, 

Bagh beds . . . . xxxix, 
„ „ mineral characters and dis 

tribution . 
„ „ resemblance to Lametas, 295. 
.. >, physical geology 
„ „ palseqntology 
„ „ relations to cretaceous rocks 

of South Arabia 
u „ probable conditions of depo 
sition 
B^h, Bijawars of 
imara . 



B^gbmati river .... 675, 
Bagpura, quartz reef at . 
Bagra group 

„ „ Satpura basin 
Bagwa, quartz reef at . 
Bahadur Khel 

„ salt beds at . 
Bah£walpur .... 436, 

„ height above sea 

Bakkar 

B£lagh£t copper and silver implements 
Balanpur 
B^lasan river 
Balmir . . 53,54,263,264, 

„ sandstones 
Balch pass . 
Ballarpur ■ . 
Baltistan 

Baluchistan, mountain ranges of 
„ disturbance in . 



773 



INDEX. 



Baluchistan, cretaceous and lower ter 
tiary rocks of 

„■ Makran. group of 

Balumath . 
Bambai' 
BtoaganpiU group 

„ 'bone cave near 

„ diamond mines 

Banalah 

Bancoora, see Bankura. ■ 
Banda 

Bandar coal-field 
Bandugarh fort . 
Banganga river . 
Bauihal pass 
Banks of rivers raised by blown sand 
„ „ flood deposits 

Bankura 

Bannu .... 45'8,. 

„ plain. . . 478,505,514. 
Bansloi river. . . ' • 165,167, 
Bara ..■■■■• 
Bara-Bhagal .... 631, 

Barabar hills 

Bdrai . . • • . • 

Barail range . . . • 683, 

„ origin of . 

Barail-Patkai range . xi, 683, 

„ relations to Himalayas . 

Barffli river 



Barakar group . 

„ ■ river . . 174, 176 
Barakars, relations to Talchirs 
„ thickness 
„ coal of 
„ Kajmahal hills . 
„ Tangsuli basin 
,j Sahajori field 
„ Jainti or Karauu field 
„ Kavharbari field . 
„ Eaniganj field 

Jharia coal-field . 
„ Bokaro field 

■ E4mgarh field 
„ South Karanpura field 
„ Earanpura field. 

■Chop6 field-. 
„ Itkuri field 
„ Daltonganj field . ' 
,, near Latiahar 



115, 

178, 



453 

470 

197 

. 11 

70 

.381 

70 

608 

442 

226 

203 

549 

665 

404 

406 

184 

495 

515 

169 
58 

633 
38 
58 

698 

699 

685 

685 . 
xi 

124 

180 
125 

125 

125 

167 

171 

172- 

173 

175- 

180 

186 

188 

190 

192 

194 

196 

197 

rt7 

198 



Barakars, South Eewah field 
Tdlohir pebbles in 
basalts interstratififid with 
•Jhilmilli field 
Bisrampnr field 
Lakbanpur field 
Korba field 
Eaigarh-Hingir field 
Tilchir field 
S£tpura basin 
Bandar field 
Wardha field 

Godavari valley . . 235 
Kamaram field 
Singareni field 
Athgar basin 
BaraWcha . . ix, 629/ 630, 631, 

Baralatse, see BSralacha. 
Bardhi 
Bareta 
Bargandi . 
Barhatpur . 
Barhi 

Bari Doab sand hills 
Bari hill 

Bari Tawi river . . . • . 564, 
Barmandal . 
Barmaur 
Barod hill . 
Baroda 
Bdrrah hill . 
Barren Island 
Barus 
JBarwai 
Barwar 
Barwarna . . . ... 

Basalt, in coal, Raniganj field' . 
„ intrusions, Gdniganj field 
„ dykes. South Eewah 
dyke, Athgar basin 
„ columns . . . . 

,, interstratified with cretaceous 
', beds of Sind . . . . 

Basauli " . . . ; . 549, 
Basauli-Naushera fault, Sub-Himalayas 
Basins of upper transition rocks . 
Gondwdna ' . . 
„ sedimentary, of Cei^tral Hima 
layas . ■. . . 
Baspa river ..... 



223, 304 



631, 



308, 



84, 99, 221, 294, 296, 
. 12,. 



PA en 
202 
203 
•204 
205 
206 . 
206 
208 
209 ■ 
212 
Sfl7 
226 
229 
239 
241 
241 
243 
639 

78 

13 

217 

89 

37 

439 

33 

568 

'564 

632 

49 

425 

448 

735 

661 

385 

13 

554 

180 

185 

204 

244 

303 

449 
568 
567 
56 
161 

638 

597 



INDEX. 



773 



Bassein ^17, 

„ river 

Bastar . . . . .76, 

Bath Oolite, or Bathbnian of Cutch . 

Bau-dwen-gyee ..... 

Baxa 

Baxa series . . ' . 

Bay of Bengal 

„ islands in, geology of . 

Bazdrgaon 

Beaches, old. sea 

Be£ha 49, 

„ beds 

Beas, see Bi^. 

Beaufort beds, S. Africa - . 

Beawar .... 

Beddadanol coal-field . 

Beerbhoom, see Birbhum. 

Behar . . . " . 



123, 



Bijawars 



„ lower Vindhyans 

Southern, Gondw£ua basins in 
177, 
„ stone implements in . 

Beharinath hill 

Bela . . .58, 251, 254, . 
Belaspur, Kangra . . . 552, 

„ section, Sub-Himalayas 
Belemnites grantiatfas . . 258, 

„ katrolensis . . 259, 

Belemnopteris 

Belgaum .... 300,308, 

Bellary • 

Bellerophon in triassic rocks 
Benaiesy height above sea . 
Bengal, 391, 

„ gneissicarea . . . 

„ south-western, transition rocks 

„ upper, plains of . . . 

„ south-eastern, stone implements 

Benodakatta 

Berdr . • • ■ -227, 311, 

Beryl in gneiss 

Besram stream , . . . . 
Betul .,.■... . • 220,. 
Betwa river, fossil bones found, in 

Bezwada 

Bhabar 

Bh^bar slope ai foot of Himalayas 



PAG* 

727 


Bhdbar slope, Siud .• . . 


725 


Bhabeh pass . 596, 627, 628, 630, 639, 


355 


„ series 


254 


Bhadrachellam . . 233, 238, 239, 


708 


BhMwahiU 


618 


Bhigalpur 


618 


Bhaganw^la . . . . ■ . 


.408 


Bhagirathi, oscillations of , ' . 


732 


Bhagotoro copper implement 


225 


„ hills . . ■ . . .• 


376 


Bhdgsu . . . . , .' 


51 


Bhngw^ho, trap dyke at . . . 


50 


Bhamo 




Bhaudak 


133 


Bhand£ri .' 


50 


Bhdngar ....... 


239 


„■ of Gangetic plain . 




Bhanrer beds 


391 


„ limestone 


36 


Bhartpur 


19 


Bheng river ....-, 


78 


Bhiaura hills . * . . 20, 36, 




Bhima basin, transition rocks . 66, 


196 


„ series, subdivisions and thick' 


442 


ness ' 


184 


Bhimbar 


345 


Bhimgarh near Goa 


555 


Bhimtal '. 


555 


Bhit range . . . • . 


26.0 


Bhitfi 


260 


Bhodta 


118 


Bhokara- near Nagpnr 


362 


Bhooj, see Bhdj. 


355 


Bhopal . , 


494 


Bhorla ... 


392 


Bhos^wal, elevation of . 


410 


Bhiij 


18 


Bhdgti hills . . vii, 479, 480, 


43 


Bhur land • 


410 


Bhurtpore, see, Barhatpur and Bhart- 


441 


pur. 


180 


Bhutan ...... 


^55 


„ Duars 


19 


„ frontier, absence of Sub-Hima- 


183 


layan rocks . . 521, 


224 


„ Sub-Himalayas of . ... 


403 


„ loyper Himalayas of 


238 


Bhutra .'..... 


403 


Bias river ...... 


412 


„ „ former course of 



774 



INDEX. 



Bi& river, Sub-Himalftyas on, 548, 553 
„ valley, lower Himalayas of . 602, 
» » ^ upper 
Bibra . 
Bichiako . . 

Bidar 354, 

Bidoung hill ^ . 

Bijawar formation , , ■ 6, 7, 

„ basin 
Bijfiwars of DhSr forest 

„ of middle Narbada area 

„ of Son-Narbada area 

„ of Son area 

„ of Behar 

„ of Bagh and Jobat 
Bijigarh 



115, 



12S, 



127, 



199, 
80, 



103, 139, 165 
and Karharbari 



597, 



Bijiragugarh 
Bijori group 
Blkauir . . 
■ Bikrampnr . 
Bilaspur . . . ' 
Bilheri 

Billa Sdrgam . , 
Bimphcdi . 

Bindrabun, Bajmabal hills 
Biotitein gneiss . 
Bir . . . . 
Birbbum . 
Birbhum, Deogarh 
Gondwaua region 
Bisahir 

Bisramganj ghat 
Bisrampnr coal-field . 
Black band, Kaniganj field 
Black Pagoda near Pooree, formerly on 

sea-shore , 
Black soil . 

„ distribution of 
„ origin of 
Blaini group 
„ . river 
Blown sand 

„ of Indian desert 
Bogapdni river 
Bogin river 
Boileauganj 
Boj mountain 
Bok^ro coal-field 



404 



41, 686, 690, 



533, 534, 
. 106, 



rXBlTS 

554 

606 

632 

237 

543 

355 

715 

28 

28 

81 

32 

33 

34 

36 

45 

85 

84 

80 

218 

437 

11 

200 

90 

381 

611 

•170 

19 

559 

171 

171 
598 
83 
205 
181 

377 

429 
431 
432 
599 
699 
435 
486 
694 
83 
601 
599 
187 
187 



Bole in Deccan traps . . 304, 

Bompoka 

Bon 

Bone-cave, Billa Sfirgam 

Bos (BuhalusJ palcBindieus 386, 402, 578, 



Boulder bed, Talchif, xxxv, 109, 173, 
180, 186, 188, 190, 194, 205, 206, 211, 

229, , 

Boulder bed in transition rocks . 

„ „ . South Africa . xxxvi. 

Boulders in post pliocene rocks of 

Punjab .... 

„ striated in olive grodp. Salt 
Bange . . xsxvi, 
., in Pangi slates . xxxvi, 632, 
„ Kangra valley 

Bombay . . 299, 304„319, 

„ evidence of depression at 
„ intertrappeau beds of 
„ „ fossils 

„ raised shell beds at 
„ alluvium .... 

„ littoral concrete 
Borghit . . .. - . .'306, 

Bor hill ...... 

Bor Fat^r ...... 

Borobhtiiu 

Bore-hole, Fori William, Calcutta, 378, 
„ Umballa .... 
„ Sabzal-ka-kpt 
„ ^nkakheri, Narbada valley . 
Borendo pass ..... 
Boring, Madras . . 
Botanical regions, ancient . 
Bothriceps atistralis 
Boundary, abnormal, of upper tertiaries, 

Punjab 

Brachiopoda Utatur group . 27.3, 

,-, Trichinopoly group, 278, 

„ AriaMr group . 283, 

Brachiopa laticeps . . ' . ■ 123, 

Brdhmani river, B^jmah^l hills 165, 

166, 
„ coal-field 

Gondwina region 
„ river, Orissa 
Brahmaputra river 
„ delta 

„ changes in course of 



312 
785 
535 
381 
582 
386 



234 

xxxvi 

112 

515 

496 
664 
669 
320 
Ixxi 
319 
321 
377 
424 
426 
320 
449 
692 
. 43 
397 
401 
402 
384 
597 
423 
101 
131 

483 
275 
280 
286 
131 

170 
167 
199 
210 

viii 
405 
107 



INDEX, 



775 



Bramaputra valley . . . 405, 


BAOB 

682 


„ section of tertiary rocks near 


696 


Br^bminabad 


418 


Breynia carinata . . . 466, 


470 


Broach, . . .. 267, 339, 425, 


435 


„ higber tertiaries of . ; 


340 


Bronze implements .... 


443 


Bronzite, Hundes .... 


650 


in serpentine, Burma . 


714 


„ Nicobars' . . 


735 


JBryozoa, Arialur group 


286 


Bubhdr gorge . , . 549, 


669 


„ Siwaliks at . . . 551, 


555 


„ and Bilaspur sections of Sub- 




Himalayas compared 


555 


Budbavada . . i . 141, 


246 


Bugaoti river, fossil bones found in 


403 


Sulimtis insularis . • , . • , 


576 


Bulsar .. , . , 


427 


Enndair, see Bhanrer. 




Bundelkhand area, gneissic rocks, xviii, • 


5 


„ gneiss .... 


10 


„ „ composition of 


10 


„ „ accessory minerals in 


16 


„ „ relations .to conti- 




guous formations 'xviii, 16, 31, 


55 


Bundelkhand, Bijawars of . ' . 29, 


55 


,, Vindhyaus . 69.81; 


87 


„ laterite of, vi. 355, 354 


363 


„' stone implements in. 


442 


Bunnoo, see Bannu. 




Bunter flora . . ' . .114, 


118 


Burail range 


27 


Buramuk near Tezpur, height .above sea 


392 


Bnrdwan coal -field , . 


178, 


„ height above sea 


392' 


Buriadih ...... 


175 


Burma, area afld physical geography . 


704 


„ rivers and ranges of 


X 


„ geological data 


.706 


„ rock-groupa .... 


706 


„ gneiss of . . . 


six 


„ metamorpbic rocks 


707 


„ Mergui group . ... 


708. 




709 


„ Axial (triassic) group 


710 


„ Mai-i (cretaceous) group 


711 


„ Hegrais rocks 


713 


„ Serpentine .... 


714 


„ Nummulitic gfbup 


714 



Burma, Pegu group . , • 
„ Pliocene fossil wood group 
„ upper tertiaries 
„ tertiary disturbance in 

Volcanic rocks 
„ poSt-tertjary deposits 
,, stone implements in 

Byangyee .... 

Byieuconda (juartzites - 



61, 



Cacbar ... . . . 683, 

Cairns . • . • 

Calcutta bor^-hole .... 
„ neighbourhood of . 

Calder's description of Indian geology 

Callian, see Ealyan. 

Cambay, Gulf of . 339. 341, 342. 

Camorta 

Campbellpur 

Canals, effects of, on reh lands . . 

Candona Tcotahensis . . . 152, 

Cane river, see Ken., 

Canning town, peat at . . . 

. Cape Monze .... 464. 

Carboniferous fossils, Salt Bange 
„ „ Zanskar area 

„ „ . ^iti, Hundes 

„ „ Milam pass 

„ „ Kashmir . . 

„ . in Maulmain group 

Carboniferous rocks of Australia, 119, 

„ „ Punjab saltrange 

xxiv, 

„ „ West of Indus . 

„ „ Northern Punjab, 

XXV, 

„ „ Changchenmo 

„ „ Karakoram. 

„ „ Ku'enlun . 

„ Sa.rikol 

„ „ of Kashmir 

„ „ supposed, of Pir 

Panj&l 

Cardita heatimonii . . 449, 

Cardium (ProtooardmmJMllaimm 280, 

Caribarj, see Karibari. 

Carter's summary of the geology of 

India 



719 
721 

724 
Ivii 
725 
726 
442 
725 
62 



693 

441 

397 

, 407 

Ixxii 

425 
735 
503 
414 
154 

400 
.470 
491 
633 
648 
650 
661 
70s 
120 

489 
490 

501 
654 
65S 
656 
658 
660 

• 666 
497 



Ixx 



776 



INDEX. 







FA.GB 






riOB 


Cashmere, see Kashmir. ' 




Chahgrizing .... 




629 


Cauvery river . • 269, 383, 


433 


Chano 




195 


Cave deposits 


881 


Chari ... ,. . .254, 


255, 


256 


Cawnpore, height above sea 


392 


„ group .... 




255 


Celts . . - . • • . _ ■ 


"442. 


„ „ fossils 




257 


Central and lower Himalayan gneiss 




Charwar range . . 252, 257> 


258, 


260 


identical • — . 


597 


Chatarhill 




219 


Central gneiss of Himalayas . xxvi, 


627 


Chattarkot . ■. . , . 




83 


„ „ stratigraphical relations. 




Chaura 




58 


age of, &c. 


628 


Chebu . . . . 


81 


■87 


„ „ terminal extensions of . 


630 


•Cheduba Island . . ... 


717, 


729 


Central Himalayas, definition of . 519, 


529 


„ mud volcanoes of . 




729 


„ (Tibetan) Himalayas 


622 


Cheirolepis . ■ . 




155 


Central Himalayas, see Himalayas. 




Chel river 




614 


Central Provinces, gneiss of 


22 


Chela . . . . ... 




694 


,j ■ „ stone implements . 


441 


Chemmtda tmdosa .... 


.277, 


292 


Cephalopoda Paohham group 


254 


Chenab river. . . '. 


44, 


52 




257 


„ „ see CbiB&b. 






Kantkot sandstone 


258 


Chendragiri ridge 




612 


„ Katrol group 


. 258 


Cherakhan 




294' 


„ TJmia group . . 


260 


Cherat hills . . . . 477, 


498, 


500 


„ distribution of, in" Cutch 




Cherra Poonjee . . 684, 686, 


698, 


694 


Jurassics . ' . . . 


262 


„ „ cretaceous beds at 




6^9 


„ of Utatur group . 272, 


274 


„ „ coal of . 




693 


„ of Trichinopoly group • . 


278 


Cherra sandstone .... 




690 


,i of Arialfir gEOup . 283, 


284 


Chessagarhi ridge 




611 


Ceratite beds, Punjab salt range 


493 


Chetrai, quartz reef at 




14 


Ceratites in carboniferous roclis 


492 


Cheyai'r group 


61, 


62 


Ceratoius . xxxiy, Ixx, 100, 101, 


15-4 


Chhataip)ur 


11, 


14 


Cerusite in gneiss 


19 


Chhatisgarb 75, 


128, 


• 199 


Cervus namadicus 




38ff. 


Chichali hills, 478, 480, 485, 490, 


493, 




Ceylonese subregion . . . 




Ixv 


. 495, 


505, 


507 


Chagos islands, depression of 




376 


„ „ nummulitics of 




506 


Cbaibassa .... 




43 


Chicli^U pass 




'496 


Chainpur 




87 


Chikiala group .... 


141, 


152 


Chalsai 




174 


,', „ Godavari valley . 




237 


Chaki river .... 




558 


Chikkim limestone 




635 


Chalicotherium . 




580 


„ shales . 




635 


Chamba .... 


631, 


658 


Chiklik psiss . . . 




657 


Chambahill 




503 


Chilka lake, estuarine shell-beds near . 


424 


Chimpagiri 




692 


Chimiir 


, 


226 


Champanir beds . 




46 


Chinab river . viii, 562, 566 


567, 


676 


Chanch • 




.180 


„ upper valley of . 


658,' 


665 


Chsinda . 75, 110, 124, 227 


,231 


432 


„ origin of gorge, at Riassi 


562, 


676 


Chanda coal-field. 




227 


Chinakuri .... 


, 


182 


Chandanwari 




660 


Chin^ni .... 


. 


566 


Chandnai stream . 




207 


Chinese jllant fossils 


, 


122 


Chang range 




654 


Chiniot ..... 


44, 


52 


Chdngchenmo . 


. 658 


654 


Chinna Tripetty , 




148 


Changes of level, subreceut . 




Ixxi 


Chihiir . . . . 234, 235 


,236, 


237 



INDEX. 



777 







V\GH 




Chip^ . ■ . 




604 


Coal, Eimgarh field . . . . 


Chitapahar, 478, 485, 498, 503, 503, 505, 


512 


„ South K^ranpura field 


Chitlong . . . 


. .. 


6U 


„ Kfiranpura field . . . 194, 


Chittagong . . ' . 


. ■ 


704 


,, Chop^ field. . . . ; 


Chittorghar . ... 




84 


„ Itkuri field. < . . , 


Chlithrolepis 


, , 


120- 


„ Daltonganj field ..... 


Chlorite in gneiss 


. 


10 


„ near Iiatiahar . . . . 


Chondrodite, Mandalay 




708 


„ reported near Kurea, Jashpur, 


ChDpg ... 




164 


Chutia Nagpur 


Chop^ eoal-field . 


, 


196 


„ South Rewsh field 


Chopra 


, 


82 


„ Jhilmilli field . . . . 


Chor mountain ... 


. 598, 


607 


„ Bisrampur field .... 


„ gneiss of . 


, , 


608 


„ Lakhanpur field . . ' . 


Chor.ar . ... 


251, 


354 


„ Udepur (Chutia Nigpur) . 


Chorkheri . 


, 


225 


. „ Korba, Bil^spur .... 


Chota Nagpore, see Chntia Mgpn 


r. ' 




„ ftaigarh-Hingir field . 


Ghota TIdepur 


, 


221 


„• Tdlchir field . . . . 


Choti T^wi river ... 


564, 


566 


„ Lameta ghat .... 


Chotan .... 


, 


54 


„ Satpura basin . . ,' . 


Ch'rysotile in gneiss 




19 


„ Bench valley .... 


Chumalari 


, 


' X 


„ Mopani 


Cbnnar .... 


78. 


87 


„ Bandar field .... 


Chupai'bhita pass . 165, 167 


,168, 


169 


„ Wardha (CJi^nda) field . 


j_ „ coal-field . 




167 


„ God^vari valley . 234, 235, 


Churiagh^ti range, Nepal 




543 


„ Madaviram field 


Chnrna Island 


• 


464 


„ Beddadanol field _ . 


Chutia Nagpur . 


142, 


199 


„ Kamfoam field- .... 


,', „ plateaii, iv, vi, 18, 


106, 




„ Singareni field .... 


163, 


lily 


35d 


„ from Calcutta bore-hole 


gneiss . 




21 


„ Eanikpt group, Siud 


„ _ . „ Goiidwfina outliers 


in . 


207 


„ Jurassic, Punjab salt range . 


„ „ stone implements 




442 


,', SnlemSn range 


Chutro 




197 


„ nummulitic, Salt Range 


Classification of animal kingdom . 




Izxix 


„ supposed, of Sabdthu 


„ of azoic rooks . 




9 


„ cretaceovis, Khasi hills 


Climate, change of, efi'ects on fan 


aa . 


585 


Garo hills .690; 


Climate of Gondwdna epoch 




XXXV . 


. „ basins of Eongreng and DSrdng 


Coal, in Talchir beds . 


109,' 


205 


„ of Upper Assam . . . 


„ Kurharbfoi group 




113 


,, nummulitic, Khasi hills . 693, 


„ Bar^kar group . 




125 


„ Tenasserim, cretaceous 


„ Bfinigpnj . 




126 


„ near Thayet Myo, Burma 


„ Jabalpur group . 




156 


„ in JPenasserim 


„ EAjmahffl hills . 




167 


„ Upper. Burma . . . . 


„ Tangsuli basin . 




171 


Coal-fields of Damuda valley 


„ Kandit Kar^yah field 




172 


„ of Assam .... 


„ Jainti or Karaun fields- 




173 


Coal-measures, Eaniganj, possible 


„ Karharbdri conl-fleld . 


* 


.175 


extension to eastward 


„ Raniganj field . 


181, 


182 


Coal-measures, upper Assam 


„ Jharia field 




186 


Coast line Of Peninsula in Upper Gond- 


„ Bokai'o field • ... 




188 


wdna times 



778 



INDEX. 



Coast in cretaceous period xxxviii 


1 


„ in Deocan trap peilod 




xliv 


„ of Peninsula in tertiary per 


od,x 


vi, Ixi 


„ in Jurassic period 


XXX 


i xTix 


Cochin . . ■. 




. 368 


Coconada . . . ■ 


!l47 


, 244 


Coeos islands 




. 732 


■ Coimbatur iron implements 




. 444 


„ limestone 




. 25 


Coleroon river . . 




. 268 


Colossoehelys atlas 




. 580 


Colgong . . . .165 


,167 


, 170 


Columnar basalt, Depcan trap 




. 303 


Conglomerates, Siwalik 




. 525 


Conjeveram 




. 249 


Coorg, see Kurg. 






Copper glance, Punjab Salt Rang 


e 


. ■ 489 


„ implements 




. 443 


Coral islands in Indian seas 




. 876 


■ „ reef limestone, Utatur grou 


P 


. 270 


„ reefs, raised, Nicobar island 


s" 


. 735 


Coralline limestone,. Bagb . 




294 


Corals, TTtattir group . 


273 


275 


„ Trichinopoly group . 


278 


280 


„ Arialur group . 


283 


286 


Corhula harpa. ... . 450 


453 


462 


trigonalis , 


463 


468 


Cores, flint, .... 




441 


Coromandel coast 




268 


Corteliar river .... 




248 


Corundum in gneiss . 




19 


Cossya or Cossyah, see Kh&i. 






Cotton soil . . - . 




429 


„ ,„ distribution of 




431 


„ „ origin of . 




432 


Orentmconchits 




378 


Cretaceous coal, Assam range 




689 


„ Mikir hills . 




692 


„ „ Tenasserim 




712 


Cretaceous fatina, relations of 


xl, 


289 


„ „ South Arabia, . 




297 


„ forms in Banikot beds 




453 


„ fossils, Z&nsk£r area . 




635 


„ „ Milam pass 




649 


„ Kh&i hills 




688 


„ land, distribution of . 




xxxix 


marine beds of Peni 


nsula 




Xi. 


xviii. 


266 


„ rocks of Trichinopoly 


and 




Pondicherry . Xi 


xviii, 


267 



Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoly and 

Pondicherry, age of . . xxxviii,. 

Cretaceous rocks of Narbada valley 

xxxix, 
„ „ of Assam range 

. sxxix, 
„ „ extra-peninsular 

„ „ of Trichinopoly, rela- 

tions to other formations 
Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoly, sub- 
division of ' . 
Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoly, table 

of groups 

Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoly, coral 

reef limestone in ... . 

Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoly, table 

showing distribution of invertebrate 

fossils in .... 

Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoly, con 

.nection with other Indian beds 
Cretaceous rocks of Trichinopoly, re 

lations to South Africa , , 
Cretaceous rocks of Sind 

„ „ of Baluchistan 

„ „ Punjab salt range 

„ „ of Hazara 

„ „ near Kohdt 

„ „ Zanskar . . 635, 

„ „ Lokshung range,Tibet 

„ Sanju 
„ „' Khasl area 

„ „ of G^ro area 

„ „ Mikir area , 

„ „ Burma . . ' . 

Crocodilus palustris .... 

Groinlechs 440, 

Crystalline rocks, Hazira . 
Cuddalore . . . .335, 

Cuddalore sandstones .... 
Cuddapah, see Kadapah. 

Cullygoody 

Cumbum slates . . . .61, 
Cundacoor, see Kandakur. 
Curruokpore, see Karakpur. 
Cutch Gondwdnas -.97,99,100, 

„ flora, relations to Bajmahals, 147, 
„ jurassic'rocks of . . . xxxvii 
jurassicB, relations to higher 
. formations, . 
. i> physical geology of . 



268 

293 

687 
xlix 

268 

269 

270 

270 

290 

291 

292 
448 
453 
496 
503 
504 
643 
654 
656 
687 
690 
692 
711 
580 
443 
498 
424 
335' 

271 
64 



158 
156 
251 

252 

252 



INDEX. 



779 



Cutch j uraBsics, sub-divisions 

,j „ correlation with EurO' 

pean groups 

„ „ thickness . . 

„ neocomisn beds of . • 

„. traps of . . 300, 308. 328 

„ tertiary rocks of 

„ „ relations to traps 

„ „ classificatijon 

„ Bubnummulitic group 

» gyP^^Q?^ shales of 

i, nummulitics 

„ arenaceous group 

„ argillaceous group 

„ upper tertiary . 

„ alluvium of 

„ blown sands 

„ Kan of, see Kan of Cutch. 
Cuttack . 140, 199, 242, 243, 355, 
Cffcadiies gramineus 
Cyclopteris jenhinsiana 
„ oldJiami ■ 

„ pac, 

CzelcanoiBsiia 



Dacca 
Dagshai beds 

,. ridge . 
Dalchipur sandstone 
Dalhousie . 
Uffling 

„ Fort ■ . 

„ series 
Dallipur, quartz reefs 
Dalma hill 
Daltonganj coal- field 
Damdn - 
D&man-i-boh . 
Dambal hills 

„ gold in 
Damdaina beds . 
Damuda outliers . 
„ river 



at 



524, 



81; 



425, 



Series 
„ sub-divisions 



183, 190; 

191; 

107, 108 



palseontology 



PAGB 

252 

253 
254 

266 
331 
348 
343 
344 
344 
345 
345 
346 
346 
347 
426 
436 

858 
157 
147 
147 
133 
157 



407 

530 

532 

83 

633 

613 

545 

614 

14 

44 

197 

427 

165 

355 

23 

50 

164 

192 
115 
115 
116 



Uamuda series, relations to Australian 
carboniferous 

„ „ relations to Karoo series 

of South Africa . 

„ valley . . 103, 163, 171, 

„ „ coal-fields , • . 

Damudas, Upper . . , 156; 

„ Kajmah^l hills ' . . 

„ Kandit Kavayah field- . 

„ Kaniganj coal-field 

„ South Eewah field 

„ Sikkim 

„ underlying gneiss in Sikkim 

„ Bhdtan 

„ Dikrang section, Assam 
DantEopsii rajmahalensis . 
Danian beds, possible representatives 

in South India 
Daphla hills . . .97, 546, 
Dandiapura 
Dapedius . 
Hiring coal basin 
Darjiling . 

„ gneiss . 
Dayvallah . 
Darrang district . 
De Beaumont's theory 

formation 
Debigarh ridge . . ' . 
Deccan trap not connected with Hij 
mabal . . . ' 

„ „ period, coast lines of 

„ „ relations of, to Gondw&nas 

„ ■„ preservation of Gondwanas 

by 

■ „ „ series . . . xli, 

„ „ » area of . 

„ „ „ classification of " 

„ „ original limits of . xliV; 

„ ,, origin of name 

„ „ scenery a"nd vegetation 

„ „ petrology 

„ „ columnar: basalt in . 

' „ „ volcanic ash in 

„ „ minerals in 

„ „ horizontality , , 306, 

„ „ thickness of lava fiows 

,) „ associated sedimentary 

rocks . . 

„ „ series, thickness of 



lis 



691, 



of mountain 
. 634, 667, 



?80 



INDEX. 



D'eccan trap of snbaerial origin xliii, 322, 
„ relations to underlying 
rociss . . . xlii 
„ „ not poured out in a great 

lake ... 
„ „ hoiizontality difficult to. 
explain . 
„ volcanic foci of ' . 326 
„ „ djkes of . 
„ „ geological age of 
„ „ probable conditions of 

formation 
„ „ of Sind . 
Dehing group .... TOO, 

„ river .... 
Debra Dun . x, 535, 540, 542 

Debri, quartz reef at , 

Delhi 

„ height above sea ' . 
Delta of Ganges and Brahmaputra-, 
„ „ Mr. Fergusson's theory 

„ „ depression in, 400, 409 

„ of Indus .... 

„ „ depression in . 419, 

„ of Irawadi ,, 

Deltas of Indus and Ganges, depression 

in . . ■ • 
Denwa group, Satpura basin . . 137; 
.„ river . . . 127, 136 
Deobun mountain . -. . 
Deogarh . . . ... 

. „ Gondwana region . 
Deokalli, quartz reef at . _ . 

Deoli 

Deopur 

Deorat ghat .... 
Deosai plain .... 

Deothan ' 

Deposition of azoic rocks 
Dera Ghazi Khan, carboniferous lime 
stone near . . . 486, 491, 
Dera Ghazi Khan, nummulitics near 

„ „ Siwaliks near , . 

Dera Ismail Khan 

„ „ height above sea 

Derajat ..... 
Desert, Indian .... 
„ „ Jurassic beds in . 
Dev.a river .... 222; 

Devonian rocks of Eastern Tibet 



PAGS 

324 
323 

324 

325 
328 
326 
329 

332 
450 
702 
701 
595 
14 
52 
392 
405 
406 
411 
419 
421 
727 

378 
219 
215 
608 
173 
171 

14 
183 
174 

11 
670 
17'6 



495 
505 
513 
479 
392 
513 
436 
263 
295 
xxvii 



Dhaba 






232 


Dhamini ' . 






.603 


Dhariiui . .• ■ • 






311 


Dhantua hill, Kyanite of 






16 


Dhansiri river 


27, 


683, 


699 


Dbfiow^ra . 






13 


• „ iron ore at . 






16 


Dhar forest, Bijawars of 






31 


„ „ Vindhy^insof 




8.6, 


91 


Dharamjur 






596 


Dbarmsila . . . 






557 


Dhfirwar 






355 


Dharydro . 






456 


Dhasan river, Bundelkhand 


13, 


81 


Dbauladhar ix, 530, 547, 556, 


557, 




559, 602, 658, 


665, 


669 


„ gneissic range 


. 


632 


„ Sub-Himalayas at base of 


557 


Dhaulagiri . ... 


. 


s 


Dhosa oolite . . ... 


256, 


257 


Dhyanda 


. 


388 


Diamond gravels . . ■ 


. 


390 


„ washings, Sainbalpur 


. 


77 


Diamonds in Banaganpili sandstone . 


70 


„ in yindhyans 


84, 


92 


Diaspore in gneiss 






19 


Dibrugarh . . • 






546 


„ height above sea 






392 


Dicerocardivm . 




502, 


654 


Dictt/ozamites . ' . 


150, 


246, 


247 


JDicynodon orieifdalis . 






132 


Dihar 




534, 


552 


Dikhu river 






701 


Dikrang section . 






620 


Diorite dykes in gneiss 


' 




15 


Dipsang plain 






655 


Disai river 






701 


Disang group 






700 


„ river 


\ 




.701 


Distribution of extra-peninsular 


for- 




■ mations' 




xvii 


„ of Gondw£na basins 




161 


„ of recent fauna 




Ijiv 


Disturbance of peninsular rocks 


vi, 


xviii 


„ , of ?xtra-peninsnlar 


area 




vii. 


xviii, 


Ivi 


„ of transition series . 




• XX 


„ ' •' of Himalayas . ■ Ivi, 


569, 






667, 


671 


„■ of Upper ViHd 


lyans 


. 


9 



INDEX. 



781 







P4GB 


Disturbance post pliocene, Sind , 




474 


„ of Assam range 


.• 


685 


Division of Qoudwdua system 




107 


Dohad . . . • . 


, 


313 


Dolerites of EajmaliAl group 


. 


170 


Dolomite in gneiss ' . 


, 


19- 


„ in South Mahratta country . 


23 


„ of Bnxa 




618 


Dolphins, river, of Indus and Ganges . 


392 


Domalgiri 




695 


Dome gneiss . '. 


. 


20 


Dongaho .... 




11 


Dongargaon ■ . 


, 


311 


Dooniagoodiam, see DumS.gudem 






Doon, see Dun. , 






Drainage lines, Himalayas- . 




675 


Dring «... 


556, 


558 


Dr&s ... 


623, 


625 


Dubrijpur group 


138, 


168 


Dubrog .... 


558. 


556 


Dudhi river 


215, 


219. 


Dudukur . . . . 




316 


DiimagliSem 


233, 


239 


Dungagalli 


,484, 


511 


Duns of- Snb- Himalayas 




521 


Dykes, Rajmahal hills . 




170 


„ Karharhari field 




176 


„ Eaniganj field . 


. 181 


184 


„ Jharia field 




187 


Bokaro field . 




• 189 


„ Rimghar field . 




191 


„ South Rewah . 




204 


„ Deccan trap 




. 326 


E 






Earthquakes in Himalayas, &c. 




. Ivi 


„ Indus valley . 


.418 


, .419 


East coast region of Gondwfinas 




. 242 


„ tertiary beds of . 




. 335 


„ rise of land on . 




. 376 


„ alluvium 




. 422 


Eastern area gneissic ro.cks . 




4 






iv 


Ebe river. . . 




. 213 


Ecca beds, S.: Africa . 




. 123 


Echinodermata, TJtatur group . 


. 273 


, 275 


- „ Arialur group 


. 284 


, 286 


Echinostrolus expansus ■ 




. 159 


Eedatum . . 




. 244 


Ehalapur . . 




. ' 174 



Til ex 

Eishniakam G62 

Elao . . . . • . . .341 

Blephas namadicus . . 386, 389, .402 

„ insignis .... 386 578 
Elevation of Tibetan plateau post-Siwa- 

lik . ■ . . . . Ivi, 585 586 
Elevation of Himalayas, Ivi, Ixii, 569, 

. 677, 680 

Ellifthpur 223, 311 

„ Gondwfina inliers near . . 224 

Ellore . 99, 140, 147, 223, 238, 245, 267 

Emdtaganj 198 

Emys tectum , . '. . 386, 580 

Endain 726 

Enkatpur 232 

Eocene basin of Laddk . . 634, 643 

„ land, distribution of . , Hii 

„ „ in Himalayas . . 569 

„ rocks, extra-peninsular . . 1 

of Surat . . . 340 

Sind . . 447, 451, 456 

Balachistan . . , 453 

Punjab ... 505 

Kh£si Hills . . . 693 

Burmah . . . 715 

Epidote in Bundelkhand.gneiss . 12, 16 

,, „ gneiss of Singrauli . . 19 

Erratics of Punjab . ■ . . 373, 515 •. 

„ Dipsang plain, Karakoram 655 

Eruptions of Ramri mud volcanoes . 731 

.EryoB in Ongole plant beds, .149, note 

Eshwaraeupum ..... 64 

Estheria Jcbtahensis . . . 152, 154 

„ manffaliensis . 129, 132, 232 

Estuarine fossils, Gaj group . . . 453 
„ „ RAjamahendri inter- 

trappeans . . 318 

„ „ Tibetan uummulitics . 643. 

,, shells in alluvium . . 423 

„ „ STadras . . , 423 
„ „ in North-Eastern Kat- 

tywar. , . ' . 426 
Ethiopian mammalian families in Or- 
iental region . ^ . . . Ixvii 

Ethiopian region ]xiv 

Ethiopian afiinities of Oriental mam- 
mals Ixvi 

Ethiopian afiinities of Indian mammals Ixix 

Ethiopian fauna '582 

Etounda 544 



782 



INDEX, 



Europe and India, land connexion be- 
tween . • • • xxxiv, 
European formations, list of 
Euphyllite in gneiss . 
Everest, Mount . 
Extinct genera in Siwalik fauna 
Extra-peninsular area 

„ mountain ranges 

of . , viii 

Extra-peninsular area, disturbance of 

,, sub-divisions 

jj „ formations, list of 

distribution 
of . 
„ „ palaeozoic rocks, 

. „ „ mesozolc 

„ „ tertiary •„ 



PASB 

xlvii 

Ixxv 

19 

X 

579 
■ ii 

Ivti 
vili 

U5 
xiv 

xvii 
xxiv 

xlvl 

1 



Fadial 


506 


False Island near Ramri 


731 


Families of mammalia. Oriental . 


Ixvi 


Fatehganj 


516 


Fatehpur ..... 


217 


Fauna and flora, Gondwina; relations o 


xxxii 


Fauna mammalian, recent, poverty of 


586 


„ miocene, migration of 


584 


,' of cretaceous groups, relations 




of . . . . xl, 


289 


„ of India, Ethiopian and. Malay 




forms in . . . 


590 


of Indian mountains 


374 


recent distribution of 


. Ixiv 


„ recent, of Northern India, com 




pared vpith Siwalik 


589 


„ Siwalik . . . . liv 


572 


„ terrestrial, diversity of . 


101 


Fault boundary, Talchir field 


211 


„ „ supposed, Satpura basin 


216 


„ „ of South Rewah field 


201 


„ . Jhilmilli field . 


204 


„ in Assam coal-fields . 


700 


Faulting, west of S^tpura field . 


220 


Faults in Gondwanas . 


104 


„ Raniganj coal-field . . 179, 


. .184 


„ Bokaro coal-field 


187 


„ Karanpura coal-fields 


196 


„ Bisrampur field 


205 


„ in Gondwana beds near EUichpur 


224 


,, discussion of 


526 



delta 



malayas . 
iional 



Faults in Sub-Hima]ayan rocks 
Felsite in Malani beds ' . 
Felspar in Bundelkhand gneiss 

in Deccan traps 
Fergusson, Mr., theory of Ganges 
Ferpzepore, height above ' sea 
Ferozabad iron implements 
Flakes 

Flexible sandstone 
Flexnres, classification of 
„ normal, in Sub-Hi 
„ east of Jhelum transi: 
with those to west 
Flood deposits, Gaoges delta 
Floods, Indus ., 
Flora, Gondwana • 

„ of Indian mountains 
„ diversity of 
Foliation of gneiss 
Foraminifera, asserted discovery otj 
near Naini Tal .... 

Formations, Indian geological, in general 
„ peninsular, list of . ' . 

„ extra-peninsular, list of . 

„ „ „ distribu- 

tion of . 
„ European, list of 

„ contiguous to Bundgl- 

khand gneiss 
„ in Burma . . . 

Fort William bore-hole 
Fossil mammals, Tibet 
Fossil-wood group, Burma . 

„ „ Trichinopoly group . 
„ „ Manchhar group . 
Fossilifei-ous series of Zdnskar area 
Fossils, marine, rarity of, in Peninsula 
„ wanting in older rocks 
„ supposed, in Gwalior beds . 
„ „ „ Vindhyans . 

„ Gondwana . 

Talchir group _ . 
„ Karharbari group 
„ Damnda series . 

Australian eoal-measnres , 
„ Karoo series. South Africa 
,, M^ngli beds 
„ Panchet group . 
„ Mahadeva series 
„ Bajmahdl group 



XXXIl, 



PASS 

526 

53 

10 

305 

406 

392 

444 

441 

52 

527 

527 

568 
406 
516 
xxxii 
374 
101 
20 

' 609 

xi 

xii 

xiv 

xvii 

IXXV', 

16 
706 
397 
651 
721 
276 
471 
635 

xl. 
1 

58 

89 
100 
111 
114 
116 
120 
123 
129 
132 
136 
142 



INDEX. 



783 



Fossils, Rngavapuram sbales 

„ Kota Maleri beds 

Jabalpur group 

„ TJmia group of Cutch 

„ Kajmahffl group, localities of 

. „ niear Golapilli . 

„ near Inkola 

' „ Jurassic marine . . 250, 

„ Pachham group . . 253, 

„ Chdri group 

„ Katrol group 

„ Jesalmir limestones . 

„ cretaceous marine, xl, 266 note, 

neocomian, Cutcli 

„ TJtatdr group . , 270, 271, 
,, ^, list of . 

„ Trichinopoly gi'oup . 
„ - „ • list of 

„ Arialtir group . •. . .280, 
„ ■ „ list of . 

„ Ninnyur beds . . 

„ invertebrate, table of distribution 
in cretaceous rocks of Soqth 
• ern India 

„ B^gh beds 

„ Lam eta group . 

„ lower intertrappeans 

„ infratrappoan, Rajamabendri 

„ intertrappean, Eajamahendri . 

„ upper intertrappeans, Bombay 

„ in Travancore limestones 

„ in Surat eocene beds 

„ mammalian, Perim Island 

„ Cutch tertiary beds . . 345, 

„ Narbada alluvium 

„ Godavari alluvium . 

„ from Calcutta boring 

„ Indo-Gangetic alluvium 

„ Sind cretaceous beds 

„ Banikot group . 

,', Khirthar group 

„ Nari group . . 

„ Gaj group 

,, Manehhar group . . 468. 

Carboniferous, salt range 

,, Siwalik of Kusbalghar 

post-pliocene near Patehganj 

„ Sabathn group 

„ Kasanii beds 

„ Siwalik . ^ . . . liv. 



riLGB 

148 
162 

157 
159 
170 
246 
.246 
note 
254 
257 
258 
264 
289 
267 
272 
274 
.278 
278 
283 
284 
287 



290 

296 

310 

313 

316 

318 

321 

338 

340 

343 

346 

385 

389 

398 

402 

449. 

452 

458 

461 

465 

471 

491 

514 

516 

531 

582 

572 









PASS 


Fossi 


Is, Pikermi. .... 


583 


>y 


doubtful, from Krol group 


596 


» 


in Central or Tibetan Himalayas 


624 


at 


Cbikkim limestone . 


635 


t» 


Qieumal, sandstone . 




635 


» 


Spiti shales 




636 


9> 


Upper Tagling . 




636 


St 


Tagling limestone . 




636 


n 


P&ra limestone 




637 


»» 


■Lilang series 




'637 


» 


Kuling series . 


• 


638 


)» 


Muth series . ... 


638 


« 


Bhabeh series • , . . 


638 


>' 


from Niti, Hundes , ' . 


647 


» 


from Milam Pass 


649 


n 


carboniferous, Kashmir 


661 


it 


cretaceous, Khasi Hills 


688 


j> 


nummulitic, Khisi Hills . 693, 


694 


>» 


upper tertiary, Khasi hills . 


698 


„ 


carboniferous, Burma 


708 


i> 


pliocene vertebrate, Irawadi val- 






ley 


722 




G 




Gabbro, Burma , . , , . 


714 


» 


Andaman islands . 


733 


J3 


NiCobar islands . ... 


735 


Gadani 456, 


470 


Gadi 


rwara railway station, borings 




near. .,.,,. 


384 


Gflhrwal-Kumaun area, Sub-Himalayas 


543 


Gaira hills , . . , . 345, 


346 


Gaj 


?roup . ... . .1, 


463 


Gaj 


river .448,454,456,457,463, 






' 464, 


46'8 


„ 


section on upper . 


454 


Galena'from Jhansi 




IB 


„ 


in Singrauli gneiss 




19 


Galla .... 




341 


Gamrola river 


. 553, 


555 


Gandak river 




X 


Gandgarh bills . 


. 498, 


499 


Ganeshpur . -.■' 




195 


Gangamopteris . 


118, 119, 


130 




. angustifoUa, 


. Ill, 


114 




„ cyclopteroides.lW, 112, 


114 


Gangeria copper implements 


443 


Ganges, boundary of Vindhyans on 


87 


1, 


Delta . . • 


, 


405 



378, 400, 
409, 



411 



784 



INDEX. 



Ganges Delta, Mr. Vergusson's theory 
of formation 
„ „ discussion of changes in 

„ 1, peat of . 

„ oscillations of . 
,, pMn of, see Ipdo-Gangetic plain 
„ river ■ . . . . 165 
„ „ effect on Siwalik heds 

„ valley, former condition of, 

Gangetic alluvium, possible extension ' 
of coal-m«asures beneath 

Gangpur coal-field 

Ganjal river 

Ganjam 

Gangta 

Ganurgarh sh^iles 

Garangi hill 

Garhjat States . 

Garhwal, Lower Himalayas of 

(Jarnets in gneiss of Singrauli 
„ in Darjiling gneiss 

Garo area, cretaceous series 
„ nummilitic rocks 

Garo hills,' • . 

„ character of 
„ upper tertiaries 

Garudamangalam . . . 270 

Gas issuing from mud volcanoes 

Oasteroyoda of TJtatur group . 273 
„ Trichinopoly group . 278i, 

„ Arialur group •. 283, 

Gatparba, see Ghatprabha. 

Gauhati, height above sea . 

Gauli plateau 

Gawelgarh, see Gawilgurh. 

Gawilgurh hills 

Geelhoutboom, S. Africa 

Genera of Siwalik mammalia 
„ extinct, Siwalik 
„ recent, Siwalik 

Geography, Physical, of India 

Geological age of IJeccan traps 

Geology of India, summary of 

Gerfo .... 

Gerwa hill 

Ghagar river . . , .85; 

Ghambar-Basanli fault, Sub-Himalayas 

548 

Ghambar river .... 549 

Ghansura 



406 
408 
435 
406 

412 
541 
393 

185 
208. 
220 
244 
256 

84 
184 

43 
609 

19 
614 
690 
695 
682 
691 
698 
276 
730 
274 
279 
285 

392 
362 

224 
146 
577 
579 
579 

328 
xvili 

13 
195 

90 

560 

600 

• 37 



Oharialis gangeticns . 

Ghatprabha river . . 66, 68, 

Ghidaur bills 

Ghiigus 

Giants' cauldrons 

Gidalur . , 

Gieumal salidstone 

„ „ of Hazara 

Gilgit ... 

„' landslip in 
Gir ... 

Girai ... 

Giri river , • , . 604y 607, 

Glacial action in olive group, Punjab 

„ epoch, evidence of, in India, Ixx, 
372, 586, 

,, „ effect of, on Siwalik 
fauna , 

„ evidence in Tibet 

„ oljgjn of Talchir . boulder bedj 
xxxvi, 110, 112, 
Glaciers, former extepsion of, in Hima- 
layas 

Glauconite, Deccan traps . 302, 305, 
Gleichenia hindrahundensis . 145, 151, 
Qlohosi ammonites in cretaceous beds, 

Ixx, 

Glossopteris 111,'114, 118, 119, 121, 

„ browniana 115, 120| 121 

Glossozamites stolicz&arms 

Gnari-khorsum 

„ „ area, Central Himalayas, 

Gneiss, Assam . . . ' 4 

„ Bundelkhand . 

„ „ composition of 

„ . , accessory minerals in 

„ main area, relations to newer 
rocks , 
„ sub-divisipna of 

„ Bengal area 

„ of Bundelkhand and main areas 
contrasted . 

„ Singbhoom area 

„ Orissa area 

„ Central Provinces . 

„ South, Mahratta area 

„ Southern Konkan . 

„ Nilgiris ... 

„ Trichinopoly and Arcot 

„ Peninsular, Assaip valley 



VA.GK 

580 
390 

36 
230 
439 

65 
635 
503 
625 
516 
342 

11 
608 
496 

668 

586 
669 

229 

373 

•306 
243 

273 

130 

123 

114 

622 

646 

684 

10 

10 

16 

17 
18 
18 

19 
21- 
22 
22 
22 
23 
25 
25 
522 



INDEX. 



785 



PASB 

OneiaB, of Himalayai . xix, xxvi, 596, 626 
„ of CHor mountHin . . . 608 
„ apparently overlying Damudas 

in Sikkim . . . .615 
„ Himalayan of two ages . . 626 
„ Central of Himalayas . xxvi, 627 
„ „ terminal extensions of . 630 

„ newer, of Central Himalayas . 633 
„ ofBupshu .... 640 
„ Central, Hundes . . . 650 
„ ofLadak . . . .652 

„ ofKuenlun .... 656 
„ ofPdmir .... 657 

„ ZSnskar . ... .664 

„ ofPingi .... 664 

„ ofPirPanjil .... 665 
„ of Burma . . . .707 

Gneissic axis of Himalaya . . . 624 
„ range, Z&nskilr . . . 630 
„ „ Pir Panjfl . . ,631 

„ „ Dhauladhar . . 632 

Oneissic regions, three ... 3 

„ rocks, main area . . . 4, 17 
„ „ Bundelkhand area . 6 

„ „ Arvali area . . 5, 27, 44 
„ „ section of . . . 6 

„ „ classification of . . 9 

„ series of Feninsnla . . xviii, 1, 3 
„ „ lower Himalayas . 696 

GneisBoid beds in Bijiiwars . 30, 

Goa 

Goalpara, height ahove sea . 

Goats, wild, of Indian mountains 

Godivari valley . 104, 124, 151, 200, 
,, lower, Vindhyans of . 
region of Gondwanas . 
barrier, third . . . 
district .... 

alluvial flats of . . 383, 
older alluvial deposits of 
alluvium, mammalian fossils . 
„ agate flake 

Godda 

Gogi 

Gogra river 

Gok^k 

Golagh£t 

Golapilli 

GolapilU beds 




God^vari district 



38 
358 
392. 
374 
223 

74 
223 
233 
245 
432 
388 
389 
389 
166 

74 

X 

390 
.692 
245 
147 
245 



Gold, absent in Bundelkhand quartz-reefs 
„ in South Mahratta gneiss . 
„ in Burma .... 
Golden oolite of Chfiri group, Cutch 

„ „ Salt range, Punjab 

Gond countries .... 

Gondwaua, derivation of name . 

„ area on upper Tapti . 

„ areas on lower Narbada 

„ areas, surface of. 

Gondwana basins, origin of, and relations 

to existing valleys, 

xxix, XXX, 103, 

„ „ distribution 

„ „ groups of. 

„ „ origin of different 

groups . 

„ basins of North-Eastern Ha- 

zarib&gh, including Ear- 

harbiri . 

Gondwana beds, relations to gneiss 

„ „ former existence of, on 

Chutia Ndgpur plateau 
„ „ changes in, to west- 

ward, in Damnda val- 
ley . . . 193, 
„ „ trap dykes in 

Gondwana coast liiie . . xxix, 
„ epoch, climate of 
„ fauna and flora, relation^ of, 
Gondwina groups, lower 
„ „ upper 

„ „ „ table of . 

„ inliers near Ellichpur . 
„ „ west and north-west 

of Nagpur 
Gondwana period, physical geography 
of . . •. 
„ region, Bajmah&l 
„ „ Birbhum, Deogarh 

and Karharb^ri 
„ „ Damuda valley 



Son, Mah^nadi 
Brahmani 
S£tpura . 
Godavari . 
East Coast 



and 



213, 



Gondwana system 



xxvui, 

geological position 
and characters . 



PlOB 

16 

23 

708 

255 

49S 

97 

97 

220 

220 

106 



161 
161 
162 

163 



174 
17 

164 



199 

328 

xxxii 

XXXV 

xxxii 
109 
135 
141 

'224 

225 

xxxii 
165 

171 
177 

199 

217 

223 

242 

96 

96 



Zl 



GDnawSna »ysfieni, area occupied by, 

tx\m, 
„ fluviatile origia of, 
xxviii, 
„ „ •geological relations 

of, xxviii, 99, 
„ „ fossils, xxviii, xxxii, 

„ „ probable range of . 

„ „ supposed age of, 

JEXviii, 
„ „ disturbance of, xxix, 

„ „ division into groups 

„ „ table of representa- 

tive groups . 
Qondw^nas preserved by covering of 
Deccan trap . . xxx, 
„ possible outliers in Narbada 

valley .... 
„ upper, iu Easteirn Sirgnja . 

„ „ Goddvari valley . 

„ of Sikkim .... 

nas . ■• t 



35,80, 



Goona ■ . . 
Gooty, see Gtiti. 
Gopillprasad 
Gopat river . 

Gopikandar 

Gowan 

Graphic granite 

Grauite> Shillong series, Xh&i bills, 

40, 
„ in Arvali series , > 
„ of Himalaya's . . . 627, 

ft Hundes 

Granite veins, Bundelkhand gneiss 
„ „ Bengal gneiss 

„ „ Triohinopbly and Arcot . 

„ „ near 'Jabalpur j 

„ „ Behar transition rocks, 

37, 
Granitic axis of Bimalayas . 
Gravels, high level, of Sub-Himalayas . 
„ older, Pegii .... 

Gogo ' 

Great limestone of Jamu 
Green-eartb, Deccan traps . . 302, 
Greenough's geological map of India 
Greenstone, Sbillong series . 
„ Hundes . . 



FASB 








riOB 




Greenstone, YaUgi pass 


« ^ • 


657 


87 


Sarikol . 


. 


658 




„ Kashmir . 


- 


663 


Q9 


„ Burma 


. • 


714 




Groups, Gondwfina 


. 


107 


100 


„ allied to Edjma 


bSl, oorreiatioli 




100 


of . . 


• • • 


141 


102 


Gujtat, see GuiiBrat 








Gulchern quartziteS . 


. . 61, 


62 


102 


Guma 


. 


559 


104 


„ peak . 




. 


601 


107 


Gumani river 
Gnmra stream 




. 165, 167, 


169 
167 


108 


Gunchari . ■ 
Gundicotta hills 




. 


11 

64 


164 


Gurda 




'i 


208 




Gnria mountain 




. 


646 


216 


Gruntoor 




. 


246 


207 


Gtiti . 




. 60, 63 


286 


Guzerat ' 




. 222,339, 


433 


615 


„ tertiary beds o) 


' 


839 


492 


„ alluvium of . 


. 


4^5 


132 


Gwddar . 


. 458, 470, 


471 


300 


Gwalior 


. 86, 


88 




„ rooks , 


. 8,51,65, 


56 


212 


„ transition area 


. 


56 


203 


„ laterite . 


. 


'356 


167 


Gya . . . ., 


. 


86 


176 


„ (Laddk) . . 


. 


640 


21 


Gypseous shales of Cut< 


•b . . . 


345 




Gypsum salt range 


. 


486 


42 


'„ Eohat . 


• . 


508 


50 








629 


I 


[ 




650 


Habb river ' . 


. 


458 


13 


„ valley 


. 461, 


464 


21 


flM4ng . 


.. 


690 


25 


Hsematite in Bijdwars 


. 80, 


34,35 


84 


„ in gneiss 


. . 13, 


16,19 




„ in Gwaliors 




59 


38 


H^ii Pir . 


. 


566 


629 


Hakra river 


• 


416 


668 


HfflaPass . 


• 


448 


726 


„ range. 


. vii, 446, 


448 


342 


Halamdn hill 


. 254, 


256 


666 


HanW 


. 626, 


644 


305 


Hard river .' 


. 215, 


217 


Ixxiv 


„ . ■ * 


. 384, 


385 


41 


Haida railvpay station, 


elevation . 


385 


660 


Hardwar 


. 


■ ^ • . 


641 



INDEX. 



787 



Haripur, Haz£ra . 

„ near Simla . . , S34, 
Hasdo river . 
Hassan Abdal 
Hatteria , 

Hatu 598, 

Haurb^gh . 

Hawkesbury beds, Australia 
Hazara . 478, 479, 498, 505, 512, 

518, 

„ rock-groups of, xxv . . 483, 

Hazaribdgh. 127, 142, 174, 177, 187, 

192, 
„ gneiss and minerals . 

„ pegmatite veins 

„ copper implements • 

„ stone implements 

„ plateau , . iv, 18, 

), „ Qondw£nas of 106, 

Heights above sea, Narbada valley 

„ ludo-Gangetic plain 
Heinlap .... 
Hengir group . . . 
Henjdag hill 

Henzada 717, 

Herbert's Survey of Himalaya 
Heulandite in Deceau traps . 
High-level laterite, 351, 354, 857, 359, 
Hill nummulitic limestone of Northern 
Punjab ...... 

Himalaya .... viii, 372, 

Himalayan range, . . . viii, 
„ and peninsular rocks con- 

trasted . . zii, xzvii, 
„ and peninsular gneiss con- 

trasted .... 

„ tiiassic fauna, resemblance 

to Alpine 
„ geological subregion . 

„ and extra Hisialayan beds, 
contrast of, in Punjab . 
„ geology, scanty materials - 

for 

„ region . . . 518, 
„ land in eocene times . 
„ » „ exten- 

sion of < 
„ lake basins .... 
„ river gorges in Siwalik times 
the same as now . 



lASE 






rASa 


499 


Himalayan drainage lines . i 


575 


603 


» 


elevation, crest of . 630, 


677 


208 


,f 


rivers, rise Of, beyond snowy 




501 




range .... 


677 


154 


Himalayas, physical geography of 


viii 


604 


„ 


oldest riocks of . 


xxvi 


556 


,» 


gneiss of .... 


xxvi 


121 


,, 


©rigin of . Ivi, 667, 677, 


680 




» 


structure of, Iviii 526, 667, 


679 


566 


r> 


connexion of, with Indo- 




498 


3t 


gangetic plain 
former extensions of glaciers 


Ixii 


196 




in 


373 


19 


», 


provisional limit of region . 


518 


21 


„ 


geologicEil map . 


519 


443 


„ 


general features . 


519 


442 


„ 


thriee main divisions . 


519 


177 


,f 


lower, definition of 


619 


196 


„ 


Central or Tibetan, defini- 




385 




tion of . . . 519, 


592 


391 


,f 


middle anc( terminal . 


529 


718 


It' 


disturbance of late date, 533, 


569 


128 


1, 


easternmost outlier of num- 




192 




mulitic group in . 


534 


727 


„ 


elevation to eastward older 




609 




than to westward . 564, 


570 


306 


» 


defined in middle tertiary 




365 




times .... 


570 




J, 


extreme slowness of disturb- 




511 




ing action 


570 


373 


» 


elevation preceded compres- 




518 




sion .... 


571 




„ 


origin of river systems 


676 


513 


„ 


connexion of Assam range 








with .... 


685 


six 


Himalayas, central, data available 


622 




,1 


„ V classification of 




xlvii 




rocks . 


623 


Ixv 


,» 


„ difference from low- 








er Himalayas . 


624 


485 


» 


„ uniformity of 








structure . 


624 


517 


» 


•„ gneissic axes, syn- 




519 




clinals, &c. , 


624 


569 


» 


„ position of tertiary 








formations . 


62fll 


569 


j» 


„ gneiss of two ages . 


626 


570 


„ 


„ older gneiss . 


627 




,t 


„ granitic axis . , 


629 


570 


„ 


„ gneissic range . 


630 



788 



INDEX. 









lASB 








USI 


Himalayas^ 


centra), newer gneiss 


683 


Hinnalgar river . 




. 609 


,t 


» 


chief sedimentary 




Hippopotamus namadicus . 




. 386 






basins 


. 633 


,, palaindicua . 


386 


, 402 


it 


» 


ZSnskar area . 


633 


Hippurites, Lokzhung range 




. 654 


9* 


jj 


Hundes or NgSri- 




Hippuritic limestone, Sind . 




. 44S 






Khorsnm area . 


646 


Hiran river .... 




. 312 


i> 


j> 


Karakoram area . 


652 


Hirapur .... 




11 


tl 


j^ 


Kuenlun range 


655 


Hislopite .... 




. 305 


>l 


» 


Kashmir-Ptogi 




Hissar 




52 






area . 


658 


Hoharu river 




. 192 


IJ 


„ 


Pir Panjal chain . 


665 


Hornblende in gneiss . 


10 


19 


i» 


it 


post-tertiary and re- 




Hoshangabad 69, 86,. 91. 136 


138 








cent formations • 


667 


199. 215. 220 


303 


, 323 


t> 


), 


Summary 


679 


Hoshiarpur .... 




. 547 


Himalayas, 


lower 


, limits of , , 519, 


592 


Hot-springs, Jamu 




. 564 


9> 


*> 


general features 


£93 


Hothian Pass 




. 452 


>r 


»* 


boundaries of - 


593 


Hoti-Mnrdda 




. 500 


n 


»> 


distribution and 




Hottapati sandstone 


73 


74 






structure of rocks . • 


593 


Hundes . . . 622, 627, 


630 


646 


9> 


>» 


terminal or Simla 




„ or Ngari-Khorsum area . 




646 






area . 


594 


„ fossiKferous series of 




647 


» 


J, ' 


classification of rocks 


595 


,. tertiary eruptive rocks of 




. 650 


tt 


>s 


correlation of groups 


595 


„ lake-basin 




670 


ft 


1, 


absence of fossils 


595 


Hundes-Zinskar synclinal . 




. 625 


9> 


s» 


gneiesie series , 


596 


Hura coal-field . . . . 


167 


163 


t1 


>» 


the slate series 


598 


Hyderabad (Deccan) gneiss ; 




18 


)» 


J> 


relations of slate and 




Hyperodapedon , . xxxiv, Ixx 


,100 


135 






gneissic series . . 


601 


Hypersthene, Hundes . 




650 


>i 


« 


special metamorphism 
and disturbance . 


605 


I 






3t 


>J 


trappean rocks, 606, 


610 


Igneous rocks in transition series 




XX 


it 


» 


Chor mountain 


607 


Ikoua • . • . 




H 


>» 


J, 


South-east of Simla 


608 


Umenite in Bundelkhand gneiss . 




16 


>t 


3» 


Kumauu and Garh- 




„ in Singrauli gneiss 




19 






wal . 


609 


Implements, stone 




440 


n 


» 


Nepal . 


611 


„ prehistoric, stone 




441 


)> 


S> 


Sikhim . 


612 




, ■ copper, silver and b 


ronzE 


443 


>» 


„ 


Damudas in . 


615 




. iron . . 




443 


j> 


)» 


Bhutan border 


618 




, human, Narbada alluvium. 


386 


441 


3» 


„ 


Dikrang section 


620 




, „ God^vari alluvium. 


389 


441 


»» 


» 


Summary 


620 




, „ Krishna alluvium . 




390 


Bindia 


. 


. 31, 221, 


385 




, ■ „ in laterite of Hi 


idras 




Hiadon 


. 


. .51, 


59 


358, 369 


,370 


441 


Hindu Kusb, 


ix 


657 


Inchapilly, see Yenchapali. 






Hindustan, 


geological sub-region . 


Ixv 


Indargarh 




84 


Hingangbat; 




223 


Indhyddri hills . . . . 




iv 


Hingir 


. 




209 


India and Africa, land connexior 


1 be 




„ coal-field 




208 


tween, xxxv, xxxix, lii, 1 


xviii. 


Ixix 


Hinglaj 


. 




470 


„ and Malay countries, land 


con- 




Hingoli, fossil bones found near . 


389 




nexion between . 




Ixviii 



INDEX. 



789 



Indo.gangetic plain 



India, north-weatern, palsearctic forms 

in . .... 

Indian area, survival of older types in . 

Indian desert 

„ „ sand hills of . . . 

„ „ derivation of sand , 

Indian geology, previous summaries of. 
„ land shells, recent 
„ mammals, Ethiopian affinities 
of ..... 

„ peninsula, connexion of, with 
Oriental region . 
Indo-gangetic alluvium, area and eleva- 
tion > 
„ „ not marine, Ix, 

„ „ character of . 

„ „ subdivisions . 

„ „ denudation of 

„ „ bore-holes in 

„ „ fossils in 

.ii, 372, 
origin of 

„ „ „ connexion of with 

Himalayan ele- 
vation 
„ „ „ a land area in ter- 

tiary times 
„ „ „ surface features of' 

Indo-Malayan subregion 

„ fauna allied to miocene 

of Europe , 

Indrawati (IndrSvati) river . K, 233, 

Indus river ..... 

„ course of, through limestone 

hills between Hohri and 

Sukker .... 

„ former changes in 

„ floods 

in Tibet . . 625,640, 
Indus valley, subrecent marine condi- 
tions in . . ■ 
„ „ lower .... 
,, „ sand hills 
„ •, npper, tertiary rocks of . 

Indus delta 

„ depression in . . • 
Infra-Blaini group . . .xxvi, 
Infra-Krol group . • • x^vi, 
Infra-trappean, or Lameta beds, . 
of Kajimahendri 



Ixiv 
Ixx 
436 
437 
438 
Ixxii 
Ixix 

Ixix 

Ixiv 

891 
393 
396 
396 
397 
397 
402 
391 
Iv 



Ixii 

393 
403 
Ixv 

582 
237 

viii 



417 

418 

i 516 

667 

394 
417 
439 
626 
419 
379 
599 
600 
308 
316 



372, 707, 724, 
. xi. 



Infra-triassic rocks, Haz£ra 

Inkolu 

Inliers, paleeozoic, in sub-Himalayas 

Innaparaz-Kotapilly . . . . 

InnaparazpolUam . .- . 141, 

Intertrappean beds . . . xlii, 

'„ „ of N^gpur, the Nar- 

bada valley, &c. . 

„ „ lower, fossils of, 313, 

„ „ of B^jdmahendri . 

„ „ „ fossils 

of . 

,, „ upper, of Bombay . 

„ „ „ fossils of 

Irai 

Irawadi valley . . 
„ river 

„ delta 

Irawadi and Siwalik faunas compared . 
Irlaconda quartzites . . . 61, 
Iron implements, prehistoric 
Iron in laterite .... 349, 
Iron-clay .,..•. 
Iron-ore, DhSowara, Bundelkhand 
„ Salem ..... 
„ Bijdwar . . .30, 
„ Gwalior beds . . .57, 

„ Baniganj . , . . 
„ K£ranpura field . 
„ Sub-Himalayas, Kuma^n, &c . 
„ Sub-Himalayas, Sangar Marg. 
„ Burma .... 

Ironstone in Baniganj group 
Ironstone shales, Damuda 

„ „ Raniganj field . 

„ „ Jharia field 

„ „ Bok^ro field 

„ Bamgarh field 
„ „ South Karanpura field 

„ „ Karanpura field 

Ironstone, clay, Assam coal-fields 
Isakhel .... 487,491, 
Islamabad 

Islands in Bay of Bengal 
Itial .... 
Itkuri coal-field 



,115, 



Jabalpur . 156, 199, 200, 214, 307, 
„ district, Bijfiwars of , 



501 
24S 
562 
244 
244 
307 

311 
314 
317 

318 
319 
321 
229 
726 
705 
727 
588 
65 
443 
350 
351 
16 
26 
34 
59 
181 
194 
543 
563 
722 
182 
125 
181 
186 
188 
191 
192 
194 
703 
506 
662 
732 
237 
197 



384 
33 



790 



INDEX. 









fJLGS 






PIQB 


Jabalpur flora, relations to Mjmah&l 




Jashpur t 


356 


and Cutch floras . 147 


157, 


158 


Jasol 


54 


Jabalpur group . . . ■ 




156 


J»sper in transition rpeks, 28i, 33, 35. 


45 


„ „ South Rewah 




203 


„ in Gwalior.beds 


57 


„ „ near Jabalpur 




214 


„ in Deccan traps 


305 


„ „ Stipura basin 




219 


Jaunsar 


608 


„ Godavari valley . 




238 


Jatinga river ..... 


699 


Jabalpur, Lameta fossils near 




310 : 


Jerruck, see Jhirak; 




„ railway station, elevation 




385 


Jesalmir . . .54, 263, 347, 437, 


439 


,j agate flakes found near . 




442 


„ limestones .... 


264 


„ bronze implement . 




443 


Jesalmir, nummulitic limestone of 


347 


Jacdbabad , . . .41'? 


505, 


513 


Jet-coal, Jabalpur group, 156,204, 215, 


238 


Jade in gneiss .... 




19 


Jewargi 


73 


„ near Shahidula, Kuenluu . 




656 


Jhaban 47, 


48 


Jddukata river . 


687, 


690 


JbMra Patau ..... 


91 


Jaggampet 




245 


Jhand 


515 


Jainti Nadi . . . . • 




174 


Jhdnsi, gulena from .... 


16 


Jainti or Karaun field 




173 


Jbaria coal-field ..... 


185 


Jaintia Hills . . . x, 682 


692, 


696 


Jhelum river, viii, 478, 485, 554, 560, 


566 


„ upper tertiarieg 




698 


„ - „ tertiary boundaries near 




Jaintiapur 




698 


566, 


567 


Jaiput near Vizagapatapa . 




355 


„ valley 


509 


„ higlilands, gneiss of 




16 


„ upper valley of . . . 


658 


Jaipur, Assam .... 




701 


Jherria, see Jharia. 




„ , coal-field 




701 


JhilmilU 


203 


Jaldoka ..... 




545 


„ coal-field 


. . 109, 


204 


„ river 


613, 


619 


Jhils of Ganges delta . 




406 


Jailor 




54 


Jhirak 


451, 457, 461, 


469 


Jalori ridge .... 


598, 


602 


Jhiri shales 




84 


Jakbmari .... 


,449 


450 


Jilladypad 




244 


Jako ..... 


598 


605 


Jobat, Bij^wars of 




45 


Jambugbora , , 


. 47 


48 


Jodhpur . . ■ 


53, 54, 93, 


437 


Jamkbandi . , 




66 


Johila river 




203 


Jamtarra , , . . 




173 


Jorh4t 




700 


Janini river 




11 


Jualamnkij inflammable gas at . 


549 


Jamu .... 




560 : 


Jubbulpore, see Jabalpur. 




„ hills, Sirmur boundary in 




554 


Juggiapet 60, 


72 


„ area of Sub-Himalayas 




. 560 


Julo2ai ...... 


600 


„ inliers of pals^ozoiQ rocks 




. 562 i 


Jumera Pat .... 300, 


355 


„ characters of Subiithu grog 


P 


562 


Jummoo, see Jamu. 




„ Sub-Himalayas compared 


witl 


I 


Jumna river, mammalian bones found in 


402 


Simla section , 




. 564 


„ course of . 


412 


Jamulmadgu group 


70 


. 71 


„ ^fiect on Siwaliks 


641 


Jamuni . , 






12 


Jumna-Ganges area, Sub.Hiinalayan 




Jamuni river . 


. 




. 187 


beds .... 


541 


Jangion 


155, m 


,236 


, 237 


Jura hill .^ ... . 254, 


256 


Jangti river 


, 




. 618 


Jurassic coast lines, xxix, xxxii, xxsvii. 


xlix 


Janji river . ' 


. 




. 701 


„ marine beds. East Coast, xxxvii, 




Jarra . , , 


> 




. 254 


148, 149, 244, 


250 


J&hk . . . 






. 470. 


„ age of Upper 


Qondvrauas 


103 



INDEX. 



791 



Jarassic rocks, extra-peninsular . 

„ „ of Catch . xszvii, 
M „ „ sub-divisions . 

„ „ „ correlation with 

European 
Jurassics 
„ TTpper, of Catch . 
,, in Indian desert xxzvii, 
,, in Northern Katty war 
» Salt Range, Punjab 
„ west of Indus 
„ of -Hazard, &c. 
fossils, Zdnskar area 
rocks north of ISTepil 
rocks and fossils, Niti 
fossils, Milam pass 
Jntog .... 

Jyntia or Jyntea, see Jaintia. 

e: 

Kabul Tirer . . , 
Kach and Kachb, see Catch. 
Kadapah .... 
Kadapah formation 
Kudwal . . ... 
Eafirkot, triassic bed near . 
Edfirkot hUls, 478, 486, 487, 491, 
Kairda dun . 
Eaijn£g range 
Eaimnr range 

„ scarp . .• 78,80,86, 

„ sandstone 

„ beds 
Etunjna hills 
Kairgura- . 
Eajrah . 
Eakarhatti . 
Eakindya . 
K&Wa&gh 



490. 495, 496, 



salt marl near 
coal near . 



Ealadghi 



area, transition rocks 
beds, thickness and sub< 
sions . • 



Ealahandi . 
E^apahdr . 
KUapiai livar 
Kalar . 



72, 

8. 



495, 
536, 



■divi' 



i^as 






FASB 


xlviii 


K£1aw£la pass . . . • • 


S42 


261 


Ealiani 


■ ■ . ■ 


355 


252 


Ealingar . 


• 


14 




Ediipur 


. 


184 




K£ka 


. 536, 538, 


547 


2S3 


E^lkadun . 


* . . . 


548 


259 


Eallar kah£r 


^ . 


490 


263 


E£ltangh£t hill 


.... 


205 


265 


Ediu river 


. 691, 692, 


695 


495 


Eilyan 


. 


319 


495 


Edma . 


. * 


720 


502 


Eamaljor hill 


■ • . . . 


175 


635 


Eamamet . 





75 


646 


„ • see Ehamamet. 




647 


Kam&am coal-field .... 


240 


649 


Eamdrsen bridge .... 


598 


601 


Eamatkigh^t .... 304, 


note 




Eimthi 225, 


226 




E£mthi group . . . 104,116, 


128 




„ „ Bisrampur field . 


206 




„ „ Eorba field . 


208 


viii 


„ ,, Raigarh-Bingir field 


210 




„ „ Mchir field . . ' . 


212 


355 


„ „ near EUichpur' 


224 


60 


„ „ west and north-west of 




47 


Nagpur 


225 


493 


„ „ of Edmthi area 


226 


514 


„ „ Bandar field . 


226 


539 


„ „ near Ehair and Arjuna . 


227 


485 


„ „ Wardba or Ch^nda field : 


231 


iv 


„ „ Godfivari valley . 235, 


240 


205 


„ „ Eamdram field 


241 


82 


Eandah gh&t ..... 


608 


84 


Eandakur 


247 


78 


Eaudikonda talak > . . . 


241 


234 


Eandit 


172 


38 


Eandit Eurayah coal-field . 


172 


608 


Eanigiri hill . . . i 239, 


240 


256 


E&igra valley ..... 


632 


515 


Etingra area of Sub-Himalayas < 


547 


487 


„ „ difficulty ef classing Sub- 




495 


Himalayas in 


554 


311 


„ „ want of fossils in Sub- 




65 


Himalayas . 


557 




„ „ north-western termination 


659 


67 


„ high level gravels of 


669 


355 


Eanhiin river .... 128, 


215 


20 


Eanher river 


201 


41 


K&nheri caves . . . : 304, 


note 


413 


Eankar 




381 



793 



INDEX. 







PASS 




FASH 


Kankar, analyses of . . . 382, note 


Kashmir, trappean rocka of 


662 


Kanoj 


. 599 


„ Silurian rocks of . 


662 


Kantkot sandstone 


258 


„ glacial evidence in 


668 


Kappatgudd hills, gold in . 


23 


„ lake-basin .... 


672 


Karachi. . . . 464,470,471 


, 473 


Kashmir- Pangi area. Central Himalayas 


658 


Kfoak&h river . . . 654,656 


, 671 


Kashmor, height above sea . 


392 


E&r^koram .... 


. 623 


Karambar rings . . . * . 370, 


444 


„ synclinal . 


. 626 


K^teru 316, 


317 


„ area .... 


. 652 


Kathm^ndu . . . 543.611, 


675 


„ basin, eastern section 


653 


„ section, lower Himalayas . 


611 


„ section 


654 


Katikela 


22 


„ stones 


655 


Katkona 


207 


Karakpur (Khargpur) hills . 36, 38 


356 


Katrol.group . . . 141, 159, 


253 


££ranptira .... 


192 


„ ,, fossils of 


258 


„ coal-fields . 


191 


Kattywar, Jurassic beds in . 


265 


„ South, coal-field 


191 


„ traps of . . 300, 304, 


328 


Karauli 51 


52 


„ tertiary beds of 


341 


Karaun coal-field 


173 


„ raised bed of oysters in 


377 


Karchat 458, 


464 


„ alluvium of . . . 


426 


Karharbari, Gondwilna region . 


171 


coast deposits of 


426 


Karharbari group, 112, 175. 180, 217 


, note 


„ littoral concrete 


427 


„ „ relation toTalchirs 


113 


, „ blown sand of . . 


435 


„ „ palsBontoIogy 


114 


Kaveri, alluvial flats . . . 383, 


433 


„ coal-lield .... 


174 


Kaveri, see Cauvery. 




Karen-ni 708, 


709 


Kaumapying 


719 


Karewa deposits, Kashmir . 


673 


Kaurangyi 


721 


Kargil . . 626,635,639,641, 


643 


Kauray 


270 


Kari£n» 


44 


Kautairoo, see K&teru 




„ flexible sandstone of 


52 


Kawarsa ...... 


232 


Karib&i 


697 


Keantali 712, 


717 


Karjan 


341 


Kelat . . , 447.448,456, 


453 


Earnatic 


60 


„ section of rocks*near 


455 


Karnul . . . 60,62,69, 


381 


Kelloway beds of Cutch 


255 


„ area of Lower Vindhyans 


69 


Kelod 


225 


Earnul formation ... 8, 


69 


Ken river . . . .81, S3, 86, 


87 


„ „ subdivisions and thickness 


70 


„ Bijiwars of . . . ■ . 


30 


Karo river 


312 


Kerauli 


88 


Karoo series of South Africa 


122, 


123 


KeryU 


203 


Kiirtse .... 


, 


639 


Khddar 


404 


Kasara .... 


. 


227 


Khadi 


543 


Kdsta .... 


. 


179 


Khair, Gondwana. outliers near . 


227 


Kasauii ridge . . ' . 


. 


532 


KhairiMiirat . . , 484,505, 


610 


„ beds . . 


524, 


530 


Khamamet 


241 


„ „ plant fossils in 


. 


5'32 


Khamapur 


220 


Kashmir .... 


623, 


658 


Khdndesh . . 327,378.383,385, 


388 


„ oldest rocks of 




XXV 


Kharagdiha .... 174, 


176 


„ synclinal 


• 


626 


Kharbu 641, 


645 


„ triassic rocks of . 




659 


Kharian ridge 


668 


„ rock gronps of 


. 


659 


Kharir . . 251, 254, 256, 343. 


34S 


u carboniferous rocks of . 


• 


660 


Khasi bills . . . z, 40, 682, 


687 



INDEX. 



793 



Eh£si hills, cretaceous heds, relations to 




Southern Indian rooks 


291 


„ cretaceous series 


687 


„ „ fossils from 


688 


„ nummulitic series 


693 


„ upper tertiaries 


698 


Khfogpur hills 


173 


Ehettapini 


220 


Ehewra salt mines .... 


486 


Khirthar rauge . vii, 446, 457, 460, 




464, 466, 


469 


Ehirthar group .... 1, 


456 


Eholas of Nepal 


674 


Ehozdar 


455 


Ehulna 


400 


Ehundair valley , . 60, 70, 71, 


72 


„ group . . . .70, 


71 


Ehunmu ....... 


661 


Ehurreer, see Eharir 




Ehyrasol 


184 


Khyrpur 


417 


Eiagar lake . ' . 


640 


Eilar 


664 


Eilian ridge 


655 


Eim river 340, 


341 


Eim^mli 


341 


Eimmeridge beds of Cutch 


258 


Einchiojnnga . . . . z. 


614 


Einersw&mi stream . . . 23S, 


239 


Eira hUl . . . . 254, 255, 


256 


Eirlnmpudi 


244 


Eirwi . . . 11,81,83, 


442 


Eishenganga river . . . 478, 


566 


Eisiljilga 


654 




664 


EitcheD-middens, Andaman Islands . 


733 




653 


Eiw^z 


656 


Eoari ^et 


254 


Eoda DoDgri 


226 


Eoel river 


36 


KoUt . . 478,503,504,513, 


514 




507 


„ „ section of beds . 


508 


Eoil river 


197 


Eoilkuntla limestones . . . 70, 


72 




705 


Eolamal^ hills . . . ' . 


iv 




65 


Konkan 


327 



FAOa 

Eonkan, gneiss of Southern ... 23 

„ laterite of . . 357, 368, 377 

„ denudation of ... 378 

Eon khas 80 

Eonjirihill 213 

Eoonap beds of South Africa . . 123 

Eopili river 692 

Eopilashill 355 

Eorana hills ■ . . .62, 481 

Eorba 125 

„ coal-field 207 

Eorea . . ' , . . .202 

Eorb£di . 226 

Eori creek 418, 419 

Eosari fault, Sub-Himalayas . . 549 

Eosi river x 

Eota (Singrauli) 203 

„ (Sironcha) '. . . 151, 236 

„ limestones 152 

Eota-Maleri beds . . 100, 102, 151 
„ „ Wardha field . . . 232 
„ „ Godavari valley . . 236 
Eota-Maleri fossils .... 152 
„ „ „ contradictory evi- 
dence of, 100 . 155 

Kotgarh 602 

Eotkhai 604 

Eotleh 549 

Eotli 562, 568 

Eotri. .. .300,451,452,457, 469 

„ height above sea . . . 392 

Erishna river .... 238, 246 

„ alluvium of . . 383, 389, 433 

„ u mammalian fossils in 390 

„ „ stone implements in 390 

Erishna group . . .61, 65, 72 

Krol hill .... 533, 599, 600 

group . . .. .xxvi, 601 

„ „ assigned to trias . . 595 

>, „ „ to .carboniferous 596 

„ „ fossils doubtful . . ' 596 

Erol limestone near Simla . . . 603 

„ „ u Mussooree . . 609 

„ „ Eumaun . . . 609 

„ representative of, in Nepal . 611 

Erur 664 

Euchri 264 

Eudia stream ■ igi 

Eudunwira, steatite quarried at . , 15 

Knenlnn ii, 623 



794 



630, 



Euenlun axis 

„ range, sections of 

„ lake basin . 
Kukurkhadi stream 
Kulam, see Quilon, 
Koling series 

Kulu 

Eumaan, lower Himalayas of 

„ Sub-Himalayas of 

„ iron ores of 
Kummnmmeet, see Khamamet. 
Kund-Kaplas mountain 
Kungirpnra 
Kunkur, see Kankar. 
Eunzum pass 
■Kupputgode hills 
Kuralihill . 
Enrat 
Kurg stone implements 

„ iron im 
Knrt . 
Kurkut river 
Kurram river 
Kurreer, see Kharir. 
Kurrukpoor, see Earakpur and Eh&rg- 
pur. 

Eurseong 

Eushdlgarh, mammalian fossils from 

514, 
Ensukunubal . . 
Eutkheri 

Eutto-jo-Eabar . . . 
Entunji .... 
Eyanite in Bundelkhand gneiss 

„ in Daijiling gneiss . 

„ in Hundes gn^ss . 
Eymore, see Eaimur. 
Eyouk-phyu 



PAOB 

626 
655 
671 
217 

638 
631 
609 
543 
543 



565, 632 
11 



631 

355 

327 

83 

442 

639 



478, 491 



614 

576 

74 

2S5 

456 

81 

16 

614 

650 



730 



L 

Labyrintbodont from M£agU . . 129 

Laecadive islands, depression of . . S76 

Ladak range ..... ix 

„ gneisgiftaxis, 625,^626,627, 633 

eocene basin of . . 634,^ 643 

„ G;neiss ..... 652 

Xiildera 56, 94 

Lahore, height above sea . . . 392 

IJ,hul 633 



Lairangau 

Laisophlaug 

Lake basin, Euenlan and Liugzithang 
„ Hundes 

„ ' Tso moriri 
„ of Eashmir 

„ of Nepal . 

Lake deposits . . 

Lakes, Himalayan and Alpine com 

pared . . ... 

Lakes of Naini Tal and Sikkim 
Lakhanpur coal-field . 

Lakhimpur 

Lakhpat . . . 260, 267, 345, 
Laki hills, 451, 452, 457 461, 464, 
467 . ... 

„ cretaceous beds of 

Lakiserai 

Lalatpur . * . . . . 11, 

Lalsot 

Limay^iru 

LamelUiranchiata TJtatfir group . 273, 

„ Trichinopoly group 

278, 

„ Arialur group 283, 

Lameta Ghat .... 215, 

„ „ coal at ... 

Lameta group 

„ „ resemblance to Bilgh 

beds 
„ „ relations to older form- 

ations 
„ „ distribution 

„ fossils of . . . 
Land, eocene, distribution of . . 
„ shells, recent affinitaes of . 

Landour 

Lingpar 

Lipri ridge 

Laterite ...... slv, 

„ composition . . . . 

„ analysis of . . , 349, 
„ tubes in . . . . 350, 

„ varieties, high level and low. 
level .... 

„ passage into lithomarge . 
;, re-consolidation of . 
„ infertiKty of , 
„ high level, distribution, &e; 
„ Bajmahal hills 



694 
688 
671 
670 
671 
672 
674 
427 

675 
675 
206 
546 
346 

469 

448 

33 

12 

50 

641 

275 

279 
285 
307 
'215 
308 

309 

309 
310 
310 
lii 
Ixix 
609 
688 
562 
348 
349 
note 
367 

361 

358 
354 
354 
354 
356 



INDEX. 



795 



Laterite, Surat tertiary beds . 340, 
„ bigh level, once perhaps a con- 
tinuons bed .... 
„ low-level, distribution, &c. 
„ west coast . . , 
„ east coast .... 
„ quartzite, implements in , 
„ bigb level, theories of origin 
359, 
„ geological age 

„ „ possible derivation 

from scoria, &c. 
„ connexion of high level vrith 
lower tertiary laterite of Gu- 
zerat • , . • • 
„ low-level, origin of 
„ „ age of . 

„ „ older than Earam- 

bar rings • 
„ in Ehirthar group, gind 
,, in Sabathn gi'oup, glub-Bima- 

layas • 
„ Burma . 
Ijead mines, i^undialumpet 

„ Biama . 
Lehti river . 
Lenya river , , . 
Lepidolite in gneiss , 
Iiepidofus , , 
Jjencopyrite in gneiss , 
Jievel, subrecent changes of 
Lian glen . 

Lias fossils, Ziinskar area 
Liaasic affinities, Bajmah^l group 
Lidar valley, Kashmir 
Lignite sandstone of Nahan 
Lhowa'stream 
Lilang series 
Limestone in gneiss 
„ in BijawarS; 

34, 35, 
„ in Arvali beds 

in Gwajior beds 

„ in Eadapah beds 

in Ealadgi beds 

„ in Earnul bed^ 

in Bhiipa beds 

„ in lower Vindhyaris, 75, 76, 

78, go, 81, 82, 

.„ in upper Vittdbyajas, §4, 85, 



29, 



660, 
group , 
. 711. 
. 637, 

19, as, 

31, 33. 33, 



. 57. 
62, 63, 

70, 71, 
. 73. 



r^aa 






PAGB 


366 


Limestone iq Biniganj coal-field • 


. 


183 




„ in cretaceous beds 


270. 


276 


357 


ofBagh . 




293 


357 


„ in Lameta group 




309 


357 


,. in Blaini group . 




600 


358 


„ in Krol group . 




601 


358 


„ Great, of Jamu . 




666 




Limits of area, described . 




ii 


365 


Lingala 




23S 


364 


Lingzithang . . . . 


654. 


671 




„ lake basin 




671 


365 


List of European formations 




Ixxv 




Lithomarge . . , . 




354 




Littoral concrete . . , 




426 


366 


„ Arakan Coast . 




729 


368 


Lodai 


254 


260 


369 


Lobdrdagga . . , . 


197. 


198 




Lokapur 




68 


370 


Lokartalai . 136, 137. 214, 215 


219. 


220 


457 


LokzhuDg range . . , . 


654. 


671 




Lonar lake 




379 


563 


„ origin of . 




380 


726 


Lprot . . . . ' , 




597 


64 


Low level laterite . 352, 357 


,368. 


369 


708 


Lower Himalayas, definition of 




519 


617 


„ linjits of . 




592 


712 


.. Simla region 




xxvi 


19 


., see Himalayag. 






154 


LAdiana, height above sea . 




392 


19 


LAgtihill .' . . . 


188. 


189 


kxi 


Lnmki hill .... 




175 


686 


Luni river . . ,54, 395 


,437. 


438 


636 


Lunkar-la .... 




653. 


145 


Lunsu .... 




549 


662 


Lushai hills 




698 


536 


Lynyan .... 




453 


716 








642 








24 


M 








Macbu river 


, 


619 


45 


MoBrocephali ammonites in 


Cutch 




50 


jurasi 


ics , 


263 


59 


» in cret 


iceous 




64 


beds 


. 278, 


284 


67 


J^roianiopferis 


, 118, 


14S 


72 


Madagbirbill , 


. 164, 


196 


74 


Madanpur gorge, trap in . 


, , 


16 




Madapur , . , ' . 


, , 


236 


83 


Madavdram . . . 


, 


238 


89 


., coal-field . 


• • 


239 



796 



INDEX. 



Maderapauciim 

Madras . . . 149,247,336, 
„ stone implements in laterite 
near . . 358, 369, 370, 
„ raised shell bed near . 377, 
„ boring at 
Madnpar jnngle .... 407, 
Magar Pir .... 

Magnesian sandstone group, Salt Rang( 
Magnesite, Salem 
Magnetite in gneiss 

„ Salem 

„ in Deccan trap . 
Mahabar hills . . . 86, 37, 
Mahdbleshwar . . . v, 827. 
Mahada;i ravine . 
Mabideo, Assam hills . 
Mahddeva beds, thickness . 

„ „ fossils 

„ hills . . . vi, 136; 

„ series . . . 107, 108, 
Mah^devas, Bfiniganj field . 

„ Bokaro field 

„ South Karanpura field 

„ Karanpura field . 

„ near Latiahar . 

„ • South Eewah 

„ Jhilmilli field 

„ Bisrampur field . 

„ Chutia Ndgpur . 

„ Korha field 

„ Talchir field 

„ S&tpura basin . 

„ near Barwai . 

„ Deva river, Bajpipla 

„ near EUiehpur . 

Mahammad bazar 
Mahanadi Gondwdna region 

„ river, Orissa . 199, 

„ Ti)lley, Orissa 



„ „ gneiss of . 

„ „ lower Vindbyans 

„ „ Talchir ontliers 

Hab^nadi river, Sikkim 

„ „ Siwaliks in . 

Mahar£jpur 
Maher hills 

Mahim .... 
Mahindraganj 



213, 
163, 
211, 



of 



370 
423 

441 
424 
423 
408 
464 
489 
26 
19 
26 
305 
38 
354 
362 
688 
136 
136 
216 
135 
184 
189 
192 
195 
198 
203 
205 
206 
207 
. 208 
213 
219 
221 
222 
224 
171 
199 
243 

213 

22 

74 

211 

614 

545 

95 

36 

427 

697 



Mahratta Country, Soathern, traps of 

312, 313, 

„ „ „ laterite of 

354, 355, 

„ „ „ lake de. 

posits 

Mahratta, South, gneiss area ' , 

„ „ transition area . 

Mahsud Waziri country, metamorphics 

in 

Mahtin .... 

Mahton stream . 

Mahuagiri hill . . . 167, 169, 

Mai-i 711,712, 

Mai-i group . . • 

Mailan Pat .... 

Mailag 548, 

Main area, gneissic rocks . xviii, 4, 

Main boundary between Siwalik and 

Sirmur series, 539,547, 

„ „ representation of, in 

Hazara . . . 

Main gneissic area, sub-divisions . 

Main Pat . . 207,308,313,355, 

Mainpuri, copper implements found 

near 

Maisur, iron implements 

„ gneiss . . . .23, 
„ plateau . . • • . 
„ „ gneiss of . . . 

Makran 

„ coast, submarine cliff along .. 
Makr£n gronp .... liv, 

Hakr£ch 

Makum coal-field .... 
Malabar coast, gneiss of . . , 
„ „ sand dunes of 
„ „ iron implements . 
„ sub-region, zoological . . 
Malabar hill, Bombay . 
Malagarb hill 
Malani \ . 
„ beds 
Malay Archipelago, volcanic band of 

725, 
Malay countries, connexion of, with 

India 

Malayan fauna allied to European 

miocene 

Maldlve islands, depression of 



53, 



324 

364 

427 
22 
65 

486 
164 
716 
356 
718 
711 
163 
553 
17 

552 

567 

18 

363 

443 

444 

24 

V 

18 
456 
Ixxi 
470 
494 
701 

17 
435 
444 
Ixv 
320 
232 
264 

53 

732 

Izviii 

682 
876 



INDEX. 



797 



. 151.236, 



69, 



17, 427, 



Maledi, gee Maleri. 
Maleri 

„ beda. . 
MalkapuT, elevation of 
M^wa 

„ escarpment 
,, traps of'. 
Taiwan 
Mamlu 
HammaUa, Siwalik, homotaxis of liy, 

„ • „ genera of 
Mammals, fossil, Tibet. 

„ Indian, ElhiOpian affinities of 

„ Oriental, Ethiopian affinities 

of . . . 

„ . u Palcearctic affinities 

of . . . 

Mammalian faunas, recent^ poverty of . 

„ fossils, Narbada 

„ „ Indo-6angetic 

allavium 
„ „ Perim Island . 

„ tertiary fauna . 

ManGb£t 

Man^r river 

Manasaraur (Manasarowar) Lake, 622, 

646, 
M^asbal lake .... 660, 

Manbhum 

„ transition rocks . . 
Manebbar beds, connexion vrith 

Siwaliks Iv, 

Mancbar group .... J, 
„ „ sub-divisions 

,. „ estuarine beds in 

,, „ relations to Makran 

group 

„ „ Palseontology, Iv, 471, 

„ age of . lv,473, 

Mancbhar lake . . 417, 457, 466, 

M£nd river .... 208, 

Mandan group 

Mandar hill, Bhagalpur 
Mandera . . 

Mandi 

„ rock salt . . . . • 
Mandla plateau . . . 18, 202, 
Mandlaisur, see Mandlesir. 

Mandlesir 

Mandogarfa and Mandoo, see Mdndu. 



237 
100 
388 
363 
377 
303 
358 
686 
576 
577 
651 
Ixix 

Ixvi 

Ixvi 
686 
885 

402 
343 
572 
601 
236 

650 
663 

174 
43 

581 
466 
466 



470 
581 
581 
469 
209 
49 
21 
608 
557 
558 
363 

267 



Mindu 

M£ndvi 

Mangali, see M^ngli. 

Manganese in laterite . 

M£ngli beds 

Mangrad river 

Manbiari 

Mankipur . 

Mans(iri 

Maraura 

Maratrattur 

Marbal pass 

Marble rocks near Jabalpur 

Mareba valley 

Margalla hills 



542, 



Mari and Bbdgti hills . 



117, 



595, 



478, 



293, 



129, 



167, 



600, 
11, 12, 



485, 



294 
346 

350 
231 
548 
168 
' 48 
609 

16 
273 
662 

34 
641 
498 
503 
664 



vii, 479, 480, 

505, 513 
Marine beds, absence of, in Indo-Gan- 

getic plain . , . ■ Ixi, 393 

Marine beds of peninsula . . . xii 

„ „ „ equivalents of xiv 

„ fossils, rarity of, in peninsula xi 
„ Jurassic rocks, distribution 

of 250 

,. origin of Sahyadri scarps . . 377 

Markanda river .... 1 537 

Marl, salt, of Salt Eange, Punjab . . 486 

Marpamaudi range .... 24 

Martaban . . . 704, 707, 709, 726 

Marun .562 

Mascareue islands, birds of . . . Ixviii 

Masimik pass 653 . 

Mastodon pandionis . . . . , 390 
Matabangab, oscillations of . . , 406 

Matepenai bill 327 

Matheranhill . . . 320,355, 365 

Matiani 604 

Mau, quartz reef at .... 14 

Maubilarkar .... 689, 690 

MaudibhiU ..... 195 

Maulmain 705 

„ group 709 

Mauphlong . . .41, 42, 689 

Mansmai 688 

Mayo salt mines 486 

MazBgaon 321 

Mechi river . . . . . 613 

Mednlea stream 212 



■ftXl &yjUA.a 



Meerut, height ahovi sea . • 
Megalosaurus in cretaceous beds, Ixx, 2S0, 284, 



Mekalgandi gbftt, section of tfUps and 

sedimentary bed^ t < ■ • 

Membn> mud Tolcanoes of . • < 

Mergui 705, 

„ archipelago . . . 709, 
„ group .*.... 
Mesozoic rocks, extra-peninsular . 

„ „ of Punjab Salt-Range . 

„ „ Northern Punjab 

„ series of Zeinskar 

Hetamorphic series . > xviii, 1, 

„ areas . . . ■ 4^ 

„ rocks, classification of . 

„ „ of Bundel k h a n d 

xviii, 

„ „ main area 

„ „ Arvali area . 27, 

„ „ Mabsud Wariti 

country 
„ „ Hazara ' 

„ „ of Bnpsba 

„ „ Niti . 

Metamorphism special, in Lowef H!ma- 



Mbar 

Mianj^ni .... 
Mica in gneiss . . . 
Micaceous iron in gneiss 
Micropholis stotvU 
Middle Himalayas . « 
Middle Sub-Himalayan region 
Midnapur . . , 184, 

Migration of tertiary mammalia 
Mikir area, cretaceous series 
Mikir hills 

Miliolite of Kattywar . 
Millstones of gneiss . 
Minerals in Bundelkhand gneiss 

11. 

„ in Haz£rib^h' gneiss 
„ in Singrauli gneiss 
„ in Deccan trap . 

Minet-toung 

Miocene beds of Sind . . 44>7, 
„ „ Central Europe 
,1 „ Pegu . 
„ flora of Greenland, &c. 



10, 

123. 

520, 

335, 



10, 
12, 13. 



TAQB 






• 


7X0E 


392 


Miocene forms, survival of, in Se walik beds 


582 


284, 


„ » in ■ Indo-Malayan 


and 




407 


Ethiopean faunae 


, 582, 


684 




„ fossils, Arakan 




720 


313 


MirampUib . . 




69^ 


729 


Mir kfilan hills . 




499 


709 


pass . . . 




434 


732 


MIrwania .... 




4S 


708 


Mirzapar district, Bijawars of 




36 


xl*i 


„ gneiss . 




19 


493 


Mochpura mountains . 


. , 


502 


498 


Mocbu river 




619 


641 


Mohangarh 




11 


3 


Mohaui .... 




196 


S 


Mobankot .... 




451 


9 


Mohdr .... 




95 




Mofrahill 




356 


10 


Mdasse. resemblance to Siwalik 


sand. 




17 


stone .... 




524 


48 


Molim granite .... 




42 




Mollusoa, fossil, Narbada alluvium 


384 


486 


,, Siwalik 


. 


576 


498 


Momein ..... 


708, 


725 


640 


Mongbyr ..... 


142, 


174 


649 


Monze, Cape, rise of land at 


, 


877 




Mooltan, height above sea . 


• 


392 


605 


Mopslni .... 217, 218 


384 


345 


„ ■ coal at ... . 




218 


499 


Moraines, ancient, Hundes . 


652, 


670 


19 


in Sikkim and Nepal 




373 


19 


„ in Naga hills 




373 


131 


Mor river ..... 




172 


529 


Moran rfver 


. . • 


137, 


219 


528 


Morang river . 


, , 




165 


435 


Morar 


. . 




58 


584 


„ group 






57 


692 


Morel river 




165, 


170 


682 


Morbar river . 






198 


342 


Moriri lake 




640, 


671 


16 


Mortaka 
Morung 




32, 


84 
404 


16 


Motiir 






217 


19 


„ beds, S£tpura basin . 




218 


19 


„ group .... 


115, 


127 


340 


Moulmein, see Manlmain. 






720 


Mountain formation, De Beaumont's 




466 


theory . 


634, 


667 


682 


Mountain ranges of Peninsula 


. 


ui 


719 


.1 • „ of extra peninsular 




685 


area 


* . . 


Tii, 


Ivii 



INDEX. 



7-99 



Mountain ranges of Sind and Western 




Punjab 


vii 


„ of Himalaya . 


viii 


u „ of Burma 


X 


» „ of Peninsula, Origin 




of . .' . 


XX 


„ „ extra-peninsnlat, di- 




rection of . . . 


ivii 


Mountain structure, one-sidedness of . 


667 


Mountains of India, fauna and flora Of 


374 


Kud Tcdcanoes of Bamri, &c. 


729 


,1 „ difference of, from true 




volcanoes . 


730 


Muduwal 


73 


Mubair, see Maher. 




Mulakhel 490; 


495 


Mnlgoab, quartz reef at . . . 


13 


Mlingi 


389 


Mnnny Mai6 


24 


Murdan i 


500 


Murree, Punjab, 478, 483, 485, 502, 503, 


511 


„ beds 511, 


513 


„ Mils, Punjab . . 498,505, 


512 


„ rocks of 


510 


MuTsbidabad 


406 


Murtazapur, elevation 


388 


Muscat, depression near 


Ixxii 


Muscbelkalk 


122 


Muscovite in gneiss .... 


19 


Mussooree, see Mansdri, 




Mnstagb range . .i ■ • . rx. 


657 


Muth ...*... 639, 


643 


„ series . 


638 


Muzafirabad . . . 478, 485, 


566 




727 


Myit-ma-kha kbyoung 


727 


Mvriolepis 


120 



Mysore, see Maisur. 



N 



Nadann dun . 
Niga bills . 

„ „ coal-fields of 
Nagar Parkar 
Nagari Kose 

„ quartzites 
Naggery river 
Nigpur, 128,223,225 
K^gpur, agate flakes found near 



X, 683, 696, 


699 




699 




64 




60 


. 61, 


62 




248 


9, 311, 855, 


432 


near . 


442 



Nagpur iron implements . . , 444 

„ intertrappean beds of . . 311 

„ gneiss 22 

u Gondw£na inliers west and 

nortb-west of— . . . 225 

Xagode 89 

Ndhun 536, 547 

„ area, Siwaliks . . . 536,- 539 

„ iron ore near .... 543 

N£bun group . . 524, 536, 540, 652 
„ „ relations to Mancbbar beds 

Of Sind .... 58^ 

Ndbun-Sirmnr boundary . . 552, 539 

H£bun-Siwalik boundary . . . 637 

„ „ y) extinction of . 550 

Naina Devi ridge . . . 550, 651 

Naini Ml / . . , 543, 596, 609 
„ asserted occurrence Of Num- 

mulites near . . . 609 

„ metamorpbic rocks near . 610 

„ eruptive rocks of . . 610 

„ lakes > . . . . 675 

Nal 420, 426 

Nalagarb .... 548, 649, 

660, 653 

Nalamal^ range . . ■ , . iv, 60 

„ group .... 61, 64 

NaJdera . . . . . 599, 603 

Nalwar ...... 73 

Namding river ..... 702 

Nfimbar river 692 

Nancowry 73S 

Nanda Devi ..... x 

Nandial Sbales' . . . .70, 72 

Nanowal ...... 550 

Naogaon 234 

Nfoshera, Salt Range . . . 493, 495 

Nfeir ...... 264 

Nara, eastern, of Sind . . 416, 419 

Naraj 243, 244 

Narbada Bijiwar area ... 32 

„ Gondw^na areas on lower . 220 
Narbada valley . 5, 31, 45, 86, 91,202, 

214^ 216, 220, 267, 293, 383 
„ „ cretaceous beds, rela- 
tions to Tricbinopoly 
beds . . .291 

„ „ cretaceous beds of . 293 

„ „ traps of 4 . 308, 328 

„ „ ' intertrappean beds of . 311 



800 



INDEX. 



Narbada, alluvial plain of — 
„ old aUuvium of 
„ „ fossils of — . , 
„ „ stone implement iu 
„ „ of fluviatile origin 
„ „ fauna compared to Sewalik 

Karcondam .... 

Narganjo 

Uarh mountain .... 

Narha 224, 

„ beds . . . ■ 

Nari group, represented in Punjab 

. . . . 1. 

Narji limestones . . • . VO, 

Nfokanda . . . . . 604, 

Narnaveram river .... 

Narsingpur . . . > 136, 

„ district 

„ railway station, elevation 

Narukot 

Narwar ..... 

Naspur 

Natrolite, Bajmah£l traps . 

Kaushera fault .... 

Nomtihts danicus 

„ neoeomiemit . 

N&ziia coal-field 

Nearctic region . 

Neemucb, see Nimacb. 

Negrais, Cape 

„ rocks .... 
„ „ in Andaman islands 

Neocomian beds of Cutch . 

„ „ „ relations to 

jurasaics 
„ „ Cbicbali pass, Punjab 

Neocomians, supposed, of Poudicheri-y 

Neolitbic stone implements 

Neotropical region 

Nepal area of Sub-Himalayas 
„ region, lower Himalayas 
„ lower Himalayas of . 
„ valley, lake basin 

Nerbndda, see Narbada. 

Neirta schmedeliana . 

Neu/ropteris vaUda 

Newbold's summary of the Geology of 
Southern India 

Newcastle beds, Australia 

Nezataab pass 



281, 283, 



705. 713, 



PAGB 

383 
884 
38S 
386 
387 
587 
735 
166 
568 
259 
159 
504 
459 

71 
606 
248 
215 

32 
385 

48 

95 
234 
170 
568 
287 
272 
701 
Ixiv 

717 
713 
733 

266 

252 
496 
272 
442 
Ixiv 
543 
593 
611 
674 

459 
114 

Ixxii 
120 
658 



503, 
490, 



Ng£ri-Khorsum . 
Nga-pu-tau 
Nga-tha-mu 
Nibhora 

Nicobar Islands . 
Nilabgash . 
Nilaw&n ravine . 
Nilgiri hiQs,. Southern India, 356, 374, 

427, 
gneiss of . . 18, 24, 

,, iron implements 

Nimach 

Nimbua Tanr 

NinnyAr .... 282, 283, 
„ uppermost Arialdr (cretaceous) 
beds of . . • 

Nithahdr 

„ beds . . • . • 

Niti pass ...'.. 

„ in Hundes, stratigraphical series of 

NoeggeratMa hislopi . Ill, 115, 

Nokrek 

Nougkulang 

Normal flexures in Sub-Himalayas 
Northern India, plain of . . . 
North-West Provinces 
Nowagarh-Karial plateau 

,i . sandstone 
Nbwanagar 
Nowgong (Bundelkhand) 

,, (Assam) 
Nowroji hill, Bombay ' " . 
Nowshera .... 
Nubra river 

NuUaymulIay, see Nalamal^. 
Numnrnlitea garansensis , 

„ sviblcBfigata 

NummuUtes in Surat tertiaries 

„ in Sub£thu group 

„ in Ladak tertiary beds 

„ doubtful, of Singhl pass . 

„ asserted occurrence of, 

near Naini.T&l 
Nummulitics 

Nnmmulitic Sea, coasts of ; 
Nummulitics of Cutch 

„ Jesalmir 

Nummulitic limestone, Sind . 457, 

„ „ lUari and Bhugti 

hills . 



391. 
75, 



11, 13, 



460, 
460, 

525, 



646 
727 
721 
217 
734 
512 
497 

434 
25 

444 
69 

611 

287 

287 

51 

50 

628 

647 

118 

691 

698 

527 

410 

410 

77 

76 

203 

14 

692 

321 

500 

653 

462 
462 
340 
531 
643 
644 

609 
1 
Hi 
346 
347 
460 

505 



INDEX. 



801 



Nummulitic limestone, Sulemaa range . 


PABB 

505 


Orissa .... 




PAQB 

128 


„ Salt Range 


t- 


506 


gneiss area 




22 


„ „ KoMt 


. 


609 


„ old shore lines . 




377 


„ „ Northern Pot w^r 




„ raised shell beds in . 




377 


, and Murree hills. 


509 


„ sand hills 




435 


» u hills of Northern 




„ stone implements 




441 


Punjab 




511 


Ormfoa .... 




470 


Nnmmulitics (Subathu group) eastern- 




Orthoclase in gneiss 


. 10, 


19 


most outlier in Hima- 




Ossiferous beds of Perim island 




342 


layas 


. 


534 


Ostrea nmlUcostata . . 464 


466, 


469 


„ former extension of, 


alqng 




Otozamites gracilis 




157 


base of Himalayas 


535 


Oudh 


391, 


435 


„ in Jama 




561 


Ouli Eiver 




213 


„ Q&ro area 




695 


Outliers of Upper Vindhyans 




92 


„ Kh£si hills . 




693 


Owk, see Auk. 






„ Eastern extension 


of, in 




Oxford beds of Cutch . 


255, 


258 


Assam range 




696 


Oxus river 




657 


u Burma . 




715 


P 






Nun river, Sub-Himalayas . 




542 


Pabar valley \ 


597, 


598 


Nundialumpet 




64 


Pabbi ridge 




568 


Nundrukki 




509 


Pachamal^ hills . 




iv. 


Nfirpur .... 


549 


, 577 


Pachham . . 251,254,256 


,343, 


345 


o 






group 




254 


Oboltis, Salt Bangs . . 




488 


„ „ fossils 


253, 


254 


Odium .... 




273 


Fachmari .... 




127 


Ohun river .... 




91 


group . 


136, 


219 


Olapandy .... 




272 


„ hills . . vi,135 


,216, 


218 


Oligoclase in gneiss 


. 10, 


19 


Pachumba copper implements 




443 


Olive group, Punjab Salt Eange 




496 


Pachwfoa coal-field 




167 


Olivine, Bijmahal traps 




170 


„ pass 


167, 


169 


„ Decean traps . 


. 802, 


305 


FacTiypTiylVum divaricatum 




159 


Oman, Gnlf of, depression in 




Ixxii 


FacTw/gonia incurvata 




132 


Omar river .... 




215 


Padam .... 




639 


Ong river .... 




213 


Padwani 






327 


Ongole .... 


140, 


148 


Pagan 






725 


„ Gondwana beds near 




246 


Pagoda hill, Cheduba 






730 


Oodeypoor, see TJdepur. 






Pahari 






11 


Oolitic rocks of Cutch . 




251 


Pain river, Jamu 






562 


ofNiti . 




647 


Paisuni river 






91 


Oomia, see TJmia 




99 


Pakha 






75 


Ootatoor, see Utatur. 






„ tank, 




234, 


240 


OpalpM plateau . 


. 


63 


Pakli valley, Haz^ra 






498 


Orhitoides dispansa . 


340, 


459 


Falaearctic mammalian families ii 


lOri- 




0. papyracea 


461, 


462 


ental region 




Ixvii 


Orchha . . 


13, IS, 16 


„ region . 


^ . 


Ixiv 


Oriental region . 


. 


Ixiv 


Palseo-botanical evidence . 




101 


„ subregions . 


. 


Ixv 


PalsBolithic implements 369, 370, 


386, 




„ mammals, families of 


. 


Ixvi 




390, 


441 


„ „ Ethiopian affinit 


ies of 


Ixvi 


PalcBonisctis . . . . 




120 


Origin of Gondwana basins 


• 


103 


Palaeontology, Gondw£ 


aas . 




100 



802 



INDEX. 









Tt.BJI 








PAOa 


Palseontology, 


TAlcMrs 


111 


Pd,nchbhadra, salt at . . 


. 


. 


395 


i> 


Karharb&i group . 


114 


Panchet hill 




183, 


184 


» 


Camuda series 


116 


„ group . 


. 


107, 


131 


» 


Panchet group 


132 


„ „ Kdniganj field 


•' 


183 


» 


Rajmahal group . 


142 


„ Bokaro field . 


, 


189 


» 


Kota-]rfaleri group 


152 


„ „ Kfoaupura 


field 


, 


195 


M 


Jabalpur group 


157 


„ ,, thickness 




, 


132 


>9 


Umia group . 


159 


„ fossils 




, 


132 


« 


Utatfir group 


272 


Panchets, upper . 


. 131 


,184, 


200 


f» 


Narbada alluvium 


385 


Panduah hill 




, , 


30 


W 


Sind cretaceous beds 


449 


Paneum group . 




70, 


71 


» 


Eanikot group 


452 


Pangadi 




316, 


317 


» 


Khirthar group . 


458 


P^ngi 


. 628 


,632, 


658 


3> 


Nari group . 


461 


Ptogi basin, boulders in slates of. 


Kxxvi, 




„ 


G&i group 


. 465 


.... 




632, 


664 


J> 


Manchhar group . 


. 471 


PangkongLake . 




625, 


672 


»i 


Punjab Siwaliks . 


. 514 


PaniSr . . . 




. 


58 


PalcBomttaria .... 


118 


„ stream , 




. 


57 


Palceogamia i 


ifricana . 


. 147 


Panjab, see Punjab. 








„ rubidgei . 


147 


Pankabari 




614, 


615 


Palaeozoic inliers in Sub-Himalayas 


. 562 


Panna 




83, 


92 


>3 > 


relations of tertiary 




„ shales 






84 




to palseozoic rocks in 


. 563 


Pantanau . 






728 


Palseozoic rocks, Salt Range . xxiv 


, 485 


Panw^ri hill 




82, 


91 


)» >i 


Northern Punjab 


. 498 


Panwat 






232 


» >i 


converted into gneis 




Par sandstone 




56, 


57 




in Himalayas . 


. 626 


„ scarp . 




57, 


94 


't » 


Zansk£r series . 


. 638 


P&ra river . . 




629, 


640 


» w 


altered, of Eupshu 


. 640 


„ limestone . 






637 


S> »S 


Kashmir , 


. 661 


Parari 






203 


Palamaun (Palamow) . 196, 197 


328 


Farasn£th, Himalayan plants on 




374 


„ nnsurveyed coal fields in 


. 198 


Parasuchus . . xxxiv, 100 


.137. 


153 


Palar river 


. 247 


433 


Parh hills . 






456 


„ river near Simla 


608 


Parwain range 




549, 


559 


Palghat gap 


■ 


. 18 


378 


Pasai stream 






181 


Pfili . 


. 




11 


Paskim 






644 


Palisst/a . 


• 




129 


Pasni .... 






470 


P. conferta , 


• 




155 


PatalhiU . 






192 


P-jahal^iirmsis . 


. 154 


157 


Patan 






377 


Paljor river 






213 


P^tau Sdongi 






226 


Palkoa 


• 




81 


Patauri 






14 


PalnM 


• 


60, 65, 70 


72 


Patarnala ridge . 






604 


„ limestone 




72 


Pathankot . 






5619 


Palni hills 


. 


V 


38 


Patharghfita 




167. 


168 


PalmMna deecanensis 




310 


Patkai range 


xi, 683 


.696, 


699 


Palumpet slates . 
Paluncha 
Pamir section 


. 61 
. 233 


64 
240 
657 


Patua (Sambalpur) 
Fatrap&da . . 
Patro Nadi, Mchir field 






355 
212 
174 


Pandr river 
Pauchbhadra 


. 


268, 269, 28S 


433 

54 


Paupugni group , 
Payen ghat 




61, 


62 
60 



INDEX. 



803 





rAQB 






rAGB 


Peat 


434 


PhcBnicopsis 


. 


157 


Ganges delta . . 397, 398, 


400 


Phirsa stream 


, 


673 


„ Nepal 


674 


Phizdura .... 


. 


310 


Pebbles from Calcutta boring 


400 


Phlogopite in gneiss 


. 


19 


Fecopteris eondnna .... 


133 


PTioladamya angulata 


. 


262 


P. lohata 


147 


„ granosa . 


, 262, 


264 


P. odontopteroides , 


120 


Phonda ghat 


. . 


66 


JPecten (Vola) qiiinquecostatiis, 266, 289 


, 297 


Phulchok .... 


. 612, 


675 




21 


Phyllotheoa 


. 


119 


„ in Malani beds 


53 


Physa Prmsepii . 


310, 318, 


330 


Pegu . . 704, 713, 716, 719, 723 


726 


Physical Geography of India 


. 


ii 


„ group .... 


719 


„ of Gondwana period 


xxxii 


„ trachyte in South-Western'. 


725 


Physical Geology of Southern 


India in 




Pegu Toma . xi, 705, 707, 719, 720 


726 


cretaceous times 


. 


291 


Pem beds 


. 76 


Pichor .... 


• . 


94 


Pench river .... 127, 215 


218 


Pid 


• 


507 


Penganga river, 75, 76, 110, 223, 229 


> 


Pihira .... 


. 


176 


230 


, 389 


Pikermi in Attica, pliocene fauna of . 


583 




Pilka hills . . . 


• • 


206 


„ „ „ rocks 


Pinauni .... 


. 


611 


contrasted . xxvii, 480 


, 518 


Find DMun Khfo . 


. 486. 


494 


Peninsular formations, list of 


xii 


Piudura . 


. 


164 


„ „ marine eqniva 




Pinjor dun . . . 536, 539, 548, 


550 


lents of 


xiv 


Pinnacled quartzites . 


. 70, 


71 


„ formations in extra.Penin 




Pir Pahar .... 


. , 


167 


^ sular area . 


XV 


Pir Panjal . ix, 479, 602, 


628, 658, 


662 


Peninsula, rivers of . . . 


iii 


„ gneissic chain 


. 


631 


„ mountain ranges of 


iii 


„ trap of 


. 663, 


665 


„ ranges, origin of . 


XX 


„ geology of . 


. 


665 


PennSir river . . . .60 


, 62 


„ pass, section of . 


. 


665 


Pennfo, see Panfo. 




Pir Pynti .... 


. 


170 


Perambalur .... 


. 249 


Pisolitic nodules in alluvium 384, 396, 


423 


Perched blocks in Western Himalayas 


. 373 


Plain of Upper Bengal and Northern 




Perim Island .... 


342 


India .... 


, 


410 


;, „ ossiferous beds of 


ih. 


Planes of marine denudation, 


245, 376, 




„ „ mammalian fossils 


. 343 




377. 


378 


Perim Island and Siwalik faunas com 




Platanista, distribution of . 


, , 


392 


pared .... 


588 


Plateau quartzites 


. 70, 


71 


Permia^ age, glacial conditions of 


102 


Plesiosaurus indicas . 


. . 


262 


„ of lower Gondwdnas 


. 103 


Pliocene land communication 


between 




Permian fossils, Milam pass . 


650 


Himalayas and Perim island . . 


393 


Persia, mountain ranges of - 


lix 


Pliocene rocks, Sind . 


. 


44.7 


„ hippuritic limestone of 


449 


„ facies of Siwalik fauna . 


580 


Peshawar 


483 


„ fauna of Pikermi in 


Attica . 


583 


plain of . . . 478, 


515 


„ fossil wood group, Burma 


721 


Petroleum, Upper Burma . 


724 


Po 


. . 


639 


„ in Pegu .... 


717 


Podozamites lanceolatus 


, . 


157 


„ discharged from mud vol- 




Poikilitio .... 


. 


133 


canoes .... 


730 


Pokran .... 


54, 93, 


437 


Pence sclmidiana .... 


336 


„ boulder beds near 


, 


xxxvi 



804 



INDEX. 



423, 
267 

281; 

304, 



341, 



PoUconda range . 
PolycisUna from Nleobar islands 
Pondicherry . . . 267, 387, 
„ cretaceous rocks of 

272, 

Poona 

Foonahlite .... 
Pooree, see Pari. 
Forbandar . . . ■ 

„ stone 
Porcellanic beds in Gwaliors 
„ „ Kadapahs 
„ „ in Lower Vindhyans, 79, 
Porpoises of Indus and Ganges 

Porsa 

Port Blair .... 
Portland beds of Cutch 
Porto-novo, shell beds near . 
Post-pliocene deposits, Punjab 

„ and Siwalik fauna c 

pared . 
Post-tertiary and recent formations 

„ beds, distinction from 
tertiary 

„ „ „ relations to ter, 

tiaries of 
Himalaya, 
Punjab, and 
Sind . 
„ „ „ classification of 

„ „ Sind . 

1, » „ Himalayas 

Post-tertiary changes of level . 
Pot-holes in river-beds 
Potw£r . . 477, 509, 511, 515, 516, 
Powagarh hill . . . .47, 
Pranhita river . . .157, 223, 
Prehistoric human implements 
Preparis Island 

Prome 720, 

Prome beds 

Protection of coast by alluvial deposits 

Fseudomorphic salt-crystal zone. Salt 

Bange 

Fterophi/limn . . . 145, 158 
ItUopliyllum, 136, 138, 139, 144, 147, 
151, 155, 219, 
P. amtifoUum, . . 144, 151, 246, 
P. cutchense .... 151, 
Pulavaindla 



fAQB 

64 
735 
433 

282 
327 
305 

377 

342 

58 

63 

80 

392 

232 

732 

259 

424 

515 

587 
371 

371 



372 

380 
473 
667 
375 
439 
518 
304 
233 
440 
732 
724 
719 
422 

494 
246 

247 

249 

260 

62 



. 561, 562, 



Pulney, see Paine. 

Funasa 

Fdnch river 

Funlar, see Pan&r. 

Punjab 372, 

„ erratics .... 373, 
„ rivers, ancient changes in 
„ alluvial plain of the 
„ hill ranges of . . viii, 478, 
„ Salt Range, rocks of . . 481, 
„ Northern, rock groups of xxv, 
.„ tertiary rocks of . . . 

„ upper tertiaries of . . . 
„ post-pliocene deposits 
„ upper tertiaries, abnormal bound- 
ary of . 

Funon ...... 

Punii 

Puppa, extinct volcano of . • 

PurSn river 

Purgial mountain . 625, 629, 639, 

Puri 

Pdrna river .... 224, 

„ alluvial plain of . . , 383, 
„ alluvium, salt in ... 

Purian point 

Purple sandstone group. Salt Range . 

Putchum, see Pachham. 

Fyanlir 

Pyrite in gneiss .... 

Pytnn ...... 

Pyzu range 

Q 

Quartz in Deccan traps 

„ in gneiss . . . .10, 
Quartz-reefs in Bundelkhand gneiss 10, 

„ direction of . . . 

„ in Bengal gneiss 

„ South Mahratta 

Quartz veins traversing quartz-reefs 

and gneiss _ 

Quartzite implements 

Quern- stones of taloose quartz schist . 

„ of Bijiwar quartzite 
Quilon 

B 

Bachna Doab sandhills . . . 439 

Ragavapuram shales . . . 140, 147 

n „ Goddvari district . 246 



221 

564 

391 

515 
415 
415 
479 
485 
483 
504 
512 
515 

583 
11 
191 
725 
418 
646 
377 
388 
388 
388 
717 
483 

248 

19 

389 

514 

305 
19 
13 
IS 
20 
23 

15 

441 

16 

30 

337 



INDEX. 



805 



Rngavapuram shales near Ongole 

Raidlo beds 49, 

Raichur ...... 

Eaichur Dofib 

Eaidak (Eydak) river . 27, 522, 

Raigarh and Hingir coal-fields . 
Rainfall, Indian desert 

Rairakol • 

Rajah's choultry .... 

Rajdmahendri, 238, 242, 244, 245, 315, 

336, 
„ Gondwana outcrops near 

traps of . . xliv, 800, 
„ intertrappean beds of. 

„ marine beds associated 

with trap near, 315, 
„ Cuddalore beds near . 

Raja,uri 561, 

Rajdpur, serpentine at . . . 

Rdjgir hills . . . 36,37, 

Rajmahal . . . 139, 165, 167, 

,, height above sea . 
Rajmahlil flora, relations to Jabalpur 
and Cutch floras, 147, 157, 
„ flora : relations to Uitenhage 
fossils compared with Euro- 
pean .... 
Rajmahdl group . . 107, 108, 
„ „ traps of . . XXX, 
„ „ in Southern India 
„ „ in Khasi hills . xxxi, 

„ „ relations to Lower Oond- 

wauas 
„ „ table of allied groups . 

„ „ thickness 

„ „ volcanic area . xxx, 

„ „ palaeontology 

„ „ section of . . . 

„ „ Bast coast region 

„ „ association of marine 

fossils 
„ „ Athgar basin 

„ „ near EUore . 

„ near Ongole . 
„ „ near Sripermatur . 

„ „ near Trichinopoly 

B^jmahal Gondw&a region 
„ „ section 

Kajmahdl hills . . iv, xxx, 17, 

„ „ 'description of 



PAGE 






PA9H 


247 


Rajmahdl hills, volcanic cores near. 


170, 


171 


51 


„ „ laterite of, 356, 


359, 


364 


23 


„ „ black soil in 




432 


71 


RdjmahSl traps, eruption of 




163 


619 


„ not connected with 


Deo- 




203 


can traps 




xU 


438 


Rdjnagar 




14 


212 


Eajpipla 




222 


293 


„ hills .... 




326 




Efijpur 




209 


389 


Rajput£na< Tindhyansof 




88 


244 


Rajdr 


229, 


231 


308 


R^kasTdl 




650 


317 


Ramapatnam .... 




247 




Ramgarh (Singhblim) . 




44 


328 


„ hill, Sirguja . 




208 


336 


„ hills (Birbhum) . 




165 


566 


„ coal-field 




190 


14 


Ramnad : raised sandstones near . 




377 


38 


R^mpur : Bis&hir 




598 


406 


„ . (Chattisgarh) 


207. 


210 


392 


R&mpnra (Bundelkhand) 




11 




Eamri Island . . . 717, 


718, 


729 


159 


„ mud volcanoes 




729 


146 


Ran of Cutch, 251, 343, 395, 420 


436, 


438 




„ description of the . 




420 


144 


„ formerly a gulf of the Sea 




139 




395, 


420 


139 


Sanapusilla .... 




321 


140 


Rangoon .... 705 


720, 


724 


140 


Rangchu river .... 




613 




Ranges, extra peninsular . 


. vii. 


Ivii 


141 


Rangichang .... 




615 


141 


Rangit river .... 




613 


141 


„ Little .... 




615 


142 


Baniganj . . . 124, 126 


178, 


336 


142 


„ coal-field 




178 


169 


„ coal : analysis of . 




702 


242 


RSniganj group . . 115, 126 


169, 


180 




„ „ RAniganj field . 




182 


242 


„ „ Jharia field 




187 


243 


„ „ Bokaro field 




189 


245 


Rfimgarh field . 




191 


247 


„ „ South KSranpura field 


192 


247 


„ „ Karanpura field 




195 


249 


„ „ South Rewah . 




203 


165 


Ranikot 




450 


166 


„ group .... 


1, 


451 


139 


Ranj river, Bundelkhand 




83 


165 


Ranjoti ridge .... 


662, 


564 



806 



lis UJSX. 



358; 



561, 567, 
632, 65^, 
484, 511, 
m, 509, 514, 



E^pti river, Siwaliks on 

„ valley . 
Bas f artak . . 
„ Malan . 
„ Sharweu . 
Eatanpur . 
Eatilagiri . . 
„ ' laterite 
„ plant beds 
Eavercherla 
Eavi river . viii, 558, 560, 

„ valley, upper 
Eawalpiudi . 

plateau 

Eecent formations, Himalayas 
Eecent genera in Siwaliks 
Eecent and Siwalik faunas compared 

586, 
Eecent and post-tertiary formations . 
Bed colour of Vindhyans and transi 

tion rocks .... 
Eed bills of Pondicherry 
„ „ Madras 

„ soil 

Eegions, Zoological, of Wallace . 
„ ancient zoological and botanl 

cal , 
„ gneissic 
Eeh : nature and origin of 
Eeband valley 
Eehr or Eeband River . 
Eegnr .... 
„ analyses of 

absorbent power of 
„ distribution of . 
„ origin of . 
„ derivation from basalt 
Eelations between Bundelkband gneiss 

and contiguous formations 
Relations of different azoic series 

„ of upper Vindbyans to lower 
Reptilian remains in Crondwana rocks 
132, 137, 153, 
„ „ Panchet group, local- 
ity of . 
„ „ Narbada alluvium . 
„ „ Sind cretaceous beds 
„ „ Siwalik . . 575, 
Resin, fossil, in cretaceous coal . 690, 
Eeversed faults 



35, 80, 



PAGE 

544 
611 
297 
470 
297 
341 
23 
368 
338 
246 
568 
665 
568 
515 
667 
579 

589 
371 

xxii 
337 

358 
429 
Ixiv 

101 
3 

413 
203 
202 
429 
430 
431 
431 
432 
432 

16 

6,7,8 

90 

154 

183 
385 
450 
580 
712 
526 



Bewa Kanta 

Bewah gneiss 

,, group 

„ „ diamonds in . . . 
Bewah, South . . . 104, 199, 
„ „ and Sobagpur coal-field . 

Rewab, laterite of . . . 355, 
Rbsetic affinities of Eajmabal group . 
„ beds, extra peninsular 
„ „ of Hazara . . . . 
„ fossils, Zanskar area 
MMnoceros deccanensis . 

It. sivalensis 

SMnosaarus jasikomi .... 
Shododendron arboreum 

Mynchocephala 

Eiassi .... 549, 562, 567, 

„ conglomerates , . . . 

Eilly-la-Montaigne, Eocene fossils of . 

Ring money 

„ stones b . . . . . 

Rikikes ...... 

Else of land in post-tertiary times 
„ „ probably greater in western 
than in eastern India, 377, 
Eiver, lost, of tbe Indian desert 
„ gravels and clays, older 
Elvers of Peninsula 
„ Burma . 
„ Punjab . 

„ Northern India, action 
on surface . 
River-systems of Himalayas 
Eivers of Himalayas flowing 

beyond snowy range 
Eivers of Punjab, ancient changes 
Bock -salt of Punjab . 

„ of Mandi 
Kobilkand . ... 

Eobri . . . 436, 442, 446, 
Eongreng, coal basin of, Garo bills, 

„ Kaga hills . 
Botang pass 

Botfc gorge near Jbelum , 
Eotas group 
Botasgarh .... 

Rottab Boh 

Euby mines, Ava . , 

Buksbu, see Eupshu. 
Eunn of Cutcb, see Ran. 



of, 

from 

in . 
486, 



457, 
i,691, 

631, 
515, 

78, 

478, 



fAQB 

313 
19 

84 
92 
200 
201 
363 
144 
xlvi 
501 
636 
390 
466 
131 
374 
153 
676 
568 
330 
443 
442 
535 
376 

384 
416 
382 
382 

X 

viii 

410 
676 

677 
415 
508 
558 
543 
474 
695 
702 
664 
669 
80 
80 
487 
708 



INDEX. 



807 



Bup£r .... 


. 550, 


551 


Kupi .... 


. 631, 


632 


Kupin pass . 


, . 


597 


Bupin valley 


. 


604 


Rupshu 


625, 635, 


672 


„ metamorpbics . 


i • * 


640 


Kntile in gneiss . 


■ • 


19 


Kutland island . 


• ■ • 


733 


Eydak, see Baidak. 






s 






Subatba beds 


. 534, 


530 


„ „ nummulites i 


n 


525 


„ „ fossils of 


• ■ . 


531 


„ „ easternmost o 


ntliers of . 


534 


„ Jamu . 


• « ■ 


562 


„ „ laterite in 




563 


Subatbu, section at 


. 


533 


coal 


. 


600 


Sadiya, beigbt above sea 


. 


392 


Saffrai river 


. 


701 


Sagenopteris 


. 


118 


Sabajori coal field 


. 


172 


Sabaranpur, beigbt above sea 


392 


Sabyadri range 


. iv 


V 


„ „ scarps of 


. Ixxi 


301 


„ „ hypotbetics 


il marine 




origin of 


scarps, Ixxi 


, 377 


„ traps of, 3C 


)i, 306, 319 




32 


0, 327, 354 


358 


„ „ fresb-water 


moUuaca of 


378 


Saimnlda 


. 


46 


Sainthoray . 


• 


. 282 


Sakar river . 


J • 


. 215 


Sakbar, see Snkkur. 






Sakmur . ~ . 


. 


. 232 


Sakri river . 


. 


, 176 


Salem district 


. 


26 


„ iron implements 


. 


. 444 


Salenia, tertiary - 


. 


. 453 


Salgraun 


. 


. 632 


Salkura 


■ 


. 692 


Sallawai 


. 234 


, 235 


Salsette 


. 304,819 


, 424 


Salt, Purna alluvium . 


. 


. 388 


„ Wardba alluvium 


- 


. 389 


„ Ganges alluvium . 


. 393 


, 415 


„ Indus alluvium . 


. 


. 395 


lakes near TJmarkot 


. 


. 394 


„ PLncbbhadra 




. 395 



Salt, efflorescence on plains of Nortb- 

ern India . . . 

„ in Himalayan river-water 

„ Punjab .... 486, 

„ Kobat 

„ Mandi 

Salt range . . . viii, 53, 477, 

„ „ rock groups of . 

„ „ contrast between eastern 

and western portions, 481, 

„ „ azoic and palseozcic rocks 

of . . . . xxiv, 

„ „ salt marl of . . xxiv, 

„ ,, „ „ dislocations 

,. „ „ „ origin of . xxv, 

„ „ purple sandstone of 

„ „ Silurian beds of . 

„ „ magnesian sandstone of . 

speckled sandstone of 
„ „ carboniferous rocks of xxiv, 
„ „ triassic rocks of 
„ „ pseudomorpbic salt-crystal 
zone .... 
« » Jurassic or variegated group 

of . 

„ „ coal of 

„ „ olive group of 

„ „ nummulitics , . li, 

„ „ flexures . 

Salwin river . xi, 705, 709, 727, 

Sambalpur , 76, 128, 199, 200, 209, 

„ diamonds at . . . 

„ gneiss .... 

Samundri 

Sand, blown 

„ of Indian deserts, derivation of . 
Sand-hills of Indian deserts 

„ formation of . . , 
Sand denudation and striae on rocks . 
Sand-storms on Indian rivers 

Sandarbaua 

Sandoway ij\\ 

Sandrapali 235 

Sandstone in ludo-gangetic alluvium . 

flexible .... 

Sangar Marg ridge . . 562, 567, 

Sangla 

Sangpo or Sanpoo river , , viii, 

Sangra 

Sanju pass ..... 655, 



413 

414 
508 
508 
558 
480 
481 



485 
488 
487 
488 
488 
483 
489 
489 
489 
493 

494 

495 
507 
496 
506 
568 
728 
213 
77 
22 
597 
43S 
438 
436 
437 
439 
404 
i40S 
712 
237 
397 

5a 

568 
597 
677 
639 
656 



808 



INDEX. 



Sankos river 

Sausaa, miocene fauna of 

S&nktoria , 

Santhdl Farghnahs 

Saoner 

Sarasvati river 

Sarikol . . 

Saruth Deogarh . 

Saser pass . 



Sasti 



S^tbpahiri hill 



lUra range 



657, 

653, 
69, 78, 



IV, 



140, 



84, 



trap 



118, 



hiUSi 32, ld4, 127, 135, 161, 
163, 200, 220, 
„ region of Gondwanas 
„ basin of coal measures 
Sattavedu .... 
„ group . 

„ „ near Sripermatur 

Saugor . . . , 
S&wantwari . . , 

Scenery and vegetation of Deccan 

area .... 
Schists, Bundelkhand . 

„ lower Himalayas 
Schistose series, Hazara 
SoMzoneura 
S. gondwanensis . . 
S. meriam .... 
Schorl, Singrauli gneiss 
„ Bundelkhand gneiss 
„ Darjiling gneiss 
„ Hundes gneiss 
Soolecite in Deccan traps . 
Scoriae, Deccan traps . 
Scyphia .... 
Sea-face of Indus delta. 
„ of Ganges delta 
Secondary series, Zanskar . 
Section, azoic rocks 

„ Gondwana, Bajmahal hills 
„ „ Kaniganj coal-field 

„ „ Jharia coal-field . 

„ Kamgarh coal-: 
„ „ K^ranpura field 

„ „ Bisr^mpur field 

» „ S&tpura basin 

Wardha field 



305. 
304, 



field 



PAGB 

613 

586 
182 
172 
226 
416 
658 
172 
654 
84 
230 
198 
195 



224 
213 
214 
248 
150 
248 
363 
23 

801 

12 

596 

499 

119 

133 

114 

19 

16 

614 

650 

306 

812 

254 

419 

407 

641 

6 

166 

179 

186 

190 

193 

204 

217 

229 



448, 

692, 
7,81, 



Section, Sub-Himalayas, Simla and 

Eangra areas contrasted . 

Sedimentary beds intercalated with 

Deccan traps . 
Sibsagar, height above sea 
Sehwan , . . 417, 418, 
„ height above sea 

Seju, 691; 

Semri beds .... 
Series, Vindhyan 
Serpentine, Bundelkhand gneiss 
„ Singrauli gneiss 

„ Arakan range, Burma 

„ Andaman Islands 

„ Kicobar Islands . 

Seychelle Islands, birds of . 
Sh£hab£d, Kashmir . , . 
(South Mahratta) 
Shagarh 

Sbahidul^ .... 
Shaikhawati 
Shaikhpura hills . 
Shaly slates of Spiti . 
Sh^li mountain . 
Shdlkar .... 
Shankan ridge 
Shargol .... 
Shayok river 

„ stones transported 

on 

ShekhBudin . 478,479,480, 
491, 495, 
Shekawuttee, see Shaikhawati, 
Shells, land, afiiuities of recent 
Sheopuri ridge . 
Sher river .... 
Sbergotty .... 
Shevroy, see Shivarai. 
Shib-wala hills . 
Shik&rpur, height above sea 
Shillong .... 
„ plateau 
„ „ gneiss of 

„ transition series 
„ coal near 
Shimakeri . 

Shingarh hills . 478, 480, 505, 
Shinglung . 
Shipki 
Shivarai hills 



26, 



,12, 
653, 

36, 



598, 
641, 



by ice 

487, 
506, 



683, 



507 



378, 



550 

307 

392 

460 

392 

695 

88 

69 

14 

19 

714 

733 

735 

Ixviii 

662 

73 

14 

656 

49 

38 

636 

602 

639 

604 

645 

625 

516 

514 

Ixix 
612 
215 
198 

541 
892 

42 

684 

4 

40 
689 

67 
514 
654 
622 
443 



INDEX. 



809 



Sicliel hills .... 
Sidh Nadi Qondwina basin 

Sih 

Sikana, steatite near . 

Sikkim, Gond miusk (Damuda) beds of xv, 

97: 

„ moraines in . . . 373, 
„ iron ores .... 
„ area. Lower Himalayas . 
„ relations of rocks in 
„ lakes of . 
Sikkim-Bhutan area of Sub-Himalayas 
Silew&ra (Silewada) 
Silicified wood, Burma 
Silt in Brahmaputra . 
Silurian fossils, supposed, from Khyber 
pass 
„ „ Zanskar area 

„ „ Milam pass 

Silurian rocks of Kashmir, Spiti, &c, 
„ „ of salt-range . 

„ „ and fossils, Niti, Hundes 

„ „ metamorphosed Ladak 

„ „ Karakoram area 

„ „ Kashmir 

Silver implements 

„ mines, Burma . 

Simaldhap 

Simla . . 529, 592, 594, 598, 

599, 603, 

„ region, of Sub-Himalayas . 529, 

„ „ Lower Himalayas 

,. series 

„ slates 

„ „ relations to gneiss 

Simliu • • I . • 

Simra .... 

Sind . . . 372,391,417,436, 

„ mountain ranges of 

„ flints, flakes and cores in 

„ copper implement in 

„ tertiary rocks of . . 1,339, 

„ physical geography of western 

„ rock formations of J. 

,, cretaceous beds of 

,, Deccantrapof .xliv,300,308, 331 

„ Banikot group of . 

„ Khirthar group or nummulitic 

limestones 
„ Nari group 



PAGE 

312 

172 

556 

15 

615 
668 
543 
612 
615 
675 
545 
226 
721 
405 

500 
638 
650 

XXV 

488 
648 
653 
654 
662 
443 
708 
168 

605 
592 
594 
596 
599 
603 
558 
170 
445 
vii 
442 
443 
447 
446 
447 
448 
450 
451 

456 
459 



690,691 

. 19 
199, 201; 



498, 500. 501; 



Sind Gij group . 
„ Manchhar group 
„ post tertiary beds 
„ tertiary series, additional notes on 
„ absence of breaks below pliocene 
„ great post pliocene disturbance 
„ alternation of freshwater and 
marine beds 

Sind Sagar Do£b, sand hills 

Sind valley, Kashmir . 

Sindh river, Bundelkhand . . 57, 

Sindri fort . 

Sindwdna . 

Singareni coal-field 

Singhbhum gneissic area 
„ transition rocl^s 

Singhi pass 

Singhpho country 

Siugmdri 

Singrauli gneiss, minerals in 
„ pegmatite veins 
„ Gondwanas . 

Sinhgach . 

Sipri 

Sirbau, mount 

Sirbu shales 

Sirgnja,104, 109, 163, 199, 200, 202, 
204, 205, 207, 300, 308, 328, 

Siri pass 

Sirkanda 

Sirmur area, Simla region, . . 530, 
„ series . . . li, 524, 529, 
„ „ thickness of 
„ „ relations to older rocks 
„ „ easternmost outlier . 
„ „ relation to Siwaliks i . 539, 
„ „ western expansion 
„ „ west of Sutlej . . 548, 
„ „ doubtful beds of, in Kangr 
„ „ at Ravi river 
„ „ doubtful beds of, iu Jamu 

Sironcha 223, 

„ sandstones . . . 155, 

Sirpur 234, 

Sirsi . 

Sirun river 

Sitang, see Sittoung. 

Sitarfimpur 

Sitariva river ..." 215, 

Sitsyahn shales . 



463 
466 
473 
473 
474 
474 

475 
439 
660 

94 
421 

11 
241 

21 

43 
644 
701 
692 

19 

21 
203 
304 

88 
503 

84 

363 
513 
609 
534 
530 
532 
532 
534 
552 
561 
552 
• 556 
560 
564 
236 
237 
236 
231 
515 

182 
217 
719 



810 



INDKX. 









FAQB 




EAoa 


Sittoung river . . xi, 705, 726, 


727 


Siwalik' mollusca . . . • 


576 


jy 


valley .... 724, 


728 


„ reptilia .... 575, 


580 


ft 


delta 


. 


727 


Siwalik-Nahan boundary 


537 


Siwalik hills 


. X, 536, 


541 


Siwalik-Sirmur boundary, Jamu 




fi 


series . . . . li, 


524 


area ...... 


567 




„ 


Siud .... 


466 


Sdkakheri bore hole .... 


384 


39 


» 


Western Punjab 


512 


Skiu 


641 




>i 


disturbance of 


iii 


Slate series of Lower Himalayas . 


598 


73 




river deposits 


525 


„ Kashmir .... 


663 


t> 


» 


N&han area . 


535 


Slates of P^ngi 


664 


» 


» 


lower, middle and upper . 


536 


Slate series, Mti .... 


649 


» 


» 


relations to Nahans, cru- 




Slates of Pamir 


658 






cial section . 


537 


Slope of depositing rivers . 


407 


f> 


» 


relations to Sirmtirs 


539 


Speckled sandstone group, Salt Bange . 


489 


99 


5» 


composition in relation 




Spinel, Mandalay .... 


708 






to the great rivers 541, 


552 


Sphenopteris argitia . . . 144, 


160 


jj 


)) 


correlation of ds-Jumna 




S. Mslopi 


146 






and trans-Jumna beds 


541 


S. memhranosa 


146 


,, 


51 


section in Nun near MuB- 




Spiti valley .... 635, 


639 






sooree 


542 


„ oldest rocks of . 


XXV 


99 


]) 


section near Kathmandu 


543 


Spiti shales . . . xlviii. 


686 


»9 


)> 


general structure near 




„ of Hazara 


502 






Kangra 


548 


„ of Niti, Hundes , . 


647 


)) 


» 


Simla and K&ngra area 




Scan river .... 477, 515, 


516 






contrasted . 


550 


Soda sesquicarbonate in Lon&r Lake . 


380 




» 


Simla and Jamu area 




Sohagpur (S. Eevyah) . 199, 201, 203, 


313 






compared 


564 


coal-field . . . 104, 


201 


Siwalik age, 


stratigraphical evidence of 


581 


(Hoshangabad) . 


33 




beds 


mioeene forms in 


582 


„ railway station, elevation . 


385 


99 


» 


representatives of in Tibet 


651 


Sohana 


608 


99 


S) 


„ „ Kashmir 


673 


Soils 


427 


>» 


» 


„ Upper 




„ of Ganges valley 


428 






Assam .... 


702 


Sojafc 


93 


Siwalil 


c fauna .... liv, 


572 


Sok&i 


12 


99 


» 


probably pliocene . 


580 


Solan 534,596, 


599 


» 


» 


migration of . 


584 


Soory .... 139, 165, 171, 


336 


99 


j» 


effects of change of cli- 




Son river . . . 197, 199, 201, 


203 






mate on . . . 


585 


„ valley . . . 5,91,177, 


203 


S» 


„ 


compared with recent 586, 


589 


„ series 


7 




}> 


compared with post- 




„ area, Bij^wars of . 


34 






pliocene Narbada fauna 


587 


„ lower Viudhyans of . . . 


77 


99 




compared with Perim 




„ Gondwfina region 


199 






Island fauna 


588 


,, valley, trap dykes in . . . 


328 


99 


s> 


compared with Irawadi 




Son-Mahanadi